The History of the Sevarambians: A Utopian Novel

The History of the

Sevarambians A Utopian Novel

Denis Veiras edited and with an Introduction by John Christian Laursen and Cyrus Masroori

The History of the Sevarambians

This page intentionally left blank.

The History of the Sevarambians A Utopian Novel

Denis Veiras

Edited and with an Introduction by John Christian Laursen and Cyrus Masroori

State University of New York Press

Woodcuts courtesy of Beineke Rare Books and Manuscripts Library. Yale University. Published by State University of New York Press, Albany © 2006 State University of New York All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America No part of this book may be used or reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission. No part of this book may be stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means including electronic, electrostatic, magnetic tape, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise without the prior permission in writing of the publisher. For information, address State University of New York Press, 194 Washington Avenue, Suite 305, Albany, NY 12210-2384 Production by Kelli Williams Marketing by Anne Valentine Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Vairasse, Denis, ca. 1630-ca.–1696 [Histoire des Sévarambes. English] The history of the Sevarambians : a utopian novel / Denis Veiras; edited and with an introduction by John Christian Laursen and Cyrus Masroori. p. cm. Includes “The history of the Sevarambians” published in French (5 parts) and translated into English in 1738; and “The history of the Sevarites or Sevarambi,” part one published in 1675, and part two published in 1679. Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 0–7914–6777–5 (hardcover : alk. paper) — ISBN 0–7914–6778–3 (pbk. : alk. paper) 1. Voyages, Imaginary—Early works to 1800. 2. Utopias—Early works to 1800. I. Laursen, John Christian. II. Masroori, Cyrus. III. Vairasse, Denis, ca. 1630-ca. 1696. History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi. IV. Title: History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi. V. Title. G560.A4513 2006 843⬘.4—dc22 2005021346 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Contents

Introduction

vii

Notes

xxii

Bibliography

xxii

The Original Texts

xxvi

The Prints

xxvii The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

The Publisher to the Reader (1675)

2

Part I (1675)

9

Part II (1679)

57

The History of the Sevarambians (1738) The Author’s Preface

118

Part I

125

Part II

161

Part III

203

Part IV

259

Part V

315

Index

387

v

This page intentionally left blank.

Introduction JOHN CHRISTIAN LAURSEN AND CYRUS MASROORI

I

t is part Thomas More’s Utopia and part Jonathan Swift’s Gulliver’s Travels. But the English-speaking world has too often forgotten the great utopian novel from the late seventeenth century, Denis Veiras’s The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi, despite the fact that it appeared first in English in 1675 and 1679 and then in an expanded edition as The History of the Sevarambians in 1738. It livened up the sometimes-staid genre of utopian writing with romantic tales, detailed explanation of religious fraud, and, in one version, magical talismans and supernatural animals. Veiras’s work was well known in its own time and for at least the following century. After a complicated gestation in both English and French, explained below, translations came out in German (1689, 1717, 1783), Dutch (1682, 1701), and Italian (1730). Modern editions appeared in German, French, Russian, and Japanese in the twentieth century (see the bibliography). What purports to be a third volume of Jonathan Swift’s Gulliver’s Travels, dated 1727, continues the story, telling us of Gulliver’s adventures in the land of the Sevarambians, but it was not by Swift. Famous philosopher Immanuel Kant grouped Veiras’s work together with Plato’s Atlantis (in the Timaeus and Critias), More’s Utopia (1516), and Harrington’s Oceana (1656) as brilliant ideas that have never been tried in practice (Kant 1991, 188).

AUTHOR There is an element of mystery about the identity of the author of our utopia. His name did not appear on early editions of the work, and we have no collateral evidence such as letters or other testimony from the man himself. Early commentators nominated a variety of possible authors such as Isaac Vossius, Johann Gregor Pfeiffer, Sir Philipp vii

viii

Introduction

Sidney, Simon de la Loubère, and even the philosopher G. W. Leibniz. The consensus of writers eventually attributed authorship to Denis Veiras (also spelled Veyras, Vairasse, Vairrasse, etc.), who styled himself Sieur (or Lord) d’Allais, a village in Languedoc in the south of France. Jean Le Clerc wrote that Veiras was a particular acquaintance of John Locke, who told Le Clerc that he was a native of Provence (Le Clerc 1712, 402). One piece of evidence of authorship is that Veiras also published a French grammar in 1681, and the description on the title page of the author’s residence is the same as the description of the author’s residence on the title page of an early edition of our History (D’Allais 1681, 1683). The hero of our book, Captain Siden, and the name of the founder of the country, Sevarias, are anagrams of the name Denis Vairasse. The 1675 preface to part I is signed “D.V.”. Together with other evidence such as Le Clerc’s report on the testimony of Locke, we can be fairly sure the author was Veiras. However, it is not clear that all of the book came from the same author. Part II of the original English version, published in 1679 after part II of the French version (1677), is very different from the rest of the work. It is full of titillating sexual reports as well as descriptions of the magical powers of talismans, perhaps the seventeenth-century equivalent of the twentieth-century literary genre of “magical realism.” Some scholars have concluded that Veiras did not write it, but no one has advanced any theories as to who the author might have been (Rosenberg 1999, 20). It might have been Veiras, who may have calculated that the voyeurism and magic would work for the English market but not for the French. Word of the success of the first volume in English and demand for a second volume could have inspired him to write a new second volume in that language and for its market, rather than translating his French version. We include it here because of its intrinsic interest, because English readers of the time would have known it as a continuation of part I, and because it is an example of what one author—whether Veiras or not— thought would be a likely continuation. Little is known about Veiras. He was a Huguenot, or French Protestant. He is known to have been involved, perhaps as a spy, in the circles of the Duke of Buckingham in London during the years 1665 to 1674, including the period when Buckingham and his colleagues in the “Cabal” ruled England. A letter from him to government official and diarist Samuel Pepys dated 1680 can be found in the Rawlinson manuscripts at the Bodleian Library (Braungart and Golawski-Braungart 1990, 68*–71*). Judging from the grammar books he was living in Paris in the 1680s, and later, he seems to have returned to his homeland in the south

Introduction

ix

of France. Following up on the fascination with hydraulics and fountains in his fiction, in 1696 he presented a proposal to the Estates (Parliament) of Languedoc for canals and locks to render navigable the Gardon River and irrigate the plains around it (Joucla 2000; Braungart and GolawskiBraungart 1990, 24*–25*). He dedicated the French version of his book to Pierre Paul Riquet, originator of the Canal du Midi, France’s greatest water project of the period.

PUBLICATION Part I appeared first in London in English as The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi (1675). Then parts I to III appeared in French in Paris as L’Histoire des Sévarambes (1677; some volumes of part III have 1678), followed by parts IV and V in French in 1679, the same year that the English part II appeared. The English part I and part II were republished in English in 1700, but the first full version in English, a retranslation from the French version, appeared in London in 1738 as The History of the Sevarambians. The present volume contains a transcription of the first English volumes (1675 and 1679) followed by the 1738 second edition. Part I of the 1675 edition overlaps substantially with part I of the 1738 edition, but part II of the first edition is very different from part II of the second.

CONTENT The preface sets the book in opposition to the works of Plato, Thomas More, and Francis Bacon (Lord Verulam), which are said to be inventions, whereas the present work is true. A narrator—the preface is signed “D. V.”—purports to tell the story of a shipwreck on Terra Australis, the southern continent, based on the papers of the recently deceased Captain Siden. Verisimilitude is established by what purports to be a letter passed on from a Dutch lawyer confirming that a ship named The Golden Dragon was indeed wrecked on the coast of the South Continent. Readers could have found extratextual confirmation: scholars have found mention of the disappearance of a vessel with this name in the Dutch newspapers of the time.1 The first part in both versions is the story of the shipwreck of the vessel after it is blown off course on its way to the Dutch colony of Batavia in what is now Indonesia. Captain Siden’s credentials are established by a short description of his education as a soldier and lawyer and his decision to travel abroad. The ship goes aground near the shore, but no one is killed. When the castaways organize, Siden is chosen to be

x

Introduction

Captain General. The camp is fortified and smaller boats are built from the wreckage. One of the parties sent out to explore discovers a better campsite, and the colony of castaways moves. One of the boats is sent on to Batavia for help. Hunting, fishing, and agriculture are successful. After things settle down, lovers’ quarrels break out, so the colony sets up rules by which each woman is shared by about five men, except for the officers, who have one each. Scottish philosopher David Hume later misquoted this arrangement in one of his essays: “In that agreeable romance, called the History of the Sevarambians, where a great many men and a few women are supposed to be shipwrecked on a desert coast; the captain of the troop, in order to obviate endless quarrels which arose, regulates their marriage after the following manner: He takes a handsome female to himself alone; assigns one to every couple of inferior officers; and to five of the lowest rank he gives one wife in common” (Hume 1987, 182–83). This was not just for the satisfaction of male needs: Veiras’s narrator makes it clear that female sexual desire is one of the reasons for these arrangements (cf. Neville 1668 and Aldridge 1950). One day an exploring party headed by Siden’s lieutenant Maurice is captured by the natives and brought to a nearby city, where they are treated hospitably. They are presented to officials, introduced to local customs, and provided with women, after being checked for venereal disease. After concluding that they are not in danger, they tell their hosts about the remaining castaways and return to pick them up and start the trip to the capital city. The natives disapprove of the men sharing women, but they justify indulgence of the natural sex drive and provide enough women so that each man has one. The castaways witness the three-day wedding celebrations of the natives. Just as in Thomas More’s Utopia the ideal city is named after its conquering founder, Utopus, so the capital city, Sevarinde, is named after its conquering founder, Sevarias. On their way to the capital, the castaways witness the exemplary punishment of some adulterers. The 1675 English version, but not the French, comments on the naked skins and lovely breasts of the guilty women. In a romantic scene, a husband agrees to take the punishment (whipping) for his wife.

The Two Part IIs The second part in the 1679 English version, as mentioned above, adds magic to the story. Unicorns provide transportation for our travelers, and there are other fanciful animals. The Europeans bathe in magic waters to wash away their lustful appetites before entering the inner valley of

Introduction

xi

Sevarambia. The earthly Paradise of the Bible was transported to Sevarambia by angels. In this version, Sevarias is the son of an original couple formed out of metal mixed with gold and silver. The air of the country causes visible marks or growths to appear on the nose and forehead of adulterers and thieves, and they are immediately deported. There is no poverty in Sevarambia, and gold, silver, and precious stones are only for adornment, but they are everywhere (cf. Cavendish 1666 and Hawkins 1660). The present king is the 7,509th-generation descendant of the lawgiver Sevarias. Four hundred specialists are employed to drive away with spells any devils that might enter the country. Lawyers are locked up to protect the people. There is a dig against the Catholics: the Sevarambians have no images in their temples. After death their bodies do not decay, but are laid to rest in sepulchres and one day will be reunited with their souls. The Sevarambians have many talismans, described by the narrator as “an Art altogether lost in Europe.” These are transparent stones that can be used for such purposes as killing flies and venomous creatures or restoring life to dead animals. One of them draws a thousand birds into the room for the visitors. Another is used to draw out a company of men and women to dance naked for them. Another makes a group of naked virgins dance. Yet another sets threescore lions, a hundred bears, and more animals to dancing, and then to fighting for the audience. Perhaps Veiras is imagining the role that television and cinema were later to play in people’s lives. All of this is done by natural causes, not unholy devil’s magic, we are assured. It is worth noting that the art of talismans had not been forgotten in Europe in Veiras’s time. In fact, there was something of a genre of books that explored what was known about talismanic magic (e.g., Sorel 1636, Boodt 1609, 1636; Mayr 1679). After Veiras, Baudelot de Dairval specifically discussed the benefits of voyages in bringing back knowledge about talismans, and Arpe surveyed the previous literature (Baudelot de Dairval 1686; Arpe 1717; see also Savage-Smith 2004). It is quite possible that by Veiras’s time skepticism had set in, and some readers, at least, would have taken these accounts as pure fantasy. One well-known book, available both in French and in English in 1650, concluded with some distancing from belief in the matter: “I shall as yet suspend my own judgment, as well in this, as in all the rest of these Curiosities, which I have here delivered; till such time as I shall have found either Weaker, or stronger Reasons” (Gaffarel 1650, 433). For riding, the guests are given camels that can cover 150 miles in a day’s ride. A cat provides a form of musical entertainment that the Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals would not approve. A

xii

Introduction

pet rat is made to talk. It turns out that the purpose of the trip is for the king to depose an unworthy governor of a city. The governor is whipped, covered with honey, and exposed to die from the attacks of bees, wasps, vultures, and eagles. The themes of animals with special abilities, crystals with scenes of life inside them, and other magical elements may have been borrowed from the contemporary utopian tale of Gabriel de Foigny, The Southern Land, Known (Foigny 1676). Finally, Captain Siden falls in love with a native woman and wheedles permission from the king to marry her. In this version, there is open trade with the Europeans. Siden and his bride board a Dutch ship bound for Batavia, where he lands safely, displays his riches, and gives an account of Sevarambia. The second part in the 1677 French version, translated into English for the 1738 edition, is very different. Unlike the 1679 English version, there is no magic, no talismans, no supernatural beasts, and less titillating sex. Although he was a Protestant in the English version, Captain Siden is now a Catholic, presumably for better marketing and less likelihood of censorship in Catholic France. Part I in this version ends with Maurice’s report of his time with the Sevarambians, and part II starts with the decision of the rest to travel into the interior. As in the English version, the visitors attend a three-day wedding celebration and they witness a punishment for adultery, but this time the description is not so lurid. In this version, the travelers have to cross a mountain range by means of a tunnel. This scares the women, but when some of their own party are sent ahead and return safely, they go on. The mayor of the first town inside the main valley of Sevarambia is a black man. What inspired the author to insert this fact, which is never explained and never followed up? One can only speculate that it was a gesture toward the rising tide of guilty conscience about the European treatment of blacks, reflected in works such as Aphra Behn’s Oroonoko (1688) (see Feldwick and Nederman 1998). The chief diversions that the visitors are offered are fishing, hunting, and animal fights. The travelers continue on, scaling another cliff in carriages pulled by a rope, rather like today’s aerial tramway. The travelers learn a different story of the founding of the country than in the 1679 English version. This time, the founder was a Persian, reminding us of the Persian connection in More’s Utopia (More 1992, 31, 57, 92). Together with a Venetian companion, he had traveled a great deal, learning about the world, and drawn up the laws for Sevarambia. In this version, the Sevarambians refuse to engage in direct trade with the rest of the world in order to prevent corruption, but they do

Introduction

xiii

send spies to the other countries to learn about them (cf. Bacon 1627). As in More’s Utopia, where men and women are both trained in military skills (More 1992, 66), when our travelers inspect the army they discover that a third of the army and most of the cavalry are made up of women. The travelers are received by the viceroy in the capital city amid architectural and artistic splendor. They begin to study the language in order to find employment, in order to keep out of trouble and not set a bad example of idleness for the natives. Captain Siden becomes fluent over the course of a few years and learns a lot about the people. The capital city is in the middle of an island thirty miles in circumference. This is the same as in Christianopolis, Johann Valentin Andreae’s utopia of 1619, but in most other respects Sevarambia is an anti-Christianopolis. It consists of 267 osmasies, or four-story buildings fifty “geometric paces” square and inhabited by one thousand people each. Plumbing provides water for fountains, cisterns, and baths.

Part III Part III consists of an account of the life of Sevarias, the lawgiver. He was a Parsi, from Persia, born and raised in the sun- and fire-worshipping religion of his ancestors known as Zoroastrianism. He was sent abroad to avoid persecution by the Muslims who ruled his country.2 Years of travel included enslavement by pirates and visits to much of Europe and Asia. Hearing from mariners about an undiscovered continent and its inhabitants, he determined to go there. He landed on the Southern Continent with several hundred soldiers in 1427 at the age of 32. Sevarias conquered the continent by alliance with some of the natives and use of artillery and firearms, which were unknown there. The people he had conquered practiced incest and community of wives, which he abolished. But he did allow polygamy, and he and his officers took several native wives in order to make alliances. He built a large temple and several osmasies. Sevarias commissioned a prayer to the sun and set about introducing the religion of the sun, making himself the viceroy of the sun. One of his means to this end was to make music and voices come out of the roof of the temple. As the narrator comments, some of the wiser sort realized that this was a pious fraud, but the vast majority of the people took it for a miracle. Margaret Cavendish’s Blazing World also portrayed a pious fraud built into the structure of a church in order to persuade people to accept the ruler’s religion (Cavendish 1666, 78–79). Sevarias considers setting up a system of social classes and private property, but decides instead to abolish all private property, as in More’s

xiv

Introduction

Utopia or Andreae’s Christianopolis. One of the reasons the novel was translated and reprinted in Russian several times during the twentieth century is that it was an early socialist utopia (Spini 1992, 164–65, 181–82). All of the people are required to work eight hours a day, in contrast to More’s six hours (More 1992, 37), and thus eight hours could be spent on recreation and eight in rest. The fundamental constitution of the country was the heliocratic or sun-centered government, supplemented by respect for old age, temperance, laws of marriage, and other provisions. Sevarias reigned for thirtyeight years. His successor was chosen by lot, as an indication of the sun’s choice. The book goes on to list the succeeding viceroys and their accomplishments in building up the country. The History of the Sevarambians has been read to teach a variety of political doctrines. David Fausett wrote that “the heart . . . of the story is . . . an absolute social ideal—pure democracy” (Fausett 1993, 120). On the other hand, Nannerl Keohane observed that “Veiras is the intellectual ancestor of that variety of absolutism we now call ‘enlightened absolutism’” (Keohane 1980, 323). There is substantial scope for citizen action as voters and candidates for councils, but there is also nearly unlimited authority for those in power. It is perhaps best to characterize the government of Sevarambia as Veiras did, as “monarchical, despotical, and heliocratical . . . which has also a mixture of Aristocracy and Democracy in it” (246). Veiras’s ideas about education have been the subject of recent study (Drouin-Hans 2004). The officers in charge of educating the youth are among the most respected, as in Plato’s Laws. Public schools keep parents from spoiling or being too severe with their children, who are considered children of the state. All learn agriculture for several years. Most of the men become laborers or masons, and the women are taught to spin, weave, and sew. Slaves perform the dirtiest work. Deformed or handicapped people are sent to a provincial city. All women must marry at 18 and all men by 21. Some women may prefer not to marry the more ambitious men, because successful officials are entitled to several wives, depending on their category. Every mother is obliged to suckle her own child, and the highest honor goes to the woman with the most children.

Part IV The next part begins with a description of various practices and customs of the Sevarambians. The color of their clothes indicates their age and official position. There are public hunts. Hours at work are fixed.

Introduction

xv

Then we are treated to a long story about an intrigue of love. There are enough dissimulations and double-crosses here to bring into serious doubt the narrator’s many assertions about the honesty and innocence of the people (cf. Laursen and Masroori 1999). It is most likely that stories like this one are inserted in order to maintain reader interest. On the one hand, they undermine and deconstruct the author’s efforts to construct a naïve and virtuous utopia. On the other hand, they can be read as implicit recognition of the fact that human nature will never be as virtuous as some may wish, but that a utopian social arrangement can survive even though the people spend some of their time on such intrigues. As the text concludes, “every body does not yield an equal obedience to the Laws” (271). A similar moral is drawn from a legal case in which a prejudiced judge condemns the righteous and sets the guilty free. “Where there are Men, Passion will reign among them,” the author comments, but justice is eventually obtained (273). On appeal, the judge is chastised and removed from office. One section of this part is devoted to the military affairs of the Sevarambians, similar in some respects to Campanella’s City of the Sun (1602). Men and women are trained in arms and remain in a militia even after they begin a trade. Court life is described, including the number of wives to which each level of official is entitled. In lieu of divorce, citizens are permitted to exchange wives, if the women agree. The royal garden includes a fountain with the latest plumbing technology. A large basin of water allows for mock sea fights of three hundred vessels. The temple of the sun is splendid. One of its paintings provides the author with another opportunity to tell a love story. Here, the viceroy seeks to marry a young woman who has promised her heart to another. The benefits of marrying such a high official are explained to the woman at length. Ambition overrides constancy, and she agrees to marry the prince. But when the jilted lover stabs himself, she returns to him, and the viceroy lets her go.3 The account of the religion of the Sevarambians is one of the most important in the book. As in Campanella’s City of the Sun, the Sevarambians worship the sun. Where Thomas More’s discussion of religion is limited to the summary report that the Utopians worship the sun, the moon, or other stars (More 1992, 72), the discussion here is much more sophisticated. The History of the Sevarambians has occasionally been cited as an early development in the history of ideas about religious toleration. There certainly are passages that sound like a robust theory of toleration. People “are indulg’d a full Liberty of Conscience” (301), “no Person can

xvi

Introduction

oppress his Neighbour, nor violate any natural Right under a pretence of Religion” (302–03), and “it is permitted to every body to profess what Religion they please” (303). Furthermore, “when any Person is to have justice done him, or to be advanc’d to any Place or Dignity, his religious Notions are no part of the Question” (302). Because of these and similar passages, several authors have argued for mutual influence between Veiras and noted toleration theorist John Locke (von der Mühll 1938). We have already seen that the two authors knew each other. Locke’s A Letter concerning Toleration was not written until 1685 (published 1689), so it could not have influenced Veiras although he could have influenced it. But Locke was also closely involved with a previous text with tolerant implications, The Fundamental Constitutions of Carolina of 1669 (published 1670). One provision held that “No person whatsoever shall disturb, molest, or persecute another for his speculative opinions in religion, or his way of worship” (Locke 1993, 230). It is worth observing that Veiras writes that “each Opponent may freely speak his Sentiments, and offer any thing in support of them, without fear of being blamed or ill-treated by any Person whatsoever” (301; emphasis supplied) and styled a summary of his laws a “Fundamental Constitution” (234). However, there were definite limits to the toleration of Locke’s Fundamental Constitutions, just as there were to the toleration of Veiras’s Sevarambians. Certain beliefs were required: “no man shall be permitted to be a freeman of Carolina, or to have any estate or habitation in it, that doth not acknowledge a God; and that God is publicly and solemnly to be worshipped” (Locke 1993, 228). “No person above seventeen years of age shall have any benefit or protection of the law . . . who is not a member of some Church” (Locke 1993, 229). Atheists and individualists were excluded from toleration. Similarly, and despite the liberty of speculative opinions, most of the Sevarambians agree to “one sort of external Worship” (301). “No one makes any difficulty in assisting at the publick Assemblies, and joining in the Sacrifices, Prayers, and Hymns . . . ” (307). Downplaying the idea that someone could consider attending religious ceremonies that they do not believe in hypocritical or even idolatrous is a form of religious intolerance. The Sevarambians do make an exception: certain Christians have scruples about such services, and they are permitted to absent themselves (307). But this permission goes hand in hand with a lack of respect for the Christians. Most of the people believe that the alleged miracles of the Christians really came from natural causes, and Veiras provides examples of such explanations. Other elements of intolerance include the internal exile of “defective” people. The Sevarambians also held a hard line against Islam, partly

Introduction

xvii

because the Muslims in Persia had persecuted the Zoroastrians who were their ancestors (309–10). Like the Roman republicanism of Harrington’s Oceana, there are a number of elements of Sevarambian policy that are more backward-looking than forward-looking. The Sevarambians depend on slavery, both as a punishment for criminal activity and by purchase from foreign nations. They are not believers in freedom of the press: they are willing to use censorship where they deem it appropriate. Following Hobbes’s Leviathan, they forbid the reading of Greek mythology for its tendency to corrupt morals (310). Along with the absence of private property, there is not much of a private sphere exempt from interference by the authorities. Modern people would consider it a very regimented society: clothing is regulated, breakfast and dinner must be eaten in common, with only supper reserved for family and friends (263). Drunkenness is severely punished (260). There is no such thing as separation of church and state in Sevarambia. The viceroy is also the High Priest of the Sun. And the absence of a separation of church and state is conceived of as another aspect of toleration: churchmen are not excluded from public office because that would deny them their natural and civil rights (302). The Sun is not the supreme God, but rather the glorious minister of an invisible and supreme being. There is debate over the immortality of the soul. Some say it is material, but admit that it can be immortal in the same way other matter is immortal. But the common opinion is that the soul is punished in the afterlife for misdeeds in this one. In the final analysis, there are elements that we would understand today as religious toleration, and there are also elements of what we would understand as an oppressive power in the hands of the authorities to limit certain kinds of freedom of religion. As the text puts it, the Sevarambians do not “trouble any one for his opinions, while he yields an exterior Obedience to Authority, and conforms to the Constitutions and Customs of the Country, in things relating to the Good of the Society” (301). Naturally, everything will turn on who does the interpreting, and on what counts as a threat to society.

Part V Part V continues the religious history of the Sevarambians in thinly veiled analogy to Christianity. Sevarias allies himself with the purer sun worshippers against an impostor named Omigas who sets himself up as the “son of the sun.” Omigas used tricks, false miracles, and violence to establish his cult. Among other things, his priests convinced the people to send

xviii

Introduction

their virgin daughters to the temple for intercourse with the sun. A tale of heroic resistance to this custom is told, with a long speech about the evils of the impostor’s religion. As the narrator points out, it did not change anything: the priests could construe heroic resistance as impious heresy. When new temples were set up, the impostor could appear miraculously in all of them at the same time, in analogy to the Real Presence in the Christian mass. When a false miracle is exposed, the priests are quick to use another false miracle and violence to suppress the one who has exposed them. When Sevarias conquers the nation, he is prudent enough not to replace their religion only by force, but by greater pomp and further false miracles: so we see that there is nothing wrong in principle with false miracles, but the difference is whether they are staged for good or bad purposes. Sevarias also introduces numerous feasts and other celebrations, which are described in detail. A long prayer or hymn to the Great God serves as a confession of faith. Its chief message is that we cannot know anything about the real God, so the people will worship the sun as his representative. A learned scholar, Scromenas, gives a summary of Sevarambian theology (353–58). The universe is infinite and eternal, and both material and spiritual. The Jewish account of the age of the world and the Mosaic account of the generation of animals seem the most reasonable to them. The origin of religion is only in curiosity and contemplation, and the purpose of the state is to protect all individuals in their natural liberty (356, 357). When one of the castaways converts to the religion of the Sevarambians, Captain Siden decries the move, asserting that salvation is impossible outside of Roman Catholicism. He cannot do anything more because it is a principle among the Sevarambians not to use violence in matters of religion. Jonathan Israel is the most recent of the authorities who have considered our volume a “French Spinozistic novel” (Israel 2001, 591–92, 597). Benedict de Spinoza’s Tractatus Theologico-Politicus of 1670 had provided a critique of miracles and a substantial defense of freedom of speech, and his Ethica of 1677 had provided a materialist interpretation of the soul. Scromenas’s materialist interpretation of the soul, the implicit critique of miracles throughout the book, and emphasis on the Sevarambian custom of allowing people to say what they think certainly parallel important elements of Spinoza’s philosophy. But before we conclude that Veiras is deliberately promoting Spinozism, we should note that Aubrey Rosenberg has pointed out that some of these elements were common in the intellectual milieu of the time, and might not even have been recognized as specifically Spinozist in the late 1670s (Rosenberg 1972, 72). Many of the themes, especially the elitist assumption that

Introduction

xix

there will always be a small group of wise men and a large group of those who are easy to fool, remind us of what is known as the “erudite libertinism” of the age (Pintard 1943). In any case, the immediate suppression of Spinoza’s work after it came out surely would have made Veiras cautious about drawing explicitly on Spinoza (Israel 1995). But Rosenberg also points out that Veiras’s intentions are clearly subversive of major portions of established religion, so even if he is not a Spinozist in any strong sense, he is a radical reformer (Rosenberg 2001, 46). The book includes a long discussion of the grammar and language of the Sevarambians, which helps confirm the authorship of Veiras on the assumption that it reflects the interests of someone who also wrote a French grammar. The Braungarts point out that this makes Veiras a proto-Enlightenment figure since getting the language clear became one of the ideals of the Enlightenment (Braungart and Golawski-Braungart 1990, 26*ff.). The last of the romances that are sprinkled throughout the book tells the story of a competition among the greatest poet, the best musician, and the handsomest man of the day for the love of the viceroy’s daughter. The poet wins, and the lesson is drawn that “mental Endowments are more solid and durable than those of the Body” (380). After fifteen years in Sevarambia, Captain Siden reports, he was permitted to return to Asia and then to Europe. And that returns us to the sea battle that began the book and ended his life, and which was also based on a true story of a naval engagement (Fausett 1993, 119).

RECEPTION Almost as soon as the French version of the History of the Sevarambians came out in 1677, Parisian socialite Madame de Sévigné wrote to a friend about reading it (Sévigné 1978, II.472).4 It was soon mentioned in the Mercure Galant and reviewed in the Journal des Sçavans (Mercure Galant 1678, 189; Journal des Sçavans 1679, 87–89). So many of the elements of Fontenelle’s utopian History of the Ajaoïens of 1682 were taken from Sevarambia that one assumes it was written with Veiras’s book at the author’s elbow (Fontenelle 1998). Erudite authors writing in Latin debated whether the book was in fact atheistic (Morhof 1688, 75; Heumann 1711, 161–65; Fabricius 1716, 491; Reimmann 1725, 482–84; Struve 1740, 240–42). The open anticlericalism would certainly have provoked the religious to suspect irreligion in the author, despite his occasional pious declarations of orthodoxy. In the seventeenth and early eighteenth centuries, one could be called an “atheist” even if one did not deny the existence of a God, which the

xx

Introduction

Sevarambians did not deny. One could be called an atheist for denying God’s providence, which the manipulations of both the good and the bad impostors in Veiras’s story could be taken to imply. In the German-speaking world, Christian Thomasius’s long review in 1689 set the standard for exploration of the authorship and intentions of the work, which was reprised in a major dictionary article by Prosper Marchand in 1758 that served later authors as a guide to the book (Thomasius 1689, 949–1005; Marchand 1758, 10–20). Later in the century, the great Swiss historian Johannes Müller von Itzehoe thought the work important enough to retranslate it (Veiras 1783). He omitted most of the long discussion of the Sevarambian language, perhaps finding it tedious. Probably the most important writers to comment on Veiras’s book were Pierre Bayle, Gottfried Leibniz, Montesquieu, Rousseau, and Kant. Bayle pointed out that others had put irreligious hypotheses in the form of stories about faraway places in order to evade the censors, adding that “perhaps the author of the History of the Sevarambians did not neglect this finesse” (Bayle 1697, 989–90). German philosopher Leibniz mentioned our tale in his Theodicy (1720), an attempt to explain the existence of evil in a world supposedly created by a benevolent and all-powerful God. He observed that “one may imagine possible worlds without sin and without unhappiness, and one could make some like Utopian or Sevarambian romances: but these same worlds would be very inferior to ours in goodness. I cannot show you this in detail. For can I know and present infinities to you and compare them together?” (Leibniz 1985, 129). He followed this point with what he called the argument ab effectu, that in fact God has chosen this world as it is, and God would not have made an inferior world. Montesquieu compared Sevarambia to ancient Sparta. “The ancient Greeks,” he wrote, “made singular institutions to inspire virtue. When you see, in the Life of Lycurgus, the laws he gave the Lacedaemonians, you believe you are reading the history of the Sevarambians” (Montesquieu 1989, 36). But this was not intended wholly as praise. Lycurgus is described as “mixing larceny with the spirit of justice, the harshest slavery with extreme liberty, the most heinous feelings with the greatest moderation” (Montesquieu 1989, 36). It is probably fair to say that Montesquieu saw the same combination of opposites in many of the institutions of Sevarias. Swiss philosopher Jean Jacques Rousseau was often accused of a wild imagination. He tried to defend himself from this charge by claiming that his writings were about real objects, not Sevarambian fantasies (Rousseau 1764, 810).

Introduction

xxi

Immanuel Kant wrote that it “is certainly agreeable to think up political constitutions which meet the requirements of reason (particularly in matters of right). But it is foolhardy to put them forward seriously, and punishable to incite people to do away with the existing constitution. Plato’s Atlantis, More’s Utopia, Harrington’s Oceana, and Allais’s Sevarambia have successively made their appearance, but they have never (with the exception of Cromwell’s abortive attempt to establish a despotic republic) been tried out in practice” (Kant 1991, 188). He went on to add that it “is a pleasant dream to hope that a political product of the sort we here have in mind will one day be brought to perfection, at however remote a date,” but that “we can continually approach such a state” and “it is also the duty of the head of state (not of the citizens) to do so” (Kant 1991, 188). In recent decades, Nannerl Keohane believed that the History of the Sevarambians “can still be read with pleasure as a utopia” (Keohane 1980, 319). Raymond Trousson wrote that “critics have unanimously considered Veiras’s novel not only one of the richest and most complex of the genre [of utopian writings], but also the most accomplished and the most successful as a novel. Adventures, exoticism, color, and ideas are found together in a harmonious synthesis equally far from the extravagances of the Adventures of Jacques Sadeur (1676) of Gabriel de Foigny and from dryness of dialogue in the manner of More and Campanella” (Trousson 1979, x). Aubrey Rosenberg points out that the large number of new editions and translations of the History of the Sevarambians were “testimony to its immense and durable popularity throughout Europe, from its publication up to the Revolution, and that the controversies it inspired were not due only to superficial interest in an imaginary voyage, but rather to the conviction, perhaps in part intuitive, that this novel represented a turning point in the history of ideas” (Rosenberg 2001, 46). Wolfgang Braungart and Jutta Golawski-Braungart have provided some insight into what the elements of that turning point might be. Among other things, they point out that it is one of the first utopian writings that qualifies as a novel (Braungart and Golawski-Braungart 1990, 55*). It is not just a description of a utopian community, and not just a moral tale for edification. It is alternately entertaining, instructive, and provocative. It is long enough to tell a comprehensive story in all of its social, economic, political, natural, and historical contexts. It is up-to-date in the sense that it brings up almost all of the philosophical, religious, and political controversies of the day. The philosophy behind the story is complex. There are elements of early modernity in the story, such as the will to order society and bring

xxii

Introduction

nature under control (Braungart and Braungart-Golawski 1990, *59). There are elements of the coming “Enlightenment,” such as the critique of religion and the endorsement of enlightened absolutism. Yet there is no separation of church and state, slavery is an integral part of life, and there is very little private life, so it cannot be read as a precursor or an endorsement of modernity tout court. There is a strong tension between elements of democratic theory and of autocratic patriarchalism. Thus it is possible to read the story as a metaphor for human life as we live it, in all its complexity and ambiguity. Perhaps this is one of the best reasons for reading any utopian writing.

NOTES 1 On this and several other Dutch explorations and shipwrecks off the coast of Australia in the preceding period, see Fausett 1993. Fausett’s account must be used with caution: for example, he describes the second volume of the English edition as “a condensed version” of the second part of the French without noting its major differences (113) and refers to “Omigas” and “a later impostor, Stroukaras,” without realizing that these are the same person (118). 2. Safavid dynasty persecution of the Zoroastrians in Persia actually began in the 1500s. 3. The best analysis of the many love stories in the book is Kuon 1986, 351–58. 4. The Braungarts reprinted most of the original passages of the reception history cited in the following paragraphs (Braungart and Golawski-Braungart 1990, 64*–203*). However, they did not include Fontenelle, David Hume, and Immanuel Kant.

BIBLIOGRAPHY Aldridge, A. O. 1950. Polygamy in Early Fiction: Henry Neville and Denis Veiras. Publication of the Modern Language Association of America 65: 464–72. Andreae, Johann Valentin. 1999. Christianopolis. Ed. E. H. Thompson. Dordrecht: Kluwer. Arpe, Peter Friedrich. 1717. De prodigiosis naturae et artis operibus, Talismanes et Amuleta dictis. Hamburg. Bacon, Francis. 1627. The New Atlantis. London. Baudelot de Dairval, Charles-César. 1686. L’utilité des voyages. Paris. Bayle, Pierre. 1697. Dictionnaire historique et critique. Rotterdam.

Introduction

xxiii

Boodt, Anselmus Boèce de. 1609. Gemmarum et lapidum historia. Hanover (Reprinted Leiden: 1636, 1647). Braungart, Wolfgang and Jutta Golawski-Braungart. 1990. Nachwort der Herausgeber, 1*–220*. In Veiras 1990. Campanella, Tommaso. 1602. La città del sole. Cavendish, Margaret. 1666, 1668. The Blazing World. Reprinted in Claeys 2000, 53–114. Claeys, Gregory, ed. 2000. Restoration and Augustan British Utopias. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press. D’Allais, D. V. 1681. Grammaire Methodique. Paris. ———. 1683. A Short and Methodical Introduction to the French Tongue. Composed for the particular use and benefit of the English, by D. V. D’Allais a Teacher of the French and English Tongues in Paris. Paris. Drouin-Hans, Anne-Marie. 2004. Education et utopies. Paris: Vrin. Fabricius, Johann Albert. 1716. Bibliographia antiquaria. Hamburg. Fausett, David. 1993. Writing the New World. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press. Feldwick, A. and C. Nederman. 1998. “Religion set the world at odds”: Deism and the Climate of Religious Tolerance in the Works of Aphra Behn. In Beyond the Persecuting Society, 216–31. Eds. J. Laursen and C. Nederman. Philadelphia: University of Pennsylvania Press. Foigny, Gabriel de. 1993. The Southern Land, Known. Ed. and tr. David Fausett. Syracuse: Syracuse University Press. Fontenelle, Bernard Le Bovier, M. de. 1998. Histoire des Ajaoïens. Ed. HansGünter Funke. Oxford: Voltaire Foundation. Gaffarel, Jacques. 1629, 1631, 1637, 1650 (Latin edition 1676). Curiositez inovyes sur la sculpture talismanique, des Persans. Paris. ———. 1650. Unheard-of curiosities concerning the talismanical sculpture of the Persians. Tr. Edmund Chilmead. London. Harrington, James. 1977. The Political Works of James Harrington. Ed. J. G. A. Pocock. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Hawkins, Richard. 1660. New Atlantis Continued. Reprinted in Claeys 2000, 1-51. Heumann, Christoph August. 1711. De libris anonymis. Jena. Hume, David. 1987. Of Polygamy and Divorces. In Essays Moral, Political, and Literary, 181–90. Ed. Eugene Miller, revised ed. Indianapolis: Liberty Fund.

xxiv

Introduction

Israel, Jonathan. 1995. The Banning of Spinoza’s Works in the Dutch Republic (1670–1678). In Disguised and Overt Spinozism Around 1700, 3–14. Eds. Wiep van Bunge and Wim Klever. Leiden: Brill. ———. 2001. Radical Enlightenment: Philosophy and the Making of Modernity 1650-1750. Oxford: Oxford University Press. Joucla, Véronique. 2000. De la fiction romanesque au projet réel, adduction d’eau et réalisations hydrauliques chez Denis Veiras. Dix-septième siècle 52 330–40. Journal des Sçavans. 1679. Vol. 6. Kant, Immanuel. 1991. The Contest of the Faculties in Political Writings, 176–90. Ed. Hans Reiss. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. Keohane, Nannerl. 1980. Philosophy and the State in France. Princeton: Princeton University Press. Kuon, Peter. 1986. Utopischer Entwurf und fiktionale Vermittlung. Heidelberg: Winter. Laursen, J. C. and C. Masroori. 1999. Liars and Unbelief in the Forgotten Utopia: Denis Veiras’ History of the Sevarambians at the Roots of Modernity. In La Vie intellectuelle aux refuges protestants, 185–202. Eds. J. Häseler and A. McKenna. Paris: Champion. Le Clerc, Jean. 1712. Bibliotheque Choisie. Tome XXV. Premiere Partie. Amsterdam. Leibniz, G. W. 1985. Theodicy. La Salle: Open Court. Locke, John. 1993. Political Writings of John Locke. Ed. David Wootton. New York: Penguin. Manuel, Frank and Fritzi Manuel, eds. 1966. French Utopias. New York: Free Press. Marchand, Prosper. 1758. Dictionaire historique. The Hague. Mayr, Johann Baptist. 1679. Krafftiges Amuletum, oder Geistliche Artzney. Salzburg. Mercure Galant. 1678. Vol. I. Montesquieu, Charles de Secondat, Baron. 1989. The Spirit of the Laws. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press. More, Thomas. 1992. Utopia. Ed. Robert Adams, second ed. New York: Norton. Morhof, Daniel Georg. 1688. Polyhistor. Sive de notitia auctorum. . . . Lubeck. Neville, Henry. 1668. Isles of Pines. Reprinted in Claeys 2000, 115–30.

Introduction

xxv

Pintard, Rene. 1943. Le libertinage érudit dans la première moitié du XVIIe siècle. Paris. Reimmann, Jacob Friedrich. 1725. Historia universalis atheismi. Hildesheim. Rosenberg, Aubrey. 1972. Tyssot de Patot and His Work (1655–1738). The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff. ———. 1999. Denis Veiras, Histoire des Sevarambes: a Preliminary Checklist of Seventeenth- and Eighteenth-Century Editions. In The Culture of the Book: Essays from Two Hemispheres in Honour of Wallace Kirsop, 120–35. Eds. David Garrioch et al. Melbourne: Bibliographical Society of Australia and New Zealand. ———. 2001. Analyse et réception du roman, 31–47. In Veiras 2001. Rousseau, Jean Jacques. 1764. Lettres écrites de la montagne. Amsterdam. Savage-Smith, Emilie, ed. 2004. Magic and Divination in Early Islam. Aldershot: Ashgate. Sévigné, Marie de Rabutin-Chantal de. 1978. Correspondance. Ed. Roger Duchêne. Paris: Gallimard. Sorel, Charles. 1636. Des talismans ou figures faite sous certaines constellations, pour faire aymer & respecter les hommes, les enricher, guerir leurs maladie, etc. Paris. Spini, Giorgio. 1992. Le origini del socialismo. Torino: Einaudi. Spinoza, Baruch. 1991. Tractatus Theologico-Politicus. Tr. Samuel Shirley. Leiden: Brill. Struve, Burckhard Gotthelf. 1740. Bibliotheca Philosophica. Düsseldorf. Thomasius, Christian. 1689. Freymütiger Jedoch Vernunft- und Gesetzmässiger Gedancken. Halle. Trousson, Raymond. Préface, vii–xxx. In Vairasse 1979. Vairasse, Denis. 1979. Histoire des Sevarambes. Ed. Raymond Trousson. Geneva: Slatkine. Veiras, Denis. 1783. Geschichte der Sevaramben aus dem Französischen übersetzt. Tr. Johann Gottwerth Müller. Itzehoe. ———. 1934. L’histoire des Sevarambes. Ed. Emanuel von der Mühll. Baltimore: Johns Hopkins University Press. ———. 1937, 1956. Istoriia Sevarambov. Ed. V. P. Volgin. Moscow: Academia. ———. 1971. Utopicheskii roman. Moscow: Izdatestvo. ———. 1990. Eine Historie der Neu-gefundenen Völker SEVARAMBES genannt 1689. Eds. Wolfgang Braungart and Jutta Golawski-Braungart. Tübingen: Niemeyer.

xxvi

Introduction

———. 1994. Histoire des Sévarambes. Ed. Michel Rolland. Amiens: Encrage. ———. 1996. Keimo no yutopia. Ed. Kyo Nozawa and Yuzi Ueda. Tokyo: Hosei Daigaku Shuppanyoku. ———. 1997. Austeru tairiku hyoryuki. Sevaranbu monogatari. Eds. Nobuko Kurata and Koji Suzuki. Tokyo: Iwanami Shoten. ———. 2001. L’histoire des Sévarambes. Ed. Aubrey Rosenberg. Paris: Champion. von der Mühll, Emanuel. 1938. Denis Veiras et son Histoire des Sévarambes. Paris: Droz.

THE ORIGINAL TEXTS Original volumes of The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi (1675, 1679) are in the Williams Andrew Clark Memorial Library at UCLA (call number G560.V131). The editors wish to thank Bruce Whiteman and Jeffrey Rankin for making them available under extraordinary circumstances. The volumes can also be found in the British Library, the New York Public Library, the libraries of Harvard, Yale, and Duke University, and elsewhere. It is also microfilmed and catalogued as Wing V 20, English Books 1641-1700, University Microfilms, Inc., Ann Arbor, Michigan. See Rosenberg 1999, 130. The History of the Sevarambians (1738) is in the Eaton Collection at the University of California, Riverside (call number SpCol Eaton HX811 .V3513 1738 UCR), the British Library, the Library of Congress, the National Library of Australia, and the libraries of the University of Michigan, the University of Illinois–Urbana, and elsewhere. See Rosenberg 1999, 131. Notes in brackets are the editors’ notes ([xx]), and notes with an asterix (*) are the author’s notes. We have left seventeenth and eighteenth century spellings as is and silently corrected a few obvious misspellings. We have left seventeenth and eighteenth century commas and semicolons as is; also silently correcting a few obvious mistakes. We have replaced single quotation marks with double quotation marks. Our texts are not consistent in the use of diacritical marks in the names of the invented language: for example, sometimes a town is spelled “Sporundè” and sometimes “Sporunde” or “Sporounde.” We have followed the texts. The author uses apostrophies for plurals and omits them for possessives, and is inconsistent in his use of compound words: “my self” and “myself.” We have followed his usage.

This page intentionally left blank.

Introduction

xxvii

THE PRINTS The prints reproduced in this volume are from the German edition of 1689. Originals may be found in the British Library, Berlin, Wolfenbüttel, The Hague, Hanover, Stockholm, Stuttgart, Yale University, Duke University, and the University of Michigan. They are reproduced here courtesy of Beinecke Rare Books and Manuscripts Liberty, Yale University. See Rosenberg 1999, 131–32. The German edition was also reproduced in Veiras 1990. The editors would like to thank the La Rochelle chapter of the Huguenot Society of California for their support for the publication of this volume.

Dedicated to Teresa and Cheryl, real utopias

THE HISTORY OF THE

Sevarites or Sevarambi: A Nation inhabiting part of the third CONTINENT, Commonly called, Terræ Australes Incognitæ. WITH An Account of their admirable GOVERNMENT, RELIGION, CUSTOMS, and LANGUAGE. Written By one Captain Siden, A Worthy Person, Who, together with many others, was cast upon those Coasts, and lived many Years in that Country.

LONDON, Printed for Henry Brome, at the Gun at the West End of St. Pauls Church-Yard. 1675 1

2

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

THE PUBLISHER TO THE READER There are many, who having read Plato’s Commonwealth,1 Sir Thomas More’s Utopia, the Lord Verulam’s New Atlantis,2 (which are but Ideas and ingenious fancies) are apt to suspect all relations of new discoveries to be of that kind; and chiefly when they find in them any thing extraordinary and wonderful. But although these persons are to be commended for being wary and cautious, yet it is but so long as they keep within the bounds of moderation, and do not pass to the excess of incredulity. For as some men, through a believing simplicity, are easily imposed upon, and receive that for a truth, which in effect is not one: So others, on the contrary, through a contrary humour, are apt to reject, as fabulous, that which often proves to be a real truth. This clearly appears in the case of Vergilius Bishop of Collen,3 who was like to have suffered a severe punishment for affirming, that There were Antipodes; neither could any thing save him but a publick Recantation. Columbus was looked upon (here in England, and afterward in France) as a brain-sick Fellow for saying, There was Land on the West parts of the Ocean: Yet the Voyages since made round the World have justified Vergilius his opinion: And the discovery of America (where we have many flourishing Plantations) has sufficiently evidenced the truth of Columbus his Assertion. The Histories of Peru, Mexico, China, etc. were at first taken for Romances by many, but time has shewed since that they are verities not to be doubted of. Those remote Countries were for thousands of years unknown to the People of Europe, and so are still many others perhaps, and at this day we know little more of them, than what lies upon the Sea-coasts. But how should we have a perfect knowledge of remote Countries, lately discovered, since there are many parts of Europe very little known yet, and some not at all. Nay, the British Islands are not perfectly described: And before their last Civil Wars, the Highlands of Scotland; many parts of Ireland, and other smaller Isles about, were very little known to the People of England: And their Customs, Laws, and Religion, are things we have not yet had any very good account of. Few Travellers make it their business to write Histories, and make descriptions of those Countries they have travelled in, for most of them being Merchants, or Seamen, they mind little more than their Trade; and being intent upon gain and profit, seldom busie themselves in making observations. Besides, —————— 1. [Better known as The Republic]. 2. [Francis Bacon, author of The New Atlantis (1627), became Baron Verulam in 1618]. 3. [St. Vergilius of Salzburg, d. 789 AD, canonized 1233 AD.]

The Publisher

3

few of them are qualified for the writing of Books if they were never so willing; and fewer have time and opportunity to apply themselves to that study; so it falls out, that we have few exact relations of remote Countries, although they be often seen, and even described in Maps. For an Instance, The Isle of Borneo lies near Java, and in the Way to China, it is one of the biggest in the world according to Geographical Descriptions, and yet we have very little knowledge of it, although the Dutch have very large Dominions in Java, and other Islands about it, and sail daily by it in their way to Jappan and China. Many other places there are which Sailers take no more notice of than as it is necessary for their Ships to avoid them. And how can it be expected we should have any good descriptions of them, unless some great Powers should undertake it, and send fit persons for that purpose, with all the helps and encouragement requisite in so useful and honourable a design? Among all remote Countries, there is none so vast, and so little known, as the third Continent, commonly called, Terra Australis.4 It is true, Geographers give some small and unperfect descriptions of it, but it is with little knowledge and certainty; and most of their draughts may be suspected, and look’d upon, as imaginary and fictitious. Sure it is, that there is such a Continent; many have seen it, and even landed there, but few durst venture far in it, if any there were; and I do not think that any body hath made any true description of it, either for want of knowledge, or other necessary means and opportunities. This History will supply that defect, in a great measure, if it be true, as I have reason to believe upon these grounds: First, Upon the testimony of the Reporter, who doth not only herein affirm this History to be true, but did it also by word of mouth, a good while before, and again near the time of his death, when he gave his Papers to the Gentleman, who did lately put them into my hands. These two Gentlemen came to know one another at Smirna,5 a little before the Dutch Fleet departed from thence, in or about the year 1607 [sic: 1672], and being both bound for Holland; they came together in the same Ship, where by a daily converse they contracted a very strict friendship. This Fleet being attacked in its return, there were many men killed and wounded; and among the rest, the Author of this Relation, called Captain Siden, was mortally wounded, and lived but little after the fight. Upon his death-bed he made his Friend Heir of what he had in the Ship, and spake to him in this manner: as the Gentleman, himself, hath often declared to me. —————— 4. [Now known as Australia]. 5. [City on the southwest coast of what is now Turkey].

4

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Sir, Since it is Gods Decree that I should live no longer, I patiently submit to his Divine Will without any murmuring. But before I die, I am willing to dispose of a Chest I have in this Ship, where you will find some Money, and a few Jewels, of no great value, I confess, but such as they are I give them to you, and I am sorry they are not better worth your acceptance, I give you also the Chest, and every thing in it; and though, it seems, the whole is worth but little, yet you will find a great Treasure in it, and that is the History of my Adventures in the South Continent, as you have heard me relate to you several times. You will find it in a great disorder and confusion for the most part; and written in several Languages, as being intended only to serve for memoires till I could digest them into an orderly contexture. But since God will not permit me to do it my self, I commit it to your care, knowing you are an ingenious person, and give you full power and authority to dispose of the said Papers as you will think most convenient; assuring you upon my death bed, as I have done before in several discourses, that they contain nothing but truth; which, I hope, time and further experience will bring to light. These were the last words of the dying Gentleman, who a few hours after gave up his Soul to God; and who, according to his Friends testimony, was a very sober, discreet, and worthy Person. After his Death his Heir examined the Papers, and found they were written, for the most part in Latine; the rest in French, Italian, and Provencal; the diversity of which Languages put him to a great deal of trouble, for he did not understand them all, neither was he willing to trust the Writings into Strangers hands. These difficulties, together with the confusion of the Wars that followed, and several troublesome Affairs, were the reason why he kept this History concealed all this while, not knowing whom to trust it with. But being come from Holland into England since the Peace was proclaimed betwixt the two Nations; and having contracted some acquaintance and friendship with me, he did me the favour a while ago to intrust me with his Papers, and desired my assistance in putting them into an orderly method. I perused them, and found the matter, therein contained, so extraordinary and wonderful, that I was never at rest till I had disposed them into a good order and contexture; which I, at last, effected, not without much labour and pains, with the Gentlemans help and counsel. Now we were a while uncertain in what Language we should publish this History, he being inclined to do it in Latine, or French: But at last I prevailed with him, and perswaded him to let me Print it in English, taking the whole task upon my self. But before we proceeded in that design, I was desirous to enquire after the truth of this discovery some other way, and told him it were very material to send into Holland, to know of the Officers of the

The Publisher

5

Admiralties there, whether any such Ship, as the Golden Dragon, herein mentioned, was at any time gone from thence for Batavia:6 To which he readily answered, he had satisfied himself therein, and found upon examination, that a Vessel of that name was gone from the Texel,7 at the time herein expressed, with all the other Circumstances. But this was not enough to satisfie me, because I had nothing but his bare Affirmation: I therefore went to Mr. Van Dam, Advocate to the East-India Company, and one of the Commissioners sent hither from the States General to adjust matters concerning the Treaty of Commerce between the two Nations, and enquired of him, Whether he remembred any such Vessel. His answer was, That he did very well remember, that in the Year 1655 a new Ship, called the Golden Dragon, was gone from the Texel, and as he thought from Enchusen for Batavia, carrying Money, and a great number of Passengers; that she had perished by storm, as he thought, about the South Continent. This Gentleman’s declaration did much confirm me in the opinion of the truth of this History. But that which did, a while after, absolutely, convince me, was a Letter, shewed me by a French Gentleman, who had made some enquiry after this Ship, at the intreaty of a Savoyard upon this occasion. This French Gentleman discoursing, three or four years ago, with a Gentleman of Bruges, (as I take it) who had once great Concerns in the East-Indies; and lived there many years; and asking him many questions relating to those Countries, heard him relate the Story of this Ship, and how she was cast away upon the Coasts of the South Continent, where all her Men and Provision were saved, &c. Not long after he told occasionally the same Story in a Company, where was a Gentleman of Savoy. This Gentleman hearing this Story related, seemed to be much concerned in it, and craved of the French man, that he would bring him acquainted with the Dutch Gentleman, who had made that Relation to him. But this could not be done, because the Dutch Gentleman was then in Flanders; whereupon he intreated him to write to him, and desire him to give the best account he could of it; which he readily consented to, and having sent a Letter to his Friend concerning this matter, received the following answer, which we have faithfully translated out of French, and inserted it here. SIR, According to your desire, and for your Friends satisfaction, I shall tell you; that when I was at Batavia, in the year 1659, a Dutch Seaman, named Prince, hearing that I had been near the South Continent, told me, that some years —————— 6. [[The capital of the Dutch East Indies; now Jakarta, Indonesia.] 7. [The port of Amsterdam.]

6

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

before (I do not remember how many, nor at what height) he was cast away in a new Ship, called the Green, or Golden Dragon; which carried a great deal of Money, designed for Batavia, and about four hundred people; who for the most part had got into the said Land, and kept there the same Discipline they had at Sea. That having entrenched themselves, with what they had saved, and among the rest, most of their Victuals, they made a new Pinnace out of the broken pieces of their Ship, casting Lots for eight men (whereof this Seaman was one) to go to Batavia, to inform the General of the Holland company of their disaster, to the end he might send Ships to fetch those who had been cast away. That Pinnace being come to Batavia, with much ado; The said General dispatched presently a Frigot, which being come to that Coast, they sent their long Boat ashore with many men, who landed at the place and height to them described before, but found no body there. They ranged along that Coast till they lost their Boat, and some of their men, through the badness of the weather, which that Coast is very subject to, and so returned to Batavia without effecting any thing. The General sent a second Frigot, which likewise came back, with no better success than the former. People speak differently of that Country, some saying, that in the Inland, there are People of a great Stature; others, that they are little and subtile, and that they carry those they can catch into the inner parts of the Land along with them. I was like to have landed there, but, as through Gods special favour, a sudden calm in the night saved us from being cast away; soon after a sudden storm made us alter our minds of landing there, and we thought our selves happy to get to Sea again. This is all I can tell you of this business: Your Friends may hear more of this ship from those who belong to the East-India company. General Maetsuycker was then, and is still, General in Batavia; but I had this account only of the Seaman above mentioned. The Land of this Country is reddish, and barren, and the Coasts as if they were enchanted by reason of frequent storms, which hinder much those who will land there: And that is the reason why the aforesaid Frigots lost their Boats and men. They could not land every where; and this Seaman is of opinion, they could not find the right place. I remain Your most humble Servant Bridges, Oct. 28.1672. Th. S. This is the true Copy of the Letter sent to this French Gentleman, who has given me the Original, and I have it still in my possession. He added, That the Savoyard took a Copy of it, and told him, that he himself had made great enquiry after a Gentleman of his Country, who was said to have gone in this Ship. That the same Gentleman had been a great

The Publisher

7

Traveller, and had left an Estate near Nice de Provence, where he was born, and that his Kindred, not having heard from him for many years, were much troubled to know what was become of him. All these things are, in my opinion, very strong Arguments to establish the truth of this History, since they agree so well with the History it self in all the Circumstances of Time, Place, and Person, and are attested by so many credible Witnesses, which are yet alive, for the most part, and who living in several places, not knowing one another, and having no interest in the publishing of this Story, cannot rationally be suspected, to have all joyned together to give credit to a Fictitious Narration. But I leave the Reader to the liberty of using his own Judgment, and content my self with shewing the Reasons which have been able to convince mine. I wish that those who shall read this most delightful and admirable Relation may reap some profit out of it either in point of Pleasure or Utility, it being a very ingenious Piece, and the most perfect model of Government I ever read or heard of in my life. D. V.

This page intentionally left blank.

The History of the Sevarites, or Sevarambi

M

y Natural Genius, the manner of my Education, and the Example of others, inspired me in my young years with a restless desire of travelling the World, that I might my self be an Eye Witness of those things I had either read or heard of. But the Authority of my Parents, who designed me for the Gown, and my want of sufficient means, were powerful Obstacles to my desires; and would have confined me at home, had not fortune, mightier than all these, ordered it contrary to their intent, and according to my wishes. For before I had attained the fifteenth year of my age, I was sent into Italy, in a Military Imployment, which kept me there two whole years before I came home again into my own Country; from whence, soon after my Return, I was obliged to march into Catalonia with a better Command than that I had before. I continued there in the Army for the space of three years, and would not have quitted the Service, if my Fathers untimely Death had not called me home again to take possession of a small Estate he left me, and to obey my Mothers absolute Commands, who called me back, as the only person, after so great a loss, that was able to dry up her tears. These Considerations made me to return, and after that, to leave the Sword, and to put on the Gown, and change a Souldiers life for that of a Lawyer; to which study upon this occasion I did wholly apply my self; read the Institutions, the Codex, and the Digest or Pandects,8 where having made a pretty good progress in four or five years time I was perswaded to take my Degrees in the University, which I did accordingly with an indifferent good success. Then was I received into the Soveraign Court of Judicature of my Country in the quality of an Advocate, as being the first step to higher dignities, exercised my self in Declamations upon fictitious Causes, and pleaded real and choice ones in Apparatu, as they term it, with some applause and credit. I was well enough pleased with these kinds of exercises, in which young men love to shew their Wit and Eloquence to the Publick, and where they get more praise than money; But when I descended to the lower practice of the Law, I found it —————— 8. [The major texts of Roman law, promulgated by Byzantine Emperor Justinian I (527–565 AD).]

9

10

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

so crabbed, so mean and slavish, that in a short time I was quite weary of it. I carefully examined the ways and means by which Lawyers attain to Riches and Dignities, and found there was much of fraud and indirect proceeding in them, and that unless I did comply with men of that Calling in all these vices, I should never get either Wealth or Credit by my practice. Now being naturally inclined to Ease and Pleasure, and loving frankness and honesty, I clearly perceived I was no ways fit for that Imployment. So while I was thinking and contriving how to cast it off with some plausible reason, a fatal accident took away my loving Mother; and although her death made me absolute Master of my self and Estate, yet it laid so much grief and sorrow on my heart, that all things at home became odious to me, insomuch that I made a strong resolution to leave my Native Land, if not for ever, at least for a long time. Pursuant to this design I disposed of all my Concerns, except of a small Estate in Land, which I reserved for a place of retreat in case of necessity, leaving it in the hands of a faithful Friend, who ever since gave me a very good account of it so long as he could hear from me. Having in that manner ordered my affairs and taken leave of my best friends, I travelled into the chiefest Provinces of the Kingdom of France ’till I came to the famous City of Paris, where I spent almost two years without going above fifty or sixty Miles from it. But the former desire of seeing more Countries, and an opportunity while I was there of travelling into Germany made me depart from that Populous City to go and see the several Courts of the German Princes, those of the Kings of Swedeland and Denmark, and at last the Low-Countries, where I made an end of my European travels, and rested my self, till the year 1655, in which I took shipping for the East Indies. The cause and motives which induced me to take this long Voyage were these: First, My natural curiosity of seeing Countries, and the wonderful relations I had heard or read of those remote parts of the world. Secondly, The earnest solicitation of a Friend who had a concern in Batavia, and was bound for that place. And last of all, The great gain and profits which I was told would accrue to me by this Voyage if it should prove successful. These Arguments and Invitations easily prevailed with me, so that having in a short time ordered my affairs, and prepared my self for this purpose, I went with my friend aboard a new Ship, called the Golden Dragon, bound for Batavia. She was a Vessel of about six hundred Tuns, and thirty two Guns, and carried near four hundred People Seamen or Passengers, and great Sums of Money, where my Friend, called Monsieur de Nuits, had a great concern.

Part I (1675)

11

In order to our Voyage we weighed Anchor from the Texel on the twelfth day of April 1655, and with a fresh Easterly Wind sailed through the Channel betwixt France and England with all the speed and good success we could wish, till we came to the open Seas, and thence prosecuted our Voyage to the Canary Islands with variety of Winds and weather, but no Storms or Tempests. There we took in fresh Provisions, such as the Islands afford, and which we had occasion for; and steering from thence towards the Isles of Capo verdo to fetch a constant Trade Wind, we came in sight of them without any accident worth my relating. It is true, we saw several Sea Monsters, flying Fishes, new Constellations, etc. But because those things are usual, that they have been described by others, and have for many years lost the grace of Novelties, I purposely omit them, not being willing to increase the Bulk of this Book with unnecessary relations which would but tire the Readers patience and my own. To proceed therefore with my intended brevity, I think it will be sufficient to tell you that we made the Coasts of Brasil, and got there another Trade Wind, which carried us towards the Cape of Good Hope with indifferent good success. We doubled the Cape without any danger, and pursued our Voyage with all chearfulness and alacrity, till we came to 38 degrees of South Latitude, on the Second day of August of the same year 1655. Till this time and place Fortune had smiled upon us, but now she began to frown, for about three or four a clock in the afternoon the Sky began to change its former clearness and serenity into thick Clouds, Lightnings and Thunders, which were the forerunners of the vehement Winds, Rain, Hail and Tempest, which succeeded soon after. The very approach of this violent storm did much terrifie our Seamen, and although they had time to take down their Sails, tie fast their Guns, and order every thing as they thought fit, yet foreseeing the terrible Hurricane that hapned immediately after, they could not chuse but dread the violence and fierceness of it. The Sea began to foam, and turn its smooth Surface into Mountains and Vales. The Winds ran all the points of the Compass in less than two hours time. Our Ship was tossed to and fro, up and down again, in the horridest manner imaginable; one Wind drove us forward, and another beat us back again; our Masts, Yards, and Tackling were broken, and the storm was so violent that a great part of our Seamen being sick could hardly hear and obey command. All this while our Passengers were kept under Deck, and my Friend and I lay at the main Mast sadly cast down, and both repenting, he for his covetous desire of gain, and I for my foolish curiosity. We wished our

12

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

selves a hundred times in Holland, and as often despaired ever to see it again, or any other Land, for any would have served our turn then. He was a very honest young man, but no Souldier nor Seaman. At the beginning of the storm I was full of courage, and well resolved to submit to the will of God without any murmuring or fear of dying, but he did not understand that Philosophy, the dreadful image of Death appeared to him with all his horrour, and I think I might have seen it in his face if we had not been in the dark. I have admired he did not die for the very fear of it: At first he sigh’d and groaned only, but a while after, when the storm increased, he broke out into the saddest howling in the world. He accused his Fathers Counsel and Command, who had sent him, but chiefly his own folly in obeying. He called his dear Mother, Brother, and Sisters, and bad them an Eternal Farewel, as likewise his beloved Country, which he had no hopes ever to see again. He lamented and deplored the cruelty of his Fate that put an end to his life in the flower of his Age by so horrid and untimely a Death. In fine, he made such sad complaints, and was so eloquent in his affliction, that I was moved with Compassion more than with the fear of being drowned. Pity first wrought upon my heart, and drove out of it all the Stoicity my reason had laid there in store; then fear and infirmity came in, so that I began to howl and lament with my afflicted Friend, as if I had been as weak as he, and had it not been for some ridiculous Expressions of his, which made me sometimes laugh, I think I had been as much dejected as he. Mans weakness and simplicity is much to be admired in such occasions as this, and shews that Custom, Prejudices, and Opinions, have more influence upon his mind than true reason he so much boasts of, and which in such occurrences as this forsakes him, and leaves the mastery of his Soul to weak and silly Passions. Death is but one and the same thing what shape soever it assumes to appear in, and we commonly fear the manner of Death more than Death it self. Before this storm (wherein none of our People perished by the special Grace of God), I had been exposed to a great deal more danger than I was now; I had been exposed to the mouth of Canons, I had fought in Battles, and in Sieges, where many thousands of men had lost their lives, and where we marched upon the slain to a seeming inevitable Death: Yet the fear of it did hardly make an Impression on my heart because it was an usual thing, and the contempt of danger as much accounted courage and gallantry as the fear of it cowardliness and infamy, yet death is still but one and the same thing. While my Friend and I were thus lamenting, the master and his Crew were not asleep, neither did they neglect any thing that could contribute to our preservation; They used all their art, and all their endeav-

Part I (1675)

13

ours, some about the Stern, some about the Pumps, and others about several other parts of the Ship; and God did so bless their labour, that they kept her up while the violent Hurricane lasted, which at last fell into one particular Wind, that got the mastery of the others, and drove us to the Southward with so great rapidity that we were not able to keep out of that Course, but must yield to his violence. After two days running that Course the Wind changed a little, and drove us to the Southeast for the space of three days, the weather being so foggy that we could see nothing at five or six yards distance. On the sixth day the Wind slaked a little, but drove us still to the Southeast till towards night, when of a sudden we felt a very great Calm, just as if our Ship had fallen into a Pool or dead Lake, which caused no small wonder in us. Two or three hours after we were thus becalmed the weather cleared up, and we spied a great many Stars, but could not make any good observation by them. We judged in general that we were not far from Batavia, and a great many Leagues from the South Continent: But it proved afterwards we were much deceived in our Conjecture. The seventh day we continued in this great Calm, as if we had been ordered to celebrate the Sabbath day after six days labour and toyl; during this Calm we searched and examined all the parts of our Ship, and found her pretty tight, though she was a new Ship, and had never gone a Voyage before. But she was so strongly built that she endured the rage of the Seas without springing any Leak able to endamage her. The eighth day at Noon a fine breeze began to blow, and drove us to the Eastward, much to our joy and satisfaction, for besides that it made for our purpose, we were afraid of being becalmed; at night the weather grew dark and misty, and the Wind stiff and violent, so that we feared another storm. The Fog continued all the day following, and the wind blowing by fits and puffs, which did sometimes put us to great danger; at night the wind changed, grew boisterous, and drove us again to the Southeast with great impetuosity, the Fog growing still thicker and thicker. About the middle of the night, Wind being very high, and our Ship running very swiftly, she struck of a sudden upon a Bank, much contrary to our expectation, and stuck there so fast that she remained there without any motion as if she had been nailed to the place. Then did we think our selves absolutely lost, and looked every moment to see our Ship staved in pieces by the fury of the Seas and Wind, and every body fell to his Prayers seeing neither Art nor Industry could avail. But God, whose mercies are great, shewed us salvation where we expected nothing but destruction; for the Morning being come, and the Sun having expelled the darkness of the Night, and dissipated the thickness of the Fog, we saw that our Vessel stuck upon a Bank near the shore of a great Island or Continent. The discovery of this Land turned our despair

14

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

into hopes, for although it was unknown to us, and we could not tell what good or bad fortune we should have in it: Yet any Land was then welcome to men who had during many days been so miserably tossed upon the water betwixt life and death, hopes and despair. About Noon the weather grew very clear and hot, the Sun overpowring the Mist and Fog, and the Wind abating much of his violence, so that the Sea did by degrees lose much of his rage and agitation. In the Afternoon about three a Clock it Ebbed from the shore, and left our Ship with less than five foot of water upon a kind of a muddy Sand where she stuck very fast. The place where she stuck was not above a Musket shot from a pretty high but accessible shore, whither we resolved to remove our selves and our goods whatever should come on’t, and in order to it our Long-boat was let down, and twelve of our stoutest men were sent ashore well armed to discover the Country, and to chuse a place near the Sea where we might encamp with some safety without going far from our Ship. As soon as they were landed they carefully viewed the Country from the top of a rising ground not far from the shore, but saw neither Houses, nor Inhabitants, nor any signs of either, the Country being but a Sandy barren Land, where grew nothing but bushes and little shrubs wild and savage. They could see neither River nor Brook in the parts they had discovered; and not having time to make a farther search that day, nor counting it prudence to venture any farther into so unknown a place, they came back to the Ship three hours after their landing. The next Morning we sent them ashore again with provisions, and order to send the Boat back again to fetch our People by degrees, and likewise our Provisions and Goods, which were all whole by Gods mercy without any the least damage. All these Orders were executed with great care and diligence, so that the day after our being cast upon the Bank we got all ashore with a good part of our Provisions and Goods most useful and necessary. The first who landed pitched the Camp on the side of a rising ground near the Sea over against our Vessel, which could cover us on the Land side from being seen by any body that should come towards the shore, and afforded us a convenient station for a Sentinel to discover a good way round about. Thither did we by degrees carry our goods, leaving in the Ship but ten or twelve men to keep her till we could tow her off upon high water, if it was possible, or dispose of her otherwise. One of the first things we did so soon as we were landed was to call a Council, to advise what order we should take for our mutual preservation. It was presently resolved that we should keep for the present upon the Land the same order and discipline we kept at Sea, till such times we should think fit to alter it; so after this resolution it was agreed, we should humble our selves before God Almighty, to give him most hearty

Part I (1675)

15

thanks for preserving our lives and goods in so special a manner, and to implore his divine assistance for the future in a place altogether unknown to us, and where we might fall into the hands of some barbarous people, or starve there for want of Provisions, if he in his mercy did not provide for us as he had done heretofore. After this Resolution and humiliation our Officers divided our People into three equal parts, whereof two were ordered incessantly to work about the Camp in drawing of a Trench to secure us from any sudden invasion, and the others were imployed in discovering the Country, and fetching in Wood and such kind of supplies. Those who were left aboard the Ship had orders to see what condition she was in, and what could be done with her. After an exact examination they found that her Keel was broke by the violent shock she gave against Sand, and that she stuck so fast in it, that it was impossible to tow her off if she were never so sound, so that they thought the best way was to take her in pieces, and build a Pinnace or two out of her ruines to send to Batavia with all speed and diligence. That Counsel was approved of, and the fittest men for that purpose were employed for the execution of it with all diligence. The parties that were sent to discover durst not venture far in the Plain for fear of some danger or ill accident, till such a time that the Camp was better fortified, and the Guns carried thither from the Ship. They brought in only Wood, and some kind of wild Berries, of which they found great quantities upon the bushes and shrubs of the place; some spreading along the shore found a very great plenty of Oysters, Muscles, and other Shell fish, which did not only refresh our People, but did also much save our Provisions, which upon examination we found could not hold out above two Months according to the ordinary allowance: The consideration whereof made us think of some way to husband it, which could be but by getting and saving. In the first place we used all diligence to get our Nets and Hooks ready, for we had found that the Sea thereabouts was very full of fish; we fed as much as we could upon the Berries of the Plain, and upon the Shell fish of the shore; and on the other side we shortned every ones allowance, and reduced it to eight ounces a day of the Ships Provisions. But our greatest want was sweet water, for although we had made a Well in the Trench that afforded as much of it as we could use, yet it was somewhat brackish and ungrateful by reason of the nearness of the Sea. Our adventurers made every day some new discovery, and having gone so far as almost Ten Miles about the Camp without finding any the least sign that the Country was inhabited grew every day bolder and bolder; They saw no living Creature in all this sandy Plain, but some Snakes, a kind of a Rat almost as big as a Rabbet, and some kind of Birds

16

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

like wild Pigeons, but somewhat bigger, who fed upon the Berries we have made mention of. They killed some of them with their Guns and brought them to the Camp, where after trial they were found to be very good meat, especially the Birds. These new discoveries made us a little remiss in our Fortifications, and we contented our selves by drawing a small Trench about our Camp, casting up the Earth inwardly, and thought it was enough in a place where we found no Inhabitants. We planted some Guns upon the most convenient places, and setting all thoughts of fear aside, dreaded nothing so much as hunger, and the injuries we might receive from the weather, which we were not yet acquainted with, for it had proved very temperate since our Landing upon that Coast, where we had been fourteen days before our Pinnace could be perfected. But about the seventeenth day she was ready to put to Sea with Provision for Eight men for six weeks time, which was as much as ever we could spare. Now there arose great strife amongst the Seamen about the sending of the Pinnace to Battavia, for few would venture on that Voyage, yet it was necessary that some should go. Whereupon it was agreed that a number of the best Seamen should be taken out of the whole Crue, and that they should cast Lots among themselves to determine the difference, which was done accordingly. The Lot fell upon the Master himself, upon a Seaman called Prince, and six more, whose names I have forgotten. They seeing it was the will of Fortune that they should go, submitted to it joyfully, and after having agreed upon a Signal we should give them, to find us out if ever they should come again with relief, and taking their leave of the Company, they went aboard the Pinnace and with a good Land Gale sailed to the Eastward till they were out of our sight. We made publick Prayers for their prosperity with many sighs and tears, trusting in Gods goodness and mercy. The same day we advised among our selves what kind of Government we should keep as most convenient for our present Condition, for some of our Officers being gone in the Pinnace our Sea Discipline was somewhat altered, neither did we judge it proper for the Land, upon better consideration. The business was debated Pro and Con, but after some contestation it was agreed that we should live in a Military Discipline under a Captain General. And other inferiour Officers, which together should compose a Soveraign Council of War with Authority to direct and order every thing absolutely. Now the question was whom we should chuse of all the Company. All were inclined to defer that honour to Van de Nuits, my Friend, as being the Person of most eminent quality among them, and who had greatest concern in the Ship, but he modestly

Part I (1675)

17

excused himself, alledging that he was young and unexperienced in Military Affairs, and therefore not fit for such Command, and that it was necessary in such an occasion to make choice of a Person of riper years and greater experience in that kind than himself was, who never was a Souldier. Then, observing some trouble and irresolution in their faces, he went on in this manner: Gentlemen, I give you many thanks for the esteem and good will you shew towards me, and wish heartily I were worthy of it, and capable of this Command; But since I cannot be your General my self, give me leave to recommend one to you who is very fit for that Imployment, having been a Commander in Europe in two several Armies and a great Traveller in most parts of the Christian World. You know his Person, and I dare say you do all love and esteem of him as I do, although he is not so well known to you as he is to me, who have had long experience of his probity and good Conduct. Then (poynting to me) he said, The Person I mean is Captain Siden, to whose Command and Authority I will readily submit if you please to chuse him for our General.

This unexpected Speech, and the looks of the Company, who all turned their eyes upon me, put me somewhat out of Countenance, but being soon come to my self, I answered, That his recommendation proceeded more out of affection and love than out of any knowledge of either merit or good Conduct in me; that I was a Foreigner among them, and born in a Country far from Holland, and that I thought there were many in the Company far more capable of that Command than I was, and therefore desired to be excused, chusing rather to obey my betters than to use any Authority over them. I had no sooner ended my Speech, but one Swart (a stout and active fellow, who never went out of my company in all the discoveries we had made in the Country) took me up somewhat briskly, and said: Sir, All these excuses will not serve your turn, and if Mr. Van de Nuits counsel and mine be taken you shall be our General whether you will or no; for besides what he hath worthily spoken of you, all the Company (and I particularly) know that since we were cast upon this Land you have shewed your self most active and industrious for the common good and preservation of all, and are therefore most fit to command us. We are Seamen and Traders, altogether ignorant of Military Discipline, which you alone can teach us here, since there is no body among us that understands it, and who is so well qualified as your self, upon which consideration I declare that you are the only fit person to command us, and that I will submit to no mans command but yours.

18

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

This blunt Fellows Speech, which he pronounced with a strong and loud voice, did so affect the minds of the Company, already disposed by Van de Nuits recommendation, that all with one voice cried out, Captain Siden must be our General. When I saw I could not avoid the taking of this Command, I made sign for silence, and spake to them in this manner:

Gentlemen, Since you force me to accept of this Command, I accept it with thanks to you all, and do heartily wish your choice may prove to your advantage and satisfaction. But that all things may be done in good order, and carried on vigorously I beg a few things of you, which if you please to grant me I will do my best endeavour to preserve you from all danger, and to keep you in that Civil Discipline and Society which may best conduce to the Publick Good. The first thing I beg, That every man here will take an Oath to obey mine and the Councils Authority without any repugnancy, upon pain of such punishments as we shall think fit to inflict upon them. The Second is, That I may have the priviledge of chusing the Principal Officers to be elected, and they to bear such Commands and Offices as I shall bestow upon them for the time. In the third place I beg, That in Council my single Vote may pass for three Votes. Lastly, That I or my Deputy may have a Negative Voice in all Publick deliberations.

All these Priviledges and Prerogatives were presently granted me, and I was saluted by all the Multitude in the quality of their General, and had a Tent larger than ordinary set up in the middle of the Camp for the first Badge of my Authority. I lay in it that night with Van de Nuits, and had his advice in several things, which were afterwards put in execution. The next day we called all our People together, and in their presence I made Van de Nuits Over-seer General of all the Goods and Provisions we had, or should hereafter have. Swart Captain of the Artillery, Arms, and Ammunitions of War. Maurice, an expert and active Seaman, Admiral of our Fleet, which was to consist of a Long-boat, a little Boat, and another Pinnace we were a making out of the pieces of our broken Ship. Morton, an English man, who had been a Serjeant in the Low Countries; I made Captain of the Eldest Company. De Haes, a sober and vigilant fellow, was made second Captain, one Van Sluis, third Captain, one de Bosch, fourth Captain, and one Brown, Major General.

Part I (1675)

19

I gave all these men leave to chuse their inferiour Officers with my approbation, which they did accordingly. I had two Servants with me, the one called Devese, who had been my Serjeant in Catalonia, a stout and understanding fellow, sober, and trusty, who had served me ever since I left the Wars, and followed my fortune every where, him I made my Lieutenant General; and the other, named Tursi, my Secretary. Our Officers being all chosen, we numbred our People, and found we were three hundred and seven Men, three Boys, and seventy four Women, all in good health; for although there were many of them sick when they first landed, they were all well again in less than a Weeks time, which was no small argument of the healthiness of the Country. I distributed all these into four parts, and gave Maurice six and twenty of the best Seamen, and the three boys, to man his Navy. Swart had thirty for his Artillery. I disposed two hundred men into four Companies, and Van de Nuits had all the rest to attend him, and take Orders of him in the Camp, or out of the Camp. We had two Trumpetters, which used to say Prayers in the Ship besides their Office of Trumpetting. I took one of them, and gave Van de Nuits the other, and they both were confirmed in both their imployments after the Dutch fashion. All our Affairs being so ordered and setled, in the Evening I called our Superiour Officers together, and told them, that before our Provisions were all spent we should go about by Sea and Land to discover the Country, and endeavour to get some fresh Provision, as likewise to discover some fitter place for a Camp than that we were in, where in a short time all things would grow scarce, and where we had not so much as good water. That my opinion was we should send several Parties of men well Armed to make new discoveries, and go farther into the Country than we had gone yet. They readily assented to my Proposals, and told me they were ready to obey my Orders. Whereupon I commanded Maurice to man his two Boats, and to send them all along the Coasts, as far as they could conveniently go, the one, on the right side of the Camp, and the other, on the left. I ordered Morton to take twenty men out of his Company, and to go all along the shore on the left hand. De Haes was commanded to take thirty out of his, and to go through the middle of the Country; and I my self drew forty men out of the two other Companies, and left my Lieutenant to command in the Camp in my absence. We all took three days Provision, and good store of Powder and Bullets, with Swords and half Pikes, and I commanded all my men to be ready early in the Morning, and to wait for further Orders, which they did accordingly. The next day, which was the twentieth since the first day

20

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

of our Landing, and from which we shall hereafter reckon as our principal Epoche, all my men were ready by break of day, and came to receive my Commands, which were the same I had given the night before, with this Addition only: That if they should meet with any thing considerable they should presently send advice thereof to the Camp. I likewise gave Orders to Morton to keep with the Boat as near as he could, and to come every night to the shore to joyn with the Boats-Crew before Sun setting, I my self intending to keep the same Method with Maurice. As soon as these Orders were given we went our several ways all full of hopes and alacrity. I marched my men in Rank and File, and I divided them into three Parties, the first that had the Van was composed of six Musketteers and a Corporal, the second of twelve and a Serjeant, I my self brought up the Rear. We marched within Musket shot distance one from another in that manner as near the shore as we could, that we might be within sight of our Boat. The Sea was very calm, and the Weather very still, though something hot. At noon the Boat came to us at a place where we stood near the shore, and there we took some rest and refreshment for the space of two hours. All the Country we came upon for ten or twelve Miles was much like to that about our Camp, and we did not so much as find a Brook or a Spring in all our way, all being dry Sands, and nothing growing upon them but Bushes and Thorns. After we had taken some rest, we marched five Miles beyond the place where we had halted, and there the ground began to grow more unequal and to rise here and there into small Hills. Two Miles farther we found a Brook of sweet water, which gave us no small occasion of joy, chiefly when we saw that a little farther up in the Country there was some small plots of green Trees upon the Banks of the Brook; there we halted again, and made Signs to our Boat to come to us, which they did immediately, coming into the Brook with the Tide; and finding it was a very good Harbour for such a Vessel as theirs, they rowed up a Mile into the Land till they came to a plot of green trees, where we pitched our Camp for that night. Maurice brought us some Fish he had taken in the Sea, and some Oysters, and other Shell fish. We strook fire, went to Supper an hour before night, and then to sleep, keeping good Guard about us, and hiding our fire with green Boughs we fixed in the ground round about it lest it should be seen at a distance. The next day early in the morning I sent three of my men back again to the Camp to give them notice of the Brook and the Trees we had found, and to tell them we intended to proceed farther. But before we removed from that place I sent five men up the Brook to discover more of the Country. They came back two hours after, and told us that the Country above was a little more Hilly than below, but dry and

Part I (1675)

21

barren, and like that which lay towards our Camp. Our Boat fell down towards the Sea after these men were come with this account, and had carried us over the Brook, which was deep and not fordable, unless we went two or three Miles higher. When we had got over we marched on along the shore still within sight of our Boat, and found that the Country grew more and more unequal. When we had gone five or six Miles further we came to a pretty high Hill, which was barren and without Trees. We got on the top of it, and from thence discovered a Wood of tall Trees four or five Miles beyond this Hill, which Trees stood upon a high ground that shot a good way into the Sea. At the sight of these green Trees we did much rejoyce, and resolved to go thither after we had taken a little refreshment. We marched on through a Sandy Plain that lay betwixt us and the Wood, and reached the foot of the high ground in less than two hours time, got up into the Wood, and found it did consist of very lofty Trees, not thick, and under which there was not much under-wood, so that it was easily pervious; there I kept my men very close to one another, and doubled the Van, that they might be the more able to resist if they should be set upon by any men or fierce Beast. As we went we cut down several Boughs, and strewed them upon the ground, whereby we might know the way we came in our return. In that manner we marched on in as direct a Line as we could till we came to the other side of the Wood, where we spied the Sea again, and saw Trees over the Water at six or seven Miles distance, which demonstrated to us that this water was a great Bay between two Capes. The place was very delightful to behold, and afforded a very fine prospect over the Bay, which made us wish we had been cast away nearer to it than we were. We had left our Boat on the other side of the Wood by reason of the great way she must go about before we could meet her again. I sent down ten of my men to the Water side, where they found a vast quantity of Oysters, and other Shel-fish, which was no small encouragement. As soon as they were come up I sent three men to Maurice, and bid him row as fast as he could towards the head of the Cape, where he should meet with a Party I intended to send immediately that way. I sent another Party towards the inner part of the Wood on the Land side to see if they could find any sweet water. Those who went towards the head of the Cape travelled almost two Miles before they found any, but at last they perceived a Declivity in the ground, which led them down into a kind of a Vale, very full of green and thick Trees, at the bottom of which they found a fine stream of sweet water, running into the Bay. In this pleasant place they stopped, and sent three of their Company to bring

22

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

me notice of it; they had not been come a quarter of an hour but the ten men, who were sent on the contrary side, came back again, and told us they had gone a great way in the Wood, which they thought grew wider and wider towards the Land; that they had found a Heard of Deer near a little Brook, whereof they had killed two, and shot at two more. They had cut these Deer into four pieces, and carried them upon their backs, which was no uncomfortable sight to us. We left the place where we stood, and marched towards the Vale above mentioned, having before dispatched five of our men towards the Camp, to give them notice of what had hapned us, and sent them part of our Venison for a token of the good Fortune we had met with. When we were come to the Vale, I liked it so well, that I resolved to encamp there that night, and to remove our old Camp thither, as soon as possibly we could. My men made presently a fire, and fell a roasting of their Venison; and I sent five of them to meet with the Party which were sent to Maurice; they marched but two Miles farther before they came to the head of the Cape, where they joyned with the other party, and there standing all together, upon the most eminent place they could find, looked for Maurice his coming. He as soon as he did receive my Orders, Rowed to the Rendezvous with all the diligence possible, and came to the place half an hour before Sun setting, where having pulled the Boat upon the ground, they all came to the new Camp before it was night. They found us very merry, some about the fire roasting of meat, and others lying upon Beds of dry leaves and dry Moss, which they had gathered good store of in a little time. We passed all the night in that place with a great deal of joy and quietness, and the morning being come I got up betimes, and bid Maurice and his Crew to prepare for the old Camp, whither I intended to return by Water with only two of my men besides the Boats Crew. I left one to Command the rest, and ordered him to keep in that place till he heard farther from me, promising to be with him again in less than three days, and that in the mean while they might supply their wants with Hunting, Fishing, and Shelling; so we went towards the Boat. We soon reached the place where she lay, put her to Sea, and Rowed to the old Camp the same day, a gentle breeze favouring our Voyage; we arrived about Sun setting, and were received by our People with general demonstrations of joy. They had heard of the new Camp, and all asked me if they should not remove thither? I answered, we would do that with all speed, it being the best place to pitch upon of all those we had seen. Morton and De Haes were come to the Camp two or three hours before my arrival, and came to give me an account of their Expeditions.

Part I (1675)

23

Morton told me, he had marched his men fifteen or sixteen Miles to the left side of the Camp through a Sandy and barren Country, where they had not found so much as a Spring or Brook of sweet Water; that at night they were gone to meet the Boat on the shore, according to my Orders, and lain there till the next morning, which being come, they departed early from that place, and proceeded to the Westward in the same manner as the day before, through a Rocky and Stony Country, without finding any water till Noon; at which time they came to a pretty broad River, where they stopt till their Boat came to them. That they had observed the Tide came into this River with great noise and Impetuosity, and that the water was salt where they came to it at first, as being not far from the Sea, which had obliged them to go up the River till they should find sweet water. That going up along the Banks they had at the last found a Stream of sweet water, which refreshed them much, and so proceeded in their discovery; they had been set upon by two great Crocodiles, which ran out of the River to devour them, but that they having spied them before they could come near, had fired at them, and the report of their Guns had so frighted those Monsters that they ran into the water with more haste than they were come out of it. That seeing the danger there was along that River by reason of these, or other fierce Creatures they might meet with, and having no Provision to go on any further in a Country where they could get nothing but some Shell-fish, and those only upon the Seashore, they thought they should proceed no farther, but come back again the same way they were gone, according to my Command of not staying longer without some special reason. De Haes told me he had marched twenty Miles the first day through a Sandy Plain, directly to the Southward. That at night they were come to a little Hill full of Heath, where they lay till next morning. That when the Sun began to shine they saw a very great Mist five or six Miles beyond their Post, which clearing up by degrees, as they marched towards it, they discovered a great Pool or Lake of standing water, which could be no less than ten Miles Diameter. That being come near this Lake they had seen abundance of Reeds and Rushes growing about the shore, and an infinite number of Water-Fowl, that flew from place to place, and made a very great noise in their flight. That they had gone a good way about this Lake before they could come to touch the water by reason of the Marshy and Muddy ground about it, where they could not march without danger of sinking, till they came to a Sandy place near a Hill, somewhat higher than that they lay upon the night before. That having got to the top of it, from whence they had a very large prospect round about, they could discover nothing

24

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

but a large Heath, and at great distance towards the South, a long Row of very high Mountains which stood like a Wall, and reached from East to West as far as they could see. That after this discovery, they being afraid of wanting Victuals, were returned to the Camp on the third day according to my Command. I found by these relations that I had had far better luck than these two Captains, and we were all the more encouraged to go to the new Camp on the Eastward; that we saw it had such conveniences as we could not find any where else, and that all our hopes lay on that side. The next morning I called a Council, where I propounded our removal to the green Vale. It was embraced presently, and ordered that we should transport our People and Goods thither by degrees, beginning with those which were most necessary and easie to carry. The New Pinnace we were making was almost finished, and would be ready in four or five days more, and fit to transport our Guns, Casks, and other Lumber. In the mean while we used both our Boats to remove our Provisions, and sent many of our People by Land, with such Axes, Nails, Spades, and other Implements of that kind as we had there. The Major went with the first Party, my Lieutenant with the second; and when I saw that most of our People and Goods were removed to the new Camp, and that the Pinnace was ready, I sent her loaded with diverse things; and travelled thither my self by Land. I omitted to tell you that Maurice had doubled the Cape in his second Voyage without any danger by reason of the calmness of the Sea, and the stilness of the weather, which was clear and serene, without any Rain or great Wind above six weeks after our Landing, and so temperate that we felt neither heat nor cold in the first Month except about noon, at which time the Sun was something hot; grew hotter every day as it drew nearer to us, and brought the Spring about August: For in those Countries it begins then, contrary to our Parts, where the Summer ends at that time. Maurice told me, that at the head of the Cape he had found many small rocky Islands, which lay together very thick as far as a great one that lay at the very mouth of the Bay, and defended it from the fury of the Waves; he was of opinion that it would prove an excellent Harbour for Ships, if the passage into it was not too difficult, or too shallow for great Vessels by reason of the many Rocks that lay between the Cape and the great Island which divided and sheltered the Bay from the main Ocean. Well Maurice, said I to him, when we have removed all our Goods and People, and they are settled in the new Camp, we shall have time enough to discover those Islands, and I will leave the discovery of them to your care and industry.

Part I (1675)

25

In less than twelve days after the first discovery of the Vale we had transported all our People and Goods from the old Camp to the new, which in my absence Van de Nuits and other Officers named Sidenberge. That name obtained so in two or three days time that it was impossible afterwards to change it. Our men, partly by my order, or of their own accords, made several good Huts along the Brook side upon a piece of Ground almost a Mile long, which abutted to the Bay on the East side of the Cape. Wood we had plenty enough upon the place, and our fishermen took so much Fish in the Bay that we knew not what to do with it for want of salt to season or smoak it. But Maurice quickly supplied us with that, for being gone upon some of those Rocks which lay at the mouth of the Bay, he found there as much of it as would serve the whole Company twenty years if we should be so long in that place. That Salt was naturally made by the water of the Sea, which in great storms being flung upon those Rocks, filled some hollow places in them, where the heat of the Sun afterwards turn it into Salt. There were every day great Parties sent into the Woods to discover and hunt the Deer, of which many Herds were found up and down, and many of them killed by our men. We saw every day multitudes of Water-fowl fly over the Bay, which made us judge that they had some particular haunt there. Maurice with his new Pinnace and his Longboat ventured every day further and further into the Bay, and in the Islands, and made several good discoveries. He found a place near the great Island where grew abundance of Reeds and Rushes, and thither it was that an infinite number of Sea-fowl of all sorts did repair. He found another place where there came many green Turtles to lay their Eggs upon the sand, from whence we might draw the greatest part of our subsistance. In fine, we found so many things to shift withal that we were certain never to want Victuals if we should live there a thousand years. The greatest want we were sensible of was that of Powder, for though we had saved a good quantity of it, yet that was a thing that would be consumed every day, and that we did not know how to get again when our stock was spent. We foresaw likewise that our Cloaths, Hooks, and Vessels would in a short time be worn out if our friends, that were gone in the Pinnace for Batavia, should be lost, and no relief sent us. But we had already so many experiments of Gods mercy towards us, that we hoped he would not forsake us. The Spring came on apace, and we laid up every day new Victuals, by the means of which we saved the Ships Provision as much as we could, and chiefly some Casks of Pease, and other kind of Pulse we had brought from Europe. It came in my head to sow some of these in the ground, and having told some of my Officers of my design they all readily agreed to it. In order to it, we felled a great many Trees above and below the

26

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Camp, and having cleared the ground of all bushes and underwood, which we burned upon the place, we made several furrows in the ground, and sowed our Pease in them, covered them carefully with the earth we had taken up, recommending our endeavours to him that gives the increase. Some of our Huntsmen venturing far in the Wood killed abundance of Game, and not being able to carry it all with them, they hanged two Deer upon an old and thick Tree with an intent to fetch them home the next day. But when seven of them came to the place the day following, they saw upon the Tree a great Tiger gnawing on the dead Deer before that terrible Creature perceived our men, which I suppose was occasioned through his hunger, which made him so eager about his meat that he minded nothing else. Our People were much surprised at the sight, and stood still behind some Trees, and two of them, having cocked their Guns well charged with Bullets, they aimed, and shot at him both at one time, and fetched him down the Tree. The Tiger made a hideous Cry when he fell, but being shot in two places through the body he died immediately; they stripped him of his spotted skin, and taking down the dead Deer brought them in triumph into the Camp. I was glad of their success, but yet new fears came upon me upon that subject; for I judged, that since they had found this mighty Creature in the Forrest, there might be a great many more in it, which at some time or other might come to our Camp, and fall upon our People unawares. I suggested this to the Council, and it was resolved, That without any delay we should make a strong Pallizado9 about our Hutts. We fell to work the next morning, and in less than ten days after we had empaled our Camp on all sides, so as to be secure from any sudden invasion of Men or Beasts. Our Huntsmen also became a little more cautious than before, and did not dare to straggle in the Woods least they should meet any of those dreadful Creatures. It was now seven weeks since we were cast away, and hitherto we had had no strife nor quarrel among us so long as we lay in fear and danger: But as soon as we thought our selves secure from men, beasts, thirst, and hunger, when fed plentifully upon fresh meat and Fish, and we did not labour so much as before, then our People began to be wanton. We had a great many Women among us, of which I hitherto forebore to speak, because I saw no great occasion for it. But now that they began to act their part, and stir up trouble among us, I must a little speak of them. —————— 9. [Italian for “palisade.”]

Part I (1675)

27

Some of them were poor women, who compelled by poverty and their hopes of Preferment, were perswaded to go to the Indies. Some had their Husbands there, or other Relations, but most of them were Whores taken out of Bawdy houses, or spirited away by Fellows, who sold them to the Master for a little money, notwithstanding the punishment ordained by the Laws against such practices. These Whores seeing themselves at rest, and the men idle for the most part, began to smile at them, and by amorous speeches to draw some of them to themselves; they found many so well disposed that they needed no spur to be put on, so they would sometimes come together in the night, and enjoy one another in the best manner they could. But as we lay altogether in a little Camp, and that there was a Guard kept in the night, they could not meet so secretly but some body or other would discover them and become a sharer in the prey. These practices did often occasion quarrels and jealousies, which at last came to blows, but chiefly upon this particular occasion. Two young Fellows lay both with one woman, and did not know one of the other; once she appointed a meeting to one of them in the night, and the other coming to her awhile after, and requesting the like favour that very night, she denied him, and put him off upon frivolous pretences. The Fellow being subtil, and of a jealous disposition, suspected something of the truth, and resolved so narrowly to watch her that he would find the true reason of her denial; he did it accordingly, and caught the Wench with her other Gallant in the fact, the sight whereof did so move his anger, that he drew his Sword and stuck them both in the ground, and then slunk away without being seen. The unfortunate Couple cried out, and were found in that posture, first, by the next Sentinel, and then by the whole Guard, who having taken the Sword out of their bodies, and out of the ground, into which it was run above a foot (such was the strength and rage of this jealous Lover) carried them to the Chirurgeon [Surgeon], who presently dressed their wounds, then came to me to give me an account of the business. The next day I assembled the Council to advise what should be done about this horrid fact, but we knew not whom to accuse. We examined every body that could be suspected; we asked the wounded man, Whether he had any enemies which he could himself suspect? He answered, That as he had neither wronged nor disobliged any body of the Company, so he could not fasten any suspition upon any man. We examined the Wench, but she would accuse no body, although she suspected, and it may be knew the Author of the Crime; but knowing that it was a just indignation and excess of Love that had moved her other

28

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Lover to take that revenge, she was so generous as not to accuse or mention him in the least. This put us into a great perplexity, and we did not know by what ways or means we should find out the Criminal, when at last it came into our thoughts to draw out our men into the Fields, and see which of them wanted his Sword, for no body would own that which had been found in the unhappy Couples bodies. When they were all drawn up, we called every one of them according to the order of the List, and found out the Fellow by the want of his Sword. He was immediately apprehended, and brought to his trial. We asked him, What was the reason he was come into the field without his Sword? To which he answered boldly, He came without because he had none. Had you never any in this Camp, said I to him? Yes Sir, I had one Yesterday. What have you done with it? I lent it last night to one who was to go to Sea this morning (for it was true, that a Party of Maurice his men were gone early in the morning to some of the Islands.) Then we asked him, What the mans name was he lent his Sword to? I do not know his name, said he, although I lent him my Sword and did sometimes converse with him, as I do indifferently with any one in this Camp, where I know every one by his face, although I am ignorant of the names of most men in the Company, and I do think that it is the case of every man here as well as mine. Then I asked him, Whether he was a Seaman or a Passenger he lent his Sword to? He was a Seaman, and told me, he had lost his own Sword when he borrowed mine; and because he would not have it known that he had lost his Weapon, he intreated me to let him have mine upon his urgent occasion. Then did we send for the Sword with which the fact had been committed, and asked him, Whether he knew that Sword? He readily answered, He might very well know it, since he had wore it ever since I trained up all the men of the Camp into a Military Discipline, whereof himself was one. Sir, saith he, This is my Sword, and the very same I lent last night to him that borrowed it of me. How came this sword to be found in the bodies of the two wounded persons if your hands did not thrust it through them? And please you General, it doth not follow that I thrust it into their bodies because it is my Sword, he that had it of me might use it to commit that cruelty instead of using his own, thereby to shake off all suspition from himself, and lay the guilt on me. I confess that there are many apparent Arguments against my Innocency, but I am sure there is no evident proof, and I hope you will never find any. After this strict examination, finding we could not convince this Fellow till Maurices Crew were come from Sea, we deferred his trial until another time.

Part I (1675)

29

But it fell out by fortune that the men of the Boat being upon one of the Sandy Islands where they turn Tortoises, and some of them having a mind to swim, went into the Sea to wash and cool themselves in that Element; and as some were more forward than others, a great Shark snapped the forwardest of the Company, who being warned by that dreadful example, got out of the water with all the hast possible. The Story of this fatal accident, as likewise the description of the person who had been devoured, came to the knowledge of the Prisoner we had examined, before we could bring him to a second trial. When he was tried again, he cunningly catching hold on the opportunity, said confidently, That he had lent his Sword to him who was devoured, of whose Face and Person he made a very exact description in our presence. So that we could not do any good, nor bring any evident proof against him. We all admired his confidence and subtilty, and hearing that the wounded persons were like to be well again, we were contented to keep him in bonds till they were both out of danger. The woman was soonest well, and here you may admire the humour of some of that Sex. As soon as she was cured she came to the young man who had wounded her, and expressed the greatest love to him that can be imagined, under pretence that she had been the cause of all his trouble. But I think the true reason was, that she looked upon this Fellow as a man well in his body, having never been wounded, and who consequently was far more vigorous than her other Gallant, who had lately received a large wound through the body. This accident occasioned new Laws, and new Customs. We considered, that as long as we had Women among us they would be the occasion of trouble and mischief if we did not betimes take some good course, and allow our men the liberty of using them sometimes in an orderly manner. But we had but seventy four women, and above three hundred men, and therefore could not give every man a Wife. We consulted long upon a Method, and at last pitched upon this, We allowed the principal Officers each of them one woman wholly for himself, with the priviledge of chusing according to his rank. The rest we distributed into several divisions, and ordered it so, that every man, who was not past fifty years of Age, might have his woman-bedfellow every fifth night; we laid aside the old men, and the four Wives that were going to their Husbands in Batavia, and who professed to be very chaste and honest. These kept together, and lived a while very reserved, but when they saw that all the other women lay freely every night with a man without incurring any blame, and that the relief we expected from Batavia was long a coming, they began to grow melancholy, and to repent that they had chosen chastity for their share, by which means they were deprived alone of those delights and pleasures which they saw all the other women take so

30

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

freely and so plentifully. They shewed their discontented minds by a hundred actions, and they nor we were never quiet till we had distributed them among the rest, and then they were satisfied. Here we had a very great proof that multiplicity of men to one woman is no friend to Generation, for few of these women, who were common to five men, proved with Child; and on the contrary, all those who lay but with one man presently got a great belly. I think that is the natural reason why multiplicity of Husbands was never allowed in any Nation, although Poligamy of Wives and Concubines was ever used, and is still practised in most Countries. Now the time was come that we were to set up the Signal we agreed upon with the eight men of the first Pinnace sent to Batavia. I therefore commanded our men to chuse in the Forrest a tall and straight tree to set it up at the head of the Cape with a white Sail the largest we had, which was done accordingly. I commanded also a great fire to be made every night at the same place, that the Ships sent to our relief might see it in the dark, and take their aim by that. We were in good hopes that the Pinnace was got to Batavia without any great difficulty, considering the good weather we had had, and that the General would send us relief with all the diligence possible. But God it seems had ordered it otherwise, for the weather, which for almost two months had been fair, began to grow rainy, and stormy, so that we saw almost every day great tempests in the Ocean, although our Bay was not much agitated by them by reason of the high ground, and the many little Islands that sheltered it from the violence of Winds and Waves. It rained almost every day for a fortnight together, but the Sun shined hot every day also, so that we had a mixture of Rain, Wind, and Sunshine at the same time. It was well that we had been provident in powdring and smoaking of meat and fish, which we laid up in great store in the empty Casks we had brought from our Ships, for if we had not done so, we might have wanted Victuals while this bad weather lasted, which was above a fortnight. It grew a little better after that space of time, but not so good but we had Winds, Rains, and Storms at Sea; then sudden calms, at the least once or twice a week, which made us despair of ever hearing from Batavia, and made us resolve to provide for our selves there, without depending upon any relief from thence. The weather grew very hot, and since the rain fell all things were visibly grown in the fields, and our Pease did thrive the best that ever I saw, so we were like to have a great Crop of them, which encouraged us to break more ground, and to sow a great many more. There was an infinite of Fish and Fowl in the Bay, and upon a calm day we could take as many of them as we pleased; but our Nets began to wear out, and we

Part I (1675)

31

were forced to tear some of our Cables to make new Nets of them, which we made a shift with for a great while, necessity being the mother of Arts. Our Huntsmen had made such a noise in the Wood near the Camp, and so chased the Dear, that they were quite gone from that part, and none could be seen ten miles about us. That made them resolve to take another course, and to go by water to the other side of the Bay or to the bottom of it, where we saw Wood all round. Maurice was first ordered to make discoveries on the other side; which he did, and found there were great Woods there, and a little River that ran into the Bay. He rowed four or five miles up that River and saw nothing but Trees, and some marshy ground along the bank of it, yet we supposed there would be many Deer found on that side if we should put it to a trial. In order to which fifty of our men having taken Victuals and Ammunition for a Week, went to the Banks of that River in the Pinnace, and the Long-boat, and having Landed there, made themselves Huts, keeping the Long-boat with them to use it according to their occasion, and sending the Pinnace back again. A while after being gone into the Forrest to seek for Deer, they found great Herds of them, whereof they made a great slaughter; they likewise found a kind of Beast like a Swine, but bigger, and slower in his pace, and using to go a rooting in the Woods in great numbers; they killed first one of them, which upon examination proved far better meat than any of our European Pork. Maurice being desirous to discover the great Island that lay at the mouth of the Bay, landed there with twenty men; the first part of it that lay inwardly he found to be but Stony and Rocky places, but when they were gone a little beyond, they found it to be a pretty big Island, consisting for the most part of moorish ground, which being almost dreined by the heat of the Summer was turned into very good Pasture ground; they found hundreds of Deer feeding upon it, and abundance of Fowl of all kind, so tame that they would let a man come within a yard or two of them, they marched to the Eastward of the place, and found that this Land was divided from the continent by a narrow Channel only; it was found afterward that in the Spring time the Deer swam from the Continent to the Island, which Island was not above twelve miles Diameter. These new discoveries being so happy filled our hearts with joy, and a certain assurance we should not want for Victuals if we were ten times as many, and made us bold to venture farther. Maurice had observed that the Bay ran a great way in length towards the Southeast, and supposed there was some great River that flowed from that side of the Country into the Sea, which was not unlikely. He therefore, having obtained leave to take a Weeks Provision,

32

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

and a sufficient number of men, sailed that way with a resolution to go as far as he could with his Pinnace, and we having prayed for his good success minded our other concerns, in hopes of his happy return. By this time our Pease were almost ripe, and nine or ten days after we had a most prodigious Crop of them, every Peck yielding above a hundred, which is almost incredible; and we expected another Crop that promised no less than this if it should come to perfection. We dried them carefully, and laid them up in store for the Winter, and so we did with every thing that would keep, using for the present such as could not be preserved. It was above a quarter of a year since we were setled at Sidenberg, and having heard nothing from Batavia, we concluded our Pinnace was perished, and gave it over for lost; but our greatest trouble was, that above ten days were past since Maurice was gone and we heard no tidings of him. This cast a general sorrow upon our hearts, and in that great affliction we did not know what Counsel to take, we durst not send the Long-boat in search of him for fear she should be lost, knowing that without our Vessels we could hardly be able to subsist. Our Huntsmen had made a kind of a new Plantation on the other side of the Bay for conveniency of hunting, and without our Boats we could keep no commerce with them. All these reflections, and the fear of worse accidents increased our affliction throughout all the Camp, where we lay lamenting the loss of our Pinnaces above a fortnight before we could hear any thing of either of them. Maurice did not come, and we did not know what to think of him and his Vessel, knowing there had been no great storms since she was gone, and that being in so calm a Sea she could not have perished by Tempests. We did not think neither that she was fallen into the hands of Enemies or Pyrates, having reason to believe from our former experience that there were no men in those parts. Wavering so betwixt hope and fears, upon a calm day we saw Maurices Pinnace and two Vessels more coming along with him towards us. While we were looking upon them, wondring how he came by these two Vessels, and what they might be, We spied ten Sails more at good distance coming after them. This unexpected Fleet put our Camp into a great apprehension. We ran all to our Arms, prepared our Cannons for our defence, and sent Scouts towards the shore to observe the motions of this Fleet. In the mean while they drew near to the shore, and at Musket shot they all cast Anchor in good order; but Maurices Pinnace came very near, so that we could see him and his men from the shore, and hear him plainly speak to us. He bid us not be afraid, and desired us to send the Boat with three men only to fetch him ashore; after some contestation we sent the Boat, which being come aboard him he leapt into it with one

Part I (1675)

33

of his men, and took down with him a tall and grave Personage in a black Gown, a Hat on his head, and a white Flag in his hand, and so came ashore to us. I, with some of my Officers, stood at some distance, but when we saw this man landed we went to meet him. Maurice told us in few words, That he was sent from the Governour of a City situate about sixty miles above the Bay, where we had received all the kindness and civility imaginable, and desired us withal to express all manner of respect to him. Upon that advice we did bow to him in very humble and submissive manner, which he received with a great deal of gravity and mildness, and stretching his right hand towards Heaven, said in very good Dutch. The Eternal God of the World bless you, the Sun his great Minister, and our glorious King, shine kindly upon you, and this our Land be fortunate to you.

After this, Maurice having told him that I was the General, he gave me his hand, which I humbly kist, and he took me about the neck and kissed me in the middle of the forehead, and then desired to march to our Camp, where we received him in the best manner we could. He looked upon our Huts and Pallizadoes, and nodded his head in sign that he liked it very well, then spake thus to me: Sir, I have heard the History of your disaster, and knowing of your merits and Gallantry, I have made no difficulty of putting my Person into your hands; but that I may not keep you any longer from the Relation your Officer Maurice will make unto you of what hath hapned unto him since his departure from hence; I desire to rest a little in your Hut while you satisfie your curiosity, and hear those thing which will be necessary for you to be acquainted with, that I hope will set your minds at rest.

We made no answer, but making a low reverence left him in the Hut, and went to Maurice, who expected our coming in Van de Nuits Hut. We were no sooner with him but we began to ask him questions concerning his journey; and he having begged our leave and favourable audience spake to us in this manner:

MAURICES SPEECH “Noble General, and worthy Officers, with your leave, and even with your Command, I departed from this place about three Weeks ago, with a design to make further discoveries in the Bay. The first day I sailed to

34

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

the Southeast of it above twenty miles and saw nothing on either side but great Woods as you see here, distant one from another five or six miles at the least. At night we cast Anchor at a mile distance from the right side of the river; and lay there till next morning. From thence with Wind and Tide we sailed up further to the Southeast about five Miles more, and there we found the Banks on each side of the River came near one to another, within two miles distance. We sailed up still, though with a little more difficulty, till we came into a broad place, where the water spreads it self into a great Lake, from the middle of which we could hardly see the shore on either side; we only saw ten or twelve small Islands dispersed up and down the Lake, and most of them shaded with tall green trees, very delightful to the Eyes. By this time the Wind was somewhat altered, and the Lake was so calm that we could hardly perceive any motion in it; but as the place was wide we rid to and fro as the Wind did serve, not much caring which side of the Lake we should go first to, yet when the Wind would serve we endeavoured as much as we could to make to the Southeast. About Evening we had a fine breeze, which drove us to the Southeast according to our wishes, and that night we cast Anchor betwixt two or three of those small Islands, not above two or three miles distant one from the other, with an intent to visit them the day following. We lay at Anchor all night, and took our rest without any care or fear, not thinking there had been any Inhabitants in those places, but we found were much deceived, for as soon as it was broad light we saw about us ten or twelve Vessels, which did so encompass us about, that we could go no way but we must fall among them. This struck a great terrour upon us, and we thought verily we should all be killed or taken, for we had but one of these ways to chuse, to fight, or to surrender our selves, and lie at the mercy of unknown men, who might use any cruelty upon us. This last consideration prevailed, and made us all resolve to fight it out to the last man; so we all ran to our Arms, prepared our Guns, and were very well resolved to defend our lives, for we could not run away, the weather being very still, and the men we saw about us having several Shallops well manned with Rowers, who rowed towards us with great swiftness. When they were come within Musket shot of us they all stopped, save a small Vessel, wherein we saw a man with a white Flag in his hand coming on to us, and making as many signs in token of Amity. We stood to our Arms, and let that Vessel come on to us, knowing it was not strong enough alone to attempt any thing against our Pinnace. When they were come within fifteen or twenty yards of us the man who had the white Flag in his hand, making a low reverence, spake to us in Spanish, and bad us not be afraid, for no harm was intended against us. One of my men, who could speak that Language, explained what he said, and asked

Part I (1675)

35

him why they came so about us? He answered, It was the custom of the place, that we should come to no harm, and desired to know what Countrimen we were. He told him we were Hollanders. Then he replied in Dutch, That we were welcome into the Country; and desired to be admitted into our Pinnace himself and another man of his Company only, proffering to remain with us as Hostages till matters were better understood. We readily yielded unto his desire, so they came aboard us. He was a very lusty man, with a manly look, wearing a red Gown down to the middle of his Legs, with a Cap of the same colour, and a Shash about his waste, much after the Garb we paint Cardinals in. The other man was in the like habit, and a lusty man too, both about forty years of Age. When he was come up to us he asked who was the Commander of the Pinnace; and having been told I was the Person, he came to me in a kind and civil manner embraced me, and bid us all welcom into the Country. Then he asked how we came into those parts in so small a Vessel. I answered, That we came in a bigger, but that she was cast away upon the Coasts, and that out of her Ruines we had made this Pinnace. Then he asked me if we were all that were saved? I told him it was so, and that the rest of our Company were drowned (for I did not think it fit to speak of our People in the Camp until we were better acquainted with these men, and saw what usage we should have amongst them.) He altering his Countenance, as if he had been sorry for our loss, told us he took great part in our affliction. Then did he ask me several questions concerning our Voyage, our Shipwrack, and the present state of Europe. To which I returned such answers as I thought convenient. He seemed to be well pleased with my answers, and told us we were come into a Country where we should find more kindness and civility than we could in our own, and where we should want none of those things that are capable to make moderate men happy. We returned him humble thanks, and desired to know what the name of the Country was? He told us it was called in their Language Sporumbè, the Inhabitants Sporui, that it belonged to a greater and happier Country beyond the Hills, called Sevarambè, and the people Sevarambi, who lived in a great City called Sevarindè. That we were not above fourteen Miles from another City (but much less than the first) called Sporunde where he intended to carry us. Then perceiving some alteration in our faces caused by his last words, he proceeded in this manner: “Gentlemen, I told you at first you should not be afraid, for no harm will be done you I assure you, unless you will draw it upon your selves through your distrust and stubbornness. Your best way is to rely upon Gods Providence, and the assurances I give you, that no wrong shall be done to the least of you either in his person or his goods. You are

36

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

but a small number of men in a little Pinnace, in a strange Country, destitute of all things, and no way able to defend your selves against our Vessels which are many against one, and full of men, who no less understand how to fight than you, as you will find if you put it to a trial. They are no Barbarians as you may imagine, but a very good charitable and civil people. So consider what is best for you to do. As soon as he had spoken those words, he and his Companion went to one end of the Pinnace as it were to give us an opportunity to consult among our selves, which we did, and presently resolved to follow his directions, and to trust to Providence. He, perceiving we intended to go to him, came himself to us, and asked what course we were resolved to take? We intend to obey your Commands in every thing, Sir, and think our selves happy to be under your protection; We are poor distressed men, fitter Objects for pity than for anger, and we hope to find Mercy and help at your hands. You will find it in a great measure, and see in these Countries such wonders as are not to be seen in any other part the World. Then he made sign to his Shallop to come near, which they did immediately. They brought us Bread, Wine, dry Dates, Raisins, Figs, and several sorts of Nuts, of which we made an excellent Feast, and drank merrily of the delicate Wines that were given us. After this welcome Meal, the man told me his name was Carshidà, his Companion’s Benoscar, and desired to know mine. I told him my name was Maurice, and asked him withal how he came to speak Dutch and Spanish in so remote a Country. I will satisfie you herein another time Maurice, (said he) in the mean while we must give order for our going to Sporundè, that we may be there today before night. “Then did he speak to his men in his own Language, and they made sign to another Vessel that stood near to come to us, they presently came, and having tied a rope to our Pinnace, towed her up the Lake to the Southeast of it, the other Vessel rowing after us; in that manner we left the little Island and the Fleet (which did not stir from their Station so long as we were in sight of them) and rowed till two in the afternoon through that great Lake of salt water, which looks more like Sea than like a Lake. About that time we had a gentle breeze, which carried us in less than two hours clear out of the Lake into a River, where we found sweet water, and saw a fine Champain Country on each side of it. We had not sailed two miles in this River but we came to a pretty narrow place, where the water is kept in by two great and thick Walls, and saw all along near these Walls great Buildings of Brick and Stone mixed together, and built after the manner of a Castle in a perfect Quadrangle. We went two miles further up along these Walls and Buildings before we came to the City of Sporundè, which stands in the confluence of two great Rivers, in a

Part I (1675)

37

fine delicate Plain, diversified with Corn-fields, Meadows, Orchards, Gardens, and Groves, which make it very delightful to the eye; the small Vessel, which at first came after us, was gone up a good while before we came to the Town, to give them warning of our coming. We rowed to a great and stately Key, where stood a great multitude of People, who came out see us Land. Carshidà went on shore first, where he was received by some grave men in black, with whom having discoursed a while, he turned himself towards us, and made signs to Benoscar to bring us ashore. He in a few words told us what we were to do, and bid to follow him. We went up the Stairs of the Key, (which was pretty high) and being come to the place where the grave men stood, we inclined our selves down to the ground three several times. The men bowed a little to us, and the chiefest of them taking me in his Arms, very kindly embraced me, kissed me in the forehead, and bade us all welcom to Sporundè. From that place they carried us through a stately Gate, and a noble Street as streight as a Line, to a great square building after the manner abovesaid. We went into it through a large gate that stood in the middle of the Building, and found the inner part of it to be like Cloysters with large Galleries on all sides, and a large Green in the middle. From thence we were brought into a great Hall, where stood several Tables and Seats. There the grave men in black stood round me, and asked me several questions, much like unto those Carshidà had asked me at the first, to which I answered in the same manner. A while after they carried us to another Hall next unto that, where we found several Tables full of meat, much after our European fashion. Then Sermodas (for that is the name of the grave man who is now in the Generals Hut) asked me whether we had any stomach to our Supper. To whom I made answer, That it was so long since we had seen such a Supper that I did not think any of us would want a stomach to eat it. He smiled, and taking me by the hand brought me to the chiefest Table, and made me sit next to him; then all the other grave men sate with us, and Carshidà with Benoscar took all my men to another Table. We had a very noble Supper, after which we were carried up into a great Room, where we saw several beds upon Iron Bedsteads. There my men were ordered to lye two and two, and I was carried to a Room by my self, where Sermodas and his company wished me good night, and so went away. A while after Carshidà came in and told me, that I and my men must prepare to appear the next day before Albicormas, Governour of Sporundè, and said he would give us directions how to behave our selves, and so he bid me good night. “The next day about six of the clock in the morning we heard a great Bell ring, and an hour after Carshidà and Benoscar came into my Chamber, and asked me how I had taken my rest, and if I wanted any

38

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

thing? I would have risen presently, but he told me I must not, till such time as I had new Cloaths to put on, which would be brought immediately. Upon that Benoscar went out, and came a while after with some attendance, who brought new Cloaths, both Linnen and Woollen, made after the manner of the Country. Then came in others with a Tub, which they filled with warm water, and then Carshidà told me it was to wash my body in before I put on my new Cloaths, and so went out with all the Company, leaving only a Servant to wait upon me. According to his directions I washed, and then put on a fine Cotton Shirt and Drawers, with Stockings of the same. I had also a new black Hat, new Shooes, a Gown of several colours, and a black Shash to put about my middle. As soon as I was ready, the Servant, taking my old Cloaths with him, went out, and then came in again Carshidà and his company, who told me that I and all my men were to attend Albicormas and his Council, and gave me directions how to behave my self. We went down into the Yard, where I found all my men in new Apparel, much like unto mine, but not altogether so good, and wearing Caps on their heads instead of Hats. Benoscar was with them, and was giving them directions how to behave themselves before the Council. We stood there a while looking one upon another, till Sermodas and his company came in. He very kindly asked us all how we did, and then directing his speech to me, he asked me whether I was ready to wait upon the Council? I answered we were all ready to obey his Commands; which said, he took me by the hand, and made me march on his left side into the Street. Carshidà put himself at the head of my men, which were disposed two and two, and marched in Rank and File like Souldiers, Benoscar bringing up the Rear. “In that order we marched through some Streets till we came to a great place in the middle of the City, and in the Center of this place stood a large and magnificent Palace, of a square Figure, and built with white Freestone, and black Marble, all so clean, and so well polished, that we thought it was new, though we heard afterwards it had been built a good while. In the middle stood a great and stately Gate, adorned with several brazen Statues, and on each side thereof two long Files of Musquetteers, all in blew Gowns. We marched through them into the first Court, where we found another Lane of men in red Gowns, with Halberts in their hands. As soon as we were come in, we heard a great sound of many Trumpets, and several other Instruments of War, very sweet and pleasant, which sounded all the time we stood in that Yard, for a quarter of an hour. From thence we proceeded into the next Court, all built with well polished black Marble, with Nitches round about, and delicate Statues in them. In the middle of the Yard stood about a hundred men in black, most of them of riper years than those we had seen in

Part I (1675)

39

the other Courts. We stood a little in that place, till two grave men (such as stood in the Court, with only this difference, that they wore a piece of Gold coloured Silk hanging loose upon their left shoulder) came down and bid Sermodas bring us all up. We went up in the same order as we came, upon a stately Stair-case, gilt and painted very richly, to a great Hall, gilt and painted in the same manner, and there we stood a while. From that they brought us into another Hall, richer than the first, and then into a third, far beyond either of them. At the end of this Hall we saw a pretty high Throne, and a little lower long Seats on each side of it. Upon the Throne sate a grave Majestick Personage, and upon the other Seats several venerable men on his right and left. He that sate uppermost in the midst of them wore a Purple Gown, and the others were habited like the two men who led us into the place, who were Members of the Council. We were told that he in the Purple Gown was Albicormas, and the others the chiefest Officers the City, who, together with him, govern the whole Country of Sporumbè. At our first coming into the Hall we made an inclination of our bodies, then being come to the middle of it we bowed a little more, but when we came to a Balister or Rail near to the Throne, we bowed down to the very ground, according to the directions given us before. Then stood up all the Counsellors and made a small inclination of their bodies, but Albicormas nodded only with his head. Then did Sermodas take me by the hand, and brought me as near the Rail as we could go, and bowing down very profoundly spake to Albicormas, and gave him partly an account of us in his Language, as we imagined, and as we were told afterwards. Methoughts their Speech sounded much like the Greek or Latine, as I have sometimes heard it spoken in Holland, and ran very smooth and Majestical. When Sermodas had spoken a while, Carshidà was sent for, who gave the Council a full relation of our Affairs, and of the time and manner we came into the Lake, by them called Sporascumpso, how we were seen and taken in it, which was in this manner, as we understood afterwards. “The day upon which we came into the Lake was a solemn day in those parts, so that all the Inhabitants of the Islands were celebrating the same, and intent upon their Exercises and Pastimes when we sailed into it, and that was the reason why we saw no Vessels in it at first, although there are several fishing there upon other days. But although we saw no body, yet our Pinnace was soon spied from the Islands, so that several Vessels were sent out in the night to catch us in the morning, and secure us from going back again without leave. It being the custom of those People to keep a very strict guard about their Country for fear it should come to be known to Foreigners, whose designs, and corrupted lives might in time bring trouble to

40

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

their State, and corruption to their manners, the peace and purity of which two things they are most careful to secure. When Carshidà had made an end of speaking, Albicormas stood up and bid us welcome in his own Language, as Sermodas interpreted it unto us. He added, That we should find all manner of kindness and good usage among the Sporui, that we should stay in Sporundè till such a time as he did receive Orders from Sevarminas, the Suns Vice-Roy, who lived in the City of Sevarinde, whither he would send a Messenger that very day to give him an account of us. That in the mean while, we should enjoy all the comfort and moderate pleasure the Country could afford if we would be ruled by Sermodas and his Officers, to whose care and conduct he recommended me and all my men, exhorting us to behave our selves modestly, and so he dismissed us. I observed, that Albicormas was very crooked, though he was otherwise a man of good presence, and grave carriage, and so were many of his Assessors; and we found afterwards that among the People there was a great number of deformed persons mixed with very handsom Folk of all Ages and Sexes; and I was told, That the reason of it was, that those of Sevarindè sent all such imperfect People as were born amongst them to this place, and would not suffer any body who had any deformity of body to live in their Country. I was further told, That in their language Spora signified a defective person, and Sporundè the City of the maimed or defective. Those that were incorrigibly vitious, or unquiet, were disposed of another way, as in the sequel or continuation of this History shall hereafter be made appear. After Albicormas had dismissed us we went back to our Lodging in the same order as we came from it, and found there a very good Dinner provided for us. We kept at home all that Afternoon because the weather was hot, but in the Evening Sermodas and Carshidà took us out to shew us the City, and led us from Street to Street, where we found great multitudes of People, who came out to look on us. The Town is the most regular that ever I saw, being divided into great square Buildings, which contain every one above a thousand People, & they are built all after the same manner. There are seventy six of them, and so many thousands of Inhabitants in the whole City which is above four miles about. It stands betwixt two Rivers, as I told you before, but the industry of that People has made it an Island of a Peninsula, by drawing a great Trench from River to river miles above the City. This Trench is no less than three miles long, having a great Wall on each side and many Bridges over it, very broad and strongly built with large Free-stone, as you may see your selves when you come to the place. “At night we had a good Supper, and two hours after we were all carried to a great Hall, where we found fifteen young Women, who

Part I (1675)

41

waited there for us. They were most of them very tall and proper women, in painted Callico Gowns, wearing their black hair in long and thick breads, hanging down upon their Breasts and Shoulders. We were a little surprised to find so many of them in a row, and did much admire at them, not knowing what they stood there for, when Sermodas spake to us in this manner: “You wonder Maurice to see here so many proper Women together, and little understand the reason why you find them in this posture and habit, somewhat different from other womens Dress. Know you therefore that these are our slaves, and that they are here to wait upon you and your Comrades. You have your several Customs in Europe, and so have other Countries their own. Some are bad and vicious in nature, and others only seem to be good or bad according to mens prejudices, and apprehensions. But there are some that are grounded upon Reason, and are truly good in themselves if we rightly consider them. Ours are for the most part, if not all of this kind, and we hardly have any one which is not established upon Reason. You know, I suppose, that the moderate use of those good things Nature hath appointed for all living Creatures is good, and that there is nothing but the abuse of them, either in the excess, or in the defect that may be termed bad, provided Faith, Justice, and Equity be exactly observed. “Among those good things, we conceive there are two of the greatest importance, viz. The preservation and happy being of every living Creature, and the propagation of its Species. The means to attain to the first are all those natural Actions, without which no Creature can subsist, and such are Eating, Drinking, Sleeping, &c. But her bountiful hands do not only give those things which are meerly necessary to keep us alive, but also liberally bestow upon us those delights and pleasures, the just and moderate use whereof may make our lives sweet and comfortable; and that we may the better take pleasure in them she hath given us an Appetite, and a Palate capable to discern their various tastes and qualities according as they are sutable to our natures. For the preservation of every Species Nature hath likewise appointed that every Male should be united to a Female, that by their union their kind should be preserved, which is her chiefest end. And that they may be the more inclined to accomplish her noble design she hath given them a mutual love and desire of Conjunction, and annexed a pleasure to the actual union of the two Sexes for the preservation of the Species, as a pleasure also in eating, and drinking to every Animal. These are the Eternal Laws of God in Nature, and these two ends, together with the pleasure we take in the means, through which we may attain to them, are not only lawful and necessary but also laudible and commanded. Besides these two great concerns there is a third one, which hath a general regard to Humane

42

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Society, and without which no Kingdom or Commonwealth can well subsist, and that is obedience and submission to the Government. But every Government ought to be established as much upon Natural Reason as possibly can be, that every Member of that Society may freely enjoy his natural liberty, and the moderate use of all those good things which Nature hath appointed for the welfare of Mankind. For if any Government make those good things bad and unlawful, which in themselves are good and innocent, we may conclude that such Government is unjust, and contrary to the Eternal Laws of God and Natural Reason. By those Arguments it appears, that those who have not in these three principal things a due regard to their own persons, their Posterity and their Neighbours are cruel to themselves, rebellious to God, and unworthy to live in any humane Society. “Those considerations induced our great Lawgiver Sevarias (whose glorious name and love of his incomparable vertues shall ever be sweet and precious to us) to fit his Government as near as he could to the Laws of Nature established upon Reason, carefully avoyding to forbid any thing that is naturally good in it self, and allowing the moderate use of them to all his Subjects. Among the rest of his Laws there is one that commands Marriage to all men and women, as soon as they are come to an Age fit for Generation, which Law and Custom we inviolably observe in all our Dominions. But because many among us are sometimes obliged to travel and leave their Wives at home, we keep in all Cities a number of women Slaves appointed for their use, so that we do not only give every Traveller Meat, Drink, and Lodging, but also a Woman to lye with him as openly and lawfully as if she were his Wife. According to this laudable custom, and being willing to use you as well as any of our own Nation, we have appointed so many women as you are men to come and lie with you every other night so long as you remain here with us if you can find in your hearts to use this priviledge. “You may easily imagine that these reasons quickly prevailed, and that he needed not use any further arguments to perswade us to accept of the proffer. We gave him most humble thanks, told him his Reasons were very powerful, and the Custom of this Country much better than that of Europe in our judgment. “Well, saith he, use the priviledge if you please, find out a method to agree among your selves, and so I wish you good night. “As soon as he was gone there came in two men, who spake to us in French, and bid us welcome to Sporundè; one of them told us, he was a Physician, and his Companion a Chirurgeon. He desired us very earnestly to be sincere with him, and to tell him whether any of us had any venereal distemper upon him.

Part I (1675)

43

“Gentlemen, I am appointed to examine every one of you upon that score, and if any deny the truth it will turn to his damage and shame; but if he confess it ingeniously he will get love, esteem, and a speedy cure. “Every one of the Company said he was free from any such thing; but notwithstanding our saying so, the man would not be satisfied till he had seen and carefully examined every one of us apart in a Room next to the Hall we stood in. When he was satisfied he told us he was very glad to find us all sound and free from so nasty distemper, very common in the other Continents, but only known by fame in the Southern Lands. He told us likewise, he had lived in France and Italy above six years, and seen most parts of Europe and Asia in the space of twelve years, and that from time to time there were men sent from Sporundè beyond the seas upon the same account, by which means they had persons among them who knew all those Nations, and could speak their Languages. This Speech unriddled to me the mystery of Carshidà’s speaking Spanish and Dutch the first time he came to us, and took us out of the amazement we were in, to hear so many European Languages, and to see so many of our Fashions in so remote a Country, where we supposed there could be none but barbarous People, if any at all. We would have satisfied our curiosity by asking this man several questions if the earnest desire of going to bed had not prevailed with us, we therefore advised how to find a method to proceed in the choice of the Women. It was at last agreed, That I, and then my two Mates should chuse before any of the others, and then the Commonalty should cast Lots among themselves, which was done accordingly without any dispute or quarrelling, so every man chose his bedfellow. Then was I brought to my Chamber where I lay the night before, and my men to another long Gallery, on each side of which stood little Chambers, divided one from another by thin partition-Walls made of white Plaister, not unlike the Cells of Nuns and Friers. Every Couple had one of these places, and lay there, till next day without any the least disturbance. “The next morning we heard the sound of the Bell at the usual time, and Carshidà came to me to ask me how I did, and to tell me it was time to rise. My Bedfellow had leaped out of the Bed, and put on her Cloaths as soon as she had heard the Bell ring, and was but just gone out of my Chamber when Carshidà came into it. He told me Benoscar was gone to my men to take them out of Captivity, (meaning out of their Bedfellows embraces, and out of their Cells) where they had been locked all night lest they should use the opportunity of permutation, not allowed in those parts, lest some of the women proving with Child the Father should be uncertain. When I was drest I went to the Hall where my men came in like manner, and our Guides carried us out to shew us the

44

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Workhouses in several Squares of the City, where we saw both men and women working very orderly, some in Weaving and Sowing, others Forging, Carving, &c. But Carshidà told us, That the chiefest employment of the Nation consisted in Building and Tilling of the ground. “We lived there in that manner till the sixth day after our first coming to Sporundè, expecting the return of the Messenger Albicormas had sent to Sevarinde. He came at last with Orders to send us to Sevarminas, who was very desirous to see us. When I heard we were to march to Sevarindè I was sorry I had concealed your being here in this Camp, chiefly after we had found so good usage amongst those People, and did hardly know how to mend the matter; but the reason I had at first to do so being a good and solid reason I thought it would be received, and that Albicormas would forgive us the lye we told him, through the care we had for your safety in a time when we much doubted of our own; I did ingenuously confess the whole matter to Sermodas, who immediately went to Albicormas and told him what I had confessed to him. “Thereupon we were ordered to continue in Sporundè till the return of another Messenger, who was presently dispatched to Sevarminas to acquaint him with the whole matter. He returned six days after his departure, and brought new Orders from Sevarindè to Albicormas, who in obedience to them, sent us with all this Fleet to fetch you and carry us all to the great City, where we must appear before the Soveraign Power that resides there, and where Sermodas tells me we shall yet be better used than we were at Sporundè.” Here Maurice made an end of his Speech, which filled us all both with joy and admiration, and seemed not to hold any considerable time, though it had been long, and might have proved tedious upon another subject. But the things he related were so full of wonder and novelty that we could have given him a quiet and patient hearing if his discourse had taken up a whole days time. We consulted a while what we had best to do, and resolved at last to submit to Sermodas in all things, to go whither he would carry us, and wholly to depend upon Gods Providence and these peoples Humanity. While Maurice was relating all these adventures to us, Some of his men, who burned with a desire to be talking of the same to their Friends in the Camp, got ashore, and began to discourse with our people, who gathering together in a ring about them, were all amazed at their relations, and were acquainted with the news almost as soon as we, so we needed not repeat any thing to them to let them know how our Affairs stood. They were all willing to go to these fine places the Fellows had mentioned and described to them, and wished themselves there already.

Part I (1675)

45

One thing only vexed us all, and this was it, We were still in some hopes that our first Pinnace might have got to Batavia, which if it had, we did not doubt but the General would send Ships to our relief as soon as he should be informed with our misfortune. Now if those Ships should come and not find us, they would conclude we were lost, and we should see our selves deprived of all hopes of ever hearing from our Friends, and of returning to our Native Country. But Maurice told us, That there was no reason to fear in either of these cases, considering that we were fallen into the hands of a Civilized Nation, who had Ships, and sent some of them from time to time beyond the Seas. And that it was probable we might get leave to go to the Indies if we did not like this new Country. After we had ended these Consultations we went to my Hut, where we found Sermodas just got up from the Quilt where he had a while taken his rest. He smiled at us when we came in, and asked us how we liked the Description Maurice had made us of the People and City of Sporundè? We answered, We could not but like and admire both of them, and wish our selves there if it was his pleasure to carry us thither. I came for that purpose, said he, and I am very glad to find you so well disposed to go; you will find our Cities far better places to live in than this Camp, although through your industry you have made it already a very fine Habitation. We had several discourses upon that and other subjects; after which we asked him, Whether he would not be pleased to eat and drink of such Victuals as we were able to give him? I will, saith he, eat of your Victuals upon condition you will accept of such as we have brought along with us. Then he desired Maurice to send for some of his men, and bid them bring some of the Ships Provision, which together with ours made up a very good Feast. When the Dinner was ended Sermodas told us, That since we were willing to go with him, we should use all diligence to put our selves in readiness, and order the transportation of our Men and Goods as we should think fittest; That he thought it convenient the chiefest of us, and all our women should go aboard the same day, and he would leave some of his men ashore, who together with such of ours as we should appoint should take care to ship up all our things, and then come after us to Sporundè. Thereupon I told him we had another company on the other side of the Bay, and if it was his pleasure we should send Maurice with a Vessel or two to fetch them. You may do so, answered he, and I will order one of our Ships to go along with Maurice, and carry them from their Station directly to the City without coming back again to this Camp. Do you get such of your Officers as you like best to keep you company, and come along with me aboard my Ship, where you will find passing good accommodations.

46

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

I took only De Nuits and Turci my Secretary with me, and appointed Devese and the other Captain to command in my absence, and see every thing transported with good order and diligence. Sermodas left Benoscar with Devese to be his Assistant and Conductor, and so we sailed toward Sporundè, where we landed the third day after our departure from Sidenberge. We were received in almost the same manner as Maurice had been, with this only difference, that De Nuits and I had a great deal more respect, and better attendance than he had had. Albicormas was very kind to us, and particularly to me. We had several long conversations concerning the present state of Europe, wherein I was far better able to give him satisfaction than any one of our Company. I found he was a man of very excellent parts, learned in all solid Sciences, and very well acquainted with the Greek and Latine Tongues. We spake Latine in all our conversations; for although he understood some of our Vulgar Languages, yet he could speak none so readily and so eloquently as Latine. He told me many things concerning the Customs and Government of their Nation, which I will faithfully set out when I come to describe the City, Laws, and Manners of the Sevarambi. The day after our coming to this Town all our People and Luggage arrived there, and nothing was left in the Camp but what they thought was not worth taking. They were all used as Maurices men, and had new and clean Cloaths given them every man and woman. But there arose some difficulty concerning our Women, for as you may remember it was ordered in the Camp that one woman should serve five of our common men, and none but our Principal Officers were allowed to have one woman wholly every Officer to himself. Sermodas and his Companions were much displeased with this Plurality of men to woman, and told us it was so beastly a thing as was not to be suffered, and rather than to endure it they would provide more women for our men to keep them from that filthy and worse than brutish practice. We excused our selves upon the necessity of our condition, and told him he might order the matter as he thought best himself. Will you, saith he, heartily conform to our Laws and Customs? We told him, We desired to do so, and thought it our best way. Well then, saith he, number out your men and women, and give me a List of them all; and let me know likewise, how many of your Women are with Child, and we will take care that you shall be supplied with every thing you want in that particular according to the manner of the Country. We gave him an exact account of every thing according to his desire and then he said, That if any one of us was willing to stick to any of the Women we had, who was not with Child, he might do it; Furthermore, we should agree of

Part I (1675)

47

a method for every one how to chuse his Bedfellow, for there would be a number of Slaves allowed to supply the want of our Women. We consulted among us how to proceed in that matter, and it was agreed, That every Principal Officer who had a woman wholly to himself, might keep her still if he pleased, or take a Slave of the Country, chusing according to his degree; and that the Commonalty should cast Lots as Maurice his men had done before. Some of these Officers stuck to their old Bedfellows, but others had rather chuse a new one than to keep such as they were already weary of; the inferiour sort chose according to their Lot; and Maurices men not being allowed to make a new choice must be content to keep those women they had chose at the first. The women who were with child by any Officer were commanded to stick to the Father of the Child, although he was allowed a fresh woman besides; as for those of the Commonalty that had a great belly, they were obliged to stick to one of the five men who lay with them; and exhorted to chuse, as near as they could, the man whom they thought to be the true Father of the Child. And that was the Method according to which this matter was ordered, much to most of our Womens grief and discontent. The fifth day after we were come to Sporundè, Sermodas came to me in the morning, and told me, That I must prepare to go to the Temple, where the Osparenibon or Marriage Solemnities were to be celebrated. He told me farther, That the same was kept four times a year, and that it was the greatest Festival they had, though much inferiour to that of Sevarindè, which was the most magnificent in the world. I got up and put on the new Cloaths that were brought me, and to every one of our Principal Officers who came to my Chamber to go with me to the Temple along with Sermodas and Carshidà our perpetual Leaders. We went together to the Palace, where Albicormas had given us Audience, and having passed through several Courts we came at last to a large and magnificent Temple, where we saw a great many young men and women together in new Apparel, and wearing upon their heads, the men wreaths of green boughs; and the women Garlands of Flowers. They altogether made the loveliest show that ever I saw, being most of them very proper and handsome. The farther end of the Temple was kept from our sight by a large Curtain which divided it almost in the middle; we stood there near an hour, looking upon the rich Ornaments, and the several Objects of the place before we heard or saw any alteration, but at the last we heard the sound of several Trumpets drawing near to us; we heard likewise the Harmony of many Flutes and Houboyes, which played very sweet and airy Tunes. Then came in a great number of People with lighted Torches in their hands, and set them up in divers places of the Temple,

48

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

where hanged divers Candlesticks disposed in a very good order. The Windows were close shut up, and the Curtain drawn, which discovered the other end of the Church, where we saw at a distance a great Altar very rich and magnificent, adorned with Garlands and Festons of fresh flowers ingeniously done up together. About it, and in the Wall, against which it was set up, we saw a great Globe of Crystal, or very clear Glass, as big about as four men can fathom, which cast such a light as enlightned all that end at a very great distance. On the other side was a great Statue, representing a Woman with many breasts; and suckling as many little Children, all very curiously cut. In the middle of these two Figures we saw nothing but a large black Curtain, plain without any Ornaments. While we were looking upon these Objects, the Musick came nearer and nearer, and at last into the Temple. Then turning our eyes that way, we saw Albicormas, with all his Senators, coming towards the Altar in great Pomp and State. As soon as he came in, several Priests went to meet him with Thuribula, Censors in their hands, and singing a Canticle. They bowed to him three times, and then turned and lead him to the Altar, where he and his men inclined their bodies three times to the Curtain, twice to the Luminous Globe, and once to the Statue: Then he took his Seat on the right hand of the place against the Wall, where several high Thrones were set up to receive him and his Company, and so many on the other side on the like manner. Sermodas brought me to a Seat under Albicormas his feet with three more of my men, and placed the rest over-against us on the other side. We were no sooner set down but three of the Priests went towards the young People, and called them to the Altar. They divided into two parts, and all the Men came orderly on the right hand, and the Women on the left. Then did the Principal Priest stand upon a high place in the middle of all, and made a short speech unto them; which done, fire was brought in lighted by the Sunbeams, as I understood afterwards. This fire being brought in, Albicormas came down to the Altar, where he lighted some Aromatical sticks that lay upon it with that fire, and kneeling before the Luminous Globe, spake aloud some words, which then I could not understand. From the Globe he went to the Statue, and bending down one of his knees only, he made there another short Speech or Prayer, which done, the Priests sang an Anthem, which was answered by the People. When this short Anthem was ended, several Musical Instruments began to play very sweet and melodious Tunes. A Chorus of men and women succeeded these Instruments, and sang so Divinely that all thought we were in Heaven, our Voyces and Musick in Europe being not comparable to these. When this Symphony was ended, the chiefest Priest went to the young woman, who stood at the upper end of

Part I (1675)

49

the Row, and asked her, Whether she would be married? She, making a low inclination, and blushing at the same time, answered, Yes. Then did he go to all the others, asked them the same question aloud, and received the like answer. The same was done on the other side where the young men stood, and when all these questions were asked, and answered, the Priest went again to the uppermost Maid, and asked her, Whether she would marry any one of the young men who stood on the other side? Whereunto she answered, Yes. Then did the Priest take her by the hand and brought her to the uppermost young man of the other row, and bid her chuse her Husband. She looked upon the first young man and then upon the others successively, until she came to the sixth, and there she stopped and asked him, Whether he would be her good Lord and faithful Husband? He answered, That he would be so, if she would be his loving and loyal Wife. Which she said, She would be till death should part them. After this solemn and mutual promise, he took her by the hand, kissed her, and walked with her to the lower end of the Temple. All the others did successively do the same till they were all marched down by Couples. But there remained eight young women who could get no Husbands: Five of them seemed to be full of confusion, and tears trickled down their eyes in great abundance. The three others looked not so dejected, and when the Priest came to them they got hold of his Robes, and went along with him to Albicormas. He spake some words to them and then they went to three several Senators, and said, That since it was their ill fortune not to be able to get single men to their Husbands, they made choice of them to take way their reproach that lay upon their heads, after having three times been slighted publickly. Therefore they desired them, that, according to the Laws, and their particular priviledge, they would receive them into the number of their Wives, promising to be very loving and faithful to them. The three Senators came down immediately, took them by the hand, and carried them to the Altar, where they stood till all the others came up by Couples. The five afflicted Virgins were asked by one of Priests, Whether they had a mind to chuse any of the Officers? To which they answered, That this being the first time they had tried their Fortune, they were willing to try twice more before they took that course. Then pulling down their Vails they marched out of the Temple, and got into Chariot, ready to receive them at the Gate, and so went away much discontented. As soon as they were out of sight the Musick began to play very merry Tunes, and Albicormas going to the Altar spake some words aloud, and taking the three first Maids, and the three Senators, joyned their hands together, and spake some words, to which they made answer, and bowed very humbly to him. He did the like to seven or eight Couples

50

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

more, and at last leaving the Office to other Senators, he went up again to his Throne. The like Ceremony was used to all the rest, and when it was done, two Priests took the fire from the Altar, brought it to the middle of the Temple, and the new married Folks made a ring about it. Every one of them had some Gums or Perfumes in their hands, and each Couple mixing them together threw them into the fire: Then kneeling down, laid their hands upon a yellow Book, which two Priests held in their hands, Swore obedience to the Laws, and promised to maintain them to the utmost of their power till the end of their lives, taking God the Sun, and their Country to witness of their Oaths. Then did they march the Altar again, where Albicormas made a short Prayer, they being upon their knees, and turning towards them gave them his blessing, which done, he marched out of the Temple, all the Company following after, and the Musick playing all in a Consort. Next, they went into a great Hall near unto the Temple, where stood many Tables, which were immediately covered with meat. Albicormas took me and Van de Nuits, told us we should be his Guests that day, and bringing us to the uppermost Table, sate down with his chiefest Officers, and made us sit with them. Sermodas took the rest of my men to another Table, and the Commonalty of our People, who stood in a Gallery all the time of the Ceremony, were carried home again by Carshidà and Benoscar. We had a very noble Feast, several Instruments of Musick playing all the while we sate. After Dinner we marched out into the Amphitheater, which stood about a Musket shot from the Temple, and all the way we went we found the Streets strewed with herbs and flowers, and heard the acclamations of a great multitude of People, who came out to see us pass. This Amphitheater is strongly built with very large stone, and is no less than fifty paces Diameter, counting from outer Wall to outer Wall. It is covered with a prodigious high and large Vault, which shelters the place from the Sun, and from all injuries of weather. There are Seats around about it one over the other, from top to bottom, which take up a great deal of Room, and streighten the Pit to an indifferent bigness. The upper Seats were full of people, and none but the Officers and the new married Folks were admitted into the pit except some young men, who exercised themselves a while in Wrastling, Fencing, Leaping, and in many other acts of Agility, which was no unpleasant sight. Then fell our People to dancing, and kept so till it was almost night, at which time the Trumpets and other Instruments sounded out a retreat. We marched out in the same manner as we came, and found in the Streets many fire-works, which made a second day of the night. Albicormas and his Company went home in their Chariots, and the new married people

Part I (1675)

51

to the Lodgings prepared for them, where I suppose they enjoyed one another all night to their hearts content: and Sermodas carried us home again, where he explained to us several parts of the Ceremony. The next morning he came to us and asked whether we would go to the Temple again to see another Ceremony which was but a consequence of the former; to which we readily assenting he carried us away, and made us stand awhile at the Temple-gate. Soon after we heard a sound of Musick coming towards us, and saw the new married men coming to the Temple, each of them with a long and green bough in his hand, where were hung up the Wreath he wore the day before, and his Wives Garland, tied together with a white Clout [cloth] stained with bloud, which were the marks of his Wives Virginity. They came all into the Temple in a triumphing manner, and being come to the Altar laid down their Garlands upon it, consecrating them to the Deity, to the Sun, their King, and to their Country, which is represented by the Statue I spake of before. After this Consecration they went out dancing at the sound of the merry Tunes, the Instruments played till they came to their homes. This Festival lasted three whole days with a general joy and merriment throughout the whole Town. Now our time was come to leave the City of Sporundè, and to march to Sevarindè. Sermodas gave us warning of it the day before we went, and carried me, Van de Nuits, and Maurice to Albicormas to take our leave of him. We went together to his house, which we found to be a noble and stately Palace, though much inferiour to the City Palace both in bigness and state. He received us very kindly, and told us that the day following we must take our Journey to Sevarindè to wait upon Sevarminas. Then he asked us how we liked Sporundè, and the Ceremonies we had seen in the celebration of the Osparénibon. We answered, We liked every thing even to admiration. You have seen nothing yet, and you are going to a place as far above this as the Sun is above the Moon. I will not too much prepossess your minds with the glory of it, knowing experience will teach you more than I can tell you. Sermodas is to be your Guide, he will be very tender of you, and I admonish you to take his Counsel in every thing, and to carry your selves so prudently that the great Sevarminas may love and cherish you as heartily as I have done. Then he kissed us in the forehead, and bid us farewell. The next morning early we were carried to the Waterside on the West part of the City, where we found several great Barges ready to receive us. Sermodas brought me and three or four of my men into an indifferent big one, but rarely carved, gilt, and painted. Our other men and women were distributed into other Vessels, and in that manner we rowed up the River, which running through a very flat and Champain

52

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Country flowed down very slowly. We saw along the Banks of it several great buildings like those we had seen below the City. We had many Rowers, who relieved one another from time to time; so we went up with great speed, and never stopped till we came to an indifferent great City, called Sporumè, about thirty miles above Sporundè. We were expected there at that day, and so we found great numbers of people upon the Key, who came out to see us land. A little before our Barge came to the City, a Vessel full of several Officers, cloathed like those of Sporundè, came to meet us, and some of them leaping into our Barge expressed a great deal of respect to Sermodas, and much civility to us. We went ashore with them, where stayed for us the Governour of the place, called Psarkimbas. Sermodas and he embraced one another, and had some discourse together, after which he kindly saluted us, and bid us welcome into the Country in the Latine Tongue. Then addressing himself to me, embracing me, and kissing me in the Forehead, he said he would be glad to have a little private discourse with me sometime of the next day. I answered, I was at his command, after which we followed him into the City, which we found to be built much after the manner of Sporundè, and about half as big as it, standing in a fine and fruitful soyl, the best manured and tilled we had ever seen before. We were received and used in this place as at Sporundè, without any great difference, and stayed there all the day following, not observing any thing remarkable in it but the exemplary punishment which in the afternoon was inflicted upon fourteen Malefactors in this manner: They were taken out of Prison fast tied together with Ropes, and divided into three parts. In the first were six men, who as we were told had been condemned to ten years punishment, some for Murther, and others for committing Adultery. In the second were five young women, whereof two were condemned to suffer punishment during seven years, to satisfie the Law, and afterwards so long as their Husband pleased, and this was for having lain with other men. The three others were condemned to suffer three years punishment for having been debauched before their Osparenibon was come, or the time of their marrying, which is at the eighteenth year of their age. In the third were the three young men who debauched these maids, and they were to suffer the like punishment, and at last marry them. They were carried from the Prison to the Palace Gate, where stood a great multitude of people to see the execution. These poor Prisoners were stript of all their cloaths from their shoulders to the middle of their bodies, and we saw their naked skins very plainly. I remember that one of the women, who had committed Adultery, was a very proper and lusty woman, not above one or two and twenty years of age. She had a very beautiful face, black eyes, brown hair,

Part I (1675)

53

and a delicate clear skin. But her breasts, which we saw quite naked, were the loveliest I ever beheld. This was the first time she was brought to her punishment, so that her shame was extraordinary. Tears trickled down her cheeks in great abundance; and these instead of taking off from her natural beauty, did on the contrary so much add to it that I never admired any thing like this beautiful Criminal. Admiration produced love, and pity joyning with those two Passions did so move the hearts of all the Spectators, that there was hardly any ingenious Person who was not moved to an extreme compassion. But their pity was turned to a kind of generous indignation, when they considered that within a few moments all these divine Charms were to be soiled and prophaned by the cruel stripes of a barbarous Executioner: Yet this was an act of justice ordained by the Laws against a Crime which among those people is look’d upon as one of the greatest; so there was no means to save this lovely Person from the rigour of the Law, and the Officer had already lifted up his scourge, and was going to strike, when of a sudden her Husband, running through the croud, cried with a loud voice, Hold, hold, hold. All the Spectators, and the Officers themselves, hearing this voice were much surprized, and turned their eyes on the side from which they heard the voice come, suspending the execution till they knew what this mans meaning was. He came to them almost out of breath, as having with much ado passed through the crowd, and, addressing his Speech to the chief Officer, said, pointing at his Wife, Sir, I am that miserable womans Husband, and therefore much concerned in this Execution. Before she receive her punishment I desire to speak something to her in your presence, after which you will know more of my mind. Then having got leave of the Officer, he spake to her in this manner: You know Ulisbè with how great passion I loved you for the space of three years before our Marriage; You know likewise, that since we have been united my love hath rather increased than decreased and that I have given you all the testimonies of a tender, sincere, and constant affection for these four years that a woman could expect from her Husband. I was perswaded that you had for me the same Sentiments, and that your flame was equal to mine; and as criminal as you have proved, since I believe still that I have the best share of your divided heart, knowing that you have been seduced by the wicked Claniba’s wiles, and subtil devices to commit a crime which you would not have committed out of your natural Propensity. Within this three hours I have been informed of his wicked practices, and know that you could not be drawn to comply with his desires till you were perswaded I had wronged you, and done with his Wife that which, in your ill grounded indignation and desire of revenge, you have since done with him; If I had known so much before, you had

54

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

not come to this place in this infamous manner, and I would rather have forgiven you the wrong you have done to our Conjugal bed, and concealed your Crime than brought you to this severe and shameful punishment. I cannot altogether free you from it, because you must satisfie the Law and your Country which you have grievously offended; but if the tears I see you shed, and the sighs and sobs I hear out of your mouth be true signs of repentance, if you have still in your breast any remainder of that love so sincere which you once professed to me with so many obliging demonstrations, and if you promise me that you will wholly give me your heart again, I will save you from the cruel stripes that are ready to fall upon you, and suffer them mine own self, rather than see them laid upon you. Speak Ulisbe, and let not your silence be an Argument of your obdurateness, and indifferency for me; There he stopt, and the woman, almost drown’d in her tears, was silent a while before she could utter any words, but at last she returned him this answer, My silence, O too Generous Bramistes, is not an Argument of my obstinacy, or indifferency, but of my shame and confusion. I have injured you contrary to the Sacred Laws of Justice, and honour; I have defiled our Conjugal Bed, and whether I have done it out of a just revenge, or out of any other cause, I am guilty, and deserve to suffer a far greater punishment than is ordained for the expiation of my Crime; Do not trouble your self for me, I am a fit Object of your indignation, and just revenge, and not of your undeserved pity. All that I beg of you is That you would believe that I am truly penitent, and that I would endure with gladness the cruellest torments, and at last lose my wretched life to satisfie you if it were possible. Why should you receive upon your innocent body the stripes which ought justly to fall upon mine? Ah, why should I be freed from a pain due to me, and not to you? To make it short, there was a long Contestation betwixt the Husband and the Wife, which made all those, who could hear them, shed tears; and at last the business came to this, That the Man received the Blows which were prepared for his Wife. He was tied with her, and they, with all the other, were whipt three times round the Palace, and then, sent to Prison again. It seems that the Women in that Country have that priviledge to be exempted from such chastisement if any body will suffer it for them; whereof I was told that there had been many examples upon several occasions. After this Execution we went home again, where Psarkimbas and I had above an hours discourse together about the Affairs of Europe, and such like matters as Atticormas and all the other Officers had been inquisitive of. The next morning we took leave of Psarkimbas, and went to the Water-side again, where we found other Barges ready to receive us. Sermodas went into one of them, taking me and the other person who

Part I (1675)

55

travelled with us before, and so we rowed up the River five or six miles above it, where we found a Town consisting only of eight square Buildings like those of Sporumè. There we found other Barges of another fashion waiting for us, so without losing any time we went into them, and were drawn up by horses against the stream of the River, which growing strong in this place, we could not row up any farther. The Town we left behind was called Sporunidè, and, as we were told, was governed in the same manner as the other were. As we went up the River we drew nearer and nearer to the great Mountains De Haes had seen at a distance when he was near the Lake in his discovery of the Island over against the old Camp. They stretcht from East to West as far as we could see, and appeared very high and steep; we had spied them long before we came to this place, but now we could see them very plain. From Sporunidè we were drawn up to another lesser place fourteen miles above it, called Sporunikè, where we took fresh horses, and went up eight miles farther the same day to another little Town, called Sporavistè, where we lay that night, and where we observed nothing remarkable. The next day in the morning we found several Chariots and Wagons ready to receive us; Sermodas took me, De Nuits, and Maurice only to bear him company, and so leaving the River on the West side we went directly to the Southward, and drew nearer and nearer to the Mountains, the ground rising by degrees as we went towards them, although the Country be flat and plain to the very foot of them, which is the reason of their steepness. As we went thorow the Country we saw here and there many Towns and Buildings, and came to a place called Sporaguestè about eleven of the Clock; There we took some rest and refreshment till Two in the Afternoon, and pursuing our journey came in the Evening to the very foot of the Mountains, where we found a pretty big Town, called Sporagondò, where we were received with much kindness by Astorbas the Governour of it. The Town consists of fourteen Squares, and is the last we saw in Sporumbè. We were treated there as in other places, and rested our selves all the day following; we saw nothing considerable in it, or about it, but the rare Canals which are drawn up and down to water the Country, which is full of fine Pastures, always green as we were told. These Canals by Walls, Bridges, and Sluces convey abundance of water from the Mountains to this Plain, and the work is so vaste and costly that the like could not be done in Europe for fifty Millions of Livers,10 yet the Industry of these People has done it without money, for they use none in any part of their Dominions. We were told that we —————— 10 [Livres = French currency.]

56

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

should rest there three days, and then we should go through the Mountains into Sevarambè, whereof we intend to give the Description in the Second Part of this Story, begging of the Reader that he would allow our Pen a little rest, till we have put into a Method the Papers out of which we are to draw the Second Part, where we shall give him an account of the Country beyond the Hills. Finis

THE HISTORY OF THE

Sevarites or Sevarambi: A Nation inhabiting part of the third CONTINENT, Commonly called

Terræ Australes Incognitæ. WITH A further Account of their admirable

Government, Religion, Customs, and Language. Written by one Captain Siden, A Worthy Person, Who, together with many others, was cast upon those Coasts, and lived many years in that Country. The Second Part more wonderful and delightful than the First

LONDON, Printed by J. M. for Henry Brome, at the Gun at the West End of St. Pauls Church-yard. 1679. 57

58

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

TO THE READER I Have here recommended to thy perusal the Second Part of the rare Country of the Sevarites: a Country so curious and so pleasant, that if thou hadst ever been there, thou couldest never have had the least inclination to dwell in any other part of the World. I know some will be carping and quarrelling at this Narration, like those unreasonable Animals, that are always fretting to see things with which they are not well acquainted. But these poor Souls that have seen nothing but the compass of their Cradle, and have confined their knowledge within the narrow limits of their own Territory, cannot well conceive nor imagine the glorious things, and the strange Wonders that appear to Travellers beyond the Seas in Foreign Nations. Captain Siden was one of the most famous of his Time, a Man well known for a worthy and approved Person. What account he hath given of these rare People is not so publick, I confess, as could be wished, because the Persons and the Nation, who have a Correspondency in those Parts, have discouraged all others, by declaring these things to be fabulous, because they intend to ingross all the Trade to themselves. The Advantages many Dutch Families have received by them already, is incredible. The vast Treasure they have heaped up in a few years, is beyond all belief. They have met with some new Mines of Gold in this golden Country, and raised their Families to an extraordinary Grandeur. It is an idle humour in any of us to despise or reject strange Discoveries. If all our wise Forefathers had been of the same temper, the Indies had always been unknown to the European People, and we should again burn such as dare affirm, that there is a Jamaica or an America, a World under us. Our Nation heretofore, and the French Court, lost the advantage which the Spaniard hath well improved, through incredulity. It is therefore good in all such cases as this, to weigh the Reasons and Arguments on both sides, and to judge of the probabilities of this Country. If any thing is here related of this Country or People seemingly beyond all possibility, we must know, that as this People have the advantage of living in the earthly Paradise, they have knowledges of Nature and natural Effects, which look like Miracles. Captain Siden and his Dutch Camrades visited many places, and saw some other Islands thereabouts, which are as full of Curiosities as those we have here taken notice of. But that this Relation might not be too voluminous, and the Account too tedious to the ingenious Reader, I thought fit to set some of his Papers aside, and speak only of the chief country of the Sevarites; hoping that these lines may give some an incouragement, when they are at Cap de bon Esperanza, to direct their Course a little out of the way, and to visit this Country, which lies Southwest and by South from the Point. If the Charge and Danger don’t discourage them, doubtless some brave generous Soul may get to himself an immortal Name, and Wealth enough to pay his Charges, if he returns as safe as Captain Siden did. However I wish that this Narrative may give you all as much satisfaction as you can desire or wish for.

The Second Part of the History of the Sevarites

A

t the foot of the great Mountains we rested three days upon the Borders of Sevarambè, in a little Town called by the Inhabitants Cola, from the delightsomness of the place; for it stands upon a small Rising, and is watered by three pleasant Rivers, Banon, Caru, and Silkar, which render the ground thereabouts extraordinary fruitful beyond all credit, to a miracle. For some have told me, that they have usually in their fields every year four Crops of Corn, because the ground wants neither heat nor humidity to bring forth, and is never parched with the drought of Summer; for here as well as in all the Kingdom of Sevarambè, they know no difference between Summer and Winter, unless it be by the course of the Sun and Stars, which draw nearer to or farther from the Northern and Southern Poles. Sermodas had here many old Acquaintances, and particularly a she-friend, who caused us stay in this place longer than we purposed at first. For our great expectation and earnest desire was to pass over the Mountains into Sevarambè, to injoy the delights of that Paradise on Earth. But whiles Sermodas was diverting himself one way, he caused some Divertisement to be given us another way, that our abode there might not seem too tedious. He interested some of the chief of the place to shew us their Gardens of Pleasure, and to lead us out into the Fields to hunt the Ostrich with Beagles, and Grey-hounds, or Dogs not much unlike that sort which we have in Europe. This Hunting was performed in Parks, where this sort of Game was kept for Diversion. The pleasure that it afforded to us, and the extraordinary actions which were thereby represented, caused us not to think the time long, or our abode in that place tedious, though we were in great expectation of injoying sweeter Delights beyond the Mountains in a Country so far excelling all others in the World, according to the relation which had been given to us. It is the usual custom of all Travellers that pass often through this Town, to have she-Comrade, with whom they are wont to spend some days. For in the Country of Sevarambè such kind of natural delights are not allowable by the Laws of the Country, nor agreeable with the strict lives and severe Customs of the Inhabitants, nor with the nature of the 59

60

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Air; for at the first entertainment of inordinate lust, such disorder happens in the blood and veins of men, that their countenances are immediately changed, and their skins are covered with Boils and Scabs, chiefly their Noses, which have so great a correspondency with the noble Members. For this cause the Inhabitants of Sevarambè abominate the least sign of all lasciviousness. I never was amongst a more temperate and orderly Generation. All Passengers therefore use to make a due preparation before they can or are admitted to pass over the Mountains. At this Town of Cola therefore Travellers stop to refresh themselves with those delights which are only allowable in Sporumbe. After three days rest Sermodas had provided all things needful for our passing over the Mountains, some Provisions and Carriages. We had to each man of us an Unicorn appointed to carry us. This Creature by the skill of the Sporvi are brought to be as tame as our Horses. They seemed to me far stronger and more swift, and so sure footed, that though we climbed over Rocks and Mountains, there was none of them seen so much as to stumble or fall. Instead of a Bit and Bridle we held in our hands a silken cord tyed to the horn, which was in the front of the Beast, and at the least motion it would bend and turn, and go a swifter or slower pace, according to our desire. I inquired several things concerning this Animal, which I could never hear of in all Europe. Sermodas gave me great satisfaction, and informed me of its nature, properties, and excellent qualities so that I had brought some over with me into my own Country, had not this transportation been forbidden by the Law of that place. We took our leaves of Cola about noon after a plentiful Dinner. An Unicorn of a Chestnut colour, with many black spots on the right side, and white on the left, was prepared for me to mount upon. At the first when I saw the nimbleness of the Beast, I was afraid to venture my self upon it, and could not be perswaded to make any use of it, till Sermodas assured me, that it was one of the gentlest Creatures in the World, and so extraordinary swift, that we passed over the Mountains through uneven ways into Severambè in a day and a half, being near threescore or fourscore miles. These Mountains are not inhabited by any other thing but Lions, Tygers, Panthers, and such wild and ravenous Beasts as care not much for the society of men. We had the sight of many thousands of them in our way, and saw the Roman Sports of their Theatres and Amphitheatres in the bottoms, when we were on the side of the Hills; for there we met with these furious Beasts contending for their prey. Two Bears were devouring an unhappy Deer, which by chance was by them surprised in a Thicket or Bush of Brambles. They had no sooner seized upon it and overcome it, but in steps the Lion to share in the sport. The two Bears

Part II (1679)

61

would not allow him any part, therefore one steps back to encounter him, whiles the other held the innocent Deer half dead; but the Lion being too strong for the first Bear, the second ran in to rescue him with that fury, that made the Lion leave his hold. The fight lasted about an hour, with such a variety of sport, that we could not pass on in our Journey, till we had seen the end. At last the Lion had so bitten the Master-Bear by the legs, that he was scarce able to stand; which when the Lion perceived, he retreated from him about an hundred paces, and then was too strong for the other Bear, which had unadvisedly pursued him. After a short dispute the Bear ran away, and left the Lion alone to his dinner with the lame Bear in sight, which sent to him many snarling and wishful looks, waiting till this King of Beasts had well satisfied his appetite. But when the Lion had well filled his paunch with the Deers flesh, and that he endeavoured to drag away the rest, the two Bears seeing his greediness, gave the Lion another assault, and obliged him to depart with a good piece of flesh in his mouth, leaving the reminder to the hungry Bears that devoured all to the very Guts. In pursuance of our Journey we were carried over a high Mountain named Sporakas; the top reaches to the second Region of the Air, and is always covered over with Snow and Ice in this hot Country. There is a very clear Fountain of water which yields a plentiful stream running down the Rocks and Mountains of various ascents, and by the fall and diversity of the noises and rumbling of the water, gives to the Passengers a pleasant Musick. When I was within a mile of the place, I thought I had heard some Trumpets, Drums, and warlike Harmony, Flutes and Hoboys, and such other windy and watry Instruments of Musick. What! said I to Sermodas, what means this warlike Musick that we hear? Is there not an Army coming before us? This question caused Sermodas and all the Sporvi to smile. No, said Sermodas, we have no need to fight amongst our selves, this Country is more free from all disputes and contentions than any other under the Sun. We are not pinch’d with those necessities that are apt to make you Europeans so mad and furious one against another. There is nothing of oppression or violence to be seen here. We are never assaulted by any Enemy: All our Thieves, Robbers, and disorderly persons are confined to the skirts of our Dominions where they live to plague one another, but they are not suffered to abide in the middle and bowels of the Kingdom. Since Noahs Flood, whereof we have more certain Memoires than you in Europe, there was never any disorder nor War in this place, or in the Country round about, because of the excellent Orders and useful Laws of this Country, which I shall hereafter represent to you. At the top of the Mountain we lodged in a Tent which Nature had prepared in a Diamant Rock, with several Apartments. The

62

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Rock stood in a plain ground, as high as the great Steeple of Amsterdam. It occupied about an Acre of ground, having many transparent Turrets round about at the middle of it. There was an entrance into it so luminous and glorious, that I thought the Sun had made here its abode, and that there was one within as well as without in the Heavens. In the first room we rested our selves, and unloaded our Unicorns. Some of the company gave them Provender, others kindled us a fire; but Sermodas led me and Maurice by the hand to take a full view of this stately Palace. When we had gone round, and seen the glory of it, and taken notice of the brightness of the Diamant with the crystal Turrets, and steps by which men may climb up to the top, and which are made of Ice congealed and hardened into Crystal by length of time, we returned to our company to take a share of the fire they had kindled; but we were no sooner sate down in the niches about the Wall, but out comes a Leopard followed by a wild Masty from some inner rooms where they had been sleeping all the day. Now the noise of men had awakened them, and obliged them to seek another more quiet retreat. The entrance was stopt with our Fardels and Goods to keep out the cold wind that blew in. When therefore we perceived them running and walking about, we ran to our Arms to defend our selves from their fury. But stay, said Sermodas to me, we need not stir, you shall see pleasant sport, if you will sit quietly. He had no sooner spoken the words, but the Leopard and the wild Masty began to salute one another with grim looks and furious crys, which ended not without a sharp dispute for mastery. Sometimes the one had the upper hand, anon the other would tread his Enemy under foot. They were so furiously set one against another, that they took no notice of our being there, nor of the fire kindled in a corner, till two of our company, by the order of Sermodas, discharged two Guns upon them. The Bullets killed the Leopard, but the wild Dog retreated into the inner rooms, where he remained till the next morning, that we fetched him out with fire, and dispatched him also. We were mightily afraid at their first appearance; but when we perceived how little they regarded us, and how speedily they fell foul of one another, we were well pleased with their company, for the room was large enough for them and us. Sermodas led us into every chamber and corner of this Diamant Palace, where we had the sight of all manner of Prospects and shapes of Beasts and Birds graven there with Natures finger to delight Passengers when they pass over these rough Mountains into Sevarambé. I shall forbear from giving any exact Description of it, for fear this strange account, incredible of it self, should injure the rest of this Story, and cause my Reader to suspect the truth of all other passages of these Travels in this remote Country. The night we spent in such pleasant dreams, as made us Europeans to

Part II (1679)

63

laugh heartily in our sleep. We fancied our selves in a most glorious Paradise, and were not willing to depart the next day. Had not Sermodas promised to bring me back the same way, I had prevailed upon him to have staid there a few nights, that we might have again a taste of our drowsie delights, and of our imaginary happiness, which to us was as good as any real and true. I had almost forgot a Custom observed by all the crooked Sporvi, when they come to this place, to prepare themselves to go down into the glorious and fruitful Vallies of Sevarambé. They wash themselves all over their bodies in a Mineral Fountain of a Water, which to the eye appears very yellow, which Fountain stands at a stones cast from the Rock; and though the Air be cold, this Fountain is hot, and of an excellent virtue: for the Water cleanseth not only the filth of the body, but it hath that influence upon the humors of men, that they are freed from all those extravagant desires of Lust and Lechery, which agrees not with the Air and Manners of the Sevarambi. Before we went to sleep, Sermodas led me and my Companions out to this rare Fountain: Now, Captain, said he to me, strip your self naked, and wash your self in this Water: with these words he shewed me several corners, which seemed to be made purposely for men to bathe themselves and wash their bodies from the irregular inclinations of these other Regions. After we had well cleansed our selves, we returned to our Lodging, and after supper Sermodas gave me this account of this Custom: Captain, said he to me, we are entring into a Climate where men are forced to be abstemious against their wills; where if they harboured those amorous affections which other men have, they meet with so many and such powerful temptations, that they would be far more extravagant than the rest of men, and be more deformed than any people; for the Air and nature of this Country is such, that it sets a mark upon all men that touch any other women than their own. And such Virgins as forget themselves, are spotted visibly to the eyes of all beholders, as you shall see when you come amongst them. For the prevention therefore of this and all other inconveniencies which proceed from lustful appetites, we have a custom to wash our selves in this admirable Fountain, whereof the water hath that virtue to free us from those lecherous inclinations as well as our bodies from filth, and to oblige us to appear amongst the Sevarambi with a quiet and calm spirit: so that none or few dare joyn with any other female but his own. I inquired whether they had not a plurality allowed them: No, answered Sermodas, we in our Country have that allowance, and this causeth us all to be so crooked in our bodies; for this shape proceeds from the crookedness of our reason, which carries us to act and perform such things as agree not, I confess, with the excellency of our humane nature, but only with those

64

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

natural propensities, which we either by Art or resolution should restrain within the compass of a moderate appetite. But you are entring amongst the soberest people of the World, free from all those wild passions which cause so much disturbance in other Lands. They are the perfectest and most beautiful Ladies that ever you beheld, all their Country and all things therein are stately, glorious, pleasant, rich and noble, and so extraordinarily full of innocent delights, that you would be content to abide there for ever. This short account, with the many relations that we had already of this Country, inflamed our desires to be Eyewitnesses of these rare things, and to injoy the stately advantages that this place and Country afford. Therefore the next morning early we washed and prepared our selves for our Journey. But there happened an accident which retarded our Journey for a while. As soon as our Unicorns were loose and ready to be loaded, a Jaccal happened to run by in sight of these Animals. As soon as they perceived it, they ran after it so swiftly, that one of the foremost caught the Jaccal and killed it: for there is a natural Antipathy between these two creatures, as there is between a Hare and a Grey-hound. At the first sight of a Jaccal it is not possible to keep in the Unicorn, who is naturally carried to pursue this ravenous Beast. This gave us the trouble to run about a mile after them to the declive of the Hill, where the Unicorns were all dividing the spoils of the dead Jaccal: one was tearing the tail, another was busie about the Head, another was devouring the guts; they had all shared it amongst them. When we had brought them back, we all mounted, and went on in our Journey. About ten miles in our way, at the top of a very high steep Hill, we saw the great City of Sevarinde, and the beautiful Country where it is situate. Here the Sporvi are wont to perform certain Ceremonies before they dare venture farther; for they imagine, that if they neglected or contemned them, the Great Spirit of the Air, which governs in that Climate, would punish them with some signal token of his displeasure, as he doth such as are given to Debauchery and Lechery. I and my Comrades were all obliged to follow the same Customs and Manners, for fear of giving offence, and for avoiding those deformities and marks which are said to be inflicted upon all Contemners of the Laws of the Land. In our Travelling we had the sight of many strange Creatures, Animals, Birds, and Insects, whereof I knew not so much as the name. The Trees in our Road were hung with Apes and Monkies: the Woods full of aromatick Trees and sweet Perfumes: the Mountains and Wildernesses were inriched with Diamant Rocks and Banks of Crystal: the Rivers and Streams of Water are full of sandy Gold and precious Stones transparent. When I considered how rich and delightful a place

Part II (1679)

65

the descent of these Mountains was, I judged that the Country beyond, and the Bottoms and Vallies must consequently exceed all that I ever beheld on Earth. One thing I cannot omit: we saw in our travelling a Beaver pursued and hunted by a Creature not much unlike in shape to our Rabbets, but of another nature more ravenous and fierce. For Eagles and Vultures of all kinds and sorts, they were here in such numbers, that the Sky was sometimes darkned with them. In the way Sermodas gave me and my Companions several precautions how we should behave our selves amongst the Sevarites. First he advised us to talk but little: For, said he, they are the wisest of all men. If therefore you will gain any esteem, or hinder your selves from being despised, abstain from too much discourse; for if they perceive, by a multiplicity of words, any indiscretion in you, they will contemn you, and not think you worthy to abide in the Land, much less to be honoured by them. Again, take heed of swearing, cursing, or damning; for such irregularities in language were never yet admitted into that Land. They spue or banish out all disorderly persons, and confine them to the Borders. Observe next to do as you see other men, and take heed you be not singular in any practices: but when once you are admonished by them, imitate them, and follow their good advices; for in so doing, you will preserve your selves in their esteem, and shew them respect. Obstinacy and singularity are vices not known amongst them as they are amongst you Europeans. Take heed that you drink not too much of the delicious Wines of the Country, but use all things with abstinence and moderation. Refuse not any gifts which they will bestow upon you; for they are all noble and generous in their behaviour and actions, and love not to see their favours slighted by Strangers. I shall, said Sermodas, inform you what to do, and give you other directions, as I shall see occasion, that you may pass with credit through the Country of the Sevarambi. When he had ended his discourse, we thanked him for his kindness, and promised him our ready obedience to all that he should require from us. He seemed to be well satisfied with our compliance with him from the beginning. Thus we travelled along till we came to the foot of these high Mountains to the passage of a large River three times bigger than the Danube or the Rhyne. It is called by the Sporvi Cocab, and by the Sevarambi Rocara. It runs at the bottom of the Hills, and incompasseth the Kingdom of the Sevarites almost round, till it meets with another large River, which together unite their streams, and fall into the Pacifick Sea beyond the Streights of Magellan, about one hundred Leagues Southwards. At Sunsetting we came to the banks of the River, but could not get over till the next day; for there is no Bridge suffered to be made, because the Sevarites are not willing to give such an easie access into their

66

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Country. They are afraid of two things, of the Vices of Strangers, and of their Diseases, which causes them to set Guards at the mouth of their Rivers, and all the ordinary Passes, lest a sudden Invasion should disorder their quiet and earthly tranquility. This caused us to stop upon the sides of the River till the morning; for the Boat which was to carry us over and our company, was then on the other side, and after Sun-set there can no man be admitted into this happy Country: besides there are many things to be examined of Strangers before they can be received into the Boat. We lodged therefore all night at the foot of the Mountains in a beautiful Arbour or Bower of Jesmine mixed with Rose-trees, which in this place flourish and bear all the year long; for here neither Snow nor Frost is to be seen, nor such cruel winds as hinder the Fruits of the Earth. The Bower was about an hundred paces from side to side, so that our Unicorns and Goods lay and rested with us in the same place all night. Whiles our Supper was providing, Sermodas took me and my Companions to walk with him near the Rivers side, and to discourse with me about the Wonders of Nature, the delightsomness of the Prospect, the clearness of the River-water, the sweet harmony of the Evening-birds, the pleasant noise of the Crystal streams, together with the comfortable brieses of Wind, which amongst the branches of the Chestnut, Orange, Cedar, Elm, Oak, and other Trees, which here upon the sides of the Mountains grow naturally without planting, and promiscuously together, made such an Angelical Musick, that we imagined our selves in Paradise, and wonderfully contributed to our satisfaction in our Walk. Sermodas being in the middle of us, asked how we liked this abode: It is, replied Maurice, the most glorious that I ever was in. You will see and know something more when you get over the River, and behold the excellency of those things which are there confined. I asked him how it came to pass, that we in Europe were so ignorant of this Country, and why this should excel all others. This question, replied Sermodas, requires a long discourse to give an answer to it; but I will not leave you without some satisfaction. You must know, that when Adam, the first man, had offended his God by disobedience, he shut him out of the earthly Paradise, and would not suffer him nor his wicked Posterity to injoy the pleasures of that pleasant abode. They had liberty to inhabit round about, but for two thousand years Paradise was guarded in such a manner, that none could enter into it all that time. Afterwards came the Flood, which turned and altered Mountains and Vallies; therefore we have some Records that tell us, that the earthly Paradise, which, during the old World, was in Asia, was then transported hither, and all those rare Trees, with the Jewels and Riches, were carried hither by Angels, and planted in this remote corner. And because there was no man then fit

Part II (1679)

67

to inhabit so blessed a place, of the Sons of Noah, a new couple were formed, not out of the slimy Earth as the former, but out of a purer and more delicate substance, out of some Metal mixed with Gold and Silver: hence it is, that their bodies are so clean, pure, glorious, and splendid as you shall see. This couple, named Chericus and Salmoda, are the Parents of all the Sevarites; from their loins proceed the numbers of beautiful men and women, which you shall see on the other side of the River. They had an hundred Sons and as many Daughters, and lived, by our Records, two thousand years; afterwards he was buried in the City of Sevarinde, where you shall see his Sepulchre. When men and women began to increase, his eldest Son Sevarias appointed Laws for men to govern their actions, and to avoid all kind of confusion. These Laws we can shew you in our Registers, subscribed by all the men of those days. In his time there happened some Sons of Noah to be carried by the stormy winds upon these Coasts. At their landing one of them met with a beautiful Virgin called Serissa, whom he ravished and got with child. She brought forth Twins, a Boy named Bubo and a Girl called Chrestona. These two being crooked, could not meet with Matches amongst the Sevarambi, who despised them: Therefore when they came to the Age of thirty they matched and increased strangely. When Sevarias our Lawgiver saw how numerous they were like to be, being a just man, would not destroy them, neither would he suffer the pure Race of the Sevarambi to be defiled or mixed with the filthy Generations of the other part of the World. He sent away Bubo and Chrestona with their old European Father and their Mother Serissa, with all their Children and Grand children to build the City of Sporunde, and to inhabit the Country on this side the River, appointing a certain Tribute for us to pay as an Acknowledgment that we are descended partly from the same stock: hence it is, that we are all so deformed, and a little crooked, and that the true Sevarites will not be perswaded to joyn with us in Marriage, and yet they love us as brethren, and have a natural inclination for all men in general, which obliges them to be courteous, kind, affable, liberal, and bountiful to them all when they happen to fall into their hands. Sevarias our wise Law-giver appointed to us distinct Laws, and in some respects contrary to the rest of the Sevarites according to the crookedness of our European nature, which he saw could not live up to that natural Sanctity which became us as men. He gave us therefore liberty to make the vilest of our female Sex Slaves for our conveniency in times of need, and in travelling up and down our Country; but such practices as these are not agreeable with the strictness of the lives of the rest of the Sevarambi, they abominate such mixtures; and though their Country inclines them as much as any to the flesh, they cannot be perswaded to make use of it out of the rules and

68

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

ways prescribed to them. And if at any time they forget themselves by chance, the Air and Country is so great an enemy to such practices, that it distinguisheth them from all the rest by some visible mark upon their Noses or Foreheads, which causeth them to be immediately banished out of the Country to the Confines over another River on the other side of the Kingdom, where they have the liberty to live deprived of all the pleasures of this earthly Paradise. Thither are confined all the disorderly persons, the lecherous, the filthy, and base, each sort have their distinct places of abode, or Islands from whence they are not suffered to depart till they dye naturally: For our wise and ever glorious Law-giver commanded us not to put men to death for any mistake, forgetfulness, or miscarriage of their lives. Killing is permitted by our Laws only in defence of our own persons; all other Offenders against the Municipal Laws of the Land are banished to the Borders, where they live to repent them of their wickedness, and most times dye good men. I shall give you a farther account of the excellent Laws and Manners of the Sevarites, when we shall be on the other side amongst them; for they will not be perswaded to venture over into these parts, for fear of infecting themselves with Foreign Customs and Manners, and the vicious Air, which is every where but in Sevarambé. But, Captain, said Sermodas to me, when we had walked about a mile from our Company, it is time for us to visit them again, for yonder comes a furious Company down the Mountains, which will force us to a retreat. I looked and saw a Party of Jaccals followed by two old Lions and some young ones running apace towards us, howling as if they had been mad: hunger makes them more furious and greedy than otherwise they would be; for they increase so fast, that in the Woods and Retreats there is not sufficient food for them all to fill their Paunches every day. Towards the dawning of the day they burst out of their Caves and Holes to seek their necessary provisions for them and their young ones. The foremost were not above an hundred paces from us when they first declared their coming with fearful out-crys, which were signs to the Lions round about, that they had discovered some prey. We were then without Weapon, and never dreamed of any danger in so pleasant an abode. All the wild Beasts understood the Alarm of their fore-runners, and hasted to the place where the Jaccals had made a noise. A mixture of all sorts followed them close at the heels, Lions, Bears, Tygers, Elks, Leopards, and some other sorts which I shall hereafter describe. It was not time for us to stay there any longer, and see our danger hasten upon us. We took our selves to our heels, and ran with Sermodas towards our Bower, where all the Sporvi had put themselves in a posture of defence as soon as they heard the noise. But we could not make such haste, but one of the foremost Leopards caught Maurice by

Part II (1679)

69

the Coat, and tore off a piece, which the furious beast devoured, and gave him time to escape; another bit me by the Buttocks, and held me so fast, that I could not get away from him. In the mean while all my Company run before, every one shifting for himself. I thought my self lost, but I was resolved to struggle for my life. The less hopes I saw of escaping, because several Companies of other ravenous Beasts were near at hand. I turned therefore my self and pulled the Leopard by the Ears, thrusting one of my fingers into his right Eye. The pain forced him to let go his hold, which as soon as he had done, he leaped upon me with his open Jaws, into which I thrust my right hand and took hold of the Tongue, necessity adding more strength to my Arm, I pluckt it by the root whiles the beast held me with his Paws. At that instant six roaring Lions, and three Bears, with an infinite number of Jaccals, had overtaken and surrounded me, but none offered to touch me. I flung amongst them the Leopards tongue, which they all greedily catched at with a short dispute, which of them should have it. This gave me leisure to run about a dozen paces from them before they had ended it. As soon as a Lion had taken it for his share, the rest fell foul upon the Leopard, which was become so troublesom to them, because of his extraordinary howling, that they minded me not so much, only an old Bear made after me, and overtook me. When I saw Sermodas and Maurice, and all the Company hastening with Weapons to my rescue, their sight and coming gave me some hopes of escaping out of the Jaws of an unavoidable death. The Bear gallopped after me, and was just at my very heels, when I stumbled and fell flat on my face, the Bears fury caused him to run about a dozen paces beyond me over my body, before it could stop; then were Sermodas, Maurice, and all the rest come in with their Guns, and other Weapons, and one for my self. As soon as I had got a Sword in my hand, I ran at the Bear, and wounded the beast in the right Thigh at the first blow, but at the second I thrust it in at the breast, and wounded him at the heart. In the mean while all our Company were not idle, they fell upon the wild Beasts with their Swords and Halberts in their hands, and killed in a short time twenty Lions, thirteen Bears, and forty Jaccals, with threescore other sort of furious and ravenous Creatures. We found dead the next day one like a Bull with six Horns, two small ones a little above the Nose, two a little bigger under the Eyes, and two great ones upon his Head. This beast is called Susa, and lives upon the spoils of other Animals. We saw another having a Head like a Lion, a Skin like a Crocodile, and a Tail as a Fox as red as blood, the Claws were bent in, but when they were stretched out, they were about a foot long, and as sharp as Needles. Sermodas told me, that this was the most furious beast in all the World; for nothing can escape out of its Jaws and Claws, it tears in pieces all that it meets with,

70

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

and were it not that it hath but a small appetite, it would devour all the Lions of the Woods. He told me, that the Sporvi called it Forabab, and that there are no Females of them to be found, because they are begot by a mixture of Lions and other Animals which copulate together. We killed two other beasts as big as ordinary Masties, but so extraordinary furious, that none are to be compared to them. We continued the slaughter near two hours, rescuing one another when the wild beasts were too hard for any of us, and had worsted us. The rest we put to flight, having wounded most of them: three of the Sporvi in our company were bit in their Limbs, and six of us run through the Arm with the Claws of the Lions. After this fierce Encounter, which was not above three stones cast from our Bower, we went, very joyful to have escaped the danger, to refresh our selves with good Supper of Roast meat and Fruit, which was ready prepared for us. Sermodas embraced me and Maurice, expressing much joy for our escape out of this great danger, because none of us had been devoured by these furious Inhabitants of the Woods. After Supper he walked into the Air, and met with a Shrub tree upon the bank of the River, called Mezola, he took a stick from it, and rubbed the Wound of my Buttocks, and before the morning I was perfectly cured of my Wounds, as all the rest of the men hurt by the beasts: For had he not applied this to our Wounds, we should have been lame, and hindred thereby from passing over the River into Sevarambé. We laid our selves down upon the Banks and Beds of Earth made under the Bower for Strangers to rest themselves, and slept all night, only we were interrupted by the howlings of strange Creatures and beasts of prey, who ranged about the Bower, attempting to enter in, but we had stopt the passages and ways, so that there was no entrance for any of them. The next morning a large Boat was on this side to carry us over with five grave Signiors, two came to our Bower to call to us before we were up, and visit us. The chief Owner of the Boat was named Kibbus. As soon as we heard them we rose and dressed our selves. Sermodas went out to give Kibbus an account of our persons and misfortunes: which when he had understood, he entred in with him, and took us by the hand and kissed us, bidding us be of good chear, and that his Prince would be joyful to see us. We went with him to see the slaughter of the wild beasts which we stripped of their skins, because the Sevarambi are great Lovers of Furs; and this was a noble Present, which we intended to give to their King. As soon as we had dispatched our business, Kibbus with his Companions called us one after another to ask us, whether we had any infirmities or distemper in our bodies: after this he caused us to wash in a Fountain hard by, and gave us green Gowns, which he had in his Boat on purpose for all Travellers, buttoned before with rich Buttons of Jasper

Part II (1679)

71

stones. They were perfumed in such an extraordinary manner, that I never saw the like. After this and some previous Ceremonies, we were admitted with our Unicorns into his wide and large Boat, and in an instant we were carried over to a small Town, where I beheld the most beautiful men and women of the World. They all knowing us to be Strangers, of a Foreign Country, went to the banks of the River to salute and welcome us. At the head of them was a grave Gentleman with ruddy cheeks, and a comely countenance, and a long beard of bright hair, which in the Sun shined as if they had been of gold: he was attended upon by six most beautiful tall young Men, who were followed by four of the female Sex, whom I cannot liken to any but to Angels: they surpassed all that I ever beheld with my eyes on earth. These were his Children. They took Maurice and my self by the hand, asked of our welfare and Country, and spoke to us in very good French. I was glad to meet in so remote a place a man that spoke that Language, I desired to know his Name: My Name, said he, is Zidi Marbet. All the rest of the Town did him Obeisance when he passed by them; for he was a man of great Riches and Authority, and of an excellent Memory and Wit. Sermodas had some private discourse with him near the River; afterwards he marched with us into his Town to his Palace, the most glorious thing that I ever beheld, and yet that was nothing to what I saw afterwards. The Town lay upon the banks of the River, and had six uniform Streets abutting to the Water. The Houses were for the most part built all of white and black Marble, very curious to the eye: they were covered over with a shining Slate, which seemed to be gilt with Gold before every door. In a wide empty place grew several aromatick and excellent rare Trees for pleasure and profit. We all admired to see the place, sometimes we stood astonished at the beauty of the men and women, anon we were ravished with the glorious and delightsom abodes. Wherever we cast our eyes, we saw nothing but that which deserved our wonder and admiration. Zidi Marbet walked with us with his company, and led us to his Palace, which excelled all the other houses in beauty. At our entrance we saw two Posts of pure Ivory, ring’d round with Gold, with a little Court paved with white and black Marble. The House was built almost in the same manner as the rest, but surrounded with the most beautiful Trees, and moted with a Draw-bridge of black Wood like Ebeny, having Chains of Gold instead of Iron. In the Water the Fish were in such plenty, and so great, that we saw hundreds as we passed by. At our first entrance we stood in amaze to behold the glory of the inside, we could not sufficiently admire the beauty and splendor of the rich Moveables, the Hangings and Tapistry overlaid with Gold and precious Stones, with all other things which can never be believed, if I should offer to relate them. Here we stopped seven days, till we had

72

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

News from Sevarinde, whither we had sent word of our Arrival, to know the Kings Pleasure. In the mean while I cannot express the delights which were given to every day; the sweet Concerts of Musick, the pleasant Walks about the Town, the Recreations of Hunting, Fishing, Hawking, and other Sports, were not wanting to us with many other Pasttimes. Zidi Marbet and his whole Family were extraordinary civil to us. The Town were not wanting in their respects. At the end of seven days, Sermodas our Guide, with the rest of our Company, set forward towards Sevarinde, where we arrived in six days. The Journey was the most pleasant that ever I had been in. There was scarce any manner of Recreation or innocent Pleasure belonging to our bodies, but we found it in the way. All our senses were ravished with their delights, the Ears with the sweet Harmony and Tunes of all manner of Singing-birds, with the grateful Crys of all sorts of Creatures: our Eyes beheld all the most glorious Sights which are to be seen in all the Earth: the Fields, the Towns, and Cities, the Woods, the Vallies, and Mountains refreshed our Eye-sight with new objects of pleasure and wonder at every moment: our Noses met with the rarest Perfumes; every Bush and corner yielded to us new delights of this kind. For our Taste we had every where such Dainties and rare Wines, that are not to be expressed. One thing I took great notice of, That all those Creatures which are elsewhere, are to be seen in this earthly Paradise; as Lions, Bears, Wolves, Jaccals, &c. and tame beasts, as Sheep, Cows, Camels, Oxen, Horses, &c. but they are not of the same nature, as elsewhere. The wild beasts, as soon as they swim over the River of Rocara, lose all their fierce dispositions, and become as harmless and mild as Lambs; for they feed upon grass and Insects, without offering to meddle with any living Animal. Likewise they, as well as the tame beasts, have another cry, not so harsh and unpleasant, as every where else. Their crys are more grateful to the ear. All things, in a word, are so ordered, as if they were purposely intended to delight, and increase the pleasure of the Inhabitants. We saw in our Journey many strange birds and tame beasts, not to be seen in any other part of the World. The Fields almost in every place are watered with fresh Streams and Chanels, full of all manner of fresh water fish: so that in every Town and Village we saw many Fish-ponds incompassed about with the rarest Trees in Nature. The ground is so extraordinary fruitful, that it is ordinary for them to gather three or four Crops every year of several sorts of grain. So that it is no wonder, if men and creatures are here so numerous. Every two miles we met with a good Town in our way, some more, some less glorious than the rest; but built so regular and uniform, that I judged that these Sevarites were not ignorant of the humane Sciences and Arts, which are imperfectly known in

Part II (1679)

73

other parts of the World. Sermodas informed me, that for Philosophy, the Mathematicks, Astrology, and the rest, they were trained up in them from their youth. They chiefly excel in all delightful Sciences and Arts, as Musick and the Mathematicks. Every Child about fourteen years of age can play upon all manner of Instruments, with that dexterity and nimbleness, that I have often wondered to look upon them, and hear such ravishing Tunes and Airs, which our Musicians are not acquainted with. They are not much skilled in Physick, nor in those Arts, which mens Vices and Diseases cause the Europeans to inquire into; for seldom any distemper seizeth upon them, till they fall away with old age, and drop into their graves. I never saw any deformity amongst them, but such variety of Beauties both in men and women, that we were all ravished to look upon them. These Beauties in the female Sex were not pitiful and effeminate, as amongst our women; but accompanied with a great deal of Majesty, Modesty, and Gravity together. It is not possible to instance all the several particulars and instances of their beauty; for there was as great a variety in that excellency of the body, as there is a variety and diversity in the deformity of ours in Europe. Sermodas entertained us in our Road with many delightful and satisfying Stories concerning these Sevarites. But I intend to represent them in the several Chapters or Heads unto which they properly belong. We had in our Journey a sight of many Eagles and Vultures; but I was told, that they prey upon nothing but Insects: and for venomous creatures, there are none to be found. They know not what it is to live always in fear, to be poysoned by Asps, Scorpions, Snakes, or to be devoured by flying Serpents and Crocodiles, which in other Kingdoms swallow man and beast. So that in all respects this Country is the happiest, the most pleasant, and abounds with so many necessaries to the life of man, that it is not possible to imagine any thing more. We saw many Diamant Rocks in our way, with which the Inhabitants imbellish their Houses. We saw some Rocks of Jasper, of Sardonyx, of Beryl, and Emerald; for Gold and Silver and Brass, they find these Metals, but rough, as plentifully as we do in other Countries, stones. But as they never make use of Money, they refine the Gold for no other purpose but to adorn themselves and their Dwellings, and for other civil uses. Silver they have in great abundance, and Brass much more easie to be purified than ours in Europe or America, because Nature being hotter and more powerful, performs that in the bosom of the Earth which belongs to our Refiners to do, and fits the Metal for their use with a small alteration and labour. All manner of precious Stones are to be found here in the High-ways, in such abundance, that had our Merchants liberty to trade into these parts, they would bring down the price of

74

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Jewels, that they would not be looked upon as they are for such rich Commodities. The Cattle and the Sheep here are far bigger and better than ours, and all their tame beasts; but when they want any thing, they exchange with one another: and if they are not able to purchase it in that manner, they have all that great love and affection for one another, that they never deny things that may benefit the publick Society or any of the Sevarites. There is amongst them so much love, sincerity, good correspondence, that no Nation hath the like besides themselves. Hence it is, that poverty and want are not known amongst them. They are great Lovers of Hospitality, and strive to excel one another in this Vertue. An Example of this we had in our way to Sevarinde; for in a great Town, named Bubasti, ten of the Chief men contended with one another in civil manner to have us to lodge at their houses, which I may justly call Palaces: and to content them all we were forced to divide our selves, and to accept of all their kindnesses; neither could we get away from them in a day, they had so many new inventions and Recreations to retard us till the Evening, and then they would not suffer us to depart till the next morning. Our first stage was at Foralar, thirty miles from the River, where we met with Excellencies and Riches beyond all belief and imagination. The next was Fustad, about five and thirty miles from Foralar. The third was Brobas, a large City well walled, and so glorious to the eye when the Sun shines, that it dazles it. The fourth night we reached as far as Crocarambe. The fifth we entred into Bubasti: And the sixth day about noon we were received and welcomed into Sevarinde. As soon as we were arrived and entred into the Palace appointed for our abode, men and women of all sorts, but of rare and compleat beauty, came in to welcome us, bringing with them of the Fruits of the Country. Amongst them a party of Musicians, a dozen in number entred the Hall, where we were refreshing our selves, and admiring all the Excellencies before our eyes, and the Divine Beauty of those incarnate Angels, the Women of that place. At the first they saluted us with a short Speech to this purpose in their own Language, which was immediately interpreted to us by a stander by in Spanish. “Welcome, noble Strangers, to our City of Sevarinde, let not your misfortunes and losses grieve you, the great Being of Beings hath sent you to discover what I understand was never known to your World. You shall see by experience the Generosity and brave minds of the Sevarambi. We rejoyce to have an occasion of imitating our bountiful God, and express our Liberalities to his Creatures, and our kindness to men, though of another World and Parentage. This brings me and my Companions into this place, and at this time to mitigate your sorrows, and cause you to forget your shipwrack and calamity.” With these words

Part II (1679)

75

he made a grave bow and nodded to the rest of his Comrades and immediately the Musick began to play so sweetly, that we reckoned our selves in Heaven, and not upon Earth. This Sport continued about two hours with an interruption of other Sports. We tasted there also some of the most delicious Wines of the World; they grow not as ours upon shrubs and short stumps, but upon great Trees as high as the Cedar and Oaktrees; neither have they any trouble with them to manure or cut them, for the Wine-tree brings forth of its own accord plentifully. In an Orchard of these kinds of Trees about the compass of an Acre, they have sometimes ten Tun of this rare Wine, as clear as Crystal, but so extraordinary strong and pleasant, that the Vin de la Ciudad of Paris, nor the Rhenish, nor Frontiniack, nor Florence, nor Canary, nor any other sorts of Wine of Asia, or Europe are to be compared to this Divine Nectar, which so refreshes Nature, and strengthens the body, that the oldest persons in that Country seem to be but young. Their age is discoverable only by their grey hairs and long beards, which they are not to cut by the Law of the Land. That evening Sevarminas sent us a Messenger to know of our welfare, advising us to prepare our selves for the next morning to wait upon him, for he was very desirous to see us. Sermodas had been with him, and had given him an account of us, and of our behaviour since our landing in Sporumbè and our entrance in Sevarambé. At his return to us, after Supper we desired him to give us an exact account of the extent of the Dominions of his King Sevarminas, and of the furthermost bounds of his Empire. In answer to your request, said Sermodas to us, I must tell you, That we have now a Prince called Sevarminas, lineally descended from our wise Law-giver Sevarias: this is the seventh thousand five hundred and ninth King, who hath since that time reigned in this Land. His Government between the Rivers are three-score and five Principalities: the chief are Rostaki in the West, Shafstati on the North towards the Pacifick Sea, Roblati on the East, and Manasti on the South. These are the four principal Parts of the Kingdom commanded by four chief Officers, who are to have an inspection over the other lesser Divisions. These wait upon Sevarminas, and are of his Privy Council. The other Chieftains are to reside in their several Principalities, and take care to do Justice, and punish all Offenders with Banishment to their several places appointed for their retreat. Besides these Jurisdictions within the Rivers, there are several other places belonging to Sevarminas, which acknowledge him for their Supreme Lord; but they are full of all banished men, Offenders of the Law, and Malefactors. There is the Province of the Sporvi which you have seen already, commanded by the Noble Albicormas: the next to us is the Island of the Fornicators, whom these Sevarambi cannot endure. These all appear with their rotten Noses and

76

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

poysoned Faces, so that they are ashamed to shew themselves amongst perfect men. They live in Woods and dark Caves, men and women promiscuously, without any regard to their honesty, which they have had no care to preserve. They have an ill favour’d old Hag for their Governess, a filthy Bawd, named Brustana. Their Country affords them many good things, so that they live without much labour; but are so deformed and infectious, that none dares venture amongst them, who hath any regard to the safety of his own person or Honour. When amongst the Sevarites any, either man or woman, breaks the Law by any such fleshly liberty, they are immediately sent over and landed there, from whence they cannot possibly return, because there is no Boat dares carry them from thence. In this place they have a freedom to do what they list, and to please themselves with the choice of persons of their own disposition and temper without any restraint. The next Province is that of the Knaves, a cunning sort of men, who are all upon catches, continually plotting the mischief of others. When there is the least suspicion of any such person in a Province of the Sevarites, they never leave till they have found him out, and sent him to this place, where he is commanded by Marabo: when any excels in Knavery, he is there promoted in his Court to Offices of Honour and Trust. These have the largest and best Province belonging to Sevarminas beyond the River; for they are numerous and increase daily in number of men and in Lands towards the South. They dispossessed another Generation of covetous Rascals, who had been banished from among the Sevarambi, and had laid great improvement upon their Lands, having built many good Towns and Cities. When the Knaves, their Neighbours, had understood it, they caught it from them, and drove them out of it by a Trick, sending the Covetous to live in their Country empty of Inhabitants. The next is the Province of disorderly persons troubled with the distempers of discontent, fury, ambition, and other Vices. Sevarminas is forced to keep a Guard upon their Borders, and to place next to them the stoutest and most warlike souls, for fear of a sudden irruption. There are thirteen other large Provinces filled with other kind of men; but I forbear to speak of them till I shall give you an account of an attempt which the bordering Provinces made once to dispossess King Sevarminas of his Throne, and to seize upon the Territories of the unspotted Sevarites, who were forced to arm themselves, and drive those disorderly Villains into their own Nests, where they are now confined. Since that time care hath been taken to build such Walls and Forts, as that they cannot now easily pass over to trouble the Peace of the Sevarites. I had almost forgotten to speak of the large Province of Fools, which lies directly South from Sevarindé. If any person, by a mischance, becomes crack-brain’d or dis-

Part II (1679)

77

temper’d with any kind of folly, he is condemned to be transported to the island of Cracos, where he is to spend all his days in what Exercises please him best. The Country affords him all Necessaries without pains: therefore the Fools lead a pleasant life in the Woods and Medows. Before we go out of the Kingdom, I will, said Sermodas, beg leave of Sevarminas to have a Guard, and visit the Provinces of Knaves and Fools, where you shall see such Tricks and Sports, as you never saw the like. And if you desire to visit any other part of the Kingdom, I will desire leave from our mighty King, who will take care to provide for your safety in going and coming. For though in this happy Paradise there is nothing of evil, all things are answerable to the excellent and kind nature of the Inhabitants; yet round about the Borders in the adjoyning Islands and Provinces, there is as much Disturbance, War, Tumult, and Unquietness, as in any part of your Northern World; for the Sevarambi have a Law to send thither all those persons who desire to cause any alteration in their Government or Manners, or who live not according to the strict Rules which they have received from their Forefathers, and which by no means they will be perswaded to change. Some of these banished men, after a certain number of years, and a visible sign of Reformation, have leave to return, and to be admitted again amongst the Sevarambi; but others are so unquiet and unruly, that they are a trouble to themselves, and all that are concerned with them. Therefore our Princes and Governors will not admit them again, for fear they should relapse into the same evils, and disturb this Kingdom, which for many thousand years hath continued in peace and prosperity without alteration by the excellent Laws of our Great and wise Sevarias, the first Monarch of this happy Land. Hence it is, that we never have any change of chief Governours or Governments, every one knows his duty, his place and abilities, and is fully satisfied with the advantages that he expects from thence. Here is no oppression nor violence, the least inclination of that unnatural disposition sends men away to the Borders to prevent future mischiefs. Neither have the Sevarites that wicked custom of coining Money, and buying and selling all things with money, the root of all Northern evils. They will not admit of any such weed to grow in this Land, but things are exchanged for one another. And you have seen since your entrance, there is so great an abundance of all good things, that men must be lovers of wickedness, that can be evil in the midst of such a plenty of goodness where it overflows. But I must tell you, said Sermodas, of one thing more, which causeth us to continue in peace: we are not subject to the wicked attempts and temptations of any evil Spirit, as you are in the Northern World. Those dangerous Imps care not to visit this Southern part; for they have been so often caught in the snares here, that they dread the

78

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

very sight of the Sevarites, or of their Country. You, I understand, in the Northern parts lay most of your miscarriages at the Devils door, who hath a room in many of your habitations, and a dwelling in every place and corner; but we are altogether free from his company, and temptations. Sometimes it is true, he sends some loose Devils to debauch a few indiscreet persons, but then we send them away immediately to their proper places with the Fiend in their company. But, said Maurice, how can you keep the Devils out of your Land? They fly in the empty Air, and go by night, as well as by day. Sermodas answered, Our eyes are better than yours, but the Sevarites of all men have the most refined senses. They can see when the Spirits come amongst them; for this purpose there is a constant Guard kept in all the usual Roads upon the Borders of the Sevarites, four hundred Conspirers, if I may so call them, are kept in constant Pay to drive away the Devil with Spells, when he ventures to approach upon the Borders. They have a particular Art to command the evil Spirits, which no man knows but themselves. It is true, some of the peeping and crafty Rascals creep into this Land through by ways out of the usual Roads; but when the Sevarites catch them, they torment them sufficiently, and deal with them as with Spies, without any compassion of them: so that they seldom return to this place again, but by their cruel entertainment they keep all their other Comrades from entring in amongst the Sevarambi. I know that in your Countries you have not that care nor vigilancy of your selves for your own good. Hence it is, that all sorts of Devils have so great an interest in your parts, and that you can scarce stir without meeting one or many in your way. Besides, this Country between the Rivers bears an aromatick Tree, which the Devils cannot endure; for it sends up into the Air such a strong smell, that they are ready to choke when they draw near to a place where it grows, and you shall see that the Inhabitants have been advised by their wise Sevarias, to plant one in every Garden and side of their Houses. The Tree is named Crassarabi, and bears a leaf like a Palm-leaf, but is full of prickles as a Thorn and Bramble-bush. The Sevarites have this way to torture the poor Devils that unhappily fall into their hands: they tye them with a Cord invisible to you, but visible to them, answerable to the substance of the Devils, which is airy, and then bind them to this Tree, where they slash them with a Rod cut out of the branches, which causes them to howl most dreadfully. We may chance to give you a sight of this action, if you travel into the Country towards the Borders. Another way they have to plague and imprison them, by making Gun-powder; for when the Devils come into a Land, they always draw to that place where there is the greatest noise and disturbance, for there they imagine they may make a good interest. Now there is no greater noise in this Land

Part II (1679)

79

than this of the Gun-powder, which we make not as you do in Europe, but with a wheel, as you may see, if you travel into the Land. Sometimes therefore it happens, that the silliest of them prying too near into the work, either to understand the Art, or to know what the Sevarites are doing, they are many times caught by their ears, and I have known half a dozen wound into a grain of Gunpowder, and imprisoned so close, that they could not possibly get away, till the powder took fire. The best and strongest powder hath always some of these airy Beings shut up. This causeth the destruction that follows when Gun-powder takes fire; for then the Devils being released, break out with a vengeance, and tear in pieces all that dare stand in their way. The Sevarites have many other ways to punish them for the insolences and wickednesses which they have committed in the World; but when I have an opportunity, I shall give you an account of that. I could wish, said Maurice, that our Country-men in Europe knew how to deal with these subtle Creatures, and how to be revenged for the continual wrongs which they daily receive from their malice and evil suggestions. It is a question, said I, whether many of them would make use of that Art, if they knew it; for a great many are so pleased with their company and suggestions, that they seek them rather, than to endeavour to be rid of them. Well, said Sermodas, let them be in love with their own mischief and danger, the Sevarites are seldom taken and deceived by their allurements: and if at any time they are carried to any wickedness, they are banished; and if the Devil be caught, he is severely tortured. This good order and many others, when I shall speak to you of their Laws, preserves happiness, peace, and prosperity in this Country. This Discourse pleased us well, and caused us to intreat Sermodas to take some other time to inform us of the Laws of the Sevarites. We asked him several other questions concerning their Government within the Rivers, concerning their Customs and Tributes, and whether all the Country was so happy and rich as that which we had already beheld. He answered to all questions so exactly, that we thought our selves much obliged to him for his singular favour. He was well acquainted with all things, for he had been imployed about the Affairs of Sevarminas from his infancy, and was often sent to carry the Tribute to his Court. He told us, that the Kings Revenues were certain, and that from all parts men brought to him all sorts of Necessaries for him and his numerous Court. That he never had any need to demand more, for his Expences were as regular as his Incomes; and that if he should want any thing more, there is none of his Subjects, from the meanest to the highest, but would think himself highly honoured, if he would accept of all that they have. But as he is a great Lover of Justice and Equity, he is content with the ancient

80

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Reversions of the Provinces, which are sufficient to cause him and his Court to live in great abundance and extraordinary Splendour, which all the Sevarites looked upon as their greatest Glory. Sevarminas, said he, is a middle-aged man, and hath reigned in this place twenty two years, with the general love of all his Subjects. He is adored by us all as our visible God. His Fathers name was Seravino, a Prince of an extraordinary Beauty; he reigned amongst us thirty years, and mightily inlarged the Palace and Dwelling of the Kings of this Country. You shall see to morrow a place which hath not its parallel on Earth for Riches and humane Glory, and you shall see a Prince and such noble Attendants, that your eyes never looked upon any thing, nor persons more deserving admiration. After this discourse, Sermodas led us all to our Chambers, where we had all things convenient for us, and shewing us in a great wide room hung with Cloth of Gold, each mans Bed of embroidered Silver for him to rest till the next morning, he took his leave of us, and bid us good night. We rested very sweetly without any disturbance till the morning, when a Concert of Musick in the next Chamber awakened us. Sermodas opened first our door, and entred our Room, desiring us to get up and put on the Apparel which he had brought to us. Whiles we were dressing of our selves, a Messenger came from King Sevarminas to hasten us away, because he intended to give us Audience, and then to take some Recreation before Dinner. At the time of our appearance he appointed ten Senators of his City, men of great Gravity and Worth, to attend upon us, and lead us to him. We were conducted through the Streets full of Sevarites, who seldom see Strangers in those parts. Their curiosity caused them to throng together to look upon us: we marched thus about half a mile through the most splendid places, and had the sight of so many rare objects, that the World cannot afford the like. The number of Jewels and precious Stones, the quantity of Gold, Silver, the excellency of the Structures, Arches, Palaces, and Temples dedicated to their God, are beyond all credit and imagination of men. But nothing surprised us so much as to look upon the Royal Court and the glory of it. It stands upon a small rising incompassed about with a deep River, and walled three times round with square stones cut out of a Diamant Rock about six foot square, and polished so well, that at the first approach our eyes could not endure the brightness of the place when the Sun shines clear without a cloud. Some other precious Stones were intermixed of green and red colours, but all transparent. There was but one entrance over the River by a Bridge. The first Gate was full of Ivory Pillars and Supporters, and embellished with large stones, black and white Marble. Round about in the void space were delicate Walks, and Gardens full of strange sorts of Trees, some yellow, others green, some black, others white, and shew-

Part II (1679)

81

ing to the eye such a variety of beautiful colours, that it is the most glorious Prospect of the World. The second Wall was all of a red stone, but bright and shining. The third and innermost Wall was as white as Snow, like to our Alabaster, but of a stone which is not to be found in any part of the Northern World. In the empty places round about between the Walls, grew all manner of Trees for pleasure or profit, with some that are not to be seen elsewhere. The Kings Palace stood within these three Inclosures, having round about it a large Green with several Walks of sandy Gold and stately Images of Alabaster and Porphyry, representing all manner of shapes, as beasts, birds, and men in most actions of their life. These Images stood upon Bases of Saphir, and the Images were all made of a transparent hard stone as clear as Crystal. You may imagine, that at our first entrance, the Sun shining in its greatest brightness upon them, we were cast into a sudden maze, and surprised at the unexpected view of so many glorious things. The Palace was perfectly round, with four long Galleries reaching from side to side, and as many Gates. It was built of precious Stones, of all sorts and sizes: the Tyling was of Gold and Silver, and the inside was so curiously wrought, and so rich, that it is not to be imagined nor believed, if I should here declare every particular. The King sate in an empty Court in the middle of his Palace, under a beautiful Gallery inriched with all manner of Jewels: round about him on the right and left stood his Counsellors and Attendants: his Seat was a Throne of six steps, over which there was a Canopy of State, before it were six Bases upon which stood six Lions rampant of a red stone. To this place we were conducted by Sermodas and the Ten Grandees, and led to the foot of the Throne, where we were taught to do our Obeisance upon our knees. The King had a rich Crown upon his Head, and a Scepter in his right Hand, and sate in a great deal of Majesty and Glory. Sermodas advised me to speak to the King, as soon as we had paid him that respect which was due to his Person and place. Therefore I stood up, and addressed my self to him in this manner in the French Tongue, which he understood well: “Most glorious and mighty Prince, you see before you poor Strangers cast upon your Coasts by a storm, which I know not how to name, happy or unhappy; for since our Arrival in your Land, we have met with so many civilities and expressions of kindness from your loving People, that we have already received a compensation for the loss of our Ships and Goods. We are come here to adore your Majesty in obedience to your Commands, and to receive from you those Orders, which we shall punctually follow. We doubt not but according to your wonderful clemency, your Majesty will look with compassion upon such objects of pity as Providence hath made us, and to raise us up from our hard and low Fortune. As all things that we have hitherto met with in

82

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

your noble Kingdom, are beyond all belief and credit, we are perswaded that the King of so glorious a Land, must needs have Vertues as extraordinary and Divine. We humbly submit our selves therefore to your Majesties Wisdom and Mercy, and that when we shall have performed what your Majesty shall think fit to require from us, you would out of your compassion and goodness, suffer us to depart into our own Countries, that we may spread abroad all over the World the Riches, the Excellency, and Wealth of this earthly Paradise, and the noble Vertues of your most Glorious Majesty, and publish your Fame where-ever the Sun appears with his beams of Light.” Sevarminas seemed to like our persons and our Speech, to which he returned this Answer: That he had sent for us, not to offer any injury to our persons: That he who was a Lover of Justice amongst his own Subjects, could not do injustice to strangers: That the Sevarites in general were of a civil behaviour, and inclinable to pity the miseries of other men; but that he had given strict Orders to have a care of our persons, and furnish us with all that we should want. He told us, That not only the curiosity of seeing us, who were come out of remote Nations, famous for their industry and wit, had caused him to send for us to discourse with us, and understand our Customs and Manners; but also to discover to us his Kingdom and the Riches of it, that we might report it in our own Lands, and incourage some to venture to trade with his People: That for that purpose he would appoint a place or an Island in the Pacifick Sea, where all the Commodities and Riches of the Sevarambi should be transported, because the ancient Laws, as well as the good and preservation of his Kingdoms Peace, Vertues, and Innocency, suffered him not to admit all manner of Strangers into his Borders: That he had received a good report of us, which inclined him the more to send for us, and that he hoped that our conversation and behaviour would be answerable to his expectation, and the kindness that he would shew. After this, he inquired of our Country, how long we had been from it, who commanded in Chief, what Commodities we had of any request, what Arts and Sciences of any use to the life of man. To all these particulars, and many others, I gave him full satisfaction. So that, as a gratification, he sent for a Box of Jewels, which he bestowed upon us, together with Collars of Gold and Ambergriese, which he wished us to wear whiles we should remain in that Country. After we had continued with him about an hour, he rose up from his Throne, and commanded Zidi Parabas, the Master of his Ceremonies, to lead us to Lodgings provided for us in his own Palace, and Zidi Marlorat his Chancellor and chief Minister, to discourse with us about a Trade, and the means to open it with us. During our abode in those parts, we had several meetings with him, and assured him, that the Dutch Nation would be overjoy’d to meet

Part II (1679)

83

with so civil a People, so sociable and amiable, and that they would quickly embrace the first motion of a Trade with them. We extolled our home Commodities, and shewed what advantage they would reap by a conversation with us; but the Chancellor told me, That such as I was should have liberty to enter into their Borders; but Ruffians and Rascals of an ill life could not be admitted by the Laws of their Land. Yet they should have leave to trade in Sporumbe, and in the Islands, which Sevarminas would appoint for that purpose; but that none of the Sevarites should go thither, unless it be such banished men as are sent away for their misdemeanours. I replied to him, That if he would keep away from thence such as are banished out of Sevarambè for their Knavery, we would trade with all the rest; for we and all our Country-men had rather deal with honest men than with Knaves. At last it was concluded to prevent the inconveniencies on both sides, That all the Dutch should land amongst the Sporvi, and in an Island that is at the mouth of the great River Rocara in the Pacifick Sea, about an hundred and thirty Leagues from the Streights of Magellan. This Island is peopled with a generation of men descended from the Sevarites, and banished out of the Country for their inordinate love of women and men. There are three good Towns belonging to it, and a capacious Harbor for Ships of the greatest burden. I acquainted the Chancellor with our Art of Navigation, with many other knowledges which the Europeans use with great profit and advantage to their Kingdoms. He seemed to be well satisfied and mightily pleased with the account I had given him.Whiles Sevarminas was gone to hunt and sport himself, Sermodas and Zidi Parabas led us round about the Galleries and Walks, shewing us the rare Fishponds, the stately Orchards, the riches and beauty of the Buildings, and all things round about, which caused us to wonder, and stand many times in a maze. The Art of Painting is here also, and the Sevarites excel in that skill. Therefore the Galleries, and generally all the Palace of Sevarminas, was adorned with many lively Representations. Maurice, who was an excellent Painter, admired some Pictures, and told us, that he thought they could not be made but by a Divine hand. The Sevarites are excellent in Geometry and Astrology. They have differing names for all the Stars that appear in their Hemisphere, and understand perfectly well all their Motions and Vertues. As soon as we returned from our pleasant Walk, we met with Sevarminas about dinner-time returned from his Hunting, whereof I shall give this short account, for this Sport is not like to ours. The Sevarites hunt not with Dogs, but with tame Foxes, of an extraordinary swiftness; they hunt Rabbets, Hares, Deer; and all other wild beasts are hunted with tame Leopards. In the morning that the King intends to see this Sport, the chief Huntsman hath orders to prepare all things for the

84

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

diversion, twenty Leopards are then let loose in a wide Park, where the wild beast is brought. The King and all his Nobles are mounted upon their glorious Mules, of beautiful colours, with Trappings of Silver and Gold, adorned with precious Stones. The Leopards, at the sight of the Lion or the Bear, draw near to him by degrees, and taking their opportunity, they run to him. When he feels himself overpowered, he seeks his safety in his heels, and all the Mules gallop after him. I am not able to represent all the various actions and delights that are here expressed to the Beholders eyes; but this kind of Hunting is much esteemed by the Sevarites, and none have the liberty to make use of it, but the King and some of the prime Nobles; for it is a Royal Sport, and gives much satisfaction to the Spectators. Sevarminas at his return entred into his Palace, accompanied with all his Servants, in very rich Attire: some of them came and spoke to us in the Spanish Tongue, and bid us welcome into their Country. We answered their Civilities with respect, and followed the Train of Sevarminas that walked two and two into the Palace, into a great Hall an hundred yards in length, and as many in breadth, where Tables were ready covered with all manner of curious Dainties, of all sorts. Sevarminas and his Queen, with three of his Sons, and six of his Daughters, sate down at a Table, which stood at the upper end, raised a little above the rest, under a large Canopy shining with Gold and precious Stones, of an inestimable value. As soon as they were sate down, the Musick in the Galleries round about began to play such ravishing Tunes, that we Europeans were astonished. Sermodas and Zidi Parabas invited us to sit down at a Table not far from that of Sevarminas. To tell you of all the Glory and State we beheld, the sweetness of the Wines, the various Services, and the dainty Meats, of the excellent and ravishing Sights, I reckon it impossible, I could fill up a Volume of those things that were then presented to our senses; so many and such variety of objects, rare and wonderful, appeared before us, that when Zidi Parabas saw how we were pleased with them, he inquired of us, whether had any such Delights in Europe. I answered, that the pleasures and delights of the Europeans are many and curious, but they are not to be compared to what we then saw. One of the Table inquired of us about some other particulars; and because he was a Learned Philosopher, he proposed to us several learned Questions relating to the Nature of things. Every one had liberty to speak his mind and judgment. After all, he declared his opinion, with a repetition of what every one had spoken, and then added his own solution with that Learning and Gravity, that I never heard the like. This to me and Maurice was almost as good as the Musick and Meats; for at Table it is a modern as well ancient delight to feed the mind with rare instructions, as well as the body with meat and drink. After Dinner Zidi

Part II (1679)

85

Parabas went to wait upon Sevarminas, and understand his pleasure. When he was returned to us again, he brought us up to Sevarminas, who was then sitting on his Throne with his Queen Larida at his right hand, and his Daughters and his Sons on the left. She was the most beautiful Creature that I ever beheld. We paid them our respects according to the mode of their Country. To please Queen Larida, Sevarminas asked us many questions in Spanish, a Tongue which she understood: after all they seemed to be well satisfied. Sevarminas sent us all Gifts and Presents of a great value. When I was returned into Europe, I sold the Jewels and other Rarities, which the King and Queen bestowed upon me, for above six millions of Gold. Maurice and the rest of my Companions had Gifts according to their Qualities. We had Orders to walk about the City, and take a view of the Rarities of that wonderful place. To speak truth, every thing, if it were in our own Country, would seem a rarity. I never beheld so much Glory and Riches, nor such beautiful objects, nor such gravity, and comely personages so full of Majesty and goodness. They were so far from scorning or contemning us that were Strangers, that they seemed they could not too much honour and respect us; for Sevarminas had given that strict Order, to give us all the satisfaction that we could desire. Zidi Parabas led us to their publick Halls through beautiful Streets, paved with many transparent stones. When we entred into them, we saw their Court of Judicature. On both sides were the Lawyers Cells or little Closets. These are a certain number of men who are locked up as Prisoners in this place, and not suffered to range up and down the City, for fear they should infect the rest of men with their idle notions and Quirks. They are here all kept, the Judges only excepted, as our mad and crasie men in Europe, are confined to Bedlams, and as the wild beasts to their dens; for by this Policy they preserve the City in quiet. When we were in their vast Hall, and heard some entring in, they looked all to see, whether we were fit for their turn, whether we had committed some offence that deserved punishment; but when they saw that we viewed that place only out of curiosity, they sneaked all in again, and would not so much as look upon us all the time that we were there, till the Trumpet began to sound, and the Judge sate upon his Seat. Then came in a company of Sevarites leading a young Girl that had forgotten her self, and given liberty to a puny Fellow to play the wag with her. They had both of them great punches of flesh growing upon their Noses and Foreheads, which came up in the very act. As soon as their Neighbours had beheld this superfluity, they understood the crime, and took hold of them both to bring them to this Tribunal. The Lawyers, like Bees swarmed round about, all the petty Attorneys, Clerks, Bailiffs, Sergeants, demy-Sergeants,

86

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Pleaders, Sollicitors, Probationers, &c. and such a gang of them, that I pitied the poor Couple to fall into their unmerciful hands. Amongst the Sevarites in every city they have a Hall or a Convent of these persons, whom they all esteem no better than Butchers and Executioners, they have not that honour as amongst us in Europe, nor that esteem of honest men, with which many of them cozen our World. Zidi Parabas made me get up to hear their Pleading, but I understood not their Language, only Sermodas gave me an account of some passages. The crime was not to be denied, which caused them both to look ashamed, because they had forgotten all honesty, and lost their honour. The Judge asked them many questions. All the cruel Lawyers cryed to punish her with death, because she had not given them any thing to plead for her; but the young man had got a bawling Lawyer to speak for him when his crime came to be examined; but all would not do: he would have made the Judge believe, that this Excrescence in his face was only a natural deformity proceeding from some other inward cause, and not from Lust. But the Judge, a wise and brave man, of the Court of Sevarminas, convinced him of his errour, and made him at last confess, that the Girl had inticed him with her bewitching Looks. In conclusion of the Tryal, the lecherous couple were sent to the Island of Whores and Rogues, where they were to live confined for ever from all friends and acquaintances, and to spend their life in lust and debauchery, a sufficient punishment, as they imagined, for their forgetfulness. I took no great delight amongst the Lawyers; for I looked upon this place as the Hell in the midst of the earthly Paradise of the Sevarites. After these two Fornicators had been judged and condemned to perpetual banishment, where nevertheless they live in great plenty, there was brought before the Judge a Thief, a sneaking Fellow, differing in looks, as well as in manners, from the rest of the Sevarambi. The Judge, whose name was Zidi Morasco, commanded him to be examined before him by a crafty Lawyer. And it was proved plain against him, that he had stole some Jewels and Gold from his Neighbour, with some Garments of Cloth of Silver, covered over with precious Stones, of a great value. The Fellows countenance since this deed was mightily changed; for every wicked action, especially amongst the Sevarites, alters the countenances of men. The Eyes being the windows of the Soul, through them it discovers all the inward thoughts, fears, apprehensions, and displeasures that rowl in the breast. Besides, the Thieves have here in this Country a mark, which immediately appears upon their Chins and Cheeks, a black spot very ugly to the eye. This Fellow also was adjudged unworthy to live any longer amongst the religious Sevarites. I asked Sermodas, why the Sevarambi suffered the Lawyers, who I told him in our Country, were generally none of the best men in the World: What! said

Part II (1679)

87

he, have you any there? Yes, said I, to our sorrow, we cannot be quiet for them. Captain, replied he, I must tell you, were it not for these Fellows, the Sevarites would not be able to live so quiet as they do; nor so innocent as in all other Countries: fear as well as shame must keep men in awe, and in the performance of their duties to their Neighbours and Superiours. And though men are not here so inclinable to wickedness as in Europe, because they proceed from another stock and generation of men; yet the pleasures of the Country, together with the inticements of some subtle Devils, whom we cannot always perceive, many may be brought to do what is contrary to Law, Reason, Equity, and Justice. It is therefore for the publick Good, that these men are living amongst us. And though they are as bad as those whom they plead against, they are here confined in these and such like Cells, where there is a publick provision made for them, to keep them from running up and down to breed disturbances. Such amongst them as are honest, good, and merciful men, are highly esteemed, but they are very rare; and if they were known to be honest and good men amongst the Lawyers, the rest would not suffer them to come near the Bar, but would banish them out of their Society, and deprive them of all manner of Practice and liberty of Pleading. The greater Knaves they are, the more esteemed amongst the Lawyers, though less valued by the rest of the Sevarites. Therefore, to keep up their credit amongst both, is a hard Chapter, and not to be done without some kind of dissimulation on some side. With that he pointed at a great fat Fellow, who stood up in Court to see and look for his Clients: Do you see, said he, that Knave? Do you see him? I turned my eyes towards him, and beheld him stedfastly, and asked what he was. He is, said Sermodas, one of the chief Attornies of this Court, a cunning Fellow, his name is Rekrap, a wicked Villain, and a great Oppressor of poor Fellows that fall into his hands. After the Court had examined and tryed all the Causes, the Lawyers departed to their Dens; and Zidi Parabas taking me by the hand, led me to the Shambles of the City, and to view all the Excellencies of that Noble place. As I was passing one of their Temples, I intreated him to give me a sight of that, which I judged to be a Rarity, or rather full of Rarities; for it was so glorious without, that I could not but think that the inside was far more rich and splendid. Zidi Parabas made some difficulty to yield to my request; but Sermodas perswaded him to grant it at last, when he had asked me some questions concerning the Religion of our Country: Are you not, said he, defiled with Idolatry, I mean with the Worshipping of Images; for I must tell you, that this is a great abomination amongst the Sevarambi. We have pictures and images in our Houses, but none in our Temples: we adore a great and glorious Being, the Creator and Author of this earthly Paradise: he is an infinite Spirit, not

88

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

to be confined within our walls; therefore our Temples are open on the top, when we are at our Devotions. He is not to be likened to any outward Image or Representation; therefore our ever blessed Sevarias commanded us to have no Images in our Temples, nor to liken God to any Creature or Representation visible to the eye. If therefore you have never dishonoured your self with such kind of practices, you may be admitted to see and walk in our Temples. I thanked him for his kind condescension, and assured him, that though it was a wickedness that many Nations in Europe were guilty of, yet our Country men abominate such kind of follies, and that for my own particular I never was of that Religion which allows of Idolatry and Worshipping of Images. When he understood this, he walked to the great Gate of the chief Temple, where he met with a grave Priest standing at the door, unto whom he declared our business: the Priest took me by the hand, and in Spanish told me, that I should see the Temple of his God. I walked round, and saw so many glorious Sights and such extraordinary Riches, that all Europe together cannot produce the like. The Priests name was Ziribabdas. I desired him to tell me something of the Religion of the Country, and of their Manners: for that purpose Zidi Parabas took me by the hand and led me to a by-place much like a Chancel, where when we were all sate down, in Niches of beaten Gold in the Wall, Ziribabdas began his Discourse in this manner: I perceive you are a stranger to this Country and to the Customs of the Sevarites, I know not what Religion you have in your Country, nor what thoughts you have of the Great God, who hath made us all; but I hope none of you are guilty of the foul sin of Worshipping of Images, which we hear is universally practised by the Europeans. I answered him, That there were a great many Nations who did abominate and hate such practices as well as the Sevarites. Well, said he, in regard you are free from that vice and baseness, I will shew you a great many Sacred Curiosities of this Temple, which you have not yet seen, and I will give you a brief account of our Religion in this Country. You must therefore know, that we acknowledge but one only Great God, Maker of all things, Lord of Heaven and Earth, who sendeth us all those good things that we injoy: Reason teacheth to worship and praise him for his goodness and innumerable mercies. For that purpose we have Schools erected in every corner of this City to train up Youth, and teach them the Principles of Religion. All persons are obliged twice every week to assist at our publick Devotions, which are Songs made to praise our God, with Instruments of Musick: we have also Prayers, which I and my Brethren offer for the prosperity of Sevarminas and of his Royal Family. Once a year every person is obliged to present something upon a Table, which stands in the middle of this and other Temples, as a token of gratitude to

Part II (1679)

89

God: now this thing is always the richest and best beloved thing that he hath. By this means every one shews, that his affection for God is greater than for any thing else. Religion amongst us is the most sacred thing, and whatsoever belongs to Religion is highly valued by every one. There is the greatest respect shewn to religious persons and re1igious things amongst all the Sevarites, you shall not hear Oaths and Blasphemies, Cursing and Damning. The Rules of good living are registred in the Book of our Law-giver Sevarias; and since that time we are all so addicted to it, and all our Generations so used and trained up in our obedience to these Laws, that very few persons offer to break or violate them: and if at any time any such be, he is carried away and banished into the Islands: by this means peace, plenty, and good manners are here to be seen every where, and men take not the liberty to do what they list. But the Rules of Reason are commonly observed by all the Sevarites in their behaviour and actions: so that you shall not see any thing of Drunkenness, Gluttony, Quarrelling, Murders, and Villanies committed scarce in a whole year all over the Empire. But for our better Government in matters of Religion, besides our King, who is the chief Moderator in all disputable matters, we have thirty Chieftains under six principal Heads, who are always at the Court attending upon our Prince. These thirty live in their Precincts and Jurisdictions, having under them such as have the care of and inspection over every Town and Hamlet. We have besides, publick Meetings and Assemblies to consult about matters of high moment. Now there is such an excellent order and harmony in all respects, that we injoy Peace both in Divine and Civil Affairs, and there is no jarring, disputations, and dissensions, as amongst you in Europe, but a blessed concord and agreement. If any be suspected to be otherwise disposed, he is immediately banished to the Lonesom Islands, where he can quarrel with none but with wild beasts that inhabit there. He is never suffered after to set a foot in the Country of the Sevarambi; but there in those Islands amongst the Woods and Caves he is confined, and obliged to spend the rest of his days in fighting with the Lions, Jaccals, wild Dogs, Bears, and such like furious Creatures. By this means you shall see we preserve peace and quiet both in Church and State. But that our Governors might not act in an arbitrary way, we suffer no mans Will to be a Law, but that of our glorious Sevarminas and his lawful Successors; but for the rest of all our Governors, they have Rules and Laws to act by in all occasions: neither can they do any thing without the consent, advice, and concurrence of other wise men appointed for that purpose. For our Belief, I must tell you, we know and are taught by Nature as well as by the Works of our great Sevarias, that God created all things in Heaven and Earth: That in the beginning this Paradise stood in another part of the World; but when

90

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

men began to abuse those good things that it affords, it was transported hither upon the shoulders of Angels, and all the Trees planted here, where they have increased: and that because the first Generation of men was corrupt and wicked, there was another man and woman made to inhabit here, and to live in this blessed Kingdom. We believe, that when we come to dye, our Souls being of a spiritual substance, fly up to the Firmament, where they rest till a certain time be appointed to joyn them again together. Now our bodies decay not as yours, we lay them in places where they continue thousands of years without any alteration. I shall shew you our Sepulchres, and that of our Kings, where you may see all the Princes who have governed in these happy Regions since the beginning of the World, as fresh as if they were yet all alive. We believe, that when our bodies and Souls shall be again joyned, your generation and ours shall be received together into a place appointed for us, such I mean of you as are honest and good men; but for the rest of you, I know not what you are fit for, unless it be to be cast into the Sea, or banished to a lonesom place, where they may live without doing harm. We believe that there are good and evil Spirits above us, and that the Sun, Moon, and Stars are full of Creatures answerable to their light and beauty. We believe, that when this generation shall be transported somewhere else, other Creatures shall succeed us in this Paradise, and in other parts of the World. We have many things that we believe; but I must tell you, that our reason directs us, and rules our judgments in all matters of Faith as well as practice; only some things of a sublime nature, which our senses cannot attain to, we must submit to the Wisdom of our Sevarias, who had them by Inspiration from the Angels, with whom he had a familiar acquaintance, and therefore his body is not to be found in the Sepulchre of our Kings; but it is thought they took him with them into the place appointed for their abode, and that there he lives with them without fear of death, in expectation that all his Posterity should come to him. But you must take notice, That such of our Generation as are banished for their misdemeanors, will be admitted one day to the same happiness, if they bear patiently their punishment, and are sorry for their wickedness; but such also must be purged in a fire which is in the Air, through which their bodies, as well as ours, must pass to mount up to the highest station designed for us: but with this difference, that the fire shall open to let us go by; but they must burn a while there, till their bodies be freed from all corruption and filth, some more, some less, according to their dispositions, but few stay there less than twenty years, some an hundred, others a thousand, till such time as their bodies be sublimated and fit for an higher abode. Such of us as are incorrigible, shall be confined to a sad Pit, where they shall be up to the

Part II (1679)

91

Elbows in Mire and Dirt, and be deprived of all comforts of life. Whiles he was speaking this, there happened an accident, which caused him to stop and put an end to this good Discourse. Ziribabdas was called to receive a dead Sevarite, and open the Caves, in which the deceased lay in Coffins of Ivory and Gold. He excused himself, and told me, that he had much more to say concerning the Religion of their Country, but could not remain with us any longer. I was glad to have this opportunity to see their manner of burying the dead. At the great Gate of the Temple stood near a thousand people with the friends of the deceased. When Ziribabdas came to them, one who stood before the Corps and the Bearers, spoke to him in this manner, as was afterwards interpreted to me. “Most holy Priest, we have brought to you our Neighbour Suffarali, a good man, and a religious Sevarite, who hath often expressed his Devotion in this place, and his respects to your Holiness; we desire that he may be admitted amongst the dead Sevarites, as he hath lived amongst them with respect and honour.” Ziribabdas sate himself down in an Ivory Chair adorned with many precious Stones, which stood in the Porch, and then he called the Friends of the deceased, inquiring of them, whether he had committed no unworthy action in his life-time? Whether he had lived peaceably with his Neighbours? Whether he had not been privately guilty of drunkenness, &c? Whether he had not at his departure bequeathed something to the Church? How many children he had? What were their names? And such like questions, to which they gave an answer, and satisfied him fully. Afterwards they carried in the Corps into the Temple, and laid it upon a long Table of an Emerald-stone, and the Priests anointed the body all over with an excellent Oyl, called the Oyl of Botamine, which signifies in their language Uncorruption: For such is its extraordinary virtue, that it keeps a body from all manner of corruption or alteration an hundred years. Now this is a Sacred Oyl, which only the Priests, who are learned in Chymistry, make of several Ingredients; for this cause it is no where to be found but in their Temples, unto which they have their Laboratories annexed. Now once in an hundred years they anoint over all the bodies of the deceased from the beginning of the World: by this means the bodies are kept fresh, and so lively and beautiful, that if a dead body could stand upright, at a distance no man could distinguish the dead from the living. When the body was well anointed, they opened a large Cave of a thousand yards broad, and as many long. It had as many Closets as there were houses in the City. Ziribabdas, at the opening of the mouth of the Cave, caused some Ceremonies to be performed, and then marched down a pair of stairs, into this burying-place: the Corps was carried after him, and I and my Companions, with Sermodas, were admitted to behold the subterranean Rarities, and to walk up and down in the

92

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Caves, so full of transparent stones, that the light entring in by two or three holes, made on purpose, caused it to be as light within, as if the Sun had shined there in its Meridian. In the Cave were six hundred thousand separations capacious enough to hold above an hundred thousand bodies: they were all laid one upon another in very good order. There were several Alleys and Walks between the separations, unto which were doors of massie Gold, and in several places stood great Pots full of that Oyl of Botamine, which the Priests cast upon the bodies, when they perceive any alteration in the bodies by their smelling. By this means it happens, that there is not the least noisom smell; but there is every where the most blessed Perfume in every corner, as if you were in a Garden of Roses, or amongst blooming Beans. When we had well viewed the Caves, I intreated Ziribabdas to shew me the Sepulchres of their Kings; for that purpose he led us out at another door, when all the company was departed, and shewed us all their Princes sitting in Chairs of State, as if they were alive; but this place was not in the Cave, but round about their Temple, in Closets made on purpose. The Princes were all cloathed in their Royal Attire, which they changed once every year; for that purpose the King that reigns is bound to send them Vestments according to the ancient Custom. Ziribabdas shewed us all the ancient Kings sitting in their gravity and Majesty, and pointed out to some who had been very remarkable in their Lives for some noted Actions, by which they had obliged the Nation of the Sevarites, and rendered their Names and Memories more sacred than others amongst their Posterity. He shewed us King Bormarti, who was so great a Lover of Justice, that he banished his own Son for committing a fault, and sent him to live and dye in the Islands. He told of his King Robarmi, who invented the Art of Painting, and laid the Foundations of Sevarinde. He shewed us the Body of King Darti, who built the stately Palace for the Kings of the Sevarites, and fetched the stones from the Diamant Rocks and the Mountains of Saphyr, at a great distance from thence, upon Carts driven with the Wind, with Sails as Ships. We saw King Marati, who taught the Sevarites how to make Boats, and to fish in the Rivers. We saw the Bodies of King Bumorli, Serabi, Cussori, Menari, Monasti, Nacri, Labomor, Apolori, Ribolo, Staraki, Muraki, Amlorod, and many others, who had been reverenced for some witty Invention or glorious Action, by which they had benefited Posterity as well as their own Generation. Therefore their Closets were more beautiful and richer than the rest, and they had the Honour to have their Images placed in the noted Rendezvous of the City, for all men to look upon them, and for all Posterity to reverence and respect them. By this Honour the succeeding Kings were the more incouraged to do good, and abstain from all blame; they are the more animated to deserve well

Part II (1679)

93

from their Generation, and to invent something to advantage their People. We walked about to see all the Rarities of this Royal Sepulchre, which exceeded in glory the richest and stateliest Palaces of our European Emperours and Kings. To speak of the rare Jewels, of the Gold and precious Stones, and of the excellent things that were never brought over nor seen in our World, I should be endless; for here in every place there are red, yellow, white, and other transparent Stones of rare Vertues, not known to us in Europe. Orient Pearls as big as Walnuts are as ordinary as Pebble-stones in our Country. The common people polish them, and hang them in strings about their Windows; but they seldom wear them, because they have rarer and more glorious things to put about their necks and bodies as Ornaments, than these things, which, for want of a name, I omit. Ziribabdas shewed me next the Gallery of their sacred Hieroglyphicks, which is one of the rarest things of the World. The Gallery is about half a mile long, joyning to the Temple, standing upon an Arch, under which are beautiful Walks and Closets, for the Learned Students in all Arts and Sciences to spend their time, and imploy themselves in their searches into the Mysteries of Nature. The Wall is of a white transparent stone, as clear as Crystal, and the Gallery is paved with Diamant stones square, at every six foot is a great large Window of Crystal, and the top is covered and arched over with Saphyr stone. Emeralds, Chrysolytes, Rubies, Jaspers, Beryls, and other precious Stones not known to us, are without number about in the Walls. This Gallery was built in the year 3406 after the Creation of the World, by King Murabormati, a great Philosopher, and a Learned Student of Natures Mysteries. In these Walls he caused the Rules of all sorts of Sciences, and the Principles of all manner of Arts to be ingraven in black in the white stone of the Walls, not in Characters, but in Figures and dark Enigmes and Representations. Here I beheld the shapes of all manner of Creatures of this and our World in all kind of postures and actions of life, put here to represent the sacred Mysteries thereby signified to the understanding Reader. In this Gallery were several hundred Learned Students beholding and searching into the directions that were given them by these Hieroglyphicks. And in some Closets, near adjoyning, were several companies of men discoursing and disputing about those things which were represented upon the Wall. We were introduced amongst them to look and sit with them, and observe their grave postures and mien; but for their Learned Lectures and excellent Discourses, we understood nothing, only Sermodas told us, that here were all the Wits and Learned men of the Sevarites gathered together; and that for their better understanding of all manner of Sciences, and to perpetuate Learning, and free it from forgetfulness, they had in the Gallery the

94

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Rules and Axioms of all Arts, with all the Definitions and other matters of any moment, needful to be known in relation to any Skill or Science; and that when any Student doubted of any matter, in these Closets the great Doctors were met to direct and teach the ignorant, and improve all Arts and Sciences; and that by degrees as they improved Learning by new Discoveries, they were always engraven upon the Walls, after a serious and judicial Examination of the Learned Doctors, and their Approbation of such invented things and Rules: which Hieroglyphicks were graven with the names of their Authors for a perpetual Memory. We walked three or four turns in the Gallery, and saw such variety and number of new Objects and Representations, that I have often wondered, how any one man can have that vast memory to give an interpretation to all those things of different shapes, and to comprehend all the Mysteries of such Enigmes. In some places of the Gallery the Wall was covered over with Plates of Silver, and the Hieroglyphicks were of Gold; but generally they were in black upon a white clear stone, and so hard, that though, as I was informed by Zidi Parabas and the Priest, some of the Hieroglyphicks have been there put above a thousand years ago, yet appear as fresh, as if they had been graven but yesterday. At the end of the Gallery are two large Cabinets, of a curious workmanship, and rare stone, of a reddish colour, most beautiful to the eye, curiously cut and graven. The Cabinets are full of Pictures and Images of all sorts of Creatures, which serve the Learned in their Contemplations: here are also a great many Skeletons of many Animals, with all manner of rare things, which are to be found in this wonderful Country. Here I saw a great Saphire-stone, about the bigness of a Goose, in which the Heavens and the Earth were represented very lively to the eye. In an Emerald, about the bigness of a mans head, I found in one side all manner of Birds graven with the finger of Nature; and in the other all sorts of Beasts. I saw several other precious Stones, one having the Image of a Man, another of a Horse, another of a Woman, another of a Camel, another of an Eagle, another of a River, another of a Fish, another of other Creatures, so curiously engraven, that no Artist could mend Natures work. These stones were useful not only to satisfie mens curiosity, and please the sight of the Learned; but also to teach them several things concerning those creatures, which were thereby intimated to them. We found several Learned men observing those things, and viewing them with leisure: For that purpose there are several Seats for them to sit down and contemplate. Here I saw also many Talismans, an Art altogether lost in Europe, and not to be recovered but from the Learning of the Sevarites; for Zidi Parabas shewed me a round stone, hollow within, wherein I saw, through many parts of it transparent, a perpetual motion of Trees, Woods, wild Beasts, and many

Part II (1679)

95

Animals, which he told me, was but a Talisman made to direct such as are Learned in this Art, how to make others for the same purpose. Some are so skilful, that with a Talisman they will kill any beast or creature at a mile distance; but as the Sevarites are not for the destruction of creatures, but for their preservation, they never make use of this Art to do mischief, but save and comfort such creatures as are decaying, and to put life in those that are dead. Only the venemous creatures and noisom Flies, if by the procurement of any evil-spirited, such are introduced into the Country, then the Philosophers have an Art to make such a Talisman, as will not only destroy the Flies, and disarm the beast of his poysonous and ill qualities; but severely punish the wicked Spirit who hath been so bold as to send in such troublesom creatures into their Land. For this purpose I saw upon four corners of the great Church a great Giant of black Marble, holding in his right hand a pair of Rams horns, as they appeared to me; but in truth it was nothing but a Talisman to keep off the Devils and evil Spirits from their Meeting-place and holy Assembles. In his left hand he held a Book open, of white Marble, in which some Characters were graven, as I was told, which the Devils cannot endure to see, and therefore keep at a distance from such places. Besides, these Learned in Talismanical Figures, have the Art to make those Talismans as have an influence not only upon bodies corporeal, but also upon the subtle Spirits of the Air, and will bind them to a good Behaviour, or drive them with vengeance off from the place, or else so benum their senses, that they can neither stir nor move, but are as so many mazed creatures, without life or motion, when they come within such a compass. For that purpose I saw upon the top of the Temple a great Eagle of Gold standing with its wings abroad on the highest Pinacle of the Temple, which Ziribabdas told me, was nothing but a Talisman made to drive away all subtle Spirits of the Air, or to hinder their malicious intents in that Sacred place, and amongst the people of the City. He told me, that they have some persons so well acquainted with that Art, that they can work wonders, and do any Miracle by their Talismans, kill and make alive, cure distempers, benum the minds and senses of men, draw together thousands of creatures and birds, and make them perform any action that may be named. I intreated Ziribabdas to let me see some of the skill of these Learned men in this Art. I importuned him so much, that he went into one of the Closets from the Gallery, and fetched to us a grave Signior about an hundred years of age, with a long beard reaching down to his knees, and a pair of large whiskers each near a foot long. He saluted me very gravely, and led me into a private Closet, which belonged to him, out of it there was a way and door into a stone-Balcony, of a red transparent stone, with several Bosses or Apples of Gold. He had several curious Inventions,

96

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Talismans, and other things of a wonderful Art. One thing he took in hand, about the bigness of a Bushel, having several handles to it, the substance, as I thought, was of Crystal: it had several large holes: in the midst I could see many birds, all without motion, till the grave Philosopher, whose name was Zidi Mufti, pulled a string, and set them all in a motion, then did we hear the chirping of all manner of birds, so pleasantly, that we stood in a maze and wondered; but much more, when we saw all the birds of the Air, that can be named, flying apace towards us into the Philosophers Closet: there were Eagles, Cormorants, Magpies, Crows, Vulturs, Jack-daws, Kites, Sparrows, Falcons, &c. I numbered above a thousand, which in less than a quarter of an hour came into the Closet, and perched upon the Balcony and upon the Gallery. When Zidi Mufti saw them all come, he played another tune, and all these Birds began to dance two and two, and chirp according to their kind, very pleasantly. This sport lasted about an hour, with such a variety of action, that we could have wished it might have lasted longer. At the conclusion the Philosopher dismissed them, neither at that time did any of them injure one another, but were as quiet and harmless, as if there had been no enmity between them. When they were gone, he took the Image of a man made in Wax; but shewing all his privy parts backwards, and with it he marched to the Balcony, where he sate up and spoke two or three hard words, to the best of my remembrance they were these, Bomralok Kostraborab Abrolakar Bourakabou Branbastrokobar Abrovora Birikabu, and immediately there came a company of men and women of the Sevarites that danced all naked before us in a beautiful Green: whiles he held the Image in that place, they were not able to depart from thence, but continued playing and dancing, and sporting with one another above an hour, shewing such antick tricks, as I never saw the like; for all this they were not dishonest; but immediately as soon as the Image disappeared, every one of them departed and run away; but whiles the Image stood still, they were neither ashamed, nor could they stir from the place, so great a power these Talismans have upon the minds of men, as well as the bodies of beasts and birds. ’Tis an Art which can give as much delight as profit to those that understand it well; for they can perform those things in Nature that are most wonderful, and advantageous to the life of man. In the first Ages of the World this Art was generally known amongst the Learned: and when I saw how perfect the Sevarites were in it, I wished with all my heart, that we had but some insight into the same Art and skill for the good of our Country; but our ignorance would slander such knowledges, and think it to be Magick, if we did not understand the depth of it, nor the causes that such men set a work, for many wonderful effects are to be produced by the inferiour

Part II (1679)

97

causes, which are secret and hid to the most part of men; for such is our natural unskilfulness, that we know not the hundredth part of those things that we may easily attain to. This Learned Philosopher gave me another diversion: he fetched his Instrument for that purpose, and caused such musical Sounds and Voices to be in the Air round about us at a distance, that we began to hang between fear and pleasure. When Ziribabdas saw a change in our countenance, he desired us to be contented, and assured us, that we should receive no harm. The noise and voices continued half an hour, not in the Instrument, but at a distance, and with such a variety of Sounds, that I could never imagine what it was. For whiles he stayed upon the Balcony, he turned the Instrument round with a little wheel, which was in the inside, but this had the power by the Talismanical Art to cause in the Air such shrieks, crys, hollowings, and sometimes such curious and melodious voices, that we were ravished and struck into admiration. We desired to know what it was that made that noise in the Air; the Philosopher told us, that they were airy Spirits, which this Talisman had the power to attract, and to oblige to break out into those shrieks and crys. This caused us to wonder the more, that this corporeal Instrument, which seemed to have nothing but material, should draw together on a sudden such powerful Spirits, and oblige them to give sport to men. I concluded from these Examples, that he that understands well the Talismanical Art, is able to do anything in Nature, to work wonders and miracles, and to delight himself with any kind of sport when he pleaseth. After these passages, I saw another Philosopher, very well skilled in this curious Art, bring before Sevarminas threescore Lions roaring, with an hundred Bears, twenty wild Horses, two hundred Mastiffs, thirty Leopards, forty wild Bulls, which he caused first to cry every one according to his custom and nature, then the Philosopher forced them to dance whiles he played upon a musical Instrument, and they performed this as exactly, as if they had been taught on purpose; but when he saw his time, he set them all together by the ears, the Dogs, the Lions, and the Bears, every one pitched upon his Enemy, and began a pleasant Fight, which lasted two full hours, with a great deal of variety of sport, which caused Sevarminas and all his Court oft-times to laugh heartily. When he hath a desire to take any such diversion, he sends for some of these men skilled in the Talismanical Art, and they answer his expectations in all things, and bring before him whom and what they please. We returned our thanks to this worthy Philosopher for his great pains. He answered, that he was glad to give us any delight, and that if we would visit him at some other more convenient time, he would shew us some more of his skill in acting greater wonders, than what we had seen; but that he had done this only to divert us for the present, because he saw

98

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

that we could not stay with him long; but if we would see more wonderful things; that we should do well to come to him some morning, and to spend a whole day with him, and that he would shew us what we had never seen, nor never should see but by his and his Companions means. We returned him our thanks again for his great kindness, and then departed with Ziribabdas, who led us next to see the Treasury of the Church, which is a large Room joyning to the Porch, all arched above, with six windows on the top: the Walls were of Diamant, niched with Saphirs and Emeralds, in it were Chests and Coffers full of the rarest things in Nature, offered to the service of the great God by the Citizens of Sevarinde. We beheld with admiration the rare workmanship, the curious things, and the Excellencies that had been there laid up by many Ages, and never made use of. Some Pictures were upon the Walls of this Treasury, of an admirable hand: Ziribabdas told us, that the Painter was an European, cast upon their Coasts by a storm at Sea, and that he lived and dyed in that Country; and that the Father of Sevarminas had such an affection for him, that he gave him a beautiful young Virgin to Wife, one of the most considerable of his Court, and gave him an Estate to live on, having made him a Citizen of Sevarinde: and that he lived there fifty years, till he was an old man, leaving behind him many children, Girls and Boys, to perpetuate his name amongst the Sevarites. His name was Simeon van Zurich, a Dutch man, who had a great skill in Swimming; for when he was cast away, all the Ships company was lost, but only him: they were at a distance from the shore, and could not so well swim, or were devoured by the fishes. It was his fortune to be carried stark naked on the Coast of the Sevarites, in an Island full of Ladies of Pleasure, who had been banished thither for their incontinency. As soon as it was day, he found himself surrounded by a whole Troop of the female Sex, who had a great delight to see him, and came to draw him into the Country; but when he saw no men, he was afraid to venture amongst them: this caused him to swim up the River into the Land in the sight of these beautiful Creatures that accompanied on the shore, and often made signs to him to land, and go no further; but he continued on till he landed amongst the innocent Sevarambi, who cloathed and brought him to their King. He was by him entertained courteously and nobly, and provided for the rest of his days. When we had taken notice of the Treasury, and of all the great Rarities that are in it, we marched into the Church or Temple again to see the excellent Workmanship, the Carving, and rare things that adorn this excellent place. Ziribabdas caused us to take notice of three Partitions in the Temple, the one, which is at the higher end, is only for their Priests and their King: the second is for their Nobles: the third is for all sorts of persons promiscuously without exception. By that

Part II (1679)

99

time we had seen all this, the night drew on apace, which caused us to withdraw towards our Lodgings. Zidi Parabas led me, and Sermodas went with Maurice, our other Companions followed us to our Lodgings. We took our leaves of the generous and civil Ziribabdas, the Chief Priest of that stately and glorious Cathedral-Temple of Sevarinde, and thanked him heartily for his great courtesie shewed to us. When we came to our Lodgings, we found our Supper ready, and we were no less prepared for it; but Zidi Parabas returned to the Palace, to give Sevarminas an account of his Commission and of our Walk, promising to return to us the next day. Sermodas, my self, and Companions supped that night together, the Musick playing all the while we were eating. After Supper we had good store of rare Wines brought to us, which we received and made good use of; but, as we understood, that the Sevarites hate Drunkards and drunkenness, I advised all my Companions to drink moderately, for fear of giving an offence to those noble people. They followed my advice, and after an hour or two’s discourse with Sermodas, we went to our beds, where we had been the night before. Sermodas brought us into the Chamber, and then bid us good night, telling us, that he would call us up the next day, and shew us some other diversions, as pleasant as those of the day before. We thanked him, and told him, that we should be ready to wait upon him, and that we had seen so many wonders already, that we thought that we could never see any more: at those words he departed smiling. The next morning Zidi Parabas and Sermodas, with twenty more Gentlemen of the Kings Court, came to attend upon us, Sermodas only entring the room, the rest stayed in a Chamber hard by till we were dressed. As soon as we were ready, two Fellows, with Flutes in their hands, ready to play, saluted us, offering to conduct us to the company that stayed for us: they marched before us, making most curious Musick, till we came to the company. A grave Signior of them stood with Zidi Parabas, and told us, that we must that day ride with Sevarminas into the Country, and that he had sent them to call upon us for that purpose. Sermodas had caused some of the excellent Wines of the Country to be brought, he caused some to be poured forth into a great shell of a Fish, which is the ordinary Drinking-vessels of that Country. He caused us to taste of it, and obliged all the company, before we went out, to pledge us: which when we had done, Zidi Parabas led us to the door, where we saw as many Dromedaries ready sadled as we were men: we mounted upon them that were prepared for us; but when I inquired for a Bridle, they bid me take hold of the Ears; for in this Country these Creatures have Ears of an incredible length, they are commonly an Ell long, but very slender: so that they are fastened together as the Reins of a Bridle, at the

100

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

end, with a Clasp, or some such thing. This men hold in their hands, and with this they govern or turn them at their pleasure. I must confess, I was afraid when I was first mounted upon this strange beast, which is so swift, that in a day we rid over hedges and ditches and uneven places, above one hundred and fifty miles. We went through the streets to the Kings Palace, where we attended not long before there came out a great Train with Sevarminas himself, I and my Companions alighted to salute and do him reverence. He inquired how we had thrived, whether we wanted any thing; we assured him, that amongst so courteous and obliging a People as his Subjects were, we thought that we could not possibly want any manner of thing needful for the life of man. He bid us get up again and ride along with him, we were in all near a thousand, all on swift Dromedaries: the Kings was as white as Snow, all the rest either red or black. It seems Sermodas had given the King an account of the passages of the former day: so that, to increase the more our wonder, he was resolved to shew us the excellency of his Country, and many other rare things; for that purpose he had appointed in our Road towards the Confines, all the ingenious men to meet us at every Town with their Talismans in their hands ready to shew us their skill and sport. We had not gone above two Leagues Southward, but we came to a Town called by the Sevarites Magmandi, where thirty Philosophers met the King; and to welcome him, they had a Talisman ready to make a Louse grow in an instant as big as a Camel. I saw the beast, and admired how such things could be done by a man, and as they told me, that they did it by the natural causes alone, with out the concurrence of any other thing. As soon as the Philosopher had turned the Louse into a Camel, he mounted upon it, and offered his service to Sevarminas to wait upon him in his Progress, which was accepted. And if I should say, that this strange Camel gallopped, or rather flew, as fast as any of our Dromedaries, scarce any person will believe it: yet true it is, that this new-made creature led the way before us, and returned back with us, shewing no signs of being weary: instead of Provender the Philosopher had provided himself with a bottle of Spirits, which he would sometimes, as I took notice, pour into the Camels Ears, and by that means kept the beast alive and vigorous. Another of these Philosophers had got a Flea in his hand, which, with an Image of Wax, he turned into a Dromedary, so like that which the King was upon, that I could not tell how to distinguish them. I saw the Flea which he held in a silken string, he shewed it to all our company, and before us, by an application of the Talismanical Figure, the Flea began to dilate it self into the body of Camel, and out of the body the legs and ears and head broke out almost like a Snail when it goes to creep, or like a Tortoise. All this was done in less than a quarter of an hour. He also had

Part II (1679)

101

a Saddle ready to ride along with us in the company of the King and his Nobles. I confess, I took these two Learned Sevarites for Conjurers, if not for Devils in mens shape. When Zidi Parabas perceived in our way, that Maurice whispered to me, he drew near to me, and assured me, that they could do more wonderful Feats than that by their great Art, and that what they had done was done by the secret power of natural causes, set on work by the influence of the Talisman. I told him, that I could wish, that we in our Country had the same skill and knowledge: but he answered, That such Mysteries are not fit but for men of the most refined Wits, and that no dull or vicious apprehensions can be capable of the sublime Notions that such men must have to act such Wonders, and to find out the way to make such strange Talismans. Another of these Philosophers, who stood within some golden Rails adjoyning to the Highway, had in his hand a naked Image of Wax, representing a young Girl, which Image he turned about his head, with some hard words which he uttered out of his mouth, and immediately there came to the place all the young Maidens within a certain distance, and threw off their garments with their modesty, in my judgment; but the religious Sevarites are not ashamed to behold what Nature teaches other men to cover. These Maidens leaped over the Rails about threescore in number, and began a most pleasant Dance upon the green grass before all our company, the Philosopher having appointed a Musician ready for that purpose, who played all the while upon his Instrument of Musick, according to which these Maidens leaped and danced up and down, which gave Sevarminas much sport and to all his Court; but when the Philosopher began to turn away, and cover the waxen Image, they took all their garments again, and departed with much satisfaction, because they had given some delight to their Prince, whom all the Sevarites reverence as they do a visible God; they are therefore very joyful, when they can do any thing to please and delight him. The rest of the Philosophers shewed every one in his turn what he was able to do. One held a Mouse by the tail in one hand, and his Talisman in the other, and threw the Mouse behind Sevarminas upon his Dromedary, which as soon as it was there, but a moment, it had the power to attract one of the most beautiful Virgins, whom I saw straggling behind the King. This thing caused the whole company to burst out in laughter; for she was just putting on her Apparel with the rest of her Companions, when the Talisman tyed her hands and feet, and drew her on a sudden, so that she was seen to leap all naked through the midst of us behind the King, where she remained till the Philosopher drew her back with the Talisman, and caused her to put on her cloaths and depart. Another of these Makers of Talismans was blowing with a Pipe at the breech of a Cat, which swelled bigger than any

102

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Elephant: when therefore he saw his time, he turned the tail towards the company, and by a secret Talisman gave liberty to the wind to go softly out by the same hole where it was put in. The noise was so delightful, that I never heard more variety and sweeter Musick in my days; for the Philosopher stroked the Cats back and belly, and as he pressed it harder or softer, the wind would go out and whistle all sorts of Tunes. The King himself and all the company desired the Learned man to come to Court as soon as he should return, and give them that sport, which they fancied very much. I looked upon the Cat, whether it was alive, and I saw that it was a natural Cat, much like the Civet-Cats; for besides the Musick, the Air was filled with such excellent and glorious smells, that we were all ravished and in a maze, how this could come to pass. All the rest shewed some trick or other, but for brevity sake I omit them, to give an account of our Journey. I cannot here describe the number of beautiful Fabricks, of Orchards full of all manner of Fruit-trees, Gardens with all kind of Flowers, Herbs, and Plants, both delightful to the eye, and useful to the body. I cannot number all the other Rarities and Riches which this Country was full of, with the pleasant Chanels of Crystal-water, with the Bridges and Arches in our way, with the many Towns walled and open, most of precious Stones, and adorned with Gold and Silver, and Ivory, and all manner of Riches. If I should give a particular account, no person can believe, unless he had been himself an Eye-witness of the things that we saw then in our Journey. We went through Parascali, a good Town, where the River Omer joyns with Rocara. The Inhabitants were so civil, that they met the King with rich Tables of Gold, covered all over with Dishes of Sweet-meats, of a China substance and make. Every Cavaliero had liberty to take what pleased him best. Whiles we stayed there, some Philosophers stood in our way to give us some of the former sports: at last he that was mounted upon his Camel, made of a Louse, caused two great wings to grow out at the back, by the means of a Talisman, which he had brought with him in his hand. As soon as they were perfected, the Camel flew up to the top of the great Steeple of the Temple of Parascali, where it stood a while with the Philosopher on its back: at last it returned to us again without any harm either to the beast or the man. The next Town was Moramir, the third Storax, the fourth Bolaciro, the fifth Memrak, the sixth Burino, where we stopt to take a Dinner prepared for us. I must not forget to mention certain Images that stood in the Highway, at the entring in of the Town; there were two chief, a young Maid of Alabaster, and a Man of white Marble. The Philosophers Camel would not go beyond them, till he began to prick the beast forward with a Talisman. If it had not been for this accident, I should not have taken so much notice of them, nor inquired after the cause of their being there.

Part II (1679)

103

Zidi Parabas gave me full satisfaction, and told me, that they were the Images of two unfortunate Lovers of the Town of Burino, who had been constant to one another, till death separated them, their love and constant affection caused their deaths: For it happened, that their Parents would not consent to their conjunction, which they dared not agree to without their leave, and the publick Solemnity, for fear of the disgrace which usually, as a consequence, attends upon such kind of amorous indiscretions in the Country of the Sevarites. They were therefore resolved to love one another tenderly and to refuse all other Matches and Proffers. They had been often tempted with other Proposals, and with the Beauty and Riches of other Parties; but Ziricus and Malimna, so were they named by Zidi Parabas, slighted all things but the sight and company of one another, which they would endeavour to injoy by stealth, because they were narrowly watched by their jealous Parents, who by no means would suffer them to come near together with their good will. Their love by this restraint increased more and more, and their mutual affection found many Tricks and Arts to meet together in spight of their Parents watchfulness. They found many back doors and secret corners, to which their extraordinary Sympathy brought them together: yet they would not be perswaded to violate the Law of the Sevarites. This Love continued near forty years with a constancy worthy to be chronicled; yet their Parents would never consent to their Marriage. At last when they saw, that neither their affection, nor their resolution never to change could prevail upon their cruel Parents, and their invincible obstinacy, they consulted betwixt themselves to depart together out of the Kingdom, and to marry in some other Land. Whiles they were in this resolution, they knew not which way to go, because the passages were narrowly guarded. At a meeting therefore, an old crafty Devil appears to them in the likeness of a man, and offers them his service to assist them over the Seas. They agreed for a price to be transported to an Island not inhabited, upon the Pacifick Sea, with some Tools, and grain for their maintenance. The Devil, in the shape of a Sevarite, promised to bring them a Ship in the dead time of the night to the great River of Rocara; for they thought he had been some Sea-man or Ship-master. The time and place of departing was appointed. The young Couple, according to their ingagement, came to the place a little before the evening; and when they saw that the Devil was rough to them, and had cloven feet, they began to suspect, yet they were so passionate for one another, and therefore so blind, that the woman first ventured her self in the Arms of the Devil to be carried through the water to the Ship, which they saw in the River: the young man intending to follow next; but the wicked Devil, instead of conveying the young Virgin safe aboard, plunged and held her under

104

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

water till she was stifled and dead, and that in sight of her Sweet-heart, who as soon as he heard her begin to shriek, and saw what was practising against her life and his, it is not to be imagined what torments and trouble of mind he was in, sometimes with his Sword in his hand he ran into the water up to the neck, again he would return up to the bank, to see whether his dearly Beloved was yet alive, again he would run into the River, till at last, when he perceived the wickedness of the counterfeit Devil, he cast himself desperately into the River; and though he had never any skill to swim, his love for his Beloved, for whom he had a more tender affection than for his own soul, made him venture, and found a means to get as far as the body of his murdered Darling, which he brought ashore, and seeing no sign of life, he killed himself, and fell upon her body. In remembrance of this Tragedy the Town hath dedicated these two Images, the one to Ziricus, and the other to Malimna, with a great many lesser Images of young Men and Maidens, that are all weeping for the misfortune of these two constant Lovers. This story Zidi Parabas told me, whiles the Dinner was bringing in to the great Hall of Ivory, where the King Sevarminas was to dine with all his Court. When we were sate down, we had all things needful presented before us, with a Concert of Musick mingled with rare Voices of some Virgins of the City. After this, a Philosopher brought in a Silver Chain, a great white Rat, about the bigness of a good Rabbet, which leaped upon the Table near Sevarminas, and looked wishfully upon him when he was eating; but when the Rat saw that the King said nothing, the Rat reached forth its paw or foot, and took some of the meat. The King was not a little surprised with the Rats boldness: How now! said he, did your Master teach you this? The Philosopher by the Talismanical Art could make it speak what he listed, for he could govern the tongue of the little creature in that manner, that what was in his mind the beast would speak: By your leave, my Lord, quoth the Rat to the King, I am hungry. The Rats speech surprised the King, and all the company left their meat to hear the discourse between the King and the Rat; for the Philosopher told his Majesty, That it would give him any answer that he would desire. They not knowing from whence it proceeded no more than we, they stood to see what the Rat would say: the Rat was neither ashamed, nor afraid of the company, but went from one dish to another to taste which was the best; it met with an Ostrich Pye, on which it fell aboard without any manners: the King bid it be gone, I’ll fill my belly first, answered the Rat, now I am here. King, I command thee to be gone. Rat, I love this company too well to run away in haste. King, Make haste. Rat, We must do nothing rashly. King, Thou wilt eat all. Rat, There is enough in the Land, for you and me too. King, Who tutored thee? Rat, My Master. Several

Part II (1679)

105

other discourses past between Sevarminas and this artificial creature, which was made to speak, not by its own understanding, but by that of the Philosopher only; by the Talismanical Art he could make use of the organ and tongue of the Rat to speak what was according to his mind. This was a curious passage, and gave the whole company great delight. The Philosopher told Sevarminas, That he could make any beast, that was tame, to speak in that manner, and say any thing. We found this to be too true; for afterwards another Learned man had taught a Camel, another an Ass, another a Dromedary, another a tame Lion to say any thing, with as much reason, as if they had been rational creatures, whereas it was but the organ of their tongue that was made use of by the strong power of a Talisman to turn which way, and articulate whatsoever the Author of the Talisman pleased. We stayed not long in the place; but as soon as we had all dined, and refreshed our selves, we mounted upon our Dromedaries, and went on in our Journey. The Louse, Camel, and the Flea turned into a Dromedary, going with us in our company, we passed by a curious Town that stood upon an Hill, which had a plentiful stream of water rising from the top, and falling from a steep place upon a Diamant Rock, and then incompassed the Hill round with a deep Chanel, over which there was a curious Bridge of precious Stones, with Silver Globes on the top, and the sides of the Walls with a most beautiful Arch, the most regularly built that I ever knew. The Towns name is Tiftani, commanded by a Prince, the most considerable of all the Subjects of Sevarminas, he came out to meet us with a beautiful Guard of young Gallants, all cloathed in Cloth of Silver. The Princess also came to the entring in of the Town with a beautiful Attendance of ladies in their rich Attire covered over with Pearls, and the richest and most precious Stones. They made a low obeisance to King Sevarminas, and offered him the Keys of their City, which he returned to the Prince Muraski: that was the name of the Prince, who was young, about the age of thirty years. We passed through the streets through the Acclamations and Applauses of all the Common people, that are the happiest in the World in all respects; for they pay but little or no Tribute, and have all things in such abundance, glory, and plenty, that there is no want nor complaints in all the Land, the poorest Sevarite hath enough, and the richest can have no more than they use, for all the rest is superfluous. The next Town was Tiptanicar, where upon an high Tower stood a Talisman of Gold, for what intent I could never learn. We went through Muramni, Borascot, Malavisi, and several other good walled Towns in our way. We lodged that night in one of the Kings Palaces, situate in a little Lake, about ten miles in compass, in an Island that stands in the middle. Several Boats and Vessels waited for us to convey us and our Dromedaries over to the

106

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

Island. This place is one of the most pleasant abodes of the World. Here we stop’d above a fortnight, which we spent sometimes in fishing, sometimes in hunting, walking about, and admiring the wonderful things that appeared every where. Sometimes the Kings Philosophers together with the Musicians, would make us such good sport, that we were never weary, we could have spent the days and the nights in seeing such sports and pass-times. Sevarminas all this while sent for me often, with De Nuits and Maurice, to discourse with us, and inform himself concerning the Affairs, Commodities, and Conveniencies of our Country: in which particulars I always gave him such answers as would increase his desire to entertain a Trade and Correspondency with our Nation, and the other People of Europe. When we had lived here in this Castle, and pleasant Island called the Isle of Foxes, and in the Sevarites Language Cristako, we set forward for another place called the Mount Timpani, where the Kings of the Sevarites have another House of Pleasure: it is about an hundred Leagues distant towards the Southwest from Cristako. We passed through many Woods, Vallies, and an open Country in our way to it, and had the sight of several rare Towns, Seravi, Puteoli, Nanti, Quarok, Runtour, and several others no less rich and beautiful than the former. I cannot forget to mention a rare Invention which I saw at Seravi. There is a large River about two miles distant from the Town, which stands upon a Hill without any water. The ingenious Sevarites therefore have found an Art to convey this great River in an artificial Chanel, built and supported upon an Arch of hard Diamant stone, above two miles from one Hill to the other, over a deep Valley, into which the River did run before; but because the Valley was not so wholesom an Air as the top of the Mountain, they have built there their houses, and been at the trouble to make for the River an artificial Chanel, so deep, that Boats of an hundred Tun can sail up and down in the driest time of Summer; for there is scarce any mud or dirt in the Chanel over the Valley: the water is as clear as Crystal. In another Town called Runtour, there was a company of Apes met us at the entry in of the Town: they were so bold, that they leapt upon the backs of our Dromedaries, and put us in no little danger to be cast to the ground. But one of our Philosophers pulled out of his pocket a strange Talisman, of a yellow colour, through which there was a hole which he clapt to his lips, and whistled away the Apes. They were not gone ten paces from us, but they all fell down dead with the venemous Spirits which this Talisman conveyed to them without hurting any creature else; for you must know, that what is a poyson to one creature, is not so to another, and these skillful men so well read in the secret Mysteries of Nature, can direct their operations which way they please, at a dis-

Part II (1679)

107

tance as well as near at hand. The King of the Sevarites hath always one or more of these Philosophers to accompany him when he goes into the Country, for fear any accident might happen to his Person or Retinue. We found a plentiful Dinner prepared for us at Nanti, where the Ladies of the Town waited upon Sevarminas at the Table, and came to the rest of his Company to offer their Services. The Governors name was Forabo, an old grave Signior near fourscore years of age, he had twenty Sons comely and proper young men, with five Daughters, all by one Woman, whose name was Pluralis: she was then a grave Matron of a beautiful and grave countenance, her Daughters young Ladies followed her when she came to salute Sevarminas and his Lords. We made no long stay in this place, but marched next to the Mount Timpani, but could not get thither till the next day at night; we lodged therefore in the Town of Durambi, and the next day early in the morning we set forward in our Journey to mount Timpani, where we arrived about Sun-set. There happened nothing in this days riding remarkable, only Maurices Dromedary being offended that he had kicked her with his heel, cast him to the ground, and bruised his thigh and arm; but the Kings Physician applying an Herb called Muroz, which he found in the fields hard by, cured the wound, eased him presently of his pain, so that he never complained afterwards. The nature of these creatures is such, that they must be gently dealt withal, otherwise they become furious and mad; but if the Rider handles them softly, there is no beast so gentle, so easie, and useful. Mount Timpani is a pleasant Hill crowned on the top with all manner of the most beautiful Trees in Nature, bearing all sorts of Fruits. In the midst is the Kings Palace moted round. The water runs from six great Fountains, which are on the top of the Hill, unto which there is an easie ascent on the side of the Hill: about half a mile from the Castle is a Town of the same name, very glorious to the eye when the Sun shines. The Castle or the Kings Palace is about a mile in circumference, with strong Walls of clear stones, of a white and reddish colour, such as I never saw the like before. It was well furnished with all manner of Houshold-stuff, the richest that I ever beheld: the large and spacious Rooms, Chambers, and Halls, and Galleries, with their Ornaments, were not to be numbered. At our first arrival, the Governor of the Town, with the chief Inhabitants, came to wait upon their King, who shewed them a great deal of respect as belonged to his loving Subjects. All this while he had concealed the cause of his Journey to that place, and would not let any person, not his own Son, nor any of his Privy Counsellors understand any thing of it, till three or four days after our arrival; for it becomes a great Prince, who intends to act securely in weighty matters,

108

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

not to let any man, not his greatest Friends, know his intentions to the full. Sevarminas having here a great business to put in execution, which concerned nothing less than the safety and peace of his Empire, he concealed it from all the world, and gave out, that he would make this Progress for his pastime and for his health. The Governors name was Smuriamnas, a man of an ancient Family, lineally descended from the great Sevarias, but young and very ambitious, and no less proud and haughty amongst his Equals, which caused his People not to affect him so much as otherwise they would have done. At our arrival he came to pay his Homage and Respects to Sevarminas his Prince, and the next day invited him and all the Court to a costly and sumptuous Banquet. I and my Companions, together with Sermodas and Zidi Parabas, were lodged in a spacious Chamber, where were twenty Beds of Ivory and Gold, with curious Curtains of Silk embroidered with Gold, with the Walls hung with Pictures, very well and artificially drawn. After Supper we went to take our leaves of King Sevarminas, and were immediately conducted to our Chamber, where we rested sweetly, till the next morning the noise of the Trumpets, Bag-pipes, Flutes, Viols, and Violins, Harps, Guitars, and all manner of Musick played at the Kings rising. This pleasant and ravishing Harmony awakened us and our Chamber-fellows, and obliged us to put on our Apparel. We walked about the Chamber a while, discoursing of the strange passages of our Journey, when in came a Messenger from the King to call us to him. He had an intent to walk about his Parks, and view the Town before Dinner. He was therefore willing, that we Strangers might go along with him, not only for our satisfaction, but also to shew his People men of foreign Nations come to adore and worship him. The Parks were all walled round with many Lakes, Ponds, Rivers, and Streams of Water full of all manner of wild and tame Fowl, with all sorts of Beasts, Deer of all kinds, Rabbets, Hares, and a sort of Creature named Buffoli, which hath no joynts in its fore-legs, and nevertheless runs as swift as any other beast. In the Parks we had the sight of many Trees and Woods, where the Birds and wild Fowl and Beasts use to shelter themselves. After this Walk we marched into the Town, all our Company, where the Governor at the entrance received us with his Family; but the Citizens, with the chief men, stood at a distance, crying out, men, women, and children in their Language, Marabi, Marabi, Marabi, that is, Justice, Justice, Justice. I saw at this sudden cry the Governors countenance change: he nevertheless drew near to Sevarminas with all the respect imaginable; but he received him with a setled countenance, and asked what the people meant by their Marabi. Before he had time to answer, one of the chief of the Sevarites stept forward, followed by all the rest. They all fell upon their knees, and bowing to Sevarminas,

Part II (1679)

109

they humbly intreated him, that he would listen to and pity their grievance. What is the matter? answered he. One of them stood up, and in the Governors presence spoke to him in this manner: “Most Noble and ever Glorious Monarch, we your Subjects are heartily glad to see you amongst us, we have longed a great while to have you here to free us from an intolerable burden. Prince Smuriamnas our Governor forgetting the blessed Rules of out great Sevarias, oppresseth us contrary to all Law and Justice, and hath spilled the innocent blood of many of our friends, whose Souls will not suffer us to sleep in quiet, till their deaths be revenged. We have often admonished him to recal him from his perverse and wicked practices; but to all our admonitions he hath returned nothing but curses and blows without mercy: so that for these many years we have lived as so many slaves; and unless your glorious Majesty will relieve us, we must forsake him and his Principality, and seek our remedy in a retreat far from him. But we expect from your Justice and Goodness that relief which you have afforded to many of your poor Subjects in such like cases.” This Speech made Smuriamnas faint away, so that he fell down as dead before the whole company; but Sevarminas caused him to be taken up, and his Physician to take care of him. Sevarminas expected this complaint before he heard it. His coming was to remove and punish Smuriamnas, and place in his stead his eldest Son Suricolis, a young Man of an excellent beauty, who waited upon him from his youth. As soon as he heard the peoples grievance, he assured them, that he would severely punish him according to Law, and cause them to receive satisfaction, wishing them all to depart home with this assurance, without noise or tumult, and to be ready when his Judges should be ready to examine their Cause, to bring in their Allegations and Proofs against Smuriamnas. In the mean while Sevarminas would not go to the Palace of Smuriamnas as he was invited, nor to the Town Hall, where the chief of the Town promised to bring him a Dinner; but he returned with all his Train to the Castle, where Dinner was ready for us. He gave Order, that Smuriamnas should be kept in a close Prison, joyning to the place of Judicature, till the next day; for then he intended, with the Advice of his Court, to punish him according to the Laws of the Land; for it seems he had been guilty of Murder, and Violence, and Oppression, and had not observed the sacred Laws of the Sevarites in his Jurisdiction. The next day we went down into the Town to accompany Sevarminas, who sate down upon an high Throne prepared for him, under a Canopy of Gold, embroidered; round about sate and stood his religious Counsellors and Judges. When it was noised about the Town, that Sevarminas was sate in his Judgmentseat, for it was not above nine of the clock in the morning, the whole Town came to the place, with intention to accuse Smuriamnas, who was

110

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

brought before the King with his hands tied behind his back. Presently there came a Widow with four young Infants weeping, because Smuriamnas had killed her Husband in his anger, for no other cause, but because he would not comply with his irregular commands. She proved it against him by no less than ten Witnesses, who were there present upon the place. Another stept up and said, That he had killed his Brother, producing sufficient Witnesses that saw the Murder. Another complained of the destroying of his Friend privately: others came forth to declare how Smuriamnas had oppressed them with cruel Exactions. The King desired no other proof of these Accusations, but the view of his body without a disguise, covering, or paint: For, as I said before, as soon as men amongst the Sevarites have committed any wickedness, there is immediately an alteration upon the body and skin of the Offendor, that declares what he hath done. That this might not appear, Smuriamnas had made use of the Talismanical Art and of Painting, by the one to keep down all tumors and rising in his face and hands, and by the other to cover all ugly colours that were upon his skin. Therefore the King commanded him to be stript naked, and carried into a Bath, and there to be rub’d and washed, which accordingly was done. When he was brought back, I never saw such a disfigured Creature, his arms were as black as pitch, his hands all gore blood, his face as green as grass, his legs as yellow as saffron, on his back and legs appeared two Tumors about the bigness of Walnuts. When he appeared so odious to the company, the King passed his Sentence upon him, to the great joy of the Inhabitants: and because blood requires blood, and no other Crime is to be punished with death but Murder amongst the Sevarites, the King delivered him to the will of the aggrieved parties to put him to death. They took him first and whipped him, till his body was full of scars and wounds, which they anointed with honey, and then tyed him upon an high place in the middle of their Town with his face upwards. As soon as he was there, a Swarm of Wasps and Bees flew about him, with some Vulturs and Eagles, which devoured him in two days: so that there was nothing remaining of his body but the bones. The King condescended to this exemplary punishment, the rather, because Smuriamnas had a design to alter the Government of the Sevarites, and revolt from his obedience: for that purpose he had endeavoured to perswade some other petty Princes to Joyn with him against their Soveraign King Sevarminas. Yet he was so gracious to call his son in the presence of all the Chief men of the town, and to restore him to his Fathers Estate and Goods, without the least diminution of any thing. He gave him this admonition in the presence of a multitude of people: Suricolis, said the King, thou hast seen a

Part II (1679)

111

severe Example of Justice upon thy Father for abusing his Power and Authority, I might make that use of his Crime, to deprive all his Family from any such opportunity of doing a mischief; but I consider, that thy Religious inclinations have often caused thee to disallow thy Fathers proceedings, and to blame him for the liberty he took contrary to Justice and Law. I consider, that thou art as likely to do as much good as Smuriamnas hath done mischief. I restore thee not only to thy Fathers Estate, but likewise to his Authority and Command. Take heed that thou followest not thy Fathers Example: let not thy Glory puff thee up with pride, nor thy Power cause thee to act contrary to Reason and Law: remember that there is a punishment for evil doers, as there are rewards for the just: behave thy self with that discretion and moderation, that thou mayst have the commendation rather than the condemnation of thy Country-men, that thou mayst deserve well from me and them. This Clemency and Justice made Sevarminas to be praised in all parts amongst the Sevarites; for thereby all persons were obliged, and thereby secured from such like violences, and the noble Family of Smuriamnas continued in its Splendour and Glory, only a rotten Member was taken out of the way for the Publick good. After this piece of Justice, we remained there about a month, which Sevarminas spent in regulating all those things that were amiss in the Government of Smuriamnas through his ill Management of Affairs. Afterwards he left there the new Governor Suricolis to do Justice in his absence, commanding him to be impartial in all his publick Actions, and to abstain from the Vices unto which his Father was inclinable, which cast him into the dangerous precipice of destruction. We departed from thence with the blessings and good wishes of all the Inhabitants; and in three days we returned to Sevarinde, where our coming was expected with much impatience; for in the Kings absence that City could not be governed well by any other person. Some disorders therefore had happened, which the Viceroy could not pacifie without the Kings Authority and Presence. The whole City met us at two miles from the place, and in a most beautiful order marched along with us into Sevarinde. I continued in the City about half a year, which I spent in inquiring after the Conveniencies of the Country, the Sea-Ports, the Commodities and Riches that it brings forth, that I might give that information to my Country-men, which might benefit them, in future Ages after my return to my own Country; for we were in expectation of a Ship from Batavia, whither we had again sent some of our men with a Vessel, which we had recovered amongst the Sporvi, to desire the Governor of Batavia to send a Ship that might convey away our Goods and persons.

112

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

But whiles I stayed there, a young Lady of Sevarinde, who had lost her Husband by death, fell in love with Maurice, and often treated us very nobly in her house. Maurice was no Sevarite, and could not refrain from some amorous embraces, which the Lady gladly accepted of; for it was not lawful by the Law of the Sevarites to match with any other generation. But to cover their actions, the Lady had made use of the skill of the Philosophers to keep down the Tumors in her skin and body, and to paint Maurices face and hands, which hindered their secret correspondency from being known abroad. I must needs confess, that Maurices happiness caused me to look abroad, and see whether I could meet with the same Fortune: For that purpose I walked about the City often, early and late, to see what I should by chance meet with. About a month before our departure from Sevarinde, a young Gentlewoman, who had Father and Mother, and never knew a man, invited me into a Garden, where she was alone, in the Spanish Tongue. I was glad of this opportunity, we walked therefore several turns together, talking of diverse matters: at last she opened her mind to me in this manner. Sir, I understand by your countenance, that you are a Stranger, our King Sevarminas hath a great esteem for you, as well as my Father and Mother: we have often talked of you and your religious behaviour since your coming into our Country; we shall therefore be glad to be acquainted with you; for in my Fathers name I will bid you welcome, and will assure you, that he will give you a kind reception; for he is a Merchant, and conveys Commodities from City to City amongst the Sevarites. Sir, modesty will not give me leave to tell you more of my mind; but when we shall be better acquainted, I hope—With these words she broke off with a modest blush upon her Cheeks. The young Woman was most beautiful, and was cloathed in white Silk, with a Girdle of pure Gold, all beset with precious Stones about her middle. She inquired whether I were not married in my own Country, I assured her, that I was not: upon this, she confessed her amorous inclinations for me, but withal told me, that every thing must be performed in due time, and that she would not precipitate the business, but wished me to ask her Fathers consent, assuring me that she would willingly leave all to live and dye with a man of that sweet temper and disposition that I was of. Her loving Complements I answered with Caresses, and assured her, that I should think my self happy in her injoyment. We spent some time together to begin our a acquaintance, and to inform our selves of one anothers Conditions and Estate; but the night obliged me to leave her for that time, and return to my Lodgings. When I gave Maurice an account of all particulars, he advised me not to neglect the offer, but to visit her in her Fathers house; for himself and his Lady, he told me, that he was resolved to carry her

Part II (1679)

113

with him to Batavia, where he intended to live and dye with her: and though Women amongst the Sevarites are forbidden Goods, and that it is not lawful to transport them to other Countries, he was perswaded by the means of friends with Sevarminas, to get that liberty and priviledge, which was never granted to any before. This discourse and his hopes made me conceive the same. I went therefore often to see the young Lady, who entertained me and my Companions very courteously, as well as her Father and Mother. After several Visits, I opened the matter to the Parents in their Daughters absence; they made some difficulty, because of Laws of the Country, and my inclinations to return into my own Country. But when I told them, that we had Plantations in Batavia, not far from thence, and that I would live and dye with her there, they began to yield to my request in case Sevarminas would dispense with the Law of the Land, and suffer me to carry her away. This I told them, that I would endeavour to obtain from his goodness. I cannot give an exact account of all our pleasant meetings, of the rare things she discovered to me, of the delightful Walks, and other things which pass all imagination. But certainly her company and sweet Conversation made me spend my time with great contentment. In order to our Marriage, when the Portion was agreed upon, I caused Zidi Parabas and Ziribabdas, my two intimate Friends, to open the business to King Sevarminas, that we might have his approbation and consent to that which was not agreeable with the ancient Laws of the Sevarites. But in regard we had behaved our selves so religiously since our being in the Country, he thought it no disgrace to grant us more liberty than ordinary. After this business had been debated in his Privy Council, it was resolved that this course should be taken to oblige us the more, and invite our Country-men to trade with his People. Therefore I had a leave to marry publickly my young Mistress, and Maurice also had a Dispensation to take to Wife his courteous Lady. When all these things were agreed upon, the day was appointed, for both King Sevarminas, and all the Nobles of his Court, assisted at the Solemnity, and brought us to his Royal Palace, where he bestowed upon us most rich and glorious Gifts, and entertained our new and young Wives with a sumptuous Feast, at which they had the Honour to sit next the Queen. The Ceremony of Marriage was performed in the great Temple of Sevarinde, by breaking of bread and joyning of hands, with many Prayers and Blessings from their Priests. It was concluded with a Dance and Musick, where all the young Ladies of the Court shewed their activity. Before the Marriage was concluded, a Ship was arrived amongst the Sporvi from Batavia, where Meen Heer van Plumerick commanded in Chief. As soon as we had news of this Ship, we went and gave an account

114

The History of the Sevarites or Sevarambi

of its arrival to Sevarminas, who desired us to send for the Captain Van Plumerick, and promised, that then we should have liberty to depart along with him, with our Wives, and such things as belonged to us, to Batavia, or whither we had a mind to go. We thanked him for his great and extraordinary Civilities, and told him, that we would spread his Fame all over the World. According to this Order, Sermodas was sent back to Sporundè, to fetch Captain Van Plumerick, whose Ship had Orders to get into the River of Rocara. He came with some kind of reluctancy, not knowing the Civilities and good Entertainment that we had found amongst the Sevarites. But when he was arrived, and saw the Riches and Happiness of the People and Country, and found them, as well as we, to be men of Faith, good Behaviour, and Honesty, he was not sorry for his condescension to this request. After his arrival to Sevarinde, we remained there two months, which we spent in merry Sports, Feasts, Banquets, Hunting, Hawking, and all manner of Delights, according to the custom of that glorious Court. Sevarminas was well pleased with the Conversation of Van Plumerick; for he was a gallant Man, and knew so well how to hit the humor of Sevarminas, that the King gave him very rich Presents. His Ship had Orders to draw near to the Borders of the Sevarites into the River Rocara, because we might more conveniently load our Goods, and because Sevarminas had a great desire to go on board, and see the manner and fashions of our Ships of War, and the great Guns that were on board. To comply with his desire, we all went to the banks of the River Rocara, where the Ship rode at an Anchor, trimmed and flourishing with Garlands and Pendents of all colours. Sevarminas, accompanied by all his Court, was carried in the Captains Pinnace that waited for him, with several other Boats: when he was aboard, the Cannon and Trumpets bid him welcome. The Captain presented him with some Rarities, which they have not in that Country. He gave him a Watch, a Clock, Guns of an extraordinary make, with many other things of Europe. After a Banquet in the great Cabin of the Ship, he returned to the shore, very well satisfied with his Entertainment. He desired one or two of our great Guns; for he intended to have some cast of Silver, because he had no Brass nor Bell-metal in all his Country. We returned with him to Sevarinde, and then taking our farewel of all our Friends and Relations, we carried away our Goods, and shipped them aboard. Van Plumericks Ship, with our Wives, and all our Company, set sail towards Batavia; but a storm, or rather a Hurricane at Sea, had almost driven us back again on the shore. We escaped narrowly by the great skill of the Mariners, and the watchfulness and vigilancy of the Captain: So that in six days, or thereabouts, after the storm, we had sight of a Cape in Batavia, where we landed, to the great joy of all our

Part II (1679)

115

Country-men, who were desirous to see the new Country that we had discovered, when we shewed them our Riches and Jewels, and gave them an account of the excellent People that inhabit there. FINIS.

This page intentionally left blank.

THE HISTORY OF THE

SEVARAMBIANS: A People of the South-Continent. IN FIVE PARTS.

CONTAINING

An Account of the GOVERNMENT, LAWS, RELIGION, MANNERS, and LANGUAGE of that NATION.

Translated from the MEMOIRS of

CAPTAIN SIDEN,

Who lived fifteen Years amongst them.

London: Printed for JOHN NOON, at the White-Hart near

Mercer’s-Chapel, Cheapside.

MDCCXXXVIII. 117

118

The History of the Sevarambians

THE AUTHOR’S PREFACE Those who have read Plato’s COMMON-WEALTH, Sir Thomas Moore’s EUTOPIA,11 or Lord Bacon’s NEW ATLANTIS, which are only ingenious Productions of Imagination, may, perhaps, be ready to believe, that all the Relations of newly discover’d Countries, that have anything of the marvellous in them, are of the same kind. Nor, indeed, do I pretend to condemn this prudent Precaution, which will not, lightly, assent to every thing that is said; provided it keeps, still within the Bounds of Moderation. But yet, it is, surely, as great an Instance of Obstinacy to reject any thing without Examination, because it has somewhat extraordinary in it, as it wou’d be of want of Judgment to receive every thing, implicitely, which is reported to us of foreign Countries. I might cite a thousand famous Examples to confirm what I am now saying. Many things have formerly past as incontestable Facts, which the Ages since have fully discover’d to be only ingenious Fictions. Many things have also, for a long time, been looked on as fabulous, nay, and even been rejected as impious and contrary to Religion, which have afterwards come to be admitted as such Certainties, that whoever should but dare to doubt them, would be condemn’d as ignorant, stupid and ridiculous. Was it not owing to the grossest Ignorance of this sort, that Virgilius, Bishop of Cologn, was, by a publick Decree, condemn’d to lose his Life, for asserting the ANTIPODES? And, that nothing but a solemn Renunciation, of that incontestable Truth, could save him from the Torments, which, the inconsiderate Zeal of the Bigots of his time, were preparing for him? Was it not, also with as little Reason, that Christopher Columbus was treated as a Visionary, first of all in England, and afterwards in Portugal, for suggesting, that, there were Lands west of the most western then known? Yet, after all, those who have sail’d round the World, are fully convinc’d of the Truth of Virgilius’s Assertion; and the Discovery of America, has so throughly justified Columbus’s Conjecture, that there is not a Person living who makes any doubt of either:—The Accounts of Peru, Mexico, and China being now universally believed to be authentick, though at their first Publication they were look’d on as meer Romances. These distant Countries, and many others which have been found out since, were not only wholly unknown for several Ages in Europe, but even continue, to this day, far from being perfectly discover’d. For the Persons who sail into such remote Parts, being induc’d thereto more by the Hope of Gain, than Curiosity, content themselves chiefly with a —————— 11. [Sir Thomas More’s Utopia (1516).]

Preface

119

View of the Sea-Coasts, where they do their Business, and never give themselves any trouble about Places which they cannot go to with their Ships: besides, as they are almost all Seamen, they frequently pass by Islands, and sometimes Continents too, without being at the pains of remarking them, any farther, perhaps, than is just necessary, in order to know how to avoid them another time. From hence it comes to pass, that generally what knowledge we have of these Countries is owing to Chance; there being few Persons, who have either Curiosity enough, or any of the other Requisites, for the making these long Voyages, with no other Design than that of discovering unknown Countries, and rendering themselves capable of giving true and faithful Accounts of them. It were therefore to be wish’d, that a happy Peace wou’d give Princes leisure to think of Things of this nature; and to endeavour at such laudable and useful Discoveries, by which, without any great Expence, they might procure an inestimable Advantage to the World, do honour to their Country, and acquire themselves a never dying-Fame. In short, if they would employ but a small part of their superfluous Wealth, for the Maintenance of a Set of ingenious young Men, and send them into foreign Parts, to remark every thing worthy of Observation, and make faithful Reports of them, they would derive on themselves a solid Glory, which would make them excellent Examples for their Successors, recommend their Memory in a most endearing manner to Posterity, and perhaps, be accompanied with many other Advantages, sufficient to repay them the Expence of such a laudable Enterprize.—There would be no room to doubt the Relations which should be made by People set a-part expresly for that purpose; and who, having been brought up to the Study of the Mathematicks, and other Sciences, must be much more exact than Merchants and Sailors, which for the most part are either ignorant, or have not Time and Conveniences for Observations; and oftentimes, even dwell a long while in a Country without adverting to any thing but just what concerns their Trade. This appears, evidently, to be the Case with respect to the Dutch. They have many colonies in the East-Indies; they go besides to a thousand other Places where their Traffick calls them; and yet they give us only some short and imperfect Relations of the Places themselves where they have Settlements, or near which their Vessels daily pass in their Voyages to them. The Sund-Islands, and especially that of Borneo, which is describ’d in the Charts as one of the largest in the World, and lies in the way from Java to Japan, are hardly known amongst us: At least I cannot recollect that ever I have seen any tolerable Account of them. Several Persons have coasted along by the third Continent, commonly call’d Terra Australis incognita, but none have taken the pains to visit it, and give

120

The History of the Sevarambians

any Description of it. ’Tis true indeed we find its Shores painted on our Maps and Charts, but so imperfectly, that ’tis but a confus’d Light that is to be got from thence. No body, indeed, doubts but that there is such a Continent, because several Persons have seen it, and some few made a Descent upon it; but as they have not ventur’d far up into the Country, and have been most times driven thither contrary to their Inclination, we have yet but very slight and trifling Descriptions of it. The History which we herewith offer to the Publick, will, in some measure, supply this Defect. It is written in so plain and simple a manner, that I hope no Person will hesitate about the Truth of it; it being easy for the Reader to remark, that it has all the Characters of a true Narration. However, I think my self oblig’d to add a few Reasons which go a good way in establishing its Authority. The Author of this History, named Captain Siden, after having dwelt fifteen or sixteen Years in a Country he here gives an Account of, left it in the way which he himself relates at the close of the Work, and came to Smyrna, a City of Natolia,12 where he embark’d on board a Dutch Ship belonging to the Fleet which was then ready to return into Europe. This Fleet was that which the English attack’d in the Straights, at the Commencement of the second War. Every body knows, that the Hollanders defended themselves bravely, and that there were great Numbers kill’d and wounded on both sides. Captain Siden happen’d to be one of the last; and liv’d but a few Hours after he receiv’d the Shot. There was a Physician in the same Vessel, who was coming over with him, with whom he had contracted an Acquaintance before they sail’d from Smyrna. As they were both ingenious, learned Men, they had had, frequently, long Conversations together, during their Voyage, which produced a reciprocal Esteem and Friendship between them, and this rose to such a degree, that the Captain (who made a Secret of his Adventures to every body else, because he was not willing that any other Person but himself should have the Honour of publishing his Discovery; which he had Thoughts of doing himself, as soon as he should get home) related them almost wholly to the Physician; beginning with his Departure from Holland, and coming down to his Arrival at Smyrna. But as he did not live long enough to accomplish his Design, when he found his End approaching, he gave all his Things to his Friend, and recommended his Papers to him in the following Terms: “My dear Friend, since it is the Will of the Almighty that I should not live so long as I might have done according to the ordinary Course of —————— 12 [Anatolia, or modern Turkey.].

Preface

121

Nature, I submit to the divine Pleasure without murmuring; and am ready to resign my Soul into his hands, because he is my Creator, and God; and has a right to redemand it, and to dispose of it as he shall think fit—I hope that, of his infinite Mercy, he will pardon all my Sins, and make me a Partaker of his eternal Glory. My Dissolution is now at hand, and I shall see you no more: But since I have yet a few Moments of Life remaining, I would make use of them to tell you, that I die your Friend; and, as a Proof of my Esteem for you, I bequeath to you all that I have in the Ship. You will find a great Coffer that holds my Clothes, with some Money and Jewels. These things are not, indeed, of great value; but such as they are, I give them to you with all my heart. Besides the Clothes, the Money, and Jewels, you will meet with a real Treasure; which is the History of all that has happened to me since my setting out from Holland for the East-lndies; great part of which I have related to you. The Work itself, indeed, is in much confusion, being almost all written on loose Leaves, and in divers Languages, which will need to be explain’d: The Events also will want to be rang’d in their natural Order, which I design’d to have done my self; but since it doth not please God to permit me to execute it, I leave the Care of it to you; and I assure you on the Word of a dying Man, that I have said nothing, in those Writings, but what is strictly true; as perhaps, Time and Experience may one day shew.” These were the last Words of the Author; who, a few Hours after, resign’d his Soul to God, with an exemplary Constancy and Submission. He was a Man, according to the Account of the Physician, who was well made, had a good Stock of Wit, and whose Manners and Deportment were exceeding prudent and decent, and had the Appearance of the utmost Sincerity. After his Death his Executor examin’d his Papers, and found that they were written in Latin, French, Italian, and Dutch; which greatly embarrass’d him, because he did not understand all these Languages himself, and was unwilling to trust them in other hands. These Difficulties, and many other Affairs since, occasion’d his neglecting the Publication of this History till now. But being come out of Holland into England, soon after the Conclusion of the Peace between the two Nations, he did me the Honour, some time since, to leave the Papers with me, on my promising to methodize them, and put them all into one Language. Accordingly I examin’d them with great Care, and found them to contain Things so extraordinary, and marvellous, that I could not be at rest till I had reduc’d them into order, and plac’d them in such a Light as the nature of the Subject requir’d; making use, for this Purpose, of the Assistance and Opinion of the Person who put them into my hands.

122

The History of the Sevarambians

Besides what has been already said, there are many other Proofs which support the Truth of this Relation. Several Persons in Holland, soon after the Death of Captain Siden, assur’d his Executor, that about the time specified at the beginning of the History, a new Ship sail’d from Texel, call’d the Golden Dragon, bound for Batavia; with Money, Passengers, and other Things: which was suppos’d to have been wreck’d, because no News had been heard of her since. To this I may add, that before I went to work upon the Papers, I waited on Minheer Van Dam, Advocate for the East-India Company, and one of the Commissaries deputed by the States of Holland, to enter into a Treaty of Commerce with England. Of this Gentleman I enquir’d about the Ship, and he confirm’d, to me, all that had been told my Friend in Holland. But, after all, that which establishes most strongly the Truth of this History, is deduc’d from a Letter, written by a Flemish Gentleman to a French one, concerning this very Ship. The Letter has been put into my hands by the Person who receiv’d it, which, therefore, I think proper to insert here; after having just mention’d the occasion on which it was written. This Gentleman informs me, that being one day walking with the Author of the Letter, and falling into Discourse with him about the Indies, where the other had resided a long time, he told him that he had once been driven by bad Weather on the Coast of the Southern Continent, where he was in great danger of perishing, but at last by divine Assistance escap’d. To this he added, that he remember’d to have heard a Mariner say, that he was once wreck’d there in a Ship call’d the Golden Dragon, from whence he came to Batavia with seven others, in a Pinnace built out of the Pieces of the Ship, to sollicit Succours for the rest of the Crew. A Year or two after this Recital, my Informant happening to be in a Company where there was some Talk of the Terra incognita, repeated the Story which he had heard from the Fleming. He had no sooner finish’d his Narration, but a Gentleman of Savoy ask’d him several Questions relating to it with a good deal of Concern; and, because he was not able to answer him in every particular, the Savoyard begg’d the Favour of him, to write to the Fleming, and get all the Light he could into that Affair. He added, that his Eagerness proceeded from an Interest he had in the Ship, one of his Relations having embark’d in it, whom they cou’d never hear any News of, tho’ they had made the utmost Enquiry: Tho’ this Relation had left an Estate in trust with him, after having sold the greatest part of his other Effects, and that having in vain expected his Return for many Years, his Heirs were engag’d in a Suit of Law about the Succession. It was, therefore, at the Intreaty of this

Preface

123

Savoyard that the Gentleman wrote to the Fleming, from whom he receiv’d the following Letter in French, which I have here transcrib’d, word for word, without the least Variation. “Sir, according to your Desire, and for the Satisfaction of your Friend, you are to know, that, when I was at Batavia in the Year 1659, a Flemish Mariner named Prince hearing that I had been on the Coast of the South Continent, related to me, that he had been wreck’d there, some Years before, in a new Dutch Ship, call’d either the Green, or the Golden Dragon; which carried a considerable Sum of Money for Batavia, and about four hundred Persons, who all, or however the greater Part, sav’d themselves by getting ashore, where they continu’d under the same Discipline and Command as aboard, and entrench’d themselves, having sav’d the most part of their Victuals. That, out of the Pieces of the Ship they had built a Pinnace, and cast Lots for eight Men, of which he happen’d to be one, to go in it to Batavia, to inform the Dutch General of their Misfortune, and pray him to send some Ship to fetch over those who were left behind. That, after much Difficulty the Pinnace arriv’d there, when the General immediately dispatch’d a Frigate, which, being come on the Coast, sent her Long-Boat with several Hands a-shore, with Orders to go as high up as had been directed; but they found no Soul, nor any Sign that ever there had been any body there. That, not fully satisfied with this first Attempt, they search’d several other Places on the Coast, till at last they lost their Long-Boat, with several People in her, by the bad Weather to which that Coast is, at some times of the Year, subject, which made them return to Batavia without doing what they were sent for. And that, after this, the General sent a second Vessel, which came back again with the same Success. “ ’Tis frequently said, that there are People in that Country, who are of a large Size, and not at all barbarous, which take all those who fall into their hands up with them into their Country.—I, my self, was about to have gone to the height of twenty-seven Degrees; but as we met with a sudden Calm in the Night, which prevented our being cast away, so a sudden Tempest made me change my Purpose, and glad to get once more off to Sea. This is all that I can say touching that Affair: Your Friend may know more Particulars of the Ship Dragon, at the East-India House in Holland. Maët Suyckar was then, and is still General of Batavia; but I had this Account only from the Mariner. The Soil of the Country is reddish and barren; and the Coast as it were enchanted with Tempests, when one offers to approach the Shore.—And this is the Reason that the Frigates lost their Boats and were so much damag’d by attempting to land there.—The Mariners thought they did not find the right Place, which, to the best of my Remembrance, he said was about the twentythird Degree of South Latitude, and in the Year 1656 or 1657.

124

The History of the Sevarambians

I am, Sir, Bru Oct. 28. 1672.

Your most humble Servant, THOMAS SKINNER.

The Reader may, if he pleases, collate this Letter, with the Author’s Relation, and judge, after such a Comparison, whether in a Matter so much in the Dark, one can expect stronger Testimony than this to establish the Probability of the History. As to the Stile and Disposition of the work, I leave every body, at full liberty, to approve or condemn it as they please; and content my self with saying, that, we have alter’d it as little as possible, being desirous of keeping close to the Author’s Manner of writing, which is very simple and natural.—In such sort of Works, where the Subject engrosses the whole Attention of the Reader, I think it enough if the Stile has nothing to interrupt him. The Author is somewhat more exact in his second Part, where he treats of the Laws and Manners of the Sevarambians, whose Government, in my Opinion, is one of the most perfect Models in the World. But we must leave every one to determine this Affair for himself; and I only wish, that the Reader may be agreeably entertain’d in the perusal of this delightful Work, the first Part of which is but a kind of historical Journal, as the Author himself, in the Conclusion, says.13

—————— 13. [“Contents,” pp. xiv–xxiii, and “Errata,” p. xxiv, omitted.]

The History of the Sevarambians

T

he reigning Passion of my earliest Years, was that of Travelling; which increasing daily upon me, grew, at length, too strong to be controul’d, and kindled up a violent Desire of seeing other Places besides that of my Birth, which, in a manner, wholly engross’d me. This made me take an incredible pleasure in reading Voyages, Relations of foreign Countries, and all Accounts of new Discoveries, which still cherish’d and heighten’d my natural Inclination. But the Authority of my Parents, who designed me for the Law, and a Want of Requisites for engaging in any thing of that kind, were great Obstacles in my way: However, I found by Experience, that nothing can successfully oppose that Biass which draws a Man on to his Destiny. I was scarce enter’d my fifteenth Year, when I had a Commission given me to serve in the Army in Italy; which kept me then near two Years before I cou’d return to my Country, where I was no sooner arriv’d, but I was order’d into Catalonia, with a more considerable Command than I had before. I continued in this military Station three Years longer, and should not, perhaps, have then quitted the Service, if the unexpected Death of my Father had not call’d me home, to take possession of an Estate he had left me; and Duty to my Mother, who, till I came to be with her, was inconsolable under so great a Loss. These Considerations prevail’d with me to go back; and, when I came there, I was obliged, by the peremptory Injunction of my Mother, to change the Sword for the Gown. Accordingly I applied my self to the Study of Law, and made such a Progress, that in about four Years, I was qualified for a Doctor’s Degree; and was also admitted an Advocate in the sovereign Court of the Place of my Birth: A Step very necessary to be taken by all who would attain to higher Dignities. After my Admission, I practised the making Declamations on feign’d Subjects, and pleaded sometimes publickly to real, good Causes, in order to procure Reputation. In a word, as I omitted nothing in my power, I had, in a while, acquitted my self so well, as to acquire some Character among those who heard me. But, to say truth, I took the greatest pleasure in those Sort of Exercises which young Men are generally fond of, as giving them an Opportunity to display their Wit 125

126

The History of the Sevarambians

and Eloquence, without any regard to the advancing their Fortunes. This Temper fully discover’d it self in me, as soon as I engag’d in regular Practice, which I found so crabbed and servile, that it quickly gave me a perfect Aversion to it: For I naturally lov’d an easy agreeable Life, and a frank unconstrain’d Deportment, which so unfitted me for the Business of a Solicitor, that I cou’d be at no Peace till I had quitted it. Just at the time when I was considering how to deliver my self from this Slavery, my Mother died, and by that means left me at liberty to dispose of my self and my Effects in what manner I pleas’d. The Disgust I had taken to my Profession was so great, that all things in it becoming insupportable to me, I resolv’d to leave France for a considerable time. With this Design in view, I began immediately to settle my Affairs; and accordingly sold off every thing, a little Estate only excepted, which I reserv’d for a Retreat, in case of Necessity, and left in Trust with a faithful Friend, who always accounted with me punctually, as long as he knew where I was. When I had finish’d this Disposition of my Effects, I set out on a Tour thro’ almost all the Provinces of France; and being come to Paris (a City famous for the many Advantages she enjoys) this Abode appear’d so charming to me, that, without scarce adverting to it, I had made a Stop there, of near two Years; when my former Desires were kindled up afresh, by an Occasion I had of going into Germany. I could therefore now tarry no longer, but immediately undertook a Progress thro’ that Country; visited the Court of the Emperor, and those of the Princes of the Empire; from thence I pass’d into Sweden and Denmark, and after that into the Low-Countries, where I ended my European Travels, and reposed till the Year 1655, when I embark’d for the East-Indies. I engag’d in this long and dangerous Voyage, to gratify my natural Curiosity, and the strong Inclination I had always had to see a Country of which I had heard so many Wonders: And I was still the more induc’d to it, by the pressing Sollicitations of a Friend, who had a considerable Substance at Batavia, and was obliged to go thither. To these Motives I must also ingenuously add, that the Hope of Gain had some share in determining me. Accordingly I prepar’d for the Voyage, and embark’d with my Friend on board the Golden-Dragon, a new-built Ship, bound for Batavia. She was of the Burthen of about six hundred Tuns, carried thirty two Guns, and near four hundred Men, reckoning Passengers as well as Sailors; besides a great Sum of Money, in which my Friend Van de Nuits had much Concern. We weigh’d Anchor in the Texel, the 12th of April 1655, and, with a fresh Gale at East, run thro’ the Channel betwixt France and England, with as much Speed and Pleasure as we cou’d wish, till we reach’d the

Part I

127

Offin. From thence we pursued our Voyage to the Canaries, experiencing sometimes the Inconstancy and Variation of the Winds, but met with no Tempest. At these Islands we took in such Provisions as we could get, and steer’d our Course for Cape-Verd, which we perceiv’d at a great distance, and came up to without any Difficulty worth noting. ’Tis true, we saw a great many Sea-Monsters, Flying-Fishes, new Constellations, and other things of the like nature. But as they are common, have often been described before, and consequently, long since, lost all the Grace of Novelty, I do not think it proper to enlarge the Story with such useless Relations as must at once tire both the Reader’s Patience and my own. Let it suffice therefore, that we pursued our Voyage prosperously, till we came to the third Degree of South Latitude, where we arriv’d the 2d of August in the same Year. But the Sea, which till then had been very favourable to us, began now to give us a taste of its Inconstancy. About two in the Afternoon, the Sky changed from its preceding Pleasantness and Serenity, into thick Clouds, from whence issued Thunder and Lightning, which were the Forerunners of stormy Winds, Rain, Hail, and the Tempest that followed soon after. As the Hurricane came on, the Countenances of the Sailors became pale and fearful. For tho’ they had time to strike their Sails, lash their Guns, and to put every thing in such a posture as they thought best, nevertheless, as they foresaw the Storm which happen’d, they cou’d not but be apprehensive of the terrible Consequences of it. The Sea, by this time, began to be in a vast Agitation, and the Wind run thro’ every Point of the Compass in less than two Hours. The Ship was sometimes beat one way sometimes another; here a Gust of Wind drove her forward, there another push’d her back again; now she rode tilting on the Waves, and seem’d ready to kiss the Clouds, the next moment she pitch’d as if she was going to dash in pieces against the Bottom, in the most horrible manner imaginable. Our Masts, our Yards, and our Rigging, were all presently broken and torn in pieces; and, in a word, the Hurricane was so violent, that our Mariners, who were almost all Seasick, cou’d scarce hear, and much less obey Command. Mean while, we Passengers were all shut down under Deck, where my Friend and I, lying at the foot of the Main-Mast, were exceedingly cast down, and dearly repented, both of us; he, of his covetous Desire of Gain, and I, of my foolish Curiosity. We wish’d our selves a thousand times in Holland, and a thousand times despair’d of ever seeing that, or any other Country again: For, in the Condition we then were, any Country would have been welcome, any Climate delightful to us. While we were thus engag’d in melancholy Thoughts, our Seamen, far from being asleep, neglected nothing that could any ways contribute to our Preservation, and even

128

The History of the Sevarambians

exerted their utmost Skill and Strength, some managing the Helm, others working the Pump, and all applying themselves to any thing our Necessity requir’d. At length, by the Blessing of Heav’n on their Endeavours, they had saved the Ship from the Violence of the Hurricane, which turning it self into a particular Wind that absorbs the rest, drove us with so much force Southward, that it was impossible for us not to run to that Point. Being therefore now constrain’d to submit to the Impetuosity of the Wind, and to go wherever it would carry us, we kept the same Course for two Days, when it varied a little, and push’d us towards the South-East three Days more, where we met with such thick Mists, as that we cou’d scarce discern Objects at five or six Paces distance. The sixth Day, the Wind began to abate, but still continued at North-West till about Midnight; when we found our selves as much becalm’d, as if our Ship had been in a Pond, or dead Sea, which exceedingly surpriz’d us. In about two or three Hours, the Weather clear’d up, and the Stars began to shine brightly; but we cou’d take no Observation from them to be depended on. We believ’d indeed, that we were on the Coast of Batavia, and at least a hundred Leagues from the Continent; but we found some time after, that we had been greatly out in our Reckoning. We continued becalm’d all the seventh Day, and had time to rest our selves, and examine the Ship thoroughly, which we found very little damaged; for being well built, she bore the Rage of the Winds and Waves, without making any Water of consequence. The eighth Day, we had a moderate Gale, which carried us Eastward, to our great Joy; for besides that this was getting on in our Voyage, it deliver’d us also from the Apprehensions of a long Calm. But in the Evening, the Sky began to grow black, the Air was full of Mists, and the Wind became so strong, that we were in fear of another Tempest. The Fog continued all the following Day, which was the ninth, and we had abundance of Gusts and Squawls, which put us in very great Danger. About Midnight, the Wind changed again, and blew almost a Storm, which drove us once more to the South-East, with much Impetuosity; the Fog all the while continuing to increase upon us. Of a sudden, the Ship running on with prodigious Swiftness, struck on a Sand-Bank, at a time when we were in no Apprehension of any such Accident, and stuck so fast, that she was perfectly without motion, as if she had been nail’d to the Place. We now believ’d our selves to be absolutely lost, and expected every moment when she wou’d be broke in pieces, by the Violence of the Winds and the Waves. Our Affairs being in this desperate Situation, and the Art and Industry of our Mariners wholly useless to us, our only remaining Refuge was in Prayer, which therefore we had recourse to, beseeching Almighty God, of his infinite Mercy, to hear our Vows, and grant us a Deliverance,

Part I

129

even now when we had nothing but Death and Destruction before our Eyes. The Morning being come, and the Sun having dispell’d the Mist, we perceiv’d our selves near a Shore, but whether of an Island or Continent, we could not tell. This Discovery turn’d our Despair into Hope; and tho’ we did not know what Country it was, nor whether we should find any Relief there under our Misfortune, yet any Land could not but be agreeable to People so miserably tost on the Sea for many Days together, and who had been long in suspense betwixt Life and Death. About Noon, the Weather became fine and warm; and the Sun having totally dispelled the Mist, and the Wind lost most of its Violence, the Waves also abated much of their Agitation. At three in the Afternoon, the Sea being on the ebb, our Ship appear’d to be stuck in a muddy Sand, where there was not above five Foot Water, and about a Musquet-shot from a bold and good Shore. Finding this, we resolv’d to land there, and carry with us all that was valuable, or that might be any ways useful to us. Accordingly we let down our Boat, and put twelve of our bravest Men well armed into her, with Orders to take a View of the Country, and choose a Place near the Shore, where we might encamp without being far from the Ship. As soon as they were landed, they surveyed it carefully from the Top of a high Ground which was not far off, but cou’d discover neither Houses nor Hutts, nor any thing else that look’d as if the Country was inhabited; the Earth being sandy and barren, with here and there a Bush, and some wild Shrubs. But they cou’d see no River, nor so much as a little Stream, in any of the Places within their Ken; and not having time that day to go farther, they came back again in about three Hours, not judging it proper to venture themselves at night in a Country which they were much unacquainted with. The next day they went ashore again, and were order’d to send back the Long-Boat and Yawl to land the rest of our People. We resolv’d also to begin to unload the Ship of those things which we shou’d want most, and especially of our Ammunition, which, thank God, was not at all damaged. All these Orders were executed with so much Care and Diligence, that by night we had got out of the Ship the greatest part of our Provisions. Those who went ashore first, pitch’d a Camp on a high Land just against the Ship, which was in the fortieth Degree of South Latitude, according to our best Observations. The Mould which was made choice of for this purpose, was inclos’d by a little natural Rising, which at once both cover’d it towards the Land, and conceal’d it from the View of any that might come by Sea to annoy or disturb us. From the Summit of the Rising, our Centinels cou’d see very far all around them, which made it a Place both secure and convenient for us. To this Camp we transported all our People, our Provisions, and our

130

The History of the Sevarambians

Merchandizes, leaving only ten Men in the Ship, till we should have an opportunity of making trial at a high Tide to get her off again. As soon as we were all landed, we held a Council to consider of Ways and Means for our mutual Preservation; and the Result of it was, that we shou’d observe the same Discipline ashore as we had done at Sea, till we shou’d see reason to change it: Besides this Resolution, it was also agreed to join in a general Thanksgiving to Almighty God, for the Goodness he had shewn, by saving our Lives in so signal a manner, and to implore his further Assistance and Protection, in a Country which was altogether unknown to us, and where we might fall into the hands of some barbarous People, or die with Hunger, if, of his great Mercy, he did not provide for our Subsistence, as he had hitherto done. After these Orders, and this Humiliation, the Officers divided their Hands into three equal Parts: Two of them were to work incessantly in the Camp, and throw up a Rampart round it, in order to cover us from any sudden Invasion; and the other were to be imployed in making farther Discoveries of the Country, and bringing in Wood, and such other Provisions as they cou’d meet with. Those who had the care of the Ship, were ordered to observe in what State she was, and to endeavour to put her in a Condition for Service again, if an Opportunity shou’d offer. But after a nice Examination, they found that her Keel was broken by the Violence of the Shock against the Shoal; and that she stuck so fast in the Mud, that it would have been impossible to get off, even supposing she had not been at all damaged. They added, that in their opinion, the best way was to take her to pieces, and out of the Materials to build one or two Vessels, to transport the whole Company to Batavia. This Counsel was approv’d of, and proper Persons were set apart for the execution of it. The Party, whose Business it was to reconnoitre the Country, not daring to venture themselves very far, came back early, deferring to hazard themselves in the Plain, till the Camp should be better fortified, and the Cannon all mounted. In the mean time they brought us in Wood, and a kind of wild Mulberry, of which they found a great Plenty on the Shrubs and Bushes. Some of them also taking a Progress along the Shore, pickd up abundance of Oysters, and other Shell-Fish, in order to save the Victuals of the Ship, which, according to the exactest Calculation we could make, would not last above two Months. This Consideration made us as frugal of it as possible; and as we could not spare it much without a Supply of other Food, to help out the short Allowance which had been settled among us, we took care to prepare our Nets and Hooks, having met with great plenty of Fish in some Parts of the Sea near us. Our Fishing was so successful, that in a little time we

Part I

131

liv’d in a great measure upon what we caught, and the Berries mentioned before. We therefore now much lessen’d our Allowance, and reduc’d it to eight Ounces a day. We had not yet been so fortunate as to find any fresh Water, which was what we needed more than any thing; for tho’ we had sunk a Well in our Trenches, which furnish’d us with Quantity enough, yet being salt, by reason of its Nearness to the Sea, it was both ill-tasted and unwholesome. Our Adventurers, who every day made some new Discovery, had now advanc’d near ten Miles round the Camp, and meeting with no Traces of Man or Beast, began to grow more bold than they had been. They therefore now ventur’d into the great Plain, but cou’d see no living Creature there, except some Serpents, and a sort of Rat almost as big as a Rabbit, with a Species of Birds like Wild-Pidgeons, but something larger than those of Europe, which liv’d upon the Berries. Some of these they shot, and brought with them to the Camp, where we found that they were very good to eat, and especially the Birds. These new Discoveries made us a little indifferent as to finishing our Fortifications according to the first Design. We therefore contented our selves with only drawing a Trench round the Camp, and throwing the Earth up within the Ditch, which form’d a kind of Parapet, and was look’d upon as a sufficient Defence, in a Place where we cou’d find no Inhabitants, the most exposed Parts being guarded by our Cannon. Having therefore taken these Precautions, we were no longer under any Apprehensions of either Men or Beasts, and fear’d nothing but Hunger and Famine, and the Injuries of the Air, whose Temperature we did not yet know, tho’ it appear’d to us to have been healthful ever since we had been there, which was fourteen Days before the Pinnace was finish’d. When she was launch’d, we soon got her ready to put to Sea, with Provisions for eight Men six Weeks, that being all we cou’d possibly spare: But the greatest Difficulty was in choosing Persons to perform this Voyage; for this occasion’d great Disputes among the Seamen, none of them caring to engage in so hazardous a Navigation; and yet it was absolutely necessary that some of them should attempt it. It was therefore at length resolv’d, that a certain Number of the best Sailors should be pick’d out, who were to determine the matter by Lot among themselves, which was accordingly done, and fell on the Captain himself, a Mariner call’d Prince, and six others whose Names I have forgot. When these People saw that Fortune had decided for them to make the Voyage, they undertook it without any Reluctance; and after having agreed on the Signal for them to find us by, if ever they should return to our assistance, they took leave of us, and went aboard the Pinnace, which was soon out of sight, by the help of a Land-Wind which they had the advantage of; we all the time sending up

132

The History of the Sevarambians

our Vows and Prayers to God for their Preservation, on whose Mercy alone to them we founded all our Hopes. The same day we assembled in Council, to regulate our selves in a manner most proper and suitable to our present Condition: For some of the Officers being gone in the Pinnace, our Sea-Government was of course a little chang’d; and besides we found, that in many respects it was not well adapted for the Land. At length, after several Proposals, it was concluded, that we should observe a military Discipline, under the Command of a General, and some inferior Officers, who all together were to constitute a supreme Council of War, with Power to determine and regulate all things. When the Question of chusing a General came before us, every one turn’d his eyes on my Friend Van de Nuits, and all were ready to confer that Honour upon him, he being the most considerable Person among us, and having the greatest Share of the Effects in the Ship; but he immediately, with great modesty, excused himself, saying, that “he was too young, and unexperienced in Arms, to acquit himself well in an Employment of that nature; that on such an occasion, it was proper to choose a Person of greater Knowledge than himself, who had never made any Campaign, nor been in any publick Office.” Then remarking the Trouble and Embarassment of the Assembly, which appear’d in their Countenances, he said to them farther, “That he gave them a thousand Thanks for the Esteem and Affection which they had for him, and that therefore he wish’d, that he merited the Command they offer’d to him; but that since he was by no means equal to it, and could not to any good purpose serve them in such a Station, he should take it as a greater Favour, if they would indulge him the liberty of nominating a Leader to them, who was perfectly qualified for the Post, having already had a Command in two different Armies in Europe, and who, by several Years Travels, must certainly have acquired a good Degree of Knowledge in Politicks.” He added, that “they all knew the Person, and that he wou’d even venture to affirm, had already an esteem for him, tho’ they cou’d not be so good Judges of his Merit as himself, who, by a long Acquaintance with him, had sufficiently experienced his Prudence and Probity. The Man of whom I speak,” continued he, pointing to me, “is Captain Siden, to whose Authority and Command I shall most gladly submit, if you please to chuse him for your General.” This unexpected Speech, and the Looks of the Assembly, who immediately fix’d their eyes on me, put me into some confusion; but having soon recollected my self, I replied, “That the Recommendation of Monsieur De Nuits proceeded rather from the Friendship he had for me, than any Knowledge of my Capacity or Merit; that I was a Stranger, born in a Country very distant from Holland; and I made no doubt, but they

Part I

133

had Persons among them much fitter for the Command than I was. I therefore begg’d them to excuse me, assuring them, that it wou’d be a greater Pleasure to me to obey such Superiors as they should set over me, than to accept of the Authority my self.” I had scarce done speaking, when one Swart, a bold active Man, who had always attended me when we went out to reconnoitre the Country, briskly return’d upon me, and said, “Sir, these Excuses signify nothing; for if Monsieur De Nuits’s Opinion and mine can prevail, you shall, whether you will or no, be our General; for, besides what that Gentleman has reported of your Merit, the whole Company knows, and I in particular have observ’d, that since we have been on this Coast, you have not only shewn your self the most prudent Man among us, but have also been the most active and industrious for the Good and Safety of the Society. If therefore we had no other Reason but this, you have already deserv’d the Command; but we may add further, that all the rest of us are either Merchants or Mariners, who understand neither War nor Discipline, which you only can teach us: For you are posses’d of all the Qualities requisite for that purpose; and are indeed the sole Person capable of commanding us. I therefore do declare, that for my own part I will not submit to any other Leader whatsoever but Captain Siden.” This Speech, which the Man utter’d with a bold determinate Air, made such an Impression on the Assembly, before dispos’d to chuse me, that they all took the Word, and cried out with one Voice, Let Captain Siden be our General. When I saw that I cou’d no longer excuse my self, I beckon’d to them to be silent, and address’d my self to them in the following manner: “Since you oblige me, Gentlemen, to take upon me this Command, I accept it with gratitude, and heartily wish that my doing so may be for your advantage. But to the end that all things may go on well, and our Orders and Resolutions be vigorously executed, I must demand some Prerogatives, which if you grant, I shall endeavour, to the utmost of my power, to protect you, and establish such a Discipline among you, as appears to me best calculated for your Benefit and Preservation. “The first thing which I ask, is, that every one of you in particular, and all in general, may be bound by Oath to obey me and the Council, on pain of being condemned to such Punishment as shall be appointed for Offences of that nature. “Secondly, that I may have the power of regulating all military Matters, in such a way as I think best; and of choosing my principal Officers, who shall not be capable of any such Post, if they do not hold it of me.

134

The History of the Sevarambians

“Thirdly, that in Council my Voice shall be always counted as three. “And in the last place, that I, or in my absence my Deputy, may have a Negative in all publick Deliberations.” All these Privileges were immediately allow’d me; and I was at the same time saluted General by the whole Assembly. The first Mark of my Authority, or rather of their Deference to it, was, that they built me a Tent in the middle of the Camp much larger than the rest, where I lay that night, taking Van de Nuits with me, whose Advice was of service to me on several Occasions. The next day I caus’d all the People to be call’d together, and in their presence made Van de Nuits Superintendant of the Merchandizes, and all the Provisions which we either had or might have. I appointed Swart Great-Master of the Artillery, small Arms, and all the Munitions of War, and I declared Maurice, an expert industrious Sailor, Admiral of our Fleet; which consisted of the Long-Boat, the Yawl, and another Pinnace, which was building out of the Ruins of the Ship. We had among us an Englishman, whose Name was Moreton, who had been a Serjeant in the Low-Countries; him I made Captain of the first Company. De Haës, a Person of great Sobriety and Vigilance, had the second; the third was given to Van Slut; and one Bosh was pitch’d on for the fourth. After which I declared Le Brun my Major-General, and gave each of these the liberty of choosing their inferior Officers, which yet were to be presented to me for my Approbation. I had two Servants with me, whose Names were D’Eveze and Tursi: The first, who had been my Serjeant in Catalonia, was a Man of good Courage and Understanding, sober, faithful, and diligent, and had always serv’d me well ever since I quitted a military Life: Him therefore I named for my Lieutenant or Deputy, and the other, Tursi, who had also Merit of another sort, I reserv’d to be my Secretary. The Officers being thus chosen, we next proceeded to number our Company, which we found to be in all, Three hundred and seven Men, three Boys, and seventy four Women, all in good health. For tho’ several were sick when we quitted the Ship, yet they all perfectly recover’d in eight days after we came ashore; which we look’d upon as a Proof of the Goodness of Air. I then divided the People into four Parts, and gave to Maurice twenty six Seamen and three Boys, for the Equipment of his Fleet. Swart had thirty Men for the Management of the Artillery; two hundred more were set apart for the four Captains, and equally divided between them; and all the rest, both Men and Women, were to be under the Command of Van de Nuits. We had among us two Trumpeters, who besides their Business as such, used, according to the Dutch Fashion, to read divine Service. One of these

Part I

135

was allotted to Van de Nuits, and the other I took my self, confirming each in both Branches of their Office. Our Affairs being thus far regulated, in the Evening I called a Council of the superior Officers, to whom I proposed, as a Thing of absolute Necessity, “that before our Provisions were consumed, we should send both by Sea and Land in search, and endeavour to find some Place more commodious for us than that of our Camp, where in a little time we should want all things, and in which we cou’d not even be supplied with good Water. That therefore it was my Opinion that we should go out in several Parties to discover the Country, and advance farther up into it than we had hitherto done.” They immediately assented to this Proposition, and one and all declared that they were ready to obey my Orders. In consequence of this Resolution, I commanded Maurice to man his Long-Boat, and coast along the Shore to the Right of the Camp, and that he should send the Yawl to do the same on the Left. Then I order’d Moreton to draw twenty Men out of his Company, and march them so as to keep in sight of the Yawl. After which I appointed De Haës with a Detachment of his thirty Men to go directly up into the Heart of the Country, and took forty my self out of the other two Companies, leaving my Lieutenant to command at the Camp during my Absence. Each Party were to carry Provisions with them for three Days, and to be arm’d with Swords, Pikes, Batons, and Musquets. Having thus settled every thing, I appointed them to be in a Readiness to march early in the Morning, and to come to me for their last Orders, as they did the next Day, which was the twentieth after our landing. Being all ready as soon as it was light, and seeing no Occasion to alter the Orders I had already given, I only added to them, that if they met with any thing considerable they should immediately send an Account of it to the Camp; and, as I had before given those in the Yawl a Charge not to go out of the Sight of the Party that accompany’d them by Land, I now enjoin’d Moreton, who had the Command of that Expedition, not to be out of view of the Yawl, and to be sure to join them at Sun-set on the Shore; which were Rules that I my self resolv’d to observe with Maurice. As soon as these Orders were given, each Corps took their Rout, full of Hope and with great Chearfulness. I march’d those under my Command in a military Manner, dividing them into three Bodies. The Vant-Guard was compos’d of six Musquetiers and a Corporal, the MainBody consisted of twelve Men and a Serjeant, and I my self led the Rear. We kept within Musquet-shot of one another, and as near the Shore as possible, that we might not lose sight of the Long-Boat. The Sea was calm and the Weather fine, but hot. About Noon Maurice came ashore,

136

The History of the Sevarambians

when we took a little Refreshment together, and rested about two Hours. The Soil on which we march’d for the first ten Miles was like that near the Camp, without any River or Spring, being nothing but Stones and Sand, and producing only Shrubs and Bushes. We went on about five Miles farther, where we found the Land began to grow uneven, rising up in little Hills and Linches; and two Miles beyond that met with a small River of fresh Water, which emptied it self into the Sea. This gave us great Joy, which was still encreas’d when we discover’d a little way up the Stream a fine Grove of Trees, very thick and green. We therefore made a Halt here, and gave a Signal to the Long-Boat to come to us; which she easily did by means of the Sea, which brought her into the River, and up to the Trees where we waited for them, and pitch’d our Tents the first Night. Maurice had taken a good quantity of several Sorts of Fish, besides Oysters and Cockles, on which we supp’d very plentifully; and having posted a sufficient Guard where we thought it necessary, and cover’d our Fire with Boughs stuck round it so thick that it cou’d not have been seen far, even in the Night, we retir’d to rest. The next day I sent three Men to the Camp to let them know what a commodious Place we had found, and that we intended to go on still farther. After which, in order to discover the Country a little higher up, I detach’d five Men to go along by the River-side, with order to return again in two Hours; which they did very punctually, and reported that the Land was more hilly, than that through which we had past, but altogether as dry and barren as the other. Upon receiving this Account, we transported our selves in the Boat to the other side of the River, which was not fordable without going two Miles higher, and order’d her back to the Sea to accompany us as we marched along Shore, which we did without losing sight of her, but as little as possible, and found the Land still rising as we went on. When we had gone about five or six Miles, we reach’d the Top of a pretty high Hill, from whence we discover’d at three or four Miles distance from us, a tall Wood on a Brow which advanc’d far towards the Sea. We were much rejoic’d to see this Wood, and immediately resolv’d to go thither. Having therefore rested our selves a little, we went directly towards the Wood crossing a sandy Plain which lay in our way, and after a March of two Hours arriv’d at the Foot of the Brow, from whence we kept on straight to the Wood, which consisted wholly of lofty Trees growing at a distance from one another, and without any Underwood at all, which made our Walk thro’ it very easy. Here I closed my Ranks, and march’d the several Bodies nearer to one another, doubling the Vant-Guard, that it might be capable of making a better Resistance, if we should happen to be attack’d by either Men or Wild-Beasts. As we went thro’ the Wood, we cut down Branches and strew’d as we pass’d along, in order to know

Part I

137

how to find it at our Return. We march’d about three Miles directly thro’ the Wood, when we came to the other side of it, where we had again a View of the Sea, and other Trees beyond a Gulph which lay between two Capes or Promontories, whose Points advanc’d far into it. This Place being so agreeable, and having a fine Prospect both on this and that side of the Gulph, we wish’d that our Misfortune had happen’d nearer to it than it did. Our Long-Boat was on the other side of the Wood, where we had been oblig’d to leave her while we were assaying it. And now I order’d ten of my Men to go a little way up the River, who found abundance of Oysters and other Shell-Fish, which greatly rejoic’d us. Ten others I dispatch’d towards the Point of the Cape, and as many more to a lower Part of the Wood, in search of fresh Water. Those who were for the Cape went on two Miles, and had not yet reach’d it; at length the Decline of the Earth led them into a kind of Valley, encompass’d all round with thick green Trees, and thro’ which ran a River of fresh Water, that emptied it self into the Gulph. In this delightful Place they made a halt, and immediately sent back three of their Companions to give me notice of it. Those who had taken the contrary way came also back, and told us that they had penetrated far into the Wood, which according to the best Judgment they could make was much larger of the Land-side, where they had found a Herd of Deer near a little Stream, and had kill’d two of them, which they divided into four Parts, and had brought with them, for our Entertainment. Upon this I dispatch’d five of my Men to Maurice, to let him know of our good Fortune, and that he should come with all speed to the Point of the Cape, where a Party should wait for him with further Orders: And as soon as they had deliver’d this Message to Maurice, I commanded them to go on, and give an account at the Camp of these Discoveries, to which I also sent a Quarter of the Venison, and an Assurance that I would not fail of being with them very soon. Having dispatch’d these Messengers, I march’d all my Men to the little Valley where the Discoverers by this time expected us. We found the Place so agreeable and commodious, that I immediately resolved to encamp there not only that Night, but also to make it our Residence, as soon as it should be possible for us to transport our People and Baggage thither. In the mean while, we lighted a Fire to dress our Venison, and sent five Men to the Point of the Cape to wait for Maurice; they went about two Miles, which brought them to the Extremity of the Promontory, and there made a Stand on the highest Ground, from whence in a Quarter of an Hour they saw the Long-Boat coming towards them with all the speed they could make. They landed about Sun-set and having secur’d the Boat by drawing her up on the Beach, set out all of them for the new Camp, where they arriv’d a little

138

The History of the Sevarambians

before Midnight. They found us very gay, some busied about the Fire in roasting the Meat, others lying on Beds of Moss and dry’d Leaves, which they had pick’d up under the Trees. We pass’d this Night with much Pleasure and Tranquility, and rose early the next Day, commanding Maurice and his Men to get ready to return to the old Camp, which I also design’d to do with them, taking only two of my Men besides the Boat’s Crew. I left the Command to one of my Officers, with Orders that they should not go out of the Valley till he should hear from me, and promising to be back again my self in three or four Days at farthest. As to Subsistence, I told them, that they must find themselves by hunting, fishing and picking up the Shell-Fish, which there was great plenty of on the Shore. As soon as I had given these Orders we went to the Long-Boat, and having the Advantage of a fair Wind, arriv’d the same Day at the old Camp, where we landed about Sun-set, and were receiv’d with great Joy. Those whom I had sent before to inform them of our new Discovery, had given such an Account of the new Camp, that they began to wish themselves there; which I let them know I intended as soon as possible, that Place being the most commodious of any that we had met with. Moreton and De Haës arriv’d about two hours before we did, and came soon after our landing to give me an Account of their Expeditions. The first said that he march’d fifteen or sixteen Miles to the left of the Camp, in a dry sandy Soil, without finding any River or Spring; and that Night being come, they lay all together on the Shore, according to the Orders I had given them. That the next Day they pursu’d their Journey to the West in the same manner as before, across a stony Country, without meeting with any Water till Noon, when they came to a large River, where they stop’d till the Yawl cou’d get up to them. That then having observ’d that the Tide set strong into the River, and that the Water was salt at the Place where they were, they went higher up in search of fresh, which they found in a little Stream that discharg’d into the River. That thence advancing farther into the Country, they were attack’d by two very great Crocodiles, which came out of the River after Prey, but that having perceiv’d them before they were near, they fir’d two or three Musquets at them, at the Noise of which they were so affrighted, that they immediately retir’d. After which, finding the Danger there was in marching along by this River, as well from Crocodiles as from WildBeasts they might meet with; and that their Provisions were too far spent to go any further in a Country where no Subsistence was to be found but Shell-Fish on the Shore, they had immediately return’d back the same Way that they went, being unwilling to stay any longer out than the three Days which I had order’d them not to exceed.

Part I

139

De Haës reported, that he march’d twenty Miles the first Day in a sandy Plain, and that at Night they came to a little Hill cover’d with Broom, where they lodg’d. That the Day following at Sun-Rising, they perceiv’d a great Mist about five or six Miles beyond them, which dissipating as they advanc’d towards it, they discover’d a Pond of standing Water, which could not be less than ten Miles in diameter. That when they came up to it, they found the Banks full of Reeds and Rushes, which afforded a Retreat to an infinite Number of Wild-Ducks, and other Water-Fowls, which made a prodigious Noise there. That they walk’d a long time round this Lake, without being able to get at the Water, by reason of a soft Morass which surrounded it. That after a while they came to a sandy Soil, near a Hill, somewhat higher than that where they lay the Night before; which, having ascended, afforded them a large Prospect of a prodigious heathy Country, terminated by a Range of high Mountains, upright as a Wall, which extended from East to West as far as the Eye cou’d reach. And that then their Provisions and Time being far spent, they had return’d again in obedience to the Command I had given them. By these Accounts it appeared that we had been more fortunate than those two Captains, which made our People the more eagerly desire to go to the new Camp, where we had found such Conveniences as were not to be met with elsewhere. The Day following therefore I call’d a Council, in which I proposed the removing the Camp to the verdant Valley, where I had left my Men. My Proposition immediately receiv’d a universal Liking, and we resolv’d to get thither by little and little, beginning first with a Transportation of the things which were of easiest Carriage and most useful to us. The new Pinnace we were building was near upon finish’d, and we reckon’d she would be fittest to bring our Cannon, Barracks, and all our heavy Baggage; but in the mean time we freighted the Long-Boat and Yawl with our Provisions, and sent several of the People by Land, with Hatchets, Hammers, Nails, Spades and other working Tools that we had sav’d. The Major went with the first Party, and my Lieutenant with the other. And as soon as the Pinnace was ready, I sent her loaded with the heavy Baggage, and went my self with the rest of our People by Land. I forgot to take notice, that Maurice in his second Voyage doubled the Cape without any difficulty, by reason of the Calmness of the Sea, which continu’d without any Storm for more than six Weeks after our Descent. The Air was so temperate, that we felt neither Cold nor Heat, unless in the middle of the Day, when the Sun was a little scorching, and grew more and more so as it came nearer to us, and brought with it the Spring, which begins there in August, when our Summer in Europe leaves

140

The History of the Sevarambians

us. In doubling the Cape, Maurice told me that he had found several little Islands very near one another, which extended themselves almost to a larger one that lay in the Mouth of the Gulf, and defended it from the Fury of the Waves; and that he believ’d the Bay within it was an excellent Haven, but feared the Channel might be somewhat difficult for large Vessels by reason of a great Number of Rocks and Shoals, between the Cape and the Island, which separated the Bay from the Ocean. On his giving me this Account, I said to him, that when we were wholly remov’d to the new Camp, and well settled there, we should have time enough to make Discoveries on these Islands, and that it should be his Province to do it. In less than twelve Days after our finding the Valley, we had transported our selves and Effects to the new Camp, which Van de Nuits and some other Officers had named Sidenberg. This was done while I had been absent two or three Days, in which time the Appellation was so often repeated, that it became, afterwards, impossible to change it. Our People had now, partly by my Order, and partly of their own Choice, built several Hutts along the River-side, on a Piece of Land which was near a Mile long, and bounded the Bay on the East. We had a great Quantity of Wood on the spot, and our Fishers had taken such Numbers, that we cou’d not tell what to do with them for want of Salt to preserve them. But Maurice soon furnish’d us; for going to some of the neighbouring Rocks, he found much more than we should have wanted if we had continu’d there twenty Years. This Salt was made naturally of the Sea-Water; which, in Storms, being thrown up on the Rocks, fill’d the Cavities which it found in them; and was afterward dry’d and harden’d there by the Heat of the Sun. While these things were doing, we still continued to send out Parties every Day to make further Discoveries, and hunt the Deer, which we made a great Slaughter of. And, having observ’d abundance of SeaBirds flying about the Bay, we judg’d that their Retreat was somewhere not far off, tho’ we did not know it. Nor were we out in this Conjecture: For Maurice venturing every Day further into the Gulf, and among the Islands, in some little time fell upon a Morass full of Reeds and Rushes, to which the greatest Part of them retired. He also met with an Island, or rather a vast Sand-Bank, where a prodigious Number of Tortoises came to lay their Eggs, from whence we might have been supplied with a considerable Branch of our Subsistence. In a word, by this time all our Wants were so well provided for, that we were satisfy’d there was no Danger from that Quarter, tho’ we should continue ever so long in that Country. A Supply of Powder was what we seem’d to stand in most need of; for tho’ we had a pretty good Stock, yet we saw plainly it cou’d not

Part I

141

last a long time. We also consider’d that our Cloaths, our Linnen, our Arms and our Tools cou’d not endure always; and that if the Vessel which we had sent to Batavia, should be lost, it would be impossible for us to get more. But having already had so many Proofs of the Goodness of God, we were encourag’d, from thence, to hope that he would not forsake us in the time to come. In the mean while, the Spring advanc’d upon us, and we daily brought in such Quantities of Provisions, that we quite forbore using those of the Ship: particularly certain Barrels of Peas, and other Pulse which we had taken with us from Europe. I had therefore a Project to sow some of these; which, after consulting some of my Officers, who approv’d of the Design, we did. For this purpose we fell’d several Trees above the Camp, and burnt them to consume the Herbs and Roots, which might otherwise hurt our Seed. After we had thus prepar’d the Soil, we digg’d it, and made Channels in the Ground, where we strew’d our Grain, and cover’d it over with Earth; which having done, we water’d them several times, and recommended them to that kind Providence which gives all things their increase. About this time some of our Hunters having advanced far into the Forest, and kill’d more Deer than they cou’d bring off, hung up two of them on a large Tree, with an intention to go the next day and fetch them. Accordingly seven of them went; and when they came to the Place, saw a great Tiger on the Tree, tearing the Carcasses. They were very much surpriz’d at the sight, and hid behind another Tree, till two of them watching their opportunity, levell’d their Fusees, charg’d with Ball, and firing both together, gave him a mortal Wound, which instantly brought him to the ground. As soon as he was fallen, he set up a hideous dreadful Howling, and died a few moments after, shot thro’ the Body in two places. They stript him of his fine spotted Skin; and, taking down their Venison from the Tree, came back to the Camp, as it were, in triumph. But tho’ we were pleas’d at their good Success, this Adventure alarm’d me with new Fears: For I judg’d, that since we had met with one of these terrible Beasts in the Wood, in all probability there must be more, which might, at some time or other, come and fall upon us in our Camp. I therefore acquainted the Council with my Apprehensions, who, to guard against the Danger, immediately resolv’d to fence in our Hutts with a strong Pallisado; which we accordingly set about the next day, and compleated on the tenth, so as to be perfectly secured from all Invasions of wild Beasts, which might offer to attack us in the night. This Adventure also made our Hunters more circumspect than before, and kept them from rambling by themselves, for fear of meeting with any of those dreadful Animals.

142

The History of the Sevarambians

It was now seven Weeks since we landed, which had pass’d without any Quarrels or Disturbance amongst us, because we had been always in fear and danger. But as soon as we look’d upon our selves as safe, and were no longer under apprehensions of perishing by Hunger and Thirst, having a plenty of all things; in short, being now furnished with fresh Meat and Fish every day, and not oblig’d to labour as we did at first, Love and Discord began to light up their Torches among us. We had in our Company several Women, whom I have but just mentioned before, as not having occasion. Some of these were very poor Creatures, the Meanness of whose Circumstances, and the Hopes of advancing their Fortunes, had engag’d in this Voyage to the Indies. Others of them had Husbands or Relations there; but the greater part of them had been taken out of Brothels, or some such Places, or else had been kidnapp’d by People who purchas’d them for small Sums of Money. Those Women had a liking to the Men, who began also to discourse them on the Subject of Love; and such Conversations quickly produc’d Appointments. But as we were all together in a small Camp, where a strict Guard was kept, it was difficult for the Parties to meet without being taken notice of. This often caus’d Jealousies and Quarrels, which sometimes ended in Blows. ’Tis true, that fearing the Severity of our Laws, they conceal’d themselves as well as they cou’d; which, by means of my necessary Avocations, and thro’ the Connivance of the other Officers, they did but too often. However, the following Affair made most noise among us. Two of our Young-men had a secret Commerce with one Woman; and each flatter’d himself that he alone enjoy’d the Favour. It happen’d, that the Woman had promis’d to admit one of them in the night, which she accordingly did; when the other coming, and demanding the same Favour, was, upon some slight Excuse or other, refus’d. This stung him to the quick, and being naturally jealous, gave him a Suspicion of the Case as it really was, and made him resolve to watch his Mistress so well, as to discover the Cause of this Cruelty. In short, he kept so strict an eye upon her, that in a little time he surpriz’d her with her Gallant in the dark; which enraged him to such a degree, that drawing his Sword, he plung’d it into their Bodies, and retir’d without being known by either of them. The Lovers, in this terrible Circumstance, cou’d not forbear shrieking out; upon which the Centinel first, and then the rest of the Guard, ran in to their assistance; and, having pull’d the Sword out of their Bodies, and the Ground into which it was stuck above a Foot, call’d the Surgeon to dress their Wounds, which he accordingly did; and soon after came to give me an account of the Condition in which he left them. The next day I assembled a Council upon this Affair, but we could never

Part I

143

discover the Assassin, tho’ we used our utmost endeavours. We interrogated the wounded Man, whether he had no Enemy whom he cou’d suspect; but his Answer was, that as he had never offended or disobliged any one Person of the Company, he did not know whom to accuse. We questioned the Woman also, but tho’ she had good reason to believe, that it was her other Lover, she was so generous as not to impeach him, knowing that it was a Transport of Love which had impell’d him to take this vengeance upon her. As we found that it would be impossible for us to make any discovery in this way, we caus’d all our People to be put under Arms, and call’d over by their Names; and by this means we thought we had detected the Criminal, because we found a Man who had no Sword. We therefore demanded of him, “How it happened that he came into the Ranks without one?” To which he boldly replied, “because he had none.” “Have you never had any,” said I to him, “since our landing on this Coast?” “Pardon me, Sir,” return’d he, “but I have lent it to one of my Comrades, whose Name I don’t know; and who, when he borrow’d it of me, said he was order’d out in the Long-Boat.” Then presenting the Sword to him, which had been found in the Bodies of the wounded Persons, we ask’d him, “If that was not his?” Upon looking at it, he answered, “Yes; and that it was the same which he lent to his Comrade.” “How comes it about then,” said I a little roughly, “how comes it about, I say, that it has been found in the Bodies of these unhappy People?” “I beseech you, Sir,” replied he, “do not make a Prejudgment to my disadvantage; and give me leave to say, that it is much more probable, that the Person to whom I lent the Sword, was he who gave the Blow, than that I shou’d have done it; and that he borrow’d it of me, on purpose to throw the Suspicion upon me, since he was to go away this morning.” I put some other Questions to him and particularly I ask’d him, “How it was possible that he did not know the Name of this Man, who was his Comrade?” He answer’d me without any sort of Confusion, that, “surely no one could think that at all strange, since there was not a Person in the whole Crew, that could call every Man by his Name, whom yet he knows, and sees every day: He to whom I lent my Sword,” added he, “is no more my Comrade than every one of the Crew; nor, indeed, do I see him so often as most others, because he is almost always out in the Boat: And therefore, tho’ I know him very well by sight, and have several times talk’d with him, it never once came into my head to ask him his Name.” These prompt and subtil Answers were rather Evidences of his Wit than of his Innocence. But as we had no full Proof against him, we deferr’d giving Judgment on this Affair ’till the Return of the Long-Boat; which indeed sail’d that Morning, and did not come back till some Days

144

The History of the Sevarambians

after. In the mean while, we contented our selves with keeping him under Confinement. While the Boat was out among the Sand-Islands, where the Crew was turning Tortoises, it happen’d by Accident that some of them had a mind to bathe themselves. Which as they were doing, several of the best Swimmers adventur’d so far, that a *Lamie,14 meeting with them, seiz’d one of the foremost, which so terrified the rest, that, making what haste they could to the Shore, they left the miserable Wretch to the Mercy of the Monster, which quickly devour’d him. The Prisoner was, by some means or other, inform’d of the whole Detail of this Affair before we cou’d bring him to a second Examination; and, dextrously making use of it, affirm’d strongly that the Deceased was the Person to whom he lent his Sword; withal describing him so exactly, that no Doubt could be made as to the Pourtraiture. And thus, not being able to convict him, and the wounded Persons growing out of all danger, we only kept him some time longer in Irons, and at length set him at liberty, without offering to inflict any other Punishment upon him. This Adventure was afterwards unravel’d, and we found certainly that the thing was as I have related it. This Accident gave rise to new Laws among us. For we began to consider that as we had Women in our Company, we must expect some Trouble on their account, unless we provided against it early, and allow’d our Men the use of them in a regular manner. But the misfortune was, that having but seventy four Women, and being more than three hundred Men of us, it wou’d not be possible that every Man should have one. At length, after several Meetings, and Debates on various Expedients proposed for this purpose, it was resolv’d, That every principal Officer should have a Woman to himself; and that each of them should make his Choice, according to his Rank. The rest we distributed into divers Classes, agreeable to the Condition of the Persons, and regulated the whole thing so well, that every inferior Officer might co-habit with a Woman twice a Week, the common People once, and even the meanest of all every ten Days; keeping still a strict Regard to the Dignity and Age of every Person. For we excluded from this Allowance all the Men that were above fifty, besides four Women who had been going to their Husbands at Batavia, and piqued themselves on their Constancy. These were separated from the rest, and each Sex dwelt by it self, without having any Commerce with one another, or the rest of the People. But when these Virtuosa’s saw that the Women, whose Conversation they avoided, had Lovers whose Conduct was approv’d of, and that the Succours which we had hoped from Batavia did not come, they appear’d melancholy, and —————— 14. * A Lamie is a Sea-Monster.

Part I

145

repented of the Choice they had made; discovering their Uneasiness in such a Manner, and by so many different Ways, that we were oblig’d to give them Husbands as well as the rest. Experience on this Occasion show’d us that a Plurality of Men is prejudicial to Generation; for few of those who had more Husbands than one prov’d with Child, whereas almost all the others were so in a very little time. And this furnishes us with a Reason, why tho’ Polygamy of Wives has been often, and is still much practis’d in many Nations, yet that of Husbands was never allow’d of in any. But tho’ we had thus regulated this Matter, the Execution of this Scheme was deferr’d till we should see whether we should have any Succours from Batavia or not. The Time therefore being come for us to make the Signal that had been agreed on, I ordered some of our People to cut down a tall straight Tree, and fix it at the very Point of the Cape with one of our largest Sails fasten’d to it; which was done accordingly. I also commanded that great Fires should be made every Night, that they might discover us even in the dark: Hoping that our Pinnace might have reach’d her Port, and that the Governour wou’d not fail to send us Relief. But God, it seems, had determined otherwise for us. For the Weather, which had been fine ever since their Departure, now chang’d to such a degree into rainy, and stormy, that we scarce pass’d a single Day without a Tempest: Tho’ our Bay was sufficiently shelter’d from the Fury of the Waves by the Promontory and other Islands which separated it from the Sea, and skreen’d it from the Wind. It rained almost every day for three Weeks, and yet the Sun shone every day too, which made a perpetual Mixture of good and bad Weather. And now our Care and Providence, in salting and drying Flesh and Fish, and barrelling it up in some of the Ship Casks, was of very great advantage to us. At the end of the three Weeks the Weather grew somewhat better, tho’ not so much but that we had every two or three days Rain, Wind, Hurricanes, and sudden Calms, which quite depriv’d us of all hope of Succours from Batavia, even supposing our People had got thither. This Thought made us come to a Resolution of placing all our Trust in the Divine Goodness, and our own Industry. The Weather after the Rain became very hot, and every thing grew almost sensibly; so that according to all Appearance we were like to have a very plentiful Crop of Peas; which made us think of laying out another Plot of Ground to sow more. There was an infinite number of Fish and Birds in the Bay, which, when it was calm, we could take in what quantities we pleas’d; but our Nets beginning now to wear out, we were forc’d to untwist some of the Cable Ropes to make new ones; which, tho’ they were very clumsy, serv’d us well enough in our necessity. And whereas

146

The History of the Sevarambians

our Hunters, by making a perpetual Noise in the Forest, had frighted away all the Deer, so that none were to be seen within nine or ten Miles of us; we resolved to take another Method, and go to the other side of the Bay, where we saw Woods almost every where. Maurice, therefore, had orders given him to make a discovery of the Country, which he accordingly did; and reported, “That there were large Forests consisting of divers kinds of Trees, and a little River, but deep, which discharg’d it self into the Bay.” He said also, “that he had been four or five Miles up that River, where he saw nothing but Trees, and some Morasses near the Banks, tho’ he yet believed that there was Game, as we had conjectur’d.” He added, “that he thought it would be proper to send some of our People thither, who might try it.” Accordingly fifty of our Men, with Provisions for a Week, went in the Long-Boat and Pinnace to the other side of the Water, and up the River which Maurice had spoken of. At length finding a convenient Place for the setting up their Hutts, they made a descent; and, keeping the Long-Boat there, sent back the Pinnace to us. The same day, some of them going into one of the Woods, met with plenty of Deer, of which they made a great slaughter. They also found a certain Animal somewhat like a Hog, but more heavy and clumsy. These Creatures kept together in Herds, and liv’d on Fruits and the Roots of Trees. Our People kill’d some of them, and we found their Flesh better than our Pork in Europe. About this time Maurice, having a mind to take a nice Review of the Promontory which cover’d the Gulf, and separated it from the Sea, landed there with twenty Men, on the Inside of the Bay, where he found nothing but Rocks and Stones. But when he was advanced a little farther upon it; he perceiv’d that it was an Island, whose marshy Soil, then dry’d by the Heat of the Sun, yielded excellent Pasturage, and that it was at that time well stock’d with Deer, and other Game, which were exceeding tame and gentle. Then going on towards the Eastern Part of the Island, they discover’d that it was divided from the Continent by a very narrow Channel, over which the Deer swam when they came to feed in the Moor. The Island was about ten Miles in diameter, and near upon round. These new and fortunate Discoveries gave us great joy, and farther Assurances of never wanting Food, even tho’ we should increase to four times the Number we were. Maurice being now become more bold, spurr’d on by his good Success, and fond of the Praise we bestow’d on him, thought nothing difficult, and was always projecting to go on some new Discovery. And as he was a prudent, active, and worthy Man, and generally successful, I always countenanced his Proposals. One day he was saying to me, that he had observ’d that the Bay stretch’d very far toward the South-East, and that

Part I

147

he believ’d there was some great River that emptied it self into it from that Quarter: Which, therefore, he added, it would be proper for us to discover. There was a good deal of probability in what he said, and as I was willing to please him, I permitted him to take the Pinnace, with such a number of Men as he judg’d proper, and Provisions for a Week, in order to go upon this Expedition. After he had got this leave, he was quickly ready for his Voyage, and purpos’d to go as far up as he cou’d, to make the greater Discovery of the Country. We wish’d him good success, and a happy return, and order’d our other Affairs by the hope of seeing him again very soon. Mean while our Peas were almost ripe, and nine or ten days after their departure we had a prodigious Harvest; every Measure yielding us near a hundred-fold. We were also in expectation of a second Crop, which promis’d as well as the first. Those that we gathered we dried very carefully, and put into Barrels, as we also did every thing else that could be preserved till Winter, contenting our selves at present with such Food only as would not keep. We had now been near three Months at Siden-Berg, without hearing any thing from Batavia, which fully confirm’d us in the Apprehension that our Pinnace was lost, and made us resolve to think no more about her. But our greatest Trouble was, that Maurice had been gone ten Days, which was a longer time than he set at his departure, and we had receiv’d no News from him. This embarassed us exceedingly, and made us in doubt what Measures to take. We were afraid to send the Long-Boat after them, lest we shou’d lose her too; and she was so useful to us, that we cou’d scarce subsist without her: For our Hunters had pitch’d a kind of Camp on the other side of the Bay; but without our Boats we cou’d have no Commerce with them. These Reflections produced a general Concern throughout the Camp, where we continued mourning our loss fifteen Days longer, without hearing any thing of them. We cou’d not think what Judgment to make in the Case: For knowing that there had been no Storm since they went away, it was not likely that they should be lost. Nor had we any reason to imagine, that they were fallen into the hands of Pirates, or any other barbarous People, because our own Experience inclin’d us to believe, that the Country was not inhabited; neither did we see how it was possible for them to be destroy’d by Wild-Beasts, who cou’d not attack them upon the Water. While we were thus fluctuating betwixt Hope and Fear, we perceiv’d Maurice’s Pinnace, accompanied with two other Vessels who came on with him towards Siden-Berg. We look’d at them with astonishment, not being able to conceive where he had found those other Vessels, nor

148

The History of the Sevarambians

what People they should be. Soon after we discover’d ten Sail more following the first, tho’ at a great distance behind them. This Fleet put us into an extreme Consternation. We ran immediately to Arms, and prepar’d our Cannon to make a vigorous Defence. When we had got every thing ready, we detached a good Body to go up the River-side, in order to observe their Motions, and oppose their descent. Mean while they still came towards us, tho’ very slowly, there being but little Wind. At length they were arriv’d within a Musquet-shot of the Shore, where they came to an anchor in good order; while Maurice’s Pinnace stood directly to us, in which, she was now so near, we could perfectly distinguish him and his Men; and even speak to them. They therefore call’d out to us, and bid us not to be afraid, but send the Boat with three Men only, and fetch them ashore. After some Consultation together, we did as we were desir’d, when he leap’d into the Boat himself with one of his Men. After which they took in, with great respect, a tall venerable Person, cloathed in a black Robe, with a Hat on his Head, and a white Flag in his Hand, which he display’d as a Signal of Peace. He came ashore with Maurice, and I, and some of the Officers who were near at hand, went up to meet him: which, as we were doing, Maurice advanc’d a little before him, and told us, “That the Gentleman whom we saw was sent by the Governour of a City, where they had met with a thousand Civilities; which was situate about sixty Miles up the Bay. And that therefore he begg’d we would treat him with great kindness and respect.” As soon as he had given us this notice, we paid our Compliments to him in the most submissive manner we cou’d. He received us with much goodness and gravity, and said to us in good Dutch, “The Eternal GOD bless you: and may the SUN, his great Minister, and our glorious King, shine kindly upon you; and this LAND, our Country, be auspicious and happy to you.” After this Salutation, which we thought very extraordinary, Maurice having informed him that I was the Commander, he offer’d me his Hand, which I kissed with great respect. When I had so done, he, in return, embrac’d me, and saluted me on the Forehead; after which he desir’d to go to our Camp, whither we conducted him with all the Deference imaginable. He look’d at our Hutts and Palisado, and admiring our Works, spoke in the following manner, addressing himself particularly to me: “I have heard the Story of your Misfortune; and, being well appriz’d of your Virtue and Merit, have made no difficulty of trusting my Person in your hands. And as I am satisfied that I am perfectly safe among you, I make no doubt but you will commit your selves to me with as much frankness, when you shall be informed who and what I am.— But not to keep you any longer in uncertainty, and that you may have an

Part I

149

unsuspicious Opportunity of hearing Maurice’s Account of his late Adventure, I would choose to repose my self while you give him audience, and are indulging a Curiosity which must be natural to you and all Men upon such an occasion.” We made no answer but by a profound Reverence; and, leaving him in my Hutt, hasten’d as fast as we cou’d to that of Van de Nuits, where Maurice was expecting us with impatience. We were no sooner enter’d, but he was desir’d to give an account of his Voyage; which, having ask’d my permission, he began, directing his Speech to me in the following manner: “It was about three Weeks ago, said he, that I left Siden-Berg with a design of making some further Discovery in the Bay. The first Day we sail’d with fair Wind, towards the South East, for something more than twenty Miles, and saw nothing on either side of the Bay, but large Woods, distant about five or six Miles from one another. In the Evening we anchor’d about a Mile from the Right-hand Shore, and lay there that Night. The next Day we went on with Wind and Tide, holding still to the South-East. About five Miles higher up, we found that the River grew narrower, and that the Channel was at one Place, only two Miles over. We still kept on the same Course, tho’ with somewhat more Difficulty, till we came where the Water extended itself extremely, and formed a prodigious Lake, in the middle of which we could scarce discern the Shore round it. In this Lake we observ’d about ten or twelve small Islands, finely shaded with lofty Trees, very green and agreeable. The Wind then chopp’d about, but there was so little of it that we could scarce perceive any Motion in the Water. However, as we did not want for Sea-Room, we steer’d just as the Wind wou’d let us, without intending more for the Right than the Left-hand Shore: Tho’ still, when we could conveniently, we held on our Course as before. “In the Evening, we had a fresh Breeze, which carried us on to the same Point; and just before it grew dark, we came to an anchor among some of the Islands, which were about two or three Miles distant from each other, with a design to visit them the next day. We pass’d the Night without any Apprehensions, not imagining that these Islands were inhabited. But we were much mistaken, for as soon as it was Day, we found ourselves surrounded with ten or twelve Vessels full of armed Men, which hemm’d us in after such a manner that it was impossible for us to avoid falling into their hands. We were now exceedingly frighted, expecting nothing but Death or Captivity. For we had no other Alternatives left us, but either to fight our Way thro’ the Enemy, or surrender ourselves Prisoners to a People whom we did not know, who might treat us as they pleased. This last Consideration weigh’d so much with us, that we resolv’d to defend ourselves to the very last Man.

150

The History of the Sevarambians

Accordingly, we immediately took to our Arms; for (as I before intimated) we cou’d not fly, the Weather still continuing quite calm, and those who surrounded us having sent out several Boats well mann’d with Rowers, which came directly aboard us. When they were got within Musket-shot of us, they all lay by on their Oars, excepting one small Boat, in which we saw a Man with a Flag in his hand, who held it up to us as a token of Peace and Friendship. We continued under Arms, and suffered him to come near us, seeing he was not strong enough to attack us by himself. They were now got within thirty or forty Yards of us, when he that bore the Flag, making profound Reverence to us, spoke to us in Spanish, bidding us “not to be afraid, for they would do us no harm.” One of our Men, who understood that Language, interpreted what he said, and ask’d him by my Order “why then we were surrounded in such a manner.” To which he replied “that it was the Custom of the Country;” and again repeated, “that they would not hurt us.” He then desired to know what Country-men we were, and being told Hollanders, he seem’d well pleas’d, and ask’d leave to come on board us, with one of his Attendants only, whom he offer’d to give up as a Hostage till things should be better agreed between us. As his Demand was so equitable, we immediately consented; and he soon after came to us with but one of his People, as had been stipulated. He was a well-grown Man, cloath’d in a red Robe, which reach’d down to the middle of his Leg, and he had a Cap and Girdle on of the same Colour. The Person who came with him was drest in the same manner; and both appear’d to be about forty Years old. As soon as he was come aboard, he enquired in Dutch for the Commander, and being informed that I was he, he advanc’d in a very complaisant Way, embraced me and said, he was glad to see us in that Country, but that he could not imagine how it had been possible for us to get thither in so small a Vessel as ours. I answer’d him, that we came in a much larger, which had run ashore on their Coast, and that we had built this, which they saw out of part of the Wreck. He then enquired, whether we sav’d all our People? To which I return’d, only ourselves, and that all the rest perish’d. For I did not think it prudent to say any thing of you, or the rest of the Crew, till we should see in what manner they would treat us. He seem’d to be much affected at our Misfortune, and appear’d to sympathize with us in the Affliction. After this he put many Questions to me touching our Voyage and Loss, and concerning the present State of Affairs in Europe. To all which I gave such Answers as I judg’d most proper. Upon the whole, he shew’d himself well satisfied with what I had said to him, and told me that we were come into a Country where, perhaps, we should find more Succour, and be kindlier used than in our own: At least, added he, you may be assur’d of wanting Nothing here, that can any ways contribute to the real Comfort and Happiness

Part I

151

of Life, if you are Men of Temperance and Moderation. We return’d him our most humble Thanks, and desir’d to know the Name of the Country, which he told us was in their Language call’d Sporoumbe, and the Inhabitants Sporocii, who were the Subjects of a much greater and finer Kingdom lying beyond the Mountains, the Name of which was Sevarambe, and that of the People Sevarambi, the principal of which dwell in a very large City call’d Sevarinde. He concluded, that we were but thirteen or fourteen Miles distant from another, but much less, nam’d Sporounde, whither he design’d to conduct us. This Compliment surpriz’d us, and discovering our Fears by our Looks, he endeavour’d to dissipate them by saying to us, I have already assur’d you, and I do it again, and even solemnly protest to you, that no Harm shall come to you, if you do not draw it down upon yourselves, by your Diffidence and Obstinacy. You are so few Hands, in so small a Vessel, that it is not possible you should be able to defend yourselves against our Ships, which have a full Compliment of Men, who perhaps are as skilful and couragious in this, and any other sort of Engagements as yourselves; and whom, it may be, you will find upon Trial, not so barbarous as you at present imagine; nay, and of whom ’tis most likely you will come to confess, that they are a People no ways defective in point of Honesty, Honour or Benevolence. As soon as he had done speaking, he and his Companion retir’d to one End of the Vessel, as it were to give us an Opportunity of communing together, and deliberating what Course we should take. In a little time we came to a Resolution of following the Counsel that had been offer’d us, and to resign ourselves wholly to the Disposal of Divine Providence. By this time the Person who spoke to us was advancing toward us, and being ask’d by him what we had concluded; I let him know that we were ready to obey him in all things, and thought ourselves happy in being under his Protection. We are, continu’d I, a Parcel of poor unhappy Wretches! Objects of your Pity, rather than of your Anger! And we hope to find by your means that Succour and Relief which you offer us with so much Goodness, and such a seeming Sense of our Misfortune. You shall experience all that I have promis’d, return’d he; and moreover shall see such Wonders in this our Country, as we flatter ourselves are not to be met with in any other. While he was saying this to us, he gave a Signal to his Boat to come aboard us; which they immediately did, and brought with them Bread, Wine, Dates, Figs, and several sorts of dry’d Nuts, on which we made a good Repast. He who had discours’d us, inform’d me that his Name was Carchida, and that of his Companion Benoscar; and desir’d also to know mine, which I immediately told him. And now I ask’d him how he came to speak Dutch, in a Country so remote from Holland. I will satisfy you another time, replied he, in that or any other particular; but at present we must think of beginning our Voyage to Sporounde, that we may be able to get there before Night. He

152

The History of the Sevarambians

then commanded one of the Vessels, which was not far off, to advance to us, and fastening our Pinnace to them, towed us on to the South-East, another Vessel rowing after us. We soon left the little Islands and the rest of the Fleet a long way behind us; which last never quitted its Post till we had lost sight of them. We did not get out of the Lake till about two in the Afternoon; which by reason of its vast Extent, we thought might have more justly been call’d a Sea. And now a fair Wind springing up, we made good Way, and in two Hours time were got into a great River, where the Water was fresh, and on each side of which lay a very beautiful Country. About two Miles up the River, we came to a very narrow Reach, where the Water was confin’d between two thick Walls, which the Inhabitants have built to prevent the overflowing of the River. On these Walls we observ’d several Buildings of Brick and Stone together, which seem’d to resemble large square Castles. We kept on two Miles higher up, when we arriv’d at Sporounde, continuing all the Way between the Walls, which are still at equal Distances, crown’d with the same sort of Buildings. The City of Sporounde stands just at the falling-in of two large Rivers, in a very spacious Plain; which presents the Eye with Corn-Fields, Meadows, Vineyards, Gardens, and delightful Groves. When we came near the City, the Vessel which attended us was sent before to give notice there of our coming; by means of which when we landed at the Key, which is very grand and magnificent, we found a Multitude of People assembled together to see us come ashore. Carchida, who disembark’d first, was receiv’d by certain grave and venerable Men cloath’d in black, with whom having talk’d some time, he gave a sign to Benoscar to bring us ashore. Benoscar then instructed us in a few Words how we were to behave, and bid us follow him. As soon as we were on the Key, where those Gentlemen waited for us, we made them low Obeisances, and then went towards them. They resaluted us, by bowing themselves a little, and the most considerable Person among them, taking me in his Arms, embraced me with great Goodness, kiss’d my Forehead, and said, you are all very welcome to Sporounde. From thence they had us into the City, thro’ a great magnificent Gate, which terminated a beautiful Street, cross’d by several others exactly like it. At length we were brought to a very fine House, the Door of which was also very fine, and the Apartments dispos’d in the manner of Cloysters, surrounded on all sides with large Galleries, and having in the midst of it a spacious Square laid out in Grass-Walks. Out of this Court we went into a large Hall, where we stood some time with the Gentleman that receiv’d us at the Port, and came with us. While we stop’d here, they ask’d us several such sort of Questions as Carchida had done before. In a little while we were conducted into another Hall, where we found Tables spread,

Part I

153

and serv’d up in, almost, the same manner as in Europe. Then Sermodas, who was the distinguish’d Person that welcom’d us to the Key, and led us to the Place where we then were, ask’d me if I could eat. To which I answer’d, that it was so long since we had seen such an Entertainment, that I did not suppose any of us should want for Appetite. He smil’d, and, taking me by the Hand, caus’d me to sit down by him at the upper End of the Table. The rest of the Company also seated themselves, and Carchida and Benoscar took my Men off to another Table. We were regal’d in a very handsome manner, and after Supper show’d into a large Chamber, where there were a great many Beds on Iron Tressels, in which my Men Were to lie two and two. For my own part, I had a private Room allotted me, to which Sermodas and the rest accompanied me, and from whence, after having wish’d me a good Night, they retired; tho’ a Moment after, Carchida came back again, to tell me that we must the next day wait on Albicormas the Governor. To which he added, that he would instruct me in the Forms necessary to be observ’d at this Audience; and then once more wish’d me a good Night. The next Morning at six we heard a great Clock strike; and about an Hour after, Carchida and Benoscar came into my Room, and enquired how I had rested, and whether I wanted any thing. I immediately wou’d have arose, but they told me I should lie a-bed till I had some Cloaths brought me, which would be in a few Minutes. Benoscar now went out, but soon came back again with certain Servants who had got Cloaths of all sorts, viz. Linnen, and upper Garments of Cotton and Wool, according to the Fashion of the Country. After these came other Servants with a Tub of warm Water, in which Carchida desir’d me to wash myself before I put on my new Cloaths; going out at the same Time with all the rest, and leaving me only one Valet to wait upon me. I then arose, and having bath’d myself, began to put on the Linnen, and other Habits that had been brought me. My upper Garment was of divers Colours, and was bound round me with a Girdle of the same: For I let the Valet dress me just as he pleas’d. In a little while, Carchida was come back to us, and told me that I must now go with my People to wait on Albicormas, and that they waited only for me. He then instructed me in the Ceremonial of the Visit, and we went down into the Court, where I found my Men all new cloath’d, pretty much in the same manner as I was myself. Benoscar was with them, and informing them how to behave in the Governour’s Presence. “We continued some time standing in the Court, looking upon one another, till Sermodas came in with his Train. He ask’d me if we were ready to follow him to the Council; to which I answer’d, that we were. Then taking me by the Hand, and placing me on his left, we walk’d on

154

The History of the Sevarambians

together. Carchida put himself at the head of our People, who march’d two and two like Soldiers, and Benoscar brought up the rear. In this Order we pass’d thro’ several Streets, till we came to a large Square in the midst of the City: In the Centre of this Square was a magnificent Palace with four Fronts, built with white Free-Stone, and a sort of Marble which look’d blackish; but the whole was so neat and well-polish’d, that we thought it but newly finish’d, tho’ in reality it had been built a long time. The Gate of the Palace was adorned with a great many Brass-Statues, and we found on each side of it two Ranks of Musquetiers, cloath’d all in blue. When we came into the first Court we pass’d thro’ a Lane of Halberdiers dress’d in red, and were entertain’d as we went along with the Sound of Trumpets, and other military Instruments, which form’d an agreeable martial kind of Concert. From thence we were had into another Court, the Sides and Floor of which was black Marble, decorated with beautiful Statues of white. In this Court were above a hundred Men, robe’d in black, and of a more advanced age than those we saw as we came in. We stood some time looking at them, till two Persons, dress’d in the same manner, with Gold-Scarfs on their Shoulders, came and bid Sermodas advance with us. Upon this notice, we mov’d on, in the same order, till we were ascended into a large Hall, finely painted and gilded, where we halted again for some time. Out of this Hall we pass’d into a second still finer, and from thence into a third, which surpass’d them both in Richness and Beauty. At the upper-end of this last, stood a Throne, a little elevated, and on each side of it divers Seats somewhat lower. On the Throne sat one cloath’d in Purple, of a majestic Air, and in the Seats certain venerable Persons, robe’d as the two were who came to Sermodas in the Court. The first of these we were told was Albicormas, and the others the principal Officers of the City, who with him govern the whole Province of Sporoumbe. When we came about the middle of the Hall, we made a low Reverence, and soon after a second, more profound than the first; but when we were got to the foot of the Rail which was near the Throne, and separated it from the Pit, we bow’d still much lower than at either of the times before. Then all the Counsellors rose up, and having saluted us by a gentle Inclination of their Bodies, sat down again in their Places; but Albicormas himself only just nodded his head to us. As soon as we had gone thro’ this part of the Ceremony, Sermodas took me by the hand, and led me close up to the Rail; where making a very humble obeisance to the Governor, he related to him all that he knew of our Affair in their own Language; which, as they pronounce it, seems to me like Greek or Latin, but is both very soft and majestick. When Sermodas had done speaking, Carchida came forward, and gave the Council a more particular Account than the other had done;

Part I

155

telling them how they found us in the Lake which they call Sporascumpio, and in what manner we were taken; which (with respect to them) was attended with the farther Circumstances I am going to relate, as I was inform’d a few days after. “The day that we came into the Lake was a solemn Festival throughout the whole Country. The Islanders being engag’d in the Celebration of this Feast, were none of them on the Water, which was the Reason that we could not see any Vessels there, tho’ they have commonly a great many employed in Fishing. But notwithstanding that we did not perceive them, they fail’d not to discover us, but judg’d it not proper to show themselves for fear of frightening us; choosing rather to send out Ships in the night to surround us, which they did so effectually, that in the morning when we came to have a view of them, we found it impossible to escape them, as I before related. For this People always keep a good Guard on their Frontier, as being apprehensive that Strangers may come, and by ill Examples corrupt their Innocence, disturb their Tranquility, and introduce Vice and Wickedness among them. “When Carchida had done speaking, Albicormas rose up, and told us in his own Language, which Sermodas explain’d to us, That we were very welcome to that Country, and should be treated with all the Indulgence we could wish; but that we must continue at Sporounde, till he should have receiv’d orders from Sevarminas the Viceroy of the SUN, whose Residence is at Sevarinde, the Metropolis of the whole Kingdom; to whom he would that very day dispatch a Courier; to acquaint him with our Arrival, and to desire to know his pleasure concerning us. But that, in the mean time, we should want for nothing, provided we took care to follow the Advice of Sermodas, and his Officers. He added, I recommend Moderation and good Behaviour to you; with which he dismiss’d us. “I observ’d while we were in their Presence, that Albicormas was a little crooked, and that several of his Courtiers had the same blemish; but, excepting that, he was a well-made Man, and had a very grand Look. And, with respect to this Remark, we soon after found, that among the Inhabitants of this City, there were abundance of Persons who laboured under some natural Defect, as well as a great number of handsome People; and that the Reason of the visible Disproportion of the former to the latter was, that those of Sevarinde send all the deformed Persons that are born there into this Province, not suffering any such to dwell among them. We also learn’d, that the Word Esperon signifies, in their Language, a Person defective either in Body or Mind; and that Sporounde is the City or Place of abode for this sort of People. “After Albicormas had dismiss’d us, we return’d to our Lodging, where we found that Dinner waited for us. We tarried within all the

156

The History of the Sevarambians

Afternoon; but in the evening Sermodas and Carchida came and took us out to shew us part of the City, when Multitudes of People came from all Parts to see us. “This Place is the most regular of any I ever saw. It consists of large square Buildings, which they call *Osmasies,15 all of the same Form and Size, each of which contains, at least, a thousand People. There are seventy-six of these Osmasies in the whole City, which is something more than four Miles in Circumference. I have already taken notice, that it stands betwixt two large Rivers, which makes it naturally a Peninsula: But such is the Industry of this People, that they have turn’d it into a perfect Island, by cutting a Canal from one River to the other, about two Miles above it. The Sides of this Canal are supported by two strong Walls, between which are ten or twelve Bridges that join themselves together; which are all made of Wood except that in the middle, which is very large, and securely built with Free-Stone. We were shewn this Canal, and the Country round about, three days after our Arrival. “At night, about two Hours after Supper, we were had into a large Hall; where we found fifteen Young-women who waited for us. They were, for the most part, well-shap’d, plump Girls, and all dress’d in figur’d Cottons. Their Hair was black and curling, which gracefully spread their Shoulders. We were a little surpriz’d to see them all standing in Rank and Form, not knowing what they were brought there for; when Sermodas, addressing himself to me, gave us to understand the Meaning of it in the following manner: “You seem to wonder, O Maurice, to see so many Young-Women together, and are ignorant of the Reason of it. At least, I am sure you must be surpriz’d to find them rang’d as they are, in Cloaths somewhat different from those of the other Women, who generally wear Veils. Know then, that these are Slaves commanded hither merely to be at your service. Every Nation has its particular Customs, some of which are naturally bad, because contrary to Reason. There are others again that are indifferent, and seem only good or evil, according to the Opinion or Prejudices of the People who practise them. But besides these, there are also others which are founded in Reason, and truly good of themselves, provided they are consider’d with Fairness and Impartiality. Ours are, almost all, of this kind; and you will hardly observe any among us, but what are established on this solid Foundation. You are not, without doubt you cannot be ignorant, that the moderate Use of Things, which Nature design’d for the service of the Animal Creation, is good in it self, and that ’tis the Abuse, and only the Abuse of them, that can make them in any degree evil. Among this kind there are three sorts most considerable: The first regards the preservation of —————— 15. * These Osmasies are such sort of Buildings as our Colleges, but larger.

Part I

157

every Individual; the second respects the maintenance of it in a happy Condition; and the third has for its End the Increase and Propagation of the Species. “As to that which regards the preservation of the Individual, and for instance of Men, it depends upon certain GOODS, without the use of which he cannot subsist, because they are absolutely necessary to him. Food, Drink, and Sleep, are assuredly of this kind. “But as a Man cannot be happy in the enjoyment of these Things only, and tho’ they are sufficient for his Preservation, yet they are not capable by themselves of rendering his Life sweet and agreeable, the Author of Nature has given him other GOODS, which, join’d to the former, work him up to a State of Content and Complacency, if he will be prudent and moderate in the use of them, and not foolishly run after the deceitful Appearances of imaginary GOOD, nor suffer himself to be led blindly by the Fury and Disorder of his irregular Passions and Affections. Now the GOODS, which thus satisfy a Man, are, as we conceive, Health of Body, tranquility of Mind, Liberty, a right Education, the Practice of Virtue, the Society and Conversation of honest worthy People, pleasant Foods, decent Cloathing, and commodious Houses. All which are things that will make Life happy, provided they are used soberly, and we do not set our hearts too much upon them. “But as Nature has thought fit to set bounds to human Life, and determined it to a certain Number of Years, beyond which we cannot enjoy these GOODS; and because our Bodies, ceasing to live, are at length dissolv’d, and every Particle of them reassumes its first Form, or clothes it self in a new one, it is also her pleasure that each Species be not only preserv’d, but even increased by the means of Generation; which, in some sort, may be said to give every Creature to live again, and retains all the several kinds of Animals and Plants in the World, which are its most beautiful Ornaments. To bring about, therefore, this End, she has created every Species Male and Female, that so, by the Union of the two Sexes, the Propagation of the Animal World may go on, which is her noblest Work, and what she is most concerned for. But, to render the State of each Animal more happy, and to accomplish her Design with the greater ease, she has attach’d to this Union a particular Pleasure which we call LOVE: A Passion of the utmost Importance, seeing it is the Bond and Conservatrix of all things, and which, when under the Government of Right-Reason, produces only good Effects, because it proposes to it self only good Ends; namely, lawful Pleasures, and the Preservation and Increase of the Species to which all Animals naturally tend. “And therefore Sevarias, our great and illustrious Legislator, having well consider’d these things, has justly order’d the Punishment of Intemperance and Brutality; but then he also challenges of us, that we think of following the Design of God and Nature, in the Propagation of the Human Kind; and for this Reason alone he has appointed, that all that are arriv’d at a certain Age

158

The History of the Sevarambians

prescrib’d by the Laws, should marry; and that Travellers and Strangers might cohabit with Slaves, of which, for this very purpose, we always take care to keep a sufficient number.———This Great Man has forbidden us to look on any thing as criminal, which tends only to the preservation of the Species; but then he doth not allow of Excesses, because they break down the Fences of that Moderation which ought still to be maintain’d, even in the use of lawful Pleasures. “You are therefore to know, that we do not suffer any Man among us to be without a Woman; and that for this Reason we have brought as many in number as there are of you, which will visit you every two days during your abode here.———I am not ignorant, that this Custom of our’s would be severely condemn’d in Europe; where it is not enough consider’d, That there is a Virtue in the lawful Use of LOVE, and none at all in renouncing it.——— But, in answer to such an Objection, we have, at least, this to say, that we do not find any of those detestable Crimes among us, which are so great a Dishonour to your Country. “He added much more, which he needed not have done, to persuade us to accept of the Offer he made us; for which we return’d him a thousand thanks, and he seem’d well-pleased that we so far approv’d of the Conduct of their Law-giver. “As soon as he was withdrawn, we had two Men came into the Hall, who saluted us in French. The first told us that he was a Physician, and his Companion a Surgeon; and, as such, they desir’d to know whether any of us were infected with the Neapolitan Disease: For, added he, we have orders to visit you, and if any such Person should deny the Truth, he will thereby certainly expose himself to certain Shame and Reproach; whereas, on the contrary, if he ingenuously confesses it, he is not at all the less esteemed for it, and will be cured in a very little time. We all assured them we had no such Distemper among us; but, notwithstanding our Protestations, we were each of us examin’d in a Room near that where we were. After the Visitation was over, they told us they were very glad to find us free from a Disease so common in the other Continents, and which was not known in this Southern Part of the World but by hear-say only. They continued farther, that they had dwelt in France six Years, and had seen the greatest Part of Europe and Asia, during a twelve Years Course of Travel; that from time to time Ships were sent from Sporounde, which go over-sea on this very design, and that by this means it was, that they had People among them who knew all those Nations, and could speak their Languages. This Discourse took off the astonishment we had been in at Carchida’s speaking Spanish and Dutch to us, and to find Manners and Customs so agreeable to our own, in so distant a Country, where we expected to meet with nothing but Barbarians. We

Part I

159

should have put many more Questions to these Gentlemen, but they retired from us as soon as their Business was over. “We now began to consult in what manner each should make choice of his Woman. And it was quickly concluded, that I should take first, my two Officers according to their Stations after me, and that then the rest should cast Lots, which they accordingly did without any Quarrels or Disputes; and so every one had his Companion. “When this Affair was ended, I was had to the Chamber where I lay the night before, and all my People were show’d into a long Gallery, which led into several little Rooms on both sides of it, all of them private, being separated from one another. Each of them took one of these Chambers, and lodged there that night. “The next morning, at the same Hour as the day before, Carchida came and ask’d me how I had reposed, and told me it was time to rise. My Bedfellow had left me, and dress’d her self as soon as she heard the Clock strike; and was but that moment gone out of the Room that Carchida came in. He told me, that Benoscar was gone to release my Men from Captivity; meaning by that Expression, from the Arms of their Mistresses, and to let them out of their Chambers, in which they had been shut up all night, to prevent any Disorder that an Exchange might have occasion’d, which is by no means allow’d; for fear, if the Women should prove with Child, the true Fathers should not be known. “When I was dress’d, I went down into the Hall, where my People came to me; and our Guides took us out to shew us several Quarters of the City, in which the Inhabitants were employ’d in divers sorts of Works. For some were making Cloths and Stuffs, others sewing, others smiting at the Anvil, and others engag’d in various other Labours. But Carchida told me, that Building and Agriculture were the principal Employments of the Nation. “We continued thus at Sporounde, living much in the same manner till the sixth day; when the Courier which Albicormas had sent to Sevarinde came back, with Orders from Sevarminas to bring us to the Metropolis, where he much desired to see us. When I was informed that we were to go to Sevarinde, and especially as we had met with such kind Treatment, I began to be sorry I had not discovered that you were here. Besides, I did not know how to extricate my self from the Embarassment of this Affair; but the Reason which had induc’d me to conceal the Truth, being so good and solid, I hoped Albicormas would be satisfied with it, and pardon a Disguise proceeding only from the Regard we had for the Safety of our Friends, even at a time when we were doubtful of our own.

160

The History of the Sevarambians

“I therefore ingenuously owned the thing to Sermodas; and he acquainted the Governor with it, who immediately order’d us to continue at Sporounde, till the return of a second Courier, which he was going to dispatch to Sevarminas, to let him know the Cause of our delay. This Courier came back again in six days more, with new Orders for the Governor. In obedience to which, this Fleet is come for you, and we are all to go together to Sevarinde, and appear before the Sovereign, who resides there; where Sermodas tells me we shall be yet better treated than we have been at Sporounde.”

The History of the Sevarambians Part II

H

ere Maurice ended his Discourse, which fill’d us with joy and admiration, without having in the least tir’d us, tho’ it had indeed been somewhat long. But the things he related were so extraordinary, that we cou’d have heard him with pleasure, even tho’ his Story had held out the whole day. We now began to consult what measures to take; and, in some little time, came to a Resolution to follow Sermodas, wheresoever he should lead us, and to commit our Affairs entirely to the disposal of Divine Providence, and the natural Benevolence of the People of the Country. While Maurice was giving us this Account of his Adventures, some of his Men, mov’d by a Desire of talking with their Friends, came ashore; and getting most of our Folks round them, entertain’d them with the same Relation; who were as much amaz’d as we, at the recital of what had happened to them. By this means they were acquainted with the whole Affair as soon as we, and there needed no Repetition of it to let them into the true State of our present Situation. We were all now sufficiently disposed to go into a Country, which we had heard so fine a Description of; but, as the Pinnace which we had sent to Batavia might have possibly arriv’d safe there, and if so, we could not make any Doubt but the General would send some Vessel to our Relief, as soon as he should be inform’d of our Misfortune and Necessity, we still seem’d to descry a Beam of Hope from that Quarter; and that gave us now some Uneasiness. Because we saw clearly, that if a Ship should come and not find any of us there, they wou’d certainly conclude us some how or other lost, and by this means, all hope would be taken from us of ever seeing again our Friends and native Countries. But to this Objection Maurice replied, “that as to the Pinnace, she must assuredly be lost, since we had heard nothing of her from the time she went away, which Reason alone was sufficient to cut off all Expectation of any Assistance from Batavia; and for our return into Holland, it would not be at all impossible, nor perhaps very difficult, seeing we should be with a civiliz’d, honourable People, who frequently were sending Ships over Sea, and would, probably, not only permit us to 161

162

The History of the Sevarambians

go with them, but even furnish us with Necessaries, and not detain us in a Country by force, where they saw we had no Inclination to continue. In a word, that our Condition would have been much worse, if we had always been oblig’d to dwell in the Camp, expos’d to a thousand Dangers, and subject to as many Difficulties.” These solid reasons of Maurice’s, who was a Man of good Sense, and had acquir’d a considerable Reputation among us, by his many Services, quickly dissipated our Doubts and Fears. We therefore return’d to my Hutt, where we found Sermodas, who smil’d when he saw us enter, and ask’d, “how we liked the Description which Maurice had given us of the City and Inhabitants of Sporounde?” “We cannot,” answer’d I, “but have very advantageous Thoughts of both; and, as we even wish our selves now there, are ready to follow you whenever you please to go.” “I came for that very purpose,” replied he, “and am glad to find you in a Disposition to trust your selves to my Conduct: And, for your further Encouragement in this Resolution, I dare assure you, you will find Living in our Cities much more agreeable than that of this Camp, tho’ by your Industry you have made it no incommodious Habitation.” We had afterwards more Discourse with him on this Subject, and ask’d him, “if he wou’d please to take a little Refreshment of such Foods as we could furnish him with.” To which he answer’d, “that he wou’d accept of our Offer, provided we wou’d partake, in like manner, of theirs.” Which that we might do, he desir’d Maurice “to order some of his People to bring Wine, and other Provisions ashore.” After dinner, Sermodas told us, “that since we were determin’d to go with him, it was high time that we should prepare to set out; and that you might transport our Folk in what manner we pleas’d; but that in his Opinion it wou’d be best to embark the principal Persons, and all the Women that very Day; and that he would leave some of his Men behind, to assist the rest in getting their Things aboard, and to bring them to us at Sporounde.” I then let him know, “that part of our Men were on the other side of the Bay; and if he wou’d please to give leave, we wou’d send Maurice with one or two Vessels to fetch them over.” “You may do so,” return’d he, “and I will order one of ours to go with him, which shall immediately take them in, and have them directly to the City, without coming back again to the Camp. And for your part,” added he, addressing himself to me, “choose what Officers you please to have with you, and come on board my Ship, where perhaps you will find your self not ill accommodated.” Accordingly I took Van de Nuits, and Turcy, my Secretary, ordering D’Eveze, and the other Captains, to command in my absence, and to transport our Baggage after us as soon as possible. Sermodas left Benoscar with D’Eveze, to assist him, and to convey him up the River to the City.

Part II

163

After having thus settled our Affairs, we directly sail’d for Sporounde, where we arriv’d three days after our Departure from SidenBerg. We were receiv’d there, much in the same manner, as Maurice had been before; with this Difference only, that more respect was paid to Van de Nuits and me, than had been shown to the other. Albicormas himself caress’d us in a very extraordinary Manner, and was particularly kind to me, with whom he had several Conferences touching the present State of Europe, which I was much more capable of giving an Account of, than any of our Company. I found him a Man excelling in many things, and of an admirably solid Judgment. He instructed me in divers of their Customs, and explain’d to me the Nature of their Government, which I shall speak of hereafter, when I come to give an Account of the Cities, Laws, and Manners of the Sevarambians. The Day after our Arrival, the Baggage was brought up to the City, and nothing left in the Camp that was worth the Trouble of transporting. Our People were all treated at their coming, as those of Maurice had been before, and each of them had a Suit of new Cloaths given to them. We now found our selves under a great Difficulty with respect to our Women. I have before observ’d, that we had order’d in the Camp, that one woman should, in common, serve five Men; and that the principal Officers, only, should be allow’d the Privilege of having each a Woman to himself. Sermodas and his Friends disapprov’d of this Regulation: And that Regard for Honour and Decency, which long Habit had planted in them, let them to speak of it as a thing brutish and monstrous. They affirm’d, “that it was a Scandal to their Country and Laws; and assured me, it wou’d not at any rate be born with.” I excus’d myself by the Necessity we were under of taking this Method, rather than expose our People to the Temptation and Danger of murdering one another. Sermodas made no Reply to this Plea, but immediately ask’d me, “whether we were willing to submit to their Laws?” I answer’d, “that we desir’d nothing more.” Upon which he took these Measures. “Count, said he to us, exactly how many Men and Women there are of you, and give me a List of them: but, especially, be sure to make a Note on those that are with Child. In the mean while, you that have Wives already, may either keep them; or, if you choose not so, we will give you others in their stead.” We consulted together, some time, on this Occasion, and those Officers who had no Inclination to change, retain’d theirs, while the rest drew Lots as the Attendants of Maurice had done, and after that were not allow’d to make a new Choice. The Women that were with Child by any of the inferior Officers were obliged to continue with him whom she believ’d to be the Father; and those belonging to the common Men, that were in the same Condition, were instructed to keep to that

164

The History of the Sevarambians

Person by which she judg’d herself to be breeding. And thus all these Matters were settled. The fifth Day after our arrival at Sporounde, Sermodas came to take me to the Temple where the Osparenibon, or Solemnity of Marriage, was to be celebrated. He told me, “that it was as much to shew us this Ceremony as to repose us that we had been stopt so long in this City.” To which he added, “that this Feast was kept four times a year, and that it was one of the greatest they had, tho’ much inferior here to what it was at Sevarinde.” I immediately arose, and put on a new Suit of Cloaths which had been brought me, as like did all my Officers, who came to my Chamber in order to accompany me to the Temple, whither Sermodas and Carchida were to conduct us. Accordingly we went all together to the Palace of Albicormas, where we had had an Audience. After which, having cross’d several Courts, we came to the Temple; which was a grand, superb Building, where we found a great number of young Men and Women assembled together, all cloath’d in new Habits. The Men had on their Heads Crowns made with green Leaves, and the Maids Garlands of Flowers. I never saw so lovely a Sight as this Company of young People, who for the most part had a good Air, and discover’d Joy and Gladness in their Countenances. A large Curtain drawn across the middle of Temple took from us the Sight of one half of it. We stood near a quarter of an Hour, admiring the rich Ornaments with which it is embellish’d, before there was any Alteration. But at length we heard the Sound of Trumpets, Hautboys, and other musical Instruments, and at the same time, saw divers Persons entring with lighted Flambeaux in their Hands, which they plac’d in Candlesticks, differently disposed of, in various parts of the Temple. The Windows were then shut, and the Curtain, which had conceal’d the other half, drawn up; which discover’d to us, a rich, magnificent Altar, adorn’d with Garlands and Festoons of Flowers curiously rang’d upon it, which stood at the further end of the Temple. On the right hand of the Altar, at a moderate height, was a large Globe of Crystal, or very transparent Glass, which four men cou’d scarce clasp. This Globe was so luminous, that it enlighten’d all the upper end of the Temple, and darted its Rays even into the middle of it. On the other side of the Altar was a Statue, on a Pedestal of an equal height, which represented a Nurse with many Breasts, giving suck to diverse little Children, curiously carved, as was also the Statue, which seem’d to offer her Nipples to them. Between these two Figures, and beyond the Altar, was a great black Veil, all of one sort of Stuff, and without any Ornament. Mean while, the Musick drew nearer to us, till it came at last to the Gate of the Temple; when we saw Albicormas and his Senators enter, who

Part II

165

went up together to the Altar, in a very pompous and solemn Procession. Several Priests, as he was going up, came to meet him with Censers in their Hands, and sung a Hymn before him. When they drew near, they made three Reverences to him, and then led him to the Altar, where he and the Senators bow’d themselves, three several Times; once before the black Curtain, and twice before the Statue, and then sate down on Thrones rais’d on each side of the Altar. Sermodas plac’d me, with three of my Officers, at the Feet of Albicormas; and the rest that came with us, on the opposite side. We were scarce seated, before the Priest went to the young People, of whom we spoke before, and brought them up to the Altar. When they came there, they were divided into two Ranks: The Men on the right hand, and the Women on the left; and the High-Priest mounting a Pulpit that stood just between them, made a succinct Discourse to them, after which he took a Flambeau that had been lighted at the Rays of the Sun, as I was inform’d afterwards, and Albicormas descending from the Throne, and taking it into his Hand, kindled with it some aromatick Woods that lay on the Altar, and fell on his Knees before the shining Globe, and there pronounced a certain Form of Words. From thence he went on to the Statue, where he only bow’d one Knee; and repeated some Words, as he had done at the Globe before. Then the Priests chanted a Hymn, to which the People responded; and when it was ended, several musical Instruments began to play. This agreeable Symphony was followed by a Concert of Voices so charming, that we were forc’d to confess that our Music in Europe had nothing equal to it. As soon as the Concert was ended, the High-Priest advanc’d towards the Maid who stood first in the Rank, and demanded of her, “if she would be married?” To which she answer’d, “yes;” at the same time making a low Obeisance, and blushing a little. From her, he went on and ask’d the same Question of all the rest, who all gave him the same Answer. While this priest was interrogating the Women, another did the same by the Men, who stood opposite to them. When this Part of the Form was gone through, the Priest came back again to the first Maid, and demanded of her, if she “would have any one of the young Men that stood before her?” And when she answer’d, “that so she designed,” he took her by the arm, and led her to the upper End of the Rank, where he bid “her choose her Husband.” Upon which she looked at the first a little slightly, and then at the others successively till she came to the sixth, where stopping, she ask’d him if he “would be her kind Lord, and faithful Husband?” To which he answer’d, that “he wou’d, provided she would also love him, as a chaste and loyal Wife ought to love her Husband,” which she “promised she wou’d do till Death.” After this solemn

166

The History of the Sevarambians

Promise, he took her by the Hand, saluted her, and then led her off to the lower Part of the Temple. The others all went thro’ the same Ceremony, and as they did so, drew off and join’d the first. But after the rest were all coupled, there remain’d eight Women, five of which seem’d full of Shame and Confusion, and poured out a Flood of Tears: But the three others were not so much affected; and when the High-Priest came towards them, caught hold of his Robe and followed him to Albicormas, who spoke something to them, after which they went up to the Senators, out of whom each choosing One, said to him, that, “since such was her Misfortune, that she could not have a Husband wholly to her self, she pitch’d upon him, after having been three Times publickly refused, to take away her Reproach; and therefore did beseech him to receive her into the number of his Wives, according to the Laws of the Country, and the Privilege allow’d her: Promising to be always very faithful and affectionate to him.” The three Senators who were thus address’d, immediately came down, and taking them by the Hand, led them to the Altar, where they continu’d together till the rest were brought up from the lower Part of the Hall, and rang’d in Couples with them. These Magistrates were Men between forty and fifty, but the handsomest of all their Bench. The five Maids that were left, being ask’d now by the High-Priest, “whether he wou’d make choice of either of the Senators or any Officer of the State?” answer’d; That, “having try’d their Lot but once, they were willing to take their Chance twice more, before they made that Step.” Then dropping their Veils, they went directly to the Gate of the Temple, where a cover’d Chariot waited for them, which took them up and carried each to her own home. As soon of these were withdrawn, the Musick again struck up, and Albicormas going to the Altar, pronounc’d with a loud Voice certain Words. Then taking the three Maids, and the three Officers they had chosen, he join’d their Hands and said something to them, which they answer’d by a profound Reverence. He did the same afterwards by seven or eight of the others, when, leaving the Ceremony for the rest to be perform’d by some of the Senators, he again resum’d his Throne. When they had finish’d their Part of the Business, two Priests carried Fire from the Altar into the midst of the Temple, where the new-married Couples, who had Pastils and Perfumes in their hands, made a Ring around it, and each Man mixing his Perfumes with those of his Wife, threw them into the Fire. Then every Person kneeling down, laid his Hand on a gilt Book which the two Priests presented to them, and there swore Obedience to the Laws; promising “to maintain them to the uttermost of their power, as long as they should live, and calling on the great God, the

Part II

167

Sun, and their Country, to be Witnesses to their most solemn Oath and Engagement.” This being done, they all came back again to the Altar, where they kneel’d down once more, while Albicormas said a short Prayer; who, when he had concluded it, turning towards them, gave them his Benediction, and straightway went out of the Temple, followed by all the Company, and attended by a new Concert of Musick. From the Temple the Procession pass’d on to a Hall near it, where we found several Tables which in an instant were exquisitely serv’d up. Albicormas took me and Van de Nuits, and said we should that day be his Guests. Accordingly he plac’d us at his own Table among the Senators. Sermodas led those of my Officers that had come with me to another Table; and Carchida and Benoscar dispos’d of the rest of our People, who during the Ceremony had been posted in one of the Galleries of the Temple. The Feast was magnificent, and a fine Concert kept playing all the Time of the Repast. When the Entertainment was over, we were had off to an Amphitheatre, about a Musquet-shot from the Temple, when we found all the Streets thro’ which we pass’d strew’d with Flowers, and heard the Acclamations of a prodigious Concourse of People, who were got together to see us and the Procession. This Amphitheatre is built with large Stones, and not less than fifty Paces in Diameter, reckoning from outside to outside. It is cupola’d with a noble Dome of a prodigious height, which defends it from the Sun, Rain, and all other Injuries of the Weather. The Seats run all around it from top to bottom, and take up so great a part of the Pit, that the Area there, is but of a moderate Bigness. All the Places were full when we came in, excepting the Pit, where no body was admitted but the Officers, the new-married people, and our selves, who were show’d into Seats below, separated from those above by a round Balustrade. When all the Company was settled, several young Men diverted us with wrestling, fencing, and other such like exercises of Strength and Skill, in which they acquitted themselves to the Satisfaction of the Spectators. After these Performances were over, the new-married Couples began dancing, which continu’d till a little before Night; when the Trumpets, and other Instruments, sounded a Retreat. We went off in the same manner that we came; and found the Streets so full of Flambeaux and Fire-Works, as almost turn’d the Night into Day. When we came to a certain Place, Albicormas and the Senators, indeed, were had home in Coaches, while the new-married People return’d a-foot, in great Order, to the Lodgings prepared for them; and Sermodas took us back to ours, where he explain’d to us the several Parts of the Ceremony.

168

The History of the Sevarambians

The next Day, in the Morning, he came and ask’d us if we would go again to the Temple to see another Ceremony, which was only a Consequent of the former. We immediately consented; and, as soon as we were ready, he took us to the Gate of the Temple, where we stopt for some time. In about a quarter of an hour we heard a Concert of Musick advancing towards us, and, soon after, saw the new-married Men coming up to the Temple in regular Order, each holding in his Hand a long green Bough, on which hung the Crown that he had worn the Day before, with his Wife’s Garland bound to it by a bloody Cloth, the Proof of the Woman’s Virginity. They enter’d the Temple in Triumph, and when they arriv’d at the Altar every one laid down his Branch upon it, consecrating it to God, the Sun, and to his Country; which last is represented by the Statue of the Nurse, spoken of before. When this Consecration was ended, they all went out together, dancing to the Sound of Instruments, and return’d home in the same manner. This Feast continues three whole Days, and is a Time of general rejoycing throughout the whole City. Mean while, the Time was come when we were to set out for Sevarinde, and Sermodas came to give Notice of it a Day before our Departure. He had me, Van de Nuits, and Maurice to take our Leaves of Albicormas. We were introduc’d to him at his own House, which is a fine Palace, tho’ much inferior to that of the City. He receiv’d us very graciously, and told us that “the next Day we must go for Sevarinde.” Then he ask’d us, “what we thought of Sporounde, and the Ceremonies we had seen in the Celebration of the Osparenibon?” To which we answer’d, that “we were even charm’d with all that we had seen.” “You are going now,” said he to us, “into a Country where every thing is more beautiful and magnificent. But I will not prepossess you by so advantageous a Description as I might give you: Experience will inform you better than any thing I can say. Sermodas is to be your Guide, who will treat you with much Kindness and Respect; and I advise you to follow his Counsel in all things, and to behave your selves so prudently, that the great Sevarminas may have as tender an Affection for you as I have.” Then he embrac’d us, kiss’d us on the Forehead, and bid us adieu. The next Morning early we were conducted to the River, which runs on the west side of the City, where we found several Boats ready to receive us. Sermodas took me, with three or four of my Officers, into a tilted one; not very large indeed, but finely embellish’d with carv’d Work, and beautifully gilded and painted. Our Men and Women were put into different Barks, and we went up the River without much difficulty. For as it runs thro’ a large level Plain, its Current is but gentle. On each side of the River we saw several stately Buildings like those we met

Part II

169

with below the City. But we cou’d not observe them nicely, because we went very fast; having many Rowers which reliev’d one another from time to time, and posted us on with great speed. We ran on thus all the Day from Morning till Sun-set, without stopping at any Place. But about that Hour we arriv’d at Sporoümé, which is thirty Miles from Sporounde. We were expected there that day, for we found a great Concourse of People on the Key, who were got together for no other Reason but to take a View of us, at our landing. Sermodas and those of our Boat went ashore first; where we were met by Psarkimbas, who came to us and treated us with great Civility. He talk’d some time with Sermodas, after which, coming up to me, he said, he “should be very glad to have an Hour or two’s Conversation with me.” I told him, that I was entirely at his Service, and immediately follow’d him into the Town, which is built like Sporounde, but not so large by one half. Its Situation is in a fertile, agreeable Country; and we were receiv’d there just in the same manner as at Sporounde. We tarried there all the next Day, without seeing any thing remarkable, but the exemplary Punishment of fourteen Criminals, which was inflicted upon them in the following manner. They were taken out of Prison, tied back with Cords, which bound them to one another, and divided into three Bands. In the first were six Men, who, as we were inform’d, had been condemn’d to ten Years Punishment, some of them for Murder, and others for Adultery. In the second Class were five Young-women; two of which were to suffer seven Years, to satisfy the Law; and as much longer afterwards, as their Husbands should think fit, they having been convicted of Infidelity to the Marriage-Bed. The three others were unmarried Women, who had been adjudg’d to undergo a three Years Punishment, for suffering themselves to be surprized before their Osparenibon, which is always celebrated as soon as they are eighteen. The three Young-men who had debauch’d these very Persons, made up the third Class; which were therefore sentenc’d to suffer the same Chastizement, and afterwards to marry them. They were brought from the Prison to the Gate of the Palace, where the Execution was perform’d in the presence of a great number of Spectators. I well remember, that among the unchaste Wives, there was one who was an exceeding handsome fine-shape’d Woman. She had a Face perfectly beautiful; her Eyes were black, her Hair chesnut, her Mouth vermillion, and her Complexion quite lovely and delicate: Her Neck, which was uncover’d, was the whitest and best-shape’d I ever saw. And as this was the first time of her being expos’d to be punish’d in publick, her Shame and Confusion were extreme. The Tears trickled down her Face

170

The History of the Sevarambians

in abundance; which, far from diminishing, even heighten’d her Beauty, and caus’d her to be the more admired. Admiration produced Love, and Pity joining these two Passions, touch’d the Hearts of all that were present to such a degree, that there was not a reasonable Person in the whole Assembly, but discover’d Grief and Concern for her. But, after all, their Pity pass’d off into a kind of generous Despair, when they considered that in few moments all her Charms were to be tarnished by the cruel Hands of an infamous Executioner!—And that this Punishment was still an Act of Justice ordain’d by the Laws, against a Crime which, among this People, is look’d upon as one of the most enormous!— Besides, it was not in the power of any to save this lovely Person from the Rigour of her Sentence. The Executioner was now just lifting up his Hand to strike her, when a Man breaking thro’ the Press, cried out with a loud Voice, Stay, stop, hold. The Spectators, and even the Officers, turned their eyes towards the Place from whence the Voice came, suspending the Execution till they should know what this Person had to say. He came up to them quite out of breath, having forc’d his way thro’ the Croud with great difficulty; and, addressing himself to the principal Officer, said, pointing to the Criminal, “That he was the Husband of that unhappy Woman, and by consequence very nearly interested in the Execution. That therefore he desired to speak to her before she suffer’d; because he then should be able to form a truer Judgment in the Case, and know better how to declare his Sentiments.” Having obtain’d the Permission he desir’d, he spoke publickly to his Wife in the following manner: “You know, O Ulisbé, with what Passion I lov’d you three Years before our Marriage. You must remember, that since we have been join’d together by that sacred Band, my Affection, far from diminishing, has daily acquir’d fresh force; and that Enjoyment, which puts an end to the Passions in most other Lovers, has only serv’d to increase mine. You cannot moreover but recollect, that during the four Years I have lived with you, I have given you all the Proofs of a most endearing and constant Love that any reasonable Woman could expect from a good Husband.—And as this has been my Behaviour to you, I am also persuaded, that you had, once, the same Sentiments for me, as you have a thousand times sworn; and that your Flame, faithless as you have been since! was then equal to mine. Nay, further I believe, that I still possess the better part of your Heart, even since you have been seduced by the Arts and Wiles of the perfidious Flannibas; and that it was by infamous Methods, that he drew you on to the Perpetration of a Crime, which you never cou’d have been capable of committing, from the mere Movement of your own Inclination. It is not above two Hours since, that I was

Part II

171

inform’d of the whole Truth, and have discover’d, that this detested Wretch was not able to prevail on you to satisfy his unlawful Desires, till, by base Practices, and unrighteous Accusations, he had wrought you up to a belief that I had really wrong’d you, and been guilty of the same Offence with his Wife, as, upon hearing the accursed Calumny, your illfounded Indignation and unjust Desire of Revenge, induc’d you to commit with him.—If I had known these things sooner, you had not come here in this ignominious manner; and by pardoning the Injury to my self, I should have so effectually conceal’d the Crime, that you wou’d never have been exposed to this most severe and shameful Punishment. But, alas! since it is not in my power to exempt you wholly from the Sentence that has been pronounced against you; and you must suffer to satisfy the Laws of our Country, which you have most grievously transgressed, I will, at least, do all that I can for you.—And if the Tears which I see now streaming from your Eyes, are certain Marks of your real Repentance; if it is true, that there is still in your Heart some Remains of that sincere Love which you have sworn to me so often, and given me such incontestable Proofs of; in a word, if you promise to give me back your whole Heart, and never to suffer any to share with me in it—which alone can restore me to my former Happiness!—I will divert the Punishment, you are going to suffer, from your Person to my own.— Speak, speak then, O Ulisbé, and let me not take your silence as an Indication of your want of Affection for me.” Here he ended; and the Woman, drown’d in a Flood of Tears, stood some time before she was able to utter a word. But at length, turning towards him, she answer’d: “My Silence, too generous Bramistas! is not an Evidence of a Defect in my Love, but rather of the Height of my Despair.—I have injur’d you, by violating the sacred Laws of Justice and Honour.—Why then should you, Oh! too too kind Man, and worthy of a faithful Wife, why, I say, should you be so solicitous to save a perfidious Wretch, who, suffering her self to be hurried on by so shocking a Vengeance, has betray’d you?—And wherefore should you undergo the Strokes which I have deserv’d?—No, no. Bramistas, whom I dare no more call my Husband, be not thus tender of a miserable Woman, whom you ought rather to look upon as an Object of your Anger than of your Pity; and who, from the bottom of her Soul, desires to suffer the most cruel Torments, and even to end her unhappy Life, in order to expiate her Guilt, and efface, if possible, the Memory of so detestable a Crime. Cease, cease then, to wound my Heart, by Testimonies of a Goodness and Generosity unequal’d; and abandon the traitorous Part to those exquisite Griefs that devour it; and to that eternal Remorse which must be the Source of perpetual Horror and Self-condemnation to her; and

172

The History of the Sevarambians

no longer interpose between me and the Law, whose utmost Rigour and Severity I have but too justly deserv’d.” This discourse drew Tears from the Eyes of all that were present. But in conclusion, the Husband having caus’d himself to be bound up in the place of his Wife, and stript himself naked to his Waist, receiv’d on his Body the Strokes which the Criminal had been sentenc’d to receive on her’s. All the rest of the Condemn’d were chastiz’d at the same time, and then led three Turns round the Palace. They were handled so cruelly, that the Blood ran down at every Lash. After the whole Process of the Execution was over, they were had back again to the Prison from whence they came. As to the Substitution of the Husband for the Wife, we were inform’d, that, upon these Occasions, the Women of the Country who have incurr’d such Punishments, are allow’d to plead an Exemption from it, if their Husbands shall offer to suffer for them; and that they have had many Instances of this sort before that time. After these Executions, we return’d to our Lodgings; where Psarkimbas and I had an Hour or two’s Discourse concerning the Affairs of Europe, as I had had before with Albicormas and others, who were all particularly inquisitive on that Subject. The next day, early in the Morning, we left Sporoümé, having taken leave of the Governor just as we were going to embark. Sermodas order’d me and the others that accompanied him from Sporounde, into the most commodious Boat, which, as before, was reserv’d for himself. We sail’d with great speed; and, at six Miles from Sporoümé, came to a Place call’d Sporoünide, consisting only of eight Osmasies. Here we found a different sort of Boats which waited for us, and were drawn by Horses; because the Current being strong in this Place, it was impossible to stem it with Oars. As we advanc’d up the Stream, we perceiv’d our selves approaching nearer and nearer to the high Mountains, which De Haës had seen from the Lake in the Plain straight forward from the old Camp. These Hills stretch’d from East to West, and now appear’d exceeding lofty, and almost upright. We had indeed discern’d them long before, but from this Place our View was much more distinct, and we seem’d to be very near them. From Sporoünide we were drawn to a very small Place, where we took fresh Horses, which carried us on to a Town named Little-Sporoümé; at which we once more changed Horses, and by these last were had to another small Place call’d Sporavité, where we were to quarter that Night. This was the End of our Stage by Water, and we met with nothing here worth noting. The next Morning, very betimes, we took Coach, in order to pursue our Journey by Land; Sermodas; Van de Nuits, and my self travel-

Part II

173

ling in the same Coach. We left the River on the West, and pointed our Course to the South, across a beautiful open Country, which rose insensibly as it advanced towards the Mountains, to the very Foot of which it extended, and by that means made them appear so high and upright. As we cross’d this Part of the Country, we perceiv’d several Towns and Osmasies, which seem’d to be well-built and delightfully situated. In this manner we arriv’d about eleven a-clock, at a Place call’d Sparagoüeste.We rested here till two in the Afternoon, when we pursu’d our Journey, and came in the Evening to a City named Sporagoündo, where we were very graciously receiv’d by Astorbas the Governor. This City lies at the foot of the Mountains, and is the last in the Country of Sporoümbe. It consists of fourteen Osmasies; but has nothing remarkable but the wonderful Canals which are made in its Neighbourhood, for watering the Country round it, which by this means, and the natural Fertility of the Soil, produces most excellent Pasture. By these Canals, and certain Walls, Bridges, and Sluices, a great Quantity of Water is carried very far out into the Plain. All these Works are so vast, and require such prodigious Labour, that the like could not be perform’d in Europe for fifty Millions of Livres. And yet this People, by their Industry alone, have not only accomplish’d these things already, but are perfectly equal to every possible Undertaking, without Money, which they not only do not use in any Part of their Dominions, but even condemn as mischievous to Individuals, and prejudicial to Society. We tarried three Days at Sporagoündo, as well to rest our selves, as to observe the Country, before we enter’d Sevarambe, which lay on the other side of the Mountains; our Guides having all along been so complaisant as not to hurry so, but that we were allow’d time at any Place, to repose and divert our selves. During our stay here, Astorbas was pleas’d to give us the Entertainments of Hunting and Fishing, as they are practis’d among them. For this purpose, he caus’d us to be carried in Coaches to a Cypress-Wood, which lies about three Miles West of the City. This Wood is, for the most part, cut out into Walks, excepting towards the Foot of the Mountain, where there are a great many sorts of Trees planted together, without any Method or Order. They are very thick and brushy, and their Fruits are the Food of a certain Animal like a Badger, but somewhat larger, whose Flesh is exceeding delicate. There are great Numbers of these Creatures in this Wood, where no body dares to hunt but the Governor, who keeps a Pack of Dogs for this purpose. The Inhabitants call this Animal an Abrousta. As soon as we were got to the Wood, we alighted from our Coaches, and went into the Walks afoot, which, as I said before, are all Cypress; but the tallest, and straightest, and most brushy I ever saw.

174

The History of the Sevarambians

Astorbas told me, that they sometimes cut them to make Masts, for which use they were incomparably better than Firr. We had, indeed, seen very fine ones at Sporounde, but they were not half so large as these, nor of so firm and compacted a sort of Wood. While we were amusing our selves with the Beauty of these Trees, and the Manner in which they were rang’d, we heard the Dogs, who had found, and were driving their Game into the middle of the Wood, where there is a large Pit fenc’d in with thick Hedges. To this Place they generally hunt the Abrousta’s, there being many Paths that lead to it; and when once they are there, they cannot get out again, but by taking down some one or other of the Paths, which would bring them into the mouths of part of the Dogs, who are distributed into all the Walks at a certain Place for that purpose. The Pit, therefore, being thus inclos’d and guarded, gives the Company an opportunity of seeing the whole Combat without any difficulty or danger, which is thought the best Branch of the Sport. Accordingly, as soon as we heard the Dogs on cry, we ran with what speed we could to this Place, where we were posted on a little Eminence that commanded all around it. We had not been there half a quarter of an Hour, when we saw two Abrousta’s enter, follow’d by about thirty Dogs, which, tho’ they hunted them, were afraid to come near; for any two or three of them would fly, whenever the Abrousta’s turn’d upon them. But the Dogs were very nimble, and their Chace so fat and heavy, that when they did so, it was but seldom they could catch them. These Dogs are admirably well made, and know their Business, and the Force of their Enemy so perfectly, that they never expose themselves more than is necessary. They still continued pursuing the Abrousta’s; driving them two or three times round the little Hill where we stood, which put them quite out of breath; when the two distressed Creatures, which were the Male and Female, (who, as we were told, never forsake one another) setting them selves Back to Back, made a good Defence, for half an Hour, against the whole Pack, which encompassing them round, never gave them a moment’s Respite. At length, one of the Abrousta’s lay down as if he had been almost spent, which emboldened some of the Dogs to go nearer to him, in order to teize and torment him yet farther; but he watch’d his time so well, that darting himself at the foremost, he caught him by the Hind-Leg, and, with a single Bite, broke it short off; after which he tore him to pieces with so much fury, that, I think, I scarce ever saw so cruel and raging a Creature. This frighted the rest of them, who not daring to come near them any more, kept themselves better upon their guard. But now, this Diversion having continued long enough, they were all call’d off; and two large Beasts very like Wolves, but better coated,

Part II

175

their Hair being black and curling, in the manner of Sheeps Wool, were brought up coupled, and let loose upon them. The Abrousta’s, as soon as they saw them, bristled with fear, and set up a dreadful Howling, knowing the terrible Enemy they were now to encounter, and expecting nothing but present Death. These two Beasts, which they call Oustabars, seem’d to be exceeding slothful, and went up very leisurely towards them; nay, for a while, even after they were near them, they stalk’d round them with an apparent Indifference; but at length they fell upon them with great fury. The Abrousta’s defended themselves as long as they cou’d, but their Enemy’s Hair was so thick, that they cou’d scarce bite thro’ it; and so, after a Fight of about a Quarter of an Hour, being quite spent with Toil and Loss of Blood, they were both strangled, which put an end to this Diversion. When the Hunting was over, Astorbas had us back to the City, where we din’d on the Abrousta’s we had taken, and found their Flesh very good and nourishing, having almost the same Taste with our Venison in Europe. The next day Astorbas came to us, and told us, that, besides the Sport of Hunting, he would also give us that of Fishing: And therefore he desir’d us to be ready in the Evening, when he would call upon us for that purpose. Accordingly he did not fail; for, about two in the Afternoon, he took us to a large Bason, enclos’d by a Wall round it, which held a prodigious Quantity of Water, that runs into it from the Mountains, and is carried off thence by several Canals to divers Parts of the Plain. This Bason is of an oval Figure, and not less than three Miles in Circumference. It stands near the East-side of the City, and is stock’d with a prodigious Quantity of Fish. When we came there we went into large flat-bottom’d Boats, which were tilted to screen us from the Sun, whose Heat is excessive near the Mountains. Round the sides of the Boats were Holes, into which they screw’d long Rods, bent like Bows; at the end of which hung Lines with Hooks fasten’d to them, baited with raw Flesh. When we were got about the middle of the Pond, we came to an anchor, and adjusted our Tackle. In a very little time, we had the pleasure of seeing Fish, almost as big as Salmon, leap two or three Feet out of Water, and gobble down the Baits on the Hooks. The Fish were so very strong, and bent the Rods so much, that they must have been broken, if they had not been made of an exceeding tough, pliant sort of Wood. They continued struggling and beating themselves under Water for some time; but, as soon as they were tir’d, the Spring of the Rod drew them out; where they remain’d hung fast to the Hook, in the open Air, and kept plunging and panting above a Quarter of an Hour before they died. Sometimes we should have two or three together dart out of the

176

The History of the Sevarambians

Water at the Bait, which, by striking against one another, were all prevented from catching it; and the oftner they were thus disappointed, the better was our Sport. These Fish had blue Scales, and some of the heaviest weighed about seven or eight Pounds. Their Flesh is very firm and delicate; altogether as good as that of the Salmon-Trouts taken in the Lake at Geneva. We took about thirty in less than two Hours, with extream pleasure. For we could not but be delightfully astonish’d to see the Inhabitants of one Element thus fish’d for, and caught by a Bait laid for them in another. I enquir’d the Name of this Fish, and was told that they call’d it a Fostila. As soon as we had done Fishing, we went out of the great Boats into lighter and less; these being fitter for another Diversion that we were now to be entertain’d with; which was, properly speaking, neither Fishing, nor Hunting, and yet partook of the Nature of both. There were at that side of the Bason which lay next to the High-Land, abundance of Reeds, Rushes, and other Water-Plants. We went towards this Place, and when we were got within a Stone’s cast of it, we put two Creatures into the Water a little bigger than Cats, and very much resembling Otters, except that their Hair was not of so bright a gray, for which reason we could not see them very plain in the Water, their Colour being not much different. They call’d these Creatures Saspêma’s, and, when they have well broke them, they make use of them to take a kind of Wild-Duck, or Coot, named by them an Ebousta, which cannot fly far, their Wings being short, and their Bodies fat and heavy. The Saspêma’s were no sooner in the Water than they swam with incredible Swiftness towards the Flag-Bed, from whence, in a Moment, they drove out ten or twelve Ebousta’s. Each of them pursu’d one, and it was exceeding pleasant to see the Turns and Doublings which the Birds made; sometimes by mounting on the wing, sometime by diving, and then by retreating, and hiding among the Rushes, to avoid their Enemy, who still follow’d them, wherever they went, and never gave them the least Interval of Respite. At length, after having in vain tried all their Wiles, they grew so weary that the Saspêma’s caught them by the Neck, and brought them alive to the Persons who let them go, whose Business it was to break and feed them. After these Ebousta’s were taken, Astorbas wou’d have given us a second Hunt, but Sermodas wou’d not suffer it, saying, ’twas enough for one Time. And so we return’d to the City, well pleas’d with our Sport. The next Day, leaving Sporagoündo, we came to the Foot of Mountains, where we enter’d into a narrow Valley, betwixt two upright Rocks, about two Miles from the City. At our Entrance into this Valley, Sermodas told us that “he was going to have us to Paradise, by the

Part II

177

way of Hell.” I ask’d him, “what he meant by that Expression?” and he answer’d me, “that there were two Roads that led to this Paradise, one of which went by Heaven, and the other by Hell; but that the last was the shortest and most commodious, as experience wou’d quickly convince us.” This Discourse put us into some pain, and coming to the Ears of the Women, threw them into a terrible Fright and Apprehension. However, we kept on without offering to desire any further Explication, because we saw Sermodas answer’d us the first time only with a Smile, and refer’d us to Experience. When we were advanced farther into the Valley, we came to a Place where the Way was cut, almost wholly out of the Rock. We were here forc’d to go up five or six Steps, after which we should have the Road level near a Stone’s Cast, when we mounted as many more; and so we kept on ascending from Stage to Stage, five several times, when we found ourselves at the Foot of a high, upright Cliff, in the Middle of which we saw a dark Vault, thro’ which Sermodas told us “we must pass, to go to the Paradise he spoke of, and that the Sledges, that carried our Baggage had enter’d it already.” He bid us, at the same time, observe, “that all the Way we had come, on the left Hand, there was a smooth Path, without any Steps at all, on which the Carriages slid along, being drawn by certain Ropes fasten’d to Wheels, which were turn’d round by Men, whose Business it was to do it.” When we arriv’d at the Entrance of the Vault, we found two Houses, one on each Side, where we were furnish’d with Flambeaux to light us thro’ the subterranean Cavern, and Riding-hoods made of Oil Case, and lined with Cotton, to cover and defend us from the cold Damps of the Place. We also observ’d there, a large Sledge provided for the Carriage of our Women, who were with child, or any other Persons who cou’d not conveniently walk: And we were told that there were several others kept in the Vault for that Purpose. These Things very much amaz’d us; however we were resolv’d to follow wherever they should lead us, and submit to our Destiny, whatever it was to be. But the Women began to cry as if they were going to immediate Death, which very much surpriz’d Sermodas, who presently enquired what was the Matter? But not one of us could tell him. This made me go back to them myself, and ask, why they were in Tears? and wherefore they had made such Exclamation? In answer to these Questions, they lifted up their Hands to Heaven, beat their Breasts, and told me, “that after having escap’d the Dangers of the Sea, and surmounted the Horror of the Desart, where, for a while we had been sufficiently threatned with a Famine, our Lot was very dreadful, to be brought to Places in which we seem’d to be possess’d of real Happiness, and from thence to be hurried into Hell before our Time!” which they

178

The History of the Sevarambians

added, “was certainly the Case, and all the Favours that had been shewn us, were only to lead us on smoothly to the Scene of our Fate.” Sermodas, who had follow’d me, having heard their Complaints, immediately turning himself to me, said, “I see clearly,” (looking on the Women with an Air, which besides Pity for their Weakness, discover’d that he could scarce forbear laughing at their Error) “I see clearly, that the Outcry of these poor Women proceeds from an Imagination which it will be easy for us to disabuse: And I am very sorry to have given Occasion for this Suspicion, which has put you into so much Pain, and me into so great a Surprize. I said, jestingly, that I would lead you to Paradise, by the way of Hell; and as I did not explain myself any further, nor answer’d the Questions you ask’d me about it, these poor Women, without doubt, fancied that I spoke in earnest, and that they were really going to be thrown into Hell, when they came to see this Cavern, thro’ which we are to pass. But to remove all Uneasiness, and banish your Fears, I will now unfold the Riddle to you, which is only this. By Hell, I meant nothing more than this dark Vault, which we have made for the Conveniency of passing and repassing thro’ the Mountain. And that if we do not take this Road, we must fetch a great Compass, and go over the Top of it, which I call’d the Way of Heaven, as I did the subterranean one that of Hell. This in a few Words, is a full and true Explication of that whole Mystery.—But, besides, if there be any Danger, I shall be expos’d to it as well as you; and for your greater Satisfaction, you shall not all go together, but I will take only a few of you with me, some of which shall come back to convince the rest of the Truth of what I now say, when they have been Eye-Witnesses of it.” This Discourse, which I repeated to our Weepers, pretty well dispell’d their Fears: And we endeavour’d to excuse them to Sermodas, begging him “to pardon the Weakness of the Sex, and not impute their Fault to us; who, having receiv’d so many Proofs of the Goodness of his Superiours, and in particular, of his own, cou’d never entertain any Doubt or Distrust of them, seeing we ow’d our Lives and all that we enjoy’d to them.” “I forgive them with all my heart,” replied he, “but I insist on what I said, and will not have above ten of you go thro’ this imaginary Hell, till the rest shall have a Description of it from some of their Companions, who, by passing it with me, shall have experienc’d all its Horrors. And therefore, without any further Dispute, immediately pitch on those whom you will depute for this Purpose.” As I saw that Sermodas was determin’d to keep his Word, I took with me Van de Nuits, Maurice, Süart and some other of my Officers to accompany him; after which, putting on our Riding-Hoods, we follow’d the Flambeaux that were to light us, and immediately enter’d the Cavern.

Part II

179

It was cut thro’ the Rock in the Form of a Vault, the Breadth of which at Bottom was about ten Yards, and the Height seven. On the left, was a Slip for the Carriages without any Steps, being a Continuation of the same that we observ’d before. On the right, we found several Stories, which we mounted by easy Steps, and were twenty-six in all. As we were passing thro’, about a Mile before we came to the Issue; Sermodas told us that the Vault was a natural one, and that Art had only contributed something towards smoothing the Way, and enlarging it in some Places where it was too narrow. And indeed we remark’d, that one Side of it was not so even as the other; that in several Places it was wider than in others. And that in some there were divers Icicles, or rather bright Stones, sparkling like Crystal, which were a kind of Salt, that dropping from the Mountain, petrified as it fell, and formed various strange Figures. This Place was very cold and moist, which made our Hoods very useful to us as we pass’d it. We observ’d also, that in those Parts where the Cavern was natural, it was not so straight as where it had been made by Hand. About two hundred Paces from its Issue, it widen’d very much, and Sermodas shew’d us there, several large earthen Pots, with some of Metal, and Glass, full of Drugs, used in Medicine, which were kept here on account of the Coolness and Moisture of the Place. From thence we pursued our Way, till we came to the Exit of the Vault, which is not less than three good Miles in length. At the same Time that we issued out of the Vault, we enter’d a fine Street belonging to the first City of Sevarambe, which is called Sevaragoündo. This Place lies in a long Valley, full of verdant Meads, just against that Part of the Mountain where the Cavern ends: So that one enters the City, the Moment one comes out of the Vault. The Governour, whose Name was Comustas, came to receive us at our Entrance into Sevarambe, congratulated us on our Arrival, and conducted us to a large House built in the Manner of those at Sporoumbe. He was a tall black Man, about forty Years of Age, and had a very handsome Person. As soon as he came to us, he enquired after the rest of our People; which Sermodas gave him an Account of: Relating to him what had happen’d at our coming to the Vault, and the Panick our Women were in by their not understanding his Jest, which, he continued, “would procure us the Satisfaction of spending the remaining Part of the Day with him.” This Adventure made him laugh; “however, said he, I am glad this Mistake has given me the Pleasure of lodging you, and you may be sure of the best Entertainment in my power.” To this he added, that “he would go immediately and give Orders for the Reception of us and our Company; but, that in the mean-time, he desir’d we wou’d refresh ourselves, and take a little Repose.” Some time after he came back, and invited us to dine with him, which we all did.

180

The History of the Sevarambians

As soon as the Repast was over, we sent Süart and Haës, to fetch our People to Severagoündo; that is to say to the Gate of Sevarambe. For Gundo, in their Language, signifies a Gate or Entrance: which is the Reason that the City lying on this side is thus call’d, as the other, beyond the Mountain, is also named Sporagoündo, that being the Gate, or Entrance into the Province of Sporoumbe. After Dinner Comustas took us to walk in a little Grove below the City, thro’ which runs a small River, or rather a Torrent, whose Course is from East to West, which pours its Waters down certain Rocks, the Noise of which makes a fine Cascade. From this Grove we discover’d several very high Hills crown’d with tall Firrs, and had also a View of the Valley, which was well planted with divers sorts of Trees that we did not know. As it was now the pleasant Season of the Year, the Trees and the Water, which came streaming down the Valley, made the Prospect most agreeable and charming. Here Comustas told us, if we had Time, he would give us the Diversion of Bear-hunting; which Creatures they call Samouga’s, and have great Numbers of them in that Country: As they have also of another white Animal distinguish’d among them by the Name of an Erglanta, which approaches very nearly in Nature to that other Species. But Sermodas thanking him, said, “that we could not stay any longer than till the Morrow, and therefore desired him, that every Thing might be then ready for our Departure.” “Indeed!” replied he;— “however, if you have not Time for the Hunting, you may yet see our Manner of Fishing before the Arrival of your People.” Sermodas let him know that “we should be glad to partake of that Diversion, and that he himself would make one of the Party.” Comustas having received this Consent, immediately issu’d his Orders, and took us about half a Mile, to the Place where the River forms the Cascade before spoken of. At this Place there are a great many Rocks that obstruct its Course, which makes it swell to such a Degree, as that it there bears Boats. We found about four or five ready for us at our coming, into one of which we went with the Governour, and saw the taking of a delicate Kind of Fish resembling our Trouts, but firmer and of a better Taste. These are caught by Cormorants, whose Necks are tyed to prevent their swallowing them. The Birds are set loose, and as soon as they have taken their Prey, they return with them to the Boat. We made use of three of them, which in less than an Hour brought us fifteen Pounds of Fish. After we had done with this Sport, we went back to the City, where we found our People, quite transported at their emerging from Hell into so delightful a Country. Comustas provided Lodgings for all of us, and we pass’d the Night well at Sevaragoündo.

Part II

181

We were getting ready to set out early in the Morning, when a Person came and informed me, that one of our Women who had been frighted at the Apprehension of the imaginary Hell had miscarried, and was like to die. I immediately acquainted Sermodas with this Accident, who told me that we must never the more stop our Journey upon that Account, but only leave some of our Folks with her at Sevaragoündo, where she would want for Nothing; and Comustas would take care to send her after us if she did well, or to bury her if she should die. As soon as these Orders were given, we took Coach, and went up the Valley by the River-Side, till we came to a Town call’d Dianesté, consisting only of four Osmasies, when we chang’d Horses, and rested from eleven till two. This Borough lies fifteen Miles from Sevaragoündo, upon the same River, and consequently, in the same Valley: tho’ indeed there is another that ends just where the Town stands; thro’ which we were also to pass. Accordingly, at two o’clock, we again took Coach, and travell’d ten or twelve Miles in this second Valley, which is very fine and fertile, and maintains prodigious Herds of Cattle. At length we came to the Foot of a Hill which terminates it, where we found a small Place called Diemeké, at which we were to lie. The Hill that ends the Valley is not very high, and shows at a Distance like a plain Curtain border’d on each side with steep, and almost inaccessible Rocks. We could not perceive any Way over it, nor indeed imagine that any body else could find one: And we were afraid to enquire of Sermodas about it, lest he should take our Curiosity for some new Suspicion. But the next Morning, he himself ask’d me, “if we should not be as much afraid of going up to Heaven, as we had been about descending in to Hell?” And bid me put the Question to our Women. But as they had been thoroughly convinc’d of their Weakness, and exhorted to follow us without any Reluctance or Apprehensions, they answer’d they would go with Sermodas wherever he pleas’d to lead them. This Reply made him smile, and say, “that since that was our Resolution he would have us to the Top of the Hill by a Way that would perhaps surprize us;” but added, that “there was no Danger in it, and we should see him go first.” He then took us thro’ a Gate, that was made in a long Wall, which reach’d from one side of the Valley to the other, and stood directly at the Foot of the Precipice. Behind this Wall, we found several large Carriages hanging by strong Cables, which were let down perpendicularly from the Top of the Hill, where we were told they were fasten’d. These Carriages would hold twenty Persons each; and were fenc’d round with Boards to a proper Height, and especially behind, where there were Seats for the Passengers, with Cords running across for them to hold by. Sermodas bid me choose whom I thought fit to go with him in his Carriage, which I

182

The History of the Sevarambians

had no sooner done, but he enter’d it, and encourag’d us by his Example to do so too. As soon as we were got in, the hinder Part of the Carriage, which hung swinging back a little, like a Chariot, was cover’d with a strong Cloth, lac’d on with Cords to the upper Edge; by which means there was scarce a possibility of our falling out. When this was done, a Pistol was discharg’d, after which we pull’d a little Rope, and immediately began to perceive our selves gently mounting upwards. When we arriv’d at about the Mid-way of the Precipice, we saw, thro’ certain Holes in the sides of our Carriage, another of the same sort going down, which, by its weight, contributed a good deal to the drawing us up; for it was fasten’d to the other end of the Rope, which run round an Axle-Tree strongly fix’d at the top of the Hill. By this means we ascended the Cliff without any difficulty, being drawn up by the weight of the descending Carriage, without any Labour of Men or Horses. When we were alighted from our Carriage, we made a little stop to see the rest of our Company come up, which they all did in the same manner, without any Accident. Mean while we found Coaches at the top of the Hill ready to take us up, which carried us with great speed across a plain Country to the other side of the Mountains, which was about twelve Miles. As we went from one side of the Hill to the other, we observ’d, that it was a fine Pasture-Land, well stock’d with Cattle, which are kept there only eight Months in the Year, being had down into the neighbouring Valleys at Winter, by reason of the Snows, which make this Place uninhabitable during that Season. We met with neither Town nor Village in all this way, but only a few Hutts, and here and there a little Cottage for the Conveniency of the Shepherds. This Country is called Ombelapso. When we came to the other side of the Mountain, we descended, by the same sort of Carriage as we came up, into a spacious round Vale, such as the Romans call’d Convallis, where we found a City consisting of ten Osmasies, the Name of which was Ombelinde, where we were very kindly received by Semudas the Governor, and lodg’d that Night, meeting with the same Treatment as we had all along. We remark’d nothing here, but that the Men were better grown, and the Women fairer and handsomer than any we had seen before. Semudas inform’d us that we should find the Army in our Road, which had been encamp’d on a Plain, at the foot of the next Mountain, for about ten Days past, and would continue there some time longer. He also told us, that some Disorder had happen’d in it, on the account of an Officer who was charged with a neglect of Duty, and suffering himself to be surpriz’d in an advantageous Post which he had the Guard of, by a Party of the Enemy who had taken it from him. He added, that this Affair made so great a noise, that it was thought he

Part II

183

would be severely punish’d, in terrorem, tho’ he had a multitude of Friends who sollicited for him, and his former Conduct had acquir’d him a very considerable Reputation. The next day, very early in the Morning, we set out from Ombelinde, on a sort of Camels, each of which carried six Persons, in certain Panniers, which had Seats in them for the Accommodation of the Travellers. These Creatures carried us very well and safely, till we came to the Brow of a high Hill, from whence, by an oblique Way, we went down into a large Valley, where was a River deep enough to have been navigable; only it had some difficult and rapid Falls in it. In this Valley, very near the foot of the Mountain, was a Town call’d Arkrops, about six Miles from Ombalinde, where we found Coaches ready to carry us to a Place thirteen Miles farther, at which we were to lie that Night. Accordingly, after we had rested our selves a little, we went into them, and pursued our Journey, by the River’s side, till we came to a Place, the Name of which was Arkropsinde; from whence we were to go the rest of our way by Water. This City stands at the end of a large Valley, on the Confluence of two Rivers, like Sporounde. On two sides of it are several high Hills, crown’d with tall Trees; and beyond one of the Rivers a delightful Plain, yielding a fine Prospect of a great many Towns, and other Buildings. The River which we saw first is less than the other, and loses it self at their Meeting, which is just where the City stands. One of them runs from East to West, the other, on the contrary, from West to East; but when they become united, their Course is to the South-West, and they form a great navigable River, called Sevaringo, which also receives three or four other Rivers, before it reaches Sevarinde. Brasindas, the Governor of Arkropsinde, a grave, venerable old Gentleman, accompanied with several of the most considerable Persons of the City, came to meet us at the Gate, and conducted us to the Osmasie where we were to lodge. We thought to have gone on the next day, but two things hinder’d us. The first was, that a great Rain, which had fallen in the Night, had so swoln the River, that it would have been an extreme Imprudence to have attempted it. The second proceeded from a Curiosity to see the Army, which was encamp’d but three Miles from Arkropsinde. Besides which, we were glad to have a view of the Place, which is very beautiful, and, near upon, as large as Sporounde. These Reasons prevail’d with Sermodas to suffer us to tarry here some days; which Brasindas, and his Officers, seem’d to be well pleas’d with. In the mean time the Weather grew fine, and Sermodas took me out to walk with him in the Governor’s Garden, which I thought very agreeable. There were several delightful Alleys and Parterres planted with

184

The History of the Sevarambians

beautiful Flowers, besides divers extraordinary Basons, and curious Fountains. Sermodas ask’d me here, “What I thought of the Country, and whether I lik’d it?” I answered him, “that I was even charm’d with it, and had never seen a finer.” “Indeed!” replied he, “I am very glad that it is to your taste—but you will find it more beautiful all the way from hence to Sevarinde: and beyond that City ’tis still more charming. We have taken,” continued he, “a great Compass in coming hither, but the other Road, tho’ it is much shorter, is not passable but by Foot or Horsemen, the Way being too narrow, between some of the Mountains, to admit of Coaches, or any such kind of Carriages: Besides, it is not so pleasant as this, nor has it the Conveniency of Rivers. That which you see to the West,” he went on, “comes from a Source very far up. It is gentle, and deep, and runs round the Island in which Sevarinde is situate. You are now but just entering into this beautiful Country.—On yonder side you will find a fertile Plain, full of Towns and other Buildings, instead of those Mountains and Rocks which you have met with ever since you came from Sevaragoündo. And when you shall see with your own Eyes, the Wonders of Sevarinde, you will, I doubt not, confess I have brought you to an earthly Paradise indeed, thro’ that Hell which your Women were so much frighted at.” Perceiving Sermodas in so good an humour, I ventur’d to ask him several Questions, concerning divers things that I had seen, but did not well understand before. The first was, “Why the Names of most of the Persons that I had known among them ended in as?” To which he answered, “that this Termination was a Mark of Dignity never given but to those who had honourable Posts. To which he added, that they had also another Mark of Dignity which was appropriated to the Viceroy only; and that this was the Beginning of the Name of Sevarias, their Lawgiver, which I might observe was exemplified in the present Viceroy, who was call’d Sevarminas.” He told me besides, “that the same Preposition was sometimes annexed to the Appellations of the most considerable Places. As all the Country on this side the Mountains is called Sevarambe, and the Capital City Sevarinde: which,” he said, “was done in honour of Sevarias, before whose time it was called Stroukarembe, and the Inhabitants Stroukarembians. When you shall have learned our Language,” continued he, “you will know the truth of what I now tell you, by reading the Histories of Sevarias and his Successors; which, I doubt not, you will find very entertaining, and full of great and heroick Examples.” I desired him, next, to tell me, “How it had been possible for them to cut thro’ the rocky Mountain of Sevaragoündo? and how much that Work might have cost?” He answered me, “that the Expence was only the Labour of their Ancestors, who worked on it ten Years with four

Part II

185

thousand Men, which relieved one another at stated times; so that the Business went on night and day, without any Intermissions but at the solemn Festivals. That the principal Motive that engag’d them in this Undertaking, was the great Usefulness of it to the Publick; seeing, by that means, a long Compass, which till then, they were forc’d to take in going to Sporounde, would be avoided. And that, moreover, Nature itself had contributed a good deal to it, by a Cavern which ran far in under the Mountain.” “This Work,” he went on, “was difficult, but nothing that can be done by Men is impossible to our Nation, where the Individuals having no Property of their own, the Publick being possest, and disposing of all things, can accomplish the greatest Enterprizes without either Gold or Silver. You will see Works much more amazing than any you have met with already, and yet, I believe, you will be a good deal less surpriz’d at them: For when you come to understand the Nature of our Government, which is not difficult, your Astonishment will cease; and you will only admire the exalted Virtue, and the unparallel’d Success of the great Sevarias, the Author of it; who, under God, is the sole Source and Cause of all our Felicity.” Besides these Informations, he also instructed me in several Particularities relating to the Laws, Customs, and Manners of the Sevarambians, which I shall take notice of in the Course of this History. I thank’d him for his Goodness in telling me these things, and desir’d him to satisfy me as to one more, which, I own’d, had surprized me, and I cou’d not yet quite account for. And this was to acquaint me, “when he learned to speak Dutch, and how it came about that their Customs were so little different from ours in Europe?” “You ask’d me the same Question at Sporounde,” replied Sermodas; “but as I did not then know you so well, and, besides, had some reason to conceal, at that time, what you enquired about, I would not then open an Affair to you, which I am now very free to inform you of.” “You must know then, that I have travell’d in your Continent; and after staying some Years in Persia, went thence to India, in the Habit, and under the Name of a Persian. There I saw the Court of the Great Mogul, from whence I went into Batavia, and some other Dutch Colonies, where I staid long enough to learn their Language; and for the Persian, I could speak it before I left Sevarinde, where it is publickly taught. I had with me two Companions, who are still living, and will, I am sure, be glad to have some Conversation with you and your People, and I doubt not, be ready to do you all the good Offices in their power, when you get to the Metropolis, where they dwell, as I also do. For I am not an Inhabitant of Sporounde, as you may have believ’d, but going very often, and happening to be there, when Carchida and Benoscar brought in Maurice and his Men,

186

The History of the Sevarambians

Albicormas pitch’d on me to go to your Camp, and afterwards order’d that I should conduct you to Sevarinde.” “And as to the Resemblance of Customs and Manners, which you have observ’d between your People, of the other Continent, and ours; and the foreign Languages that are spoken among us, you will not at all wonder at it, when I tell you that Sevarias our Lawgiver, who was a great Persian Lord by Birth and Original, had travell’d over most Parts of Asia and Europe. That, in his younger Years, he had learn’d Latin and Greek, and almost all the Sciences, under a Venetian Tutor, whose Name was Giovanni, which came with him into this Country, and left Children behind him, who are much multiplied since his time. That this Giovanni was the inseparable Companion of Sevarias in all his Travels, and his faithful Counsellor in all his Enterprizes; and particularly in the Establishment of such Laws and Customs as they thought best and fittest for the Inhabitants of these Countries. For which purpose, out of Books ancient and modern, and from the Observations they had made in their Travels, together with the great natural Light they were posses’d of, they founded a Body of Laws for the Regulation of Life, which they, by express Decrees, confirm’d among us. But because the wisest and most discerning Man cannot penetrate far into Futurity, and no one alone is capable of providing for all things which may possibly happen, the great Savarias acknowledging this truth, has, by an explicit Law, not only authorized, but even exhorted his Successors to make such additional Decrees and Ordinances as they shall judge necessary or conducive to the Good and Glory of the Nation. Among other things, he forbids us to have any Commerce with the People of your Continent, for fear we should, in time, by that means, become corrupted, and learn your Vices. Nevertheless, as among the most vicious Men, one often finds great Virtue, with respect to Policy, Sciences, and Arts, Sevarias thought it would not be for our advantage, while we were endeavouring to keep clear of their Vices, to despise their Virtues, and neglect the good Examples, and useful Inventions which were to be learn’d among the Chinese, and in your Parts of the World; and therefore has ordain’d, that the Persian Language should be publickly taught in Sevarinde; and that Persons who can speak it well, should be sent from time to time into Persia, who from thence might travel into other Countries, to observe whatever is considerable in them, that so out of such Remarks every thing may be extracted that is good and proper for the use of our Nation. This Method has therefore been practised ever since; and thus, by the means of those whom we send into Europe, under the Names, and in the Habits of Persians, we learn all that passes in the most illustrious Nations of your Continent; we understand their Languages; and bring home all

Part II

187

such Improvements in Sciences, Arts, and Manners, as we judge may contribute to the Happiness of our State.” “And thus I have given you, in a few words, an Account which, I believe, will be satisfactory, and put an entire stop to your Astonishment.” After this Conversation, Sermodas told me, “that he would take us to see the Army the next day; which,” he said, “was a thing well worth our curiosity.” Accordingly, on the morrow, Brasindas sent us word to get ready to go with him to the Camp. He came himself soon after, and had us to breakfast with him; where he desired me “to send for such of my Officers as I wou’d choose to take with me, and let him know how many, that he might order Horses and Bandelies enough for them.” He added, “that I needed not to circumscribe my self as to the Number, with respect to the Beasts of Carriage, for he had a hundred that were ready and cou’d have three times as many in an hour’s time, if he wanted them.” He spoke this with an Air somewhat haughty; which shew’d, besides the Abundance of the Country, the Authority he had over all things in it. And indeed, no Monarch can be more absolute than are all the Governors of Cities in this Nation; where all the Goods and Interests of the Publick are committed to their Management, and their Orders punctually observed, provided they are agreeable to the Laws of their Country. As soon as Brasindas had done speaking, I sent Maurice to let the other Officers know that they should make haste and come to me; which they did, and were had into another Room to breakfast. We went down afterwards into the Court, where we found a Coach with six large black Horses, several Saddle-Horses, and as many Bandelies. The Bandely is a Creature bigger and stronger than a Stag, from which his Body is not very different, and has a Head like a Goat, with little white transparent Horns, which have a great Tuft of short, black, curling Hair growing between them; he has no Mane, and but a short bushy Tail; he carries a Coat as fine and sleek as a Race-Horse, and his Skin appears as spotted as a Doe’s. They are of various Colours, and live on Herbs, Hay, Leaves of Trees, Corn and divers sorts of Roots. They have Feet like a Mule, and are shoe’d as we shoe Horses, which yield to them much in Speed and Swiftness. They are rode with a common Saddle, and a kind of light Bridle, without a Bit, which, instead of one, has the Part of the Head-stall that comes over his Nose, lined with jagg’d Iron; which, hurting them when the Reins are pull’d, stops them immediately; for they are very gentle and tractable Creatures. Brasindas took Sermodas, Van de Nuits, and my self with him in the Coach, and his Attendants and mine mounted the Horses and Bandelies that had been provided for them. In this manner we went together

188

The History of the Sevarambians

towards the Camp, following the course of the River and Mountains, which declin’d very gradually towards the Plain. The Army was encamp’d by a little Stream, which, coming from the Mountains, ran all round it, and then emptied it self into the River. They were drawing up just when we arriv’d, and in less than an Hour the whole Army, so great was their Promptitude, were under Arms. They were all rang’d in one Line, and their Number was about twelve thousand Persons: I do not say Men, because a third Part of them were Women; not Followers of the Camp only, but Female Warriours who bore Arms, and did their Exercise with as much Readiness, and as good a Grace as any of the Men: nay, and even more exactly. Two Thirds of the Army were Foot, and the rest Cavalry, the greatest Part of which was made up of Women. The whole Troops were divided into three sorts of People, who were in so many different Bands, and had their Camp separated from one another, by a Palisadoe which ran between them. The married Men and their Wives had the middle Camp, the Maids were posted on the Right, and the unmarried Men had their Quarter on the Left: Which Order they also kept when they were drawn up, and under Arms. I have already taken notice that by the Laws of the Sevarambians, all Young-Women were oblig’d to offer themselves for Marriage as soon as they were eighteen, and the Young-Men at twenty-one: By which the Reader will be naturally led to imagine, that the Wings of this Army were composed of Persons in the high Bloom of their Youth and Beauty. And, indeed, I do not think it possible to find a more charming Sight than this Set of lovely young People; who, besides the Beauty which is common to their Nation, manag’d their Arms with an extraordinary Address and Grace, having been train’d up to them ever since they were seven Years old. The Female Horse were all mounted on Bandelies, and armed with Swords and Pistols only. They wore a Casque shaded with a Plume of white Feathers and crested with a white Heron, which gave them a martial Air, and added new Lustre to their Beauty. They had light Cuirasses made of tinn’d Iron, or Brass, and from the Girdle almost to the Knee, hung a short Robe open before and behind, which conceal’d their Drawers, and yet discover’d their Legs in Boots but just the Length of them. Those that serv’d on Foot, used the Pike or the Bow; and were stronger, more hardy, and generally older than the Horse. The Piqueers were cloath’d like the Cavalry, excepting only that they had not Boots, and as the others were arm’d with two pistols, these had but one, which hung to their Belt a little above their Swords. The Archers had no Casque nor Cuirass, but wore green Caps, as were also all the rest of their Habits, which were made of a sort of Simar. They bound them with Girdles, and then turn’d them back; by which mean they discover’d their

Part II

189

Drawers, Stockings, and Shoes; all of the same Colour. Their Arms were a Bow and Quiver, a Sword by their Side, and a Pistol hanging at their Belt. There were two Regiments of these Foot-Women, and the same Number of Horse. The Male-Cavalry were all mounted on large Horses, wore Casques and Cuirasses, and were armed with Fuzees, Pistols, and broad Swords like ours in Europe. Their Boots also were perfectly the same, without any Difference. They had, indeed, among them one Squadron arm’d with Launces and Shields, whose Business was to break the Enemy’s Ranks; which, covering them selves with their Bucklers, they forc’d by the Impetuosity of their Course: These rode the stoutest Horses of all, and each carried a Footman behind him, who had no other Weapons but a Sword and Pistol, and could vault into his Seat, or dismount with great Facility. Their Infantry consisted of Piqueers, Halberdeers and Musqueteers; besides which, they had also some Archers among them, accoutred exactly as the Women of the same Band. The married People were also divided into Horse and Foot, and arm’d as the others; the only Distinction between them, being their Age, and the Colour of their Habits. The Male-Cavalry were all mounted on Horses, and the Female on Bandelies, and every Man’s Wife was stationed by his Side; which Order was also observ’d among the Foot. Each Regiment had distinct Standards and Colours, like ours. And Drums, Trumpets, Timbals, Cornets, Fifes, and Hautboys made up a martial Concert, capable of kindling Courage in the most cold and pusilanimous. As soon as the Army was drawn up in Batalia, Salbrontas, the General, with several of his Officers, advanc’d and paid their Compliments, first of all to Brasindas; after which, they did the same to Sermodas, with whom they discours’d a little while, and then came on towards us. The General saluted our Company by a gentle Inclination of his Body, and continu’d walking up to me, as if he had a mind to talk with me. Being now pretty near, Sermodas made a Sign to me to approach them. I therefore did so, and saluted the General by bowing to the Pummel of my Saddle: for we had quitted the Coach, and were all mounted on horseback. He immediately said to me in Spanish, “that he understood I was chief of the Strangers which had been ship-wreck’d on the Coast of Sporoumbe; that he had heard much Talk of us, and of me in particular; and that being informed that I had been a Soldier, as well upon that account, as for the good Character which Sermodas gave of me, he already conceiv’d a great Esteem for me, and should therefore be very glad if I would take a View of the Order of their Army, and tell him my

190

The History of the Sevarambians

Sentiments of it.” For which purpose placing me on the Left-Hand, and Brasindas and Sermodas on the Right, he desir’d us to walk with him along the Lines, where I saw what I have related. He told me, moreover, “that he had travell’d seven or eight Years in our Continent, and seen several Armies in Europe and Asia, and that they borrow’d the greatest Part of their Discipline from those Countries.” All the Troops saluted their General as he went along the Line, and when we came to the main Body, a Battalion open’d to the Right and Left, to give way to ten Pieces of Artillery, which were discharg’d in compliment to him: The same Respect was also paid him by all the Musqueteers of the Army. As soon as this Ceremony was over, the whole Troops divided themselves into two Bodies, which drew up in Battalia, opposite to each other like Enemies, and entertain’d us with a mock Fight, which was manag’d with much Ardour, Skill, and Exactness. The Fire-Arms were charg’d only with Powder; the Pikes, Halberds, and Launces only clashed a little against each other, and the Archers and Archeresses mounted their Arrows in the Air. I enquir’d of Salbrontas, “why they made use of Bows and Launces, which, in Europe, had long been laid aside as of small Service?” “You have”, replied he, “laid them aside more upon Caprice than for any good Reason. For if you had consider’d the Advantage of them, you would have retain’d them, if not wholly, at least in part as we do here. We make use of the Arrows to put the Enemy’s Cavalry into disorder at the beginning of a Battle, and the Launces to force and break thro’ them, when the Arrows have put them into such confusion. In the Time that a Musquet is twice fir’d, ten Arrows are discharg’d, which, as they do not kill the Horses outright, irritate and gall them to such a Degree, that it is impossible afterwards to keep them in their Ranks: A very few wounded Horses are enough to disorder a whole Squadron, and then our Launces do Wonders, quickly breaking thro’ those, who, before, were but in a little Confusion.” He said several other Things to me upon this head, which made me admire the strength of his Reasoning. As soon as the Exercise was over, three young Men were brought up under guard, who had been surpriz’d at the Maids Camp in the Night, on a Visit to their Mistresses; but had made a shift to get out of the Bounds before they were taken. They could not by any means whatever, be prevail’d on to name the Girls they had been to see; choosing rather to suffer alone the Punishment which their Discipline prescrib’d for Offences of this Nature, than, by accusing their Mistresses, to expose them to the same; which they must have undergone, if they could have been discover’d. They were all three disarm’d, and stript naked to the Waist; in which Condition they were to run the gantlet, thro’ a Lane of

Part II

191

all the young Women in the Army, who had been drawn up, both Horse and Foot, in two Lines for that purpose. Each of the Women had a long Switch in her Hand, which she gave every Criminal a Stroke with as he pass’d by her; but they were not allowed to give more than one, and that was enough to have flead the poor Lovers sufficiently, if they had all laid it home. But the greatest part of them tapped so gently, that it was plain enough to be perceiv’d, they were not so angry, as at the Beginning they appear’d. The Officers, who had been accused with a Neglect of Duty, were not then punish’d, because the Charge was not fully prov’d against them, and besides, they had appeal’d to Sevarminas. After the Executions were over, Salbrontas had us into the Camp, where he shew’d us, first, his own Tent, which was very fine and large, and then all the rest. We then took part of a handsome Entertainment, in a Pavilion near his Tent, where we staid till Evening, charm’d with the good Order observ’d there, and above all with the Gracefulness and Beauty of the Male and Female Sevarindians, which made up almost the whole of the Army. When it began to draw towards Night, we took our leaves of Salbrontas, who told me, “that he should have an Opportunity of spending more time with me at Sevarinde, which he certainly would.” Here we parted from him, and return’d immediately to the City, which we reach’d time enough to see some of the publick Rejoicings: For that Day being the Full of the Moon, was a solemn Feast, which is observ’d thro’ all the Empire of the Sevarambians, as is also the New. These times they spend in Festivities; some diverting themselves with dancing, wrestling, running, fencing, and the Exercise of Arms; while others engage in Works of Wit, and choose to display their Eloquence and Knowledge in the liberal Arts. For which purposes there is an Amphitheatre at Arkropsinde like that of Sporounde, tho’ not so large; as neither is the City, which has no more than forty-eight Osmasies in it: But then it is inhabited by a Set of People, much handsomer than those of the other Place. In the mean while, the Waters were very much run off, and the River continued no longer overflow’d as before; which made us resolve to pursue our Journey the next Day. Brasindas being inform’d of our Design, caus’d as many Boats to be got ready, as were necessary to carry us to Sevarinde. We set out early in the Morning, and went down the River, across a beautiful level Country, where we saw a great Number of Cities, Towns, and other Buildings, with abundance of Meadows, Fields, Woods, and Streams, which I cannot stay now to give a Description of. Let it suffice, that I had never seen so well cultivated, so fertile, and so delightful a Country before. In the Evening we came to a little Place, call’d Mauinde, consisting of only eight Osmasies, where we lay that

192

The History of the Sevarambians

Night. Next Morning, taking Boat again, we continued our Voyage, passing by several fine Towns, for the more commodious viewing of which we frequently stood upon the Deck, whence, one of our People, being too intensely engag’d in looking about him, unhappily fell into the River, and was drown’d before we could give him any Assistance. About four in the Afternoon, we came to an Island, which, standing in the middle of the River, divided it into two Streams, that run along on each side of it. This Island is fenc’d in with high, thick Walls, and can’t be much less than thirty Miles round. Its Figure is pretty near oval; and the length of it, is from the Point that separates the River, to that where the two Branches join again. We held our Course to the East of the Island, and about six in the Evening, arriv’d at the great City, where we found a prodigious Multitude of People got together in order to see us land. We went ashore at a very fine Key, from whence we were conducted across some Streets still finer, till we came to an Osmasie which had been set apart for us; where we were visited by several Officers from Sevarminas, who treated us with great Civility, and told us, “that, in a few days we should be introduced to him.” While we were expecting the time when we should appear before him, which was the ninth Day after our arrival, Sermodas kept very much with us at our Osmasie. This was a new Building, inhabited only by a few Slaves, who had been put in but just before our coming, meerly to assist and serve us. We were here exceedingly well used, and our Directors took care to instruct us how we were to behave to every body, but, especially, when we should be presented to Sevarminas. Sermodas, who was a very courteous Person, and had also conceiv’d a real Friendship for us, endeavoured to divert us as much as possible; sometimes with entertaining Discourses, sometimes by walking us out, and shewing us the Curiosities of the City, and always by kind and good Usage. He gave us a sight of his Wives and Children, which were all grown up and married. There were thirteen of them, which he had had by three Wives, one of which was dead, and the other two yet living. As to Carchida and Benoscar, we had been inform’d that they liv’d at the Isles in the Lake, and were to go back again as soon as we should have had Audience of Sevarminas. The House where we resided was situate at one end of the City, up the Stream, from whence had a Prospect of the Fields, full of fine spreading Trees, regularly planted, which form’d divers shady, and very agreeable Walks; where we often took a Turn with Sermodas, and several considerable Persons of the City, who came to see us out of Curiosity. Thus we spent our Time till the eighth Day, when Sermodas gave us Notice, that, “we were on the Morrow to appear before the Vice-Roy, and all his Court.”

Part II

193

The Morning being come, we were called up early, and had to the Baths in our own Osmasie, where we had Orders to wash our selves. After which we had fine white Linnen given us, and new Cloaths, flower’d with divers Colours. Mine, indeed, was much richer than the rest, being a silver Tissue, and a sort of Silk like our Brocades. We had, each of us, a green Bough put into our Hands, and being martial’d two and two, as at Sporounde, we were conducted thro’ several long Streets directly to the Palace of the Sun. It was a festival Day with the Citizens, and, by that means, all the Ways and Balconies were lined with People, to take a View of us as we past by them. After having march’d in this manner for near an Hour, we came to a spacious Square, in the midst of which stood this most magnificent Palace, built all with white Marble, and adorn’d with divers Pieces of Architecture and Sculpture. This Building, like all their others, is a Quadrangle, not less than five hundred Geometrick Paces in the Front, and two Miles round.—A prodigious Bigness for one House! It has twelve Doors in each side of it, which being exactly opposite to each other, one sees quite through the Palace at so many different Places. Besides these twelve Doors, there is a large Gate, in the middle, of an excessive Grandeur, thro’ which we were to enter. Sermodas bid us halt when we came to have a full Prospect of this superb Palace, in order to give us time to remark its Beauties. All the Orders of Architecture are admirably well observ’d in it, and the main Body of the Building is so rich and majestick, that I never saw any thing of the kind, in the least, comparable to it. An exact Description of such an Edifice would take up whole Volumes, and require Persons well skill’d in Architecture to acquit themselves worthily of it. Fearing therefore not to succeed, and that I should only tire the Reader with an unartful Account, I shall content my self with saying, “that of all the Descriptions I had ever seen or heard, I never met with one, capable of giving me an Idea of a Structure so grand and beautiful as that which we now really beheld at Sevarinde.” When we had sufficiently consider’d this stupendous Palace, we were led up to the great Gate, thro’ a Lane of armed Men cloath’d in blue, like those at Sporounde. We stopt some time before this grand Portal, which has two hundred and forty four Columns of Brass and Marble, on each side, and several Orders of Pillars above them, with divers Figures, and Statues set between them. Thro’ this Gate we enter’d into a spacious Court, surrounded with Porticoes, which were supported by Pillars very high, and cut in different Manners; and the Body of the Buildings, next the Court, was white as on the outside. From this Court we went into another, all of black Marble, decorated with various

194

The History of the Sevarambians

Figures, and fine Foliages, of several Colours, chassed into the Body of the Work; which, as I said before, was of black Marble, well polish’d, and very shining. In this Court we found several Men under Arms, cloath’d in red, and rang’d in a Lane like the former. From the black Court we were had into one of a diverse-colour’d Marble, embellish’d with several Orders of brass Pillars and Statues, admirably well made, and prodigiously grand. Out of this Place we went up a large Stair-Case, gilt and painted; whence we cross’d thro’ a spacious fine Hall, into another still more fine, which brought us into a long Gallery, adorn’d on each side with Statues of Men and Women, that spoke a most masterly hand. From this Gallery after passing thro’ a Hall, we enter’d into another, the Floor of which was cover’d with a rich Tapestry. Here we stop’d some time, till we were had out of this into another, much larger, and more magnificent than any we had seen before. There had been Perfumes burnt in it, and divers musical Instruments were playing in Concert. We stood here a little while, admiring the Beauty of the Place, when a Curtain was drawn up at the upper end of the Hall, which was a kind of Semi-Circle, almost like the Choirs of our Churches, where we had the first Sight of Sevarminas, sitting on a high Throne of Ivory, in a Habit of Gold Tissue. He had a kind of Glory round his Head, or rather a Crown divided into Rays, sparkling with Diamonds and other precious Stones. On each side of him were seated two Ranks of Senators, drest in Purple, with a Gold-Scarf hanging on their Shoulders. There were twelve on each hand of the Throne; below was another Rank of thirty six Personages, habited in the same manner, excepting that their Scarfs were only Silver. We stood at a good distance beholding, with great Astonishment, this illustrious Assembly, till two Persons who were in the Pit, just without the Rail which fenc’d off the Choir, came and told Sermodas, that, “he should bring us forward.” We then advanc’d three Paces, and made a profound Reverence; after which we went on three more, and bow’d down to the Ground; then we were had quite up to the Rail, where we prostrated our selves, and kiss’d the Floor three times. My Men were rang’d behind, and Van de Nuits and Maurice were plac’d on each side of me. In a little time we were commanded to arise and stand up on our Feet; which, when we had done, Sermodas went close up to the Rail, and related to Sevarminas all that had happen’d to us. Then bidding me come up to him, he took me by the hand, and presented me as the Commander of the Foreigners now before him. Sevarminas bow’d his Head a little, and said to me, “that I and my People were welcome in the Dominions of the Sun, and that he was well satisfy’d with our Behaviour hitherto, and hoped we should go on improving our selves more and more, and be

Part II

195

always perfectly conformable to the Laws of the Country.” Adding, that, “if we did so, we might depend on his Esteem and Protection, and be assur’d of the favourable Regards of their glorious King, from whose comprehensive View nothing can be conceal’d. In the mean time,” continu’d he, “I advise you to regulate your selves always by the Direction of Sermodas, whom, by a new Commission, I have appointed to take care of your Affairs.” When he had thus spoken, he dismiss’d us; continuing upon the Throne with his Assessors, till we were out of Hall, from whence we were conducted thro’ other Chambers, and different Galleries, to the Gate opposite to that we enter’d at; whence we return’d thro’ new Streets, in the same Order that we came, to our own Osmasie. We remain’d ten Days after this Audience in the same State, without any other Business but that of walking about and diverting our selves with the City, and the Rarities belonging to it. But at length, Sermodas taking me, Van de Nuits, D’Eveze, and Maurice aside, told us, that, “after, having been so long reposed, it was time for us and our People to think of some Employment, to preserve us from the ill Habits which we might contract by Idleness. And if we would follow his Counsel, we should examine our People in order to find out what each Person was most capable of, that so he might be employ’d in the Business which was best adapted to him.” That, “what he said did not by any means proceed from an Envy to see us live without doing any thing; nor from a Prospect of Gain from our Labour, because it would be of some advantage to the Nation which supported us; but only for our own Good and Benefit, and from an Apprehension lest our Idleness should prove a bad Example to the Sevarambians; to whom it was strictly forbidden, by the Fundamental Laws of their Country.” We answer’d him immediately, that “we desired nothing more than to have every one of us his proper Employment, and to do as other People did: And at the same time only pray’d him to excuse our Ignorance, till we should be better instructed in the Customs and Ordinances of the Country.” That, “in the mean time he might dispose of us as he pleased, and we would punctually obey him in all things.” “ ’Tis very well,” return’d he; “we shall employ you without fatiguing you much, or even separating you from one another; and you, your Wives and Children may dwell together, under the same Government which you have at present.” Then, turning himself to me, he said, that, “I had order’d my People so well hitherto, that it wou’d be a kind of Injustice to take my Authority from me; and that, therefore, Sevarminas had appointed me Osmasionta, that is to say Governor of the Osmasie, where we were quarter’d, and that I might choose among my Officers whomsoever I would to be my Assistants in this new Government.” He added,

196

The History of the Sevarambians

that “he wou’d instruct us in their Customs and Laws, and we should find that they had Charity enough to excuse any Faults we might happen to commit thro’ Ignorance. But, that we might the better like the Country, and be able to converse with every body in it, he advised us to study the Language, which,” he said, “we should not meet with any great Difficulty in doing, because it was very methodical and regular.” That “for this Purpose he would send us Masters, who should come every day at set Hours, and give us a Lesson, and, that we might have the more Leisure to apply our selves this way, he would not order us to work but six Hours a day for the first Year, tho’ the native inhabitants were always enjoin’d eight.” He said to us further, that “they had in a Year many Festivals and other Diversions ordain’d for the Publick, by means of which our Labour would not seem burthensome to us, being mix’d with so much Recreation, and such agreeable Entertainments, as must at once relax both the Mind and the Body.” As soon as he was gone from us, we began to examine our People; and found that we had some who were capable of following handicraft Trades, which they had been bred up to in Europe. The rest were all Seamen, but strong and able to carry Burthens, or fit to be employ’d in Agriculture. When we had made this Inspection, we acquainted Sermodas with it, who told us, that, “they should soon Lay the Foundation of a new Osmasie near ours, which wou’d find Business enough for all our People.” That, “in the mean time we should do well to divide them into Companies by twelves, and set a Dozener over each Company; that is to say, an Officer, who was to have an Authority over them, and be a Director to them in their Labour.” That, “we should also take care to regulate our Affairs without doors, but need not give our selves any Trouble about Food, Cloaths, Tools, and Instruments to work with; because we should be furnish’d with all such Things as fast as we should have occasion for them. And, to the end, that we might be able to do every thing according to the establish’d Orders of the Country; that he would give us a Model of the Government which was observ’d in the other Osmasies.” In some little time he did so, and agreeably to this Model, I made Van de Nuits and D’Eveze my Lieutenants, or Duosmasionta’s, and divided my Men into Dozens, establishing over each a Dozener. As to the Kitchin, and other Officers of the House, we did not give our selves any Trouble about them, because, as we did not know the Language nor Customs, it would have been impossible for us to have acquitted our selves well in them. For which reason Sermodas committed all these Things to the Care of a Sevarambian, whose Name was Farista, who had the entire Management of our House-keeping, and presided over our Slaves.

Part II

197

Soon after we had thus regulated our Affairs, an Osmasie was begun building, as Sermodas had told us before, and I had our People thither for the first time. We were well receiv’d by the chief Architect, whose Name was Posterbas, to whom Sermodas had recommended us. He employ’d our Men about divers Things; as carrying Burthens, rolling Stones, and other Works of that nature, which they went and labour’d at every day at stated hours. Indeed, for my own part, I attended only when I thought fit, but then I sent always one of my Lieutenants, who continu’d with them all the working Hours, to oversee them and give them Orders: And I my self, usually, went once in five Days, because I would set a good Example. Mean while I applied my self to the study of the Language, and finding it very easy, as Sermodas had told me, I was master of all the Rudiments of it in three or four Months, and cou’d express my self tolerably well in about a Year. Several others of our People, besides me, also learned it; but the most part did not make any great Progress in it, tho’ all of them acquir’d as much as they wanted in the necessary Affairs of Life. We all of us had Wives, and most of us Children by them; and, for my own part, by my Office I was entitled to the Privilege of having three, as my Lieutenants also were each of them to two. Having now concquer’d the first Difficulties in the Language, I improv’d so fast in it, that, by that time I had been there three Years, I spoke it almost as well as my Mother Tongue. This was of infinite advantage to me, as it introduc’d me into the Company of the best of the Sevarambians, and gave me Opportunities of observing their Manners and Customs. Besides, as they have printed Books among them (tho’ not so great a number as we, seeing they suffer none but approv’d ones to be publish’d) I read several of them which treated of their Philosophy, their Mathematicks, Rhetorick, History, and divers other Subjects; but I applied my self, principally, to the History of this People, and particularly to that of Sevarias the first Vice-Roy and Lawgiver of the Stroukarambians: for so they were called before his coming. Moreover, by this means I was qualified to study their Laws, Religion, and Customs, which I shall give some Account of in the Sequel of this History: Beginning with that of Sevarias, before whose Time these People were stupid and barbarous, as are still their near Neighbours, and, I believe, all the Inhabitants of that Continent. There have been many Things written among them, concerning this great Man; but when I come to treat expresly of him, I shall speak of those only which relate immediately to his Establishment; or that serve to show the way by which he attain’d to such a Degree of Wisdom, and Virtue, before his Arrival in that Country. Without doubt, the Misfortunes of his Family, his own Sufferings and Travels, did not a little contribute to it; for one rarely

198

The History of the Sevarambians

meets with any remarkable Light and Knowledge, amongst Persons who have always liv’d at their ease, and never experienc’d the Rigours and Inconstancy of Fortune, or the Malignity of Mankind. Sevarias had great natural Endowments, and his Education was excellent, nay altogether extraordinary in the way of his own Country; but, besides this Advantage, his Sufferings and Travels must (as I said just now) have furnish’d his Mind with a vast Stock of Experience. So that there is no room to wonder that a Man thus prepar’d and qualify’d, should have arriv’d at so high a Pitch of Wisdom, and given such shining Proofs of it, on that great Theatre to which Fortune at last advanc’d him. As to the City of Sevarinde, which bears his Name, I will venture to say, that, it is the finest in the World; whether we regard it with respect to its Situation, and the fertile Soil that surrounds it, or consider the Delightfulness of the Climate, the Healthfulness of the Air, the Order and Magnificence of its Building, the Beauty of its Inhabitants, and the good Policy which is observ’d in it. It stands in an Island, which is near thirty Miles in Circumference, lying in a great River, into which many others discharge themselves. This Island is fenc’d round with a thick Wall, which fortifies it so on every side, that it is almost impossible to make a Descent upon it, with the strongest Army in the World, without the Permission of the Inhabitants. The Soil of it also is extremely fertile, and produces a prodigious Quantity of excellent Fruits, as likewise doth the Country, on both sides the River, for more than twenty Leagues round. The Air too is exceedingly wholesome, and the Climate perfectly temperate; being in about forty two Degrees of South Latitude. The City is built in the midst of the Island; its Figure is square, and it contains, besides the Palace, before describ’d in part, which is just in the middle of it, two hundred and sixty seven Osmasies, all of them well peopled; tho’ each takes commodiously above a thousand Inhabitants. Every Osmasie is fifty Geometrick Paces in the Fronts, which are four; and has a large Gate in each Front opposite to one another, with a spacious green Court or Quadrangle in the inside, after the manner of our Colleges. The Walls are a kind of Marble, or white Stone, which polishes very well, and every Building is four Stories high. In all the Streets, which are very straight and wide, are Ranges of Iron-Pillars from one end to the other, which support large Balconies, that shelter those who pass under them both from Rain and Sun. All these Balconies are garnish’d with handsome Jars fill’d with Earth, where grow divers sorts of Flowers and Shrubs, which make as it were so many little Gardens just against the Windows. At the back Fronts of the Osmasies, all round the Courts, are like the Balconies and Gardens, and in the midst of the Grass-Plot is a Fountain, the Jet d’Eau of which is the

Part II

199

Centre both of that and the whole Building. The Water which supplies these Fountains comes from the top of the House, whither it is brought from certain high Springs for the Conveniency of extinguishing Fire in case of necessity. From the top of the House, it distributes it self into the Cisterns and Baths of all the several Offices and Apartments; and thence it is convey’d to the Fountains in the Quadrangle by various Pipes, plac’d in different parts for that purpose. With this Water they also wash their Streets as often as they please, and can even raise it to the height of three Feet if they have a mind to it. Which is a thing seldom to be seen in so high a Land as this is, and which has nothing marshy about it. They can walk on the tops of their Houses, and even go all round the Osmasies as well as make the Water do so. In the great Heats of Summer, Cloths are strain’d over the Streets as high as the Roofs of the Osmasies, which make them fresh and shady; and defend those that pass along so effectually from the Rays of the Sun, that one is hardly at all incommoded by them. The same thing is also done in the Courts, for which purpose they fix Pulleys to the Walls, thro’ which run Cords, with Tents fasten’d to them, which are rais’d to a considerable height, to keep the Sun-Beams from striking against the Walls, and thereby scorching them with their Reflexions. All these convenient Precautions make Sevarinde no incommodious Dwelling, even in the Summer, tho’ the Country is of it self very hot. However, this at least I must say, that I never spent that Season in any Part of Europe, where it was less troublesome than at this City, in which one, every where, sees Water, Shade, Flowers, and Verdure. The principal Ornaments of this City, are the Palace and Temple of the Sun, the Amphitheatre and the Bason, which last is indeed at the end of the Isle; but as the Island it self is wall’d in, the whole might easily be taken for one City. Sevarinde is situate in the middle of this Island, and this Island lies near the Centre of the Dominions which belong to the Nation; for they have a Maxim among them, not to extend them but by little and little, and that chiefly round the Capital City, in proportion as their People increases. ’Tis true, they reckon from the Sea to the farthermost Osmasie, down the River, below Sevarinde, near one hundred and fifty Leagues; the greatest Part of which Country is inhabited by Sevarambians, lying, as it were, in a straight Line; but then, if we go across it, about twenty Leagues from each side of the Island, one finds nothing but vast Forests, the Habitations of only Lions, Tygers, Erglantes, Stags, Bandelies, and other wild Beasts. These Forests belong to the Sevarambians for near fifty Leagues on each side of the Capital, and still farther down the River which goes to the Sea. For it is forty Leagues to Sevaragoündo, which lies, as we observ’d, on a high Mountain, and is the first City of Sevarambe, in

200

The History of the Sevarambians

the Road from Sporounde. All the Country beyond the Mountains to the Seashore, where formerly dwelt the Prestarambians, is not inhabited but to the Islands in the Lake, at which Maurice and his Companions were taken; nor, indeed, is any more, even of that, than just the way from Sporounde to Sevarinde. For Sevarias having assembled all the People that were dispers’d in the Woods, where they liv’d by Hunting, on wild Fruits, and certain kinds of Pulse, and having taught them to cultivate the Land in the manner of our Continent, they had no need to take in much; because one Acre well-till’d in this way, would yield more than fifty managed according to their own manner. They sow’d therefore at first, only round about Sevarinde, and from thence have extended themselves by little and little for near twenty Leagues on each side of the River, and almost thirty below the City, towards the Coast of the SouthSea; where they choose to dwell rather than in other Places, because of the Conveniency of the great River, and the other lesser ones which discharge into it. They often send out new Colonies, for they multiply very much; and they already reckon, in the whole of their Dominions, near five thousand Osmasies, collected either into Cities and Towns, or dispers’d in divers Parts of the Country, three in one Place, and two in another; but they have none that stand single. All the cultivated Lands, as I have already said, are of great account; as well by means of the natural Fertility of the Soil, as the Industry of the Inhabitants, who cannot bear any thing useless about their Dwellings, and who spare no care nor pains to fertilize even the most barren Places, especially near their Capital. For which purpose they have cut a great number of Canals every where across their Plains, some to water the dry Parts, and others again to drain the marshy, of which there are two Instances, not far from Sevarinde, wherein the Effects of their Labour and Industry are very agreeable and conspicuous. The first is about three Miles below the City, and consequently in the same Island where it stands. The Place I am speaking of, presents the Eye, now, with nothing but beautiful Meadows, and fine Walks of spreading, shady Trees; whereas, before the arrival of Sevarias, it was wholly a boggy stinking Morass, which produced only Reeds; but by means of the Drains they have digg’d there, and the great Quantities of Earth carried into it, they have made it exceeding fruitful and pleasant. The other Instance is westward of the River, and about six or seven Miles from the City. This Place was formerly a large, sandy Plain, that yielded nothing at all; but, by means of the Streams which they have turn’d thro’ it at a great number of Cuts, and of an Invention to dissolve, fatten, and convert the Sand into good Earth, the Sevarambians have brought it to be one of the finest and most fertile Spots of Ground in the

Part II

201

World. And, what is still more surprizing, is, that the Sand thus dissolv’d and fatten’d, by a Method which gives them very little trouble, instead of growing poor again, and wearing out with frequent sowing, improves farther by every Crop, and is always advancing in Richness and Fertility. We have a vast deal of this kind of Land in Europe, that is now of no use to us, which might be made very prolifick and advantageous, if we were Masters of this Management. For my own part, I thought it so wonderful, that I cou’d not be contented till I had got the Secret; which I easily did, as soon as I had learn’d the Language. For the Sevarambians, being guided by no private Avarice, and possest of no Substance, do not make any Mystery of Affairs of this nature. I hope therefore to publish this Invention in Europe, if ever I live to get thither, and can meet with Persons reasonable and powerful enough to encourage and undertake such a Work; in which, as the Expence of it is not very great, the Profit cannot fail of being exceeding considerable, and highly advantageous to the Publick, as well as to particular People. And now, having given a short Description of the City of Sevarinde, as it appear’d to us at our arrival there, it is time that we proceed to the History, Laws, and Manners of the Sevarambians: beginning with the Life of Sevarias, which I had time, during the several Years abode I made in Sevarambe, to read over so often, as to remark every thing in it that is of any importance; and after I have given some account of him, I shall come down to the Lives of his Successors. The End of the Second Part.

This page intentionally left blank.

Part III Containing an Account of Sevarias, the first Viceroy of the SUN, and also of his Successors

I

should grow too prolix, were I to recite here all that is written of this great Man, whose wise Conduct, and worthy Actions, wou’d furnish Materials for many Volumes. I shall therefore pick out some of the most remarkable and essential Parts of the History of this happy People, who ascribe all their Felicity to the Care and Prudence of their incomparable Legislator. He was Persian by Birth, and of a very ancient Family, being descended from the Parses, of whom there are still several branches in Persia, distinguish’d by this Name from the Tartars, who possess’d themselves of that ancient Kingdom. These Parses are the true Aborigines of the Country, and have retain’d many of the Customs of their Ancestors, of which, that of worshipping the Sun, and Fire, is one of the principal: For they are not Mahometans, as the Sophi, and the rest of his Subjects are. So that Sevarias, being born a Parsis, was brought up, from his very Infancy, in this Religion of his Fathers. He was called, in his own Country, Sevaris Ambarces, being the eldest Son of a Lord, whose Name was Alestan Hosser Ambarces, who, amongst those of his Religion, was acknowledged High Priest of the SUN. The Place of his Birth and Abode, was not far from that Part of Persia which stretches along by the Gulph; where his Family had maintain’d their Credit and Reputation during all the Wars, and notwithstanding the Persecutions of the Tartars, till the time of this Alestan; when it lost much of its ancient Splendor, by the Malice of certain Powerful Enemies which Envy had rais’d up against them. The Sevarambians reckon their time by Dirnemies, each of which contains seven Solar Revolutions. Now, according to their Computation, reduc’d to our Æra, Sevarias was born in the Year 1395, and was thirtytwo Years old when he made his first Descent on the Southern Continent, which falls in 1427; from whence that People date their principal Epocha. Till he was six Years old, he was brought up among the Women of his Father’s Palace, according to the Manner and Custom of that Nation. 203

204

The History of the Sevarambians

But Alestan, who was a Man of Understanding, and well skill’d in Astronomy, and all the other Sciences receiv’d among the Parses, having remark’d in this Child several Signs of an extraordinary Genius; that even then, young as he was, he would observe, and imitate almost every thing that he saw others do, which he always succeeded in, far beyond what cou’d have been hoped for from so tender an Age, resolv’d to cultivate his Mind with Care, and to give him an Education suitable to the excellent Talents which he already began to discover. And he was the more easily engag’d in this Resolution, as having an opportunity of doing it with great Conveniency, by the means of one of his Slaves, whose Name was *Giovanni;16 a Man of great Virtue, Integrity and Learning. This Giovanni was a Venetian by Birth, and a Christian in Religion. He had already serv’d Alestan three or four Years, when the Preceptorship of his Son was committed to him. Some time before his coming hither, he had been taken by Pyrates, who afterwards sold him to certain Merchants, of whom he was purchas’d by the High-Priest of the Sun. He had naturally a good Understanding, and was a Man of strict Virtue. And having had, in his younger Years, a liberal Education, he had acquir’d a good stock of Knowledge before he had the misfortune to lose his Liberty. His first Masters, an ignorant stupid kind of People, had taken no notice of his fine Qualifications; but Alestan, who, as I said before, was himself a Man of good Understanding, soon discern’d the Merit of his Slave, and treated him with so much Kindness and Humanity, that he engag’d him, by a stronger Inclination, to prefer the Service of so good a Master, to the being restor’d again to his Liberty, which he often offer’d him, tho’ he had a great desire to keep him still in his House, that he might intrust him with the Management of his Son. As soon therefore as Sevarias was enter’d into the seventh Year of his Age, Giovanni took upon him the Care of his Education. Alestan, besides giving him all the Authority necessary for a Preceptor, ordered him not only to Instruct him in the Arts and Sciences, but also to form his Soul to Virtue; without which the most sparkling Genius is not only useless, but even very dangerous. He put him in mind of the Gentleness with which he had always treated him, and recounted some of the many Proofs he had given him, of his sincere Esteem and Good-will. In a word, he told him, that the utmost Mark he cou’d show of the Confidence he had in him, was, “the committing to his Conduct the most precious Thing he was possess’d of; which was his Son.” Giovanni received, with profound Respect, these endearing Testimonies of the Goodness of his Master, and applied himself so closely to the Education —————— 16. * John.

Part III

205

of the young Sevarias, that in a few Years he had made an extraordinary Progress in the Study of the Belles Lettres, as well as divers bodily Exercises; and, above all, in the Knowledge and Practice of Virtue. ’Tis true, he found him a proper Subject to work upon; for, besides the natural Sweetness and courteous Disposition which appear’d in this young Prince, he quickly perceiv’d in him a sparkling Wit, a penetrating and judicious Understanding, accompanied with a very happy Memory, which are rarely to be met with in one and the same Person. He therefore took care to cultivate these Talents, so that at thirteen Years old he was a perfect Master of Italian, and understood Latin and Greek well: In which Languages, he had read all the Authors that cou’d any ways contribute to the polishing his Mind, and the confirming him in the Love of Justice and Wisdom. Besides these good Qualities of his Soul, he had all the bodily Endowments necessary to a Gentleman. His Person was well made, his Shape was graceful, his Face handsome, his Mien sweet and majestick; which render’d him, at the same time, both lov’d and respected by all who saw him. He enjoy’d an uninterrupted Health, and his Strength, Vigour, and Agility, made him acquit himself perfectly well in all the Exercises that were taught him. So many extraordinary Qualities render’d him the Delight of his Relations, the Admiration and Hope of the Parses, and the Envy of all those who hated his House; for the long Prosperity of his Family had procured his Father some such, and would have rais’d him up more, if, by his own Address and Moderation, he had not stifled a thousand evil Designs in their birth, which Persons, jealous of his Prosperity, had at several times form’d against him. But how prudent and cautious soever he might be, he could not divert a certain neighbouring Lord from offering him many insults, under a pretence of asserting some Rights which were in dispute between them. As their Hatred was increas’d daily, by new Subjects, they came at last to an open War; in which Alestan’s Enemy laid several Ambushes for him, tho’ none of them succeeded. This ill Success, however, did not hinder him from attempting new ones, till at last he went, with a great number of his Dependents arm’d, to wait for Alestan in a Wood, where he and his Son were gone a-hunting. But, as their good Fortune would have it, a Parsis Lord, one of their Friends, happen’d to meet them there; for he was not invited to make one of the Party. As he had a considerable Attendance with him, he strengthen’d Alestan’s side extremely; who, without that Reinforcement, must have been in great danger of being oppress’d by the number of his Enemies. They took the first opportunity of falling upon him, which was about an hour after he came into the Wood, where they did not think to have found him so well escorted. Nevertheless, as they were still more in

206

The History of the Sevarambians

number, and prepar’d before-hand for the Enterprize, they soon put some of Alestan’s Party into disorder; and, without doubt, wou’d have push’d their Success farther, if the young Sevarias, attended by his faithful Governor, and two of his Domesticks, seeing the manifest Danger his Father was in, had not, with an heroick Courage, and extraordinary good Fortune, spurr’d his Horse into the midst of the Enemy, and kill’d their Chief with his own Hand. The Death of their Leader, and the Valour of the young Prince, threw the Assassins into such Astonishment and Fear, that Alestan, having quickly rallied his Men, to go to the assistance of his Son, found no difficulty breaking thro’ them, and putting as many to flight as could escape his just Resentment. But their Joy for this Victory was not of a long continuance, being chang’d soon into uneasy Apprehensions, when Alestan came to consider the Misfortunes into which this Affair was likely to plunge him and his Family. His Enemy indeed was dead; but the Hatred still survived him: And he had left powerful Friends behind him at the Sophi’s Court, and even in the Country, who certainly wou’d use their utmost Endeavours to ruin Alestan and his Son. They were all Mahometans, and by consequence very capable of oppressing a Prince, whose greatest Interest lay among a People of a persecuted Religion, and in a Nation subject to the Law of a despotick and cruel Conqueror. These Considerations, together with the fear of losing his Son, whom he lov’d dearer than his Life, made him resolve to withdraw himself, in order to disappoint the Vengeance of his Enemies. Accordingly, without any loss of time, which was then very precious to him, he took Sevarias and Giovanni with him into his Closet, where having strongly represented to them the sad State of his Affairs, and the Danger that threaten’d them, he said to the Governor, that “as, on the one hand, his Son had received his Education from him, and therefore, next to himself ought to look upon him as the Person in the World, whom he was obliged to treat with the most Respect and Gratitude; so, on the other, more Affection and Fidelity might be expected from him, than any one beside him;” that, “during thirteen or fourteen Years which he had been in his Family, he had given such incontestable Proofs of his Integrity and Prudence, that it wou’d be offering a kind of Violence to Reason and Justice, not to have an entire Confidence in him;” that, “as till then he had left the Conduct of his Son wholly to him, it was but right he should still continue to take care of him;” and, in a word, that, “the Bands which attach’d them to one another, were so strong, that nothing could break, nor even so much as loosen them.” “You have,” continued he, “O faithful Giovanni, till now cultivated this young Plant; but what you have done yet for it is nothing, if when it

Part III

207

begins to bear Fruit, plentifully as our Hopes, you do not preserve it from the imminent Dangers with which it is threaten’d. I, therefore, once more lodge him in your hands, as a sacred Depositum, of which I shall expect an Account from you, and which I conjure you to keep as you wou’d that which is most valuable to you. Fly, therefore, this unhappy Country, where Injustice oppresses Innocence, and travel with my Son thro’ Asia and Europe, in which you may both live with safety, and enjoy the Society of worthy and good Men. I have already order’d every thing necessary for your Journey, and I long with the utmost impatience for the Hour of your departure.” This unexpected Discourse very much surpriz’d the young Sevarias, who was not willing to leave his Father, but begg’d that he might be allowed to share with him in all the Dangers and Difficulties into which his ill Fate should precipitate him. But his Prayers were to no purpose; for Alestan wou’d be obey’d, and was determined to remove his Son from the Storm which at that time so dreadfully threaten’d them. Accordingly, he and his Governor secretly set out, taking with them only one Servant; and had even past several Provinces, before their Enemies were at all appriz’d of their departure. Mean while Alestan, having settled his Domestick Affairs, withdrew also himself for some time, and continued conceal’d till his Enemies had satiated their Rage by destroying his Houses, and every thing else that could not be hid from their Fury. At length, after three Years Exile, he came to an Agreement with them, and for a Sum of Money was restored to the Enjoyment of his Estate and Dignities. He now began to turn all his Thoughts towards his Son, after whom he sent a faithful Messenger to the Grand Seignior’s Court, where they had made some stop, after having run over the greatest Part of Asia; but when the Messenger arriv’d there, the Person to whom he was order’d to apply himself, told him, that “Sevarias was gone to make the Tour of Europe, and that, in six Months time, as it was since he went away, he had heard no News of him.” The Messenger having receiv’d this Answer, and being thus disappointed in his Expectation of finding him there, resolv’d immediately to follow him into Europe; and, particularly to go to Venice, which he knew was the Birth-Place of Giovanni. With this in view, he took the Road for Italy, and enquir’d very carefully every where for the Persons he was seeking; but after a long and fruitless Search, he was forc’d to return, and give his Master an Account of his unsuccessful Journey. This melancholy News touch’d Alestan very sensibly. He even concluded, that his Son was dead, which shock’d him to such a degree, that within three Months after the coming back of the Messenger, this

208

The History of the Sevarambians

disconsolate Father died of Grief, and left all his Estates and Dignities to a second Son, four Years younger than Sevarias. Let us now return to the young Lord, who was preserv’d by Providence for the great things he afterwards accomplish’d; and, on that account, protected from an infinite Number of Dangers which threaten’d him. He had left the Grand Seignior’s Court, in Order to go to Italy; and, accordingly, embarked in a Ship bound for Venice, the Country of Giovanni his Governor. But at Sea they were so unfortunate as to be taken by Corsairs, who, in sharing their Prize, separated them from each other, notwithstanding all their Prayers, and the Assurances they gave them of a considerable Ransom, if they would suffer them to continue together, till they should have a Return wherewith to satisfy their Demands. Giovanni was carried back into Asia; and Sevarias sent to Naples, to a Merchant who was in partnership with the Corsairs. He had not been long with this Master, before his Merit was remark’d by a Person of Quality, who bought him, in order to make a Present of him to a Sicilian young Gentleman, who was soon going thither. The Lord who had purchas’d him, was very solicitous about the Education of this young Gentleman, which was an Orphan, and his near Relation. He had, himself, examined Sevarias in the Sciences and Languages, and found in him, over and above a Knowledge altogether extraordinary for a Person of his Age, an incomparable Fineness of Genius, and Solidity of Judgment. These excellent Qualifications acquir’d him the Esteem and Affection of this Neapolitan Lord who was so generous as not to give him to his Kinsman, but on condition that he should set him at liberty at the end of three Years. Upon these Terms Sevarias went over to Sicily with his new Master, whom he serv’d, with much Zeal and Diligence, for two Years; and, without doubt, would have done so all the time that had been agreed on, if the Malice of a Woman, whose Advances he neglected, had not involv’d him in Difficulties, likely to have ruin’d him, and which he had a hard matter to extricate himself from. She had falsely and secretly accus’d him to her Husband, of having made an Attempt on her Honour; who, believing the Complaint, was resolv’d to take vengeance on him for this Injury. But after Sevarias had run thro’ a great deal of Trouble, and undergone divers severe Sufferings on this account, his Innocence at length triumph’d over the Malice of his Accuser, and his Enemies were asham’d of having endeavour’d to oppress a Stranger so far distant from his own Country, and quite destitute of Friends and Relations. However, innocent as he was, he would not so easily have got rid of this Affair, if the Lord who bought him, hearing of it, had not found out the Injustice of the Accusation; and, detesting the

Part III

209

cruel Treatment he had met with, us’d his Interest for the obtaining his Liberty, even a Year before his time was expir’d: Which Act of Goodness he still heighten’d, by adding to it the Favour of a considerable Sum of Money, to carry him back again into Persia. Thus our young Freed-Man, leaving Sicily, pass’d over, as soon as he could, into Italy; from whence he went directly for Venice, hoping there to hear some News of Giovanni his Tutor; but all this Labour was to no purpose. From thence he travell’d thro’ almost all Italy, observing what was most remarkable in it. After which he return’d to the Grand Seignior’s Court, where he had lodg’d Money in the hands of some of his Friends. There it was that he was inform’d, that “his dear Giovanni was a Slave in Egypt;” which obliged him to go thither with all diligence, in order to purchase his Freedom, and take him home with him into Persia. He accordingly did so; and they succeeded better in this Voyage than in the former, tho’, in the conclusion, it prov’d a very melancholy one. For he no sooner arriv’d at a Place where he hoped to hear from his Father, but he was informed of his Death. This unexpected bad News threw him into an extreme Grief, and made him resolve not to return home of a long time. He therefore said to Giovanni, that after “having seen Greece, Italy, and most of the Western Asia, he had now a mind to pass into the East Part of it, and from thence to travel into the Indies. That for this purpose, he desired him to go to his Brother, and communicate his Design to him, in order to get such a Supply from him as would be necessary for the Journey.” Giovanni executed his Orders; and having join’d him again, at a Place which they had agreed on, they went together to the Indies, and from thence to Japan, and last of all into the Kingdom of China. In all these Countries they met with several Occasions which call’d upon Sevarias to exercise his Virtue, and laid the Foundation of that consummate Wisdom, the Effects of which are still so conspicuous among the Sevarambians. He continued out as long on his Eastern Travels, as he had before in his others. When, coming home, he purpos’d to have repos’d himself, after all his Fatigues, during the remaining Part of his Life; not knowing that Heaven had appointed him for the Accomplishment of those great Designs, which were afterwards executed by him. For Providence had not endow’d him with such fine Talents, and prepar’d his Soul by so many Toils and Trials, but to qualify him to be the Author of the best System of Laws that ever was, and make him an Instrument for procuring the Felicity of the happiest People in the World. As soon as Sevarias came home, he not only enter’d into the Possession of all his Father’s Estates, but was also acknowledged as

210

The History of the Sevarambians

High-Priest of the Sun; an Office hereditary to the Family, and only exercis’d by his Brother during his absence, with an Intention of resigning it to him whenever he should return. This Post, being at that time the most eminent of any among the Parses, made him who held it always look’d upon as the Sovereign; and his Authority was the better establish’d, in as much as the People submitted to it voluntarily, and even believed themselves obliged to do so, by the fundamental Articles of their Religion. And as great Places do not only do honour to those who fill them, but also themselves receive a reflected Lustre from the Merit of the Persons thus dignified; Sevarias, than whom none could deserve more, carried the Priesthood to a height of Glory and Majesty, which was altogether singular to him. His good Education, his long Travels, and his past Adversities, had much brighten’d the natural Light of his Understanding, and given him Advantages very uncommon in the Oriental Nations; which, join’d to the Nobility of his Extraction, the Venerableness of his Post, and the Ampleness of his Fortune, quickly acquir’d him a Reputation for Wisdom and Prudence, with the Parses; which made him much more consider’d by them, than any who had gone before him; and brought them from all Parts, to consult him in the most difficult Affairs; with respect to which, his Opinions and Judgments were so wise and equitable, that every body acquiesced in them as if they had been Oracles. About two or three Years after his Return, there happened a great Dispute between the Master of a Ship, and a Merchant of that Country, the Determination of which was referr’d to him. The Merchant, on the one hand, complain’d, that “the Mariners whom he had employed to transport certain Merchandizes for him to India, and bring back others in return, had not acquitted themselves well of their Commission.” To which he added, that, “after having engag’d him in a great and certain Expence, and besides trifled away much Money for him, they were come home without performing their Voyage; and, in excuse of themselves, only offered some chimerical Reasons, invented merely to cheat him of his Substance.” The Mariners, on the contrary, in their own justification, affirmed, that “they had been driven by a Storm very far into the South-Sea, till at last they came to an inhabited Country, where they were forc’d to lie for seven or eight Months; and that, during their stay on this unknown Coast, they had been obliged to dispose of part of their Cargo to support themselves, and procure Necessaries for their Return.” Sevarias hearing this Account of a Country, in a Part of the World which, till then, had been believ’d to be nothing but Water, began to enquire more particularly about a Subject so new and surprizing; and

Part III

211

touching the things they had observ’d there: To which they made him the following Answer: “That, as they affirmed before, they had really been driven far South by a Tempest, which at last threw them on the Coast of a large Continent, where they found Men and Women of an extraordinary Size, but who otherwise were very comely; and, moreover, gentle and easy to be treated with.” That, “they had, in their Distress, been supplied by them with all the Necessaries of Life;” and that, “during their abode among them, they had never known them guilty of any kind of Injustice, either with respect to their Goods or their Persons.” That, “these People dwell in Hutts and Cabins, and go naked, excepting that they cover those Parts of the Body which Nature teaches to hide.” That, “the Women are very beautiful, even without the Aid of Ornaments; of which Sex, they had been furnished with several handsome ones by the Inhabitants, as well as with Food and Lodgings.” That, “the Men were only arm’d with Bows and Clubs, and that they had many excellent Archers among them.” That, “Hunting was their ordinary Exercise; and as their Situation was pleasant, and their Climate fine, they would be perfectly happy, if it were not for a bloody War which they were engag’d in with a People who liv’d on the other side of a Range of Mountains, and disturbed their Tranquillity.”—The Mariners added, that, “they were informed, that this War was occasioned by certain Differences in Religion; and that those beyond the Mountains, had innovated in the Worship of the Sun, and made war upon these, because they would not admit of their Inventions, and approve the superstitious Ceremonies which they had introduc’d into, and mingled with the Worship of that most illustrious Star.” Sevarias being satisfied, by the unanimous Testimony of the Mariners, that this Account, however surprizing, was true, found himself impell’d, by an ardent Desire, to take a Voyage to this new-discover’d Land. With this view, by Favours and Promises, he engag’d all the Mariners in his Service; and, that he might put a stop to the Complaint of the Merchant, he gave them wherewith to reimburse him his Demand. After which, he wholly applied himself to the getting together the things necessary for this Expedition; and accordingly equipt two Ships, besides that of the Mariners, which he had from the first taken into his Pay. In a little time he sail’d, under their Pilotage, with a good number of Soldiers, whom he had chosen out of such of his Countrymen as were willing to follow his Fortune. They were a long time at Sea, and met with many Storms before they reach’d the desir’d Coast, but at last happily arriv’d there. Before he landed himself, he sent some of the Mariners ashore, who could best speak the Language of the Country, to let the People know, that, “a faithful Minister of the Sun was come to their assistance,

212

The History of the Sevarambians

with a Force sufficient to defend them against all their Enemies; seeing his Men, tho’ few in Number, were armed with the Lightning of Heaven, and therefore capable of dispersing the most numerous, and otherwise invincible Armies.” By this Message he prepar’d them to receive him: Well foreseeing, that by the means of his Artillery, and the other Fire-Arms which he had brought with him, he should strike a terrour among these ignorant People, who knew nothing of the use of them, nor had ever so much as heard of any such Instruments. For, with this View, he had taken care to provide himself with as good a Stock of Munitions of this kind, as the Number and Burthen of his Ships wou’d admit of; tho’ it was with great difficulty that he procur’d them, the Use of them being at that time not very common in Persia: However, having a good Correspondence with the Kingdom of China, where this Invention was even then very ancient, tho’ not much known elsewhere, he was supplied with them from that Country. In the mean-while, the Persons whom he had sent ashore, where they were already known, took care punctually to execute his Orders; and the Proposal they made being examin’d in a large Assembly of the Inhabitants, was thought too advantageous not to be receiv’d by them. Accordingly, three Days after the Arrival of the Parsis on their Coast, the Leaders of the People, attended with a great Number of Men, arm’d with Bows and Clubs, came to the Sea-side with Presents of their best kinds of Food, and most pleasant Fruits, for Sevarias; whom they pressingly invited to land in their Country. But instead of doing so as yet, he chose rather to send for some of the Chiefs to come on board his Ship, the Bulk and Make of which they very much admir’d, where he treated them with so much Goodness and Complaisance, that he perfectly acquir’d their esteem at this first Interview. Soon after, being advis’d that there was a commodious Port on the Coast, he order’d his little Fleet thither, that they might lie safe in case of a Storm. This Port was the very Bay that we discover’d, where we pitch’d our second Camp. So that Sevarias in going up the Country took the same Rout that we did when we went to Sporounde. ’Tis true, he enter’d it at the West-side, where the Mouth was larger and more commodious than on the East, by which Maurice pass’d into the great Lake. Before Sevarias would make a descent, he thought it necessary to use great Precaution: Not being willing to trust himself to a People, whose Manners and Custom, he as yet knew nothing of. That, therefore he might be safe from all Insults, he encamp’d in a little Island not far from Shore, just against the Place which we call’d Siden-Berg. He continued there several days, receiving the Visits and Homage of the People

Part III

213

round-about, in whose View and Hearing he frequently discharg’d his Artillery, to impress them with Fear and Respect. The dreadful Noise of these Machines threw them into so great an Astonishment and Admiration, that they readily believ’d that the Parses were sent by the Sun for their Deliverance, who had arm’d them with Thunder and Lightning for the Punishment and Destruction of their Enemies. When Sevarias came to inform himself thorowly of the Manners of this People, he found that they all liv’d in common, and were distributed into Families or Tribes, each of which had a kind of distinct Government; but that, besides these, they every Year elected a Captain General, under whom, each Tribe sent a certain Number of Men armed, to take the field against the Mountaineers their Enemies; who then came down into the Plain, to attack and ravage their Country. And as to other Things, he perceiv’d, that according to the account of his Mariners, they went naked, excepting only, that they cover’d those Parts which Modesty forbids mentioning, with the Skins of Beasts, which they took in hunting; that they liv’d chiefly on the Fruits and Roots of divers kinds of Trees which they planted, and a sort of Pulse which they cultivated, and of which they had generally very plentiful Harvests; that further, fishing, and hunting Stags and Bandalies were their ordinary Exercises; and that every Year they made an Offering to the Sun of all sorts of their first Fruits. Sevarias having thus acquainted himself with the Manners of this People, which he found very agreable to his own Sentiments, and being satisfied by the Precautions he had taken, that he might safely trust himself among them, thought it would be now for his Interest and Reputation, to signalize himself as soon as possible, by some bold Action against their Enemies. Having therefore taken this Resolution, he seiz’d the Passes by which the Barbarians of the Mountains us’d to come every Year down into the Plain, and threw up an Intrenchment there, on which he mounted several Pieces of Cannon, and posted a good Number of his Musqueteers. For he had brought with him six hundred Men out of Persia; all brave and well-disciplin’d Soldiers, which were armed with Swords, Pikes, and Musquets. There was a Wood a little beyond his Intrenchment, in which he plac’d a hundred of these Parses, and two hundred of the Prestarambians, or Inhabitants of the Country. In another Wood, further on towards the Mountains, he lodg’d a like Ambuscade; and staid himself, with the rest of his Men, in the new Entrenchment, which he had caus’d to be made where the Pass was very narrow, that his Artillery might do the greater Execution on the Barbarians, whenever they should advance towards them.

214

The History of the Sevarambians

When he had thus dispos’d his Men, he sent a strong Party of Prestarambians to make an Incursion into the Enemy’s Territory, in order to alarm them; commanding them to feign a Flight, when the others should come to attack them, in order by that means to draw them into his Ambuscades. This Detachment, therefore, having thus enter’d the Stroukarambians’ Country (for so they call’d these Mountaineers) fell upon some of their Habitations, and wasted all about them with Fire and Sword. An Insult of this nature, quickly alarm’d that haughty Nation, who had not been us’d to suffer such Things themselves, tho’ every Year they did the like to the Prestarambians. They therefore assembled themselves from all Parts to repel this Violence by Force; and were at last got together to the number of ten or twelve thousand, resolving to attack the Ravagers, drive them back to the very Sea-shore, and, in a word, totally to exterminate them. Accordingly, they began to march in great Fury towards them; which the others perceiving, immediately betook themselves to flight, as Sevarias had order’d, and insensibly drew them up to the very Mouths of their Artillery; when the Cannoniers taking their time well, made such a terrible Discharge upon them, that, struck with the utmost Astonishment, they instantly turn’d their Backs, and fled with great precipitation towards their Mountains. But their Consternation was still greater, when they fell into the Ambuscades that had been laid for them. Then they believ’d, indeed, that the Bolts of Heaven were darted at them from all Quarters, which, in a little time, totally dispers’d them. In this Confusion, and general Rout, the Prestarambian Archers, who had been posted with the Parses Musqueteers, made a dreadful Slaughter, and aveng’d themselves for the many Injuries and Violences which they had so often suffer’d from those cruel Barbarians. They kill’d above three thousand, and took as many Prisoners; after which, they return’d home in Triumph, testifying the utmost Respect and Gratitude for Sevarias and his Followers, whom after this Victory, they look’d upon as their Deliverers and tutelary Gods. He receiv’d their Homages with much Moderation, and let them know, “that they ought to ascribe the Glory of this Action to the Great God of Light, who had sent the Parses to them for their Protection and Deliverance.” He added, “that it was highly reasonable, and consequently their Duty, to offer a solemn Sacrifice as a Thanksgiving to him, for this happy Success of their Arms.” This pious Exhortation being well receiv’d by them, they immediately order’d an Altar to be erected in the Field of Battle, where Sevarias, robed in his richest and most resplendent sacerdotal Habits, with many pompous Ceremonies, devoted to the Sun the Arms and Spoils of the Enemy. To this Sacrifice, he added another of Perfumes, the Use of

Part III

215

which, was not at that time known among the Prestarambians, who, during the Performance, were fill’d with Respect and Admiration, at the sight of an Offering, whose Magnificence so much surpass’d the Simplicity of theirs. After this Act of Piety and Gratitude, Sevarias return’d to his Camp, which, a few days after, he remov’d to one of the Islands in the Lake of Sporaskompso, where Maurice was taken in the Pinnace, when he went to discover the Country. This Place was more secure and commodious than that where he had been before; and also much nearer to the Mountains, and at a reasonable distance from the Sea. He was no sooner establish’d there, but he sent two of his Ships to Persia, under the Command of Giovanni, “whom he order’d to bring over as many Parses with him, as he could engage in his Service.” Besides which, he also gave him in Commission, “to take in every thing which he judg’d necessary to the making a solid Establishment.” And above all, he recommended to him, not to speak of their Settlement, but to such Parses as were inclin’d to follow him; and even to them, as of a Secret of the greatest Importance, because it was to be apprehended that the Usurpers of Persia, in opposition to his Design, would hinder their leaving the Country, to remove to this new-discover’d Land; which, it look’d as if Providence had bestow’d on them, for the Restoration of the ancient Splendour of those who were true Persians, and for the Reestablishment of the right Worship of the illustrious Star of Day.” Giovanni, having received these Orders, put to Sea with a fair Wind, and stood directly for Persia, where he prosperously arrived in a little time. Mean while, those of the Stroukarambians who had escaped from the Fight, being return’d home, threw their Countrymen into an extreme Consternation by the Account which they gave of the Battle; in which they affirmed, that Thunder from Heaven had made a dreadful Slaughter of their Companions. Report quickly carried this News beyond the Mountains, to the Stroukarambians of the Plain, where Sevarinde now stands. An Adventure so extraordinary, soon made a great noise among them, and struck them with surprise and astonishment.—It even fill’d them with Apprehensions before-hand, of a Chastisement like that of their Neighbours. And this Fear very much facilitated Sevarias’s Attempt upon them; who, when re-inforc’d by fresh Succours from Persia, carried his victorious Arms into that Country. During the Absence of Giovanni, he was elected Captain-General of all the Prestarambians. After which he spent some time in taking a View of his Dominions, and numbering the People, which he found amounted to above three hundred thousand Persons, Women and

216

The History of the Sevarambians

Children included. And as this people liv’d in little Communities, and were expos’d to the perpetual Incursions of their Neighbours, who came down every Year and wasted their Frontier, this had oblig’d them to be good OEconomists, and made them always keep two or three Years Stock of Grain beforehand. For the Preservation of these Stores, they used to dig great Pits in the Earth, and when they had laid in their Provisions, they cover’d them over again so artificially, that it was difficult for their Enemies to find them. Several of these Magazines Sevarias caus’d to be opened, and the Grain to be transported to the Island in the Lake, whither he had remov’d his Camp; to the end that he might have it handy for use, and the Command of it upon all Occasions. When he had thus provided for the Subsistence of his Troops, he gave the Prestarambians to know, that “their having defeated the Enemy on their Frontier, was a thing of little Importance if they did not pursue their Success, and attack them in their own Country;” that, “therefore they ought to put themselves into a Condition to subdue them entirely, thereby to secure their present Peace and Tranquility; for, otherwise, they might depend that they wou’d not be suffer’d to enjoy a perfect Repose, any longer than till their Neighbours were in a posture to give them new Disturbance; and that their Experience of what had past, was a sensible Proof to them of what they were to expect in the time to come.” Besides these solid Reasons which he gave them, he said to them, “that if they had any generous Resentment of the Outrages which they had so often suffer’d from their bloody Enemies, they would use their utmost Efforts to get some Reparation, and to avenge themselves for the Ravages and Butcheries which this savage People had so long committed upon them and their Ancestors.” He added to this, that, “he believ’d that all the Advantages that their Enemies had at any time gain’d over them, proceeded rather from their Multitudes than their Valour; but that for the future their great numbers wou’d only serve to render the Victories of the Parses and Prestarambians more remarkable; and the happy Success of the last Action, and the Favour of their glorious God, who for this purpose had arm’d them with Thunder and Lightning, was a full Promise of an easy and certain Conquest.” This Discourse struck the Prestarambians strongly, and inspir’d them with a new Ardour; which, redoubled the impatient Desire which they had to revenge themselves on their Enemies. With one Voice therefore they besought Sevarias, “to lead them into the Field, promising to follow where-ever he pleas’d to conduct them; and swearing that they had no stronger Passion, than that of vanquishing or dying with him.” He commended their Courage and Generosity, and assur’d them that as

Part III

217

soon as the Re-inforcement, which he expected every Day, should arrive, he wou’d march with them and attack the Enemy. Some time after Giovanni came back from Persia into Prestarambe, which was then the Name of the Country that is now called Sporombe, bringing with him above a thousand Parses, armed and provided with all things necessary for War. He had taken care also to engage as many Masons and Carpenters as he could, and to bring with him all sorts of Tools proper for building and digging. With these Succours Sevarias resolv’d to pass the Mountains as soon as the Snow should be melted, and with this View made all the necessary Preparations for the Expedition. After the victory which he had gain’d, he had endeavour’d to train the most dextrous young Men of the Prestarambians, to the Exercise of Arms, with an Intention to mix them with his Parses, and form, out of them all, a good Body of Infantry, when he should have Arms to furnish them. They had brought him fifty good Horses from Persia, which were very useful to him, for which cause he sent his Ships often to fetch more, in order to propagate a Breed of them in Prestarambia. When the Season grew proper, and he had provided Subsistence for his Troops, he took the Field with all his Army, which consisted of eight thousand effective Men; of which more than three thousand bore Fire-Arms. He made use of the Prisoners he had taken in the last Fight, to carry his Provisions and draw his Artillery, which consisted only of small Field-Pieces, easily mov’d. And as the Prisoners were very large strong Men, they did such kind of Business almost as well as Horses. Sevarias having thus dispos’d all things, advanc’d with his Army towards the Mountains. The Report of his March spread so great a Terror every where, that the Inhabitants of all the Places thro’ which he was to pass, abandon’d their Dwellings and fled before him. Without meeting therefore with any other Obstacles, than the Difficulty of the Way, he travers’d all the Country till he came to the Plains of the Stroukarambians. This Situation and Soil, which is naturally very fine and fertile, pleas’d him so much, that he resolv’d to settle there as soon as he should have conquer’d the People who possess’d it; and also to transport the greater part of the Prestarambian Nation to it; whose Country was neither so good, nor agreeable as this was. The sudden March of his Army extremely surpriz’d the Inhabitants of the Plain; but not so much as to prevent their flocking together in divers Places with an Intention to give him Battle. Accordingly, in less than four Days they found themselves above twenty Thousand strong, and resolv’d to attack the Parses, laughing at those who pretended that they were arm’d with the Bolts of Heav’n: Which whole Story, they

218

The History of the Sevarambians

look’d upon as nothing more than an artful Lye, invented by their Neighbours to palliate the Shame of their Defeat. In this Confidence they advanc’d towards Sevarias, who was encamp’d by the side of a Wood near a large River, where, that he might not be forced, he had fortified all the Places by which the Enemy cou’d have any Access to him. On his right hand was the great River, which, from his Name, has ever since been call’d Sevaringo: On his left the Wood cover’d him from their Insults; and in the rear, he cut a deep Trench from the River to the Wood, where he fell’d several Trees, and made a Palisado at the foot of the Rampart, which perfectly fenc’d him in, on that Quarter. As to the Front of his Camp he trusted there to his Artillery, and no otherwise guarded himself against the Enemy, but by the Vigilance and Valour of his Soldiers. When he thought them near enough for him to give them Battle, he put all the Prestarambians, which where arm’d only with Bows and Clubs, at the Head of his Troops, commanding them to attack the Enemy first, and, after they had maintain’d a Fight for some time, to retire slowly, till they had drawn them on to the Artillery; which Order they punctually observ’d. The Barbarians seeing at first none but Prestarambians, which they had been us’d to conquer, and whose Arms were exactly like their own, receiv’d them with much Courage; and despising the Smallness of their numbers, imagin’d that they should easily overpower them with the Multitude of their men. Mean while, those on the other side finding them advance with great Ardour, gave ground by little and little, till they had led them up to the very Mouths of their Cannon; where, opening to the right, and left as Sevarias had order’d them, in an instant the Artillery thunder’d upon them, and the Musqueteers, who had been posted to flank them, redoubling immediately the Fire, made so horrible a Slaughter of them, that there fell above five hundred at this first Discharge. The terrible Report of the Cannon, and the sudden Death of so many of their Men, quickly put a stop to their Fury, and struck them with so great a Consternation, that, throwing down their Arms, they took to their heels, and with such precipitation, that they tumbled over one another, which occasion’d soon their intire Defeat. For perceiving this Disorder, the Prestarambians, charg’d them vigorously, and kill’d great Numbers of them. Nor did they give over the Pursuit till they had totally dispers’d them. The Desire of Vengeance which animated them, made them, indeed, go beyond the Bounds of a common Resentment, and even transgress the Orders of Sevarias, who had commanded them “to kill none after the Victory should be certain.” But notwithstanding this Precaution, there were between five and six thousand Men slain in this

Part III

219

Battle, and above three taken Prisoners. The miserable Remains of this great Army found their safety in their Flight. After this Defeat, the Inhabitants of the Plain were also thoroughly persuaded that the Parses were arm’d with Thunder and Lightning, as the Mountaineers had before reported, which overwhelm’d them with Fear and Astonishment. Sevarias did not fail to make his Advantages of a Panick so favourable to his Designs. As soon then as he had offer’d a new Sacrifice to the God of Light, he march’d farther into the country along the River, without meeting with the least Resistance, the Enemy perpetually flying before him and hiding themselves in their Forests. When therefore he found that there was no more any that dar’d to oppose him, he resolv’d to gain over this People to his Party, by Mildness and Lenity. With this View, as soon as he came opposite to the Island where Sevarinde now stands, he pitch’d his Camp, and fortified it strongly, that he might treat with the greater Security, and prevail with them the more easily to accept of the Peace which he intended to offer them. But to the end, that they might come themselves and sue for it, he discharg’d a great many of the Prisoners, whom he all along had used with great Humanity, and order’d them to tell their Countrymen, “that he was not come there to destroy them, nor yet to drive them from their Habitations, but only to chastize them for the Cruelties they had exercis’d on their Neighbours the Prestarambians.” To which he added, “that the SUN for the future would take them under his Protection, as he also himself would, if they submitted without any further Opposition, to that great God of all Flesh, whose principal Minister he was here below.” This Expedient quickly produc’d the Effect Sevarias hoped for from it. For, in less than eight days, Deputies were sent in from all Parts, “to beg Peace on any Terms that he should think fit to impose on them.” He receiv’d the Deputies very graciously, and granted them very reasonable Conditions for the present; only enjoining them, a certain Tribute of Grain, Fruits, and other Provisions for the Subsistence of his Army;” adding that, “another time, when they should know one another better, and be more at leisure, he wou’d enter into further Treaty with them.” The Stroukarambians, who had no Expectation of coming off so easily; submitted very readily to this gentle Demand, and immediately furnish’d the Camp of the Parses with a great plenty of every thing they needed. A few days after the Conclusion of this Truce, Sevarias, taking a Detachment of his Troops, and leaving the main Body of the Army under the Command of Giovanni, went out and reconnoitred the Country for ten Miles round. He came back again much pleas’d with it, and more and more confirm’d in his Resolution of settling there having found the Situation far better than that of the Prestarambians. But as no

220

The History of the Sevarambians

solid Establishment cou’d be made, without building some City or Town; he had taken this Journey as much with a View to look out a proper Place for that purpose, as to indulge his Curiosity in a sight of the Country. The Inhabitants of these Plains, at that time dwelt in Hutts and Cottages, and had never seen, nor indeed so much as heard of, stone Buildings; and so, by consequence, had no Persons among them that were any ways qualified for Works of this nature. ’Tis true, indeed, that some of the Parses were Carpenters and Masons, but their Number was so small, that it must have been a long time before they could finish any one large Edifice, without the Assistance of several other Hands. However, it was believ’d, that if any thing that was magnificent and of publick Use was undertaken, great Help might be had from the People of the Country; and in the mean time, as many Workmen as could be engag’d to come, were to be brought over from Persia. That he might therefore have a specious Pretence to employ the Inhabitants about these projected Buildings, Sevarias told them, he was order’d to declare to them, from the SUN, that “it was his Will and Pleasure, that they should build a Temple to him in that country; and that, if they obey’d this Order with a religious Zeal, he would bless them with his kindest Influences: But, on the contrary, if they refus’d to hearken to his Commands, he would turn his favourable Regards from them, and afflict them with a thousand Calamities.” This Order was receiv’d by all the People with much Joy and Respect; and Persons were immediately dispatched to all Parts, to search after Quarries, from whence the necessary Materials might be had, for the performing so desirable a Work. Accordingly, they discovered two Veins towards the Mountains, and not very distant from the River; but as they had no Boats, they could not carry any thing of that kind far, and the Places where they were found, were neither so beautiful nor commodious as the Island in the River, for the erecting this Structure. It was therefore resolv’d to build in this Island, as well on account of the Pleasantness and Fertility of it, as by reason of its Strength, and for the Security of its natural Situation. But, for the accomplishment of this Design, Stone must of necessity be transported thither, and that seem’d to be a Business of great difficulty. However, Chance, or rather the good Fortune of Sevarias, help’d him out here; for as he was walking on a Hill, which rose at the end of the Island, opposite to the Current of the River, to shelter himself from the Heat of the Sun, he enter’d a Cave which he met with, where he observ’d, that the Hill it self was nothing else but a soft, white Rock, and consequently very fit for the Buildings he had been projecting. Upon his making this Discovery, he dextrously took occasion to persuade the

Part III

221

Stroukarambians, “that the SUN had reveal’d to him, that in the Island it self he should find all the Materials necessary for the building his Temple.” In short, after having made a careful Search, they found that this Hill was almost wholly a Quarry of fine Marble of divers Colours, and that, in several Parts of the Island were great Numbers of Cedars, and large Forests of tall Trees, very proper for the Wood work of such an Edifice as had been propos’d. At present, indeed, there are scarce any Remains of the Hill to be seen, the whole Rock having been used in the building of Sevarinde: so that the Island is now near level, declining only a very little with the Current of the River. Sevarias himself set out the Place where the Foundation of the Temple was to be laid, and also of several of the Houses, which are standing to this day. Mean while, tho’ he was thus employed about these Buildings, he did not lay aside the thought of other Affairs. And first of all, he took care to assure himself of the Passes over the Mountains; after which he got together a great stock of Provisions; and then, that he might have a still greater plenty in time to come, he order’d the Stroukarambians to sow divers sorts of Grain which he had brought with him out of Persia. Besides these things, he also built a considerable Number of Boats, and taught his People the Management of them, they having never till then had any thing but Canoes, which they made out of the Barks of Trees. When he had proceeded thus far, he persuaded the Prestarambians to quit their present Abodes, and settle with him in their ancient Country. And the more easily to engage them to do so, he assur’d them that, “he had laid aside all thoughts of going back to Persia, so that it would be doing no more than he did.” And indeed the Parses, hearing the News of his happy Success, and seeing the former Splendour and Glory of the Persians, almost wholly effac’d in their own Country, as it were reviving in him, were perpetually coming over to offer their Services to this great Restorer of their Name and Nation. In the Intercourse which Sevarias had with the Stroukarambians, he made it his business to observe their Genius, Inclinations, Manners, Laws, and Customs. He also remarked several things in their Language, which he became Master of in a very little time. By the exact Enquiry that he made as to all these Particulars, he found that they were a People naturally ingenious, and had much of the Seeds of Generosity among them, tho’ their Manners were then quite gross and unpolished. They liv’d pretty much as the Prestarambians, in great Families or Communities; and, when the Necessity of their Affairs requir’d, chose Chiefs for the Administration of Justice, or to command them in War. They punish’d Theft very severely, because, their Goods lying open, Attempts of that kind were easy, and consequently every one liable to sustain great

222

The History of the Sevarambians

Damages that way. As to Marriage, their Practice was quite shocking to him, which therefore he soon abolish’d from among them. For, as they liv’d in large Communities, they all equally enjoy’d the Goods and Persons that belong’d to that Community. So that they made no manner of scruple of marrying their own Daughters or Sisters, such incestuous Mixtures being in no wise reckon’d criminal among them. Nay, so different were their Notions in this matter from ours, that they even look’d on it as more decent, for a Man to marry one of his own Blood, than to join himself with a Stranger. However, they very often allied themselves to their Neighbours, by receiving their Daughters amongst them; but the Males never quitted their own Family. He who married a Woman was reputed the sole Husband and Father of the Children she brought him; but he was by no means the sole Possessor of her Person: For any of the Family, whom she thought fit to admit, were allowed to enjoy her as freely as he that had espous’d her, who had, therefore, the same Right to the Wives of all the rest as they had to his. But if any Woman prostituted her self to a Stranger, the Action was look’d on as a most enormous Crime, and punish’d with Death; as were also the Men who thus broke in upon the Property of any neighbouring Tribe. In every Community there was a Chief, and some other Officers, who were chosen from time to time, for the regular Government of the Family; and, next to these Magistrates, their old People were most honoured by them. The Chief, with his Council, had the power of Life and Death over all Persons in the Community, and dispos’d, sovereignly, of all the Goods and Persons of his Subjects. No one could leave the Family without his Permission, nor contract any Alliance without his Consent; and, in a word, each Person was oblig’d, in all things, to yield an absolute Obedience to his Orders. For the Government of the whole Nation, Deputies were sent from every Community, which, all together, compos’d a great Council, for the assistance of the General in all publick Deliberations. And this was the whole Polity of that People. As to their Language, Sevarias found it soft, methodical, and very proper for Composition; but not quite expressive enough, and a little too scanty of Terms: For the Notions of these Nations were confin’d to things common, they being utterly ignorant of all Arts and Sciences, till they were taught them by the Parses, since their mingling with them. Sevarias applied himself very closely to the learning of it; and as he understood several before, and was, besides, very happy in a Memory, he soon made so great a Progress in it, that he was easily understood both by the Stroukarambians and Prestarambians, who spoke the same Tongue, tho’ their Dialects were somewhat different. These last liv’d also much in the same manner as the others, excepting only the incestuous Mixtures, which they had in great abhorrence. They said, “that

Part III

223

this Custom had been introduced among their Neighbors, by the Example of some Borderers upon them, who dwell in a part of the Country stretching away towards the Antarctick Pole, to speak in our own Phrase.” They added, “that it had crept in among them since their Separation, (for formerly they were all one and the same Nation) which had been effected by the means of a notorious Impostor, whose Name they bore, which had bewitch’d them, corrupted their good Customs, and occasioned a thousand Evils to the Inhabitants of these Countries, who till then were called Sephirambians.” In the mean while, the Walls of the Temple advanc’d by little and little; and tho’, at first, they were not decorated with all the Ornaments of Architecture, they were yet handsome and strong: And Sevarias regulated the Body of the Building so well, that afterwards it was easy to embellish it. Round about the Temple, he plann’d the Design of a City, and accommodated the Buildings to the Model of Government which he proposed to establish among this People. He had form’d this Project ever since he had taken a view of the Country, acquainted himself with their Customs, and the happy Success of his Arms had given him a reasonable Ground to hope, that he should acquire a sovereign Authority over them. When the Temple was finish’d, he invited the principal Persons of both Nations to the Solemnity of its Dedication, making use, upon this occasion, of all the Magnificence and showy Ceremonies that he could devise, in order to give a pomp to the Action. And tho’, as his Wives and Children had been brought over to him from Persia, he was under no necessity of taking any of the Women of the Country; yet Polygamy being allow’d of among the Persians, he thought that, in good Policy, he ought to endeavour the procuring himself more Friends, by new Alliances with the Prestarambians and Stroukarambians. With this view, he married a Daughter of one of the principal Persons among the first; and some time after, a Niece of one of the Chiefs of the last, whom he had already honoured with his Confidence and Friendship. He obliged his Parses also to do the same, which Conduct was very advantageous to him, in that it very much strengthen’d his Authority; and these Alliances very powerfully supported him, when he was endeavouring to get himself declar’d Chief of all these Nations. Mean while, the Number of the Parses and Prestarambians, who were already under his immediate Command, was very much increas’d, and still augmented daily. He kept them up to a military Discipline, and exercis’d them often; and, for the rest of their time, he employ’d it either about the Buildings, or in the Tillage of the Earth, which, being cultivated after the manner of the politer Nations, yielded infinitely more than as it was manag’d by those unartful People. He had sent him from

224

The History of the Sevarambians

Persia, Horses, Cows, Camels, and several other sorts of Creatures which were not to be found on this Southern Continent, tho’ there were divers others which we know nothing of in ours; as particularly the Bandely, which we have given a Description of in the former part of this History—. ’Tis a kind of Stag, of which there are large Herds up and down the Country, that feed in the Forests. Sevarias caus’d some of them to be taken in Toils, and having well considered their Shape and natural Strength, imagin’d they might be useful, if, as he believ’d might easily be done, they could be made gentle and tame; which succeeded as he had judg’d. He therefore ordered his People to catch as many as they could, forbad the killing of the young ones, and promis’d a Reward to the Inhabitants for every one that they should bring to him alive; for they used to shoot them with their Arrows, and eat their Flesh, which was as good as any sort of Venison whatever. By this means he had soon gotten a sufficient Number, which he caus’d to be broke and manag’d, as well for the Draught of Carriages, as the forming a Body of Cavalry, which was to consist of these Bandelies, and the Horses which had been sent him from Persia. In three Years he had accomplish’d all these things. And when he saw that the Temple was almost finish’d, and that, besides, he had built four large square Houses, or Colleges, which he call’d Osmasies, that is to say, Communities, each of which would entertain a thousand People, or thereabouts; that he had cultivated the Island, and the Country all around it, so that it produc’d a great plenty of Provisions, and had fill’d all his Magazines, he thought that he ought no longer to defer the getting himself elected Chief of all the Nations he had subdu’d. For this purpose, therefore, he instituted a solemn Feast in honour of the SUN, and decreed the Celebration of it, annually, with Sacrifices, Banquetings, and other publick Rejoicings. At this Solemnity he had brought together all the principal Persons of the Prestarambians and Stroukarambians; and, finding them in a gay Humour, and full of Admiration at the Magnificence of the Entertainment, he caus’d one of their Commanders, named Hostrebas, to propose the electing a Chief over both the Nations, who should be invested with a sovereign Authority, to govern and defend them. As this Hostrebas had much credit among them, and was supported by all that were related to the Parses, his Proposition was well received, and the Honour of the Royalty, with an universal Consent, conferred on Sevarias. He refus’d it for a while, and said, “He could not accept of a Dignity so illustrious, without first consulting the SUN, whose Minister he was, and by whose Will he ought to regulate all his Actions.” That, “for this purpose he would, if they approved of it, offer a Sacrifice of Perfumes, and beseech that great Star, to direct and guide them in an Affair so important; and to give them to

Part III

225

know, how they should act upon this occasion.” They all agreed to this modest and reasonable Proposal, and followed him to the Temple, where he offer’d Perfumes to the Deity; and, with a loud Voice, pronounced this Prayer, or rather Hymn, in the hearing of all the Assembly. The Stile is a little Poetical, and, in many places, has a Cadence and Flow of Words which is not allowable but in Verse; but as this did not happen without design, and such a musical Run touches the Heart most on these occasions, I have thought proper not to depart from it. Perhaps indeed, this Manner of Writing may not be to the taste of every body; and that the entire Verses and frequent Transpositions which occur in it, may furnish matter for Censure to some of the Criticks: but I am satisfied, that many Persons of Judgment, who feel the Force of Poetry, will determine otherwise; especially when they shall be put in mind, that Sevarias, who was well vers’d in the Latin and Greek Poets, cultivated the Muses exceedingly. A great Poet, named Kodamias, that is to say Divine Wit, has translated it into Measures; of which Author we shall give some Account towards the Conclusion of this History, his Reputation being almost as great with the Sevarambians, for several excellent Works, as those of Homer and Virgil formerly among the Greeks and Romans. But, of all his Writings, there is none that this People have more Esteem and Veneration for, than this Hymn to the SUN, because, in it, is a Summary of every thing essential in their Religion; and besides, this excellent Poet has kept as close in the Composition, to the Thoughts of Sevarias, as the Nature of his Art would admit; who, as we said before, pronounced it before the People in the following manner:

SEVARIAS’S PRAYER, OR HYMN, TO THE SUN. “O Fruitful Source of Light and Life! Beautiful Star! which shinest with an unrivall’d Lustre, and whose Looks Divine our feeble Eyes cannot sustain; when, with observant Eye, we take a view of all the charming Objects which thou alone mak’st visible, we find nothing so glorious, nothing so worthy our Admiration, as thou, the sovereign Beauty! Who of thy Fulness freely giv’st to all, without receiving Supplies again from any. All the Brightness and Splendour which yon luminous Bodies, the obedient Subjects of thy Empire, seem to possess are only borrowed from thy Rays. Those beamy Rays, which paint the Bow of Heav’n, and Clouds that float in Air, with twice ten thousand Colours, which gild the Tops of the Mountains, and the far extended Plains, scattering the Shades of Night, and serving as a Guide to all the Race of Animals; and, in a word, give them to see the various Objects which themselves

226

The History of the Sevarambians

enlighten. Thou, in and of thy self art infinitely amiable, and nothing without thee is so; for nothing without thee can shew its Charms. When thou appearest first in our Horizon, all things rejoice at thy return, and break their mournful Silence, to salute thee waking. Thou snatchest drouzy Mortals from their Beds, out of the Arms of Sleep, Death’s younger Brother! announcing in their Ears the joyful Tidings of a new Life. But when, in the Evening, thou takest thy Light away, to carry it to other Countries, they stand invelop’d in thickest Darkness, (thy Resemblance Grave!) State insupportable, did they not cheer themselves with the delightful Hope of thy returning Ray. When thou thy Brightness shrowd’st, and at Mid-day becom’st eclips’d, Mortals grow pale as thou dost, and their Hearts confess Fear and Astonishment: But Joy and Gladness soon succeed that Horror, and sparkle from their Countenance to see thee freed from thy Travel. Thou run’st the Vault of Heaven with swift Career, and, thy vast, annual, Course compleating, measurest out Times and Seasons, by just and regular Movements. When thou approachest, all things revive, and bloom with a fresh Lustre. Nature, as it were till then enfeebled by the Rigours of the Winter, breaks her cold icy Bands, and throws away her Chains, invigorated by the Aids of thy all-quickening Heat. Even Earth perceives the teeming Beam, and, like a Bride, puts on her verdant, best Attire, to meet thee, and admit thy warm Embrace; whilst her wide-opening Lap, with Fruits and Flowers thou copious stor’st; which, ripen’d by thy Influence benign, yield Nourishment to all the Inhabitants of Earth, and Air, and Water. For ’tis on thee, alone, that all depend for their Subsistence, as from thee at first, they all receiv’d their Beings. Thou art the World’s great Soul, seeing thou animatest all things; and nothing moves itself but by a Power which thou impartest to it. When thy Warmth divine forsakes us, the chilling Horrors straight of Death succeed, and every Animal no longer lives, than while he feels thy Influence; his Spirit being but a Ray of that immortal Light, which when withdrawn from the terrestrial Body, the earthy Part corrupts, dissolves, and back returns again to its first nothing. When thou retirest from us, according to the Order of the Seasons, all Nature quick confesseth the dreary sad Effects of thy Departure: Every thing droops, looks sorrowful, and the poor widow’d Earth appears in Mourning. Thy Benefits extend throughout the World; but yet thou dost not equally indulge all People, and all Climates: For some find thy Heat and Light but scantily imparted, plung’d often in the Shades of long, black Darkness, and pinch’d with all the sharp Severities of fierce, inclement Winter; under which they sigh and languish in tedious Expectations of thy wish’d Return. These have Proofs most sensible, that thou’rt the Source of every Good; or else, at least, the Mean by which descend

Part III

227

all Blessings, from that great Being which sustains even thee, and whose most glorious Minister thou art. But those who share with us thy kindest Aspects, and, favour’d with thy blissful Countenance, see their Lands laugh with Plenty, are yet indebted to thee in larger Tributes, still, of Love and Gratitude. For every Morning thou restor’st again the cheerful Light that Night had taken away. And if, sometimes, out of the humid Vapours that Arise from Sea, dense Clouds are form’d that veil thy radiant Face, thy Love soon melts them down into refreshing Rains and kindly Dews, which by their genial Moisture enrich our Plains, and fertilize the Field for the laborious Hind. “And as thy Goodness, thus adorable, extends to all things, thy sharp Resentment, equally diffusive, is not less dreadful; seeing all Places furnish sad Instances of Wrath divine awak’d. For when by Sin, and vile Ingratitude, we have incurr’d thy Anger, with various Rods thou dost chastise us, and in a thousand ways make us essay the Strokes of vengeful Justice. Sometimes thou changest thy prolifick Warmth, the Cherisher and Ripener of our Fruits, into fierce, scorching Heats, that burn them up. At others, thou the gentle Dews convertest into impetuous Rain, or rattling Hail, which rob our Trees of all their boasted Riches, and instantly take from us the Promises of Harvest. Thou the soft whispering Breaths of Zephyrs mild, turn’st into roaring Storms and furious Tempests. Thou heapest up black Clouds on one another, and with thick Mists depriv’st us of thy Light. And now, no more vouchsafing us the Favour of thy Regards propitious, with thy red Arm thou fling’st the forky Lightning, and by the dreadful Voice of thy loud Thunder, reproachest us with Guilt, and givest us threat’ning Notice of thy most just Displeasure. Sometimes thou dartest thy most dreaded Bolts at tall aspiring Trees, and smitest the superb Mountains, to let vain Mortals see, thou can’st abase whatever waxeth great, and puffeth up it self against thee; and that if thy Mercy did not restrain the Fury of thine Anger, thou cou’dst, even in a moment, dash to pieces the impious and rebellious, who neither adore, nor own thy sacred Deity. “And as for us, assembled in thy Temple, to pay our Vows and Homage to thee, and offer Sacrifice upon thy Altar; we gratefully acknowledge, that to thee alone, we owe our Life and Breath, and all things; as likewise do all other Men and Creatures. But more, we feel our selves in Duty bound, to reverence thee in a peculiar manner; because thou hast not only given us Being, but daily favour’st us with various Graces, which thou indulgest not to other People, the Inhabitants of Earth. For thou, in Mercy to us, hast armed our Hands with thy dread fiery Bolts, wherewith to overcome our Foes. And also givest us such useful Light and Knowledge, respecting Life and all its Comforts, as

228

The History of the Sevarambians

thou hast not granted to any else besides us. Moreover, thou dost deign to instruct us in all Affairs important, when we have recourse to thy blest Oracle; and mak’st us still succeed in every Enterprize, tho’ Obstacles most difficult, and seemingly invincible, oppose us. Nay farther, to compleat thy Goodness to us, thou hast vouchsaf ’d us Knowledge of thy Will by immediate Revelation, prescribing to us the Manner of our Adoration, and fixing for us, the exterior Marks and Ceremonies of that religious Reverence which we owe thee; that so we may, in nothing, give offence thro’ Ignorance, or deviate from the right Worship of thy Deity. Which to secure yet more, thou lead’st us as it were by the hand, in sure and shining Paths, while others are left to wander on in Ways obscure and erring, which their own vain Imaginations shew. Some of these (judicially thus blinded) make to themselves weak unassisting Idols, while others form delusive, empty Fantoms, and in them worship the wild Conceptions of capricious Thought. But we, thy Servants, guided by a Light more simple, more pure, and natural, adore one visible and glorious God, whose awful Power we know, and whose Indulgence and Heavenly Goodness we every day experience. “Watch over us then, O Light divine, and graciously continue to shine upon us. Still let thy Ray celestial dissipate the interposing Clouds, and scatter far that Darkness, in which our Reason, otherwise, might stray; benighted, and forlorn. And seeing that, of her self, she is too weak and limited, we beg of thee to guide us, in the Choice we are making, to a Chief and Leader; who, knowing well thy Will, may also govern us according to it. If therefore, O illustrious Star, thou deign’st to hear our humble Pray’r, grant that the Person whom thou thus design’st, may be possess’d of all the great Endowments requir’d in this high Station. That so he may be both a Guide and an Example to us; protect and save us from our Enemies; make Peace and Righteousness, and all the Virtues flourish among us: And, finally, that he may know to instruct us, in that Religious Worship which we owe thee. To the end that being still accepted by thee, and doing nothing to provoke thy Anger, we always may enjoy thy kindest Influences, and find, perpetually, fresh Testimonies of thy distinguishing Goodness.” This Prayer, which Sevarias pronounced with great Zeal, touch’d the Hearts of the Assistants, and gave them a high Esteem for his Piety: But they were agreeably surpriz’d to hear, as soon as he had done speaking, a soft Harmony, as of a Lyre, which seem’d to come from the Roof of the Temple, and advance by little and little towards them. When it was got pretty near them, they could distinguish the charming Voice of a Woman or Boy, who, after having some time sung very melodiously, told

Part III

229

the Assembly, that he was sent from the SUN, to let them know, “that God had heard their Prayer, and accepted of their Sacrifice, and had even chosen one of them, to raise him to a Degree of Dignity above the rest. But that this Advancement was not to be to the Quality of a King, because no Mortal was worthy to command, sovereignly, a People whom he had selected from all others to be his Subjects, and true Worshippers.” That, “therefore, he would himself be their Monarch, as he was already their God, to the end that they might govern themselves entirely according to his Laws; which should be equitable, and express, and conveyed to them by the hand of him whom he had appointed to be his Lieutenant in the Monarchy, as he had long before advanced him to the highest Degree of the Priesthood.” That, “the Person then whom he had chosen was his Chief-Priest Sevarias, whom he hereby declared to be his Substitute; commanding them to receive him as such, and to yield a perfect Obedience to him and his Successors, conformable to those celestial Laws which he himself should dictate to this Minister, whom he had thus set apart to be the Interpreter of his Will, and the Dispenser of his Favours.” This Discourse was followed by a sweeter Harmony than the first, which seem’d to retire by little and little, till at last it could be no longer heard. Mean while the People were in a profound Admiration; believing that it was indeed a Voice from Heaven, that announced to them the Will of their God. They, therefore, immediately obey’d it; which they did the more willingly, as they saw that their glorious King had taken for his Lieutenant, him whom they would have elected for their Sovereign; and added to this Favour, the illustrious Honour of governing them himself, and taking a most particular, and distinguishing Care of their nation. Accordingly, Sevarias was, upon the spot, received in the Quality of Viceroy of the SUN, and the principal of his Subjects paid him Homage, and swore Fealty to him. The Conduct of this Lawgiver, upon this occasion, seems very remarkable, and worthy his great Wisdom and Prudence. For, whereas several other wise Legislators before him, to authorize their Laws, had given out that they received them from some Divinity, he not only did the same, but, moreover, order’d the Matter so, that the People themselves, by a Voice from Heaven (for so they were made believe) should have an express Attestation of it from their God. He imagin’d also, that by refusing the supreme Authority, and attributing all to the SUN, the Government which he intended to establish among them, would be more firm and respected; and that he himself as Lieutenant, and Interpreter of the Will of this glorious Monarch, should meet with greater Honour,

230

The History of the Sevarambians

and be much better obey’d than if he received his Investiture from mortal Men. He lov’d Musick exceedingly, and understood it pretty well himself; which makes me think that, when he built the Temple, he had Caus’d some Void to be left in the Roof, for the Symphony we just now spoke of; and that it was by the means of some Contrivance, that the Sound seem’d to come forward at first, and afterwards to withdraw again. But, however this was, the common People of the Sevarambians believe to this day, that the Voice that declared the Will of the SUN to their Ancestors, came immediately from him; and that Sevarias was chosen by the explicit Order of that great Star. But almost all the more understanding sort, with whom I convers’d freely at Sevarinde, own’d to me, that they look’d upon this Matter as a piece of Address in their Lawgiver, to give weight and authority to his Government. And this appears to have been the Case, still more plainly, from the Behaviour of the Parses of that time, who made the Natives believe, that the Arts which they brought over with them from our Continent, were taught them by the SUN, who had honoured them with an express Revelation for that purpose: Which, indeed, Sevarias himself also intimates in his Prayer, when he returns thanks for “Gifts and Favours not indulg’d to any but him and his People.” The Stroukarambians, according to the Genius of their Language, which adds the Termination as to the Names of all Persons of elevated Rank, changed that of Sevaris, (which, as we formerly observ’d, was his original Name) into Sevarias. And as their Country was at that time called by the Prestarambians, Stroukarambe; they alter’d its Apellation into that of Sevarambe: joining the first Syllables of the Name of their Prince, and the word Arambe, which, in their Speech, signifies a Land, Region, or Country. And this, indeed, was no more than the Prestarambians had done before, by the Name of Stroukaras, an Appellation which stands for a Cheat or Impostor; to shew their Hatred to that ancient Enemy of their Nation. But those who receiv’d him as their Chief, and afterwards paid him divine Honours, call’d him Omigas, and themselves, from his Name, Omigarambians. However, as we took notice above, as soon as the two Peoples were united under the Authority of Sevarias, they took the Appellation of Sevarambians, which is the Name of the whole Nation to this day. Sevarias having thus carried his principal Point, and finding himself invested with an absolute Authority, applied himself very diligently to the cultivating and embellishing the Country, the composing of Laws, and the getting them receiv’d among his new Subjects: tho’ he was some time hesitating between several Models of Government which himself and Giovanni had fram’d. Their first Project was, to divide the People into divers Classes, with an intention of sharing the Land among them, and vesting, thereby,

Part III

231

a Property in particular Persons, after the manner of almost all the Nations of our Continent. The Parses were much for this Distribution; and the whole Nation was just going to be sorted out into seven Classes, subordinate to one another. The first was to consist of Labourers, and Husbandmen of all sorts. In the second were to be rank’d all Mechanicks, as Masons, Carpenters, Weavers, and such like. The third was to take in those who were employed in the nicer, and more ingenious Arts; as Painters, Embroiderers, Joiners and other such Artisans. Merchants, Haberdashers, and Retailers of all sorts were to be included in the fourth. The fifth was to be composed of the rich Citizens, Scholars, and the Professors of the Liberal Arts. The sixth was to be appropriated to private Gentlemen only. And the seventh, and most honourable of all, was reserv’d for the Lords of different Ranks and Quality. In the Partition of the Land, a good share was to have been allotted for the Ordinary Support of the Government; and as to Extraordinaries, each Class was to contribute according to its Degree and Estate, without any Exemption or Privilege for any Person whatsoever; because it seem’d unjust, and quite contrary to right Reason, that those who are Members of a Community, and enjoy the Protection of its Laws, and all other Advantages of the Society, should not furnish their Quota towards the maintenance of it; while the rest are loaded with Taxes and Imposts. The Crown-Lands, alone, ought to be exempted; and for all the Subjects, they should be assess’d towards the publick Expences, each according to his Rank and Ability, in an equal proportion. But that they might perpetually recognize the Authority of the Sovereign, and be habituated to the paying him Tribute, it was intended to lay a moderate, annual Tax, upon every Person twenty Years of Age, which was to be called a Capitation. Besides this, all those who should come to be legally possess’d of any Estate or Substance, to a certain Value limited by Law, and should therefore be desirous of being admitted into a higher Class, were to pay the State a Sum of Money, according to the Regulations that should be made on that Subject. Each Class was to be distinguish’d by different Habits, that so the Inferiors might not usurp Honours, and that every Person might keep in his own Place and Station. There were divers other Regulations in this Project, which, as I take it, Giovanni was the real Author of. But Sevarias, after having examined this Model of Government, and some others that were propos’d to him, rejected them all; and plann’d a Form himself, incomparably more just and excellent than any that had gone before him. For as he was Master of a Prudence and Wisdom altogether singular, he set himself to search and examine with Care into the Causes of those Dissensions, Wars, and other Evils, which afflict

232

The History of the Sevarambians

Mankind, and depopulate Countries and Nations. In this Research he found, that the Misfortunes of Societies derive principally from three grand Sources; which are, Pride, Avarice, and Idleness. Pride and Ambition put great Numbers upon endeavouring to raise themselves above others, in order to usurp a Dominion over them; and nothing nourishes this Passion so much as the Advantages of an illustrious Extraction, in those Places where Nobility is hereditary. The Pomp of a high Birth dazzles, to such a degree, those who have been thus far indulged by Fortune, that they forget their natural Condition, and attach their Minds to this exterior Good, which they owe wholly to their Ancestors, and not to their own Virtue. And when this comes to be the Case, they are always ready to fancy that other Men ought to be subject to them in all things, and that themselves were born only to command; without considering, that Nature has made us all equal, and puts no difference between the Noble and the Peasant; that, we are all liable to the same Infirmities, and enter on Life the same way; that, neither Riches nor Quality can lengthen the days of Sovereigns one Moment, any more than those of their meanest Slaves; and, in a word, that, the most honourable Distinctions amongst Men, are those which derive from Virtue. To prevent then the Disorders that Inequality of Birth produces, Sevarias would not allow of any other Distinction among his Subjects, than that of Magistrates and People; and, with respect to these last, Seniority of Age was always to give Superiority of Rank. And as Riches, and Property, make a greater difference in Circumstance between the Members of Civil Society, from whence Avarice, Envy, Extortion, and an infinite Number of other Evils take their rise; that he might effectually guard against these, he abolish’d all private Property, and, depriving every Individual of his Substance, vested all the Lands and Riches of the Nation in the Community, to be absolutely at the disposal of the Magistrate; without whose Consent and Licence, no Subject had any right to meddle with the least portion of it. By this Method, he banish’d at once Covetousness, Taxes, Imposts, Want and Poverty, which cause so many Misfortunes in the several Societies of the World; and made the Sevarambians all rich, by leaving no one any thing that he could call his own. For as all the Substance of the State belongs to all, each Person may justly esteem himself as happy as the most opulent Monarch in the World; seeing the Magistrate never fails to furnish every Individual with all the Necessaries of Life, upon a Representation of his need of them; and thereby frees him from all Solicitude about Food, Raiment, and Lodging, during the several Stages of Life; and also, of the Care of maintaining his Wife and Children, even tho’ he should have ever so many. All these things, I say, are provided for

Part III

233

by the State, and the whole Nation lives in a happy Abundance, and an assured Repose, under the Conduct of their Sovereign. But because the Magistrate, who is the Head of the Body Politick, has need of the Aid and Assistance of the other Members; and, besides, that it is good to keep them in exercise, lest they should grow rebellious by an Indulgence in Ease and Pleasure, or become soft and effeminate from a long Habit of Idleness, Sevarias thought it necessary to find Employment for all his Subjects, and to keep them in breath by useful and moderate Labour. With this view, he divided the Day into three equal Parts; the first of which, he destin’d to Work; the second, to Pleasure; and the third, to Rest. For he ordered, that all that were of such Years, and not justly exempted by Diseases, old Age, or other Infirmities and Accidents, should labour eight Hours in the day; and for the rest of their time, they might spend it as they pleased, either in becoming and allowed Diversions, or in Sleep and Repose. Thus their Lives run off with much Sweetness; their Bodies are kept in due Exercise by moderate Labour, and not worn out with excessive Fatigue; and their Minds are agreeably employed, in a rational way, without being press’d down by Care, Trouble, or Solicitude. The Diversions and Pleasures which succeed the Labours of the Day, recreate the Body, and reanimate the Mind, and the Rest that follows after, perfectly refreshes and restores them. And by this means, Men, being well employ’d, have not time for the Projection of Evil; and therefore seldom fall into the Vices which Idleness leads to, when not driven away by honest Occupations. Envy, which springs from one of the three Sources we mention’d, very rarely rages among these People, whose Hearts, ordinarily, are susceptible of no other Flame than that of a noble Ambition, arising from the Love of Virtue, and a just Desire of that Praise which good Actions deserve. Sevarias found no difficulty in getting his Laws received among his new Subjects; for, besides that they were authorized by the Divinity, they were not very remote from their Customs; these People having always liv’d (as we observ’d before) in Communities, and had scarce any thing like private Property among them. When we come to treat expressly of the Government of the Sevarambians, we shall give a more explicit Account; but, for the present, must content our selves with saying things in general. And tho’ this great Legislator was the first Founder of the Laws, and publick Administration of the Sevarambians, it is to be observ’d, that there have been many Regulations made since by his Successors, he having given them authority to alter, add to, or diminish from them, as the State of Affairs, and the Good of the Nation should require. But, tho’ he allow’d them this Privilege, he has expressly forbidden them, to

234

The History of the Sevarambians

ordain any thing that is contrary to Natural Right, or the Fundamental Constitution of the State: Which are chiefly these that follow. That, “they shall, above all things, take care to preserve an Heliocratical Government:” that is to say, that “they shall never recognize any other Sovereign but the SUN, nor receive any Laws but what he shall dictate to his Lieutenant and his Council.” That “they shall not admit to the Viceroyship, any Person but he whom that SUN shall choose out of the principal Ministers of State; which is to be done by Lot, as we shall see hereafter.” That, “they shall not suffer Property, by any means, to pass into the hands of particular Persons; but to preserve the sole Possession of it in the State, to be absolutely dispos’d of at their pleasure.” That “they should not permit any Rank of Honour, or Dignity, to be hereditary; but maintain, with the utmost Care, an Equality of Birth: to the end, that private Persons may be advanc’d to publick Offices, upon the foot of Merit only.” That, “they should reverence Old-Age, and accustom their Youth, betimes, to honour those, who are their Superiors in Years and Experience.” That, “they should for ever banish Idleness from their Nation, because it is the Nurse of Vice, and Source of Seditions and Rebellions; and that, therefore, their Children should be early inur’d to Labour and Industry.” That, “they should not employ themselves in vain and unprofitable Arts; which minister only to Luxury and Vanity, cherish Pride, and, by engendering Envy and Discord, lead Mens Minds astray from the Love of Virtue.” That, “they should severely punish Intemperance of all kinds; because it corrupts both Body and Soul, and produces Effects quite contrary to its opposite Virtue; which keeps both in a State of Tranquility and Moderation.” That, “they should strictly enforce the Laws of Marriage, and cause all adult Persons to conform to them, as well for the Propagation of their Species, and Increase of the Nation, as to avoid Fornication, Adultery, Incest, and other abominable Crimes, which are destructive of universal Justice, and disturb the publick Tranquility.” That, “they should take a particular Care of the Education of Children, and cause them to be adopted by the State, as soon as they should be seven Years old; that they might learn betimes Obedience to the Laws, and that Submission which they owe to the Magistrates, who are the true Fathers of their Country.” That, “they should instruct the Youth, of both Sexes, in the Exercise of Arms, in order to the keeping up a sufficient Force, where-

Part III

235

with, at any time, to chastize and repel the Enemies of the Community.” And lastly, That, “they should, to the uttermost of their power, countenance and support Religion, the only Tye upon Conscience; by persuading Men, that nothing can be concealed from the Deity, who has therefore provided, not only in this Life, but also in that which is to come, Rewards for good Men, and Punishments for the Wicked.” This is an Abridgment of the principal Articles of the Laws of Sevarias, which were publickly receiv’d about five Years after his Arrival; and which his Successors have religiously observ’d ever since their first Establishment. After their Publication, he applied himself, with great diligence, to the enforcing of them; which he effected, partly by Gentleness, and partly by the fear of his Arms. But, indeed, he had taken his Measures so well, that he met with but few Obstacles, and still fewer persons who dar’d to oppose his Designs. For if, on the one side, his Laws were not agreeable to ill Men, yet, on the other, they were perfectly approv’d by all the Good, because they were strictly just and equitable. ’Tis true, the Parses made some little difficulty of coming into a Community of Goods; but, as they were all Strangers, and their Fortune depended absolutely on that of their Chief, they soon submitted to his Will: which they did the more readily, as they saw the Stroukarambians, (who had been long used to live in Communities) come into it without any reluctance. But the hardest thing of all, was to bring those who had always led an idle life, to take to regular Labour; for which reason, this Article was not insisted on, in its severity, with respect to these; but then the younger People were kept up to it with such exactness, that, in less than twenty Years, it was generally observ’d: and there was not a slothful Person to be found, unless it were among those of an advanced Age. Sevarias reigned thirty-eight Years in a continued Prosperity, and saw all his Subjects yield a perfect Obedience to his Laws throughout his Dominions; no one ever daring to oppose his Will. During this long Reign, his People increas’d so prodigiously, that the Number of his Subjects, which he caus’d to be taken exactly every seven Years, rose to above two Millions; tho’, at the beginning of his Reign, the whole Amount was not but about eight hundred thousand. He distributed all these into Osmasies, where they liv’d in common, as their Descendants do to this day. Since his time, the City of Sevarinde is much enlarged, tho’ he himself laid the Foundations of forty Osmasies, and built many more, as far on as to Sporounde, of which also he was the Founder. He caus’d divers Canals to be cut in the Plains of Sevarambe, for the Improvement of the Land, tho’ it was naturally very fertile, and form’d the Designs of several publick Works, which his Successors have since executed.

236

The History of the Sevarambians

Having married ten or twelve Wives, he had many Children by them, whose Posterity is very numerous, and greatly respected among the Sevarambians. They even enjoy divers Privileges not common to the other Subjects; the principal of which is, that of being admitted into the Magistracy three Years younger than those of other Families. For several Years, Sevarias took great pains in cultivating and enriching the Language, which was attended with such Success, that, ever since his time, it has equall’d any of the Eastern Tongues in Politeness, and Sweetness of Expression. Nay, he made so many good Observations, and accommodated the Fundamentals of it so well, that, by the Industry and Improvement of those who came after him, in the fifth Reign, it was got to that degree of Perfection, that, for Beauty and Copiousness, it exceeded both the Greek and the Latin. At length, after having reigned thirty-eight Years complete, being now seventy, and beginning to feel the Infirmities of old Age, he resolv’d to resign the Empire to some other Person, that he might spend the rest of his days in Repose and Privacy. For this purpose, he conven’d all the Osmasiontes of the Nation, (that is to say, all the Governors of Osmasies, which also to this day make up the general Council) and acquainted them with his Resolution. At the same time he advis’d them, “to proceed to the choice of a new Viceroy, and to consult the SUN, by whose Will they ought to regulate themselves, in an Affair so important; assuring them, that their glorious Monarch would not fail of giving them to know, by Lot, the Person whom he had destin’d to be his Successor, if they cast it according to the Order that he had already prescrib’d for that purpose.” This Discourse threw the Assembly into a visible Sadness, which he perceiving, immediately represented to them, that, “he was now far advanced in Years, and, his Strength beginning to fail him, could no longer hold the Reins of Government;” that, “therefore it wou’d be for the publick Good, to choose a Person younger, and more vigorous than himself, for the Management of the State;” and that “after having labour’d thirty-eight Years for the Prosperity and Happiness of the Nation, it was but reasonable that he should at last think of indulging himself in Ease and Repose.” He added, that, “besides these solid Reasons, he had had secret Advertisements from the SUN, to retire from publick Affairs, and to resign to some other Person, the Administration of the State, and the Office of High-Priest; which is to continue, for ever, inseparable from the Viceroyship.” When he had ended this Discourse, which exceedingly affected all that heard it, the several Members of the Council, after having testified their Respect and Gratitude, and the Regret they had to be governed by any other but him, pray’d him, “to

Part III

237

keep, to the end of his days, a Dignity which he had been so long in possession of, and in which he had acquitted himself with so much Glory; or, at least, that he would give them one of his Sons to reign in his stead, if he should still persist in his Resolution of resigning it to another.” They went on, that, “the Nation having, during the whole Course of his Reign, had such sensible Proofs of his Prudence, of his Virtue, and the Love he bore to his People, would not be able to console it self under the loss of him; and that, the only Means to assuage the Grief which all his Subjects would feel on this occasion, would be the placing on the Throne one of his own Children, whom he should judge most worthy to succeed him; to the end, that in his Person, and those of his Descendants, they might always have the living Image of their august Predecessor, and venerate, in them, the profound Wisdom, and incomparable Virtues of a Prince, to whom the Nation is indebted for all its Happiness.” With this view, they offered to make all his Dignities hereditary to his Family, and to prefer so illustrious a Blood as his, to all the Men upon Earth. To these pressing Reasons they added many others, and made use of all the Arguments and Means which they could think of, to prevail with him to accept their Offers. But nothing could move this great Man; for he continued deaf to all their Reasons and Intreaties: and his Virtue, on this occasion, triumph’d over all the Weaknesses of the human Mind. He then told them, that, “the State being purely Heliocratical, he could not accept of the Offers they had made him, because, in the choice of a Viceroy, they must, according to the establish’d Laws, govern themselves entirely by the Will of the SUN, who would let them know, by Lot, which of his Subjects was most agreeable to him, and worthiest to command his People.” He thank’d them, however, for their Zeal and Affection; and said farther, that, tho’ “he had as much Love and Tenderness for his Children as any Father could have, he would never depart from that Obedience which he was in Duty bound to render to that glorious King, who had rais’d him to the Throne;” that, “when the publick Good was the thing in question, a Man ought to impose silence on his paternal Affection, and make all private Interests give way to that of the State, of which the Prince should always take care to shew himself the true Father.” He added that, “he hoped, on the like occasions, the Virtue of his Successors would imitate his Example, and let Posterity see, that the Honour and Glory of Sovereigns consists only in exerting their utmost Endeavours to make the People happy, which Heaven has committed to their Government and Conduct.” The Osmasiontes finding, by this peremptory Answer, an absolute Necessity of changing their Viceroy, chose four out of their own Body; and the Lot fell upon one of them named Khomedas, whom, afterwards,

238

The History of the Sevarambians

they call’d Sevarkhomedas; adding to his Name the two first Syllables of that of Sevarias, which has been done ever since to all his Successors. Three days after the Election, Sevarias, accompanied with all the great Officers of State, led Khomedas to the Temple, to perform the Ceremonies of his Inauguration, which he would have to be very magnificent, as well to do honour to his Successor, as to shew the People, by his own Example, what Respect they ought to render to their Sovereign. He offer’d, on the Altar, a Sacrifice to the God of Light, and pronounc’d a second time, the Prayer which he made when he was chosen by a Voice from Heaven, adding only this Petition to it, “that it might please this illustrious Star, to enlighten and guide the new Viceroy, whom he had, himself, elected to govern his People after him.” Then, turning towards the Person who was to be his Successor, he spoke to him with a loud Voice, before all the People, in the following manner. “Before I resign that Authority which, as yet, continues vested in me, I feel my self oblig’d, O Khomedas, to make some Remonstrances to you: I feel my self oblig’d to it, I say, for the Glory of our divine Monarch, for the Good of his People, and for your particular Instruction. “The Design which, at present, brings us to this Temple, has something in it very surprizing. You, who were yesterday my Subject, are now going to be my Sovereign; I descend voluntarily from the Throne, and you are mounting it without opposition; and by this Action, we shall leave Posterity as remarkable an Example, as History any where furnishes. For there are few such Changes happen in a State, but where either Paternal Love, or the Weakness of Princes are the true Motives; or else the Law of a Conqueror imposes a necessity of them. But it is not so with us upon this occasion. It is neither Blood nor Nature that sollicit me in your favour; it is neither your Strength nor my Weakness, that obliges me to resign the Sceptre and Diadem of the SUN; no, ’tis only the awful Will of our most glorious Monarch, and that Obedience which I owe to his sacred Orders, that advances you to this high Dignity. And tho’ this his Choice of you to be his Lieutenant, and my Successor in the Monarchy, ought justly to inspire your Soul with sublime Thoughts, yet ought it not to fill you with Pride, nor lead you to forget your natural Condition. Remember therefore, still, that you are a Man; that by the common Laws of Birth you have no Pre-eminence over others; that you, like them, are subject to the Infirmities of Nature, the Inconstancy of Fortune, and that the same fatal Necessity which finishes their Destiny, must also put an end to yours. Consider seriously, how great the weight of the Crown is, of whom you hold it, and to whom you must give an account of your Behaviour, in so advanced a Station. Reflect, often, on

Part III

239

the Happiness of the preceding Reign; and, from the Example which you have to follow, learn what Example you ought to leave to those that shall come after you. The Functions of the Viceroyship, to which you are called, are all great and noble; they demand a close Application, an upright Mind, an intrepid Courage, an immoveable Constancy, and an extreme Prudence: and I doubt not but you are possess’d of all these high Qualities, since our resplendent God, who enlightens us, and sees and knows all things, has made a choice of you, in preference to all his other Subjects, to be his prime Minister. But yet, suffer me to say, that in the Government of a State, there are two ways which lead to very different ends. The first is, that of good Princes, and the other the Road of Tyrants. The one tends, straight on, to Glory; and the other, certainly, depresses into Infamy. For Tyrants give up the Reins to their Passions, and yielding to the Biass of their evil Hearts, perpetually destroy, by their Vices, even the Works of their own Prudence. They rarely direct their Minds to the great Author of their Power, think but little of the Account they are to give to him, and never consider, that, the more slow the Issues of his Justice are, his Judgments will at last be the more dreadful. And from hence it comes to pass, that their Rule is, generally, hateful; their End, often, tragical; and their Memory, always, detested. “On the contrary, good Princes conduct themselves only by the Lights of right Reason; they make their Duty their inviolable Rule, and by following in every thing the Counsels of a righteous Prudence, establish their Thrones on Foundations never to be shaken. They are belov’d during their Lives, they are lamented at their Deaths, and the Remembrance of their Reigns is always dear and precious to Posterity. “Far then from believing, that you can hesitate, one moment, with respect to the choice of these two ways, I persuade my self that you have already taken the generous Resolution, to imitate the Conduct of good Princes, with as much care, as you are determin’d to fly the Maxims of Tyrants. Your Duty, your Honour, your own Interest, indispensibly oblige you; and, yet more than all, I exhort you to it, in the Name of that God, whose living Image you are to be in this State. He it is that hath given us Laws, of which this day he makes you the Depository, the Interpreter, and the Executor; and these Laws, being the Decrees of a Wisdom not subject to change, he will not admit of any Alteration in the Fundamental Constitutions of the Kingdom. Respect then the Source from whence they spring; take a special care that you change nothing in them, and never fail to punish the Rashness of those who would prophane the sacred Ordinances of the SUN, by an impure Mixture of their own Imaginations. Use the absolute Power which the Laws entrust you with, for the distribution of Justice, the Encouragement of Temperance,

240

The History of the Sevarambians

and to make Peace flourish: for on these depend the Quiet and Happiness of Society; which, therefore, it will become you to endeavour to preserve by a careful Culture of Innocence of Manners, and a severe Chastizement of the Licentiousness of Vice. The Government of good Men is easy; but it is a thing of difficulty indeed, to rule a wicked People. The only Means then of reigning with Glory, is, to dispense Rewards and Punishments according to the utmost Exactness of Justice. For this Cause, therefore, it is necessary that a Prince should be always arm’d in Peace as well as War, that he may be able at any time to repell foreign Injuries, subdue domestick Rebellions, and make himself equally fear’d and respected, in all Places, by the Power of his Arms, and the Rectitude of his Laws. “I have made it my Business by my past Actions to establish the truth of these Maxims, which I this day solemnly propound to you, in the Presence of that GOD which enlightens us, and before all this People that hear me; and ’tis your part to make a right Use of my Remonstrances. “And now, I surrender, into your hands, the Crown and Sceptre of the SUN, being the last Ensigns remaining with me of that Authority, which, by this Act, I resign to you according to his Order. Answer then by your Conduct the Intention of this divine Monarch; accomplish, to the utmost, our Hopes and Wishes; and, in a word, take it as a certain Maxim, that the Glory of a Prince, who is truly so, derives less from the Lustre of his Diadem, than the Happiness of his Subjects.”

SEVARKHOMEDAS, IID VICE-ROY. As soon as he had concluded this Discourse, he took Khomedas by the hand, and leading him up to the Altar, made him swear by the GOD invisible, eternal and infinite, by the visible and glorious SUN, and by the Love of his Country, to observe religiously the fundamental Constitutions of State, and neither to add any thing to them, nor to diminish from them. Then seating him on the Throne, placing the Crown on his Head, and the Sceptre in his Hand, he saluted him, “Vice-Roy of the SUN,” and paid him the first Homage. After which he invited all the Officers of State that were present to imitate his Example, and then turning towards the People, gave them many excellent Advices. Particularly he represented to them, that, “above all things the Duty of Subjects consisted in that Respect, Obedience, and Fidelity which were due from them to the sovereign Authority,” that, “tho’ their Suffrages and Consent were indeed necessary to the Establishment of it, they ought never the more, upon that account, to imagine, that, it was the meer Creature of their Will; for that

Part III

241

Providence had a much greater Share in the making of Princes, who were therefore to be regarded as the most lively Images of the Deity here below.” That, “if it so happened that they did not acquit themselves well of their Duty, the Subjects could, yet from thence, plead no Right to depart from theirs.” That, “Heav’n often authorized th’unrighteous Actions of Sovereigns, for the Chastizment of the People, when by their Offences, they have drawn down on themselves, the Strokes of its Justice;” that, “in this Case they ought to suffer without murmuring, or in any sort giving ear to rebellious Counsels; because Rebellion was not only the most detestable of all Crimes, but also the greatest of all Follies; seeing, instead of procuring Liberty for those who engage in it, it precipitates them, often, into a still harder Slavery, on which side soever the Victory turns; and in a word, it was not only the Duty of Subjects to submit to lawful Authority, but also their most solid Interest to do so.” After this Resignation of the Empire, he retir’d with his Family to an Osmasie, which he had built about a day’s Journey from Sevarinde, in a very pleasant Place and a wholesome Air. He there liv’d as a private Person, without concerning himself at all with publick Affairs, unless when he was consulted; which, indeed, he was upon all important Occasions as long as he liv’d; as well to testify a Respect and Veneration for his Person, as for the Deference and Esteem which they had for his Opinion. He liv’d sixteen Years after his Resignation, without feeling any of the Weaknesses of Age, with respect to his Understanding; for his Judgment and Memory continu’d sound to the last Breath of his Life. When he found his Death approaching, he exhorted his Children, “to be steadfast in the Practice of Virtue, and the Love of their Country; putting them in mind, that, true Glory consists in a strict Conformity to the Rules of Justice and Temperance.” He went on, that, “tho’ his Body indeed was mortal, his Soul was of an ethereal Nature, and wou’d, as soon as she could make her Escape from her terrestrial Prison, take her flight to that glorious Star, from whence she received her Original, there to put on a new Cloathing, more beautiful and perfect than her former; and that the same Change would be made on all, whose Lives and Manners were pure and righteous, and who obeyed from their Hearts the Ordinances of God, who discerneth all things, and knoweth all Actions. That, on the contrary, the impious and wicked, who, in defiance of his Authority, have given up their Innocence, and gone on in a Contempt of his Laws, should be severely chastiz’d after their decease, and that their Souls should be thrust into Bodies more abject and infirm than the present; after which they should be driven away to Places far distant from the lucid Face of the SUN, there to undergo the most excessive Rigours

242

The History of the Sevarambians

of Winter, and be buried in the shocking Darkness of primitive Night, till they shall have expiated their Crimes.” As soon as he had ended these Exhortations he Resign’d his Soul, to the excessive Grief of the whole Nation, who went into mourning for him fifty Days, and discover’d a most unheard of Sorrow at his Death: For they regarded him as the Father of their Country, and the Author of all the Felicity they enjoy’d. And indeed the Memory of this great Man is still, and ever will be, so dear and venerable to the Sevarambians, that they would have, long since, raised Altars to him, and paid him divine Honours, if he himself (who had some such Apprehension, and was a profess’d Enemy to Idolatry) had not guarded against it by an express Prohibition before his decease. They gave him royal Obsequies, and offer’d very extraordinary Sacrifices on this occasion, and his Successor spar’d nothing that might do an Honour to his Memory, or let the Nation see the sensible Regret which he felt for the Loss of him. And this pious and prudent Conduct greatly increas’d the Love and Esteem of his People, added a new Lustre to his Reign, and made him consider’d as a worthy Successor of Sevarias. He reign’d but six Years after the decease of this Prince. For finding himself attacked with a violent Disease, he resign’d the Government, following in that, his Predecessor, as he had also endeavour’d to imitate him in his Conduct ever after his Advancement. During this Reign many Osmasies were built, and all the Arts began to flourish, and arrive at some Perfection, which had been introduc’d in the time of Sevarias; to whom he erected a magnificent Tomb, which is still to be seen in the Temple at Sevarinde. He also built large Bridges on each side of the Island, to make a more commodious Communication with opposite Land, which before was only by Boats. Besides these things, he form’d a Design of encompassing the whole Island with a strong Wall; but, as he perceiv’d himself not likely to live long, he left the Care of that Affair to his Successors.

BRONTAS. IIID VICE-ROY. The Name of him who was elected in his place was Brontas, but after his Election he was called Sevarbrontas, according to the Compliment paid to his Predecessor. He trod in the Steps of the Vice-Roys before him, he cultivated the Plains, and even the Mountains in divers Places, particularly in the way to Sporounde, which he made much more commodious than it had been, by laying there the Foundations of several Cities and Towns, which are much enlarg’d since. In his Reign, the Wall which encompasses the Island was began, according to the Projection of

Part III

243

Sevarkhomedas. By Study and Practice this Prince became so skillful in Architecture, that he much embellish’d and beautifi’d all the Edifices, which had been erected by his Predecessors. While he was on the Throne, some Dissensions arose among the Sevarambians, occasion’d by certain Parses, newly come over, who would have set up a Property of Goods, contrary to the fundamental Laws of the State. This Affair gave him much trouble, but at length he compass’d it; and to prevent, for the future, the like Disorders, he absolutely forbad all Commerce with the northern Continent; and wou’d no longer admit such troublesome Spirits as ours among his People. He was descended from the Prestarambians; for which Cause he much enlarged Sporounde, and the rest of the Places on the Road, to render an Intercourse with it more easy. He reign’d thirty four Years, and then resign’d the Empire to another, after the Example of his Predecessors.

DUMISTAS. IVTH VICE-ROY OF THE SUN. To Sevarbrontas succeeded Dumistas, a Stroukarambian by Descent. He was inclin’d to have extended his Borders, by subduing a Nation which inhabited a Country, farther down the River, about twenty four Leagues from Sevarinde; but the Council oppos’d it, and wou’d not allow the making any new, unnecessary Conquests, it being contrary to the Maxims of Sevarias who was of opinion, that the Land round about Sevarinde ought to be improv’d to the utmost before they touch’d of any more distant, unless that in the way to Sporounde. Seeing therefore, that his Design was not acceptable, he applied himself to the Improvement of Agriculture; and built new Osmasies in divers Places, particularly at Arkropsinde, where he was born. He likewise introduc’d some new Ceremonies in Religion to give it more Pomp; as he also did in the Osparenibon, or Solemnity of Marriage. Besides these things, he made divers Regulations with respect to the publick Rejoicings, and instituted new Dances in the Erinbasion, or Feast of the SUN, which are observ’d to this day. They say, that not being able to succeed in his martial Designs, his Mind took a quite contrary Turn, and amus’d it self in the ways above mention’d. His Reign was but eleven Years: And yet, short as it was, he was the first that held the Government to the end of his days. ’Tis true, an Accident was the Occasion of it, for he died suddenly of a Fall, which brought on an Interregnum of fifteen Days only.

SEVARISTAS. VTH VICE-ROY. Sevaristas, a Descendant of Sevarias, was elected in his stead; so that, in his Person, the Blood of the first Vice-Roy again mounted the Throne.

244

The History of the Sevarambians

The Virtues and Endowments which shone in this Prince, gave great Hopes, and even Expectations, to the whole Kingdom, that he would worthily fill the Place of that illustrious Person from whom he sprung. Nor were they disappointed, for he prov’d a lively Image and perfect Imitator of him. He was but thirty Years old when he was advanc’d to the Government, but even then he was master of a Wisdom and Prudence altogether extraordinary. The Nation was extreamly increas’d, and Peace and Plenty triumph’d in it at the time of his Accession to the Throne; so that his Reign was happy even from its beginning. As he had great numbers of Subjects, which by the Maxims of State he was oblig’d to find Employment for, he undertook Works of vast Labour, and almost unsurmountable Difficulty. Particularly he finish’d the Palace at Sevarinde, and the Walls of the Island; he built the great Amphitheatre, and cut the Way thro’ the Mountains, which we took notice of in the former Part. He also renew’d the Intercourse with Persia, and the other Nations of our Continent, which Sevarbrontas had prohibited; but chang’d the Manner of it, allowing only some of the Sevarambians to travel into our Parts, in order to pick up, among us, such Arts and Sciences as they judg’d might contribute to the Glory and Happiness of their own Nation, without making any discovery of their Country among us. In short, by his Care and Industry, this People became perfectly polish’d; for he establish’d the Sciences, the most useful Arts, and most magnificent publick Spectacles among them. He instituted the Feast call’d Khodimbasion, that is to say, that of the great GOD, which Sevarias himself had given the first Hint about, and his Successors had not cared to attempt, as fearing they did not fully comprehend the Sense of their Legislator. But this Prince, either assuming a greater Privilege on the account of his Blood, or else having a clearer Idea of the Intention of his illustrious Ancestor than any of his Predecessors, got over all Difficulties, and, after regulating the Manner of its Solemnization, order’d that it should be celebrated every Deinemis that is to say, once in seven Years: Which therefore he accordingly did six times during his Reign, which was forty seven Years; when he retir’d from the Empire, and liv’d twelve Years afterwards.

KHEMAS. VITH VICE-ROY OF THE SUN. To this illustrious Prince succeeded Sevarkhemas, who was a great Naturalist, and applied himself much to the study of Simples and Metals; of which last he discover’d several Mines, and even some rich ones of Gold, which he applied to the adorning of the Temple of the SUN, and

Part III

245

the Palace at Sevarinde; for they make no Money there, it being not at all necessary, and the Use of it even forbidden by the fundamental Laws of the State. It was he that cover’d the great shining Globe in the Temple, which represented the SUN, with the large Plate of massy Gold, divided and engrav’d in Rays, that is still to be seen there. He reign’d forty three Years, and then resign’d the Government.

KIMPSAS. VIITH VICE-ROY OF THE SUN. The Successor of Sevarkhemas was Sevarkimpsas. He was a great Traveller in his own Dominions, which he visited even to the least Osmasie. He took great delight in Gardening, caus’d the Roads to be level’d and made good, and set up Indices, or Mercuries, at proper Places for the Convenience of Travellers. He measur’d out, and mark’d the Distance of Towns from one another, and appointed Female Slaves to be kept in all Towns and Cities for the Use of Strangers. He made war on the Southern Stroukarambians, a fierce and brutal People, which never acknowledg’d the Authority of Sevarias, who despis’d the Conquest of them, and even advise’d his Successor, never to attack them first, but to content himself with the Land they were already possess’d of, which, well cultivated, was capable of maintaining six Times as many People as they had then in their Dominions. They had therefore contemn’d these Barbarians to a Degree of Neglect, as long as they continu’d quiet; but becoming so audacious as to make an Irruption into the Territory of Sevarkimpsas, he invaded them with an Army, defeated them in several Engagements, and impos’d an annual Tribute on them, of a certain Number of young Men and Maids, to be Slaves to the Sevarambians. And, because there were good Mines in their Mountains, he built Fortresses among them, which are garrison’d with young Sevarambians, who take their Turns, and go at a time appointed to relieve one another. He reign’d twenty-eight Years, and resign’d to

MINAS. VIIITH VICE-ROY. Minas the Person that is now upon the Throne, and the same which sent for us to Sevarinde. He has already, govern’d a long time, and when I set out from thence for Persia, it was said he design’d to surender the Crown soon, being grown very old. He has also perform’d several Things. Among others, he finish’d the great Aquæ-Duct which brings all the Water of a River, that descends from the tops of certain Mountains, six or seven Miles off, to Sevarinde. This Work had been

246

The History of the Sevarambians

begun by his Predecessor, but was compleated by him in the first twelve Years of his Reign. He is a just and strict Man, and will be punctually obey’d; but otherwise a great Lover of the Nation, by whom also he is greatly belov’d. I liv’d thirteen or fourteen Years under his Government, where I saw many Things which happen’d in that time, having been very exact in making Observations on the Laws and Manners of this People, of which ’tis time that I give a more particular Account than I have hitherto done.

THE LAWS, MANNERS, AND CUSTOMS OF THE PRESENT SEVARAMBIANS. In the History of Sevarias and that of his Successors, I have given a short Sketch of the Laws of this People, and shown what were the principal Maxims of their Government. I might here extend my self very much, and recite all the Regulations and Ordinances which have been made by the several Vice-Roys from Sevarias down to Sevarminas; but as such a Deduction would be too long and tedious, I shall content my self with taking notice of such Things, only, as are most remarkable. The Government is monarchical, despotical, and heliocratical, as to its original Plan; that is to say, The supreme Power and Authority resides in one only Monarch, who is the sole Master and Proprietor of all the Substance of the Nation, and the Sovereign whom they thus acknowledge is the SUN. But, considering the Administration of the State with regard to Men, ’twill be found a successive, despotick Monarchy, which has also a mixture of Aristocracy and Democracy in it. This appears, in that the Vice-Roy, who alone represents the real Lord, is not only advanc’d to this Dignity by the Choice of the SUN, but by the Election of the great Council, and the Consent of the People. For when a Vice-Roy is to be chosen, the great Council pitch upon four of their own Body, who draw Lots, and he to whom the Figure of the SUN falls, is immediately declar’d Chief, as being the Designation of that illustrious Star. But then, those who rise to these Offices are preferr’d, first, by the Vote of the People of each Osmasie, who dispose of all Posts up to that of the Osmasionte, or Cænobiarch. And when once a Man gets into that Rank he is a Member of the general Council, and has a deliberative, and negative Voice for the Osmasie which he represents. In the beginning of the Establishment, when the Nation was not so numerous, these Osmasiontes belong’d to the common or privy Council which assists the Vice-Roy, but as the People increas’d, a general Council was set up, consisting wholly of this Body of Men, one of whom was chosen for the common Council, to represent, first, four Osmasies, afterwards six, and

Part III

247

now, at last, they are come up to eight. These Representatives are called Brosmasiontes; and such Persons are always pitch’d on for this Office as are intended for Senators, the eldest of them always taking the Place of any one newly deceas’d. I wou’d be understood to mean here, the most ancient in Employment; for the real Age of the Person is not at all regarded upon this Occasion. These Senators are, at present, twenty-four in number, and assist the Vice-Roy in all important Affairs, being the great Council of State. They call these Senators Sevarobastes, that is to say, Assistants of Sevarias and his Successors. There is also another inferior Body consisting of thirty-six Brosmasiontes, out of which a lower kind of Sevarobastes are made for the filling up any vacant Post, and the Government of Cities; except those of Sporounde, and Arkropsinde, which have always one of the superior Sevarobastes, as are Albicormas and Brasindas, these Places being very considerable. Besides the Business of being Counsellor to the Vice-Roy, almost all the Sevarobastes hold one of the principal Offices of State. As that of General of the Army, Admiral, Prefect of the Buildings, Provisions, Sacrifices, Schools, solemn Feasts, and several other such things. They also, have each of them, a particular Council to assist them in the execution of their Employments. Every Governor has also his Council in his own City, or Province, as we found at Sporounde, the first and most considerable among them; for it contains all the Places beyond the Mountains, and the whole Remains of the Prestarambian Nation, the greater Part of which have quitted that Country and settled themselves in Sevarambe. From whence also, they send all Persons that are any ways defective in Body or Mind hither. Which is the reason that this Country is call’d Sporombe, as we have before remark’d. Besides these Magistrates and Officers which I have just been mentioning, there are several inferior ones, among whom, those who have the Conduct of Youth are much consider’d: Because on the good Education of Children, the safety of the State, and, indeed, that of the whole Nation greatly depends. The Superintendants also of divers Arts, are highly esteem’d; and, especially, those that have the Care of Agriculture and Buildings, these two Employments being not only very useful, but also the most universal Businesses of the Nation. As the Magistrates are rais’d above the People, and exercise Functions more noble than the common Sort, they merit greater Rewards, which, therefore, they accordingly receive, proportionate to their Rank in the Common-wealth: For, in the first place, they have the

248

The History of the Sevarambians

Glory of commanding and the Pleasure of being obey’d. Then the Laws allow them more Wives than any of the other Subjects; and also a certain number of Slaves to serve them. Besides which, they are better lodg’d, eat more elegantly, and wear finer Cloathing than any private Person; and every body pays them that Respect and Honour that is due to their Quality. And further, from the Moment that a Man is admitted into the Magistracy, he may aspire to the Sovereignty it self, being then ascending the several Steps, that lead up to it. All the Vice-Roys, since Sevarias, have arriv’d at it in this way, and indeed there is no other; which makes every one, who has, either, any Merit or Ambition in him, to endeavour the acquiring the Love and Esteem of his Fellow-Citizens, in order to secure their Suffrages when ever an Election shall happen. If we seriously reflect on these Customs and Manners of the Sevarambians, we shall find that we have all of us, in the main, the very same Desires, and propose to our selves the like Ends in the Pains we take to advance our Fortunes, and procure the Comforts and Conveniences of Life. But there is yet this Difference between them and us, that the Means by which they advance themselves are all honest and lawful, whereas we frequently, by base and even criminal Methods attempt to break thro’ our Obscurity, and extricate our selves from the miserable, low Estate we are plac’d in. And if in a way just or unjust we come to attain Riches and Honours, we too commonly abuse them, or leave them to our Children to be dispos’d of according to their Pleasure. But the Sevarambians, who are not suffer’d to do any thing but what is intrinsically good, cannot preserve their Dignities but by a constant Practice of Virtue, and have nothing to leave to their Children but a good Example for their Imitation. When an Interregnum happens, the oldest Senator acts as ViceRoy till the great Council have agreed on a Successor. The first thing which the new Lieutenant doth, is to call a general Council of the whole Nation, where all the Osmasiontes, and generally the great Officers of State, assist at it. Then he declares to them the Choice that the SUN has made of him in particular, and demands of them, if they will freely submit to the Will of their God and King, and acknowledge him as the Lieutenant? In answer to which, they all cry with a loud Voice, Erimbas imanto, that is to say, Let the Will of the King of Light be obey’d. After this Recognization, they follow him to the Temple, where he offers Perfumes to the SUN, and returning Thanks for the special Favour he has shown him, he devotes himself to his Service, and promises Fidelity to him, and to administer Justice, and afford Protection to the People. This being done, he ascends and seats himself in the Throne, where we saw Sevarminas when we had our Audience. All the

Part III

249

Sevarobastes follow him in their Places, and the oldest of them advancing, puts the Glory, or rather Crown, on his Head, which we spoke of before. Then every Senator swears Fealty and Assistance to him, and all the People Submission and Obedience to both him and the Council. And if there is at that time any Law to be propos’d, he declares it before all that are present, and offers Reasons to support it, ordering Copies of it to be deliver’d to every Osmasionte, and desiring him to examine it and let him know his Sentiments of it. Nine Days after, in the same general Assembly, the Law, if it is approv’d of, is confirm’d and establish’d by them all, and each Member takes a Copy of it for the Use of his Osmasie; after which the Vice-Roy dismisses them, and goes and takes possession of his Palace.———And whenever any new Law is to be pass’d, it is always done by convening a general Council, in the Manner I have just related. All Posts and Offices are held only during the Pleasure of the Vice-Roy and his Council; but it rarely happens that a Person once possess’d of any is displac’d, unless he himself desires to resign (as they generally do at about sixty or seventy) or has some way or other misbehav’d in it; which last is very seldom known. And as to the Vice-Roy himself, if it should so fall out that he proves wicked, impious, and tyrannical, and offers at a Violation of the fundamental Laws of the State; in this Case they are to do all they can by Persuasion and Remonstrance to bring him to reason; but if their Endeavours of this kind are not successful, the senior Sevarobaste may call a general Council, and laying these Grievances before them, demand their Opinion of them. Whether or no they do not think it necessary to ask of the SUN a Guardian for his Vice-Roy, to the end that his Laws may be put in Execution, and maintained in their full Force and Authority, according to the Constitution of Sevarias and his Successors? Which if they answer in the affirmative, they all immediately are to go to the Temple, where, after having offer’d Incense, and put up their Prayers to the SUN, the Sevarobastes are to cast Lots, and he to whom the Figure of the SUN falls, is declar’d Guardian of the Vice-Roy, who, on this Occasion, is to be look’d upon, and treated, as a Lunatick. After which, he is to be no more admitted at Council, but kept in a separate Palace, where, however, he is to be treated with great Gentleness and Respect, till it shall please the Divinity to restore him again to the Exercise of his Reason; and when it shall appear that he is in a Disposition to do his Duty, he is to be publickly restor’d to his Authority, and re-assume his high Post in the same Manner he was depriv’d of it. This is a Clause in one of the Laws of Sevarias, by way of Proviso, in case such a thing should happen, but in reality it never has,

250

The History of the Sevarambians

and very probably never will. The same Article respects also such as shall be indeed Lunaticks, and refuse to resign the Government. Sevarias has left behind him Forms for all these things, as also several Prayers to be offer’d to the SUN on divers Occasions; particularly that which we have given a Translation of, which is to be recited at every Election of a Vice-Roy. ’Tis now time for us to see how this great State subsists, in what Manner their Stores are laid in, and the Method by which they are dispos’d of. We have already, more than once, taken notice that one of the principal Maxims of their Government was to take away all Property of Goods from the Subjects, and vest it entirely in the Sovereign. This has been practiced ever since Sevarias, who, to support his People, and maintain them without Difficulty, caus’d publick Magazines to be erected for all the Necessaries and Conveniences of Life; as likewise for all such Things as contribute to lawful Pleasures. And from these Magazines every Osmasie is supplied with all that they want. Every Osmasie has, also, a particular Magazine for the storing its own Manufactures and Commodities, which are sent off, from time to time, to the general ones, in order to be, by them, distributed to all the rest; as well for their Subsistence, as the Exercise of their several Arts and Occupations. The Osmasies in the Country apply themselves chiefly to Agriculture; and, first of all, each takes as much of the Produce in Corn, Wine, Oil, and other Fruits, as is necessary for putting in another Crop, and their own Sustenance; and the Surplus is sent in to the publick Magazines. The same is practiced with respect to Beasts, in Places were they breed great numbers of them. They have Prefects in Hunting, Fishing, and all sorts of Manufactures, who supply them with all the Materials necessary to their several Occupations, from the Places which produce them. For example, the Workers of Cotton, Linnen, Hemp, and Silk, have their Intendants, which collect these things for their use, and send them to the Towns and Cities where they are wrought; and from those Towns and Cities, thus made up, they are again dispos’d of in such Parts of the Country as want them. The same is done with Wool, Leather, Metals, and, in a word, every thing that is serviceable in life. The like is practised too in the Materials for Building, the Intendants of which have also Magazines in their way, from whence they are furnish’d with all sorts of Stores for the erecting new Edifices, or repairing and maintaining the old ones. The Method is the same with relation to the things destin’d for Rejoycings, Festivals, and publick Shows, which have all their particular Intendants, with proper Officers under them, who command a certain Number of

Part III

251

People set apart for those Services. They have also several Osmasies appropriated to the Education of the Children of both Sexes, but each apart from the other; in which there are Tutors and Preceptors for the Instruction of the Youth, and also Masters and Professors to teach them Arts and Trades. Every one of these Osmasies has its own Magazines and Officers, and a certain Number of Slaves to do the meaner Business of the House; and from these private Magazines, every particular Person is supplied with all Necessaries. If we consider the manner of living in other Nations, we shall find that all have in reality the same sorts of Magazines; that the Cities depend on the Country, and the Country again on the Cities; that some work with their Hands, and others with their Heads; that one Set of Men were born to command, another to obey; that, they have Schools for the Education of Youth, and Masters to teach them Trades; and that, among the several Employments of Life, some are absolutely necessary, others useful and convenient, and others again conducive to Pleasure only. All these things are the same every where; but the great Difference is in the Distribution. For we have, among us, Persons who abound in Substance and Riches, while others want all things; we have some who spend their Lives in Idleness and Luxury, and others who are forc’d daily to get their Bread by the sweat of their Brow; we have some of Rank and Quality, who are neither worthy nor capable of the high Posts they possess; and we have also others of extraordinary Merit, who, being destitute of the Goods of Fortune, are still obliged to drudge miserably on in the Dirt, and even perpetually condemn’d to a low, servile State of Action, which the Generosity of their Temper abhors. But among the Sevarambians no one is poor, no one wants the Necessaries and Conveniencies of Life, and each partakes of the publick Pleasures and Diversions, without tormenting either his Body or Mind, by excessive Toil, or hard Study for the acquirement of them. A moderate, daily Exercise, of eight Hours only, procures all these Advantages for himself, his Family, and all his Children, even tho’ he should have never so many. No person has the trouble of paying Taxes and Imposts; nor is sollicitous to amass Sums of Money to enrich his Sons, fortune out his Daughters, or purchase Inheritances. The whole People are exempted from all these Cares, and are rich, even from their very Cradles. And, if they are not all advanc’d to publick Dignities, they have, at least, the satisfaction to see none but those preferr’d, whose real Merit, and the Esteem of their Fellow-Citizens, sufficiently distinguish. They are all both Nobles and Peasants; and none can either reproach another with the Meanness of his Birth, or boast of the Splendidness of his own. No

252

The History of the Sevarambians

Person has the mortification to see others live idle, while he is forc’d to work hard to support their Pride and Vanity. In a word, if we take a nice view of the Happiness of this People, we shall find that it is as perfect as any thing in this World can be, and that all other Nations, compar’d with them, are in but a poor wretched Situation. The Condition likewise of Kings, Princes, and other Sovereigns, when set against that of the Viceroy of the SUN, will appear to be very different. For they have, generally, a great deal of trouble in getting from their Subjects the Subsidies necessary to the support of the State; and are, often, forc’d to practise Violence and Cruelty for the accomplishment of their Ends. But this has no need of any such Methods; being already absolute Master of the whole Property of the Nation, none daring to refute that Obedience which is due to him, nor to pretend any particular Privilege or Exemption. He gives and takes away as he pleases, makes Peace and War when he thinks fit, and is the sovereign Arbiter of all things. He is not expos’d to Rebellions and Insurrections; every one submits to his Will, and none presumes to contest his Authority; which, as they allow, he owes it not to them, they cannot, without the most shocking Insolence, offer to take away from him. For who would be so rash as to revolt against the SUN and his Ministers? Who so vain as to think himself more worthy to command, than he whom the King of Light, which knoweth all Men, has chosen for his Lieutenant? And if any one should be such a Mad-man, as to attempt usurping the Government, where would he find People stupid enough to support his Folly; and that would, themselves, choose to become Slaves, in order to make him a Tyrant to the Sovereignty? Add to this, that Religion binds the Sevarambians, in obedience to their Superiors; for they not only acknowledge the SUN for their King, but also adore him as their God, and even believe him to be the Source of all the good things they enjoy: so that they cannot but have the greatest Veneration for his Laws, and highly esteem a Government which they are persuaded he himself establish’d among them, by the Ministry of Sevarias. Besides, their Education being good, they are early inur’d to a strict Observation of the Laws, which therefore, by long habit, becomes natural to them: and their Submission to them is still the more free and voluntary, seeing the more they reason upon them, the more just and equitable they find them.

OF THE EDUCATION OF THE SEVARAMBIANS. The wise Legislator of this People, when he was drawing up these excellent Constitutions, took a particular care not to pass over slightly so important a thing as the Education of Youth: well knowing, that the

Part III

253

Preservation or Ruin of his Laws themselves had an immediate Connection with it, and Dependence on it; Corruption of Manners, ordinarily, producing the greatest Mischiefs and Confusion in Politicks. It will be a very hard Matter for a vicious, ill-educated Man, ever to become an able Minister or a good Subject: for, on the one hand, the Violence of his Passions gives him a strong Propensity to that which is wrong, and, on the other, his Ignorance prevents him from making a right Discernment betwixt Good and Evil, Truth and Falshood. Men have naturally a Biass to Vice; and if good Laws, good Examples, and good Education do not correct it, the bad Seeds that are in them will increase, and take deeper root, and very often quite choak all the Principles of Virtue which Nature had planted. And, when this comes to be the Case, they give themselves up to their unbridled Appetites, and surrendring the Empire of Reason to their impetuous raging Passions, they find nothing so criminal but that they readily, and without scruple, can be guilty of it. Hence proceed Violences, and Rapines; Envy, Hatred, Pride, and Ambition; Rebellions, Civil Wars, Murders, Massacres, Sacrileges, and in a word all the Evils which generally afflict and plague Mankind.———But a good Education often corrects these bad Dispositions, and sometimes even stifles the vicious Seeds, by a careful Culture of those of Virtue. The great Sevarias was well aware of this; and therefore made several Ordinances respecting the Education of Children. And, first of all, having observ’d, that Parents often spoil them by a foolish Indulgence, or a too great Severity, he would not suffer these young Plants to remain in the hands of Persons so incapable of managing them. To prevent this Evil, he instituted publick Schools to bring them up in common, under the Conduct of skillful Persons chosen for that purpose; who, being neither prejudiced by Love or Hatred, would be likely to instruct them all indifferently, by Precepts, Corrections, and Examples, and bring them up in a hatred of Vices, and love of Virtue. And that the Parents might not have any opportunity of contradicting them in the discharge of their Office, he appointed, that when they had paid the first Debts of Nature to their Children, and sufficiently testified their Tenderness for these precious Fruits of their Love, he appointed, I say, that they should then resign the Parental Authority to the State and Magistrate, which are the true political Fathers of their Country. By this Ordinance, as soon as Children are seven Years old, on four certain Days of the Year, their Fathers and Mothers are obliged to take them to the Temple, where, after they are stript of the white Habits, which is what they wear from the time of their Births, they are wash’d, shav’d, anointed with Oil, cloath’d with a yellow Robe, and then

254

The History of the Sevarambians

consecrated to the Divinity. At the same time, the Parents make an absolute Surrender of the Right of Governing, which Nature had given them, and reserving to themselves nothing more than Love and Respect, from that moment they become the Children of the State. After they are thus adopted, they are sent to the publick Schools, where, for four whole Years, they are accustomed to a strict observance of the Laws, taught to read and write, and dance, and train’d up to the Exercise of Arms. When they have been four Years at these Schools, and begin to grow to some strength of Body, they are sent off for three Years more into the Country, to be there employ’d in the Tillage of the Land, which they work at, four Hours in the Day, and another four, are kept to the Practice of those things they had learnt at School. The Maids are brought up in the same manner as the Boys, or, however, with very little difference, but in separate Places; for there are Osmasies for both Sexes, and generally, in the Country, they are distant from one another. When they come to be fourteen, they change their Abodes and Habit; having green Garments given them, instead of the yellow which they wore before; and are called, in the Language of the country, Edirnai; that is to say, Persons in the third Septenary of their Age: as those in the first septenary are called Adirnai, and those of the second Gadirnai. Tho’ they are also denominated, from the Colours of their Cloathing, Alistai, Erimbai, and Forruai, the white-robe’d, the yellow, and the green. The Maids are distinguish’d by the same Appellations; excepting only, that they change the Termination ai into ei, as Adirnei, Alistei, and so of the rest. At this Age they are instructed in the Principles of Grammar, and are allowed to make choice of a Trade; which, after they have done, they are tried at it for some time, and if they are found to be apt, are put to proper Masters who perfect them in it: but if their Disposition does not appear to lie that way, they give them the choice of being Labourers or Masons, which are the two most universal Employments of the Nation. For the Maids, they are brought up to Businesses adapted to their Sex, but which are not so laborious as that of the Men; their chief Occupations being Spinning, Sewing, Weaving, and other such Exercises as do not require so much strength as that of the Men. As soon as the Girls are turn’d of sixteen, and the Youths are nineteen, they are allowed to think of Marriage; and make love to one another; which they do in the following manner: Being now of the Ages just mention’d, their Conductors take them to the common Walks, Balls, Reviews, and all publick Solemnities. On these occasions, the Youths have full liberty of addressing the Maids, and making Overtures of Love to them; and the Maids, on the other hand, may as freely receive these Declarations, without any sort of Scandal.

Part III

255

Birth, Riches, Quality, and all the other Gifts of Fortune, make no Disputes among them, for they are all equal in those respects, and there are no other Differences but those of their Sexes, and Ages; the Youths being, as we just now observ’d, three Years older than the Maids: For unequal Marriages are never allow’d of, unless in those, who, not having the good luck to get a Husband to themselves, are oblig’d to make choice of some publick Officer, to take them out of the Class of Virgins. If any one labours under any natural Infirmity, or meets with some unhappy Accident which exempts them from the Obligation of marrying, he is sent to Sporombe; for they will not suffer such Persons to dwell in Sevarambe. In the Assemblies of the young Men and Maids, Love doth not fail to play his part, and often makes a large Conquest of Hearts. Every one endeavours to attract Love by the Beauty of his Person, or the Charms of his Understanding: and those who sparkle most in these respects, and are also distinguished by their Probity and Virtue, are generally preferr’d to the others; the prudent Girls foreseeing, that these good Qualities will certainly advance them to Offices, the Dignity and Honour of which they shall, in their degree, share with their Husbands: But some, it must be own’d, from a contrary kind of Cunning, are afraid to take a Man of Merit, because of the Privilege annex’d to high Stations, which is that of having more Wives than one, if he shall think proper. These therefore choose to marry Persons of another Make than those, who, by rising in the State, may possibly divide their Hearts out to others, which this sort are willing to keep entirely to themselves. Thus each accommodates her Policy to her Inclination; some loving Pleasure, and others Honour; every one following her own particular Biass. As the Sevarambians are naturally witty, and have been well brought up, and thoroughly polish’d, the Lovers, at these Rencounters, present their Mistresses with Fruits and Flowers, Smiles, Songs, and eloquent tender Discourses, as Proofs of their Passion. All these things are indulg’d to them, and no fault is found on this account: for, on the contrary, they despise those who do not seem touch’d with Love, and look upon them as People of an evil Disposition, and Citizens unworthy of the Favours of their Country. But, on all these occasions, ’tis very seldom that any exceed the bounds of Modesty, or either say or do any thing that is shocking to Virtue; for this is expressly forbidden, and even the most impudent dare not offer at any thing contrary to Decency, because they speak to the Women only in publick, and before their Governesses. For eighteen Months the marriageable Maids, whom they call Enibei, and the young Men of the same Class, which are named Sparai, have opportunities of seeing each other, convening together, and making

256

The History of the Sevarambians

love, without coming to any real Conclusion at all; but when that time is expir’d, ’tis customary for them to declare their choice, and plight their Faith to one another: after which the rejected Rivals retire, and the Girl admits no other Lover, but him to whom she has promis’d Marriage. When the Season of the Osparenibon, or Marriage-Festival, is come, they go to the Temple, and espouse one another in the manner we have describ’d in the former Part of this History. When they are married, the Men have blue Habits given them, to denote that they are twenty-one; and the Women have also the same, as being join’d to them: but to shew that they are not yet in their fourth Septenary, they wear green Sleeves with their blue Gowns, till they are twenty-one complete; when they put a Veil on their Heads, and conceal their Hair, which they always discover till they are of that Age. On the Wedding-Evening a Feast is provided, where are present a great Number of Persons of all Ages, and both Sexes; which concludes with Musick, and Dancing. This is done in one of the Halls of the Osmasie where they are to dwell, and in which there are two Chambers prepar’d for each Couple, both on the same Floor, one of which fronts the Street, and the other looks into the Court; in which last they consummate the Marriage. But they are not permitted to lie together but once in three Nights, for the first three Years; and then two Nights in three till they are twenty-eight; after which they are at full liberty to do it as often as they please. The greatest Honour to the Women is that of being well belov’d by their Husbands, and bringing up many Children for their Country. Among private Persons, those Wives who have the most, are the most honoured; but with respect to the Magistracy, the Husbands only are regarded on this account. Barren Women are much despised; and when a Man has kept such a one five Years, he is allowed to marry some Widow, or Maid, who cannot get a Husband, or even to take a Slave for his Concubine. The only way barren Women have left them to wipe off their Reproach, is either by tending the Sick, or, if they are ingenious, turning Tutresses, and undertaking the Education of the female Youth. Every Mother is obliged to suckle her own Child, unless she is so weak as that she cannot do it without a manifest Prejudice to her Health, or some other sufficient Reason: In which Cases, the Child is given to some other Nurse that has lost her own; who are always much esteemed, when, on the decease of their own Issue, they thus take those of other People, and breed them up for their Country. This is the ordinary Method of training up and disposing of the Sevarambian Youth. But those Children that give Signs of an extraordinary Genius, and are proper for the Belles Lettres, and the Liberal Arts, are not educated in the same manner; for these are exempted from bodily

Part III

257

Labours, to be employ’d on those of the Mind. And accordingly they have Colleges, founded expressly for the Education of such Persons; out of which a certain Number is taken every seven Years, and sent to travel in our Continent, in order to bring home with them any Discoveries that may have been made among us; which is a Practice that has been kept up ever since Sevaristas re-established the Intercourse with other Nations, and recommended and prescrib’d this sort of Voyages to them. But, even these are not suffer’d to quit their Country, till they have at least three Children to leave behind them, as Pledges for their Return. And I do not know but this may be one great Reason why they never fail of doing so, if they possibly can; for I never cou’d find, that, since this Custom has been establish’d, any one single Person ever deserted Sevarambe, to live elsewhere; and that, excepting those who died on their Travels, any one was ever known not to have come back again. By the means of these Voyages it is, that there are so many Persons at Sevarinde, and the Cities round about it, who speak divers Languages of Asia and Europe; which they commonly teach those who are design’d to travel, before they leave the Country: And thus Sermodas, Carchida, and several others, were able to discourse us at first sight, seeing they understood several of our Tongues, having convers’d whole Years with the Asiaticks and Europeans, without ever letting them know what Country they came from; for they commonly pass for Persians or Armenians. The End of the Third Part.

This page intentionally left blank.

The History of the Sevarambians Part IV

T

HE Government under which the Sevarambians live, and the Education which they receive, cannot fail of making great Impressions on their Minds, and giving them a right Turn if they have but a tolerable natural Disposition before. Sevarias soon remark’d that this People were a little high-spirited, which is still visible in them: But it must be own’d that their Education changes this Temper into a noble Ambition of doing well, and acquiring Esteem. So that the very same thing which in another State wou’d give a Biass to Vice, serves here as a Spur to Virtue. For they are laudably fond of Praise, and when any of their Magistrates commend them, as having well perform’d their Duty, or done any generous Action, they are better pleas’d, than we are with rich Rewards. The Women have not less of this Desire than the Men, which is particularly discoverable in those who have brought up several Children, and always made strict Profession of Honour and Chastity. For from hence they assume a Pride which is legible in their Faces notwithstanding all the modest Art with which they endeavour to veil it. Nothing is more detestable among them than the Name of a Debauchee; and they carry this Point so far, as to make it Criminal barely to speak to a Person who has not a good Reputation, or has only been known to say, or do, a thing shocking to the Bashfulness of the Sex. But notwithstanding this, they are not great Prudes neither; for conversing daily, at their Labour, with their Fellow-Citizens of both Sexes, they are familiar enough, and, upon any occasion, will speak their Sentiments very freely, tho’ always with much Modesty. The Men are not less strict in their Professions of this sort; an indecent Action, or a lewd Expression only, in the company of Women, being sufficient to get a Person a very bad Character. Which they endeavour to avoid as much as possible, it being their Interest to acquire the Love and Esteem of every body, because this is the only way to advance themselves; for which reason among those who aspire to Dignities, one always finds an honest Emulation, which makes them keep the strictest Guard over their Words and Actions, for fear of losing their Credit. Evil speaking, and Calumnies are severely 259

260

The History of the Sevarambians

punish’d; and if it happens that any Man accuseth one of his FellowCitizens, without being able to make good his Charge, he is not only mark’d as infamous, but also grievously chastiz’d according to Law. It is a Rule with them either to speak the Truth, whenever they are question’d, or say nothing; and even the Children are rigorously punish’d, when they are catch’d in a Lye, of whatever kind it be; which accustoms them early to this practice, and makes them so punctual in it, that when one asks any thing which they have no mind to discover, they return no answer; and if the Question is much, and often press’d upon them, they even grow angry, and never fail to treat such a Person as an Impertinent. There is therefore no room to wonder, that, among People thus brought up, and who live under such a Government, there should be few addicted to lying; especially if we consider, further, that they have not the Temptations to it that the Subjects of other Nations have: For they are neither forced into it by Poverty, nor allured by the Prospect of Gain, and still, least of all, by the hope or fear of pleasing or displeasing their Superiors. Besides, when such Examples are general, there are none but the most vicious and abandon’d will depart from the common Rule, and be guilty of Actions contrary to the Customs and Maxims approv’d of by every body. To which we may add, that, among the Sevarambians the Examples of the incorrigibly vicious never go far; for they are severely chastiz’d for their first Offences, and if afterwards there is no Appearance of Amendment in them, they are banish’d to the Mines, and shut out from the Society of honest People. As to Oaths and Blasphemies, they are not so much as known among them. And one might even venture to say, that, without having ever seen the Gospel, they observe the Rules of it on this head, much better than Christians themselves; for all their whole Affirmations and Negations are only Yes and No. Drunkenness is a most unusual Crime with them; for, besides that it is very severely punish’d, it is also difficult for them to get Liquor to fuddle with, seeing they have no Taverns or Inns of any sort, and all of them eat and drink in publick, where each Person is only allow’d enough to satisfy Nature, but must not exceed the Bounds of Temperance. Besides, they are not suffer’d to drink Wine, nor any inebriating Liquor till they are married; so that being brought up to Sobriety, they contract a Habit of it, before they have it in their power to be guilty of these Debauches. The Vices to which they are naturally most inclin’d, are in the Articles of Love and Revenge. But the Laws have provided a Remedy to prevent Excesses of the former sort, by prescribing Marriage to the Youth as soon as they are capable of this Passion; and, for the other, their

Part IV

261

Education greatly corrects it: because being brought up together, they are accustomed to bear a good many things from their Companions; either because they cannot help themselves, or out of Obedience to their Superiors, who never fail to reconcile them when any considerable Difference rises among them. They are in their Tempers gay, and love to divert themselves after they have done their Day’s Work. Musick, Dancing, Running, and Wrestling, with divers sorts of Plays, are their most ordinary Recreations. They are strong, and for the most part enjoy a great degree of Health, which is owing partly to their Birth and Manner of living, and partly to their Gaiety and Liveliness of Disposition. To their Birth, because their Fathers and Mothers are united wholly by Love, and consequently must have a much greater Tenderness for each other than those who marry upon very different Considerations. And as they have a great Regard to Generation, they lie together but seldom, which makes their Issue more strong and vigorous, than those born in Places where these things are not observ’d. Besides, as the married Women are much honour’d when they have had several Children, they make a Virtue of it not to indulge too frequent a Commerce with their Husbands, as being prejudicial to Pregnancy, and rendring the Children weak, and subject to Disorders; which either kill them in their Infancy, or however, if that doth not happen to be the Case, prevent their being ever strong and vigorous Men. But, besides their Birth, their Manner of living contributes not a little to the strengthening their Bodies. For as we observ’d before, they are extreamly temperate and sober, and endure no Hardships of Hunger and Thirst. They use a great deal of Exercise, and as they are not apt to run into Debauches of any sort, there is no such thing as Gout or Stone, or any Person attack’d with an infamous Distemper among them. Their Gaiety also and Diversions very much assist in the Preservation of their Health; which is never interrupted by Solicitudes and Troubles, which break the Souls of those, who are oblig’d daily to provide for their own present Necessities, and those of their Families, or to guard against such as they may possibly fall into hereafter. But this People have no such thing as Anxiety, or Avarice among them; they can never be in want, and their greatest and only Care is to enjoy, with Moderation, the lawful Pleasures of Life. For these Reasons they are generally not only robust, but long-liv’d, it being common to see Persons of a hundred, or a hundred and twenty Years old in that Country. They are most of them tall, and even those of the lesser Sizes there, would be reckon’d lusty People with us. Many of them from six to seven Feet high; and the Women also are in the same Proportion. Not but that

262

The History of the Sevarambians

they have many much shorter; but it is not at all surprizing to see a Man who is seven Foot in Stature who, with us, would pass for a Giant. All these things which contribute to their Health, are also an Improvement to the Beauty of both Sexes. For, tho’ one but rarely meets with any of those delicate, fine Faces, which are like Wax-work, yet there are many Men and Women of very regular Features; with soft, smooth Skins, sleek, plump Bodies, Complexions agreeably white and red, and, above all, of an Air and Presence so grand and noble, as are seldom to be found among us in Europe. Their Hair is, generally, black, and their Eyes of the same Colour. Some of them, indeed, have light, chesnut Locks, but scarce any, flaxen. Their Habits are extremely commodious, but very plain; and they are made either of Linnen, Cotton, Woollen, or Silk; of which last they have three sorts. The First is the Produce of a kind of Herb, which they sow like Flax, the second is the inner Bark of a Tree, very common in that Country, and, the third is taken from Worms, as that in use among us. They have also gold and silver Tissues, but these are appropriated to the great Officers, the Gold and all Jewels to the Vice-Roy, the gold Scarf to the Sevarobastes only, and the silver ones to the Brosmasiontes and Osmasiontes. The inferior Officers and their Wives wear Silk; and the Linnen, Cotton, and Woollen Sorts, are for the common People. The Habits are of different Colours, according to their different Ages, being chang’d every seven Years. Those of the little Children are white, as was before observ’d; to the white succeed the yellow, to the yellow the green, the green are follow’d by the blue, the blue is quitted for the red, which is of two sorts; the one pale and bright, the other very deep; two sorts of grey come after the red, the darkest of which is chang’d for the black; which is the Cloathing of all in Years. The Purple, Gold, and Silver belong to the Magistrates only. And thus, by the different Colour of their Apparel, one discovers, at once, the difference of their Ages and Dignities. Some Persons may be ready to think this Variety of Colours a trifling kind of Peculiarity; but when they shall consider that, besides their Offices, all the Superiority of this People to one another, consists solely in their Ages, and that such Marks are necessary to distinguish them, to the end that every one may be honour’d according to his Rank, I imagine they will not condemn it as ridiculous. The various-colour’d Stuffs are reserv’d only for Slaves, and Strangers; for which Reason ours were all of this sort. The Men wear Caps and Hats on their Heads, of the same Colour with their Clothes. Before they are married they let their Hair grow long, but then they cut it, so as that it only just covers their Ears. Their Habits are Drawers, a Vest, and a Robe which hangs down to the middle of their Legs. They bind themselves with Girdles, and wear

Part IV

263

painted Linnen Neckcloths in the manner of our Cravats. They use Leather Gloves, Shoes, and Stockings, of which last they have also worsted ones like ours, and a sort made out of the Bark of a Tree, not known among us. The Women have different Head-Dresses, according to their different Ages. Maids manage their Hair in divers ways, and have nothing on their Heads, unless when they go into the open Air, when they put on a sort of Umbrello, or Hat made of the Silk Herb, very proper for that purpose, and therefore used by the Women of all Ages, upon the like occasions; but married Women have always Head-Dresses of the same Colour with their Apparel. The Women who have had Children, that have liv’d to be seven Years old, discover the number of them, by as many purple silk Girdles; but those that die before they attain to that Age are not at all reckoned, and the Mothers are never the more honoured upon their accounts: Which makes them exceedingly careful and tender of them, while they are in their hands. The rest of their Habits are no ways different from those of the Men, excepting that their Robes are longer, and open on the Breast. Every Year they have two new Suits of Clothes given them; one of Linnen or Cotton, and the other Woollen. The Men have also the same, and likewise the Children; so that they are always tight and well dress’d. Once in three Years each Person is furnish’d with a sufficient Stock of new Linnen, and their houshold Goods are changed as often as there is occasion: Being only Beds, Tables, and Chairs for their Rooms, and a few Dishes and Plates; for they do not need any thing more, because they do not provide their own Food, but eat in common in all the Osmasies, where they are supplied with every thing they want. They generally make three Meals in the day; which are Breakfast, Dinner, and Supper. The two first are always in publick, but in the Evening, every Person may eat with his Wife and Children only, or any Friend, if he so chooses. This Allowance gives them Opportunities of forming themselves frequently into little Parties for Diversion, either in their own Rooms, or in the common ones, or abroad: But this is never permitted till after they have done work. Thus each Person selects such Company as he likes best, and indulges himself in any favourite Recreation. Bathing is very much practised among them; and they have warm Baths in every Osmasie for the Winter, which each Person uses once in ten Days, at least. In the Summer Evenings they go into the Rivers, and the married Men and their Wives mingle very freely with one another; but the Maids and Youths have separate Places, set apart for each Sex.

264

The History of the Sevarambians

They have often publick Huntings, when Men and their Wives are allow’d to engage in the Diversion; sometimes those of one District, and sometimes those of another. The like is done with respect to Fishing; for the Management of both which Sports, there are People who make it expressly their Business. The Hours of work are fix’d, and a great Bell rings at a stated time in the Morning, to awaken them, and put them in mind of their Duty. In the Summer they rise early, by reason of the length of the Days, but in Winter later, for the contrary reason; the Hours of labour being put forward or back, according to the Difference of the Seasons. Sick Persons are exempted from work; as are, also, all those who are turn’d of sixty, if they think fit to claim their Privilege: But the Habit they have contracted of employing themselves about something, and the Name of being idle, makes them seldom plead their Exemption if they are well. Women with Child, and Nurses, have also the same Indulgence; but, notwithstanding this, all of them do what they can, rather than be seen sauntring about, and quite out of all manner of Business. The Salutations of the Sevarambians are different to different Persons. When they pass by a Magistrate they uncover themselves, and make a Bow, more or less low, according to his Rank and Dignity. To old People they also take off their Hats, but do not incline their Body at all; and to their Equals, they only make a Motion with their Hand, by laying it on their Breast, and then letting it fall down by their Side. The Women do just the same; excepting that the Maids put their left Hand on their Head when they pay their Respects to any Officer or old Person. The Magistrates salute the Youth with a little Turn of their Hand; and, when they wou’d show any particular Mark of Favour, they kiss their Foreheads. It is not customary with this People, to kiss either Women or Maids in saluting them, nor indeed so much as to touch them; there being few of that Sex who have ever known any thing like it in their younger Years, but from their Fathers or Mothers; and, afterwards, the first Kiss they receive from a Man is that in the Temple, from their Husbands at their Marriage. Not but that the Maids are allow’d to give their Hands to their Lovers, to be saluted by them; tho’ this is seldom practised, and always look’d upon as an extraordinary Favour: For otherwise ’tis only in dancing that the young Men have the liberty of so much as touching them. But they are permitted to do it to one another of their own Sex, in token of Friendship. The Compliments which they make use of in saluting, are also different; but the most common Form is, Erkimbas erman, that is to say, May the SUN love you. It is very rare that the Women are guilty of any Breaches of Honour; tho’ such things sometimes happen, as the Reader may

Part IV

265

remember in the Cases of Ulisbé, and her Fellow-Sufferers, and the young Men at the Camp, formerly taken notice of: which shews that there are, indeed, those among them, that would indulge to this Passion; but they have three things which, commonly, prevent it; viz. the Rigour of the Laws, the Want of Opportunities, and the Care that is taken to marry them early, as we have said elsewhere. However, these Reasons are all of them not sufficient, in some Instances, to restrain their amorous Impatiences; as we saw, about three Years after our Settlement at Sevarinde, in certain young Lovers, the Violence of whose Desires would not brook the waiting for their Osparenibon, which they thought too long a-coming. These were two Youths, one of which was called Bemistar, and the other Pansona. The first had a Sister, named Bemiste, who was very like him, and but a Year younger. They were both of the same size, had the same Tone of Voice, and, in short, were so perfectly alike, that no two Persons could resemble each other more. In the Osmasie where Bemiste dwelt, was a very handsome Girl, whose Name was Simmadé, whom Bemistar was passionately in love with, and by whom he was also belov’d. The Affection of these two created a Friendship between Bemiste and Simmadé; the last growing fond of the other, because she was her Lover’s Sister; and the first conceiving a liking to her, as being her Brother’s Mistress. Having, therefore, on this account, contracted a great Intimacy, they were almost always together; and, at last, contriv’d the Matter so, that they were put into the same Room, and order’d to be Bedfellows. Bemiste was belov’d by Pansona, and return’d his Passion; who, for this reason, had likewise engag’d in as close a Friendship with her Brother, as Simmadé had with her self: so that they also were quarter’d in the same Apartment, and lay together, being Confidents to one another. By the means of Bemistar, who, as a Brother, might at any time visit his Sister, Pansona had often the pleasure of seeing his dear Bemiste, and saying any thing he thought fit in the presence of her Brother; who, on the other side, was exceedingly well pleas’d that he should entertain her, while he was declaring his own Passion to the lovely Simmadé. They had therefore these Interviews as often as possible; and found, on all hands, their Love daily increasing, by the mutual Proofs which they gave each other: which kindled in them such a Flame, and wrought them up to such an Impatience, as it was hard for them to check. This made them perpetually wishing for the arrival of the happy Day which was to put an end to their Pains. But the Approach of it seem’d too slow for these young Lovers, whose Hearts were wholly engross’d by the Violence of their Passions. Bemistar was the most raging and transported of all of them, and his Impetuosity suggested an Expedient to him for the allaying his

266

The History of the Sevarambians

Torment, by imposing on the Keepers of the Osmasie which his Mistress belong’d to. For he imagin’d, if he could persuade his Sister to change Clothes with him, and come and lie with Pansona, he might easily supply her place in the Bed with Simmadé. Full of this Project therefore, he immediately consulted his Friend, who being no wiser than himself, and having less to hazard in the Affair, confirmed him as much as he could in this Design. Being then both in the same Sentiment, the only remaining Difficulty was to bring the Girls to consent. This they believ’d would be very hard to do, but at length they resolv’d to attempt it, and to carry their point, if possible. Accordingly, soon after this Determination, they made the utmost Efforts to seduce the two innocent Creatures; and enforc’d their Discourses and Persuasions so strongly, that in about a Month they had wrought them perfectly to their purpose; and got them to join in the Intrigue. The time agreed on for the execution of it was a solemn Day, when, every body being engag’d in the celebration of the Feast, the Brother and Sister had an opportunity to change their Habits, and by that means their Abode and Lodging. Thus Pansona had the entire enjoyment of his dear Bemiste, and Bemistar of the charming Simmadé. After which, when the Festival was near concluding, they rechanged their Clothes, and each returned home, much delighted that they had so successfully indulg’d themselves in their stolen Pleasures. But, as violent things are seldom lasting, the Fire of the transported Bemistar began to abate upon enjoyment, and was kindling afresh for a new Object. For while he staid with his Mistress, he had free and frequent Conversations with several others of the Osmasie, amongst whom he had seen one, whose Name was Ktalipse, who, he fancied, was possess’d of much greater Charms than his Simmadé, whom he began to be weary of in about three days. However, he dissembled his Sentiments, and discover’d no kind of Relaxation of his Passion to his Mistress. But yet, on all occasions, that he could find to speak to Ktalipse, he endeavour’d to insinuate himself into her Esteem, before he should be obliged to leave the Osmasie. In the mean while, he carefully enquir’d, what Lovers she had, and who they were, and was told that there were three or four Pretenders to her, one of which she gave a manifest Preference to. He therefore got acquainted with the happy Man as soon as he could, and imparted to him, as a Confident, his Love of Simmadé; though without letting him know that any thing particular had pass’d between them. And, the more effectually to attach him, he inform’d him that he could, by his Sister, much advance his Affair with Ktalipse. The other, who desired nothing more, took him immediately at his word, and begg’d him to gain over Bemiste to his Interest, and to engage her to do him all Offices in her power, with his Mistress. As soon as Bemistar had receiv’d

Part IV

267

this Order, which was of his own seeking, he took care to recommend this new Friend to his Sister, and oblig’d her to speak in his favour to Ktalipse; who was ready enough to hear any thing to the advantage of a Man for whom she had already a tenderness: and therefore, upon this very account, enter’d into a close Friendship with her. In a little time they were become very great, and so often together, that Simmadé might possibly have conceiv’d some Jealousy, if she had not been entrusted with the Secret of their Intimacy. And as it is common for the young Women of the same Osmasie, when they are friendly, to change Bedfellows with one another, Ktalipse would sometimes beg that Favour of Simmadé, for the convenience of talking freely of her Affair to Bemiste, who never fail’d to acquaint her Brother with what past between them, to the end that he might inform his Friend of it. The crafty Bemistar, transported to find things come to a Point which he had not foreseen, advised his Sister to lie often with Ktalipse, and to insinuate her self still farther into her esteem, that she might have the better opportunity of doing all imaginable good Offices for the Lover. Accordingly she, who did not penetrate into the Design of her Brother, took every opportunity, and did all that was in her power for the Person he recommended; in which she succeeded so well, that Ktalipse conceiv’d a Love for him which was very sincere, but, at the same time, very chaste and pure, proposing no other End but Marriage. The Lover, who knew what the Brother and Sister had done for him, thought he could never give Proofs enough of his Gratitude; and therefore confirmed his Mistress still more and more in her Friendship with Bemiste. Mean while, the four happy Lovers waited with great impatience, for another Solemnity, to favour them with a second Interview; and the Feast of the Osparenibon, which, at Sevarinde, continues five days, being nigh at hand, they flatter’d themselves they should have as good an opportunity as the former, for the execution of their Designs. But these Hopes had an Issue very different from that before. For the insidious Bemistar wish’d nothing but the Enjoyment of Ktalipse, and regarded the possession of Simmadé only as a Mean of accomplishing his chief End, and gratifying his Desires. Which that he might be the more sure of, he obliged his Sister, partly by Intreaties, and partly by Threatnings, to persuade Ktalipse to admit her Lover to her Bed, who had, he said, found a safe way of coming in the Night, without being seen, or so much as suspected by any body during the whole Feast. Bemiste, in obedience to her Brother, did not fail of taking the first opportunity she could find; for having deliver’d Ktalipse a tender, passionate Letter from her Lover, and perceiving that her Heart was touched with it, she thought it the most proper time to make the Proposal. She therefore did so with all the

268

The History of the Sevarambians

Address she was Mistress of, but without any success. For Ktalipse discover’d an absolute Abhorrence of the Design, and told her, that, “she would never sacrifice her Honour to her Passion;” and that, “if she could not possess her Lover in a lawful way, she would for ever renounce him.” After which, looking forwards to the fatal Effects of such an Action, she said, that, “if any but her self had made such a Proposition to her, she should have hated them as long as she lived.” She added, that, “now she began to doubt, indeed, the Sincerity of her Lover, since he could thus suspect her Virtue; however,” that, “it was at least a certain Proof that he was not so honest a Man as she had taken him to be.” Bemiste seeing her so exceedingly angry, found it necessary to give the Matter another turn, that she might not quite break with her. Putting on therefore a different Air, and bursting out into a Laugh, she clasp’d her close in her Arms, and said to her, that, “after this trial of her Virtue, she should love her more than ever.” That, “she had made the Proposition only to prove her; and that, her Lover knew nothing at all of it.” That “she would advise her to persist in her noble, generous Sentiments, and never to lend an ear to any thing that might be prejudicial to her Honour, or contrary to her Duty.” To which she added, that, “if the Lover had but offer’d to employ her on any such unlawful Design, the bare imagining, that she could be capable of such an Action, was an Affront she would never have forgiven him.” This artful Discourse entirely appeas’d the innocent Ktalipse; and the Conversation ended in fresh Assurances of Esteem and Friendship. A few days after, Bemiste inform’d her Brother of all that had pass’d between Ktalipse and her self, and thereby gave him the Mortification of seeing that his Design was frustrated, and that all his Hopes were almost extinguished; for his Purpose was, to have impos’d himself in the Night, on this innocent, virtuous young Creature, under the name of her Lover. But, notwithstanding this ill Success, he still flatter’d himself, that he might be able to carry his point some other way. He therefore press’d his Sister no farther, but only desir’d her to keep up the intimacy, and, for the rest, resolv’d to wait till the arrival of the Festival. At length it was come; and he took care to change Clothes with his Sister, and supplied her place with Simmadé; but all his Caresses, tho’ they pretended Transport, were counterfeit; and, if she had observ’d nicely, she might have discover’d that some other Object beside her self had captivated his Heart. However, as she suspected nothing, and he was much a Master of Dissimulation, she still believ’d him to be faithful to her. In the mean while, the more effectually to blind her, he ask’d her, one day, jocosely, how he should manage with Ktalipse, who taking him for his Sister, had desired him to lie with her; and what Excuse he must make, if she should persist in requesting it? Simmadé laugh’d heartily to find her Spark under

Part IV

269

a necessity of refusing so pretty a Girl; and he affected to seem as merry as she upon the occasion. But the third Night, when she was fast asleep, he put a certain Drug up her Nose, very common in that Country, which threw her into so profound a Stupefaction, that, seeing her perfectly safe, he arose; and going out of his Room to that of Ktalipse, which was very near, he boldly knock’d at her Door. The Girl, taking him by his Voice to be Bemiste, immediately open’d to him. Where being enter’d, he desir’d her Bedfellow to take his place for a while with Simmadé, because they wanted some private Talk together. As they had often, upon the like occasions, been us’d to do so, the other readily complied, and he quickly found himself alone and a-bed with Ktalipse. Being now in a Place so proper for the gratification of his Desires, he soon made an attempt upon her Person; but, when she found her self in the Arms of a Man, justly imagining that it was some Villain who had counterfeited the Voice of Bemiste, with an intention to rob her of that which was most dear to her, she set up so terrible an Outcry, that, in a little time, she had alarm’d the whole Osmasie, which immediately ran in to her relief. However, before any of them could get to her, Bemistar had made his escape out of her Room, and thrust himself in through the Throng of Women which were come from all Quarters, some with Flambeaus in their hand, and others with Arms. They enquir’d of Ktalipse, “What had occasioned her Exclamation, and how she came to be so frighted?” Her Companion also was come from Simmadé’s chamber, who was the only Person in the Osmasie that was still asleep; and, taking her by the Hand, “My dear Friend,” said she, “what is it that has happened to you since I left you? And whence is this prodigious Emotion, and that strange Alarm which I find you in? Speak, my Dear, I beseech you; and let us know the true Cause of your Outcry and Fear.” Ktalipse made no Answer to all these Questions; but, revolving a thousand different Thoughts in her Mind, remember’d the Proposal that Bemiste had made to her some time before, to indulge her Lover, if she should chance to find him in her Chamber. She therefore imagin’d, that, not having been able to prevail with her to consent to the Design, he had ventur’d to make this Attack on her Virtue, without saying any thing more to her; believing he might easily obtain his end, when he should have her in his Arms. The Thought of so rash and wicked an Attempt, fill’d her at first with Indignation; but, immediately after, Affection and Pity joining together, she began to look upon the Action as nothing more than an Effect of the transporting Passion he had for her; so that, in a moment, she repented that she had made any noise, and condemned her own Conduct, for not having defended her self in another manner than by Exclamations. The Vexation and Disorder she was in was the greater, as she saw that her Outcries had

270

The History of the Sevarambians

occasioned a strange Confusion in the Osmasie, which would expose her Lover to very severe Punishment, and render her self a Subject of Discourse and Rallery for the whole Nation. These Reflections were reasonable enough, but they came a little too late; and it was vain for her to be silent now, for it was plain that she was not yet recover’d of her Fright, and therefore must, at last, say what had occasion’d it. Her Companion ask’d her, “What was become of Bemiste?” and told all that were present, how they had chang’d Beds. Immediately several of them went away to Simmadé, who was all alone, fast asleep, and made no Answer to any of the Questions that were put to her. They call’d her, pull’d her, and pinch’d her; but could not awaken her. Upon this, some of them cried out that she was dead; which gave a new Alarm worse than the former. They felt her Pulse, laid their Hands upon her Breast, and found her full of Life, but in a perfect Lethargy. This made them begin to examine what might be the occasion of it, and, after some search, they found the Medicine in her Nostrils which Bemistar had put there. Here was new Cause for Astonishment, and no body could tell what Judgment to make upon it. However, a certain Spirit was brought, which was no sooner applied to her Nose, but she wak’d out of her Trance. It is easy to imagine what her Surprize was, when, upon opening her Eyes, instead of her Lover, she saw so many Women about her, who were all asking her Questions, and saying a hundred things to her which she did not comprehend. It was natural for her, in these Circumstances, to conclude that her Intrigues were all discover’d, and that her Lover had been taken in her Bed. This Thought, with the Remorse of her Conscience, join’d to the Weakness which the Medicine had occasion’d, stabb’d her to the Heart, and threw her into a very long and dangerous Fit; which added still to the general Surprize, and was a new Subject of Discourse and Astonishment. But, leaving them to recover her, let us return to the innocent Ktalipse, who, not being able to keep silence any longer, and thinking it more eligible to lose her Lover than her Honour, said aloud that “a Man, whom she did not know, had come into her Chamber, under the name of Bemiste, whose Voice he counterfeited, and had offr’d violence to her, which had oblig’d her to cry out for assistance.” As soon as she had made this Confession, the Governante of the Osmasie order’d the Guards to be doubled at the Gates, and Bemiste to be call’d for. Immediately a strict Search was made for her, and her Name resounded thro’ the Osmasie; but all in vain: no Answer was made, nor was she to be found. Her Clothes, indeed, were there; but notwithstanding all their Care and Diligence in seeking, no one could see or hear any thing of her Person. After they had hunted about, a long time, to no purpose, the Girls were all call’d together, and Inquisition made; but it appeared that

Part IV

271

there was no Man among them. Various were the Talks now of Ktalipse, and they even began to doubt the truth of what she said; but she still persisted in it, and affirmed, that, “a Man had attempted to force her in Bed.” On this new Asseveration, Search was again made in every Corner of the Osmasie, and not a single Place neglected; but neither the Villain nor Bemiste was to be met with. In the mean while, day being come, some of the Girls having a mind to wash themselves, went down to the Bath, where they soon discover’d the counterfeit Bemiste; who, having duck’d himself under Water at their first coming, was, in a little time, oblig’d to expose himself to their view, for want of Breath. The Girls, seeing him, instantly acquainted the Governante where he was; who immediately came to seize him: and, upon visiting him, found, without any difficulty, what the Gallant’s Sex was, and knew him to be the Brother of Bemiste. By this time Simmadé was recover’d of her Fit; and Ktalipse, having heard that it was Bemistar who had surpriz’d her, discover’d the Practices of his Sister, and told the Governante that, “she would have persuaded her to admit her Lover to her Bed; without doubt on a design to introduce her Brother to her.” On the hearing this, they began to enter into a just Suspicion of the whole Intrigue; and, though the Prisoner would own nothing, they dispatch’d Messengers away to have his Chamber search’d, where the true Bemiste was taken a-bed with her Gallant. They were all three examin’d strictly concerning Simmadé, but they could not be prevail’d on to accuse her; and she might have even past as innocent, if she had not condemn’d her self, by confessing her Fault to those who examin’d her. But now, the whole Affair being unravel’d, they were all deliver’d over to Justice; Bemistar having first undergone a Scourging from the Girls of the House, which quite flea’d him. This Adventure made a great noise at Sevarinde, and all the Particulars of it were soon known. A little while after, the unhappy guilty Lovers were all publickly whipt round the Palace; and Inquest being had on Ktalipse, she was brought in pure: which gave great joy to her Lover, who married her very soon, and lives happily with her, I believe, to this day. Thus we see, how Love sometimes eludes the Vigilance of the most careful Keepers, and puts its Votaries on the most hazardous Enterprizes. Every body does not yield an equal Obedience to the Laws, how just and reasonable soever they may be; and we every where find some, who not only do not seem to apprehend any Severity, but are even fond of a Passion which blinds them, and hurries them on to venture the Rigour of the Chastisements which are ordain’d for their Crimes. The Sevarambians divide their time, as we do, by Years and Solar Revolutions. They subdivide it also into Months, and again

272

The History of the Sevarambians

into Half-Months, but never reckon at all by Weeks, as among us. The three first Days after the New and Full-Moon, are Festivals, when they work but three Hours in the Morning, and spend the rest of their time in Rejoicings. They have in this Country, almost all sorts of Musical Instruments which are us’d in our Continent, and some others besides, which we know nothing of. Particularly, they have recovered the Hydraulick Invention of the old Greeks and Romans, which is quite lost among us, and they pretend to have made great Improvements in it. But, however that be, it is certain that their Hydraulick, or WaterOrgans, are incomparably better than those that are play’d on with Wind. Their Airs and Songs have something, at the same time, so majestick and charming, that it was not without reason that Maurice affirm’d, “their Concerts to be much more complete than the European ones.” To which we may add, that being more robust and able-body’d than we, they have bolder and more masculine Voices than ours. Besides, in Poetry, they regard only the Measure, which makes theirs infinitely stronger, and more energetical than our barbarous Rhimes, as we shall observe elsewhere. To all these Advantages we may farther add, that when any Child is found to have an excellent Voice, he is instructed in Musick as soon as he is seven Years old, and consecrated to the SUN, to be one of the Chanters in his Temple. For Painting, Sculpture, Graving, Embroidery, and all other Arts that are either ornamental or useful, they are not practised in common, but there are Places set apart for that purpose, where Persons, who are Masters in their way, are employ’d on Decorations for the Publick. Coaches, Chariots, and Litters are seldom used among them, unless it be for sick People or aged Officers: Tho’, indeed, they have but few distemper’d Persons, being rarely attack’d with any Illnesses, but a Fever or Pleurisy, which proceeds from the great Quantity of their Blood, or some too violent Exercise. Their Houses are well laid out; and so airy, that they live, tho’ in such numbers together, very commodiously; which contributes not a little to their Health; as also does their Sobriety and Temperance, their moderate Labour, and the Wholesomeness of the Air they breathe in, and the Foods they live upon. They are not therefore greatly troubled with Physicians and Apothecaries, tho’ they have some establish’d by Authority; but they make very much of their Surgeons, which are mostly employ’d in embalming the Bodies of those illustrious Magistrates, who have deserv’d well of their Country: In which they are so skilful, that I have seen some, who, after lying above a hundred Years, seem’d still living, without being at all hurt by the Air when the Cases were open’d that enclos’d them. For the rest of the People, their Bodies are burnt,

Part IV

273

and the Ashes preserv’d in Urns after the manner of the ancient Romans.—When they burn a Body, they fancy that the Smoke carries up some of the most subtle Particles to the SUN, and that they have only the terrestrial ones remaining in the Ashes.

THE MANNER OF DISTRIBUTING JUSTICE AMONG THE SEVARAMBIANS. AS they have no such thing as Property, there are never any civil Processes among them. Accordingly, their Judicatories only respect criminal Cases, which are judg’d by the Osmasiontes in whose Jurisdiction the Fact was committed. Every Osmasionte is assisted by his two Lieutenants, and three old Men of the House, which the Criminal has the Privilege of choosing. If the Offence is committed by People, or against Persons, who dwell in different Osmasies, the Cause is brought before a Brosmasionte, and the Osmasiontes concerned; who, all together, determine sovereignly in small Crimes: but the greater are try’d by a Brosmasionte, and his eight Assistants, to whom also there is an Appeal from the lower Courts in all considerable Affairs. Crimes against the State are heard by a Sevarobaste, and twelve Assessors, all Brosmasiontes; and, if the Fact is very extraordinary, it is pleaded before the Vice-Roy himself, and his Council. The accused are always allow’d to make their own Defence, or to get any Friend who is more vers’d in such Matters to do it for him. I have often assisted on their Tribunals, and seen their Manner of trying and determining Causes; which is certainly very worthy of praise, as well on account of the Patience and Moderation of the Judges, as of the Respect and Veneration that is paid them. There are none of those Proclamations and tumultuary Proceedings which are to be heard in the Courts of Europe; every thing being done with wonderful Silence and Order: And it seldom happens that they pronounce an iniquitous Sentence, which is too frequent among us, where Ambition, Avarice, and Envy corrupt the Minds of the Judges, and make them decide contrary to Evidence, Equity, and the Light of Reason it self. However, it must be own’d, that, where there are Men, Passion will reign among them, and the Difference will only be from greater to less. This appeared to me, very plainly, in the City of Arkropsinde, on the occasion of a Sentence which a Judge, nam’d Nerelias, pronounc’d in a cause that came before him. A very worthy young Man, who was learned in the Mathematicks, and especially in the mechanical Part of it, had discover’d a Method of raising Water to a prodigious height, by means of a Machine which he

274

The History of the Sevarambians

had invented, whose Effect, he believ’d, wou’d be infallible. But he was not willing that this Affair should be known, till he should demonstrate in publick, when the Prizes of Glory are bestow’d on those who distinguish themselves by some Master-Piece in their way. He therefore applied himself, privately, to one of his Acquaintance who was a curious Designer, and begg’d the Assistance of his hand to represent fairly on Paper, the Machine which he had himself roughly sketch’d out. The other frankly promised, in a little time, to copy the Plans that he should give him. Having thus obtain’d his Word for it, the Mathematician deliver’d up his Papers to him, and only desir’d him to get them ready against the Solemnity of the Prizes, because he cou’d not then do without them. After this Engagement, the Painter, whether thro’ Malice or Indolence, suffer’d much time to run off without touching of the Work he had undertaken. This trifling had at last quite tir’d out the Mathematician’s Patience. He therefore grew angry, and ask’d him for his Plan; as fearing that, by a further loss of time, he should also lose the Opportunity of carrying the Prize from those of his Art. But the Painter, taking but little notice of his Remonstrances, after having amus’d him a good while longer with idle Promises, told him, in so many Words, that, “he should neither have the Copies nor the Originals, unless he would throw one whom he had a Quarrel with, off from the Bridge into the River, which,” he said, “the Mathematician might easily do, seeing he was a Man of prodigious Strength.” This Demand very much surpriz’d the young Philosopher, because the Action seem’d to him both unjust and extravagant. However, the Fear he was in, of not having the Work ready by the necessary Time, wrought so strongly with him, that, he promis’d the Painter to do what he desir’d, provided he wou’d finish the Business he had engag’d for, in ten Days. The other immediately agreed to this Proposition; and the Desire of affronting his Enemy by a third Person, without exposing himself to any Danger, made him follow it with so much Diligence, that he had compleated it before the time appointed. As soon, therefore, as it was perfected, he let the Mathematician know of it, and offer’d to give up all that he had done for him when he should have perform’d his Promise. Tho’ the Mathematician saw, plainly enough, the Malice and Baseness of his Design, he again gave him his Word, and desir’d him only to get the Person on the Bridge whom he was to treat in this manner. The Painter, having receiv’d this Assurance, did not fail to seek for an Opportunity, and having in some little time found one, he brought his Champion to the Bridge, where the Man, whom he thus hated, was looking at something that was doing in the Water. He quickly showed him to the Mathematician, who immediately taking him round the middle, after

Part IV

275

having declared to him the Occasion of it, notwithstanding all the Resistance he could make, plung’d him into the River. As soon as he had done so, he demanded his Papers of the Painter, who, immediately, deliver’d them to him; which when he had secured, he told him, that, “after having kept him so long in suspence by his fair Promises, and exacted of him to be the Instrument of his Vengeance, it was but reasonable that he should use his Strength to satisfy, also, his own most just Resentment.” Without saying a Word more, he seiz’d the Painter, and tumbled him after the other into the River, to keep him company there, who merited much less than himself the Usage he had met with. The River Sevaringo is large and deep at Arkropsinde, but the Bridge is not high; so that neither of them wou’d have receiv’d any Hurt, seeing they cou’d both swim well, if they had not laid hold of each other, being thrown in almost at the same time, and exactly in the same place. For the first seeing his Adversary so near him, immediately swam after and caught him; being too much enrag’d to defer his Vengeance till he should be got out of the Water. This brought on an extraordinary Combat between them, and if Boats had not been brought soon, to part them, and take them out of the Water, one or both of them wou’d, without all doubt, have been drown’d. For the Painter’s Enemy, having already fast hold of his Hair, and given him a great many Blows on the Face, was just going to plunge him under Water, when the Boats rescu’d the miserable Wretch out of his hands, and carried them both ashore; from whence they were taken away to an Officer, who order’d them both to Prison till the proper Judge should take cognizance of their Affair. The Mathematician seeing them had before the Magistrate, went also himself, and was committed with them. After some time, the three Criminals were call’d up to their Trial before this Nerelias (whom we have already mention’d) who having suffer’d himself to be prepossess’d, condemn’d the Mathematician, and he that was first thrown into the Water, to six Months Imprisonment; and declar’d the Painter innocent, tho’ he was really the most blameable of them all. When he pronounc’d this Judgment, ’twas in vain that the Mathematician attempted to represent the Truth of the Case, and justify the Painter’s Adversary, who was altogether irreproveable; for he would not so much as hear him, nor the Witnesses he had brought with him. Not but that this Nerelias was a Man of sound Understanding; and a good Magistrate when he was not prejudiced; but the meanest Person who sought him, and recommended his Case before it came into Judgment, was sure to be most favourably treated at his publick Audience. Besides this, he had a very false Maxim, which he observ’d in all his Decisions, and that was, to support the Slaves, and the lowest of the People, against Persons of Merit and

276

The History of the Sevarambians

Quarrelers fight in the river (facing page 210 of the German edition, 1689)

Part IV

277

Honour. This was apparent in many of his Sentences, but, as they were about Affairs that made less noise than this, he had never been called to an account for his unrighteous Judgments. And, to the rest we may add, that he was capricious and peevish in his Temper, and, upon the least occasion, would condemn those who had Misfortune not to be well with him, how just soever their Plea might be. The Mathematician, who was a Man of Spirit and Probity, was exceedingly irritated at the Injustice that had been done him, and turn’d all his Anger against his Judge; hoping to find, some time or other, an opportunity to be reveng’d upon him. In the mean while, he was oblig’d to undergo the Sentence, because he could not appeal but to the Censors, at their general Court, which they hold every three Years; when those who have any Complaints against the Judges, are not only allow’d, but even enjoin’d to exhibit them. He thought therefore, it would be much his better way to wait a time so favourable to his Design, than to make an idle Clamour about his Grievances now. Besides, it was not long before that Season would come, and as this Business is always committed to a Sevarobaste, as President, in all the Judicatories both in the City and Country, he did not doubt but so great a Minister would examine well into his Cause, and treat him with more Justice and Impartiality than Nerelias had done; who having suffer’d himself to be prepossess’d by some of the Painter’s Friends, had not only refus’d to hear his Defence, but even used him unworthily, not vouchsafing any Answer but contemptuous Looks, and severe Threatnings, to all that humble Respect and Submission which he paid him, when he demanded Audience of him. Happily for him, it fell out, that a Sevarobaste, who was a Man of excellent Understanding, and a great Lover of Sciences and Arts, was sent this Year to Arkropsinde, to hold the Court. The Mathematician preferr’d his Complaint against Nerelias, and was favourably heard by him; he condescending to view some Parts of his Design which he approv’d of; tho’ Nerelias, without any Examination of it at all, had treated it as chimerical, and a meer Heap of Confusion. Several other Persons also having join’d their Accusations with that of the Mathematician, the Censors were much irritated against this iniquitous Judge; for that he had been so unreasonable as to condemn Persons without examining their Cause, or suffering them to make their Defence: which, amongst this People, is look’d upon as one of the greatest of Injustices, and for which, more than any thing else, the Judges are liable to be call’d to an account. Nerelias therefore, being brought before these Censors, was, as we have said, accus’d before them by the Mathematician; who, being an eloquent Speaker, not only prov’d the Offence, but enforc’d it in all its Aggravations. So that Nerelias, as well for the unjust Sentence pronounced against him, as for several others which were laid

278

The History of the Sevarambians

to his charge, was reduc’d to the Condition of a private Man, and expos’d to the Hatred and Contempt of every body. But he did not live long in this State; for not being able to bear his Grief, and the Shame of his Disgrace, he in a little time grew distracted; and at last, hurried on by a just Despair, threw himself from the Bridge into the River, at the same place from whence the Mathematician had cast the Painter and his Adversary, and being carried away by the Stream, was drown’d before any body could get to his assistance. Thus we see how Heaven punishes unrighteous Judges, and shows, by its severe Chastizements, that there is nothing more displeasing to it, than the Actions of those who abuse their Authority to the Oppression of the Innocent. I was at Arkropsinde when this Affair was before the Censors, and, a little after, I heard at Sevarinde its unhappy Issue. They never punish with Death, except it be for some enormous Crime, but adjudge to Imprisonment for a longer or less time, in proportion to the Malignity of the Offence. The Prisoners are obliged to work hard, and are corrected frequently; besides that, at certain Seasons, the most guilty are had out, and publickly whipt round the Palace, after which they are remanded back till they shall have fully suffer’d their Sentence. When I ask’d the Sevarambians, why they never punish’d with Death? they answered me, that “it was both inhuman and foolish to do so. It was inhuman, because it was destroying a Fellow-Citizen, and taking that from him which none could give to him; and it was foolish, seeing they should thereby deprive a Person of Life, who may expiate his Crime, by Services beneficial to the Publick.” They added, that “Criminals were sufficiently punish’d in being obliged to labour long, and hard in Prison,” (which to say truth, is but a kind of lingering Death) “from whence they were frequently had out, and made an Example of to others; who, by this means, are kept in mind of the Punishment which is due to such Crimes as they have committed. Besides,” they said, “that it was found by Experience, that Men dreaded these lasting Chastizements, much more than a quick Death, which releases them at once from their Misery.” They therefore never carry the Business of Punishment so far, but either send their Malefactors to work in the Mines, or else keep them to hard Labour in Houses of Correction. Every Person has the Privilege of taking up any one whom he has any Allegations against, and having them before the Magistrate; provided it be a private Man who is attach’d, and the Accuser is content to surrender himself Prisoner with him. For if the Accused will not follow him, and the Accuser is not strong enough to compel him, the whole People are obliged to support the latter, on his crying out, Sevariastei somés antai; that is to say, the Laws of Sevarias are violated and disobliged: and accord-

Part IV

279

ingly, as soon as these Words are pronounced, they run in from all Parts to seize him; who, by this Contumacy, makes his Affair much worse than otherwise it would be. This is a short Account of the Manner of distributing Justice among this People, whose Causes are never long deciding, because no Profit accrues to any body by delaying them.

OF THE MILITARY AFFAIRS OF THE SEVARAMBIANS. THO’ this Nation was never much engag’d in War, they have always an Army on foot, which is kept up to strict Duty, and makes one of the principal Employments among them. As soon as the Boys and Girls are adopted by the State, which, as we have observ’d, is always at seven Years of Age, they are train’d up to the Management of Arms; this being Part of their daily Exercise till they come to be fourteen: when, tho’ they are taken off to learn some Trade, they are still obliged to perform Exercise some Hours every Holiday, of which there are six in each Month, besides several long Festivals in the Year. On the common Holidays they are exercis’d at home, in their own Osmasie; but, at the great Festivals, they have general Reviews, where every one must be present unless he can plead some lawful Excuse. Nor are the Men only employed in the military Way, but the Women also, from the Age of fourteen to forty-nine; after which they are exempted from this sort of Service. The whole Nation is divided into twelve Parts, one of which is always in Arms, and attends in the Camp, three Months, according to their turns; so that all the People that are not exempted, serve once in three Years: the Army being still in the Field, and regularly encamp’d, as if they were really expecting an Enemy. The Order of their Armies may be seen in the former Part of this Relation, where I have sufficiently describ’d them. I shall, therefore, now only add, that they have always four Armies a-foot; two in Sevarambe, and two in Sporombe, both which, in each Country, are always oppos’d, and endeavour to surprize one another, as much as if they were indeed Enemies; and, by this means, every Branch of Discipline is as punctually kept up as tho’ they were truly at War. Besides these, a certain Number of Soldiers are drawn out of every Tribe to guard the Mines, and garrison the Fortresses, built in the time of Sevarkimpsas, who subdu’d one of the Stroukarambian Nations, that had been so bold as to make Incursions into his Territory. Those who go upon this Duty, tarry always six Months before they are reliev’d; which makes it come to their turn but once in twelve Years.—But if a War was to break out in that Quarter, then one of the Armies would be obliged to march thither for the defence of it.

280

The History of the Sevarambians

Over and above the Forces already mentioned, they have always three thousand Men for the Guard of the Viceroy’s Palace; that is to say, two thousand Foot, and a thousand Horse: But the Women are exempted from this Service, as they are also from that of the Mines. Every Governor has likewise a particular Guard, proportion’d to the Largeness of his Government. And thus, by one means or other, the twelfth Part of the People, not exempted, are always actually in Arms. For the maintenance of these Armies, they have their Carriages with Provisions, Ammunition, Artillery, and in short, all things necessary on such occasions; about which the Soldiers are as much fatigued as they could be in any War whatsoever. All the Generals belong to the great Council of State; for without being a Sevarobaste, no one can command an Army. The LieutenantGenerals are all Brosmasiontes, the Colonels Osmasiontes, and the other Officers are indifferently chosen from among the People. They have a military Jurisdiction, but the Officers may appeal from it to the General, or even the Viceroy, upon some occasions. They divide their Soldiery into three Bodies; viz. that of the married People, who are posted together; that of the Maids, and that of the Youth. These are formed into Regiments of twelve hundred Persons to each, which are, again, subdivided into Companies of a hundred in a Company, and those Companies once more, into Dozens, over which there is an Officer, whom they call a Dozener. They have also two Commanders of fifty to each Company; and these two last sorts make up their inferior Officers. Their superior ones are two Ensigns, two Lieutenants, and two Captains, all subordinate to one another; then the Colonels, who are also two in every Regiment, after which come the General-Officers. They have also Ships of several Rates; some of which are always commission’d and arm’d. In the Lake of Sporascompso, they have still thirty or forty Vessels and Galleys ready to put to Sea whenever the Admiral commands it, who must always be a Sevarobaste. There are two Admirals, one on the River Sevaringo, and the other on the Seas of Sporonde. On the River are almost an infinite Number of Ships, great and small, which are all subject to the Admiral. These serve either for fishing, or to transport Wares from all Parts of the River; which is very long and deep, and receives several other navigable ones before it reaches the Sea, about a hundred Leagues below Sevarinde, where it empties it self into a kind of Mediterranean, which is believ’d to have no Communication with the Ocean, and extends beyond the Antartick Pole: a Part quite unknown to us. At first, they say, that the Sevaringo discharges it self into an Arm, or Straight of this Sea, which runs above twenty-six Leagues between

Part IV

281

Land, and in several Places is not above four or five over, but goes on winding, towards the Sea, till it comes between two high Mountains, where it is not more than two Leagues broad. They add, that in this Straight they find a Flux and Reflux like that of the Sea, but the Tide is not so strong. Beyond this Straight, the Sea spreads it self on all sides, and has divers Island in it cover’d with Trees. These Islands, and all the Coasts both of the Sea and the Straight, are inhabited by a stupid, savage kind of People, who indeed worship the Sun, Moon, and Stars, but have many of them receiv’d the Errors of Stroukaras, an Impostor much celebrated in these Parts of the World, of whom we shall give an Account, when we come to treat of the Religion of the Sevarambians. In this Sea they meet with many Monsters, and several sorts of Fish different from those of the Ocean: Which last are also found in prodigious quantities in the Straight, and are the chief Food of the Inhabitants; tho’ they have a good Climate, and a rich Soil, which would produce very plentifully, if they were industrious enough to cultivate it. The first time that the Sevarambians made a discovery of this Sea, was about the latter end of the Reign of Sevarias; when they were attacked by great Numbers of these Barbarians, who came in Canoes, and attempted to seize their Fleet; but as soon as the Artillery and small Arms were discharged upon them, they were so frighted that they all fled, and have never since dar’d to attack them: Nay, on the contrary, they make a Submission to all their Ships which pass by them, and bring Presents in a kind of tributary way aboard them. These People all go naked, only in Winter they cover themselves with the Hides of Beasts, which they take in Hunting, and make supple by some Management of the Brain of the Animal it self, which they use for that purpose. They are more or less reasonable, as they lie nearer or farther from the Sun; but in the Islands far out in the Sea, they are so barbarous that the Sevarambians have never been able to fix any stated Commerce with them. These Islands are many in number, and almost all in sight of one another, stretching along towards the Pole, about a hundred Leagues from Shore. Some of them are pretty large; but the greatest part of them not more than nine or ten Leagues in diameter and many of them much less. In the Reign of Sevaristas an Expedition was made into this Sea, almost as far up as the Pole, where they found no Ice; tho’ there was much nigh the Shore, and in several Places nearer to the Sun. Since that time they have gone beyond the Pole without any Hazard, the Sea being much calmer there than on the Coasts; tho’ it has a sort of Flux and Reflux, and, in some Places, very rapid Currents, but which are so far from being dangerous, that they are even useful in the Navigation on some Occasions.

282

The History of the Sevarambians

Curiosity only led the Sevarambians to the Discovery of these Seas and Islands, for they make no great Advantages of them: Their Government being such that they have no need of a Commerce with other Nations, and therefore they must have undertaken this Voyage only for Pleasure and Amusement. They have indeed considerable Quantities of Rock-Crystal from thence, and very fine Pearls, which are found in some of the Islands. A Pilot, whose Name was Chicodan, with whom I was acquainted, and who often us’d to entertain me with his Voyages, shew’d me several which he had brought from thence, where they are very common, and gave me seven, exceeding large and fine, which I afterwards brought into Asia, and sold for a considerable Sum. Tho’ he that gave them to me, valu’d them no more than we do GlassBeads in Europe. Before I left Sevarinde the Vice-Roy had form’d a Design of sending some Ships to discover this Sea intirely, which is very great, and suppos’d not to communicate with the Ocean, as I said before, unless it be by subterranean Passages. To make these Voyages more commodious, they have built Forts at divers Places along the Coast, and even in some of the Islands far out at Sea. In those Parts where the Cold is vehement, they make Houses very thick and strong under ground, and vault them over at top so well, that the Slaves or Criminals who are sent thither, feel but little of the Severity of the Weather, tho’ their Habitations are often cover’d with Snow; for in these Vaults there is a temperate Heat even in the midst of Winter.—It is probable, that being so well provided with all things necessary, they will in time discover the whole of these Seas. I have frequently ask’d the Sevarambians, why they do not make themselves Masters of the Shores of the River and Straight, as far as the Sea. To which their Answer is, that they can conquer them whenever they please; and that, in effect, they have already done so by their Ships, and the Forts which they have built on the Coast; but for the Land, they do not regard it because they do not want it. However, they believe, that, as their Nation daily increases, they shall at least be forc’d to send Colonies further on towards this Sea, and, by little and little, possess themselves wholly of the River: But, that this will be done insensibly, and only as Necessity obliges them; for otherwise they wou’d never offer at it, because it is one of the principal Maxims of their Government not to usurp the Rights of other People, but rather to buy them of the Inhabitants for Wine, Stuffs, and other Merchandizes, as they did all the Land where they have built Forts already. The River Sevaringo is so large and deep, that from Arkropsinde to the Sea, there is not a Place where they have not fifteen Foot Water when it is at lowest. Its Current is so easy and gentle, that in some Parts

Part IV

283

’tis hard to perceive it. The Reason of this, is, because it runs across a Plain a hundred Leagues long, and very level, where the River goes, tho’ in other Places there are several little Risings and Banks in it. About three Leagues below the Island in which Sevarinde is situated, is a great River that comes from the Mountains east-ward, and discharges itself into the Sevaringo, which makes it still larger and deeper. I have been also told that it receives several others before it reaches the Sea, and that at its Mouth it is above six Leagues over. In this Place, they say, there are very large Serpents, which sometimes devour the Inhabitants, in their Canoes, if they are not aware of them.

OF THE COURT OF THE VICE-ROY. THIS Prince dwells in a magnificent Palace, which we have said something of already; where, also, all the Sevarobastes dwell, for the greater Conveniency of assisting at Council. The number of his Officers and Domesticks is not exceeding great, but if we reckon in all the Families of the Senators, who are the principal Persons at his Court, we shall find it very considerable. All the Brosmasiontes wait on him in turn, and count it a great Honour. The Officers of State are limited as to the number of their Wives and Servants, but that of the Vice-Roy is at his own pleasure. However, it is not customary even for them to have above twelve Wives; in which they follow the Example of Sevarias who never exceeded that number. The Person whom he marries first after his Advancement to the Empire, is most consider’d, and look’d upon as the true Vice-Queen, if I may make use of the Word. All the other Wives retain the Names which they had before their Marriage, with only the Addition of the Syllable es, or the Letter s, if it ended with an é; but the first bears the Name of the Vice-Roy, and, according to this Custom, she who stands in this Relation to Sevarminas, the present Vice-Roy, is called Sevarminés. The same Rule is also observ’d with respect to the Wives of all the great Officers of State, the first espoused, only, being called by his Name; which in case of her Death descends to the second, and so on to the rest according to their Seniority. When any Girl in the Nation is thought to be an extraordinary Beauty, she is shown to the Vice-Roy, who, if he likes her, takes her himself, or else gives her to one of the Senators whom he has a mind to oblige with such a Present, provided he has not got already his statutable number of Wives complete. Each of these Senators, or Sevarobastes, may have eight, the Brosmasiontes five, and the Osmasiontes three. They are also allow’d to take as many Concubine Slaves, as Wives, but this is very seldom known. The inferior Officers have the Privilege of having two, and the same number of Slaves; but the private Persons are

284

The History of the Sevarambians

confin’d to one, only they are indulg’d a Slave in case the Wife is barren: And if the Slave proves so too, they may even change her for another. It is also allow’d for the Citizens to change Wives with one another, provided they both agree, and the Women consent to it; which is often practised when they do not live well together. But then these Exchanges are always between Persons of the same Rank, for the Women will not take up with a Man inferior to their former Husbands. If they have Children, all that are under seven Years old go with the Women, who breed them up till they are adopted by the State: Tho’ it seldom happens, where there are Children, that the Parents part, notwithstanding they are permitted to do so by the Laws. And, indeed, these Separations carry a kind of Infamy with them; for every body has an ill Opinion of those who break so strong a Band as that of Children, common both to the Husband and the Wife—This sort of Exchanges are much more frequent among the Officers than the private People, because their Love, being divided, is not so strong as when it is directed only to one Object. Maids are not allow’d to marry before eighteen, nor young Men till twenty-one; and, on the other hand, the Laws prohibit Marriage to Widows of sixty, and Men of seventy. But if a Man of that Age is very robust, and of a Constitution that requires a Woman, he may make use of a SlaveConcubine.—To supply the need they have of a great number of Slaves, they have impos’d a Tribute of Children upon some neighbouring Nations, and buy them of others, who are, sometimes, glad to get rid of them when they cannot well maintain them. Sevarminas eats in publick on all the annual, and monthly Festivals. These Entertainments are made in a very great Hall, the Cieling and Sides of which are embellish’d with large Pieces of Crystal, that, like so many Mirrors, multiply every Object, in a surprizing Manner. He is seated at the upper end of a long Table, and his Wife Sevarminés by him; on each side of the Table sit the Sevarobastes, who are serv’d by the Brosmasiontes assisted by the Osmasiontes, which stand behind them, and give into their hands all the several Dishes which they place upon the Table. All the Furniture of the Table is of massy Gold; and, while the Vice-Roy is dining, a fine Concert of Musick plays, to grace the Entertainment: He also walks sometimes along the Streets of Sevarinde, or in the Fields about it, where he has a delightful Garden by the River side. This Garden is one of the most agreeable in the World; as well on the account of the Goodness of the Climate, as the Fertility of the Soil, and the Convenience of the River, which both waters it, and is a great Ornament to it. As to its Figure, it is exactly square, and not enclos’d with Walls, but compass’d round with a Moat, full of transparent Water,

Part IV

285

in which one sees a prodigious Stock of all sorts of Pond and River Fishes. The Water of the Moat runs into the River, which fences in one side of the Garden, and runs along by a Terrass, supported by a strong Wall like those which surround the Island. The Ground-Plot is about a Mile in diameter, and, including the Ditches, full three Miles in circumference; which is dispos’d of in the following manner: First of all, the way from Sevarinde, to it, is thro’ large Walks of high, thick Trees, the biggest of which is that in the middle, which terminates at the Garden-Gate. On each side of the Gate stretches out a Building about thirty Foot high, twenty six wide, and a hundred Paces long. The Roofs are flat and enclos’d with a beautiful Balustrade of party-colour’d Marble, distinguish’d at certain distances with Statues rais’d on Pedestals. The Front to the Garden is exactly the same, and the Balustrade no ways inferior to the former. Between these two Balustrades is a large Square, pav’d with broad Stones, cover’d in some Places, with Beds of Earth well planted with Grass and Ever-Greens, and, in others, with Sand; which, together, make curious Compartiments, decorated with Dwarf-Trees in Boxes, and Pots containing a vast variety of beautiful Flowers. Besides which, the whole is adorn’d with Statues fix’d in proper Places; and little Fountains that at once embellish and water this delightful Flower-Garden; which is a kind of Terrass, commanding the great one with it, and affording a commodious Prospect of all its Beauties. Under this Square, are several Grots, and cool Apartments, down the sides of which the Water runs trickling at the turning of certain Cocks for that purpose; and without these, directly beneath the Balustrades, both on the inside and the out, is a large and long Piazza, which affords a shady Walk at all Hours of the Day; because when the Sun is on the one, the other is shelter’d from his Rays. The Garden is wholly laid out in Walks, Parterres and Knots, decorated with Trees, Fountains, Statues, and Flowers. Besides which one meets with several close Bowers, a Wilderness, and, at one end of it, a little Wood of Cedar, Palm, Laurel, Orange, and several other sorts of Trees, which form a very shady Grove, exceeding cool and agreeable. But that which is most wonderful in it, and which, therefore, I shall be most particular in the Description of, is the Water-Mount, which stands just in the centre of the Garden. This Mount is about fifty Cubits high, as many in diameter at the Base, and has exactly the Shape of a Sugar-Loaf. It is hollow within, like a Pasteboard Cone; and in this Concavity, are large Pipes which throw the Water to the top, and on all sides of the Mount: Round about the outside of it are several little Stages, at due distances from one another, to break the Fall of the Water, and form Napes, and Cascades. On the

286

The History of the Sevarambians

top is a Bason, or Reservoir, which catches the Water, that, by the Jet d’Eau is spouted up into the Air, to the height of ten or twelve Foot, in a Column as big as three Men, and in its coming back overflows the Reservoir, from whence it runs down, equally, on all sides of the Mount, and covers it so perfectly with its flowing Crystal, that nothing is to be seen of the internal Structure, and the whole appears like a solid Body of Water. Besides the Pipes which run to the Summit of the Mount, there are a multitude of small ones that issue at the sides, by means of which the Mount is as it were bristled with little spurting Streams which are directed up, or down, any way, and in what manner they please. An Effect as agreeable as it is surprizing. Sevarminas, the present Vice-Roy, was the Projector of this beautiful Work; which, to be sure, is the compleatest in its kind of anything in the whole World. And what still enhances the Perfection of it is, that, the profitable as well as the pleasant is included in it: For this rising Mount, to which the Water is brought from a Stream beyond the River, and some other high Springs very distant, not only supplies the Fountains that embellish and water the Garden, but also, a good part of it, is carried to Sevarinde, for the Use and Convenience of the Inhabitants. Besides, it has also a fine Canal round it, which conducts the Water, that falls from it, to a prodigious Bason, at one End of the Island, where all the marine Exercises are perform’d. The Pipes that convey the Water are made neither of Lead nor Brass, but of another Metal which partakes of the Nature of both, and is not known in Europe, tho’ very common in that Country. The Statues and Pillars, also, which we took at first for Brass, and, which I have call’d so, are of the same Metal, having indeed almost that Colour, tho’ it is not quite so firm; however it is yet much harder than Lead, and better for most Purposes. It never cankers, and, excepting Gold, out-dures all sorts of Metals. They call it in their Language Plocasto, and use it upon many Occasions to great advantage. When the Vice-Roy goes to divert himself at this Garden, in a publick manner, he is carried in a Chariot, resplendent with Gold and precious Stones, and attended by his Guards, mounted on Horses and Bandelies: Tho’, at other times, he often rides on horseback; especially if he is going any little way out of the City. But, most commonly, when he goes to the Amphitheatre, he is borne on Men’s Shoulders, under a rich, shining Canopy. This Amphitheatre stands a Mile above Sevarinde, near the Quarry where the Stone was digg’d that built it. This Pile of Building is, perhaps, the most magnificent of its kind in the World, and has the thickest Walls, being made with Stones of an enormous Bigness. It is of a circular

Part IV

287

Figure, about two hundred Paces round, on the outside, and fifty in diameter within. The Pit is surrounded with Pillars, of an amazing Length and Thickness, which support a Dome exceeding high, that has several Windows of Glass and Crystal in it, which throw a great Light down into the Area. Without these Pillars is another vast Roof supported by other Pillars somewhat shorter and less; and besides this, there is yet a third, still lower than either of the former. All these several Isles are enlighten’d by Windows in the sides, rising one above another. On the outside, is a large Terrass which runs spirally from the Ground, and is supported by the Roofs over which it goes, till it comes pretty high up the Dome; from whence there are several Stages of Stairs, that land in a Balcony, on the very summit of the Building, which is enclos’d in a handsome Balustrade. ’Tis true this Slope breaks the Light in some places, but as there are a great many Windows, and those well dispos’d, this is of but little consequence. The Balcony stands so very high, that it affords a Prospect of the Plain as far as if one were on a Mountain. In the midst of this Balcony is a crystal Globe on a lofty Pedestal, not less than twelve Feet in diameter. This Globe is quite hollow, and has a Hole thro’ it, from the top to the bottom, large enough to admit the Body of a Man, into which in festival Nights, they put a great Candle in a Lanthorn to illuminate the Globe, which throws the Light far all around it, and very much resembles the Moon at full. I admir’d this Globe prodigiously, seeing it was all one piece, and, tho’ made of Crystal, so very large. But I was soon told that they had there the Secret of running Crystal as well as we do Glass, and even with greater Ease. The Entrance into the Amphitheatre, is by four large Gates, on each hand of which are several Ranges of Seats, in three Galleries one above another, that take an infinite number of People: And the inside is decorated with abundance of Statues, and other fine Ornaments, the Description of which wou’d be too long and tiresome. About twelve Paces without the Building is a Wall, of twenty Foot high, which runs all round it, and, in several Places, has Lodges and Dens built against it, on the inside, for the wild Beasts; which are thence brought very conveniently into the Amphitheatre, quite up to the Pit, by Passages reserv’d on purpose, when they are to fight or be baited there, which is at all the festival Seasons: When it is also made use of, by the Youths, for wrestling, fencing, dancing, and divers other Exercises of Strength and Agility; as likewise it is, for the Recital of dramatick Performances, Works of Eloquence and Poetry, Trials of Skill in Musick and several other Arts. In all which there are Prizes of Honour conferr’d on those who excel most, consisting of artificial Flowers made of Gold, Silver, and other Metals, painted, and enamell’d; of Swords, Medals, and Instru-

288

The History of the Sevarambians

ments of Musick. When these Exercises are over, those who have gain’d the Prizes, are carried in triumphal Cars to the Temple, where they offer Perfumes to the SUN in token of their Gratitude. Besides these Performances here, they have also others, at the same Seasons, on the Water, in a Place made expressly for that purpose. This is done at one end of the Island, where there is a great Lake, or Bason, inclos’d with thick Walls, like those that surround the Island itself. On the inside of the Bason, which is vastly large, and of an oval Figure, are three Ranges of Porticoes, or Galleries, supported by Pillars whose Bases are under water, but dispos’d at such distances from one another so as to give room for the Shipping to pass in between, where they lie shelter’d from the Weather, by the Piazzas, at such times as they are not in use. In this Bason they have mock Sea-Fights; and, on some great Solemnities, I have seen upwards of three hundred Vessels and Boats on a side, drawn up in two Lines, and give each other Battle: which is a most agreeable Entertainment. The Frigates, and Vessels that are large-enough to mount Cannons, and other Fire-Arms, discharg’d them on one another, in the same manner as we do at Sea; and there was nothing but Ball and Shot wanting to make the Combat real. The small Boats, of which they have a great number, engage in another way: For being very broad and low, and not capable of taking any Artillery, they are equipt only with young Men in Drawers, each of which is arm’d with a large wooden Buckler to defend his Breast, and a strong blunt Lance, which they push at one another, whom, by that means, they endeavour to throw into the Water: A thing greatly diverting to the Spectators. Those who have the Misfortune to be thus unship’d, are not allow’d to get into the Boats again, but retire immediately to the Shore, and own themselves vanquish’d. Sometimes the Combatants board one another, and, driving their Opponents before them, take, or sink the Boat; which is a tip-top Instance of Bravery. At the same Place, also, they have rowing Matches, in which the Persons engag’d ply their utmost Strength; and those who arrive first at the Goal carry the Prizes. In like manner the Swimmers too exercise here in their way; when he who excels most, is declared Conqueror, and receives the Reward appointed for him. And, with respect to these last Competitors, I must say, that I never, in my whole Life, saw any Men swim so well, nor with so great Strength; for they go almost as swift as a Boat: Which if I had not been an Eye-Witness of, I cou’d scarce have believ’d. ’Tis true, if we consider the natural Force and Nimbleness of the Sevarambians, the Warmth of their Climate, the commodious Situation of Sevarinde, and the honorary Recompences bestow’d on the Victors, it will not be thought strange that Persons who addict themselves to this Exercise should come to perform so well. Between this Bason and the City, are several Ranks of spreading Trees, planted in reg-

Part IV

289

ular Walks, where they have often Foot-Races. The whole Island, and almost all the Country round about it, is full of Trees, thus dispos’d; which afford shady Walks at all times. But particularly the high Roads are so adorn’d and shelter’d by them, that Travellers are not at all incommoded, as they are in other Countries, where there are no such Conveniencies. The Plains are water’d by a multitude of Canals from the Mountains, which, distributing their Stores to all Parts, fertilize the Soil, and keep it perpetually verdant, notwithstanding the scorching Heat of the Sun, which is very great in this Climate. Besides these Diversions, Sevarminas also, sometimes, takes that of hunting; when his Game is Lions, Tygers, Leopards, Bears, Erglantes, Abrousta’s, Deer, Bandelies, and several other Animals, which we have not in Europe. Those who engage in this Sport, meet in some of the Forests, not far from Sevarinde, which run out towards the Sea, and along by the River side; whither they often go by Water. They also make Parties for fishing, which is most commonly done at the festival Times, when one sees a great number of People, as well Women as Men, who go to partake of the Diversion. The rest of his time the Vice-Roy employs either in transacting Affairs of State, or in private Pleasures with his Wives and select Friends. If he has any Children, as it rarely happens but he has, they are brought up in publick like those of other People, have no sort of Pretensions to the Succession, and are not esteem’d at all better born than those of the least consider’d Person among them. Tho’ yet, it is allow’d to be a great Honour to a Family to have produced a Vice-Roy, however this goes no further than the meer Reputableness of the Thing; for even such a Race enjoys no Privileges above others, that being a peculiar Advantage reserv’d only to the Descendants of Sevarias. In all other respects but this, which alone regards his Posterity, the Vice-Roy is the happiest, and best obey’d Prince in the World; and there is not that People to be found who pays a greater Deference, nor bears a truer Affection to their Sovereigns, than the Sevarambians do to this Lieutenant of the SUN. For no Person dares to speak Evil of him, none is heard to murmur against him, and there is not, there cannot be, any who presume to traduce or so much as complain of his Administration, because they know that what he doth is for the publick Good, and that he undertakes nothing without the Consent of the Council, and the express Order of his Principal, as the Generality are still made to believe.

A DESCRIPTION OF THE TEMPLE OF THE SUN, AND AN ACCOUNT OF THE RELIGION OF THE SEVARAMBIANS. THIS Temple is in the midst of the great Palace before described. It was built by Sevarias, and is no larger than one of our Cathedrals in Europe.

290

The History of the Sevarambians

He went no further in this Work, for the first three Years, than just to set up the Walls; but after that he added some Ornaments, and order’d the Disposition of the whole so well, that he left room for his Successors to improve upon it, and bring in several other things to complete what he had only begun. Sevarbrontas, the third Vice-Roy, who was a great Architect, embellish’d this Building with all its Ornaments in that way, and render’d it much more beautiful than it was before his time. But all his Decorations of it were only in Stone-Work, because then Metals were very scarce in that Country. However, in that way, as I said, he did many things. Particularly, he parted off the Choir from the Body of the Temple by a marble Balustrade, and plac’d, on one side of the Altar, a Representation of the SUN in yellow Marble, and on the other, a large Statue of white, being the Figure of a Patria, like that which we saw at Sporounde, and gave a Delineation of among the Curiosities of that Country. Besides these things, he also built three Ranges of Galleries, one above another, for the Reception of part of the People that attend at the Solemnities: Which, with a good deal more that he did here, are still to be seen, tho’ many other of his Improvements have been since chang’d by his Successors. Sevarkhemas, who was the sixth Vice-Roy, and a great Naturalist, enrich’d this Temple exceedingly by the means of Mines which he discover’d, from whence he got vast Quantities of Metals. This Prince chang’d the marble Balustrade which fenc’d in the Choir, for one of massy Silver. He cover’d the bright Crystal Globe, which Sevaristas had plac’d at one side of the Altar, instead of the yellow Marble Representation, with a thick Plate of Gold, carv’d out in Rays set with Diamonds, and other precious Stones, to an inestimable Value; which gave it an astonishing Lustre.—The crystal Globe at Sevarinde is much larger and more resplendent than that at Sporounde.—Near the crystal Globe, on the same side of the Altar, stands a Statue of Sevarias in massy Gold, and on the other, not far from the Patria, that of Sevarkhomedas his Successor: And with one or the other of these two, are plac’d those of all the Vice-Roys which have reign’d since; each in his proper Order: every one of which are made of pure Gold, and as big as the Life. At the back of the Altar, between the shining Globe and the Patria, is only a plain black Veil, or Curtain, like that which we saw at the Temple of Sporounde. On the Walls, all round the Quire, are fine Paintings in Oil, representing the several Vice-Roys, and some of their most memorable Actions. In the first Table, Sevarias is shown, as receiving the Bolts of Heaven from the hands of the SUN; who also delivers to him a Book of the Laws, which he afterwards establish’d among the Sevarambians.

Part IV

291

Besides which, the same Piece gives a View of the two Battels he fought with the Stroukarambians; and the manner in which he was advanc’d to the Government by the explicit Order of the SUN: with some other remarkable Particulars of his Life. In the second, Sevarkhomedas is introduc’d as taking the same Book from Sevarias; after which he appears employ’d in erecting a Tomb for that great Prince, which he in reality did on one side of the Temple. In other Places he is also brought in building Bridges, and Osmasies at Sevarinde; and ordering several other things which were preform’d in his time. The third, presents Sevarbrontas, with a naked Sword in his right Hand, and a Square and Compass in the other; intimating thereby, the War he wag’d with the rebellious Parses, and his great Knowledge in Architecture. The same Picture has also several other remarkable Actions of this Prince. In the fourth, Sevardumistas is seen, drawing his Sword half-way out of the Scabbard, and, at the same time, a Hand from Heaven holding his Arm. By which it is intended to signify his Design to have conquer’d some neighbouring Countries, if he had not been restrain’d by the celestial Laws of Sevarias. He is also, in another part of the Tablature, shown as offering Sacrifices, and instituting new Ceremonies. In the fifth appears Sevaristas, younger and handsomer than any of his Predecessors. On one side of him stands the great Amphitheatre, which he built; on the other, the Palace, which was finished by him. The same Table has, besides, a Representation of many other remarkable things accomplish’d during his Reign. One of which is, the Pourtraiture of an exceeding beautiful young Woman, whom he holds by the Hand, while a Man, in all the Bloom of Youth, lies bleeding at his Feet, with a Poniard in his Breast. I enquir’d what the History was, intended by this Picture, and receiv’d the following Account: which I also afterwards, read at large in the Life of this Prince. There was at Sevarinde, in the time of Sevaristas, a young Man named Foristan, who fell in love with a Girl which was called Calenis. When she was but fourteen Years old, she was an extraordinary Beauty, and much admir’d by all that saw her. Being possessed of such a Stock of Charms, it may be easily imagin’d that she did not want Lovers. But Foristan was the first that ever address’d her on that Subject, and made her a Tender of his Heart. He had indeed, soon afterwards, many Rivals, who did the same. However, as his Passion was the eldest, his Person the handsomest, and his Affection greatest, he still retain’d the most Interest in the Heart of his beautiful Mistress. Their Charms, and mutual Esteem increasing daily as they advanc’d in Years, in a while, all the other Pretenders were become jealous of Foristan; who, notwithstanding that

292

The History of the Sevarambians

he endeavour’d to behave with the utmost Modesty and Temper under his good Fortune, felt a secret Joy in seeing himself preferr’d to his Rivals. He therefore, now, waited with Impatience for the happy Day that was to put an end to his Pain, by the Possession of the beautiful Object which had charm’d him; little expecting that fatal Turn which disturb’d his Repose, and had well nigh cost him his Life before the blissful Moment came, that, in the conclusion, crown’d all his Sufferings. One day then, at the festival Season, when a great Party was made for the Chace, he attended his Mistress with the rest of her Lovers to the Forest. She was mounted on a Bandely as white as Snow, and shone in her Hunting-Dress like the Sun in his Brightness. All her Lovers were charmed with her Appearance in this Equipage; but, at the same time that they found their Love increase, they felt their Envy rise to see, that she favour’d the happy Foristan with her kindest and tenderest Regards. One of these, whose Name was Cambuna, a warm, violent tempr’d Man, cou’d hardly bear her Indulgence to his Rival; and therefore, to prevent it as much as possible, took care to be always near her, which he did as much to chagrin Foristan, as to shew his Love to Calenis. That day the Hunters found, in a certain Part of the Forest, a Flock of Erglantes; which are a sort of white Bears, but far nimbler than the common ones. The Chace therefore turning that way, all the Company posted thither, and among the rest the charming Calenis with her whole Train of Lovers. The Sportsmen attack’d the Erglantes with much ardour; many of which were in a little time wounded with their Arrows, and some of them kill’d. But those that were wounded only, becoming more furious from the Pain they were in, tore almost every thing to pieces that came in their way. One of these enrag’d Creatures, happening to make up towards the Company where Calenis was with her Lovers, overbore all that oppos’d him, and wou’d have certainly worried this illustrious Beauty, if Cambuna, who was conveniently posted, had not spurr’d his Horse up to the raging Animal, and for some moments given a Check to his Fury. But in the Rencounter, his Horse, unfortunately, fell with him, and on him, when the Erglante was just going to dart himself at Calenis, whose Bandely had that moment thrown her, if Foristan, who never had stirr’d from her, had not immediately advanc’d and plung’d his Sword into him, quite up to the Hilt, which instantly laid him dead at her feet: For he had quitted his Horse as soon as he perceiv’d the Danger his Mistress was in; which prudent Action was the only thing that sav’d both her and Cambuna. But, tho’ he was thus fortunate with respect to them, he did not come off so well himself; for being very close to the raging Beast, he, in the Plunges of Death, gave him a Stroke with his Paw, which tore off part of his Thigh, and occasion’d his losing a great deal of Blood.

Part IV

293

Mean while Calenis thought her self exceedingly obliged to both these Lovers; and tho’ Foristan had not expos’d himself first to the Danger, as not being so well posted to meet it, he had at least given as incontestable a Proof of Love to her Person, and Zeal for her Service. Nay, he had show’d much more Prudence in his Conduct than Cambuna; and even shed his own Blood in saving the Life of his Mistress. This gallant Action of Foristan’s, which undoubtedly surpass’d that of his Rival, join’d to the Inclination which she had for him before, oblig’d Calenis to shew him some particular Marks of her Gratitude; which threw Cambuna into a kind of Despair. However, for the present, he dissembled his Resentment; and the Chace being ended, all the Company return’d to Sevarinde. Some time after this Adventure, Calenis fell ill of a languishing Distemper, which, in a few days, took off the Lustre of her Beauty, and began to emaciate her. As this Disorder continued upon her six or seven Months, and she was believ’d to be irrecoverably gone, all her Lovers forsook her, except Foristan only; whose Passion continued as flaming as ever; and his Tenderness for her, far from abating, seem’d rather to be increas’d by all that she suffer’d. For, unlike the rest of her Pretenders, during whole time of her Disease, he appeared more assiduous in his Services than, not only they, but he himself had been before; he gave her daily a thousand Proofs of his Affection; he endeavour’d to comfort her to the utmost of his power, at the very instant when his own Breast was tortur’d with unutterable Anguish for her, and on her account, even voluntarily, abstain’d from all the Enjoyments and Pleasures of Life. But at length, after seven or eight Months Languishment, she was cured; and, in a little time, had recover’d her Flesh and Complexion: Nay, and more than recover’d it; for she grew more plump and beautiful than ever she was before. As soon as her perfidious Lovers came to see her in this Condition, their Fires, which had been almost extinguished by her Illness, began to rekindle; but the greatest part of them having so shamefully abandon’d her, had not the assurance to renew their Addresses to her. However, some of them did venture to attempt it, whom therefore she treated as they had deserv’d, and frankly told them, that, “seeing they had ceas’d to love her, as soon as she ceas’d to be lovely, she also had ceas’d to esteem them, ever since they had ceas’d to be faithful.” That, “Foristan was the only Person who had been constant to her, in his Professions and Services; and therefore Foristan only was worthy of her Esteem and Gratitude.” That, “for the future, she desir’d they would not importune her any further, nor think her capable of so great an Injustice, as to dispose of any part of her Heart from a faithful Lover, who had so entirely

294

The History of the Sevarambians

devoted his to her.” By such Discourses Calenis quickly got rid of these troublesome Pretenders, and sufficiently gave them to know, that, she RESERV’D her self wholly for her ever-constant FORISTAN. This threw them all into a Despair; but especially the violent Cambuna, who could not bear the good Fortune of his Rival, and, in this disposition of Mind, would willingly have sacrific’d his own Life to have prevented him of the possession of Calenis. The Sevarambians never carry Arms but when they are engag’d in some military Exercise; either in the Field, or on the Viceroy’s Guard, or that of some great Officer. Cambuna, who bore Foristan a mortal grudge, but yet being brave, was incapable of base Vengeance, sought an opportunity of finding him, when they should be both in Arms. For this purpose therefore he chang’d his Guard-Day with one of his Acquaintance, who was to mount the Viceroy’s Guard with Foristan. Being then, accordingly, met there, he took the occasion and endeavour’d to provoke his Rival by Invectives and Reproaches to attack him; but seeing that he kept the Command of his Temper, either for fear of the Laws, or out of respect to the Place they were in, he at length drew his Sword upon him, which obliged the other to do so too in his own defence. They made several Passes at one another, and were, in a while, both wounded. Foristan was stabb’d in the Arm, and Cambuna run thro’ the Body: But tho’ their Wounds were large, they were not, however, mortal. This Duel made a noise in the Palace; the Duellists were both clapt in hold, and their Audaciousness having been so extraordinary, it was thought necessary to inform the Viceroy of it. Sevaristas was exceedingly irritated against them, as well on account of their Irreverence to the Palace of the SUN, as for being wanting in the Respect due to his own Person; and therefore commanded that they should be both punish’d to the utmost Rigour of the Laws. In the mean while, a third Lover of Calenis, thinking this an Opportunity favourable to his Design, prevailed on a Sevarobaste, who was his Friend, to ask the Viceroy to bestow her on him, provided he should obtain her Consent. As this Girl was an extraordinary Beauty, she ought, according to custom, to have been presented to the Viceroy, before she had been allow’d to engage her self to any one, which, undoubtedly, had been done, if her Disorder, before spoken of, had not, for a time, tarnish’d and impair’d the Charms which should have render’d her worthy of so great an Honour. However, as soon as the Prince had granted this Lover his Request, he made the most Efforts to gain her good Graces, which that he might accomplish the more easily, he represented to her not only the Excess of his Love, but also the Degree of Favour he was in with the Viceroy. And, to banish for ever

Part IV

295

from her Heart all hope of her possessing Foristan, he took care to set before her Eyes the miserable Condition into which his Rashness had precipitated him. But all these Reasons were not, by any means, sufficient to shake the Constancy of Calenis. She continued still faithful to her dear Foristan, and resolv’d, whatever might happen, never to marry any other but him only. By this time the unfortunate Lover was almost well of his Wounds. In order, therefore, to justify his Conduct, and avoid the Punishment to which the Presumption of having drawn his Sword within the Precincts of the Palace had exposed him, he found himself obliged to lay open the Affair a little, and to shew the absolute Necessity he was under of defending himself against the Fury of his Rival. After much Trouble, he had, at length, the good fortune to extricate himself; and prov’d, by unexceptionable Witnesses, that Cambuna had attack’d him, in consequence of a premeditated Design; and that himself had endeavour’d, all that he could, to avoid the Duel, having not so much as offer’d to draw his Sword, till the other’s doing so forc’d him upon it, in his own Defence. This Justification procur’d him his Liberty, and thereby gave him an opportunity of visiting again his dear Calenis, who could scarce repress the Transports of Joy that rose in her, at the sight of her long absent Lover. But this Pleasure was not indulg’d to them long; for a few days after Foristan was obliged to go to the Army, which was soon to take the Field. This gave the poor Lovers inconceivable Trouble; which was the more severe to them, as it was not possible for them to find any Remedy. They were therefore forc’d to think of parting, which was not done without many Sighs and Tears. However, they vow’d an eternal Fidelity to each other; and as the time of their Osparenibon was approaching, they comforted themselves with the hope of being soon happy, in one another, by a lawful Marriage. With these Assurances Foristan set out, and was absent from his beautiful Mistress three Months; during which time, he who had obtain’d the Viceroy’s Consent, endeavour’d, by all sorts of Methods, to shake her Constancy; but, after having in vain tried Prayers and Persuasions, he at length had recourse to Craft, Violence, and Authority, in order, by one or other, to carry his point. A Heart less constant than that of Calenis, would have, undoubtedly, sunk under such forcible Attempts; but, far from making any Impression on her Mind, they all serv’d only to confirm her in the Sentiments which she had entertain’d for Foristan. However, foreseeing that she, by her self, should find a great deal of difficulty in resisting Persons who were back’d by the Favour of the Viceroy, she got one of her Friends to present a Petition to him. In this Petition she

296

The History of the Sevarambians

pray’d the Prince to revoke the Donation he had made of her Person, and to permit her to throw herself at his feet, there to inform him of the Violence which had been offer’d to her Liberty. The Viceroy granted her request, and order’d her to be introduc’d to him, where, drown’d almost in Tears, she told her Story in the most affecting way in the World. Sevaristas, at the very first sight of her, was quite dazzled with the Lustre of her Beauty, and on hearing her Report, felt himself sensibly touch’d with her Grief. He therefore, strongly, express’d his Resentment against those who had used her with such Violence; and, kindly promising to protect her, for that purpose plac’d her with the Wife of one of his Sevarobastes within the Precincts of the Palace. Hither he came often to visit her, and after some Conversations with her, found so many Charms in her Person, that he also fell in love with her, of which he soon gave her many convincing Proofs. At first when she discover’d his Passion, she was extreamly afflicted at it, foreseeing that it would not be in her power to reject such a Lover, and that she should be constrain’d to prove, at last, unfaithful to Foristan; but, alas! it was not possible for her to avoid the Misfortune which threatned her. Some little time after this, the Sevarobaste’s Wife, with whom she dwelt, had Orders to speak to her on the Subject of the ViceRoy’s Love, and to let her into his Design of marrying her; which she did in the most persuasive way in the World. For, as she found a Repugnance on her part, she represented things in such a manner as was enough to shock the most firm Constancy that a Woman is capable of. “What mean you, senseless as you are,” said she, “in refusing so illustrious a Marriage, which would be the utmost Ambition of the greatest Beauties on Earth. Weigh, seriously, the Advantages and Disadvantages which a right or wrong Conduct, will procure you on this occasion. If you espouse Foristan, you will have in him, I confess, a Man whose Age is more agreeable to yours than that of Sevaristas, and will alone possess him, while he continues a private Person, which will, at once, both humour your Passion, and sooth that Gratitude which attaches you so strongly to him. But all this is of small account when compar’d with the many superior Benefits you will find in marrying Sevaristas. For, in the first place, you will, in his Person, have both the most powerful, and handsome Man in the Nation. ’Tis true, he is not one of your young Folk, but then it is also true, that, neither is he very old, and that, at the Age he now is, even laying aside his Greatness and exalted Station, he is preferable in point of Loveliness to all the young Men in Sevarinde. The Advantages of Youth are common to all Men; nay, and to the very Beasts themselves; but those of bodily, and, especially, of mental Beauty, are granted to but few, and when either of them is, ’tis very rare that the other goes along with it;

Part IV

297

though, if this doth happen to be the case, and bountiful Nature has indulg’d to a Man both these Blessings, ’tis almost a Miracle if capricious Fortune will add also her Endowments, which makes the others shine with a heightned Lustre. Yet all these are found, to the highest Degree, in the Person of the Vice-Roy. He is as handsome as a Man can be, and among all the Sevarambians there is not a single one to be seen, who has so charming a Countenance, and that majestick and almost divine Port which discover themselves so transcendently in him. For his exalted Virtues, his Understanding, and other excellent natural Talents, it is not necessary that I should say any thing of them.—All the World agrees, that from the time of the great Sevarias, from whom he is descended, we have not had a Vice-Roy of so large a Soul, nor who merited more than he to ascend the Throne of the SUN. His Fortune has advanc’d him as high as any Man can be rais’d, and whatever Favours she has bestow’d on him, he can now do the same for you, by taking you up to a Degree of Greatness and Glory far beyond that of all other Women. And this, without doubt, he intends, seeing he loves you, and instead of suffering you to be the Wife of a private Person, would advance you to the Honour and Happiness of possessing himself, who is the great Master of the whole Nation, and acknowledges no superior Power above him but the Divinity only.—It will be in vain for you to alledge, that you have plighted your Faith to your Lover, and are bound to him, by all the Ties of Affection and Gratitude: For tho’ this Plea would most certainly be very good with respect to a private Person, yet against the Vice-Roy these Excuses can never be deem’d lawful and justifying: Because, in the first place, you are at his disposal by the Constitutions of the State; and consequently before you lov’d Foristan, Sevaristas might have either taken you himself; or given you to another. Again by the same Laws, you still belong to him, and have no sort of Right to dispose of your Person to his prejudice. This being, you know, expressly forbidden to all young Women, who are Children of the Publick, of which he is the political Father. But tho’ this were not the case; and supposing that he had no such Right, what Man, I pray you, can you find more worthy of your Love? Or whom could you reasonably prefer to him? If you have lov’d Foristan, was it not because he appear’d to you more amiable than all the other Persons that address’d you? Most certainly your Affection for him proceeded only from Regard to your self; as you conceiv’d greater Advantages in the Possession of him than in any of the others who offer’d themselves to you. Give therefore this Self-Love its play, and let it now act upon you by the same Motives. If you consult it, it will tell you that Sevaristas being infinitely more amiable than the rest of Mankind, and already loving you passionately, you ought also to give him the

298

The History of the Sevarambians

Preference to every one else, for the very same Reason that determin’d you to do it to Foristan.———And, as to the Excuses you make, founded on your Obligations to Acknowledgement and Gratitude, they are with respect to the Vice-Roy’s Pretensions exceedingly weak, seeing you are much more bound to him, for having cast a favourable Eye upon you, than you are to Foristan on account of all the Services he can possibly have done you. Besides, if we may take things future into consideration, reflect, I beseech you, on the difference you ought to make between the trifling Assiduities a common Man has paid you, and the vast Advantages which the Master of the State can procure for you. Consider, continu’d she, what I have said to you, and do not reject so illustrious an Honour, to gratify an obscure Passion. But, perhaps you may still insist, that you shall not wholly possess the Prince, as you might Foristan. To this I answer, that you cannot be assur’d of the entire Possession of him any longer than while he remains a private Man, but if he should attain to publick Offices, he may then marry other Wives, whom, it is possible, he may love better than you; and, if that should happen, you will lose the great and only Point, which, on the present Supposition, you have now in view. But it will not be so with respect to the Vice-Roy: For if, on the one hand, his Fire should extinguish, you would, at least, on the other, have the Consolation of the many shining Privileges which you had acquir’d by his Alliance. If therefore you have but the least Sense of Glory, you will acknowledge, that the Love of a Sovereign is infinitely more honourable than that of a Subject.” These powerful Reasons very much shock’d the Constancy of Calenis. The more she reflected upon them, the more she acquiesc’d in them; and, tho’ she yet felt some stinging Remorse, she, by little and little, suffer’d a Love for Sevaristas to steal upon her, till at last it had quite jostled out that of Foristan. A few days after, her new Lover visited her, and by that means compleated his Conquest. She admired his Person, and all his excellent Qualities, and the Pourtraiture that had been made of him seem’d but a feeble Ray issuing from those resplendent Charms which she now beheld with her own Eyes. And thus Ambition taking fast hold of her Heart, this mighty Passion soon eras’d all Remains of the Image of Foristan, which Love had engrav’d there. The beautiful Inconstant receiv’d the Prince’s Visit with Joy, she heard his Discourse with Pleasure, and becoming, by little and little, more familiar with him, she began to support his Looks, she had Courage enough to answer his Questions, and even went so far as to satisfy him that she was no longer insensible of his Pains. In short, after about a Month she promis’d to give him her Hand, and, for his sake, to banish from her Heart every other Person in the World.———A plain

Part IV

299

Instance, how crown’d Heads advance in these Affairs, and with what Ease they can vanquish even the most averse and rebellious Affections!———Tho’ yet, in the present Case, it must be own’d, that we have no room to wonder that Calenis should be thus conquer’d by such an Assailant; since Sevaristas was the most worthy and lovely of Men, and by dint of meer Merit only, was capable of shaking the most establish’d Constancy, without the dazzling Advantage of his high Station, and that Majesty which surrounded him. Mean while, as the Actions of the Great are open to the World, and the Vice-Roy no ways conceal’d the Love he had conceiv’d for Calenis, nor his Design of marrying her, this Business was known to the whole Nation; and consequently it was not long before the unhappy Foristan was inform’d of the redoubtable Rival his Misfortune had rais’d him. He felt all the Grief that a Man was capable of upon such an occasion, and cou’d find no Consolation nor Hope but in death. Common Report had given him to know the Day appointed for the Marriage of his inconstant Mistress, and his Heart pronounc’d, that, “this should be the last of his Life.” He therefore confirm’d himself in this Resolution, and full of the Thought took his way to Sevarinde, without taking leave of his Superiors. The Marriage Rites were now going to begin, when he enter’d the Temple, and hid himself behind the Pillar, near the Place where Calenis was to give her hand to the Vice-Roy. Watching therefore for the time when she was going to stretch it out to him, he cry’d out, “Stop, O perfidious one, and do not violate, during my Life, that Fidelity which my Services, and thy own Oaths, ought to preserve unalienated: tarry till my death, which will immediately follow this Proof of thy Inconstancy, and render an Action lawful, which thou can’st not perform without becoming highly criminal while I am living.” As soon as he had thus spoke, he advanced towards her, and in the presence of the Vice-Roy, and the whole Assembly, plung’d a Poniard in his Bosom. Sevaristas and every one else were extreamly surpriz’d at this unforeseen, extraordinary Event, but the miserable Calenis was stabb’d to the Heart by the Wound he had given himself; and the Image of her Inconstancy and Perfidiousness presented it self to her Mind with so much Horror, that, Despair taking possession of her Soul, she ran towards her bleeding Lover with a Design of snatching the Dagger from his hand, and piercing her own treacherous Breast, as a Proof of her Repentance, and in order to undergo the same Fate with him. Her Action and Looks, in which the Tumult of her Soul was painted in the most lively Manner, made a Discovery of her Intention, and gave, those who beheld her, time to interpose and prevent her fatal Purpose.

300

The History of the Sevarambians

Mean while, even by the express Order of Sevaristas, Relief came to the miserable Foristan; who was not yet dead, and whose Wound, indeed, did not prove mortal, tho’ probably that might have been the case, if the Promise which the Vice-Roy solemnly made, of yielding up Calenis to him, by asswaging the torturing Grief of his Mind, had not inspir’d the poor Lover with a Desire of living in order to possess her. And now he suffer’d his Wound to be bound up, which, upon searching it, was not found to be dangerous. So that in a few Days he began to mend, and felt his Hopes revive which had been almost extinguish’d. The Vice-Roy visited him often, renew’d his Promise to him, and at last actually gave up Calenis, tho’ he had a very tender Passion for her, and a strong Inclination to have retain’d her. But his Virtue silenc’d the Cries of his Affection, and made it give place to the Voice of Justice and Pity. This generous Action greatly acquir’d him the Esteem and Love of his Subjects, and his Successors have been so delighted with it, as that they thought it worthy of a Place in his Table. As to the afflicted Calenis, after having fully convinc’d her Lover of her real Sorrow, for having suffer’d her self to be dazzled by the great Merits of Sevaristas, she married her dear Foristan, even by the Command of this generous Prince, who was pleas’d to unite them, by the Bands of a lawful Wedlock, according to the manner of their country. This Story is related at length in the Life of Sevaristas, from whence I took it. And now, after this long Digression, I come to the sixth Table; in which Sevarkhemas appears with a golden Sceptre in his right Hand, and a Gripe of Flowers and Herbs in his left: to show his great Knowledge in natural Things; and especially of Plants and Metals, of which last he discover’d several very rich and useful Mines. The rest of the Piece is embellish’d with divers Works in Gold and Silver, with which he adorn’d the Temple and Palace of the SUN; and particularly with the resplendent Rays which he plac’d round the bright crystal Globe. The seventh, and last Table, represents Sevarkimpsas holding a naked Sword in his hand, with a Company of Slaves in Chains, which seem to be dragg’d after him: This Piece refers to his conquest of some neighbouring Nations who had presum’d to make Incursions into his Dominions. The same Table also shows the Indices, or Mercuries which he order’d to be set up on the Roads; several Gardens with which he embellish’d the Country; and also, another long Train of young Slaves, signifying the Tribute of Children impos’d by him on the People he conquer’d. This is the whole Set of Tables, representing the Seven Vice-Roys, Predecessors of him who is now reigning, being beautiful Paintings, containing in Epitome the most remarkable Actions of their Lives.

Part IV

301

Not far from these Pictures are the Tombs of all their deceased Princes, from Sevarias down to the present time. Each of these Monuments, stand in their proper Places, according to the Order of the Succession, and are adorn’d with marble Sculptures, reliev’d with Gold and Silver, very richly and curiously wrought. In the middle of the Temple, up against one of the Galleries, is a prodigious large Organ, the Pipes of which are Silver gilt; and over-right this Organ, is a Place, separated from the rest of the Temple, for the Reception of the Concerts of vocal and instrumental Musick. The Roof of the Temple is very lofty; and enrich’d with Gilding and Paintings to a great value; which give it a wonderful Lustre. Besides all these, there are a multitude of other rich Ornaments which I shall pass over in silence; contenting my self with saying only, that the Temple is as grand and magnificent as the Palace and Amphitheatre, all of which are so very extraordinary, that none but Persons knowing in Architecture can give an adequate Description of them. But, for my own part, as I profess nothing that way, I will not enlarge any more upon this Subject, fearing lest, by such an Attempt, I should tire the Reader with too long a Detail of Particulars. Let it therefore suffice, that I once more affirm that “I never saw, elsewhere, any thing comparable to these three superb Buildings, tho’ I have travell’d over the greatest Part of Europe, and seen almost every thing that is curious and excellent in it.” And as this Temple is the principal Place in which the Religion of the Country is exercis’d, I believe it may here be proper to give some Account of the Belief, Theology, and Worship of the Sevarambians.

OF THE RELIGION OF THE SEVARAMBIANS. THIS Nation, as well as all others, has many different Opinions concerning the Deity, tho’ they have but one sort of external Worship established among them. ’Tis true, indeed, those who are in any particular way of thinking, are indulg’d a full Liberty of Conscience, nor even so much as forbidden to dispute against the Establishment, provided they do it with that Respect and Submission which is due to the Laws and the Magistrate. Nay, this Liberty extends so far, that they have Colleges, in which, at certain times of the Year, they hold publick Disputations, where each Opponent may freely speak his Sentiments, and offer any thing in support of them, without fear of being blamed or ill-treated by any Person whatsoever. For it is a Maxim with the Sevarambians, “not to trouble any one for his particular Opinions, while he yields an exterior Obedience to Authority, and conforms to the Constitutions and Customs of the Country, in things relating to the Good of the Society.”

302

The History of the Sevarambians

Accordingly, when any Person is to have justice done him, or to be advanc’d to any Place or Dignity, his religious Notions are no part of the Question, tho’ they make a strict Enquiry with respect to his Manners and Morals. And for the same reason, neither Priests, nor any other Ecclesiasticks, are excluded from the Civil Government, which is the Practice almost every where else; it being look’d upon as a Violation of both natural and civil Right, to refuse a Person an Office, upon no other account but because he is in orders. For no Member is hereby detach’d from the State, or ceases, because a Clerick, to have any longer an Interest in the Government and Society. Besides, among the Sevarambians, this Society not being divided into divers Jurisdictions, they are all subject to one sovereign Chief, who, as well as Lieutenant, is also HighPriest of the SUN; so that, in the Person of the Viceroy, both the temporal and spiritual Titles are united; which renders his Authority much more compleat and venerable, because the Priesthood adorns the Viceroyship, and the Viceroyship gives a Lustre and Dignity to the Priesthood. These two Offices therefore, centering thus in the Sovereign, may also do the same in the Subjects; and consequently, Ecclesiastical Orders can be no bar to Civil Preferments; both which a Person may hold, even tho’ he should have very singular Opinions in the Article of Religion, provided he executes his Offices faithfully, and behaves himself like an honest Man. The Effects of these just and reasonable Maxims contribute greatly to the publick Peace and Tranquility; which is the principal End all good Politicks ought to aim at. For tho’, among the Sevarambians, there are, as we have said, divers Opinions touching the Deity, which frequently break out into open Controversies, and engage great Numbers on one side and the other, yet, perhaps, there is not that Country in the World, where there are less Heats about Religion, and in which it produces so few Disturbances, Quarrels, and Wars. Whereas in other States, Zeal and Piety are often made the Covers and Masks of the most inhuman and detestable Actions.—Under this specious Pretext it is, that Ambition, Avarice, and Envy, play their abominable parts, and blind miserable Mortals, so as to extinguish in them all the Sentiments of Humanity, all that Love and Respect which is due to Natural Right and Civil Society, and banish from their Minds that Benevolence and Charity, which the holy Precepts of our Religion so strongly recommend and enjoin. And from hence it comes to pass, that things, in themselves most venerable and sacred, become, by abuse, the most abhorr’d and pernicious; and that what ought to inspire only Lenity, Justice, and Innocence, very frequently, in its issue, brings forth nothing but Rage, Injustice, and Cruelty. But it is not thus among this happy People; where no Person

Part IV

303

can oppress his Neighbour, nor violate any natural Right under a pretence of Religion, and Conscience; where none has it in his power to stir up a fierce unthinking Populace, and engage them in Rebellions, Civil Wars, and Massacres, by a mad furious Zeal; and, in a word, where Estates and Honours are not to be acquired by mean Craft, nor the false Appearances of a pretended, counterfeit Piety. Ambition loves to walk on Precipices, and is fond of Difficulties, but doth not care to stoop to things low, and that are easily accomplish’d. Accordingly, among the Sevarambians, no Person sets himself up as the Head of a Sect, because any one may be so without finding any opposition, and it is permitted to every body to profess what Religion they please: no Person applies himself to the amassing Riches, because they answer no one good purpose; and the having immense Treasures would neither make a Man more happy, nor, even, wealthy, than the meanest Subject in the Nation; and lastly, none can be induc’d to envy his Neighbour his Ecclesiastical Dignities and Preferments, for the Rents and Revenues arising from them. Thus every Individual lives in a strict conformity to the Laws, and maintains a Veneration for the Magistrate; and tho’ each may think as freely as he will, and believe whatever he pleases, yet none is permitted to disturb the publick Repose, nor violate the Rights of Society, under any pretence whatsoever. Curiosity is the only Incentive of all their Controversies; and even those in Religion, for this very reason, are treated with as much moderation as any Philosophical Dispute in Europe. This will not seem at all incredible, if we reflect on the manner in which they are brought up; being accustom’d, from their earliest Years, to live in society, and to maintain a mutual respect for one another: To which we may also add that the Religion of the Country depending more on Philosophy and human Reasonings, than on Revelation and Faith, it is no wonder that they talk with so much coolness about it. From hence it comes to pass, that if their Religion is not the truest of any, it is however the most agreeable to human Reason, and nothing but the celestial Light of the Gospel ought to have the preference to it. In short, if we had not the Blessing of a divine Revelation, it would not be difficult to approve of their Opinions concerning the Deity. For, in the first place, they believe that there is but one supreme, independent God, who is a Being eternal, infinite, almighty, perfectly just and good, who governs and disposeth all things by an admirable unerring Wisdom. But then, they believe also, that the World too is infinite, and admit of no such thing as a Vacuum or Nothingness in Nature. As to the particular Globes, which are only Parts of the Universe, they think that each had a proper Generation, like that of every Animal; and that from the destruction of some, proceed the Births of others. Upon this head

304

The History of the Sevarambians

they add, that when any Comet appears above the Planets, it is a Globe dissolving by Fire, whose Body was not seen before but as a Star; but now being inflamed, distends and dilates it self, and by that means really becomes greater, and consequently more visible to us. Sevarias was long in doubt whether there was any other God but the SUN, which was the only one acknowledged by the ancient Persians; but Giovanni his Governor, who was a Christian, after having in vain tried to prove it to him by the testimony of the Holy Scriptures, at length convinc’d him, and brought it down to his Comprehension by the force of natural Reason. He remark’d to him, that, “the fix’d Stars were so far from the SUN, that they could receive but a weak Light, and little or no Heat from it; that therefore they must have each of them a Light of their own: and if this was the Case, that it was highly probable they were so many Suns, in the universal World, as great and glorious as that which warms and enlightens us. This Multiplicity,” he went on, “and Inequality of Suns, are things incompatible with supreme Divinity, which must be one, and admits of no Equal. Besides, the same Supposition discovers also an Impotency in the SUN; seeing he alone is not equal to the Service of the Universe, and can emit his Beams but to a very small part in comparison of the whole; from whence we may certainly conclude, that he is not that Sovereign GOD who governs the World, but that there must be an infinite, invisible, independent, and almighty Being, which presides over all things by his eternal Providence.” These Reasonings prevail’d on Sevarias, and brought him to acknowledge, that there was a supreme invisible GOD, greater than the SUN; but they could not dispossess him of the Notion, that “the SUN was also a GOD; and, tho’ not the Sovereign of Heaven and Earth, yet, at least, a subordinate Deity, or however, one of the prime Ministers of the GOD of Nature, to whom it was committed to enlighten and cherish this Globe which we inhabit, and the Planets that surround it, which he believed to belong also to his Province and Jurisdiction.” He confirmed himself more and more in this Opinion, and at his death transmitted it to his Posterity, who still adhere to it, and make it a principal Article of their Religion. And indeed this very Doctrine may be easily deduc’d from his Prayer, where he says, that the SUN is to be regarded as, “at least the Means by which descend all Blessings, from that great Being which supports even him, and whose most glorious Minister he is.” These two Ideas of the Deity, have caus’d the Sevarambians to place in their Temples, a black Veil beyond the Altar, to represent the invisible and eternal GOD, whom they know not, and can only perceive a faint Image of, thro’ the thick Darkness that envelops their Understandings.

Part IV

305

But for the SUN, who is, they say, a visible and glorious GOD, and the Mean, or Canal, by which we receive Life, and all the good things that contribute to the support of it, they believe him to be their GOD in a particular manner, seeing he quickens, enlightens, and nourishes them; and that therefore they are obliged, by Love and Gratitude, to address their Vows, pay their homage, and direct their religious Worship immediately to him, as the Minister of that great Being, who has committed to his Care the Guidance and Government of this Orb which we inhabit, as well as of all the other within his Province and Jurisdiction. They add, that the great GOD, not vouchsafing to render himself visible, doth thereby declare that he will not be seen but by the Eyes of the Understanding, and is contented with the Respects and Sacrifices which we offer to HIM, whom he has constituted the Dispenser of all the Favours, which therefore, in this mediate way, we receive from him. Thus these poor blinded People reason, preferring the obscure, faint Glimmerings of their own Minds, to the resplendent Light of Revelation, and the sacred Testimony of the whole Church of GOD. However, they worship the same eternal Being which we Christians adore; and have even instituted a solemn Feast to his honour, which they call Khodimbasion, and celebrate every seven Years. Nevertheless, all the Homage which they pay him, is as dark as their Knowledge of him; and the greatest Mystery in their Religion. As to their Worship of the SUN, ’tis clear and visible as himself, and has no profound Mysteries in it like that of the great GOD, whom they call Khodimbas, that is to say, King of Spirits. For, in their Language, Khoda signifies a Spirit, and Imbas a King, or sovereign Monarch, from the word Imba, Empire, or Command; whence they form the Verb prosimbai, to command sovereignly. In like manner they also call the SUN Erimbas, or King of Light; for so Ero signifies. Besides this Name, indeed, they give him several others, as, Phodariestas, Source of Life; Antimekodas, Divine Mirrour; and many others, which I shall explain hereafter. In divers Conversations which I held with them on these Subjects, I observ’d that they very frequently ended their Discourse with the following Reasoning: That there are in Religion three Branches of Duty, which all the rest terminate in, and to which all Men are indispensibly oblig’d. “The first are those that bind all reasonable Creatures together, to the great BEING of Beings, by Respect and interior Veneration. The second, attaches them to the SUN, on a Principle of Love and Gratitude, accompanied with an internal Reverence, and an external Worship, as being the particular GOD and GOVERNOR of this Globe which we inhabit; and the third, devotes them to their Patria, or Country, where

306

The History of the Sevarambians

they received at first their Life, Nourishment, and Education; which are things that induce all Men to love the Place of their Nativity, and prefer it to every other in the World.” And these three are, accordingly, all of them represented in their Temples by the black Veil, the bright Globe, and the Statue of a Woman, suckling several Children, which one finds at the upper end of every Church, a little beyond the Altar; the black Veil being just behind, and the other two on each hand of it, as has been before observ’d. The Sevarambians are of opinion, that ’tis the SUN that communicates Motion to the Earth, and all the other Planets of his Province, which move concentrically, each in his respective Orbit, by the force of Rays emanating perpetually from him, and turning these great Bodies, whom he warms and enlightens, as Wind or Water doth the Wheel of a Mill. They imagine also, that the SUN is the efficient Cause of the Winds, and also of the Flux and Reflux of the Sea. They believe too, that all sorts of Souls, as well of Men as those of the other Animals, come from the same Source, being only Rays more or less purified. The great Genius’s of the Nation are indeed much divided concerning the Immortality of the Soul; some of them thinking that it is so, others that it is of a perishable nature: but all the common People believe it to be immortal; and indeed this is an Article of the establish’d Religion; as it was the Judgment of Sevarias, and is a more plausible and comfortable Notion than the other. Those among them who say ’tis material, and that there is no other spiritual Being but the great GOD, do yet allow that it is immortal, in the same sense as the Body is, considered in its original Matter; which may, ’tis true, change its Form, but can never, according to them, be annihilated. However, as I said, the common Opinion is, that after this Life there are Rewards and Punishments for good and bad Men; and that, as soon as the Soul leaves the Body, it goes to some Place farther from, or nearer to the SUN, according to the good or evil it has been guilty of. This Opinion is deriv’d from Sevarias, with whom they also believe, that the Souls of the Just, after having pass’d thro’ divers Bodies, or floated up and down some time in the Air, whether in this Orb which we inhabit, or in some of the other Planets, is at last reincorporated with the SUN, from which it was only at first an Emanation; and that then and there it finds its perfect Repose, and complete Felicity. He explain’d himself pretty clearly on this head, as we have already seen; and what he then deliver’d is generally admitted as an incontestable Truth. As for the Souls of the Wicked, they are persuaded that at their separation from the Body, they are banish’d into Regions very remote from the resplendent Face of the SUN, and there confin’d, in the midst of Ice and Snows, till, by amending their evil Dispositions,

Part IV

307

they approach nearer and nearer to that beautiful Star, where, in the end, they are also reincorporated, as soon as they are purified from their Vices and Corruptions, and become like those of the Just. These People also fancy, that the Souls of Beasts transmigrate out of one Body into another; but then they do not, like Pythagoras, believe that the Soul of a Man can pass into the Body of a Beast, or that of a Beast into a Man: For which reason, they make no scruple of killing them, and eating their Flesh. We generally make a distinction between rational and irrational Creatures, but they do not allow of this difference; for they believe that all Creatures, propagated in the way of Generation, which are call’d perfect ones, have a certain measure of Reason, greater or less, according as their Souls are more or less gross. They think that these Souls also emane from the SUN; but, being mix’d with Air, and the other Elements, are neither so pure nor permanent as those of Men, which approach nearer to the nature of Spirits, and, by consequence, are of a firmer Consistence, and longer Duration. Indeed, their Opinions are much divided on this Subject; but, notwithstanding that, they all agree in acknowledging, that the established Religion is very reasonable; and no one makes any difficulty of assisting at the publick Assemblies, and joining in the Sacrifices, Prayers, and Hymns; of which last they have several which are parts of their Worship, and sung in honour of the SUN. The Descendants of Giovanni alone, who are Christians, and make a Sect by themselves, will not engage in these Services with them, which they call Idolatry, but the others religious Worship. These, indeed, are but few in number, and, upon the whole, not very good Christians neither; for they hold certain particular Opinions, not at all conformable to the Doctrines of the Holy Catholick Church. For instance, They do not believe that Jesus Christ is GOD by Nature, but by the Assumption or Association of the Deity only; and say, before he took Flesh upon him, to labour in the Mystery of our Redemption, he was but an Angel, tho’ indeed the most excellent of that Order, to whom GOD communicated a Fulness of his Grace and Favour, whom he elected for his Son, and chose out from among his Brethren, to make him the Instrument of Salvation, and associate him in his Empire. That, for this purpose, he has given him a Rod of Iron, to vanquish his Enemies, to subdue Powers of Hell, and triumph with his Elect, over the World, the Flesh, and the Devil. But they deny that he was GOD eternally, a parte ante, as the Schools speak; and affirm, that in his proper Nature, he is no more than a created Angel; and that since he became Man, he is also but GOD by the will of GOD, who has given him all Power in Heaven and Earth, adopted him for his Son in a special manner, and set him at his

308

The History of the Sevarambians

Right-Hand, to shew the Authority with which he is invested. Thus these poor Hereticks endeavour to support their Error by vain Reasonings, and deny the most sacred Mystery of the Trinity; or, however, conceive of it in a very different manner from the Orthodox. For besides they reject the eternal Deity of the Son of GOD, they say, that by the Holy Ghost we are not to understand any thing more, than the Agreement which there is between the Father and the Son, and the Virtue proceeding from both, for the Regeneration of the Faithful, for the Support of the Church, and for the Government of the World. As to the rest they believe, in most Points, as the Church of Rome believes; particularly in the Articles of Purgatory, Prayers for the Dead, Invocation of Saints, the Merit of good Works; and several other Doctrines perfectly the same with those of the Catholick Faith: but then they absolutely reject the most sacred Mystery of the Holy Sacrament of the Altar; and affirm that this is a Ceremony instituted by Jesus Christ, only in commemoration of his Cross, and of the Promises which he has made to all those who should believe in him, and endeavour to imitate the good Example he has left Mankind, by regulating their Lives, and conforming their Actions thereto. This is their Opinion about the holy Eucharist; in which, if I mistake not, they harmonize very much with the Calvinists, and the rest of our Protestant Hereticks in Europe. However, they celebrate the Mass in much the same manner that we do, and have retain’d almost all the Ornaments and Ceremonies of the Catholick Roman Church. These Southern Christians, whom, from the Name of their Founder, we may call Giovannites, have, at least, this good thing in them; that they honour the Pope, and unanimously agree, that he is the greatest of all Christian Bishops, and the true Successor of St. Peter: but then they deny that all Christians are obliged to obey him, tho’ it is their Duty to respect him. However, some of them assur’d me, that they should not be sorry to acknowledge the Pope’s Authority, if, by that means, they could procure any assistance from him, for the increasing their Sect in that Continent; but that they believed this would be impossible, by reason of the Oppositeness of the Sevarambian Laws, which will not suffer a Division of the supreme Power into spiritual and temporal, as Christians do, and who have united both these Jurisdictions in one and the same Person. The Number of the Giovannites, throughout the whole Nation, is not above a thousand, or twelve hundred; almost all of which dwell at Sevarinde, in an Osmasie appropriated to them, where they worship GOD in their own manner, without any sort of Trouble or Disturbance. They have a kind of Bishop, and some Priests under him, who perform all religious Functions among them: they honour these Ecclesiasticks very much, and pay them all the respect that is due to their Office.

Part IV

309

These Giovannites are the only Persons who separate from the publick Assemblies, and refuse to join in the Sacrifices offer’d to the SUN; but they make no scruple of assisting at the Feast of the Khodimbasion, because, say they, “that is instituted in honour of the true GOD.” Seeing them, therefore, thus zealous against the establish’d Religion of the Country, I one day ask’d some of their Priests, “Whether they had ever tried to convert any of the Sevarambians to the Christian Faith?” To which they answered, that, “it had been often attempted, but without success; because they are a People exceedingly fond of the Worship of the SUN, and build so much on human Reason, that they ridicule all Doctrines which are not supported by it.” According to this Maxim, they look on the “Mysteries of our Religion, as a very strange kind of things, and banter, as absurd, whatever surpasses their dark Understandings, and is not within the ken of their own short-sighted Comprehension. They laugh at Miracles, and say, that all of them proceed from natural Causes; and that tho’ these Effects may be very astonishing, and pass for Prodigies, with respect to us, yet, with respect to Nature, all things go on in a regular Course, according to the Dispositions and Powers which, from the beginning, the several Efficients were endow’d with.” In a word, the Priests concluded, that, “the Conversion of these poor Infidels is almost impossible; and that, if GOD did not, in some very wonderful way, confound their Reason, and vanquish their Infidelity, there was no room to hope that any of them would ever embrace the Christian Faith.” To this they added, that, “they knew by Tradition from Giovanni, that, notwithstanding the great Veneration which Sevarias had for the SUN, he, yet, very much honoured Moses and Jesus Christ; and confess’d, that, they were at least extraordinary Men, who had left a fine System of Laws and Precepts behind them, and endeavoured to engage the People of their times, in the Love and Worship of the true GOD, by drawing them off from the brutal Idolatries they were addicted to.” He said farther, that, “the Moral of Jesus Christ was excellently adapted to our Continent, for the correcting our corrupt Manners; and seem’d to have something divine belonging to it, in as much as, by the Hope of a Resurrection, and many other good Doctrines, it tends to a most valuable End; viz. that of softening the haughty Fierceness of Mankind, subduing their savage Passions, and establishing Piety, Justice, Temperance and Charity in the World. But he treated the Religion of Mahomet as profane and sensual; and said, that it issued in Ignorance, Vice, and Cruelty. That it had for Principles, Tyranny, Persecution, and Infidelity; and that, those who were most zealously attach’d to it, were a Body, or Faction, of covetous, cruel, ambitious People, who made use of the false Mask of Religion to increase their Numbers, to govern the Ignorant as if they were mere Beasts, and to make so

310

The History of the Sevarambians

many Slaves and Tools of them, for the support of their Pride, and to gratify their Avarice.” It was thus that Sevarias spoke of the Mahometans, and all such as they are; nor will it be at all wondered at: for, besides these general Reasons against them, he had also particular cause to hate them, for that they had seiz’d on Persia; and his Ancestors had, a long time, smarted under the Effects of that Tyranny and Cruelty which their Religion it self inspires. They said, moreover, that, “Giovanni their Founder had made the utmost Efforts to convince him of the Truth of the Christian Religion, and to prevail on him to embrace it; but that worldly Interests, and carnal Reasonings, were invincible Obstacles in his way, and prevented him from being ever able to accomplish his Design: tho’, yet, they own’d, that he was a capital Enemy to Pagan Idolatry; that he treated all the Greek Fables as downright ridiculous, and said, that, they had stuff’d the Worship of the true GOD, which at first was very plain and simple, with a thousand extravagant and superstitious Fictions, perfectly shocking not only to Truth, but also to sound Reason and common Sense.” And for this cause he forbad his People, and Successors, the reading and recital of those idle Legends; imagining, that such an Indulgence would only have a tendency to corrupt their Morals, and fill their Minds with wild extravagant Ideas. In like manner, he also condemn’d, as mere Fables, and old Wives Tales, all Accounts of Ghosts, Fairies, Magicians, and Sorcerers; saying, that these Opinions wholly ow’d their establishment to the Craft and Artifice of certain Sets of People, who, abusing the Credulity and Ignorance of weak Minds, had wrought them up to a belief of all these Reveries, in order to captivate their Understandings, and tyrannize over their Consciences, by the dread of Phantoms invented at pleasure. And, in this matter, his Successors have all closely adher’d to his Sentiments; for, throughout the whole Nation, there is not a Person to be met with, who so much as knows what Enchantments, Witchcraft, and Apparations mean. However, it must be own’d, they have seen some of the last sort in the Clouds. For, in the time of Sevarkimpsas, the Inhabitants of Sporounde discovered several Ships in the Sky, representing a Fleet under full Sail, which seem’d to plough their way thro’ the Air. This Appearance threw great numbers of People into a panick, and even possess’d the Magistracy with an Apprehension, that it foreboded the Arrival of some Naval Armament which might ravage their Coasts. In full persuasion, therefore, of this imagined Danger, two Armies were march’d from Sevarambe to Sporounde, and as many Vessels as could be got ready were equip’d, for the defence of the Country, in case it should be attack’d by any foreign Nation; but after having continued this Precaution for two Years, and nothing had happen’d as had been fear’d, the Apprehension it self ceas’d,

Part IV

311

and there was no longer any talk of this Phenomenon. The Learned, who made it their business to enquire, nicely, what might be the natural Causes of such an Appearance, reasoned much and variously upon it, but were not able to trace the true Source of it. About twenty Years after, they had a second Apparition of a Ship in the Air, which seem’d to be agitated by a Tempest; and their View of it was, at this time, so distinct, that they even fancied they perceiv’d some of the Crew perish. This furnished a new Subject of astonishment, and gave an occasion to the Men of Letters to philosophize again as before; but, as then, all their Researches brought no manner of light to the thing in question, and issued at last in only a few uncertain Conjectures. At length, when this Affair began to grow a little dead, a Ship arriv’d from Persia, which brought over several young Men, who had been travelling in our Continent, and, in their Passage home, had met with a Tempest in which they were like to have perish’d, just about the time when this Appearance happen’d at Sporounde. Some of these Persons having compar’d the time, and the Description of this last Phenomenon, with their own Journals, found it precisely correspond to their Circumstance in the Storm which they had weather’d; as likewise did the former, to a Fleet of European Ships some others now remember’d they had met with at Sea, exactly at the time of that Appearance. From hence it was concluded, that what they had seen in the Sky, was only the reflected Images of what, at those instants, happen’d on the Ocean; and that inferior Objects, sometimes, paint themselves on the Clouds, as on Mirrors; which, making a kind of Refraction, throw back the Representations they receive, on such a part of Earth as is opposite to the Angle of Light which conveys those Objects to them. This Explication was admitted as very probable, and quite dissipated all the mysterious Thoughts which they had entertain’d on this Subject; so that the Sevarambians will never more be affrighted at such Phenomena, wheresoever they shall happen, at Sporounde, or elsewhere. ’Tis true, this City being situated at a reasonable Distance from the Sea, in a plain Country, seems to be well plac’d for the seeing, often, such Sights; especially since the Hollanders, and other European Nations, make such frequent Voyages to the East-Indies, China, and Japan. It is exceedingly likely, that the many fighting Armies of this sort, which have been so often observ’d in Europe, and in which the Spectators have been frequently so particular as to distinguish the Horse and Foot, the Ensigns and Standards, proceed wholly from the same Cause; and, that at the time when the Clouds shew such Images, they receive them from some other Place where the Bodies really are, which are thus represented in the Air. Every one may judge as he pleases; but, for my part, I think that the Sevarambian Conjecture, on this Subject, is not at all

312

The History of the Sevarambians

unreasonable; and that there is not so much Mystery in this Matter as the common People imagine. But, tho’ the Sevarambians do not believe that there is any thing miraculous in these kind of Appearances, they yet hold, that the lower Region of the Air is inhabited by certain aerial Substances which we do not see, because their Bodies are of so subtil a kind of Matter, that our gross Eyes cannot in reality perceive them. There is, indeed, a Sect of People at Sevarinde, who pretend to have a Commerce with these elementary Inhabitants, which, they say, there are great numbers of, and can render themselves visible, by the means of condens’d Air, which they assume in the lower Region, and make themselves, as it were, Habits of them, whenever they are dispos’d to shew themselves. But many treat this Opinion as ridiculous and chimerical, and look upon the Persons who entertain it, as either Visionaries, whose Imaginations are crazed, or else as designing People, who put off their own Fancies, under the pretext of this pretended Commerce. ’Tis said, that the first Author of this Sect was a Descendant of one of the Priests of Stroukaras, whom we have already mentioned; and who, by means of a wonderful Stone which had been handed down from Father to Son, till it came to this Impostor, could make his Face resplendent, as if it had been irradiated with a celestial Light. This Person, indeed, durst not say as Stroukaras had done, that he had a Commerce with the SUN, because the Religion which Sevarias had establish’d, was contrary to his Designs; but then he gave out, that he conversed freely with these elementary People; and that he was, sometimes, transported with them thro’ the Air, where he tasted Pleasures, infinitely more satisfying than any to be met with on the Earth. To gain credit to his Reveries, he, after the example of Stroukaras, made use of the same wonderful Stone, putting it into his Mouth, which, by little and little, threw him into so profound a Sleep, that for an Hour or two he would seem perfectly dead. After which he awaked, and, as he rose up from the Earth, his Face appeared as if a divine Light shone upon it; which dazzled all that were near to such a degree, that they were not able to bear the Lustre of his Countenance. At these Seasons it was, that he told them his Soul had been carried among the elementary People, and enjoy’d unspeakable Pleasures. And thus, by these Practices, he acquir’d the Reputation of great Sanctity, among those who had not yet quite renounc’d the Religion of Stroukaras; and establish’d an Opinion which, as I have been saying, many still retain, that, there are elementary Inhabitants, which converse sometimes with Men, and whose Substances are much more pure and spiritual than ours. But, in the time of Sevaristas, this Cheat was discover’d. For as the Impostor was in one of his Trances, a Sevarambian, who, in order to have

Part IV

313

an opportunity of finding out the Truth, pretended to be a mighty Zealot for his Doctrine, perceiving the Stone in his Mouth, took it from him, and carried it away with him: after which the Knave was no longer able to perform his delusive Tricks, and it was found upon trial, that it was the secret Virtue of this Stone which brought on first a deep Sleep, and afterwards a dazzling Brightness of the Eyes and Countenance, upon every Person who put it into his mouth. They add, that Stroukaras was the first that made use of it, and from thence he took occasion to set up for a Prophet, and afterwards to aspire to the supreme Authority, which he at length attain’d to; as we shall shew in the Sequel of this Work. Mean while, tho’ the Imposture of him who us’d it to persuade his Followers, that he had a Commerce with a celestial Nation, was thus fully discover’d, the Doctrine it self made a shift to maintain some credit among them, seeing they had been brought up in the belief of it from their earliest Years; and it was also very agreeable to them, as it promises them an eternal Felicity among these elementary People, to which all those who kept up a lively Faith, are to be gather’d after their Death. The End of the Fourth Part.

This page intentionally left blank.

The History of the Sevarambians Part V

W

hen Sevarias, and his Parses, landed first on this Southern Continent, they found, that tho’ all the Inhabitants adored the SUN, they were, yet, far from being agreed as to the Manner of worshipping him. This Dispute had divided them into different Sects, and given rise to a long War between the Stroukarambians and Prestarambians; the last of which value themselves, upon having retain’d the ancient Worship of the SUN in its Purity; and accuse the others of Innovations, and mixing with Religion, the Reveries of a false Prophet, called by his Adherents Omigas, but by themselves Stroukaras: that is to say, an Impostor. This Omigas, they tell you, boasted himself the SON of the SUN; and, in a little time, had seduc’d almost all the Inhabitants of the Country, for above a hundred Miles round Sevarinde. According to the Report of the Prestarambians, he acquir’d the Character of a Deity, by divers Tricks, and false Miracles. For, as he was well acquainted with the Natures of Simples, he extracted subtil Poisons from them, which would kill by the Smell or Touch only; by means of which he often freed himself from those who oppos’d his Designs. He had also the Secret of curing several Diseases, which very much recommended him among these ignorant People, who mistook the mere Productions of Nature, for Miracles; and verily believ’d that he had a divine Power residing in him. But of all the Methods he made use of to authorize his Impostures, that of the wonderful Stone, before mentioned, was the most efficacious. And ’tis affirm’d, that as soon as he had got it, and discover’d its Virtues, he conceiv’d the Design of applying it, to the deception of the credulous People, into a Persuasion, that, he had a strict Commerce with the SUN, and that this illustrious Star was his Father. Great Numbers very easily suffer’d themselves to be imposed on by his Words, as they saw that, after he had laid some time in a profound Sleep, at his awaking his Face became so resplendent, that no Person could look upon him without being dazzled. This Brightness had still the greater effect, as he was a very handsome Man, and had the Talent of speaking with an Air and Grace, which quite charm’d all that heard him. By these Artifices, the Impostor had, in a little time, procur’d himself a prodigious Reputation among the more ignorant stupid People, 315

316

The History of the Sevarambians

who follow’d him in multitudes where-ever he went, and yielded a blind obedience to him. He now suborn’d, from time to time, Persons who counterfeited themselves blind and lame, and pretended they were afflicted with various Distempers, which he undertook, in the Name of the SUN, to cure them of. And to render himself still more important, and gain a yet higher esteem with the People, he selected some of them, whom he let into part of his Scheme, and very much associated with: These made it their business to go about crying up his Miracles and Sanctity, and exaggerating every thing that he said or did, to his advantage. He was also followed by many Women; for he was an exceeding fine Person, by some of which, whom he had corrupted, he gave out that he convers’d familiarly with the SUN, from the top of a high Mountain, whither he sometimes retir’d, and spent whole Months. To this Place he caus’d Fruits and other Food to be brought him by Birds, which he had instructed for that purpose; besides which, he was also, secretly, supplied from time to time by his Disciples. When by such kind of Knaveries, he had throughly fix’d his Character with the People, he made them believe that, “the SUN had commanded him to retire to a certain sacred Place, there to offer him daily Sacrifice, in acknowledgment of the Benefits which he is perpetually showering down on Mankind.” For this purpose, he made choice of a Wood which was always verdant, seeing it lay in a Valley where it was perfectly shelter’d from the Weather, thro’ which there was scarce any Passage, by reason of a steep Mountain that shut it up at the farther end, and made it look almost like the Bottom of a Sack. At this place, in the midst of a thick Grove, and round about a Tree of a prodigious Bigness and Age, of a sort which there were but few of in the Country, he built a kind of Temple with Wood, which he inclosed with a triple Palisade, to defend the Avenues of it. Here he took up his abode with some of his principal Confidents, whose Ministry he chiefly now made use of, and but seldom show’d himself to the People, in order to render himself more venerable and respected. In this Temple, and some Places adjoining, they daily offer’d Sacrifices to the SUN, and receiv’d the Libations that were brought in from all Parts of the Country, on which he and his Associates liv’d at their ease, without any trouble or care, being reverenc’d by every body, and persuading them to believe whatever they thought fit to invent. They have, in this Country, a sort of Eagle, whose Plumage is yellow, and which, on the account of this Colour, is called Erimfroda, that is to say, the Bird of the SUN. Stroukaras, and his Confederates, found means to tame several of these in their Grove, where no Person dar’d to enter without their permission, from whence they often let them fly in

Part V

317

the presence of the People, who, seeing them soar up towards the Clouds till they had lost sight of them, as is the manner of the Species, were easily persuaded that they went charged with Messages from Stroukaras to the SUN, and return’d back again with his Answers and Commands. This Opinion was industriously spread by his Ministers, who endeavoured, as much as possible, to confirm the People in a belief of so important a Point; that, the SUN held frequent Correspondence with his Son, by the way of these Birds. They moreover told them, that, they had orders to declare to them, from that illustrious Star, that, the Place where his Temple stood, and the Grove all around it, were sacred; and that therefore, lest any impious Wretch should dare to Profane that holy spot of Ground, it would be necessary to keep a Guard about it, night and day, to be maintained at the expence of the Nation, who depended on the SUN for their Life, and all things necessary to the support of it. This Demand was immediately complied with, and Stroukaras having made choice of a good number of Men proper for his purpose, constituted them his Guard; and so, soon became considerable for his Arms, as well as his Religion. He was a nice Observer of the Weather and Seasons, and predicted, often, Tempests and Storms, when they were only approaching; as also Rain and Sun-shine, good and bad Years, and the like. Some time before the arrival of a great Drought, which ruin’d all the Fruits, he foretold it to the People, as a Judgment Heaven was going to inflict on them, because several among them had refus’d to submit to the Orders, which he, on the part of the SUN, had declared to them. For indeed there were still several discerning Persons in the Nation, especially among the upper sort of People, who, knowing his Knaveries, would in no wise obey his Orders, nor receive the Superstitions which he had introduc’d into their Religion: Nevertheless they did not dare oppose them openly for fear of the Multitude, whom this Impostor manag’d, just as he pleas’d, by his Artifices and false Miracles. Unfortunately for the Nation, his Prediction was at this time accomplish’d, and the Drought really destroyed all the Fruits; which procur’d him, still more and more, the Admiration of the People; who firmly believ’d, that the Disobedience of the principal Inhabitants had drawn down this Chastizement from Heaven upon them. Stroukaras was too politick to neglect such an opportunity for ruining his Enemies, and therefore, with that view, persuaded those who were already attach’d to him, that, “if they did not drive out from among them, the Impious and Rebellious, they should more and more smart under the Anger of his heavenly Father, who was incens’d against them, and would, every Year, burn up the Fruits, Herbs and Grain, from whence they drew Subsistence for both themselves and Families.”

318

The History of the Sevarambians

The credulous Populace, abus’d thus by this Impostor, became exceedingly raging against these pretended Criminals, and immediately offer’d Stroukaras, “to banish them for ever from their Country, if he would only please to name them, or give them any ways to know who they were.” Having receiv’d this Assurance, he, without delay, deliver’d in a List of all the principal Persons of the Nation that were most averse to him, and accus’d them, “as being the occasion of all the Evils the People suffer’d;” to which he added, that, “if the Accused did not repent, or withdraw themselves from the Country, they would bring down much greater Calamities on the Nation.” The Persons who were thus charg’d, endeavoured to justify themselves to the Multitude, to whom they made it fully appear, that, “they had trod in the Steps of their Ancestors, in point of Religion and good Behaviour, without having chang’d any thing in these respects; and that if they had not received the Innovations of Stroukaras, it was, only because they were not convinc’d that it was their Duty to do so.” That, “he had by no means prov’d, that he had any lawful Authority to alter the Maxims of their Fathers, and to mix his novel Doctrines with the Religion of the Ancients.” That, “nevertheless, if he could shew his Mission, and support his Claim of Power, they would submit to it as well as the rest, from the instant they should be convinc’d of the Justness of his Pretensions, and that he really was the SON of the SUN.” These Reasons, for some time, gave a check to the Fury of the People; some of which, upon this occasion, represented to Stroukaras, that, “he ought, at least, to give such considerable Persons a Hearing, before he banish’d them from their Country; and that, if they continued obstinate in their Infidelity, after he had made it appear by his Arguments and Miracles, that he had a lawful Authority, he might then drive them out with Justice.” Stroukaras hearkened to this Proposition, and seemed to approve of it; but answered them, that, “in an Affair of this importance, he could not give a positive Answer, without first consulting the Will of his Father, which he made the Rule of all his Actions.” That, “therefore, to inform himself of it, he would offer a special Sacrifice, and dispatch his flying Messengers, who would bring him back the Orders of that great Star, and tell him, on his part, how he was to behave in this important Affair.” This Answer satisfy’d every body, and for a while, calm’d their Minds, or, at least, suspended the Effects of their Rage. Some days afterwards, Stroukaras offer’d a solemn Sacrifice before all the People, and in their presence sent off his Birds to the SUN, commanding them to return from Heaven as soon as possible, and report to him the Will of his

Part V

319

Father. According to their Custom, they immediately took their flight towards the SUN, and continued soaring upwards in the Air, till they were quite out of sight. About an Hour after they came back, and, in the view of all the People, alighted on the Impostor’s Shoulders, who straightway had them into the Temple, as if to hear, in secret, what they had in Commission to say to him from his Father. In a few moments he came out again, and told the Assembly, who were expecting his Answer with great devotion, that, “the SUN had commanded him to let them know, that if the Persons accused would appear at the Grove within twenty days, they should be received and their Reasons fairly heard; and that if, after all that he should say to them, they should still continue unwilling to acknowledge his lawful Authority, he would confirm it to them by a new Miracle, capable of convincing them, if they were not so self-will’d as obstinately to reject the Testimony of Heaven it self.” This Proposition, tho’ suspected, was receiv’d by the Persons to whom it was made, because every body thought it reasonable, and indeed they could not refuse it without exposing themselves to the Fury of the People: they therefore promised to appear at the time and Place assigned, to examine the Reasons and Proofs which Stroukaras should offer in support of his Pretensions. In the mean time, the Impostor caus’d a vast Ditch to be dug in the Grove, which he fill’d with combustible Materials, and then cover’d it over so dextrously, that there was no sign that the Earth had been at all mov’d at that Place. After this was compleated, he caus’d a sort of verdant Council-Room to be made over it, which not only cover’d the Ditch, but also a good part of the Terra-firma near it. He then ordered Seats to be made round it, for the accommodating the Persons who should be present at the Assembly, and contriv’d them so, that one half of them were plac’d over the Pits, and the other on the firm Ground, leaving a Space between them. At length he had so well adjusted all things, that by a way practicable from without quite into the Ditch, his Agents could set fire to the combustible Matter, and by only drawing out a Pin, make the whole Frame fall in, which supported the Earth that cover’d it. When the Day appointed was arriv’d, the Persons who were to compose the Assembly took care not to fail coming to the Grove, where Stroukaras led them into the new Council-Room, and caus’d those of his own Party to sit down on the Places which stood on the firm Ground, while he show’d his Adversaries to those rang’d over the Pit. When every body else was seated, he soon took his place in the Assembly, and open’d the Conference with those who oppos’d his Doctrine. Each Person freely offer’d his Reasons, and all things were debated on both sides with much

320

The History of the Sevarambians

Zeal and Ardour. Stroukaras exerted all his Eloquence, to persuade his Adversaries, that, “he was the SON of the SUN, and that the Doctrines he had preached, and the Miracles wrought by him, were all the pure Effects of that Obedience which he ow’d to the sacred Orders and Powers imparted to him from that great Star.” But, perceiving that the contrary Party persisted in their Incredulity, and call’d out upon him, for incontestable Proofs of the Authority he pretended to; he rose up on his feet, and, stretching out his Hand towards Heaven, pray’d the SUN his Father, “to attest the Truth of what he had said by a Miracle; and, particularly, that the Earth might open and swallow him up, if he had advanc’d any thing that was false; or else, if that was not the Case, that he would punish those in the same manner, who had rejected the celestial Doctrine, which he himself had commanded him to preach to his People.” He had no sooner utter’d this Imprecation, but the Persons to whom he had given the Signal perform’d what they had in charge; when, immediately, the Part over which his unfortunate Opponents were seated, fell into the Ditch; from whence a thick Smoak instantly issued, which was soon followed by Flames, proceeding from the Wood and other combustible Matter, which were now kindled. By this detestable Villany, Stroukaras destroy’d the principal of his Enemies, and established himself, more than ever, in the Affections of the People. However, there were still some, whom this Imposture did not convince, that persisted in their former Sentiments. He therefore caus’d a great many of these to be massacred; but, fearing lest such Cruelties, if long continued, should make him as much hated as feared, he publish’d an Edict, “commanding those who would not submit to the Will of his heavenly Father, as he had declared it to them, to retire beyond the Mountains which separate Sevarambe from Sporounde.” On the publication of this Edict, it appeared, that, even yet, there were great Numbers left, who chose rather to submit to this Injunction, than change their Religion. And thus these unhappy Innocents were all constrain’d to leave their native Country, in order to avoid being cruelly butcher’d at home. After he had thus carried this grand Point, the Impostor, having no longer any Person who dar’d to oppose him, redoubled his Guards, and caus’d himself to be declared Chief of the whole Nation, which, from his Name, call’d themselves Omigarambians, till the time of Sevarias. When he saw himself at the head of his People, whom he had enchanted by his Delusions, he imagined that he should not be secure in his Government, while they held any Commerce with those who had refus’d to submit to him, and who, for the most part, had retir’d to the other side of the Mountains, as we just now said, into the Country which is at present

Part V

2. Scheming priests trick the skeptics. (Facing page 270 of the German edition, 1689).

321

322

The History of the Sevarambians

called Sporombe, and runs along the Sea-Coast, away towards the NorthEast. He therefore persuaded his Subjects to declare War against them, and engag’d them in an eternal Enmity to them. The others, finding themselves attack’d, began to think of defending themselves, and, in this view, made choice of a brave Man among them, whose Name was Prestar, which they chang’d into Prestaras, from whom they all came to be called Prestarambians. This Prestaras, being a Man of Conduct as well as Courage, protected his new Subjects against their Enemies, and drove them back, several times, beyond the Mountains, with great loss of their Men; which still increas’d, more and more, the Hatred of these People, one against the other, and made them irreconcileable Enemies. Mean while Stroukaras reign’d absolutely, persuading his Subjects, by his Artifices, and sham Miracles, that he was the SON of the SUN, and the sole Interpreter of his Will. This Method of acting, acquir’d him the Reputation of participating of his Father’s Divinity; and, even before his Death, Vows began to be address’d to him, as the only Person by whose means the Favour of Heaven was to be obtain’d. He now show’d himself no more to the People, but, Age having enfeebled his Body, and tarnish’d his Beauty, transacted every thing by his Ministers. At length, after having reign’d a long time, when he found himself quite old and broken, and perceiv’d that he could not live much longer, he caus’d a Report to be spread, that, “he was soon to ascend to the SUN his Father, and should no more converse, visibly, with his Subjects; but that, nevertheless, he would not fail, from time to time, of being present at the Temple in the Grove, from whence he would continue to instruct them in the Will of his Father, and give them sensible Proofs of the perpetual Care he took of them, in all Emergencies when they should apply to him.” That, “in the mean time, to make up for his Absence, he would give them his Son, and his Ministers, to command them, till he should have more fully instructed them in his Will.” When this Report had, for a while, run up and down among the People, and prepar’d them for the desired Submission, he invested his Son with his Power; who was, immediately, receiv’d as Chief by all his Subjects, after having sufficiently show’d their Grief and Concern on the account of his leaving them, which he comforted them under, by the Promise of a speedy Return. In the mean time, he order’d his Son, and his Disciples “to excavate the great Tree in the midst of the Grove, and bury his Body there at his Death;” which happen’d a few days afterwards. But he gave it in charge to them, “not to let the People know any thing of his Departure, till such time as they should happen to have a dreadful Storm of Thunder and

Part V

323

Lightning.” Such a Season was therefore pitch’d on, in order to make his Subjects believe, that Stroukaras then ascended to the SUN, from whence, they said, he again assured them, that, “he would frequently return to them, as he had promised, to declare the Will of his Father.” From this time forward, he was revered as a God; Sacrifices were offer’d to him; and, in all Difficulties, whether with respect to Religion or Government, he was pray’d, “to descend from Heaven, to point out the Course to them they were to take in the present Exigencies.” For this purpose, a Priest always enter’d into the great hollow Tree; from whence, like an Oracle, he answer’d all Questions that were put to him in the Name of Stroukaras, just as if he had been really there. Whenever the Priests met with any pretty Girl, they never fail’d making a demand of her; persuading her Parents, that, “the SON of the SUN had cast a favourable eye on her; and that, to render her a Vessel of Holiness, he would deign to descend from Heaven, to unite himself to her, and gather the first Flower of her Youth;” for so they express’d themselves. They added, that, “if the young Woman her self, and her Parents, had a true Faith, and receiv’d this illustrious Honour with all that Respect and Humility which was their Duty on such an occasion, the divine Stroukaras would certainly fill the Virgin with a sacred Fruit, that should derive the Blessing of Heaven on her whole Family.” That, “if this Virgin, thus sanctified, brought forth a Son, he should be one of the Priests who offer’d Sacrifice to the beautiful Star of Day; but that if she conceiv’d a Daughter, the Child should be holy, and the Man who married her, when she was grown up, might justly value himself on being the Son-in-law of the divine Stroukaras, and Grandson to the SUN.” That, “so illustrious an Alliance would be accompanied with many other Advantages, besides the supreme Happiness which the Virgin should feel on her being united to a God.” The credulous and superstitious so easily and perfectly gave credit to all these fine Promises, that there was scarce a Father or Mother, but thought themselves happy “in having brought into the World, a Daughter whose Beauty was pleasing to the divine Son of the SUN.” This Persuasion introduc’d a Custom, of bringing from all Parts of the Country, the most beautiful Girls that could be met with, to offer them at the Temple, and consecrate them to Stroukaras. When the Priests accepted of any of these Offerings, they immediately caus’d her to put off her prophane Habits, and gave her sacred ones; after which, she was wash’d in a Bath made of several aromatick Herbs. The Day, preceding the Night in which Stroukaras was to visit her, Sacrifices were offer’d, at which several Hymns were sung, praying “him, to descend from Heaven, and take possession of the humble and holy Maid, who had devoted her Virginity to him.” These Ceremonies being performed, the Girl was left alone with

324

The History of the Sevarambians

an old Priest, who made her strip herself naked, and taught her to throw her self into a hundred lascivious Postures, to sollicite Stroukaras to come, see, and take possession of her Person. While she was going thro this Course of impure Ceremonies, the rest of the Priests who had retir’d, and left her with her old Director for this very purpose, being hid behind a Lattice, from whence they could see the whole Temple without being themselves seen, indulg’d their wanton Eyes with a View of her Person in every Attitude. After they had sufficiently satisfied themselves this way, they cast Lots who should first enjoy her; and when Night was come, the Girl was conducted into a dark Place, set apart for this use, where she was commanded to lie on a Bed, and expect, with great Devotion, the Descent of her celestial Love. In a little time, after she was thus posted, artificial Lightnings began to flash in her Eyes, which inspir’d her with Respect and Astonishment. These Lightnings were followed with Thunder, every Clap of which fill’d her with Fear and Admiration: for she had been taught to look on all these Tricks, as the Forerunners of the Arrival of her glorious Lover. However, notwithstanding this Apparatus, he always came in obscurity, after having well perfum’d himself; and so united his false Divinity with the real Humanity of this credulous and devoted Virgin. After this they kept her on in the same manner till she prov’d with Child, when they restor’d her to her Parents, who received her with great Humility and Gratitude. This filthy Practice continued in use, among these bewitched People, till Sevarias gave them to know, the Impostures of Stroukaras, and of his Priests; and those who did not submit to his Authority, still retain all these abominable Customs. To this Imposture, invented to satisfy their Concupiscence, the Priests have added another; which furnishes them with the means of a cruel Vengeance on all who disoblige them, or whose Penetration becomes suspected by them. For they demand that such unhappy, miserable Persons, be delivered up, to be, by them, offer’d as Sacrifices to the Anger of the SUN, when the Sins of the People have irritated him against them, as they make them believe: the only way, according to them, of appeasing the Resentment of this Star, and preserving the Favour of Stroukaras, being to butcher these Wretches, and Wash away in their Blood the Guilt of the Nation. The Son of this Impostor reign’d some Years after him, but happening to die suddenly, he had not time to name his Successor. This occasion’d a great Division among the Priests, and was like to have ruin’d all of them, because they could not agree concerning the Succession. However, as they liv’d together in a place where no Person dar’d to

Part V

325

enter, they kept the thing secret till they were come to some Terms about it, which they did in the following manner: There were two principal Factions, headed by two of the most considerable Priests, which all the other Parties gave way to, falling in with either the one or the other. These two Factions were so equally divided, and so obstinately bent, each to support their own Pretensions, that it was impossible to prevail on them to recede the least in the world to one another. At length, after several Struggles and Contests, they agreed to separate, and set up a new Temple in some other Part of the Country; and that the Lot should decide which of the two Parties should go to inhabit it, and establish there the same Religion and Worship as was observ’d in the old one. Having therefore put an end to their Difference, in this way, they persuaded the People, that, “Stroukaras, for their convenience, and to exempt many of them from the long Journeys they were forc’d to take, from their Abodes to the present Temple, had order’d them to make a new one, at another Place which he had chosen for this purpose; and that there he would give out his Oracles in the same manner as here.” They therefore pitch’d on another Wood, where they found a great Tree of the same kind with the former; and when they had set up their Temple, and fenc’d it in with three strong Palisadoes, as the other, they translated thither one half of their Clergy. As soon as they were settled, they began to offer Sacrifices, and to regulate themselves, in all respects, as at the old Grove; and Stroukaras came and gave out his Oracles, just as he did at the other Temple before, and since, their Separation. From this time, the Temples multiplied exceedingly; and Stroukaras was often present at all of them at once, and gave Answers in the very same instant at several different Places, at a great distance from one another, without any Person’s thinking it strange, or at least daring to start any Difficulty about it, for fear of Danger; they having often found, by the fatal Experience of others, that it was more prudent to be silent, than to offer at an Opposition of Abuses already authorized by Time, Custom, and false Miracles. And now we are on this Subject, it may not be amiss to relate a remarkable Story, which the Sevarambians have, with great exactness, preserv’d the Memory of by Tradition. They tell you, that, after the Death of Stroukaras, his Successors, to advance the Credit of their Religion, and render it more venerable, confirm’d it, from time to time, with more lying Wonders, and by the Institution of new Ceremonies, making use of all the knavish Tricks they could invent, to procure repute to their superstitious Innovations.

326

The History of the Sevarambians

This appears, egregiously, in the Person of one Suguimas, who boasted, that, “he had frequent Conversations with Stroukaras, and that he had imparted to him the Gifts of Prophecy and Miracles.” This Person was not a Priest, but yet a close confederate with those of the Temple in the Wood, who secretly sent him out, having long since suborn’d him, to make the People believe that he convers’d familiarly with the SON of the SUN, and had receiv’d from him the Power of doing many things above the force of Nature. And as he, and those who had commission’d him, made very exact Observations relating to the Weather and Seasons, after the example of Stroukaras, he often predicted Storms and Sun-shine, good and bad Harvests, with other things of a like nature. Sometimes he would cause the Fruit-Trees of those whom he suspected not to favour his Doctrine, to wither and dry up; saying to the Multitude before-hand, “If I preach the Truth, may the Trees of such a one dry up and if, on the other hand, what I teach you is a Lye, may I then be dry’d up my self, as a just Punishment of my Guilt.” But, before he pronounc’d this Imprecation, he had always taken care to secure the Event, by means of a mineral Water which he pour’d on the Roots of such Trees, which soon certainly depriv’d them of both their Vigour and Verdure. So that the Effect never fail’d answering the Prediction; to the great Amazement of the credulous and superstitious Populace. He also made use of another sort of Water, which render’d his Body proof against Fire; and, accordingly, when he had well rubb’d himself with it, he would walk boldly on burning Coals, or pass thro’ the Flames without the least danger of being scorch’d by them. This last Water was found by Experiment, to be extracted from a Species of Serpents, which lie in great numbers at the foot of a Rock pointing towards the South, in the Mountains of Sporombe. These Animals, which are of a nature extremely cold, are principally to be met with in this Place, by reason of the great Heat there, occasioned by the Reverberation of the Rays of the SUN, from the Rock which is hollow and smooth, and, consequently, almost in the manner of a concave Mirrour. This Suguimas, having observ’d that these Serpents were very fond of Heat, had a mind to try whether they could live in Fire; which succeeded according to his Imagination. After he had made his first Experiment, he lighted a large Pile in the place where he had observed most of these Creatures, and saw, not without Astonishment, that all that felt the Heat of the Fire made up to it with what speed they could, and crawl’d, with great pleasure, backwards and forwards, over the burning Coals, which, far from hurting them, seem’d to give them new Force and Vigour. These Animals being no ways venomous nor mischievous, he easily took them with his Hands, without any hurt, having a Fancy to try further, whether their Fat had not a Power to

Part V

327

render even the Wood incombustible. He therefore kill’d some of them and rubb’d several little Sticks with their Flesh, which, being thrown into the Fire, burned no more than a Stone. After this Experiment he went on, and made several others upon divers living Creatures, and last of all upon himself; by all which Trials he found, that, whatever he rubb’d carefully with the Moisture or Fat of these Serpents, became impenetrable even to the Activity of Fire. He kept this Discovery very secret, never speaking of it but to the Priests of the Wood; who thought proper to make use of it as a new Wonder, to confirm, more and more, the Religion of Stroukaras, and the Authority they had acquir’d among the credulous People. That therefore they might now gain him over perfectly to their Interest, they suffer’d him to communicate with them in their Abundance and Pleasures, and made use of his Ministry for the working of fresh Miracles, which succeeded well on sundry Occasions. But, as the most hidden things come in time to be discover’d, the Secret of Suguimas was, at last, found out, by a young Man that had a Commerce with his Wife, who being irritated against him, for that he neglected her, to divert himself with others at the Temple, thought it was but just to pay him in kind, and to take that pleasure with a Gallant, which she was but rarely favour’d with by her Husband. The young Man she made choice of, happen’d to be one of those Families, who in no wise believed the novel Doctrines of Stroukaras; tho’, to avoid the Misfortunes of the Prestarambians, they had seem’d to approve of his Impostures. This Spark gain’d so far the Heart of his Mistress, that she disclos’d to him all her Husband’s Secrets, and particularly the Commerce he had with the Priests, the Methods he took in working his Miracles, and especially that of passing thro’ Fire without being burnt. The young Man soon made several Trials, and found, that she had not at all deceiv’d him, and that he could, by the Methods she had taught him, perform the same Feats as Suguimas; and, consequently, that it was in his power to discredit the Impostures of this false Prophet, in the face of the whole World, whenever a favourable Opportunity should offer. Accordingly, such an one presented soon after, when the Impostor, in the sight of a great Number of People, was to rowl himself on a large Heap of Fire-Coals, to authorize some new Ceremony which the Priests of the Wood had a mind to establish. All things then being prepar’d, Suguimas, after having pronounc’d an Elogium on the divine Stroukaras, and implor’d his assistance, wish’d, that, “he might be reduc’d to Ashes, by the Fire he was going to throw himself into, if he had advanc’d any thing to the People that was contrary to the Truth, and the Worship that was due to the SUN, and his Son.” As soon as he had so said, he precipitated himself into the Flames, from whence he came out as unhurt as he had enter’d: which rais’d a vast Admiration, and

328

The History of the Sevarambians

an extreme Respect in the Minds of all the Spectators, excepting the young Man only, who knew the Imposture, and two or three of his Friends, to whom he had discover’d it. But he, having rubb’d himself well with the Water which he had extracted from the Serpents, and caus’d his Companions to do the same, the more indisputably to convict Suguimas of the Imposture, went up, the moment he had compleated his Miracle, and desiring the People to give him a peaceable Audience, address’d himself to him, with an audible Voice to this effect: “Thou hast just now, O Suguimas, wrought a great Miracle to authorize the Doctrine of Stroukaras; and thou pretendest to have receiv’d this supernatural Power from him. I demand of thee, therefore, if thou art the only Person to whom his Goodness has imparted this Virtue? And whether or no, there are not others also, to whom he has communicated this Favour besides thee?” The Impostor, who imagined that himself was the only one who knew the Secret of this Wonder, and who, in no wise, foresaw the flagrant Affront which the other was resolved to put upon him, answered boldly, that, “the divine Stroukaras had endow’d him, and him only, with the Power of passing thro’ the Fire without being burnt, to confirm, by this miraculous Sign, the Truth of his Doctrine.” “But what,” replied the young Man, “if others, besides thee, should perform the same thing, to shew, that, thy Doctrine is false, and that thou art an Impostor? Would not the People, whom thou bewitchest, have just reason to believe that all thy Miracles are Cheats, and that thy Doctrine has been invented only to seduce them, and turn them aside from the true Worship of the SUN, which thou, and such as thou, have stuff’d with a thousand Superstitions?” Suguimas was surpriz’d at this Demand; but as it was necessary for him to answer, and he still did not believe that any one had discovered his Secret, he replied without hesitation, and said, that, “indeed there would be just ground to suspect his Miracles, and Doctrines, if any other should do the same for an end contrary to his; but that he did not think this was possible, and therefore, on that foot, defied all the Men upon Earth.” At these Words the young Man, stripping off his Clothes, said with a loud Voice, that, “he would soon convince every body, that Suguimas was a false Prophet, a Cheat, and an Impostor; and that he wish’d, if this his Testimony against him was not true, that the Fire, into which he was going to throw himself, might reduce him to Ashes.” As soon as he had utter’d this Imprecation, he plung’d into the Flames, and rowl’d himself over and over a long time on the Coals, from whence, at last, he came out without being in the least burnt, or receiving any manner of Hurt, to the great Amazement of the People, and Confusion of Suguimas. That he might therefore render him still more suspected, and finish his

Part V

329

Blow, he propos’d to him, “either to choose some of his Followers to vouch for him, by undergoing the like Trial, offering to do the same on his side; or else, that he should publickly confess his Imposture.” He made no return to this Proposal, and the young Man seeing that his Mouth was stopp’d, said aloud, that, “it was plain from the Villain’s Silence, that his Guilt stung him; and that, to convince them all still more clearly of the Cheat, he would cause the same Feat to be perform’d by three or four other Persons of the Company.” For this purpose, therefore, he called to three of his Companions, whose Bodies he had prepar’d as his own, and bid them cast them selves into the Fire; which they did one after another, in the presence of all the People. This Adventure threw Suguimas into a kind of Despair, and very much chagrin’d the Priests of the Wood; who, knowing that many of the People began to doubt the Reality of their Miracles, and to murmur openly against them, foresaw that they should soon lose all their Credit if they did not repair their Reputation by some Master-stroke of Policy, which should be fatal to their Adversaries. They therefore consulted together, and, at length, fell on a Method that would at once revenge them, and perfectly restore their Affairs. The Grove, in which Stroukaras built his Temple, is in a Valley, form’d by a long Ridge of Rocks, on each side, which run widening from the Mountain, which shuts up the farther End, as was before observ’d, quite to the Plain. This delightful Spot, blest with an eternal Spring, was the Place the Impostor chose, before any other part of the Country, not only for his own Residence, but also for the Exercise of his Religion. As the Valley grows wider from the Wood to the Plain, so from the same Wood to the Mountain that closes it up, it becomes still narrower; till, at last, it ends at the foot of a large Rock, rising up almost in the form of a Shell, at the root of which issue a great many large Streams. About two hundred Paces from the Rock, all the Waters meet, and form a sort of River, which, dividing the Valley in two, and watering it from time to time by its Overflowings, maintains there a vast plenty of all kinds of Fruits, and keeps it in a perpetual Verdure. The Temple is situate about two hundred Paces below the Place where the Waters meet, on a rising Ground, almost, wholly cover’d with Trees; which form a thick Grove, as pleasant as the Eye can behold. At first, Stroukaras contented himself with surrounding the Grove only with a triple Palisade; but it was afterwards thought proper, to run a like one cross the Valley, from one Ridge of Rocks to the other, to shut it up below, and bar the access of People. By this means the Priests kept the whole Soil of the Valley to themselves, from the lower Palisade quite up to the Rock where the several Springs rise, which are the Sources of the

330

The History of the Sevarambians

River. Within the Space enclos’d by the Palisade, they found, at the foot of one of the Rocks, a great Quantity of Bole, or Red-Clay, which being dissolv’d in Water, gave it the Colour of Blood. The Priests, therefore, concluded to make use of this for the trumping up a new Miracle, intended to persuade the People, that, their Adversaries had drawn down the Wrath of Heaven upon them, by presuming to counterfeit a supernatural Work, which it was not lawful for them to imitate; and that Heaven could display its Anger, still more manifestly, upon the Guilty. And now, as if they contented themselves with that Expectation, they never offer’d to molest the young Man and his Companions, but seem’d rather to admire that Virtue which they had given such publick proofs of, and said, that, “undoubtedly, even, these Persons had receiv’d this divine Power from Stroukaras; but perhaps it would be found, that, they had made an ill use of it.” “However,” they added, that, “they were determin’d, on this occasion, to consult the Son of the SUN, in order to discover the Truth, and learn how to distinguish real Prophecy from mere Impostures.” Accordingly, they offer’d extraordinary Sacrifices, and pray’d the Divinity, to work some Miracle capable of clearing up their Doubts, and that might point out to them the Rule they ought to go by in an Affair so difficult, and full of manifest Contradictions. In the mean while, they had dug a great Heap of the red Earth before spoken of, powder’d it fine, and so dissolv’d it carefully in Reservoirs, whence they could easily run it off into the River, whenever they saw occasion for it. Having thus got ready their Materials, they acquainted the People, that, “they had in vain, for several days, sollicited the divine Stroukaras, to reveal his Will to them, and relieve them from the Pain they were in;” that, “he had declar’d his Anger against the whole Nation, and threaten’d to punish it on the account of some great Sin, which had been committed in it; but that, at length, he had appear’d to the High Priest, and told him, that, in a few days, he would, by an express Miracle, instruct the People in their Duty.” When they had sufficiently spread this Report, in a dark Night, a little before Daybreak, they let their red Water run into the River, and, by that means, stain’d it so much, as to make it look of the Colour of Blood. These Waters are exceeding clear and wholesome; and, because they pass’d along by the foot of the Temple, the Priests had, for a long while, persuaded the People that they were sacred, and had several secret Virtues in them. This Opinion had given occasion to all the Places round about to resort to them, and in the Summer every body was fond of bathing in them. When they therefore, whose Custom it was to come thither in the Morning, found that the Colour was chang’d, they quickly spread the Rumour of it all about the Country. The Priests pretended to be much amaz’d at this new Prodigy, and said they must consult

Part V

331

Stroukaras, and offer him new Sacrifices, in order to discover the Cause of so strange, and unaccountable an Alteration. Mean while the People, being oblig’d to go elsewhere for Water, which was neither so wholesome nor agreeable, found it very inconvenient; and therefore, the more easily believ’d all that the Priests thought for their interest to suggest to them. At the end of three days, they inform’d the Multitude, impatient to know the Answer of Stroukaras, that the divine SON of the SUN, suffering himself to be, at length, touch’d by the humble Supplications of his Ministers, had told them, that, “the River should never lose its present Colour, nor the Waters the mortal Taint they were impregnated with, till the Fountain-Head should be purified by the guilty Blood of those who had counterfeited the Miracles of Suguimas.” They added, that, “this divine Power had been imparted to those impious Wretches, for a good purpose; but, that having abus’d this special Favour of Heaven, by the just Judgment of the Divinity, the Affair must now terminate, either in their own Ruin, or the total Destruction of the People; and that it was left to them to determine which of the two they would choose, whether to sacrifice those criminal Wretches to appease the Deity, or to wait till his severe Resentment should quite exterminate the whole Nation.” This Answer being made in the Hearing of the Populace, they were not long in suspence which side to take. Accordingly, without any delay, they seiz’d the four young Men, who had convicted Suguimas of Imposture, and deliver’d them up to the Priests; who, after having put them to the most horrible Torments they could think of, at last, cut their Throats, and threw their Bodies into the River. A little while after these Executions, the Waters lost their bloody Colour, and resum’d their former Purity, nothing being now put in to stain them. But the People were made believe, that, this Change was an Effect of the Sacrifice which had been offer’d to the divine SON of the SUN, whose Anger was appeas’d by their ready and punctual Obedience to his Order. The People had been the more easily persuaded, that the Resentment of Stroukaras had at first chang’d the Colour of this River, as they had an old Tradition, that it ow’d its Origin to this SON of the SUN; and that, when the Valley was exceeding dry, he had, miraculously caus’d these Springs to break out, by striking his Foot against the Rock, at the Places whence they now issue. This Tradition is founded on Stroukaras’s turning the Course of these Waters, which, at about thirty Paces from their Source, fell into a Gulf, or subterraneous Channel, from whence they ran away under ground, and rose no more till they were got three or four Leagues lower; a thing that none had ever remark’d before him. But the subtil Stroukaras soon observ’d it, and knew, perfectly well, how to make a right use of it for his own advantage. When therefore he had thoroughly establish’d

332

The History of the Sevarambians

himself with the People, and in the Grove, and had barr’d up all access to it by a triple Palisade, he caus’d a Report to be set abroad that his Father, in favour to him, and for the convenience of the Inhabitants who were already fix’d, or should hereafter come to settle round about his Abode, would work a most illustrious Miracle; by which they should know the Power that he had given to his SON, and the Regard he had for those who maintain’d a true and lively Faith in his Doctrine. After having, for some time, set this Rumour arunning among the People, he employ’d a Number of Persons to dig a Canal, capacious enough to receive the united Current of all the Streams, in order, by that means, to turn their Course from the Gulf, and direct it along the Valley, in a Channel made for that purpose. He made choice of a very dry Season in the Summer, to enhance, by the timing of it, the Importance of the Miracle. When the Day was come, which he had a good while before destin’d for that Work, having taken with him a number of his Disciples, he led them to the upper end of the Valley where he had caus’d the Dyke to be made, which was to turn the Water-Course; and there, in the sight of them all, gave a stamp with his Foot, on a Stone which had been plac’d on a Dam of Earth just opposite to the Canal: the Stone falling out of its place, by the Stroke he had given it, opened the first Passage to the Water, which, forthwith, ran into the Canal, and from thence away down the Valley. From this management, occasion was taken to say, that Stroukaras had brought Water out of a Rock, by a stamp of his Foot; and his Disciples so thoroughly dispers’d the Fame of this false Miracle among the People, that it was generally receiv’d by all who embrac’d his Doctrine. Since that time, the Priests have often turn’d the Water from the Canal into the subterraneous Passage when they were minded to chastize the People, and persuade them that Stroukaras was angry with them; and have also frequently made use of the same Expedient, to pass any Superstitions upon them which they thought fit to introduce, whenever they found a Reluctance in them to any such Article. The Prestarambians have preserv’d the Memory of these Events to this day; and regard the four young Men who were so cruelly massacred, for having discover’d the Impostures of Suguimas, as glorious Martyrs of their Religion. From that time forwards, none dar’d to dispute the Authority of the Priests, who were at full liberty to obtrude their Miracles on the credulous deluded People, and could even command their assent to any thing they were dispos’d to enjoin them. For now they met with no more Obstacles to their Designs; and the wiser, and most discerning Part of the Nation, tho’ they were fully convinc’d of their Impostures, were the very People who least of all withstood them; choosing rather

Part V

333

to be silent, than to incur their Hatred, and to expose themselves to their Cruelty. But tho’ the general Behaviour was such, they yet suffer’d a very sensible Disgrace afterwards, which was brought upon them by the means of a young Woman, who fir’d their Temple, and occasion’d the destruction of several of their Body. The Prestarambians have also preserv’d this History, in which they finely set forth the Courage and Resolution of two others of their Martyrs, who devoted themselves to a voluntary Death, to elude the Designs and Efforts of their Enemies. They relate this Story in the following manner: In the time of the seventh Successor from Stroukaras, there was an illustrious Family which dwelt not far from the Temple, and retain’d the ancient Worship of the SUN; tho’, out of policy, they seem’d to approve of the Innovations of this Imposter. In this Family was a young Woman whose Name was Ahinomé, who was design’d for a young Man of another Branch of the same Family, as being equally worthy of one another; and having, from their tenderest Years, discovered a mutual Inclination, which closely united their Hearts, and render’d their Desires uniform. Their Passion every day acquir’d fresh strength, and they would not have so long delayed to crown with Marriage, a Love which they had felt from their very Childhood, if the elder Sisters of Ahinomé had not been Obstacles in their way: for these were not yet married, and the Custom of the Country doth not allow a younger to enter into that State, till the elder are provided for. These Difficulties, which nothing but Time and Patience could surmount, distres’d them both exceedingly. Ahinomé had attained to her twentieth Year, before either of her Sisters were dispos’d of; but the first was married soon after, and the Nuptials of the second began to be prepar’d for, which were to be immediately follow’d by those of Ahinomé, if her ill Fate had not order’d otherwise. For, just at the time when she had most hopes of being quickly united to her Lover, her Destiny, in contradiction to her Desires, had appointed, that, one of the Priests of the Grove should become desperately in love with her, without once discovering any thing of his Passion to her; because he believ’d, that the only means of enjoying her Person, would be to demand her for Stroukaras, according to long-receiv’d Custom. She was not extraordinarily handsome; her good Mien, and Understanding, making up the better part of her Beauty. ’Tis true, she was well shap’d, had a grand majestick Air, and discover’d, both in her Discourse and Actions, so much sound Sense and Probity, that these Qualities alone render’d her more amiable, than a Delicacy of Complexion and Features ever can any of those insipid Beauties which seem formed only to please the eye. Her Lover was a robust, couragious young Man; endow’d with a very solid Judgment, and

334

The History of the Sevarambians

Master of an extraordinary Firmness of Soul. This Conformity of Dispositions was a great means of uniting their Hearts; besides which, a long Habitude of being together, had bound them still more closely to one another. The Priest who was become enamour’d of Ahinomé, knew, as well as every body else, that they had long since intended to marry each other; and therefore fearing, lest if he should delay, their Nuptials might happen to be celebrated, and himself, thereby, for ever depriv’d of all hope of enjoying her, he resolv’d to exert his utmost Endeavours to prevent the Misfortune that threaten’d him. Accordingly he communicated his Design to his Brethren, and even conjur’d their assistance in an Affair, which, he said, had an immediate Connexion with his Happiness or Misery. He found it no great difficulty to engage them in his Service; and they all unanimously agreed to depute three of their Body to go to Ahinomé’s Father and demand her of him in the name of Stroukaras, to whom they were to say, she had the great Good-fortune to be acceptable. The Father appear’d much surpriz’d at this unexpected Message, and was just on the point of refusing her; but, considering with himself, that he was, by no means, his Daughter’s Master; that they would force him to deliver her up to the pretended SON of the SUN; and that this their Violence would be certainly follow’d by the ruin of his whole House, he prudently answer’d, that, “Ahinomé had been long since contracted to Dionistar, but that he doubted not, she would make her Passion for him give place to her Duty, and prefer the illustrious Honour of being united to a divine Person, to the Pleasure of possessing a mere mortal Man.” He added, that, “he believ’d, she might the more readily yield that Obedience which she ow’d to the Commands of Heaven, as it would, after all, be in her power to marry Dionistar. But that, notwithstanding this Consideration, as she had been a long time engag’d to him, and was on the point of marrying him, it was possible that this unexpected Order might, at first, give her some surprize and trouble.” For which reason he prayed them, “to allow him some days to dispose her to obedience.” This moderate Answer very well satisfied the Deputies, who immediately granted him ten days, to work her up to a Resolution of devoting her Virginity to the divine Stroukaras. Soon after this Message, the Father took an Opportunity of informing, by degrees, both his Daughter, and her Lover, of the lamentable Condition into which their evil Destiny had plung’d them. The whole Family were exceedingly incens’d on this Occasion, but the two Lovers became quite raging. Dionistar, for his part, was going away instantly to the Grove, to murder all the Priests he could find there: Nor did his Mistress fall much short of him in point of Passion, and

Part V

335

swore before her Father, her Brothers, and her Lover, that, “she would suffer the dreadfullest Torments, nay, and even the most shocking Death, rather than ever consent to such an Infamy.” The most couragious of her Relations prais’d her Resolution, and determin’d among themselves, either by Address or Force, to elude the Designs of the lascivious Priests, who had purpos’d to make Ahinomé an Instrument of their detestable Luxury. As soon as the first Transports of their Passion were over, and a kind of Calm had, for a while, succeeded, they began to consider of Means to extricate themselves from this Affair. After several Advices had been offer’d, the Council of one of Dionistar’s Friends was thought best in the imminent Danger that threaten’d them. He said, that, “near his Abode, he had discover’d a secret Cave in a Rock, at the foot of which runs a River, which, at this Place, being pretty deep, renders it almost inaccessible on that side.” He added, “that it was by meer Chance that he had found this private Place. For, being much addicted to fishing, and having a particular Art in Diving, and taking the Fish with his hand, in the Holes and Hides to which they often retire, he went one day to the foot of the Rock, where plunging in, he discover’d a large Opening in it, thro’ which he pass’d, and saw, on the other side, a spacious natural Vault in the Mountain, sufficiently enlightened by another Hole above the River, at the height of about four Men.” He continu’d, that, “his Curiosity now carried him on to examine all the Parts of this Vault, which he found was very large; and also, that on the Mountain side, there was a way into a little Plot of Ground, almost round, fenc’d in with craggy Rocks, quite upright, and inaccessible on all sides;” that, “this Spot might be about a Stone’s Cast in diameter; that he observ’d several Trees in it, some of them decay’d, others in their full Strength, and others again very young.” He concluded, that, “the Water of the River went far in to the subterranean Vault, on one side, where there was a Spring, extreamly cold, in which he had taken a great quantity of Fish; for which Reason, he had never spoke of the Place to any Person whatsoever, lest they should share with him in the Fishery, or interrupt the pleasing Reveries, which he often indulg’d in this cool and solitary Retreat.” After he had given this Description of the Cave, and the Conveniences in it, he counselled Dionistar and his Mistress to retire thither; promising to furnish them plentifully with all Necessaries, if they cou’d resolve to live some time in this Solitude, till they should have an Opportunity of passing the Mountains and settling in Prestarambia. This Counsel was approv’d of by the whole Company, and especially by the couragious Ahinomé, who said, “she would voluntarily banish

336

The History of the Sevarambians

herself from the Society of Mankind, and live in this Cave, or even in Places more shocking, to avoid the infamous Commerce of the Priests, who wanted themselves to enjoy her, under the specious Pretext of Religion and Piety.” That, “therefore she was ready to retire to this secret Place, there to spend the rest of her Days, tho’ her Lover should not have the Courage to accompany her.” Dionistar blush’d at these Words and answer’d, in an angry Tone of Voice, that, “she wrong’d him much to doubt either his Courage or Constancy.” That, “after the Proofs he had given of his Love and Fidelity to her, such a Thought, only, was injurious to him.” And that, “it would be most scandalous and shameful in a Man, to have less Firmness than a Woman; especially on an Occasion when she discover’d so great a Love for him.” “Put an end to these Reproaches,” interrupted, hastily, the Person who had counselled them to retreat. “You are both well satisfy’d in one another, and now, all that you have to do, is to think of the means of executing your Resolution.” Immediately, after this, it was agreed that they should make their Escape within three Days, taking the advantage of the Night; and that in the mean time Dionistar’s Friend should get every thing ready and prepare the Retreat for them. Mean while, the amorous Priest was perpetually reproaching his Companions, with the little Care they had taken to gratify his Passion; and representing to them, the Hazard he run of losing, in so long a time as they had allow’d her Father, the first Flower of her Virginity; without which he valued not the Possession of her; for that, he could by no means relish the disgusting Leavings of Dionistar, whom, he believ’d, she prefer’d to all Men. His Suspicions were the better founded, as he had been inform’d, that, neither Ahinomé, nor any of her Relations approv’d of the Religion of Stroukaras, but in Appearance. He gave all these Reasons to the rest of the Priests, and animated them so well, that they follow’d him in a Body, with a good Escorte of their Guards, to demand her of her Father, just at the time when she was preparing for her Escape. They surrounded the House, and told those who enquir’d the Reason of this Proceeding, “that the time which had been Indulg’d her Father being too long, the divine Stroukaras had testified his Anger, and enjoin’d them, under the severest Penalties, to bring with all speed to him the Virgin whom he intended to take possession of.” It was in vain to offer at Reason, for they peremptorily set her but three Hours to prepare in: During which time, she had an Opportunity to tell her Lover that “he might be assur’d of her Fidelity;” that, “she would fire the Temple in the Wood the first time the Wind blew, and that, if in that Moment, he would come to her Assistance with his Friends, and favour her Retreat, she would follow him where-ever he

Part V

337

thought fit to lead her. Pursue this Scheme, O Dionistar,” continu’d she to him “since ’tis the only one that is left you; keep up your Resentment, but show it with Conduct and Judgment: and be satisfied that how long so ever, or how little while, I may live, I will live wholly for you; and that the most terrible Death will be a thousand times more welcome to me than an impure and criminal Life.” When she had thus spoke, she spent the rest of her remaining time in adjusting her self to be had off to the Temple; and form’d a strong Resolution of dissembling her real Sentiments so well that the Priests should not be able to discover her Designs. She was conducted to the Grove with the Pomp usual on the like Occasions, and receiv’d at the Temple, and accommodated, in the same manner as others had been before; and, exteriourly, both in her Looks, and by her Discourse, she seem’d to be delighted with the Honour the divine Stroukaras intended her: So that the Priests themselves were deceiv’d by her Appearance, and really believ’d that she was transported at seeing her self in a Condition to be united soon to the divine Son of the SUN. The Priest, her Lover, was also impos’d on as well as the rest, and seem’d quite charm’d to find her in a Disposition which so far surpass’d his Hopes. He rejoic’d on his good Success, and sigh’d for the Hour and Moment, when he should satiate his brutal Passion with a Person who he lov’d to Distraction. But, as some Days were necessary for the going thro’ the Ceremonies practiced on the like Occasion, he was obliged to postpone, till they were compleated, the Enjoyment of his charming Ahinomé. He therefore held a strong Rein on his Desires, till the time when the old Director came to give her notice that “she must present herself before the Altar, to sollicit the divine Stroukaras to deign to descend from Heaven, and take possession of her Person.” But then Ahinomé, who had long since heard what lascivious Postures those who really consecrated themselves to this false Prophet were obliged to throw themselves into, and who from her Soul detested all such Impurities (tho’ she had been well aware that they would be required of her) answer’d, with an affected Languishment, that, “indeed she wish’d nothing with so much Ardour as to find herself united to the divine Son of the SUN; but, to her great misfortune, she was not at present in a State to receive him, by reason of the Infirmity of her Sex. That therefore, on this account, she requir’d some Days longer Delay, till her Person should be pure, and more worthy, of her celestial Lover.” This Answer, which the Old Director very well understood, gain’d her the Time she ask’d. During which, she was determin’d to fire the Temple, and rather to perish with it, than consent to the filthy Desires of these Impostors.

338

The History of the Sevarambians

Mean while, Dionistar, having got together a considerable number of his faithful Friends, waited only for the Signal which he had agreed on with his Mistress, to fall upon the Priests, and carry her off by main Force if he could not do it otherwise. Accordingly, in a dark Night she set fire to her Bed, and two other parts of the Temple. Heaven favour’d her Enterprize so well, that a brisk Wind, which arose a few Hours before, as Ahinomé had remark’d, carried the Flames to every part of the Temple. The Alarm was exceeding great among the Priests. Some of them were burnt in their Beds before they could quit them: Others ran out naked, and sav’d themselves in the Grove, full of Fear and Astonishment. The most couragious among them endeavour’d to extinguish the Flames, which, in a little time, had reduc’d the greatest part of the wooden Building to Ashes; and, notwithstanding all their Efforts to the contrary, purg’d off the Impurities with which they had defiled it. While some others of them, ran and open’d the Gates of the Palisades, and cry’d out for Help. During this dreadful Consternation, Ahinomé escap’d to the Fields without being perceiv’d by any of them. Dionistar and his Friends were the first who presented themselves at the Gate, under the pretext of being come to assist them in extinguishing the Fire. He sought every where for his Mistress, and, not being able to find her, he imagined she might have perish’d in the Flames. ’Twas then that Fury took possession of his Soul. He exhorted his Friends by his Words and his Example, and knock’d off the head of all the Priests he could meet with. The Massacre was terrible; and would have been much more so, if Ahinomé, who knew that her Lover would not fail of coming to seek her, and who being hid behind a Tree perceiv’d him go along with his Friends, to seize the Gate of the Palisade, had not advanc’d to tell some of his Companions, that she was got out of the Grove, and that she only waited for her Lover to make her Escape with him. The furious Dionistar was quickly inform’d of this News; who, thereupon rallying his Men, went away, immediately, out of the Enclosure, to go and take her at the Place where she waited for him. When they were met, they struck away, with all the speed they could, through certain Woods, towards the Place where they were to conceal themselves; leaving the Priests, who had escap’d their just Resentment, in an extreme Consternation. The Day which follow’d this dreadful Night, disclosed the Ravage which the Flames had made in the Temple, and the great number of Priests which Dionistar and his Company had sacrific’d to their Vengeance. Before they went within the Palisade, they had provided a certain black Mud to rub their Faces with, which disguised them so effectually, that they look’d more like Devils than Men. The Priests who had surviv’d the Horrors of the Night, remember’d to have seen these fright-

Part V

339

ful Persons, knocking down all that stood in their way; but their own Consternation and the Disguise the others were in, when they saw them, perfectly prevented their knowing any one of them. Mean while, all the People, round about, were got together at the Grove, to take a view of so sad a Spectacle; but none of them could guess the Cause of this terrible Calamity. Every one reason’d upon it in his own way. But at length, Ahinomé’s Father, having taken care to spread a Rumor among them, that certain Demons had committed this Ravage, that became the most common Opinion of the People. But the Priests having recover’d a little from their Fright and Astonishment, argued in another manner: They examin’d things with care; and whether from any Suspicion, or upon some well-founded Conjecture, they concluded at last, that Ahinomé and her Lover were the sole Cause of their Misfortune. They strengthen’d themselves in this Persuasion; and, full of the Thought, sent orders to the Mountains of Sporombe, to keep the Passes well guarded, and arrest Dionistar and his Mistress, if they should offer to come that way. But this Caution was, at the present, of no avail. For the courageous Maid, and her generous Lover, having found all things ready at the Cave before mention’d, secretly retir’d thither, and, with the Consent of their Relations, consummated their long and faithful Loves. They had no Commerce with any Person but him, who shew’d them the Place, and furnish’d it for their reception; and took care still, from time to time, to supply them with all Necessaries. They liv’d in this manner during the space of five Years, without ever quitting their Cave, and were perfectly bless’d even in this Solitude; for Dionistar made all his Happiness consist in the enjoyment of his faithful Ahinomé, and she plac’d all her Felicity in the possession of her dear Dionistar. By little and little, the Habitude of living alone grew pleasant to them; for tho’, the first Year, it seem’d somewhat melancholy to them, yet it was afterwards soften’d to them by the sweet Productions of their Love. They had a Child every Year, and the suckling them and breeding them up was a pleasant Amusement for Ahinomé, while her Husband employ’d himself in cultivating the spot of Ground near their Cave, before mention’d. He digg’d it up, and sow’d several sorts of Pulse, and other Herbs for Food, while the Trees that he found there furnished him with as much Wood as he wanted. The River, and the Spring within the Cave, supplied him with a great plenty of Fish; which, with what their Friend brought in from time to time, supported them and their Family in an abundance. They had built themselves a large Hut, in the open Ground-Plot, which was very commodious, as they were not afterwards oblig’d to reside always in the subterranean Vault; the Moistness and Darkness of which were neither so wholesome

340

The History of the Sevarambians

nor agreeable as this where they breath’d the free and fresh Air. The Conveniencies of this Retirement, and the Nearness of it to their Relations, from whom they heard often, made them begin to think it agreeable. They therefore no longer entertain’d any thoughts of retiring to Sporombe, but resolv’d to continue in this amiable Solitude, where, without doubt, they would have still liv’d very happily, if Fortune, envious of their Felicity, had not cut it short by the following Accident, which happen’d to them five Years after their Retreat. Certain young Men, much given to the Hunting of an Animal, call’d in that Country Darieba, (which is a kind of Wild-Cat, whose Flesh is very delicate, and its Fur rich) happening to observe a great number of these Creatures on the craggy Rocks near the Cave, were induc’d, by the hope of Sport there, to attempt the climbing of them. Accordingly they did so; and, in the pursuit of their Game, they came near to Dionistar’s Plot, which lay at the foot of these Precipices, and was quite inclos’d by them. From this Place they saw a Smoak arising, but could not perceive any Fire, which fill’d them with wonder, and excited Curiosity in them, to search into the occasion of it. They therefore advanc’d towards the Smoak, and from the top of a Rock, which they had ascended, discovered Dionistar and his Wife, dressing their Food. They look’d at them a good while, without making any noise, or being again observ’d by them. When they had staid as long as they thought fit, they return’d home, and reported the discovery they had made, “of a Man and Woman, with their Children, who liv’d by themselves, among the Rocks, in a deep Bottom, which they cou’d not conceive how they had got into; there being no way leading thither; that they could discern.” This Report made so quick a Spread over the Neighbourhood, that many soon went to be EyeWitnesses themselves, of what they heard so greatly talk’d of by others; and, among these, several who perfectly recollected the Hermits, and knew them to be Dionistar and Ahinomé. The Priests were not long before they were inform’d of this Discovery, which rekindled in them Desire of revenging, on the unhappy Lovers, the Injury done to their Temple and Society. They therefore got together a parcel of the most rascally Zealots they could pick out, amongst all their Followers, and immediately invested the spot of ground where they had been seen. But as the Place was inaccessible by reason of its Depth, and the Steepness of the Rocks which surrounded it, all that they could do, was, to shoot some Arrows down upon them; which, taking no effect, only serv’d to warn them of their Danger, while they continued in that open Place; and obliged them to keep on their guard, and retire to the adjoining Cave to avoid the farther Efforts of their Enemies.

Part V

341

Mean while, the Priests, meditating Vengeance Night and Day, invented a Machine, made of the Roots of Trees tied together, to let down Men by into the open Plot, which Dionistar seem’d now to have abandon’d; but this could not be done without being perceiv’d by him and his Wife, which obliged them to think of their Defence. When therefore they saw the Machine descending, in which there were five armed Men, they hid themselves behind a little Rock, near the Place where it was coming down; and, as soon as they could be sure of them, ply’d them briskly with their Arrows, which did such execution, that they were all easily dispatch’d at their landing. The generous Ahinomé, with a manly Courage, wonderfully well seconded her Husband, and never fail’d assisting him in the destruction of all those who attempted a Descent in this sort of Machines. These vain Efforts threw the Priests into an extreme Rage; and made them exhort their People, “to try a more vigorous Attack than any of the former, and not to suffer an impious Man and Woman, to triumph over a great number of holy Persons, and disappoint them of a Vengeance so justly due to their injur’d Altars;” adding also, the more effectually to work upon them, a solemn Promise, “of the Favour of Stroukaras, to all such as should deserve well upon this occasion, and an Assurance of those celestial Rewards which he has reserv’d for all who sincerely love and serve him.” These Exhortations and Encouragements rouz’d the Zeal of the Populace, and made them voluntarily offer to undertake any thing they should command; so that it was resolv’d to make a great many Machines, better defended than the former, and let them all down together; because then it would not be possible for Dionistar and his Wife, who could not be every where, to hinder the Descent of a number of Enemies, more than sufficient to subdue them, which, therefore, would lay them under a necessity of either surrendring themselves Prisoners, or dying by their own hands. This Project was executed in the manner it had been resolv’d on; and Dionistar, who had, from the first, foreseen and prepared for an Attack in this way, perceiving so many Machines descending at once, was constrain’d to save himself in his Cave, the Entrance of which was very straight, and consequently the more easily stopp’d up, when he was forc’d to abandon the Plot. For this purpose therefore, he made use of great Stones, and large Pieces of Wood, which he had got to the Place in readiness, while the Enemy were preparing for this grand Assault, which made them Masters of all the Territory without the Cave. They were now all got down safe, and thought themselves sure of the faithful Lovers, whom they vow’d to sacrifice to the Vengeance of the Priests; but they were greatly surprized, when, after having sought them a long time among the Trees and the Rocks, they could by no

342

The History of the Sevarambians

means find them. However, they did not give out so; but, making a more exact Research, they at length discover’d the Hole by which they had retreated into the Cavern, which they forthwith attempted to open. But as they had no Instruments with them proper for such a Work, they contented themselves with leaving a good Guard at this Passage, while the rest reascended the Precipices, in their Machines, in order to report to the Priests what they had done, and the Precautions they had taken; and to consult with them on the Measures that were farther to be pursued in the prosecution of their Design. The Priests finding that their Enemies had once more escaped them; and that, by means of the Hole thro’ which they had got off, they were shelter’d from the Torments their Malice had been preparing for them, concluded, after several Reasonings about it, that there must be some Cave in the Mountain to which they were retired; and that, perhaps, this Cave might have other Issues besides that which their People were guarding. The Probability of this Conjecture made them order a great number of their Zealots to make an exact Search all around the Mountain, which was accordingly accomplished in a few days; but no Avenue could be found that led into the Cavern. This gave them reason to believe, that there was no other way of entring but by breaking open the Hole; and that, if this Attempt should not succeed, they should yet, at least, have it in their power to starve them in their Den. Several Persons were therefore let down into the Plot; who with Leavers, and other Instruments, endeavoured to open the Passage which Dionistar had stop’d up; but he had laid so many Stones, and large Pieces of Wood across it, that it was not possible for them to make any Impression into the Cave, where they were quite secur’d from their Violence. At length, finding them thus perfectly out of their reach, they resolv’d to keep a constant Guard, Night and Day, on the Passage, and to famish the unhappy Wretches in their Lurking-Place, unless they would surrender at discretion. Mean while Dionistar and his Wife, foreseeing that their Provisions could not last long, judg’d rightly that they should not be able always to keep out of the hands of their blood-thirsty Enemies, who would torment them in the most horrible manner, if they should ever become Masters of their Persons. They conceiv’d also, that, if this should be the Case, it would afford matter of vast triumph to the haughty and merciless Priests; and this Thought afflicted them even more than Death it self. They had yet, indeed, some small remaining Hope, that their Friends might find means to throw them in some supply of Provisions; but after they had flatter’d themselves several days with this expectation, and none came, they perceiv’d, from the upper

Part V

343

opening, next the River, that a great number of the Enemy kept perpetually patrolling among the Rocks to prevent their escape that way; which quite depriv’d them of all the soothing Imaginations of Relief, and immediately determin’d them for Death. Happily for them, as their Circumstances now prov’d, Ahinomé’s Father had, some time before, taken home all their Children, excepting a young one still at the Breast. The Safety of their Offspring was a great Consolation to them; and they pleas’d themselves with the thought, that those precious Fruits of their Love would escape the Rage of their Enemies, and that they should continue to live in them even after their Death, in spite of the severe Destiny which was about to cut their Thread in the flower of their Age.—They indeed deplor’d the Rigour of this their Fate, but seeing that there was no Remedy, after having given each other a hundred Proofs of reciprocal Love and Affection, they form’d a generous Resolution of dying by their own hands, rather than to fall into those of their Enemies, and to brave them, e’er they expired, with a reproachful Recapitulation of their Crimes and Impostures. As soon as they were come to this Determination, they began to contrive the means of executing it, which they did in the following manner: We have already said, that the Cave was enlighten’d, on the side next the River, by a large Opening, about the height of four Men above the Water. On the Edge of this Opening, the Rock extended it self on all sides, and form’d a kind of Plat-form. Dionistar and his Wife made choice of this Place to be the Theatre of the bloody Tragedy they were resolv’d to act, in the presence of as many as they could get together to be Spectators of their fatal Exit. In consequence of this Design, they carried all the Wood they had left to the Plat-form, and laid it in a circular manner, with an intention of burning themselves in the Fire which they should kindle. When they had so done, they placed themselves in the Center, after they had conceal’d it, with a few Bushes, from the View of those who pass’d along on the other side of the River, which was not wide, at this Place, tho’ it was very deep. Having thus dispos’d all things as soon as they saw People near them, they call’d out and pray’d them to come to the Bank of the River over-right the Place where they stood. Three or four of those who were on the Patrol, hearing themselves call’d to, came up thither, and Dionistar said to them, that, “it was in vain, they sought to take him, seeing, the Cavern where he was being inaccessible, he should always be safe from their Attacks, while he was resolute to defend himself; but, that he thought it a better way to enter into a Treaty with them, and that therefore he desired them to inform the Priests, that, he purpos’d to surrender himself to them, rather than to remain shut up in a Cave all the rest of his Life. Tell them,” added he, “that I have

344

The History of the Sevarambians

very important Things to communicate; and that, when they shall know them, I make no doubt but they will think me deserving of their Favour, notwithstanding all the Injuries I have done them. I beseech them, therefore, to come with as great Numbers as they can, that there may be Witnesses enough of what I shall do in their presence, and before all the People that shall accompany them.” This Discourse, with an Account of the whole Affair, was quickly carried to the Priests, and a strong Party appointed to guard the Shore over against the Place whence Dionistar spoke to them. The Priests having received this News, immediately order’d some of their Body, to go and talk as gently to them as possible, and to assure them, “if they really repented of their Faults, they should not only have the Punishment remitted to them, but even be receiv’d into Favour.” These Envoys acquitted themselves punctually of their Commission, promising more than was ask’d of them, and try’d every thing they cou’d think of, to perswade Dionistar to trust their Assurances, and surrender himself into their hands. He seem’d to approve of their Council, and said to them, that, “if they would return in two Days with their whole Party, he would, in the presence of the People, make very important Discoveries, and let them know his last Resolution.” The Priests, attended by a great Multitude of People, did not fail to be at the Place at the Time appointed, and Dionistar, seeing them all assembled on the River side over against his Cave, appear’d with his Wife and a Child that suck’d her, and demanded a peaceable Audience; which having obtain’d, he address’d them in the following manner: “I think it a great Happiness, in my present Misfortune, that I see my Desire accomplish’d; for some days past I have exceedingly wish’d to have you all assembled at the Place where you now are in order to speak my Thoughts freely to you; and I conjecture by your present Silence, that you design me that favourable Attention you promis’d me; which, therefore, I gladly lay hold of, to declare to you my true Sentiments, and my last Resolution. I address my Discourse to this whole Assembly, but principally to you, O Priests and Sacrificers, who govern the People, and who, in particular, have most Reason to hate me, because I have offended you more than others. We freely confess, my Wife and I, that, she fir’d your Temple; and I killed, with my own hands, several of your Companions.——— And ought not this, you will say, to excite your Resentment against us?——— But seeing we are yet under Covert from the Storm, suspend your Rage for a little while, and as soon as we have ended this Discourse you shall infallibly be reveng’d upon us. “Before Violence was offered to my Mistress Ahinomé, we lived, she and I, with all those of our Family, in Repose and Tranquility, without

Part V

345

concerning our selves in any sort with the Affairs of other People. We let you alone to govern your Followers according to your own Fancy, without so much as uttering a single Word that cou’d in the least be offensive to you; and both of us waited for the happy Moment that was to unite us together by the Band of a lawful Marriage. The wish’d-for time, which was to have put an end to our Pain, being now almost arriv’d, and all things ready for the Accomplishment of our mutual Vows, you came to interrupt the sweet Flow of our Joys, and turn’d our softest Hopes into the most shocking Despair. You came, in the Name of Stroukaras, to demand Ahinomé; to tear my Mistress from me, and to deprive her of her Lover. Could such an Action be done without an extreme Violence? And, after such an Attempt, is it at all to be wonder’d at, that we did all that Rage cou’d prompt us to, on such an Occasion? Are there any Persons of Honour and Courage that wou’d have done less? Nay, and can you your selves justly blame us? I know very well that you cover this Procedure with the Veil of Religion, and that you will tell me, that, when Obedience to the Commands of a God, is the Point in question, there is no Reason that ought not to give place to it; that Justice, Equity, Blood, Friendship, and even Love itself, how lawful so ever it may be, are not to be any Obstacles to the Ordinances of Heaven. This way of arguing is plausible, and I will not offer to dispute it; but then I ask, Who shall assure me that an Order contrary to Reason, to Justice and Honour, is an Order from Heaven? And what Appearance is there, that a Religion, that overturns all the Laws of Nature and right Reason, and which breaks through the strongest Bands of Society, should be a celestial Religion? You say, that, STROUKARAS is the Son of the SUN; that, he is ascended up into Heaven; that, he dwells there with his Father; that, he is the sole Interpreter of his Will; that, he converses familiarly with you in your Temples and Groves; and that, it is from him that you derive a Power of working Miracles, and doing Wonders. This is, indeed, boldly said; but what Security can I have that you are sincere? And who shall vouch for the Truth of Things so contrary to natural Reason, and the Testimony of a thousand Persons of Probity, who have at sundry times detected your Impostures, and know perfectly the secret History of them? STROUKARAS was no more than a Man, but you have made a God of him; and adore him as the supreme Divinity. You pretend, indeed, that, he was the Son of the SUN, that he participates of his Nature and Power; and that, therefore, he is entitled to a share of that Worship which is due from all Men to that illustrious STAR. But, I beseech you, what Proofs do you bring to support this Doctrine, which is so contrary to the Testimony of Sense, and the Light of Reason? O ye blind, and stupid, Leaders of the blind! has the SUN, who is an eternal God, has he, I say, any need of the way of Generation to perpetuate himself ? And if he were to have Children, would

346

The History of the Sevarambians

not they be like him, as are the Offspring of all Animals? In short, if this must be the case, and you will still have it so, you would do much better, in saying, that, what he has, were born of the Moon; that, she was his Wife; that, every Month she grows big, and is deliver’d of Stars. This Opinion, tho’ ridiculous enough, is a thousand times more plausible, than what you have insinuated into this senseless People, to captivate them to your Caprice. You say, that STROUKARAS still retains the human Shape; that, he joins himself to the Daughters of Men, whom he favours with his Graces, and fills with a sacred Fruit which derives a Blessing on their Families.———And thus you abuse Religion, and impose on the Credulity of simple People, for the gratifying your infamous Luxury! Under a like Masque of Piety, you display your Barbarity against all those who cannot receive your Impostures. Stroukaras, your Chief, dipp’d his cruel Hands in the Blood of the Innocent, and either banish’d, or put to death, one half of the Nation, in order to render himself Master of the other. You imitate in all things his pernicious Example; and are, besides, every day adding new Crimes to those which he committed. As I have already said, of a mortal Man you have made him an immortal God, whom you daily adore:— More brutish in so doing than the Brutes themselves, who pay no religious Respect to their own Likeness, and worship neither Beasts nor them themselves, tho’ much more excellent than they, and tho’ they have often the Mastery over them. But you, far worse than those, attribute to your Stroukaras, Virtues which his pretended Father himself has not. For, since the Schism of his Ministers, you have erected Temples to him in divers Parts of the Country, and you affirm, that he descends from Heaven to give out his Oracles at all of them; and that this is really done in a hundred Places at the same instant; while, yet, you confess that the SUN cannot occupy but one Place in the Heavens. According, therefore, to you, the SUN [sic: SON] is, in this, more excellent than his Father, and of much greater Power than that glorious STAR, which diffuses Heat and Light thro’ the World, and gives Life to all Animals.”— As he was thus going on with his Discourse, the Priests, to whom it was by no means acceptable, and who were afraid of the Consequences of it, raised a Tumult among the People, and commanded some of their Devotees, “to pierce with their Arrows, that impious Haranguer, who, after having committed so many Crimes, had audaciously presum’d to reason against the Ministers of Religion.” The Zealots, ready to obey their Command, immediately began to level their Arrows against Dionistar and his Wife, who perceiving their Design, forthwith retired into the Cave, and there continu’d under Covert for some Moments, while they cut the Arteries of their Arms and Legs; when, having taking burning Brands in their hands, they immediately set fire to several parts of the Pile which they

Part V

347

had prepar’d, and threw themselves in to the center, in the sight of all the People, to whom they shew’d the Blood, streaming from their wounded Vessels. This dreadful Spectacle appeas’d the Murmurs of the Multitude, and gain’d them their Regards and Attention: which the generous Ahinomé taking the advantage of, as being the only Opportunity she could have during the short time of her remaining Life, address’d her self to the Priests and People. In her Discourse she declared “her Concurrence with her Husband in all he had said; reproaching the first with their Pride, their Impostures, and their infamous detestable Luxury; and exhorting the others, at length to open their Eyes, and not suffer such an Abuse of their Simplicity, as render’d them only Instruments of the Vices and Ambition of those, who, without any lawful Authority, had made themselves Masters of the Nation, in opposition to all the ancient Maxims, and laudable Customs of their Ancestors!” When she had done speaking, she took her Child, and cut his Veins in the sight of them all; after which, she, and her Husband, pour’d out a thousand Imprecations on their Enemies, and told them, that; “Death it self was sweet to them, since they died unanimously together, as they had liv’d; and had the pleasure of braving their Tyrants, reproaching them with their Crimes and Impostures, and triumphing over their Malice and Cruelty!” That, “it was no small Consolation to them, not to have fallen into their hands; and that they had so well provided for their Affairs, that their Enemies cou’d only exert their Rage, on the Ashes of two Persons, who died Martyrs to Reason and Truth!” After this they calmly laid down on the Pile, clasping each other fast in their Arms: and, perceiving their Life run off with their Blood, they remain’d in this Posture till the Flames, which they had kindled, reduc’d their Bodies to Ashes. This horrible Spectacle made different Impressions on the Minds of the People; some of the more reasonable of which were extremely touch’d with this Action of the two Martyrs, with the strength of their Reasonings, and the Firmness and Resolution with which they had despised Death, rather than renounce their real Sentiments, or fall into the hands of their Enemies. Others of less Discernment, having no Rule but the Prejudices of Education and the Sentiments of their Conductors, explain’d this Adventure in a different manner, and treated Dionistar and Ahinomé as impious, obstinate Hereticks; tho’ at first they had been touch’d with their generous, or rather heroick Behaviour. However, the Priests did not dare to exercise any Cruelty on the Relations of the deceased; for fear of rendering themselves odious to every body, and wholly ruining their Reputation, already much shock’d by divers Events contrary to their Designs, Interests, and Authority; so

348

The History of the Sevarambians

that from that time they govern’d themselves with more Moderation than before. The Prestarambians have handed down, from Father to Son, the Memory of this remarkable Event; and regard Dionistar and Ahinomé as two illustrious Martyrs for the Truth, which their Ancestors were banish’d from their Country for, after having first undergone various Persecutions rais’d against them by the ambitious Stroukaras. There are some who even go every Year to visit the Rock where these generous Persons lost their Lives, and the Respect that is still kept up for them, renders the Place it self venerable. When Sevarias subdu’d this People, he found among them twentyfour, or twenty-five Temples, where the Impostor Stroukaras was worship’d without reckoning several others which yet subsist among the neighbouring Nations, who do not submit to his Laws but persist still in their Superstitions. The Prestarambians who follow’d him in his Conquests, related this History to him, which they had receiv’d from their Forefathers, and pray’d him to use his utmost Endeavours to convince those poor abused People of their Error. He promised them to apply to it as soon as he could, but, at the same time, gave them to know, that, much Prudence was necessary in a Design of this nature, for fear of shocking the People too far, who were quite blinded in their Superstitions. However, when he had perfectly conquer’d them, and built the Temple of the SUN, the Magnificence of which excited a grater Admiration than Stroukaras’s Groves; when he had instituted pompous Ceremonies accompanied with vocal and instrumental Musick, and was chosen by the SUN himself to be the Chief of these People, and the Interpreter of his Will: In a word, when he had by his just Laws and virtuous Actions acquired himself a Character among them; then he began to tell them that, “STROUKARAS was not truly the Son of the SUN; that, this beautiful STAR being an eternal GOD, has no need of the ordinary Way of Generation to perpetuate his Species, like mortal Men; and, if he were to produce Children, they must be like their Father, as are the Offspring of all Animals.” That, “his Children would all become as great and glorious as himself and so instead of one SUN, there would be several; which is not true in fact, as they could not all but know.” These solid Reasons, back’d with the Force of his Arms, and the Terror of his Thunder, the fatal Effects of which they had already experienc’d, made a great Impression upon some of the principal Persons among them, and gave them to see thro’ the Impostures of Stroukaras. But that which perfectly restor’d them to the Light, and quite dissipated their Error, was the Care which Sevarias took to sur-

Part V

349

prize the Impostors, in the very act of their Knaveries, when they were giving out their Oracles from the hollow Trees in which they concealed themselves. For the doing this, he chose the time of one of their solemn Feasts; when, entring the Temples on a sudden, at the instant they were uttering their pretended Oracles, he catch’d the false Prophets in their Concealments, and exposing them to the view of the People, oblig’d them to confess, in the hearing of them all, their several Cheats and Impostures. After this, all reasonable Persons were entirely disabus’d; so that in a little time all the Temples and Groves of Stroukaras were destroy’d, throughout his whole Dominions, and the Religious Worship, which till then had been paid him, was totally abolish’d. But this is to be understood of only his own Territory; for several of their Neighbour-Nations persist in their Idolatry to this day. Let us now return to that of the Sevarambians themselves; which, tho’ less gross, and not so repugnant to natural Reason, is yet really and truly an Idolatry, in as much as they pay to the SUN, which is but a Creature, the Religious Respect which is due only to the Creator. The publick Exercise of Religion, among them, is only at the common Feasts; which are the three first Days of the New, and as many at the Full-Moon. At these times they offer certain Sacrifices of Perfumes, which the ordinary Priests devote to the SUN, and accompany with some Hymns; after which the rest of the Day is spent in Dancing, and various other Exercises and Diversions. But the solemn Feasts are the things most dazzling in their Religion; for then it appears in great Pomp and Lustre. There are six of these, all different from one another in their Ends and Ceremonies; and these are, the Khodimbasion, the Erimbasion, the Sevarision, the Osparenibon, the Estricasion, and the Nemarokiston. We shall describe them all in their Order. These great Feasts are never celebrated but in the Temples of the large Cities; as Sevarinde, Sporounde, Arkropsinde, Sporumé, and some others, which have each their particular Districts, and take in all the People of their several Neighbourhoods, who come and assist at some Parts of the Feast, after which each Person goes back to Festivities and Rejoicings at his own home. At the Temple of Sevarinde, they have near four hundred Priests, which officiate in turn; and at the others, a Number proportion’d to the Bigness of the Places. The Viceroy is the first of them all, being the sovereign Pontiff; and, at the great Solemnities, he always offers the first Sacrifice. Every Governour of a City, where there is a Temple, doth the same there; and the other Priests perform the rest of the Ceremonies. Let us now go on to a Description of these solemn Feasts.

350

The History of the Sevarambians

OF THE FEAST OF THE GREAT GOD, CALLED KHODIMBASION. WE have formerly observ’d, that, the Khodimbasion was instituted by Sevaristas, according to the Idea of Sevarias; who, indeed, dropt something about it, but had by no means clearly explain’d himself on this Article; which left such a Doubtfulness in the Matter, that none of his Successors, till Sevaristas, presumed to attempt this Institution. But that Prince made no scruple at all of establishing it, and saw it celebrated several times before his Death. This Feast is held only once in seven Years, at the beginning of every Dirnemy, when the Sun enters into Libra, which makes their vernal Equinox, as it doth our autumnal. The Ceremonies of this great Feast continue seven Nights successively, and are perform’ d in the following manner: As soon as the Sun is set, they open the Temple, which is hung with black, the bright Globe, and all the other Ornaments being cover’d; so that nothing of them is to be seen during the whole Feast. The Priests, who are all cloath’d in black, veil their Faces with a Crape of the same Colour; and the Viceroy himself is no ways distinguishable from the rest, but by a white Rochet which he wears on his Shoulders. In this Equipage he goes up to the Altar, where nothing is to be seen but a small Globe, cover’d also with black Crape, which darkens the Brightness of it, and affords the eye but a faint glimmering Light. All the Sevarobastes and Priests, who are to officiate that Night, follow him with lighted Flambeaux in their hands. As soon as he enters the Quire, he makes a profound Reverence; and then, continuing still advancing, he makes another; till at length, being come to the foot of the Altar, he stops there with all his Train, who stand just behind him; when the Priests hiding the Flambeaux, both he and all his Retinue lie down on certain black Squares, with their Faces to the ground, and hold their Hands join’d on their Heads. They remain in this Posture for the space of two Hours, keeping all the time a profound Silence. When this Term is expir’d, they are warned by the sprightly Sound of a Cornet, to rise upon their Knees; and a Priest taking one of the lighted Flambeaux, which had been conceal’d, gives it into the Viceroy’s hand, who immediately rises up and goes to the Altar, where he kindles certain Aromatick Woods, which he finds there prepar’d for the Sacrifice. As soon as the Pile is lighted, he throws Gums and Perfumes into the Flames, (for the Sevarambians have no bloody Sacrifices) and then, kneeling down again, he pronounces, with an audible Voice, the following Prayer.

Part V

351

The PRAYER, or HYMN, to the GREAT GOD. KHODIMBAS, OSPAMEROSTAS, SAMOTRADEAS, KAMEDUMAS, KARPANEMPHAS, KAPSIMUNAS, KAMEROSTAS, PERASIMBAS, PROSTAMPROSTAMAS. These are the Epithets which they give to GOD in their own Language; of which the following is a Translation, as also of the rest of the PRAYER. “KING of Spirits, who knowest all things, art omnipotent, infinite, eternal, immortal, invisible, incomprehensible, the sole Sovereign, and the Being of Beings: “We Mortals, blind and weak! who see some Glimpses of thy Deity, tho’ with such faintness as if we saw it not; who know too, that Thou art, by absolute Necessity of Nature, yet know not Thee; and who, even thus uncertain, believe it is our Duty to adore Thee: We come, with Clouds and Darkness compass’d round, to offer up our Vows, and pay Thee homage. For all things here below proclaim Thee, daily, to us, and speak thy Power and Wisdom. Those numerous shining Stars, which, during Night, dart down their Rays upon us, give us irrefragable Proofs, by Motions just and regular, that, ’tis to thy almighty Hand they owe their Guidance and Support. But, the bright Source of Day, which warms and enlightens us! the illustrious SUN, divine! whose Ministry Thou usest, while Thou dispensest to us, the various Blessings we receive, presents the most resplendent Mirror, in which we view thy Glory, and thy eternal Providence. ’Tis his celestial Ray uncovers Nature, conceal’d beneath the Veil of Night, and gives to see the wond’rous Works of thy almighty Hand. ’Tis he, who heats and quickens us, and to the World communicates the Effects of thy divine Beneficence. Thou also hast constituted him thy great Vicegerent, in this part of the Universe, which by his active, ardent, lustrous Rays, he moves, warms, and enlightens. Yon rolling Globes Thou hast subjected to him, and we, such is thy sovereign Pleasure! are of the Number of Beings animated by him: Him, whom thou hast declared a GOD, glorious and visible; and who vouchsafes to be our GOD, propitious, selecting us, from all the various People of the Earth, to be his Subjects and true Worshippers. Which, that we may be, he has promulged his Laws, prescribing to us the Nature and the Manner of the Homage which he expects we will pay him. And thus we know our Duty to him, by explicit Revelation of his Will. But Thou, O sovereign GOD of GODs, O Power almighty, Thou art invisible, and none can comprehend Thee! All things, indeed, proclaim thy Being, but nothing

352

The History of the Sevarambians

can explain thy Nature, or give us information of thy Pleasure. An Argument most clear, and even demonstrative, that, Thou wilt not, that we should read Thee further, than in the glorious Volume of thy Works; seeing Wisdom infinite, and boundless Goodness, has not thought fit to give us, otherwise, to know Thee. Besides, our greatest Light and Knowledge is but mere Ignorance, nay, very Darkness, compar’d to thy divine Omniscience, too wonderful for us! And, still the more we meditate to know Thee, we, by the Search it self, become less knowing of Thee. For infinite is the Gulph, betwixt our Weakness and thy Power! and, but to contemplate the Greatness of Majesty divine, would sink our Souls into the Abyss of nothing, if not supported by thy exhaustless Mercy!—Even black Despair would seize us, and banish from our Minds that Spark divine, our Reason, thy best Gift! if by her voice thou didst not say unto us, The Creature cannot comprehend its Maker, nor the Thing finite that which has no bounds. Full of this humbling Thought, we lay our hand upon our Mouth, nor, rashly, would attempt to penetrate the Mystery profound of thy Divinity; choosing much rather to pay Thee, only, mental Adoration.—Tho’ yet, as these our Bodies, the Cloathing of our nobler Part, bespeak alike thy forming Hand, we think that they, too, are in duty bound, to bear a part in that Religious Worship which we offer; and that they ought to shew externally to Men, our inward Reverence and Veneration. “We therefore, according to our feeble Light, have instituted this most solemn Feast, in testimony of that supreme Honour so justly due unto Thee; and also to caution those, and to remind them of it, who otherwise might run the Course of Life, without once lifting up their Thoughts to Thee. Deign then, O Goodness infinite, to accept us; and receive this Sacrifice of Hearts, and these exterior Duties, which we presume to pay Thee, in such a manner as we think most decent, most humble, and respectful. Grant, that the Incense of our Offering, ascending to Thee, may sollicite for us Forgiveness of our Sins; and shower down on us, daily, new Graces and Celestial Favours; that so we always may adore Thee, and celebrate thy Name for ever and ever.” After this Prayer is over, the Flambeaux are again produc’d, and the Musick of several melodious Hymns is heard resounding from all parts of the Temple. As soon as these are ended, the Viceroy goes out of the Temple in the same manner and order that he enter’d; and thus, by his withdrawing, and that of the Audience, an opportunity is given for a second Celebration. This is perform’d by the senior Sevarobaste, who, in a new Assembly of People, goes thro’ all the same Ceremonies, and says the same Prayer as the Viceroy did in the first Congregation. When this second is over, comes on a third, and after that many more, which suc-

Part V

353

ceed one another continually for the space of seven Days; that is, till the End of the Feast. During this Solemnity, they have several publick Assemblies of the Learned in divers Parts of the City, where they speak freely concerning the Divinity, each according to his Sentiments; which produces, sometimes, famous Controversies, and afford the Men of Contemplation, proper Occasions to display the Beauty and Strength of their Genius’s, and the Fruits and Acquisitions of their Studies. I was, at a certain time, present at one of these Assemblies; when a very learned and eloquent Man, named Scromenas, made a long and grave Discourse touching the Constitution of the Universe, the Birth of our Globe, the Origin of Animals, the Progress of Human Knowledge, and the Religious Worship establish’d among Mankind. As to the first Article, he said, that, “the Universe was eternal and infinite, and ought to be consider’d as both material and spiritual.” That, “Matter, and Mind, which animates it, were inseparably united together, tho’ they are two things, really distinct, as the Body and Soul of Animals.” That, “this Mind, or Spirit, had a power of Formation, by which it operated perpetually on all Bodies, in a thousand different ways, and painted it self, in miniature in every Creature.” That, “it acted with Intelligence, and all its particular Works had a wonderful Connection with, and Relation to, the great Whole; seeing it never did any thing in vain, tho’ it might appear to our weak Reason, that many of its Productions were vicious, irregular, and monstrous.” He added, that, “the Mind’s forming Power, extending thro’ all Bodies, acted in them diversly, and, as it were amused it self with an admirable Variety.” That, “according to this Principle, it lov’d to pass out of one Body into another, which is the efficient Cause of the Destruction and Births of certain Compositions, and the immediate Source of Life and Death.” That, “different Proportions were observ’d in all the Works of Nature; seeing she, sometimes, formed entire Worlds, and, at others, contracted her Action, and represented her Powers in little, after a thousand different manners.” That, “in the dissolution of Bodies, nothing perish’d but their Forms, which indeed they only chang’d for new ones, without the loss of a single Particle of their former Matter;” and that, “the Mind, when it has abdicated any such decaying System, doth not perish neither, but only goes off to operate on other Subjects.” This Doctor supported his Reasoning with the Authority of Pythagoras, Plato, and many other great Philosophers among the Greeks, Arabians and Indians; “who were,” he said, “at least the far greater part of them, of his opinion.” He added, “that the universal World was composed of an infinite number of Globes, different in their Proportions,

354

The History of the Sevarambians

Movements, Situations, Uses, and Ends.” That, “there are also an Infinity of Suns, which are so many distinct Sources of Light and Life, to enlighten and animate Globes, plac’d by Providence within their several Spheres, who are therefore to be look’d on as the Lieutenants of the Deity, in the Government of the great Whole.” That, “none of these Globes are eternal, tho’ they are of a very long duration, each indeed with the difference of more or less, according to their Degree of Excellence and Solidity; but that all of them, without exception, had a Beginning, and consequently, like all other inferior Bodies, must have an End.” That, “Providence doth not permit the Dissolution of one sort, nor the Birth of another, but at the several Periods appointed for that purpose; to the end that the great Whole may not sustain any loss, nor suffer any violence. In a word, that with respect to the Globes, the Rule was perfectly the same with that observed in relation to all the several Species of Animals; in which, tho’ the Individuals were every day perishing, yet the Species were still preserv’d, by the Birth of others, to supply the places of such as die off.” After having thus discoursed of the universal World, he came to speak of our Globe in particular; which, he said, “had also a Beginning as well as the rest, and, like them, must have an End too; tho’ the Term of its duration was not known to any Mortal.” That, “Men were divided in their Opinions concerning the time of its Birth; some making it more ancient, others of a later date; the Egyptians having assign’d it the Age of fourteen or fifteen thousand Years; the EastIndian Brachmins making it near thirty thousand; and the Chinese reckoning fourteen or fifteen thousand, in the Order of Succession of their Kings only. But that for his part, he did not believe it was so ancient: the Jewish Computation being, in his opinion, more plausible, because it agrees better with the Progress of Sciences and Arts; and tho’ there are now People on the Earth, as barbarous as any of their Ancestors could be four thousand Years ago, that, nevertheless, this last Account ought to be deem’d the most probable, in as much as the Bodies of all Animals seem to be daily running down; whether we regard their Stature, or the Strength and Healthfulness of their Constitution. And this,” he said, “was principally remarkable in malignant dissolute Nations, such as are the greatest Part of the People of Asia, Europe, and Africa, who in reality are a Set of Men exceedingly barbarous, tho’ they think themselves extremely polish’d, making Politeness consist in certain exterior Appearances, which in fact have nothing at all to do with it. For that, true Politeness doth by no means consist in certain affected Forms of Speech, in fantastick Modes of Behaviour, and some whimsical Grimaces and Gestures; but in Justice, good Government,

Part V

355

Innocence of Manners, Temperance, and that Love and Charity which all Men ought to have for one another. That the most ingenious and dextrous Man in the World is a Barbarian, if he is not just, beneficent, charitable, and temperate; and the Light of his Understanding becomes only an Ignis-fatuus, which serves to dazzle him, and throws him, as it were, from a Precipice.” That, “ill-governed Nations are blind to their own Interests; and that the true Glory of Princes and Magistrates, must always consist in the good Management, and right Regulation of their Subjects, and an equitable Distribution of Rewards and Punishments.” As to the Origin of Animals, Scromenas said, that, “this was also unknown to Men, as well as the time of the Birth of the Globes; but that, nevertheless, if we might be allow’d to build on a probable Conjecture, it was reasonable to believe, that, at the production of each World, Providence had created a couple, at least, of all perfect Animals, with which it purpos’d to fill it; and that, from such Couples, as their Sources, all the several Species had increas’d afterwards in the way of Generation.” That, “in this matter, he could not but regard the Mosaic Account as the most probable, and best founded in Reason, of any.” That, “for the other Globes, which are part of the Universe, as well as ours, none could say what was the Oeconomy of Nature in those great Bodies; and therefore, to speak of it with any Positiveness, was a presumptuous Rashness.” That, “it was enough for us to reason about the things that we saw on our own Earth, and to admire there, in a thousand Instances, the Wonders of divine Wisdom.” That, “as there were divers Species of Animals in the several Climates of our Globe, so it was also possible, that the GOD of Nature may have peopled the other Planets with different kinds of Creatures, that have nothing common with those that we see among us.” That, “he doth all things for his own Glory, and it doth not become us, to penetrate rashly into the Secrets of his Providence.” That, “of all the Animals created here below, he has given Man great Advantages which he has not bestow’d on the rest; and that these Gifts and Graces are different both in their Kind and Degree.” That, “nevertheless, Man was a mortal and perishing Creature as well as the others, and that therefore he ought not to pride himself on the Enjoyment of Goods, the Possession of which is, at best, but short and uncertain.” He added, that, “it was a consummate piece of Folly to imagine, that Heaven, Earth, and all the luminous Bodies which sparkle over our heads, were created only for the particular Use of Man, as if Providence had no end more noble and sublime, than to please us poor, miserable Worms.” In a word, with respect to the People guilty of this sort of Vanity, he said things so mortifying, that one of our most judicious

356

The History of the Sevarambians

Preachers cou’d not have express’d himself better, to humble a haughty Sinner who presumes to exalt himself against God. From this Subject, he pass’d on to the Origin and Progress of Sciences and Arts, concerning which he made several curious Remarks, and gave an historical Abridgement of all that the most celebrated Writers, of divers Nations, had said on that Subject. He cited the Chinese Authors, and the Brachmins; as also Jews, Greeks, and Arabians; by which he made it appear, that, “many valuable Branches of Knowledge which the Ancients had been Masters of, are now lost, but he hoped, that, in time, they would be again restored by the Care and Industry of the Sevarambians, who had already recover’d several, and were likely to succeed better in the search after them, than any other Nation in the World, by reason of their excellent Government, and the Care which was taken, from time to time, to send ingenious Persons to travel among all the politer People of our Continent, in order to learn every thing among them, which they should judge worthy of the Curiosity, or tending to the Improvement of their Nation.” He concluded with a Discourse on Religion, and the Worship that is due to the supreme Divinity; concerning which he said several strange Things not proper to be recited here. I shall only say, with respect to this matter, that he undertook to show, that, “Men have naturally no more Religion than the Beasts themselves, and, excepting the Power of Speech, but little more Light: For, that it was by the means of Discourse that they communicated their Thoughts to one another, and that the greatest part of Sciences and Arts, owe their Origin and Progress to this most useful Faculty.” He added, that, “Religion took its rise from Curiosity and Contemplation;” that, “before the Establishment of religious Worship Men liv’d together like the Beasts;” that, “the Meditations of certain contemplative Persons, by investigating the Order of Providence, had, by little and little, rais’d their Thoughts up to a supreme and independent Being, and produc’d the first Movements to Devotion in Mankind.” That, “afterwards the Sentiments of Respect and Gratitude had issu’d in that exterior Worship, which is offer’d to the Deity, and his great Minister the SUN, who is the most glorious and beneficent Creature, which our Eyes can discover.” That, “it was on this account, that the Adoration of the SUN was the most ancient, the most general, and the most plausible of any; and, that, tho’ pure, unmix’d Reason, led the Mind to the Idea of a superior Being, nevertheless its first Impulses, and the Testimonies of Sense, bound themselves in the Adoration of this great STAR.” He said, “that the Ceremonies instituted in the beginning, were very simple, and had consisted, during the first Ages, in the Sacrifices of certain Fruits, ripen’d by the Sun for the Nourishment of

Part V

357

Man.” That, “in aftertimes, Ambition and Avarice, mixing themselves with it, had stuffed Religion with a thousand superstitious and ridiculous Ceremonies, which were now establish’d by Antiquity and Custom, notwithstanding the Evidences of Reason and Truth to the contrary.” That, “these Errors had been follow’d by impious, cruel and tyrannical Doctrines, by means of which Attempts had been made to captivate the Understandings of Mankind.” That, “when Men were thus turned out of the right Way, it was not to be wonder’d at if they went on from Error to Error, and from Idolatry to Idolatry, and agreed so very little both in the Object, and the Manner of their Worship.” That, “their Blindness in a Matter of this Importance, fill’d their Minds with a thousand false Prejudices, which hinder’d them from seeing the Light of Truth, how shining soever, of herself, she might be.” That, “their Habitude in Error had so corrupted their Affections, and engross’d their Hearts, that it quite obscur’d all the Light of Reason, and left them no longer at liberty, to act freely, in the choice of Good and Evil, Truth and Falshood.” That, “from hence has proceeded that inconsiderate Zeal of People, of all Times and Places, who, to defend, or increase their Party, have often violated all the Laws of Justice and Humanity, under the Pretext of supporting their Opinions, and rendering venerable the weak and unperforming Idols which they had set up as Objects of their Adorations.” That, “the Obstinacy of different Parties had often caus’d Wars and Massacres, and ruin’d the most powerful Empires.” That, “to avoid all these Misfortunes, it was necessary that a well-order’d State should protect each Individual in the Enjoyment of his natural Liberty, since it was not only unjust to violate it, but every such Violation cou’d not but produce very bad Effects.” That, “it is not in our power to believe as we please; Faith being always founded on some preceding Reason, which commands the Assent; and without which, it is impossible to embrace any Profession, how much so ever we may pretend to do so.” That, “all those who leave the Religion in which they were brought up, by a choice of another, ought to shew, by evident Proofs, the Motives which induc’d them to such a Change; and to make appear by good Reasons, that it was nothing but the Force of Truth which obliged them to renounce their Error.” That, “without this all such Conversions are pretended only, and every Proselyte either a Fool or a Deceiver, who knows not what he doth, or else, preferring worldly Advantages to the Salvation of his Soul, covers his Apostacy with the specious Veil of Piety, and impudently attempts to impose both on God and Man.” That, “by Reason, a Man might vanquish the Prejudices of Education, and descend from certain superstitious Religions to those more pure and uncorrupt; but that, on the contrary, it was impossible, in the same way, to run up to them, and to

358

The History of the Sevarambians

embrace sincerely Creeds contradictory to Reason and opposite to the Testimony of our Senses.” That, “Man in this respect was like a Tree, whose superfluous Branches we can indeed lop off and take away, tho’ we can never give it any new ones.” That, “according to this incontestable Truth, a Person might sincerely and reasonably forsake all sorts of Religions to embrace that of the Sevarambians, as being the most rational, and the freest from Superstitions of any; which, indeed, was a thing claim’d by all Parties in favour of their own Creeds, but not supported by Reasons, equally strong and evident, in all Persuasions.” Scromenas thus finish’d his Discourse, which had lasted above an Hour, and to which all the Assembly were exceedingly attentive. I was well pleased to hear a Pagan, who, in several things, express’d so good an Opinion of Moses, and seemed to approve of divers Articles of our Christian Faith; tho’ I cou’d by no means concur with him in what he said concerning their Religion. But my Pleasure, on this account, was not of long continuance, being soon turn’d into Concern by a Declaration made, in the Face of the whole Congregation a Moment after the Doctor had done speaking, by one of our People, that, the Speaker, and five or six of his Companions, convinc’d by the Force of Scromenas’s Reasoning, would embrace the Religion of the Sevarambians. Moreton, the English Man, a Person of a fickle, factious Spirit, was he who spoke in this manner; having premeditated to affront me thus, in order to revenge himself for a certain Punishment I had, justly, some time before condenm’d him to; for which purpose, he had engag’d Scromenas to compose this long Discourse on the Subject, that he might renounce the Christian Religion with the more Pomp, and under the specious Appearance of Conscience and Piety. I oppos’d this Step as much as I cou’d; putting him and his Companions in mind of their Duty, which I did with all the Gentleness imaginable; but none of my Reasons and Remonstrances were capable of touching their Hearts, harden’d against their God, and treacherous to their Religion. Accordingly, they publickly renounc’d Christianity for the Religion of the Sevarambians, and endeavour’d to justify their Apostacy by many vain Arguments. I us’d my utmost Endeavours to bring them back again, and prevent the mischievous Effects their Example might produce; but when I saw that I had no longer any room to hope it, I cou’d not forbear expressing my Resentment against them; and telling them, that, “they were fallen under the Curse of God which had depriv’d them of Understanding;” that, “their Obstinacy, and that of their Ancestors had brought this Misfortune upon them; and that it was not at all to be wonder’d at, that the Children of those who had set themselves against the holy catholick Church, should be given up to a reprobate Mind, and, at last, come to renounce that Christianity, which their

Part V

359

Fathers had miserably divided into Schisms and Sects, so bitterly inveterate against the ancient, orthodox, catholick and Roman Religion; out of which there is no Possibility of Salvation.” They despised my Reproaches, as they had before my Exhortations; and I was, at length, forc’d to be silent, and let them alone to go on in their own way. But, by the Grace of God, I preserv’d my self unshaken in the Faith of the Church, which I hope to live and die in; and that nothing shall ever be able to draw me off from my Attachment to Christ Jesus, and that Obedience which all true Christians ought to pay to his Vicar.

OF THE ERIMBASION, OR FEAST OF THE SUN. THIS Solemnity is observ’d every Year, and begins when the SUN first touches upon the Tropick of Cancer which makes our Summer Solstice, and is with us the longest Day; but, on the contrary, the shortest to those of the Southern Continent. Three Days before the Arrival of this Festival, all the Fires in the Nation are put out, which are not lighted up again till they have kindled a new one at the Rays of the SUN. This would be very incommodious in a cold Country at the dead of Winter; but, besides that Sevarambe is a warm Climate, they prepare themselves for it so long before-hand, that it is not any mighty Inconvenience to them. The three first days of the Feast are spent in offering Sacrifices of Perfumes, and singing mournful, melancholy Songs, in which the People lament the distance of the SUN, and sollicit his return for the restoring of Light and Heat to them, which seems then to have forsaken them; and that he will rekindle, with his new Rays, their Fires which are every where extinguished. If the SUN shines clear, and is not veil’d with Clouds the Day after the Solstice, which happens very often in this serene Climate, by the means of burning Glasses they set on fire certain combustible Materials, which are stuffed into the side of a great Pile, built in the Court of the Temple. The Fire continues smoaking, and as it were hatching in these Materials for some Hours, till at length, about the Evening, it enflames the whole Pile, to which all the People resort and light up their Lamps, which they afterwards carry off to their several Osmasies: And thus they recover Fire for the Use of the ensuing Year, in the room of that of the preceding, which, as we said, was every where put out. But if it happens to rain at this time, or the SUN is hid in Clouds, then the common People, believing he is angry with them, offer Sacrifices and sing penitential Hymns to him: which they continue doing, till that illustrious STAR, dissipating the Clouds, appears in all his Brightness, and darts his Rays strongly enough to rekindle their extinguish’d Fires. When that is done, they

360

The History of the Sevarambians

render him their Thanksgivings; and the Scene changes into publick Rejoicings, diversify’d with several kinds of Sports and Shews, till the end of the Feast, which ordinarily lasts but five Days. I should become tedious were I to relate here all the Ceremonies of this Solemnity; wherefore I have chosen to speak of them very succinctly, and to mention, in a few Words, only that which is most remarkable in it.

OF THE SEVARISION, OR FEAST IN MEMORY OF SEVARIAS. THE Sevarision is another great Solemnity, which is observ’d annually in memory of the Arrival of Sevarias and his Parses in that Continent. The Vice-Roy and all his Officers, appear on this Occasion in their most magnificent Habits. They offer Sacrifices to the SUN, and return him Thanks for his Goodness, shown to their Ancestors, in sending Sevarias, armed with his Bolts, to vanquish those who were then in enmity to him, to bring them out of their stupid Ignorance, give them Laws, choose them to be his People, and to make them the happiest Nation in the World. After they have gone thro’ this part of the Ceremony, they pass on to the Praises of Sevarias; they recount the Battles which he gain’d over the Stroukarambians, recite the Laws and Maxims which he left behind him, and make Encomiums on his Goodness, his Prudence, and all his other Virtues. From him they go on to the Praises of his Successors; and implore the SUN to give them always Vice-Roys, who shall endeavour to imitate, and, if it is possible, even to surpass all their Predecessors in Virtue and Happiness. This Feast continues but four Days, which are spent wholly in rejoicings, without the least Mixture of any thing mournful and melancholly in them.

OF THE OSPARENIBON, OR SOLEMNITY OF MARRIAGE. THE Osparenibon is another solemn Feast which is celebrated four times a year; that is to say, every three Months. Sevarias instituted it in his time, and saw it kept up all the rest of his Life. I shall not stay to describe it here, having already elsewhere given an Account of the Manner in which I saw it perform’d at Sporounde, that being the same as at Sevarinde, excepting only, that by reason of the Greatness of Sevarinde, and the vast Resort to it, it there continues five Days, whereas in all the other Cities it never lasts but three. The Pompousness of the Celebration is also greater at Sevarinde than at other Places, and every thing is perform’d with much more Grandeur and Magnificence; especially when the Vice-Roy espouses any Woman, which I saw him do, twice, in the time I was there. Then the Festival has some publick Shew, and particular Ceremonies

Part V

361

annexed to it in honour of the supreme Magistrate, and all the great Officers of State are oblig’d to assist at it, which makes a prodigious Concourse of People at Sevarinde. There is this difference between the Sovereign and the Subjects, that, he himself makes choice of the Woman he is to marry, whereas the rest are all chosen by the Women. In all other matters there is little or no Variation with respect to the Ceremony.

OF THE STRICASION, OR ADOPTION OF CHILDREN. THE Stricasion, or the Adoption of Children, is another Festival, celebrated every three Months, and lasts only three Days. At the first Stricasion after the Children are seven Years old, their Fathers and Mothers bring them to the Temple, and give an account of their BirthDay, to a Priest set apart for that purpose. This Priest places them all in order, according to their Age, and delivers the List of their Names to the Stricasiontas, or Super-Intendant of the Schools, who is one of the great Officers of the State, and always a Sevarobaste. The Stricasiontas calls them all over by their Names, according to their Seniority, and then leads them up to the Altar; where each of them makes three Reverences before the black Veil, two before the bright Globe, and one to the Patria. From thence he takes them away, and presents them to the Vice-Roy, or to that Sevarobaste who represents him, saying, in the Names of the Fathers and Mothers of the Children, “that they are come to consecrate them to the SUN and their Country.” On his pronouncing these Words, the Vice-Roy descends from his Throne, and offers a Sacrifice of Perfumes to the SUN, praying him, “to receive into the number of his Children and Subjects, this Company of tender Youths, which are now devoted to him; to afford them his Favour and Protection, to the end that they may serve him throughout the Course of their Lives, as those who brought them into the World have hitherto done; that they may acknowledge him as the common Father of all Men, and own him for their God and King in a particular manner.” When this Prayer is ended, the Parents come forward, and taking their Children by the Hair, and turning their Faces to the Altar, after having kiss’d them on the Forehead, they cut off the Lock which they hold in their left hand, with Scissars; and, gently striking them on the Head, they say, Erimbas Prosta Phantoi, that is, May the SUN be thy Father and Mother. After which, they are led away, to a Place where their Heads are shav’d, from whence they come back again to the Temple, at which certain Hymns are sung upon this Occasion, which is all that is done the first Day. The Day following, their Heads are anointed with an aromatick Oil, the third they are wash’d, and have yellow Robes given to them; and

362

The History of the Sevarambians

at length after certain Sacrifices, Ceremonies and Rejoicings, they are sent off to the several Osmasies, where they are to be instructed and brought up.

OF THE NEMAROKISTON, OR FEAST OF FIRST FRUITS. THE Nemarokiston, or Feast of First Fruits, is a moveable one, and begins in the Spring, as soon as they have certain ripe Fruits, which they offer to the SUN, in acknowledgment of that Sustenance which he affords to all Men and Animals, by rendering the Earth fruitful, and ripening all her Productions. The Viceroy, or some Person deputed by him, presents, in Sacrifice, these First Fruits, and burns them on the Altar, in the sight of all the People, for three days successively: which Ceremony is attended with Dancing, and other publick Rejoicings. After this Festival has been once open’d, they continue offering, from time to time, the ripest of their Fruits, as they come in season; but this is done only by the Priests, as Opportunities present themselves, and the People are not present at them, unless when they happen at the Lunar Festivals; which, as I have before observed, are the three first Days of the New and the Full-Moon. These are all the Feasts and Solemnities of the Sevarambians; and these Seasons they spend in Diversions, being exempted from their ordinary Labour. Thus Toil, Pleasure, and Repose, perpetually succeeding one another, Life runs off in an easy agreeable manner, and is not disturbed with such Cares, Vexations, and Solicitudes as amongst us. By this means they pass their time happily, and live long and healthfully, in a moderate use of those Enjoyments, the Abuse of which is always fatal, in a Course of Intemperance and Idleness. I have often assisted at the Celebration of these Feasts; induc’d thereto merely by Curiosity, and not out of any Zeal for their Religion, having always continued stedfast in the Catholick Faith, notwithstanding the Example of some of our People; who, as I before took notice, embrac’d the Worship of the SUN, and unhappily renounc’d their Christianity, either thro’ Weakness or Complaisance, for they were under no sort of necessity of doing it, seeing we were permitted to worship GOD in our own way, without any hindrance or disturbance whatsoever: it being a settled Principle and fundamental Maxim with the Sevarambians, not to use any violence in Matters of Religion, but to proselyte Men to their Worship, by Example and Persuasion only; because every one ought to be allow’d a liberty of thinking and judging for himself; and Force and Authority tend only to make People Hypocrites, but can never convince the Mind, nor produce real Converts. We were also often present at the Assemblies of the Giovannites, as they are Christians; but most of us chose rather to worship by our selves, than to join with a Sect, who did not acknowledge the divine Nature of Jesus Christ; and who pretend to

Part V

363

prove from the Scriptures, and by Reason, (which is a bad Judge in these Matters) that, the Son of GOD was but an Angel, before he took Flesh in the Womb of the Virgin; and that, he is GOD only by Assumption, or Association, in the Government of the World; after the manner of the Roman Emperors, who often adopted some Collegue, whom they invested with the Imperial Power and Majesty, as if it had been their natural and hereditary Right. Thus these poor Hereticks deceive themselves with their vain Reasonings; making use of human Examples to explain things divine, and endeavouring, by gross, low Comparisons, to elude the sacred Mysteries of the Catholick and truly Orthodox Faith. Thus we have given some Account of the Religion of the Sevarambians, of their solemn Feasts, and the principal Ceremonies of their Worship, without entering into a minute Detail of Particulars, which would be more tiresome than useful or agreeable. We shall now go on to say something of the Language of this People, without extending much on the Subject; our Design being, not to compose a Grammar, but only to draw up a short Sketch, which may serve to shew its Excellence, and the superior Advantages of it, to all the several Speeches of Asia and Europe.

OF THE LANGUAGE OF THE SEVARAMBIANS. Politeness of Manners ordinarily produces that of Speech; especially, when there are natural Foundations which may be easily built on, without changing the first Model on which it was established. This Sevarias was perfectly well aware of at the beginning of his Reign; for foreseeing that, by his Laws, he should render the Manners of this People gentle and regular, he imagined they would want a Language conformable to their Genius, by means of which they might be able to express their Thoughts and Sentiments, in a way as polite as their Customs. He excell’d very much in Languages, being Master of several, and knowing perfectly all their Beauties and Defects. Having therefore a Design of composing a compleat one, he borrow’d from all that he understood, every thing that was useful or beautiful in them, and rejected all that they had which was incommodious and faulty. I would not be here understood to mean, that he transferr’d the Words of other Speeches into his, but only took Notions, Idioms, and Forms of speaking, which he endeavour’d to imitate, and introduce, by accommodating them to that of the Stroukarambians, which he had learn’d, and intended for the Foundation of that which was to be us’d among his Subjects. He retain’d all the Words, Phrases, and Idioms, which he thought good; contenting himself with only softening the Roughness, and retrenching the Superfluity of it; and adding to it where it wanted. These

364

The History of the Sevarambians

Additions, indeed, were very great; for, as the Stroukarambians before his time were a very barbarous People, they had but few Terms, having but few Notions to express by them; which render’d their Language very much bounded and defective, tho’ otherwise it was soft and methodical, and capable of Improvement and Politeness. Sevarias, therefore, first of all, made a Collection of all their Words, and disposed them in an alphabetical Order, like a Dictionary. After which he remark’d all their Phrases and Idioms, retrenching what was useless, and adding such things as he thought necessary; and this he did with respect to simple Sounds, as well as compound ones; Dictions, Syntax, and the Arrangement of Words and Sentences. Till his time, the Inhabitants of this Country were wholly ignorant of the Art of Writing, and wonder’d, as much as the Americans themselves, at the use of Letters, which gave the Parses an opportunity of persuading them, that the SUN had taught them this, and all the other Arts which they had brought with them out of our Continent, and that he communicated himself to them in a manner altogether particular. Sevarias invented Characters to represent all the Sounds which he found in their Language, as well as those which he introduc’d into it. He taught them to write in Columns, beginning at the top the Page, and running down to the bottom, but yet inclining from the left to the right, after the manner of several of the Oriental Nations. He distinguished the Letters as we do, by the Names of Vowels and Consonants; after having invented forty Figures, which take in almost every possible Vocal Sound, which yet are perfectly distinct from one another. He contriv’d several Words, and establish’d the usage of them, in which this Variety is easily remark’d; to the end that Children might learn betimes to form all kinds of Articulations, and render their Tongues flexible and apt for the pronunciation of every sort of Sounds, without pain or difficulty.—And this is the Reason, that the Sevarambians learn, so easily, the Tone and Elocution of all the Languages they study, and become so quickly Masters in this part of Speech. They have ten Vowels, and thirty Consonants, all of them distinct from one another; which gives their Language a wonderful Variety of Sounds, and renders it the most agreeable in the World. And these Sounds are, as far as is possible, accommodated to the Nature of the things express’d by them, each having its particular Usage and Character. Some of them have an Air of Dignity and Gravity, and others of Softness and Delicacy; one sort serve to express base, contemptible things, another grand and sublime, according to their Position, Arrangement, and Quantity. In their Alphabet they have followed the Order of Nature, beginning with the Guttural Vowels, then going on to those of the Palate, and

Part V

365

ending with the Labial ones. After the Vowels follow the Consonants, which, as we said, are thirty in number, and divided into Primitives and Derivatives. They subdivide the Derivatives also into the mute and the liquid; and, with respect to the Organ, that has the greatest share in uttering them, they distinguish them all into Gutturals, Palaticks, Nasals, Gingivals, Dentals, and Labials. The first Figure which they place after their Vowels, is a Mark of Aspiration, which sounds just like the Greek one, or our Letter h. Then come the Guttural Consonants, the Palaticks, and all the rest descending to the Labials, according to their natural Order. Out of this great Number of simple Sounds, their Syllables are compos’d, which is done by a Mixture of Vowels and Consonants, in which they have studied the Nature of things, which they endeavour to express by conformable Sounds; never making use of long and harsh Syllables, to express short and soft things, nor of soft delicate ones, to represent grand, strong, or rough Ideas, as do almost all other Nations, who have no regard to these Rules: tho’ the Observation of them makes a principal Beauty in any Language. They have also above thirty Dipthongs and Tripthongs, all perfectly distinct, which makes a still greater Variety of Sounds; and many of them serve to shew the Cases of Nouns, and the Tenses of Verbs. The greatest part of their Words end with Vowels, or very easy Consonants; and whenever one finds a harsh Termination, it is always used to express something of a like nature in the thing signified, and is often a Matter of choice, especially in Pieces of Eloquence. They have three Characters for each Vowel, by which they mark their Quantity, and they divide them all into the Grave, the Acute, and the Circumflex; to shew the kind of Accent that is to be put upon them. They never put the Circumflex but upon long and open Letters, nor the Grave but upon those which are pronounc’d by closing the Mouth, and which suppress or lower the Voice. The Acute, indeed, is indifferently plac’d on any, according to the Nature and Situation of the Word in the Discourse. They have Marks for the divers Tones and Inflexions of the Voice, as we have for the Interrogation and Admiration: nay, they go still farther in this respect, for they have Notes for almost all the several Tones of Voice us’d in Pronunciation. One sort serve to express Joy; others Grief, Anger, Doubt, Assurance, and almost every other Passion. Their Words are, for the most part, of two Syllables, when they are simple; but the compound ones are longer, tho’ never so tiresome as those of the Greeks, which often exceed the bounds of Mediocrity, and run one quite out of breath. Sevarias invented several Adverbs of Time, Place, and Quality; and divers Prepositions, which, being join’d to Nouns and Verbs, express wonderfully well all sorts of Differences and Proprieties. The Declension of their Nouns is form’d by

366

The History of the Sevarambians

the different Termination of each Case, after the manner of the Latins, or else by the means of certain prepositive Articles, as we do; and even sometimes by both together: but then this is always emphatical, that manner of Declension being never us’d but to express something very strongly. The Genders of Nouns are three, the masculine, the feminine, and the common. The ending a is peculiar to the masculine, è to the feminine, and o to the common. In their Augmentatives they affect their Letter ou, which frequently notes Disdain and Contempt; and in their Diminutives they use the Vowel u, which also signifies the same Affections, but é, and i, stand for Genteelness and Delicacy. Thus to design a Man, in their ordinary Form, they say Amba; and when he is a great and venerable Man, Ambas; but, if he is a grand Villain, they say Ambou, and Ambous when he is exceedingly remarkable. In the Diminution they say Ambu, when they would signify a little paltry Wretch; but if they would express a pretty little Man, ’tis Ambé; and when such are notable either in good or ill, they add the Letter s, which makes Ambus, and Ambes. In like manner they call a Woman Embé in their ordinary Speech; but, according to the different Significations just now explain’d, they denominate them Embés, Embeou, Embeous, Embeu, Embeus, Embei, and Embeis. These divers Terminations serve also to express Hatred, Anger, Contempt, Love, Esteem, and Respect, according as they are us’d in the Discourse. They have only two Numbers, the singular and plural; which last is usually distinguished from the other, by the Addition of the Letter i, or n. Thus Amba makes in the plural Ambai; Embé, Embei; and, in the common Gender, Ero, Light, gives the plural Eron, Lights. When they would express the Male and Female of a Species, both, by one Word, or they are doubtful of the Sex of any Animal, they change the masculine or feminine Termination into the common one, and add i to it. Thus Amboi signifies either a Man or Woman; and Phantoi stands for a Father or Mother, or both; for Phanta is a Father, and Phanté a Mother. In the Verbs they also observe the three Genders, which shows the Sex of him or her who speaks; and these Verbs are also capable of Augmentation and Diminution like the Nouns. Thus to signify to love, in the Infinitive, they say Ermanai, when it is spoken of a Man; Ermanei, of a Woman; and if it be neither Male nor Female, or both together, Ermanoi. In all the Tenses and Persons, they observe also this Difference; still having a regard to the Gender of the thing which speaks or is spoken of. For example, a Man who says he loves, uses Ermaná, a Woman Ermané, and a thing neuter or common, Ermano; which will be evident in

Part V

367

all the Persons of the present Tense and indicative Mood, in the following Example. The MASCULINE Ermaná,

Ermanach`,

Ermanas´,

I love.

Thou lovest.

He loveth.

Ermanan,

Ermanáchi,

Erman`si,

We Love.

Ye love.

They love

} Sing.

} Plur.

The FEMININE Ermané,

Ermanech`,

Ermene`s,

I love.

Thou lovest.

He loveth.

Ermanen,

Ermênchi,

Ermenˆsi,

We love

Ye love

They love

} Sing.

} Plur.

The COMMON. Ermano,

Errnanôch`,

Ermanos`,

I love.

Thou lovest.

He or she loves.

Ermanon,

Ermôn`chi,

Ermônsi,

We love.

Ye love.

They love.

} Sing.

} Plur.

They observe this Difference of Genders in the Terminations, throughout all the Moods and Tenses of the Verbs; and also make use of Diminutives and Augmentatives, as in the Nouns. Thus Ermanoui signifies to love grosly, Ermanui to love little, and dishonestly, Ermanei to love little, but honourably, and Ermané, to love little, but with more delicacy. But to love much and nobly, they say Ermanâssai. To signify a Lover, or the Person that loves, they add da, de, or do to the Infinitive. Thus for a Man that loves they say Ermanaida, for a Woman Ermaneidé; and for the common Gender Ermanoido. They have three Syllables, by the addition of which they form Participles in all the

368

The History of the Sevarambians

Tenses of the indicative Mood. Thus, Ermanada, which by Abbreviation they write Ermanˆda, signifies a Person which now loves. Ermancha and Ermansa are the second and third Persons singular; and in the plural they say Ermândi, Ermânchi, and Ermênsi. For the Feminine, they change the a final into e, and for the Common into o; and thus they say Ermandé, Ermanché, Ermanse, which make their Plurals in ei; and the Neuters in o change them into on, as Ermando, Ermandon, and so of the rest.*17 They have but one Conjugation, thus varied by Genders, Moods, Tenses, Persons, and Participles; but in this one Conjugation, they have a greater Number of different Terminations than we have in all ours; and the whole Language has not one irregular Verb in it: which makes it very easy to those who endeavour to learn it. The Verbal Noun, which signifies the Action of the Verb, is form’d of the Infinitive, by the addition of the Syllable psa, pse, or pso. Thus Ermanaipsa expresses a Man’s Love, or his Act of loving, Ermaneipse that of a Woman, and Ermanoipso that which is neuter or common to both Sexes. All the Active Verbs are chang’d into Passives, by prefixing to them the Preposition ex, if the Verb begins with a Consonant; as Salbrontai, to command; to which if you add ex, you make Exalbrontai to be commanded; but if it begins with a Vowel, then x only is added, as Ermanay to love, Xermanay to be loved; and so of the rest: which changes their Significations from active into passive, throughout all the Tenses of the primitive Verbs, and in all that derive from them. Almost all the Verbs Neuter admit the Preposition dro, especially if they are not of many Syllables. Thus Stamay, which signifies to be, is often wrote and pronounced Drostamay, which signifies also to be, to exist, &c. All the Verbs Transitives receive the Preposition di, or dis; as Discatai, to run; Disoterai, to fly rapidly; Dinuferai, to run swiftly. But as these Prepositions signify a rapid Motion, on the contrary dro signifies a slow and gentle one. As Drocambai, to come slowly; Drocatai, to run slowly; Drofembai, to speak slowly:———tho’ it is Difemibai, to speak swiftly. They have above a hundred Prepositions, which signify different Manners of acting; and of which every Word is fraught with more Sense than we can express in a whole Line. The Greek Language, beautiful as it is, doth not come near this in Energy and Softness, nor represent half so well the Actions of things, nor their different Manners and Properties: which I could easily make appear, were I to extend on this Subject, and compose a Grammar for the learning this Tongue; which, perhaps, I —————— 17. *This whole Passage for the Participles, to the End of the Paragraph, is somewhat obscure.

Part V

369

may, one day or other, do, when I shall have Leisure and Conveniencies for such a Work. They have Verbs Imitatives, Inchoatives, and also of those called Remittents, and Intendents, which are all marked by Prepositions proper to them, and by the slow, rapid, or moderate Run of the Syllables which compose them. This makes the Language the fittest in the world for the Metrical Poetry. It is also very commodious for all other Poets and Orators, for it has many synonimous Terms with respect to Common Notions, and they can often express the same thing by five or six different Words, some of them long, others short, and others indifferent; some of them compos’d of long Syllables, others of short, and each has its own peculiar Motion. Their Poems are all in Metrical Verse, like those of the Greeks and Latins, whom they have imitated; but their Verses are much more flowing, and more capable of moving the Passions. For they always adapt the Run of the verse to the Subject, and despise and ridicule those Poets, who utter low, trifling Thoughts, in high sounding Words, and pompous Heroicks, tiring the Ear with their perpetually returning Measures. I had a Fancy once, in the Company of some of their great Wits, to speak of our Rhimes, and compare them with their Metrical Verses, in order to hear what they would say; but they treated that Manner as ridiculous and barbarous, and said that Rhimes were only fit to chain up good Sense and Reason, and that it produc’d nothing that could either strike the Passions, or give a Grace and Flow to the Verses. And indeed, to give my own Opinion of the Matter, I must say that I think nothing more ridiculous in Writing than this way of Rhime; tho’ very great, and otherwise polite Nations, are so possess’d in favour of it, that they discover as great a Fondness for it, as your low Wits for the Clenches and Puns. These rhiming Verses seem to me to make a Chime, not unlike the Bells fasten’d to the rolling Cage of a Squirrel, who, as he runs round in his Prison, sets each of them to jambling, which, therefore, answer one another in a Melody agreeable only to the Squirrel, and the Children which pass along by him. For what reasonable Man would amuse himself with it, or hear it more than once? Our Rhimes, in my opinion, are not more entertaining; nay, I must own, that with me the Bells are preferable to the other: for they have at least this Advantage on their side, that if they do not please Men of Wit, they are by no means shocking to Reason and good Sense, as Rhime but too frequently is in such Poems where it is used. Can any thing be more ridiculous than to make a Fish-woman, a Cobler, a Peasant, a Child, and other such Personages, speak in Rhime, as they do in abundance of modern Plays? Is there any thing more absurd, than for a Man to buy, sell, plead, eat, drink, fight, make his Will, nay, and even die in Rhime? And, what still

370

The History of the Sevarambians

heightens the Absurdity, is, at the change of a Scene, perhaps, to see a Person come upon the Stage, (who till then was suppos’d to be absent, and not to have heard what was said there before) and rhyme to the last Verse of the last Speaker, just as if he had heard it, and industriously sought for an Answer. Certainly, every Person of good Sense, who shall but reflect on these Fooleries, will be amaz’d that a thousand fine Genius’s should suffer themselves to be betray’d into so stupid, and vulgar an Esteem for Rhime; and readily agree with me, that the Sevarambians had but too much reason to treat this Invention as absurd and barbarous. It may be said, indeed, that in the metrical Verses, all sorts of People and Characters are represented as well as in the Rhimes, which are not so difficult to compose. To which I answer, that provided the Writer knows how to vary the kind of Verse according to the nature of his Subject, it is hard to remark any thing like regular Measures, and one is apt to take it for a sort of harmonious Prose, which moves and strikes the Passions, instead of an idle Arrangement of Words, that only shock delicate Ears, as do the greatest Part of our Rhymes, by their constant Falls and Returns, without Strength and Spirit. Besides, it is but seldom that we find any of our modern Poems make any great Impression upon the Heart; and if, sometimes, they do so, that Effect proceeds from the Beauty and Propriety of the Thoughts, or the Elegancy of the Expression, and not from any particular Movement of the Feet and Syllables. On the contrary, I have seen Poems at Sevarinde, which tho’ they were but middling with respect to Wit, yet seem’d quite transporting when they were repeated or sung. Particularly, I remember an Ode, on the Victories of Sevarias over the Stroukarambians, which is indeed full of Wit, and abounds with fine Thoughts, but doth not affect one half so strongly when one reads it to one’s self, as when one hears it repeated justly, or sung by a good Voice. Then, indeed, it ravishes and transports the Soul, and charms all the Passions to such a degree, that the Man is no longer Master of himself. For the Fight is so well represented in it, the Noise of Sevarias’s Thunder, the Astonishment of the Barbarians, the Cries and Groans of the Wounded and Dying, and the Flight of the Vanquished, that one seems to behold a real Battle. But that which is still more wonderful, is, that the mere Run of the Feet of the Verse, without the Words, with the Notes to which it is sung, produce in the Heart, almost, the same Emotion as the Poem it self. ’Tis a common thing with the Musicians of this Country, to produce very different Effects in the same Song. Sometimes they shall excite Joy, Anger, Hatred, Contempt, and even Fury; and in a moment after, they shall have calm’d all these Passions, and in their place introduc’d Pity, Love, Sorrow, Fear, Gentleness, and at last Sleep it self: all of which is principally owing to the

Part V

371

Force of the mere Measures. And I imagine, that this will not be thought hard to be believ’d, since formerly the Greeks did as much, tho’ their Language is by no means so proper for this purpose as that of the Sevarambians, who have improv’d upon all that preceded them. In the unpolish’d Languages, such as are now spoke in Europe, and almost every where else, we have a certain scrupulous way of ranging the Words, putting the Nominative Case actually before the Verb, and the Accusative after it, because the Sense of the Phrases, or Sentences, depends upon them; we having no clear, and evident Distinctions either as to the Declensions or the Conjugations. And this Method was also practised by the Latins, while their Speech was unrefined, as are those of most Nations in our days; but, as soon as they began to polish it, they chang’d the Disposition of their Words, and render’d it more free, both in their Verse and Prose, tho’ the doing so, introduc’d sometimes an Obscurity into the Discourse, by the resemblance of some of the Cases of their Nouns to certain Persons in the several Tenses and Moods of the Verbs. Nevertheless, they preferr’d Sweetness and Cadence to Perspicuity, and consulted rather the Ear, than the Rules of natural Grammar. The Sevarambians do just the same, but with much more Success; for they range their Words as they please, without darkening their Sense in the least; because, in their Tongue, all the Cases of Nouns, and the Persons of Verbs, have different Terminations; and consequently are never equivocal, as are those of the Greek and Latin; which makes it exceeding clear and easy. They have also more Cases and Moods than those ancient Nations, and their Language is much more distinct, not only by reason that the Terms are deriv’d from one another, but also, by the means of their Prepositions, which mark precisely, without any kind of Confusion, the several Actions and Qualities of things. On these accounts, and by the Care which is taken to teach every Person the Principles of Grammar, they speak better, and express themselves more clearly, than any Nation in the World; from whence we may conclude, that they surpass us as much in the Beauty of their Language, as in the Innocence and Politeness of their Manners, and that they are, excepting only the Article of Religion, the happiest People on Earth. But, besides the natural Advantages of their Language over those of other Nations, the fine Genius’s which they have produc’d, have extremely contributed to its Embelishment; and particularly one of their Poets, to whom, by reason of his prodigious Genius, they have given the Name of Khodamias, that is to say, the divine Wit.—’Twas he was the Author of the fine Ode we just now spoke of; and who, by that incomparable Work, and several other excellent Pieces, has acquir’d himself as great a Reputation among the Sevarambians, as ever Homer and Virgil did

372

The History of the Sevarambians

among their Countrymen, the Greeks and Romans. His Style is pure, clear, and natural; his Thoughts just and refin’d, and the Flow of his Verse so wonderful, that ’tis impossible to hear them, and not feel the Passion he would inspire. One may say of him, that, he was truly born a Poet, since, even in his juvenile Years, he wrote Poems which surpriz’d the greatest Genius’s of his time. At the Age of twenty-one, he produc’d a Dramatick Performance, which was admired by the whole Nation, and not only acquired him a high Reputation, but contributed much to his gaining a compleat Victory over his Rivals; which was follow’d by the possession of a beautiful young Woman, whom he was exceedingly in love with. I imagine, that a Recital of this Adventure, will not be disagreeable to the Reader, seeing ’tis singular enough to engage his attention.

THE HISTORY OF BALSIMÉ IN the Reign of Sevarkhemas, there was at Sevarinde a young Woman named Balsimé, who, for her Beauty, was admir’d by all that knew her: for she was possess’d of all the Charms that Nature could bestow on a Woman, her Body and Mind being both equally perfect, as if Heaven had form’d her, as a Specimen of its most exquisite kind of Work. And, if Birth could have been any heightening to the Advantages she enjoy’d, in a Country where it is of no sort of account, she must also have been allow’d to surpass all the Girls in Sevarinde, by the Nobility of her Extraction, as much as she did in Merit and Beauty; for she was of the Blood of Sevarias by the Mother’s side, and, before she had reach’d her eighteenth Year, her Father was advanc’d to the Viceroyship, by the Name of Sevarkimpsas; who, when he came to be old, resign’d the Government to the now reigning Sevarminas. Tho’ the Preferment of this Prince gave a new Lustre to all his Family, it yet put a full stop to the Fortune of Balsimé: who, possessing so many charms, would infallibly have been presented to the Viceroy, if he had not happen’d to be her own Father. She therefore saw her self for ever depriv’d of the Hope of ascending the Throne in that way, and reduc’d to the necessity of bestowing her self on a Subject. It is true, that if, on one hand, her Father’s Fortune was an Obstacle to her’s, on the other, it procur’d her some Advantages;—as it set her up to the publick view in the fairest point of Light, and gave a lustre to her Merits, which made her Case taken notice of, and remember’d by the Sevarambians, who to this day frequently represent on their Theatres the Loves of Balsimé and Kodamias. Kodamias was known by the Name of Franoscar, till, by his Works, he had acquired that glorious Title. He was born at Sevarinde, and in the

Part V

373

same Osmasie where Balsimé first saw the light; so that they were acquainted from their most tender Infancy; and, tho’ Love had yet no interest in their Familiarity, it was however remark’d, that Franoscar, before he was seven Years old, discover’d a natural Inclination for the little Balsimé, who was but two Years younger than himself. Neither Absence nor Distance could make any change in his Affection; and, after his Stricasion, when he was sent to another Osmasie, where he was to be brought up with divers young Lads of his own Age, as often as he could get leave, he went to pay his respects to his Father and Mother; upon which occasions he never fail’d of visiting Balsimé, and making her some Present of Fruits and Flowers. There was, in another Osmasie, a Youth nam’d Nefrida, who was much about his Age. This Nefrida had also a Tendre for Balsimé, as well as Franoscar, being used to sing frequently with her, for they had both excellent Voices. He was somewhat better grown than Franoscar, tho’ neither of them had any thing extraordinary in their Mien, and both were but of a middling Size. However, while they were thus young, Nefrida seem’d to be the most amiable Person of the two, by reason of the Charms of his Voice, which procur’d him the Love of the whole Osmasie. As soon as he was seven Years old, he was adopted by the State, with several other Children, but on the account of the Exquisiteness of his Pipe, he was ordered to be brought up among those who were design’d for the Temple Service, and set apart to sing the Hymns compos’d in honour of the SUN. Balsimé changed her Osmasie, as well as he, at her Stricasion; so that they now saw one another but rarely: and Nefrida, not having so strong a Passion for her as Franoscar, did not so much concern himself about going to see her, and making Presents to her. Thus they pass’d the first Years of their Childhood with Innocency; nor had Love, as yet, any thing to do with them. But as soon as Balsimé was fourteen, and her Beauty, which increas’d daily, had procur’d her the admiration of every body, a thousand Hearts began to sigh for her, and Franoscar and Nefrida were no longer the only Persons that endeavour’d to recommend themselves to her favour. However, no Person dar’d to address her openly, till she was fifteen; because before that Age young Women are not allow’d to receive Declarations of Love, nor young Men to make them. But notwithstanding the strictness of the Law in that Case, the amorous Franoscar could not bear to think of losing so much time, nor of giving any one an opportunity of avowing his Passion before him. For this purpose, therefore, he began to contrive ways to disclose himself to his beautiful Mistress, with the best Grace he could, in order to anticipate his Rivals, and establish himself in her Affections, before any other should have taken possession of them: as knowing well, that

374

The History of the Sevarambians

the first Impressions are, ordinarily, the strongest, and the Honour of having it said, that, he was her eldest Lover, would give him considerable Advantages over all other Pretenders. He had remark’d long since, that Balsimé, besides her wonderful Beauty, and the Generosity of her Sentiments, had an extreme Delicacy of Understanding, and was Mistress of a perfectly polite Taste; and as these Qualities are very amiable in themselves, they had contributed to the Love and Esteem he had for her, as much as the Charms of her Person.—He had even foreseen that he should carry his point from his Rivals, by the mere dint of Politeness and Elegancy; and this Consideration made him apply himself more closely than he might otherwise have done, to the Study of the Belles Lettres, which was indeed the natural Turn of his Genius. But, as soon as he perceiv’d, that his charming Mistress had a fondness for Poetry in particular, which went so far as to engage her to write Verses sometimes her self, he no longer doubted of the Victory; and therefore, from that time, sought only for an opportunity favourable to his Design. ’Tis the Custom of the young People of this Nation, to have frequently publick Assemblies for their Amusement, and especially at the Celebration of the Osparenibon. On these occasions they amuse and exercise themselves with divers Diversions, and particularly with dancing, because it is the most proper of any for Designs of Gallantry. And, besides, as it is contributive to Health and the good Disposition of the Body, the Laws have not only permitted, but commanded it. They have therefore frequent Balls, either in the Fields near their Cities, or in the great Halls of their Osmasies, at which all sorts of People are brought together, but especially the unmarried of both Sexes, who are allow’d, at these times, to discourse freely of Love, and those who express the greatest Sensibility of the Passion are ordinarily the most praised; because this more than any thing else, is the end and design of the Assembly. If any young Spark sings wells, dances gracefully, or has composed any thing, with Wit and Fire, in praise of his Mistress, he has the full Liberty of displaying his Talent on these occasions. And tho’ this Indulgence, sometimes, produces Jealousies among the Parties concern’d, they dare not let them be publickly taken notice of, because Malice is a thing scandalously irreputable, and the common Course of acting among this People is with a Frankness and Simplicity not to be met with any where else. Franoscar had a Cousin, who, being turn’d of his eighteenth Year, was often present at these Assemblies to endeavour to gain the good Graces of a Mistress who was already in possession of his Heart. His Person was well made, his Candour and Courage equal to any body’s; but then he had but a middling share of Understanding. This was the Talent of his Cousin Franoscar; for which reason, he, sometimes, got him to

Part V

375

write Verses and Songs, in praise of the Girl whose Esteem he was desirous of; which by no means issu’d to his Advantage. For tho’ the Pieces produc’d by him were neat and delicate, and every body pretended to believe that they were his own, and were fond of hearing him repeat them, there was not a single Soul that thought him capable of composing them, because his Discourse would by no means support such a Character. For a long time, Enquiry was made after the true Author; but all to no purpose: Franoscar conceal’d himself so well, and kept his Commerce with his Cousin so secret, that no body had any notion of it. As he was very young, and the Proofs he had given of his Genius were known only to his Preceptors, no Person suspected, that, he was the Composer of those several little Pieces, which for the Exquisiteness of their Turn and Delicacy, they cou’d not attribute to his Cousin, tho’ he took, all along, the Honour of them, pretending that he really was the Writer of them. On a Festival Day, at a certain Osmasie where there was to be a great number of young People, and among the rest Balsimé’s elder Sister, Franoscar gave a Pourtraiture in verse, of that young Beauty, to his Cousin, to be read by him to the Company whenever he should see a favourable Opportunity. Accordingly, he took a proper time for it, and recited it to the Assembly with wonderful Success. All that he had produc’d before, was nothing in comparison of this Piece: It sparkled with Spirit and Elegance, and painted the charming Maid with so much Exactness under the fictitious Name of Labsinemis, that all of them cried out, with one Voice that, “it was the most lively Picture of the young Balsimé.” This Work was universally admired, and the true Author of it sought after, more than ever, but still in vain. Balsimé, who was indeed the Original to whom the Piece belong’d, was soon inform’d of what pass’d in the Assembly, and as she was perfectly sensible of the Honour it had done her, she found her Self-Complacency agreeably flatter’d with the Compliment. This made her passionately wish, to know the Author of a Work which had so publickly distinguished the Charms of her Beauty, even before it was arriv’d at its full Perfection. Franoscar, who did not want for Spies upon her, was inform’d, from time to time, of all the several Workings of her Soul; and thinking that he had now found such an Opportunity as he had long wish’d for, he sent her, conceal’d in a Nosegay, a little Piece of Poetry, which represented so well the State of his Heart and Passion, and declar’d his Love of her in Terms so tender and touching, that she cou’d not help being affected by it, and conceiving a very particular Esteem for an Admirer, who had declared himself in a manner so delicate, and so greatly to her advantage. However, as she was not yet of an Age to receive his Addresses, she contented herself with

376

The History of the Sevarambians

knowing that he lov’d her, and that he was the true Author of the poetical Pourtraiture, without disclosing it to any body, or even discovering to Franoscar that the Secret had been imparted to her. Mean while Nefrida, her other Lover, felt himself struck with a kind of Jealousy, for that another Person had so publickly obliged Balsimé, and made known the Esteem and Passion he had for her, before it was lawful for him to declare himself. He saw, by this step, that he had some formidable Rival, who, according to all Appearances, would strongly dispute the Heart of that beautiful Object which inflam’d them both. But as this Rival did not yet appear, and he imagined, that no Person was so early in Balsimé’s Esteem as himself, by reason of their former, long Familiarity, he flatter’d himself, that she would prefer none to him, when once he should openly declare his tender Passion for her. And that he might show how much he interested himself in her Reputation, and that he had no stronger Desire than to contribute to it to the utmost of his power, he set his Rival’s Description of her to Musick, and sung it in so ravishing a manner, at a publick Assembly where Prizes were to be confer’d on the best Performer in that way, that he was, without the least dispute, voted the Victor. Nefrida, having thus vanquish’d the most famous Musicians at Sevarinde, was carried in a triumphal Car from the Amphitheatre to the Temple; where, according to Custom, he offered a Sacrifice of Perfumes; after which he was had to the Osmasie where Balsimé dwelt, at whose Feet he laid down the Prize he had gain’d, to testify, publickly, his Esteem and Love for her. This illustrious Donation fill’d the whole City, and, in a little while, the whole Nation, with the Character of Balsimé: Every body talk’d of her good Fortune and her Beauty, and before she was fifteen she had eclipsed all the Toasts of her Time. The Vice-Roy himself, old as he was, had a mind to see her, and very probably wish’d himself younger for her sake. Very soon after this Affair, she enter’d her fifteenth Year; when she found herself at liberty to receive the Addresses of her Lovers, and to choose out from among them the Man that she judg’d most worthy of her Esteem. Franoscar and Nefrida, as being eldest Pretenders, fancied that no one Person could successfully dispute with them the Heart of their beautiful Mistress; but they were greatly mistaken in these their Conjectures, for, after having seen a great number of their Competitors rejected, they found, at last, one who was like to frustrate them both. This dangerous Rival was a young Man, who was really the handsomest Person of the whole Nation; and by the Gracefulness of his Body seem’d to be the only one worthy of the incomparable Balsimé. From the first Moment that he appear’d before her Eyes, she was surpriz’d at his good

Part V

377

Mien, and could not forbear loving him: So that in a single Instant he made a greater progress in this juvenile Heart, than both the others had done in two Years assiduous Application. They both of them perceiv’d this Change, and immediately began to feel the Thorns of a Love, of which, till then, they had seen nothing but Roses. This made them enter into a strict Union to disconcert and ruin their Rival; but as long as their Mistress knew him only by sight, all their Attempts were to no sort of Purpose. For some time she thought of none but him, she talk’d of none but him, and nothing pleas’d her besides him. However, as he did not seem to be in any mighty hurry to address her, she sigh’d, she groan’d, and if Bashfulness had not restrain’d her, she would certainly have sought him, and made a Discovery of her Inclination to him. Such were the Beginnings of her Passion, which her new Spark answer’d but coldly. This threw her into a Despair, and inclin’d her at first to believe, that he either lov’d elsewhere, or was not sufficiently appriz’d of his own Merit. Full of this Suspicion she us’d her utmost Endeavours to discover his Intrigues; but after an exact Enquiry, she became at length thoroughly satisfied, that this beautiful Gallant, whom she and several other Girls lov’d almost to distraction, was but a fine Body without a Soul, who lov’d all that shew’d any liking to him, and was ever most fond of the last Person he convers’d with. Balsimé, who had a just Value for Wit, and was her self infinitely furnish’d with it, was exceedingly mortified when she came to know that her new, admired Lover had so little; and this Knowledge contributed greatly to the Abatement of her Ardour for him. But yet it was not capable, at once of effacing from her Heart all the Impressions which his bewitching Charms had left there. She now found herself equally divided between her three Lovers. One captivated her by his good Mien, another by the Charms of his Voice, and the last by the Softness of his Expressions, the Sprightliness of his Wit, and the Politeness of his Behaviour. Sometimes she diverted her self with all the three just after one another; and it happen’d that when she had satisfied her Eyes with the Sight of the first she wou’d indulge her Ear with the divine Musick of the second, and lastly, when she was weary of both these, she would sigh for the ingenious Conversation of Franoscar, the Charms of whose Wit were never attended with Satiety. She was so much the more sensible of these several kinds of Pleasures, as she united, in her own Person, all the Endowments which made these her Lovers considerable, and it was not without Concern, that she saw the Qualifications divided between three of her Admirers which she wou’d have been glad to have found centering in one only.

378

The History of the Sevarambians

In the mean while, the Vice-Roy Sevarkhemas being grown old, thought fit to resign the Government, the whole Nation were now intent on the choice of a Successor, when the Lot fell upon the Sevarobaste Kimpsas, the Father of Balsimé, who was therefore advanc’d to the Throne of the SUN by the Name of Sevarkimpsas. This high Dignity gave a new Lustre to his Family, and in any other Country but Sevarambe must have ruin’d the Hopes of all our three Lovers: But, tho’ this Preferment inspir’d them with an additional Respect for their Mistress, far from depriving them of the Hopes of possessing her, it deliver’d them from the Fear which the Resignation of the last Vice-Roy had thrown them into: For, not knowing who might succeed him, they were all three, and especially the amorous Franoscar, under a just Apprehension lest the new Lieutenant, asserting his Right and Authority, should, for ever ravish from them the Object of their Love. But when they saw that Balsimé’s Father was to reign, all their Fears from that Quarter immediately dissipated, and they had now nothing more to do but to vanquish the Irresolution of their adorable Mistress. Franoscar and Nefrida, tho’ Rivals, had been acquainted with each other from their Infancy; and, as they were both Persons of Merit, and had been equally in danger of being ruin’d by the Intervention of the third Lover, they form’d a strong Coalition of Interests, and liv’d in the strictest Friendship, without bearing the least Envy to one another; each of them wishing to see the other happy in the Enjoyment of his Mistress, if he shou’d not be able to attain to the Possession of her himself. They therefore acted in concert upon diverse Occasions; and when the Poet had performed any thing well in his way, the Musician never fail’d to grace it with all the Charms that Musick cou’d add to it. And as they were, each of them, the greatest Masters of their respective Arts, they always carried off the Prizes, allotted for the most ingenious Poet, and the most skillful Musician. This flatter’d agreeably the beautiful Balsimé, whose Praises were quickly carried thro’ the whole Nation by the illustrious, enchanting Works of these two extraordinary Genius’s. They now agreed to compose a Panegyrick on the new Vice-Roy, in order to acquire to themselves his Esteem and Favour; which they therefore did in a very singularly glorious manner. For as, on these Occasions all that excel in the Belles Lettres and Sciences, are wont to outdo even themselves to procure the Applause of their Sovereign, and the whole Nation, and to gain by some Master-piece the Rewards destin’d to the most deserving; these two illustrious Rivals vanquish’d with the greatest Ease, and beyond all possibility of dispute, every one who was so overweening as to dispute the Prize of Glory with them. Franoscar

Part V

379

render’d into verse the Prayer to the SUN from Sevarias’s Prose, and Nefrida sung it so melodiously that all that heard it were ravish’d with it. They added to this Prayer an Eulogium on the new Vice-Roy, and manag’d his Praise with so good a Grace, that both the one and the other carried his point, and found themselves greatly in his favour. After this Performance, they were had from the Amphitheatre to the Temple in a triumphal Car, where they offer’d each a Sacrifice of Perfumes to the SUN, and from thence were carried off to Balsimé, at whose Feet they resign’d the Prizes they had so honourably obtain’d. These shining Proofs of their Passion flatter’d her agreeably, and fill’d her with Contempt of her other Lover, who, she saw, liv’d without Glory: This, by little and little, gave her a Biass to the other two, tho’ still, from time to time, the other’s Person seem’d to be the principal Object of her Desire. She continu’d fluctuating in this manner, till the Season came when she was obliged by the Laws to declare herself in favour of one only, to the utter Exclusion of the rest. Franoscar and Nefrida, who look’d upon this Day as that which was to determine their Fate, united themselves more strongly than ever to procure the Rejection of their Rival, and work the irresolute Balsimé up to a choice of one or the other. With this View, Franoscar wrote a Poem, which he call’d, The Price of Merit; and thro’ the Favour of his Friends, obtain’d an Order from the Vice-Roy, that this Piece should be represented by the Persons concern’d.———Balsimé was appointed to be the Reward of the Victor, and constituted sole Judge of the Desert of the Actors. The Piece turn’d wholly on the Charms of Musick, and the Glory of Poetry and Wit: The three Lovers each play’d his part, and Franoscar ingenuously furnish’d both of them with all that cou’d be said to the Advantage of their Subjects. The first was undoubtedly as handsome as any young Fellow cou’d be, spoke things to his Mistress, which, if he had known how to pronounce gracefully, and animate his Words with proper Gestures, and a right Tone of Voice, in the Opinion of all that were present, must infallibly, at this first Attack, have carried a Heart already prejudic’d in his favour. But as he had but a moderate share of Understanding, he express’d himself in so insipid and unaffecting a manner, that every Argument lost its Force as it came from his Mouth, which therefore made his Judge desire to hear her second Lover. Accordingly, he now taking this favourable Opportunity, sung before his Mistress with so much Grace, and display’d all the Advantages of his Art, by his Words, his Gestures, and the enchanting Musick of his Voice, that he quickly effac’d from her Mind all the Impressions which his Rival had made there. To the Musician succeeded the Poet, who discover’d such a prodigious Fund of Wit while he was speaking in praise of his Art, that he

380

The History of the Sevarambians

quite ravish’d all the Audience. As soon as he had ended that part of his Discourse, he address’d himself to his Mistress, and represented to her his Love, his Constancy, and his Fidelity; painting so well the Excess of his Passion, that she began to be touch’d by his Intreaties, and persuaded by his Reasons; when, at last, seeing the Vice-Roy and all the People declared themselves, by their Acclamations, in Franoscar’s favour, she immediately gave him her Hand in sign of Preference. Having now thus determin’d the Affair, she was put into a triumphal Chariot with her victorious Lover, and carried from the Amphitheatre to the Temple; whence, after they had offer’d a Sacrifice to the STAR of Day, they were convey’d to all the principal Parts of the City, where they were perpetually saluted with the Shouts and Applauses of the People. A little while after, the Day of their Osparenibon being come, they were united by the Bands of a lawful Marriage. Franoscar, after having for ten Years successively gain’d all the poetical Prizes, composed the fine Ode in praise of Sevarias, which we were before speaking of, and by that incomparable Work procur’d himself the Name of Khodamias, or divine Wit, as we there observ’d. After this he ascended by the several Degrees till he attain’d to the Dignity of a Sevarobaste. And when the beautiful Balsimé came to lose the sprightly Bloom of her Youth, and all the Charms of her Voice, she was more than ever convinc’d, that, mental Endowments are more solid and durable than those of the Body, and always deserve to be prefer’d to them. This is the History of the Loves of the Poet Khodamias, so famous among the Sevarambians, and the beautiful Balsimé, whose Memoirs will, in all probability, never be lost, but descend from Father to Son to all Posterity; at least as long as the Sevarambian Language, and the Prizes of Merit obtain’d by Franoscar shall continue. This Piece is constantly represented every five Years, and I my self saw it, twice perform’d, with great pleasure. And now, having given an Account of such things as I thought most remarkable in this happy Nation, it remains that we say something of our manner of Living in our own Osmasies, during the time of my Stay at Sevarinde; and by what means it fell out that I left this Country, and came over into Asia. I have taken notice, that we were lodg’d all together, in one Osmasie; that I was made Osmasionte; that the greatest part of our People were employ’d in building; excepting some who had been brought up to particular Handicrafts, and those who were concern’d in the Offices of the House, and that all of them work’d certain stated Hours the Business they were set apart for. I also observ’d that we had a number of Slaves allotted to us as Wives (for we were not allow’d to marry any free

Part V

381

Women) besides those which we brought with us out of Holland. We had several Children of these Marriages, which we educated till they were seven Years old according to the Custom of the Country; but then, out of an extraordinary Indulgence to us, they were adopted by the State, like those of the Sevarambians themselves. This indeed was a Point carried with much difficulty, Sevarminas having thought fit to call a Council, expresly, for this purpose, where the thing was greatly debated. One side objected, that, “we were Strangers, and a malignant Generation,” that, “we were small of Stature, and weakly in Constitution, and it was by no means adviseable to mix us with the Sevarambians, lest, by such an Alloy of their Blood with ours, some Change and Corruption should be introduc’d among them.” On the other hand, those who were for Adoption replied, that, “though we were Strangers, our Children were not so, seeing they were born in their Country, and under the Protection of their Laws; and that therefore it would be an Act of Injustice to the poor Innocents to deprive them of their natural Right, and separate them from the rest of the Nation.” They added, that, “our Manners had been tolerably good since we had dwelt among them, and that we had conform’d very well to the Custom of the Country.” That, “indeed we were, generally, but weak and small, but that, the greater part of our Children being born in Sevarinde, of a larger-sized, stronger sort of Women, gave room to hope that they might be bigger, stronger, and more vigorous like their Mothers.” They added further, that, “if they were brought up with the other Children of the City, there was reason to believe they wou’d like them be inur’d to the laudable Habits and Manners of the Country.” That, “they had already had a happy Instance of this kind in the Parses, even when the State was yet young and unsettled, tho’ they were more considerable than these, both for Number and Authority.” That, “therefore, there was little or nothing to be fear’d with respect to our Children, and their Descendants, because the greater part of wicked Men were made so, either by bad Government, or the ill Examples which they saw before their Eyes in their Infancy.” Sermodas pleaded our Cause very strongly, and gain’d it; so that at last our Children were received and adopted by the State in the same manner as those of the Natives. It is almost incredible, how much our Constitutions were changed, in three or four Years, by Sobriety, moderate Exercise, the Diversions we mix’d with our Labour, and a Freedom from Care and Sollicitude about the Necessaries and Conveniencies of Life. Our Men and Women, almost all, renew’d their Age, and became much more hale and stout than ever they had been before. Some of our Dutch Women, who never could have Children in Holland, became fertile at Sevarinde. We liv’d

382

The History of the Sevarambians

without Trouble or Anxiety, and had nothing to do but to contrive our Diversions when our Labour was done. Dancing, Musick, Walking, Publick Shows, and all the other several kinds of Recreations, which they have there in great numbers, agreeably engag’d us, and render’d the most melancholy Persons among us cheerful and sociable. Some time indeed, after our first Settlement with them, we had, almost all of us, a Fever, which carried off a few of our People; but after that seasoning Distemper, we were all of us as healthful as any People in the World; as if the Disease it self had exhausted all the ill Humours of our Bodies. We convers’d very familiarly with the Sevarindians; who, at first, could not help laughing when they saw what little kind of Creatures many of us were, and heard us pronouncing Dutch, which they call’d the Language of Cats and Dogs. They put many Questions to us touching our Continent. They often ask’d us, If our own Country was as fine as theirs? If the rest of our Men and Women were like us? with abundance more of a like nature. And, when a Company of them had examin’d us in this manner, they would generally conclude with an Elogium on the Laws and Customs which Sevarias had left them; and that all other Nations were blind and miserable in comparison to themselves: for which Inference they had certainly but too much reason. They treated us all with much goodness; and, for my own part, I was courteously received even by the Great, with whom I convers’d very familiarly. Nay, I was even sometimes introduc’d to the Viceroy himself, with whom I had three or four Conversations; which made me extremely considered, and gave me an easy Access always to the Magistrates. Sometimes I went ahunting with them, when I always took some of our People with me, and particularly Van de Nuits; who, at length, unhappily falling in the way of a Bear which we had wounded, was by the furious Animal instantly torn in pieces, before we could afford him any assistance. This Accident occasion’d a general Affliction among us; but it distressed me in a particular manner, as I lov’d him greatly, and look’d upon him as my most faithful Friend, and the worthiest Person of our whole Company. He left behind him two Wives and five Children, which I believe are all still living. There was a certain Sevarobaste named Calsimas, who was pleased to discover a great regard for me, and took me often home with him, where he made me eat at his own Table. He had travelled into Persia, India, and China, but never been in the western Part of our Continent. As he was a very curious Man with respect to the Customs of other Countries, and I was more capable of informing him in such Matters than any of our Company, he lov’d to discourse with me, and has sometimes, in his turn, related to me what he remark’d in his Travels, and the Adventures he met with. Sometimes he came to see us at our Osmasie; and very fre-

Part V

383

quently had me with him into the Country, to take the Diversions of Hunting and Fishing, and other Rural Sports. This continued Familiarity acquir’d me his Friendship, so that in a little time I was become one of his greatest Favourites. It was by this Gentleman’s means and interest, that I obtain’d a Permission to return into Europe, which had been refus’d me before. After having liv’d near fifteen Years in this Country, a violent Desire of returning home again took possession of my heart in spite of all my Reason. However, I resisted it as well as I could for a long while; but, at length, knowing that a Ship was going into Persia, in which one of Calsimas’s Sons was to embark, I could no longer restrain the Impetuosity of my Passion; and from that moment began to project means to indulge it. The Conflict which had been, for a long time, kept up betwixt my Inclination and my Judgment, had wrought such an effect on my Body, that I was grown thin, and my gay and cheerful Temper turn’d into gloomy and melancholy. Calsimas observ’d it, and ask’d me, What was the Cause of it? I endeavoured for a while to conceal it from him, but at length was forced to tell him the thing ingenuously, on his promise of doing all he could to serve me in my Design. When he knew the Subject of my Uneasiness, he endeavoured to sooth it by several good Reasons; but when I assured him I had tried the force of every thing of that kind, without being able in the least to vanquish my Passion, and that my Judgment in vain oppos’d the movement of my Heart, he engaged to try his Interest in my behalf; and, if possible, get a Permission from the Council for me to go home: but this was to be, on my solemn Promise to return again, and bring back with me my Wife and Children which I had left in Holland; for so I made him believe, in order to have a just Plea for my Voyage into Europe. ’Tis true, indeed, that this was really my Design; and since I have been come into Asia, I have found an Inclination growing in me to get back again to Sevarinde, in order to spend the rest of my days there, as soon as I shall have satisfied that Desire which is still strong in me, of seeing once more my native country, and having over one Person, who is exceeding dear to me, if I find her yet living. And this my Purpose is the more just and reasonable, in that, besides the Advantages of the Country, I have left behind me there three Wives and sixteen Children, which I believe are all yet alive, and whom I could not have forsaken one moment, if a Desire of joining to their Number the first Fruit of my Love, had not strongly sollicited me thereto. Mean while, Calsimas, seeing the Preparations that were making to send some Persons into Persia, and knowing that the Passion of engaging in this Voyage, grew on me daily, us’d his utmost Endeavours with the Viceroy, to obtain the Permission I desir’d. He met with a great deal of

384

The History of the Sevarambians

difficulty on this occasion; and the thing would never have succeeded, as he afterwards inform’d me, if it had been laid before the Council. But he guarded against that Stroke, and knew so well how to touch the heart of Sevarminas, that partly at his intercession, and partly from a Sympathy he had for me, he permitted me to embark with Calsimas’s Son and his Companions, after having made me give him a solemn Promise, to come back again, and never to speak of his Nation among the People of our Continent. At the time when we were about to sail, there was a Squadron of Ships ready to set out on new Discoveries, in their Mediterranean, which we formerly spoke of. I therefore made my People believe that I had a mind to go a Voyage in this Sea out of mere Curiosity; and so leaving D’Eveze, my Lieutenant, in my place, I bid adieu to them, not without many Sighs and Tears. My Wives opposed my pretended Design as much as they could; but, finding that I was immoveable, they comforted themselves with the hopes of my speedy Return. I left Sevarinde in the Year 1671; and, before I pass’d the Mountains, went and took a view of Stroukaras’s Valley, which I formerly gave a Description of. From thence I return’d to my Road, and pursuing my Journey the same way which we came at first, I arriv’d at Sporounde with my Company, of which my principal Acquaintance was Calsimas’s Son, whose Name was Bakinda, a very wise, prudent Young-Man, aged about thirty. At Sporounde, I met with some of my old Friends; as particularly with Carchida, who was now called Carchidas, on the account of his new Dignity of Derosmasiontas, which had been conferred on him some time before. Albicormas had been dead two Years, having before resign’d his Government to the Sevarobaste Galokimbas, whom the Viceroy had sent to fill up that Post. Benoscar liv’d still in the Islands, where he had succeeded Carchida in the Place he held at our first arrival. After a stop of some few days at Sporounde, we went down by water to the Lake of Sporaskompso, where we found a Ship of about three hundred Tuns that waited for us. We immediately embark’d, and I made the twenty-fifth Person of our Company, excluding their Attendants. Our Ship was tow’d by three Galliots, till we were got out to Sea, for it was so great a Calm that our Sails were of no service to us. We did not go thro’ the Bay by which Maurice went up, but by another Canal, running away to the East, which leads directly from the Lake into the Ocean. The Sea was exceeding calm when we came to it; for which reason our Galliots were forc’d to continue towing us till we were twenty Leagues out, before we could find any Wind. And this, I was inform’d, was nothing uncommon, it being usual for them to have such Calms for a Month or

Part V

385

two, at this Season of the Year, tho’ almost all the rest, the Coast was infested with Storms and Tempests. Two days after our Galliots had left us, we had a small Gale at South-West, which gently freshening upon us, carried us off into the Main, without any violence; but yet, with swiftness enough for the space of five days. On the sixth it slacken’d and chang’d a little; tho’, by the help of a Side-Wind, we held on our Course for seven or eight days, towards the Place to which we were bound. We then had another Variation of the Wind, which we made the best use of we could; and thus, at length, after several such Changes, we arriv’d safe on the Coast of Persia, fifty-eight days after our departure from Sporounde. As soon as we were landed, our Travellers divided themselves by two’s, and took different Routs, after having agreed together on a time for their return. Fortunately for me, Bakinda and his Companions, who had now chang’d their Names for Egyptian ones, were to go westward; so that I had the opportunity of travelling with them as far as Ispahan, the capital City of Persia. After having tarried some time there with them, I begg’d leave of them to pursue my Journey into Europe; which I obtain’d without any difficulty, and so embracing the opportunity of a Caravan, I set out with a resolution of accomplishing my Design. As I came along, I saw divers Cities in my way, which I shall not speak of here, because several Travellers having given Descriptions of them long since, they are sufficiently known to the Curious. To cut short, therefore, a Discourse which might otherwise grow tedious, I shall content my self with saying, that I arrived at last at Smyrna; where I hope to embark soon, with the first Fleet that shall set sail for Holland. And thus we have given the best Account we have been able to collect, of the Memoirs of Captain Siden; which we have dispos’d in the best Order we could, without adding a Syllable more than was necessary to connect the Materials, and throw them into the Form of a History; for the Fragments could not be read as they came to our hands. There is reason to believe, that the Author had not determined whether to publish it or not; because his Papers were all wrote in the manner of Memoirs, which looks as if they were intended rather for his own use, than that of the Publick. And this seems still more evidently to have been the Case because he hath not specified several things with that exactness which the Nature of History requires; and, in some places, appears to have abridged, when he should have been more diffuse and extensive. Besides, he hath pass’d over in silence some Affairs which ought to have been particularly described in an exact and compleat History, and even sometimes

386

The History of the Sevarambians

omitted to explain Words and Things which he never afterwards speaks of; as divers Epithets of the SUN, and some other Matters. However, he has said enough to furnish out such a Narration as we here offer to the Publick; which, therefore, we hope that the Reader will be content with, since it is all we can give him. And, possibly, he may find some Pleasure in it and reap some Profit from it. The END

Index

Bacon, Francis (Lord Verulam), History of Sevarambians written in opposition to his New Atlantis, 2, 118 Bayle, Pierre, comment on History of Sevarambians and censorship, xx Campanella, City of Sun compared to History of Sevarambians, xv Christians in Sevarambia, 307–8 Feasts, (public) in Sevarambia: of the Great God, 350–3; of Sun, 359–60; in memory of Sevarias, 360; of marriage, 360; of adoption of children, 361–62; of first fruits, 362 Giovanni, Sevarias’s Venetian tutor, 186, 204; assisted Sevarias with Sevarambian laws, 185 Golden Dragon, the Dutch ship carrying Capitan Siden: wrecked in Terra Australis, 5, 6; description of, 10, 126 Government of Sevarambians: various interpretations of, xiv; submission to it considered necessary, 42; and the Laws of Nature, 42; being most perfect, 124; form of government, 42, 246–50; temporal and spiritual authorities united, 302 Gulliver’s Travels: and History of Sevarambians, vii; purported third volume of, vii Harrington, James, his Oceana compared by Immanuel Kant to History of Sevarambians, vii

Hobbes, Thomas, his Leviathan compared to History of Sevarambians, xvii Justice and its execution in Sevarambia: examples of punishment, 52–53, 61, 68, 77, 169, 271; women could be exempt from punishment, 54, 172; capital punishment, 68, 110, 278; punishment of devils, 78–79; Sevarambian Princes great lovers of justice, 79, 82; Court of Judicature described, 85; examples of trials, 85–86; lawyers needed for public good, 87; general view of lawyers, 87; punishment of a governor, 108–10; punishment of soldiers, 190–91; judiciary procedure, 273, 278–79 Kant, Immanuel, praise for History of Sevarambians, vii, reference to History of Sevarambians, xxi Laws in Sevarambia: adjusted with time, 186; and Natural Right, 234; basic laws, 234–5 Leibniz, Gottfried, reference to History of Sevarambians in his Theodicy, xx Locke, John, his ideas compared to that of History of Sevarambians, xvi Marriage: Mandatory in Sevarambia, 42, 158; Marriage festivals (Osparenibon), 47–50; 164–67, 360–61; pre-marital relations, 254–56

387

388

Index

Maurice, a seaman on Golden Dragon: appointed Admiral of the fleet by Capitan Siden, 17, 134; leaves Sidenberge in a discovery voyage, 31, 147; his account of the first encounter with the Sevarambians, 33–44, 149–52 Military affairs in Sevarambia, 279–80 Money in Sevarambia: not used, 55, 73, 173, 245; no poverty, 74, 185; coining money considered wicked, 77 Montesquieu, Charles Louis de Secondat, comparing Sevarambia to ancient Sparta, xx More, Thomas: his Utopia compared by Immanuel Kant to History of Sevarambians, vii; History of Sevarambians written in opposition to his Utopia, ix, 2, 118; similarity of his Utopia to History of Sevarambians, xiii; his Utopia referred to as fancy, 2 Omigas (or Stroukaras), a ruler of Stroukarambians: claiming to be Sun’s Son, 315; performed false miracles, 315, 320 Osmasies, large (communal) residential buildings in Sevarambia, 156 Persian taught at Sevarambia, 185, 186 Pfeiffer, Johann Gregor, considered the possible author of The History of Sevarambians, vii Plato: his Atlantis compared by Immanuel Kant to History of Sevarambians, vii; History of Sevarambians written in opposition to his Atlantis or Commonwealth, ix, 2, 118; mentioned by a Sevarambian philosopher, 353 Prestarambians: the original inhabitants of Savarambia, 214 Prince, a seaman sent along seven others to seek help from Botavia, 16, 123, 131

Pythagoras, 307, 353 Reason: as related to custom, 41, 156; and moderation, 41, 156; and Natural Law, 42; the basis for Sevarambian customs, 156 Religion in Sevarambia: worship of images considered idolatry, 87–88; description of the temple of Sevarinde, 88, 98; description of religious beliefs and practices, 88–91, 303–4; freedom of religious opinion, 301; most reasonable, 303; immortality of soul, 306–7; view of Islam, xvi, 309; religious ceremonies, 349; prayer to the Great God, 351–52; its source according to a Sevarambian philosopher, 356–58; feast of the Sun, 359–60; toleration practiced, 362 Rousseau, Jean Jacques, considering History of Sevarambians fantasies, xx Scromenas, a Sevarambian philosopher: on universe, 353–55; origin of animals, 355; view of science and arts, 356; on religion, 356–57 Sevarambè, see Sevarambia Sevarambia (also Sevarambe or Sevarambè), an imaginary country where Veiras’s story takes place: its inhabitants’ fear of foreigners, 39, 66, 68; treatment of deformed citizens, 40, 155; weather, 59; no internal conflicts, 61; cleansing baths, 63; general descriptions, 65, 72; beards not shaved, 75; as Paradise, 66–67; knowledge of sciences, 73, 83, 93; provinces, 75–76; inhabitants’ senses greater than ordinary human beings, 78; foreigners not admitted to, 82; burial procedure, 91–92; inhabitants happiest in the world, 105; people forbidden from

Index

commerce with Europeans, 186; description of army, 188–89; considered Dominions of the Sun, 194; idleness despised, 195; inhabitants work eight hours a day, 196, 233; a communist society, 232; procedure of selecting viceroy, 237–38; Viceroys after Sevarias, 240–46; economic arrangements, 250–51; education, 252–54, 256–57; some of their customs, 259–60, 264; art, 272; use of hydraulics (Hydraulick), 272; reading of the Greeks forbidden, 310; adoption of children by the state, 361–62; language of inhabitants, 363–72 Sevarias, lawgiver and founder of Sevarambia: a Persian, 186, 203; his education, 205; taken into slavery, 208; using lies, 212, 220, 221, 228–29; perceived as sent by the Sun, 213; minister of the Sun, 225; loved music, 230; view of equality, 232; married, 236; believed soul to be immortal, 241; refused to convert to Christianity, 310; feast in his memory, 360 Sevarinde, capital of Sevarambia, 64, 151, 184,198–200 Sevarminas, King of Sevarambia, 40, 75, 80, 155 Sexual relations: as a source of conflict in Sidenberge, 27, 30, 142; laws made for in Sidenberge, 29, 144; multiplicity of husbands criticized by Capitan Siden, 30, 145; designed by nature to ensure preservation of species, 41, 157; permutation of partners not allowed in Sevarambia, 43; plurality of husbands for one woman despised by Sevarambians, 46, 163; no sexual disease in Sevarambia, 43, 158; punishment for adultery and pre-marital sexual relations, 52, 169; deforming consequences of

389

adultery in Sevarambia, 63; incest practiced prior to Sevarias, 222; limitations on sexual intercourse, 256 Siden, the imaginary Captain whose notes described Sevarambia: letter prior to his death, 4; early life, 9–10, 125–26; how shipwrecked in Terra Australis, 10–14, 127–29; opinion about custom and reason, 12; conditions to accept the position of Capitan-General, 18, 133–34; address to Sevarminas, 81–82; last words before death, 120–21; military service, 125; studied law, 125; return to Europe, 383–85 Sidenberge, the camp established under Captain Siden’s order, 25, 140 Slavery; slave women 41, 156, 245, 283; slaves as tribute, 245, 284; slaves’ clothing, 262 Spinoza, Benedict; his possible influence on History of Sevarambians, xviii Stroukarambians, the mountaineer enemies of Prestarambians, defeated by Sevarias, 214, 218 Stroukaras, see Omigas Sun: considered God’s minister by Sevarambians, 148; Sun festival, 224–25; Prayer to Sun, 225–28; description of Temple of Sun, 289–91 Talismans, 94–98, 100–2, 104–5, 106 Terra Australis (also, Terra Australis incognita), or the Third Continent, the location of Sevarambia, 3, 119 Trade: desired by Sevarminas, 82; arrangements for, 83 Van de Nuits, a friend of Capitan Siden: nominates Siden as CapitanGeneral, 17,132; appointed Over-

390

Van de Nuits, Cont’d. Seer General (Superintendant) of Goods (Merchandise), 18, 134; death, 382 Veiras, Denis, author of History of Sevarambians, biography, vii–ix Vossius, Issac, possible author of History of Sevarambians, vii Women: not allowed to go to other

Index

countries, 113; considered weak, 178; serve in the Sevarambian army, 188, 234; initial education same as men, 254; foreigners not permitted to marry Sevarambian women, 380 Zoroastrianism, ancestral religion of Sevarias, xiii

FICTION / LITERATURE

The History of the

Sevarambians A Utopian Novel Denis Veiras Edited and with an Introduction by John Christian Laursen and Cyrus Masroori Reminiscent of More’s Utopia and Swift’s Gulliver’s Travels, Denis Veiras’s History of the Sevarambians is one of the great utopian novels of the seventeenth century. Set in Australia, this rollicking adventure story comes complete with a shipwreck, romantic tales, religious fraud, magical talismans, and supernatural animals. The current volume contains two versions of Veiras’s story: the original English and the 1738 English translation of the expanded French version. Veiras’s work was well known in its own time and has been translated into a number of languages, including German, French, Russian, and Japanese, while the English version has been largely forgotten. The book has been read to teach a variety of political doctrines, and also has been cited as an early development in the history of ideas about religious toleration. It reveals a great deal about early modern English, Dutch, and French attitudes toward other cultures. One of the first utopian writings to qualify as a novel, it can be interpreted as a metaphor for human life, in all its complexity and ambiguity. “Having the two texts in the same book provides easy access to texts that are difficult to find and enables an easy comparison between the early English version and the later French version. The French version had a huge impact on French literature and is now on its way to becoming a classic, not only for scholars who study utopian literature, but also for people interested in seventeenth-century literature and philosophy.” — Denis D. Grélé, Wellesley College “This book represents the rediscovery (in English) of an important and entertaining work of fiction. It makes a significant contribution to the field of utopian studies.” — Carl Freedman, author of Critical Theory and Science Fiction and The Incomplete Projects: Marxism, Modernity, and the Politics of Culture John Christian Laursen is Professor of Political Science at the University of California at Riverside. He is the editor of many books, including Religious Toleration: “The Variety of Rites” from Cyrus to Defoe. Cyrus Masroori is Assistant Professor of Political Science at California State University at San Marcos.

State University of New York Press www.sunypress.edu